CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1

CATIA
Infrastructure
User's Guide
Version 5 Release 16
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2

Special Notices
CATIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

Protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 5,615,321; 5,774,111; 5,821,941; 5,844,566; 6,233,351;
6,292,190; 6,360,357; 6,396,522; 6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,545,680; 6,573,896; 6,597,382; 6,654,011;
6,654,027; 6,717,597; 6,745,100; 6,762,778; 6,828,974 other patents pending.

DELMIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

ENOVIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

SMARTEAM® is a registered trademark of SmarTeam Corporation Ltd.

Any of the following terms may be used in this publication. These terms are trademarks of:
Java Sun Microsystems Computer Company
OLE, VBScript for Windows, Visual Basic Microsoft Corporation
IMSpost Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc.

All other company names and product names mentioned are the property of their respective owners.

Certain portions of this product contain elements subject to copyright owned by the following entities:
Copyright © Dassault Systemes
Copyright © Dassault Systemes of America
Copyright © D-Cubed Ltd., 1997-2000
Copyright © ITI 1997-2000
Copyright © Cenit 1997-2000
Copyright © Mental Images Gmbh & Co KG, Berlin/Germany 1986-2000
Copyright © Distrim2 Lda, 2000
Copyright © Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique (INRIA
Copyright © Compaq Computer Corporation
Copyright © Boeing Company
Copyright © IONA Technologies PLC
Copyright © Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc., 2000
Copyright © SmarTeam Corporation Ltd
Copyright © Xerox Engineering Systems
Copyright © Bitstream Inc.
Copyright © IBM Corp.
Copyright © Silicon Graphics Inc.
Copyright © Installshield Software Corp., 1990-2000
Copyright © Microsoft Corporation
Copyright © Spatial Corp.
Copyright © LightWork Design Limited 1995-2000
Copyright © Mainsoft Corp.
Copyright © NCCS 1997-2000
Copyright © Weber-Moewius, D-Siegen
Copyright © Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2001
Copyright © Cogito Inc.
Copyright © Tech Soft America
Copyright © LMS International 2000, 2001
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 3

Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001

CAM-POST ® Version 2001/14.0 © ICAM Technologies Corporation 1984-2001. All rights reserved

The 2D/2.5D Display analysis function, the MSC.Nastran interface and the ANSYS interface are based on LMS
International technologies and have been developed by LMS International

ImpactXoft, IX Functional Modeling, IX Development, IX, IX Design, IXSPeeD, IX Speed Connector, IX Advanced
Rendering, IX Interoperability Package, ImpactXoft Solver are trademarks of ImpactXoft. Copyright ©2001-
2002 ImpactXoft. All rights reserved.

This software contains portions of Lattice Technology, Inc. software. Copyright © 1997-2004 Lattice
Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright © 2005, Dassault Systèmes. All rights reserved.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 4

CATIA Infrastructure User Guide

Overview
Conventions
What's New?
Basic Tasks
Starting Version 5
Starting a Session on Windows
Starting a Session on UNIX
Starting a Session Using Document Icons
Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows
Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX
Getting Help
Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages
Using the What's This? Command
Accessing the Online Help Library
Searching the Online Help Library
Getting Contextual Help
Displaying Easy Warnings
Accessing the Dassault Systemes User Galaxy
Displaying Copyright Information
Accessing Sample Documents
Editing in Context Within the Product Structure
What Is the Product Structure?
Accessing the Navigation Tools
Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure
Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure
Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench
Creating, Opening, and Saving Documents
About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX
About Filenames
Creating New Documents
Creating a New Document from an Existing One
Opening Existing Documents
Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window
Opening Most Recently Used Documents
Closing Documents
Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name
Saving Existing Documents
Saving Documents In Other Formats
Saving All Documents
Managing Document Save
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 5
Displaying Document Properties
Viewing the Specification Tree and the Geometry Area
About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area
Setting Document Window Layout Preferences
Using the Full Screen
Using Document Windows
Using the Specification Tree Overview
Using the Geometry Overview
Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree
Opening Sub-Trees
Viewing Sub-Trees
Selecting Objects
Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer
Selecting Using the Selection Traps
Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator
Selecting Using the Other Selections... Command
Selecting Using the Search... Command (General Mode)
Selecting Using the Search... Command (Favorites Mode)
Selecting Using the Search... Command (Advanced Mode)
Storing Selections Using Selection Sets
Selecting Selection Sets
Selecting Using a Filter
Manipulating Objects
Undoing Actions
Redoing and Repeating Actions
Cutting and Pasting Objects
Copying and Pasting Objects
Using the Paste Special... Command
Deleting Objects
About the Properties Command
Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties
Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar
Using the Graphic Properties Wizard
Measuring Objects
Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass
About the 3D Compass
Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass
Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass
Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command
Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically
Locking the Current Compass Orientation
Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen
Locking the Compass to the Local Axis System
Swapping the Privileged Plane
Keeping the Privileged Plane the Most Visible during Viewpoint Manipulations
Measuring
Measuring Distances between Geometrical Entities
Measuring Angles
Measure Cursors
Measuring Properties
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 6
Measuring Inertia
Measuring 2D Inertia
Exporting Measure Inertia Results
Notations Used
Inertia Equivalents
Principal Axes
Inertia Matrix with respect to the Origin O
Inertia Matrix with respect to a Point P
Inertia Matrix with respect to an Axis System
Moment of Inertia about an Axis
3D Inertia Properties of a Surface
Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects
Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects
Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects
Printing Documents
About Printing, Capturing Images and the Album
Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings
Printing the Specification Tree
Previewing Documents Prior to Printing
Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents
Printing To a File
Printing Multi-Documents
Printing in Batch Mode
Capturing and Managing Images for the Album
Capturing Simple Images
Capturing Selected Areas of Images
Capturing Images in a Multi-View Configuration
Previewing Images in the Album
Editing Images in the Album
Renaming Images in the Album
Deleting Images from the Album
Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only)
Saving Images In Other Formats
Printing Images from the Album
Replaying Videos from the Album
Recording Interactions in Video Format
Viewing Objects
Activating Viewing Tools
Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area
Panning
Zooming In
Zooming Out
Zooming In On An Area
Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane
Rotating
Editing the View Angle
Creating a Multi-View: Automatic Configuration
Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration
Creating a Multi-View: Standard Views' Customization
Defining the Level of Detail and the Pixel Culling
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 7
Testing the Visualization Performance
Testing the Visualization Time
Navigating
Navigating in Examine Mode
Navigating in Walk Mode
Navigating in Fly Mode
Changing Views
Viewing Objects against the Ground
Magnifying
Looking At Objects
Turning Your Head To View An Object
Snapping the Viewpoint
Hiding and Showing Objects
Hiding Objects
Displaying Hidden Objects
Using Rendering Styles
Shading (SHD)
Shading with Edges
Shading with Edges without Smooth Edges
Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges
Shading with Material
Wireframe (NHR)
Rendering Style per Object
Customizing the View Mode
Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views
About Stitching Effect
Setting Lighting and Depth Effects
Setting Lighting Effects
Setting Depth Effects
Using Standard and User-Defined Views
Using Standard Views
Creating, Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views
Using Layers and Layer Filters
Assigning Objects To Layers
Adding and Naming Layers
Using Visualization Filters
Recording, Running, and Editing Macros
Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros
Recording a Macro
Running a Macro
Editing a Macro
Creating a Macro From Scratch
Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications
About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications
Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications
Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications
Transferring Version 5 Data
Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail (on Windows Only)
Copying Version 5 Data To a Directory or Diskette
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 8
Managing Document Links in Version 5
Using the FileDesk Workbench
Displaying Document Links
Editing Document Links
Running Batches
Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor
Running the Downward Compatibility Batch
Running the Data Life Cycle Batch
Working With Technological Packages
Advanced Tasks
Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX and Windows
About Setting Up Printers on UNIX and Windows
Adding a Printer
Removing a Printer
Configuring an Existing Printer
Testing the Printer
Customizing Print Driver Plug-Ins
Using Power Input Mode
About Power Input Mode
Entering Data
Running Commands
Using the Search Language
Virtual Reality Configurations
About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5
Stereoscopic Viewing
Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session
Working With the Immersive System Assistant
Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5
Using the Joystick Control Panel
Navigating in Examine Mode
Navigating in Fly Mode
Using and Customizing Fonts
About Fonts
Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows
Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX
Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts
Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts
Adding Extra PostScript Fonts
Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output
Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4
Using Knowlegeware Capabilities
Parameters
About Parameters
Creating a Parameter
Copy/Pasting Parameters
Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure
Importing Parameters
Specifying the Material Parameter
Creating Points, Lines... as Parameters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 9
Applying Ranges to Parameters
Using Relations based on Publications at the Product Level
Creating an Associative Link Between Measures and Parameters
Publishing Parameters
Activating and Deactivating a Component
Creating an External Parameter
Deactivating and Re-activating External Parameters
CATIA Knowledgeware
Searching for URLs
Formulas
About Formulas
About the Formula Editor
Creating a Formula
Creating Formulas based on Publications
Specifying a Measure in a Formula
Using Geometry to Create a Formula
Referring to External Parameters in a Formula
Using the Equivalent Dimensions Feature
About the Equivalent Dimensions Interface
Controlling Relations Update
Design Tables
About Design Tables
About the Design Table Dialog Box
Creating a Design Table from the Current Parameters Values
Creating a Design Table from a Pre-existing File
Interactively Adding a Row To a Design Table External File
Generating a File From a Design Table
Controlling Design Tables Synchronization
Storing a Design Table in a Power Copy
Creating and Using a Knowledge Advisor Law
Knowledgeware Language
Knowledge Resources
Managing Knowledge Ressources
Managing Knowledge Applications Resources
About Rade Tools
About the Knowledge Environment Variables and Settings
Creating, Managing and Deploying Knowledge Applications Resources
Creating, Managing and Deploying Knowledge Applications Resources Using RADE Tools and
SCM
Advanced Example
Frequently Asked Questions
About Application Resources Management (ARM)
Managing Knowledge Ressources
Working Through the Knowledgeware Capabilities: Use Case
Introduction - The Design Intent
Calculating and Checking a Volume
Working with a Design Table
About Rule Firing
About Automation
Optimizing a Volume
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 10
Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body
Integration with Enovia V5
Useful Tips
Using the Feature Dictionary Editor
Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor
Creating a New Object Class
Adding Properties to an Object Class
Defining Discrete Values for a Property
Generating a Report
Creating a New Feature Dictionary
Opening a Reference Dictionary
Modifying the Object Naming Rules
Managing Colors
Using the Data Upward Assistant (CATDUA V5)
Using CATDUA V5 inside an interactive CATIA Session
Using CATDUA V5 outside an interactive Session
Viewing the Results of CATDUA V5 Execution
The Table of the Return Codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant
The List of the Return Codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant
Conferencing
Initializing a Conference on UNIX using the Backbone Driver
Initializing a Conference on Windows using the Backbone Driver
Initializing a Conference on Windows using the NetMeeting Driver
Launching a Conference as Host
Joining a Conference as Guest
Leading a Conference
Sharing Documents with other Conference Members
Transferring Files
Sending Messages to other Conference Members
Customizing Conference Options
Consulting Conference History
Leaving a Conference
Knowledgeware Applications Interoperability
ENOVIA LCA Interoperability
Recommended Methodology for Working with ENOVIA LCA
Recommended Methodology for Working with ENOVIA VPM V5 and VPM Navigator
ENOVIAVPM / CATIA V5 Knowledgeware Integration
Technological Packages: To Know More...
ENOVIAVPM / CATIA V5 Knowledgeware Integration
ENOVIAVPM / CATIA V5 Knowledgeware Integration
Working with Design Tables in ENOVIA LCA
Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA
Using a Design Table Saved in ENOVIA LCA in another Part
Versioning a Design Table External File
Working with Design Tables in ENOVIA LCA Using VPM Navigator
Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA Using the VPM Navigator
ENOVIAvpm Interoperability
ENOVIAVPM-CATIA V5 Knowledgeware Integration
Creating and Storing a Knowledgeware Relation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 11
Useful Tips
Workbench Description
Menu Bar
Standard Toolbar
View Toolbar
Capture Toolbar
Graphic Properties Toolbar
3Dx Device Toolbar
Desk Toolbars
User Selection Filter Toolbar
Specification Tree Symbols
Viewing and Hiding Toolbars
Viewing the Commands List
Keyboard Shortcuts
Knowledgeware Toolbar
Feature Dictionary Editor Toolbar
Customizing
Customizing Toolbars
Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping
Managing User-Defined Toolbars
Creating User-Defined Workbenches
Administering the Workbench List
Customizing Command Properties
Customizing Options
Customizing Buttons
Using the Tools Palette
Customizing Standards
About Standards
Customizing Standards for Layers and Filters
Customizing Standards for Line Thickness
Customizing Settings
About Settings
General
General
Help
Shareable Products
Licensing
Document
Macros
Performances
Printers
Search
Server Manager
Statistics
Display
Tree Appearance
Tree Manipulation
Navigation
Performances
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 12
Visualization
Layer Filter
Thickness & Font
Linetype
Compatibility
V4 Data Reading
Saving as V4 Data
V4/V5 DRAW
V4/V5 SPACE
V4/V5 SPEC
Migration Batch
3D XML
DXF
Electrical Migration
ENOVIA V5
External Formats
Graphic Formats
IGES
IGES 2D
StiSmartBOM
STEP
VRML
Parameters and Measure
Knowledge
Units
Knowledge Environment
Report Generation
Parameter Tolerance
Measure Tools
Constraints and Dimensions
Devices and Virtual Reality
Devices
Tablet Support
Infrastructure
Product Structure
Cache Management
Cgr Management
ENOVIA VPM
Nodes Customization
Product Structure
Product Visualization
Reconciliation
Tree Customization
Material
Catalogs
Photo Studio
Display
General
Output
Satellites
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 13
Stickers
Real Time Rendering
Display
General
Stickers
Part Infrastructure
Display
General
Part Document
3D Annotations Infrastructure
Tolerancing
Display
Manipulators
Annotation
View Annotation Plane
VPM Instant Collaboration
Network
Identification
Connectivity
Collaborative Design
Mechanical Design
Assembly Design
General
Constraints
Sketcher
Sketcher
Mold Tooling Design
Catalogs
Add/Remove
Component
Structure Design
Drafting
General
Layout
View
Generation
Geometry
Dimension
Manipulators
Annotation and Dress-Up
Administration
Aerospace Sheet Metal Design
General
Display
Generative Sheetmetal Design
Functional Tolerancing & Annotation
Tolerancing
Display
Constructed Geometry
Manipulators
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 14
Dimension
Annotation
Tolerances
View/Annotation Plane
Shape
FreeStyle
General
Manipulators
Automotive Body In White Fastening
General
Display
Customizing
General Settings
Working With a Support
Shape Sculptor
Analysis & Simulation
General
Graphics
Post Processing
Quality
External Storage
Reporting
Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly
General
Fastening
Tolerancing
Contact
Machining
General
Resources
Operation
Output
Program
Photo/Video
Digital Mockup
DMU Navigator
General
DMU Navigator
Multiprocess Settings
Overlay Settings
DMU 2D Workshop
DMU Space Engineering
DMU Space Analysis
DMU Clash
DMU Clash - Detailed Computation
DMU Clash - Penetration
DMU Clash - Rule
DMU Clash - Process
DMU Sectioning
DMU Distance
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 15
DMU Fitting Simulator
DMU Fitting Settings
DMU Manipulation
Customizing for DMU Immersive Review
DMU Immersive Review
Customizing 3D Joystick Buttons
DMU Optimizer
DMU Optimizer
Equipment and Systems
General
Display
Diagrams
Electrical Mapping
Design Criteria
Electrical Process Interfacing
Standards
Structure Drawing
Electrical Connectivity Diagrams
Feature Dictionary Settings
Electrical Cableway Routing
Electrical Assembly Design
General
Electrical Library Access
Electrical Harness Installation
Electrical Wire Routing
Electrical Harness Flattening
Electrical 3D Design Assembly
General
Harness Flattening
Harness Management
Wire Routing
Structure Preliminary Layout
Design
Drafting
Offset Data
Compartment & Access
Equipment Support Structures
Circuit Board Design
Graphic
Components
Structure Functional Design
Catalogs
Design
Knowledgeware
Business Process Knowledge Template
Product Function Optimization
Product Functional Definition
ENOVIA V5 VPM
ENOVIA V5 VPM Logon
VPM Search
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 16
VPM Navigator
Machining Simulation
General
Simulation
Ergonomics Design & Analysis
Human Measurements Editor
Human Activity Analysis
Human Builder
Human Posture Analysis
Reference Information
Graphic Formats
SVG
SVG Interpreter
Test Suite
Color Palette
3D XML Format
Layers and Layer Filters for Dittos
Methodology
Printing
Basic Concepts
Three Scenarios to Illustrate Version 5 Printing
Configuration Scenarios for Printer Drivers
Scenario for Printer Administration
Glossary
Index
Index Numerics
Index A
Index B
Index C
Index D
Index E
Index F
Index G
Index H
Index I
Index J
Index K
Index L
Index M
Index N
Index O
Index P
Index Q
Index R
Index S
Index T
Index U
Index V
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 17
Index W
Index Z
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 18

Overview
Welcome to the Infrastructure User's Guide. This guide is intended for users who need to become quickly
familiar with Infrastructure interactive functions.

This overview provides the following information:

● Infrastructure in a Nutshell

● Getting the Most Out of this Guide

● Accessing Sample Documents

● Conventions Used in this Guide

Infrastructure in a Nutshell

The Infrastructure User's Guide contains information about the user interface and basic tools common
to all Version 5 applications:
● starting a session
● getting help
● activating application workbenches
● creating, opening and saving documents
● laying out documents
● selecting and manipulating objects
● printing, viewing and navigating
● rendering and lighting effects
● using macros
● using Version 5 data in OLE-compliant applications
● customizing toolbars and settings
● using the Knowledgeware Advisor.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 19

Version 5 addresses advanced mechanical process centric design requirements. In addition to leading edge
feature-based design functions, it includes highly productive capabilities for the design of mechanical
assemblies and for drawing generation.

Available on both UNIX and Windows environments, Version 5 is built to be totally compliant with Windows
presentation standards.

In order to integrate to an extended enterprise where CATIA Version 4 designs need to be exchanged and
processed, it includes unique two-way interoperability with CATIA Version 4 data. Likewise, Version 5 benefits
from the breadth of the CATIA Solutions Version 4 portfolio by offering interoperable applications. As an open
solution, it includes interfaces with the most commonly used data exchange industry standards.

CATIA Team PDM

Please note that CATIA Team PDM (TD1) is no longer a CATIA product. The integration between CATIA and
SmarTeam is now a SmarTeam product named SmarTeam-CATIA V5 Integration available in the SmarTeam
product. If you are a former Team PDM customer, please contact your CATIA support to modify your Team PDM
seat to take account of the relevant SmarTeam product.

Getting the Most Out of this Guide

To get the most out of this guide, we suggest that you start reading the User Tasks section, which deals with
handling basic functions.

Once you have finished, you should move on to the Advanced Tasks section which describes more advanced
functions.

The Workbench Description section, which describes the Infrastructure workbench, and the Customizing
section, which explains how to set up the options, will also certainly prove useful.

You may also need to access the Interoperability section for more information about interoperability between

Knowledgeware applications and other applications. To do so, just click the icon from the table of
contents.

Navigating in the Split View mode is recommended. This mode offers a framed layout allowing direct access
from the table of contents to the information.

Accessing Sample Documents

To perform the scenarios, sample documents are provided all along this documentation. These samples are
located in the online/basug/samples folder.
For more information about this, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in this guide.

Conventions Used in this Guide

To learn more about the conventions used in this guide, refer to the Conventions section.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 20

Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and understand
important concepts and specifications.

Graphic Conventions
The three categories of graphic conventions used are as follows:

● Graphic conventions structuring the tasks

● Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required

● Graphic conventions used in the table of contents

Graphic Conventions Structuring the Tasks

Graphic conventions structuring the tasks are denoted as follows:

This icon... Identifies...

estimated time to accomplish a task

a target of a task

the prerequisites

the start of the scenario

a tip

a warning

information

basic concepts

methodology

reference information

information regarding settings, customization, etc.

the end of a task

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 21

functionalities that are new or enhanced with this release

allows you to switch back to the full-window viewing mode

Graphic Conventions Indicating the Configuration Required

Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required are denoted as follows:

This icon... Indicates functions that are...

specific to the P1 configuration

specific to the P2 configuration

specific to the P3 configuration

Graphic Conventions Used in the Table of Contents

Graphic conventions used in the table of contents are denoted as follows:

This icon... Gives access to...

Site Map

Split View Mode

What's New?

Overview

Getting Started

Basic Tasks

User Tasks or Advanced Tasks

Interoperability

Workbench Description

Customizing

Administration Tasks

Reference
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 22

Methodology

Frequently Asked Questions

Glossary

Index

Text Conventions
The following text conventions are used:

● The titles of CATIA, ENOVIA and DELMIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text.
● File -> New identifies the commands to be used.
● Enhancements are identified by a blue-colored background on the text.

How to Use the Mouse

The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform.

Use this
mouse button... Whenever you read...

● Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

● Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window,
...)
● Double-click
● Shift-click
● Ctrl-click
● Check (check boxes)
● Drag
● Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects)

● Drag
● Move

● Right-click (to select contextual menu)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 23

What's New?
New Functionalities
Knowledgeware

Saving a Design Table in a Technological Package

Design Tables external files can be saved in Technological Packages in ENOVIA VPM V5.
Using the Knowledgeware Index
An index containing the functions, the types exposed in the Knowledge browsers and the main behaviors
and sub-processes is provided in the runtime view. When one of these items is used in a relation, it is
searched for in the index and automatically loaded.
Managing Knowledge Applications Resources
A new directories structure is available to help you manage the applications built using Knowledgeware
workbenches.
About Application Resources Management (ARM)
You can use the ARM system to ask for physical resources referenced in an ARM catalog.

Enhanced Functionalities
Capturing Images

Capturing Images in a Multi-View Configuration

Multi-View mode is supported when capturing images.

Configuring Printers

Using HP DesignJet 4000 Series Printers

A new driver dedicated to HP DesignJet 4000 Series printers is provided. This new driver manages all the
different settings of HP DesignJet 4000 Series printers and generates HPGL2 files compliant with them.
Using HPGL Printers
Two new options are available in the HPGL Configuration dialog box to let you choose between the
thickness of the pen and the thickness of the model when printing a document.
Using SVG Printers
Advanced configuration options are available for the driver dedicated to SVG printers.

Creating, Opening, and Saving Documents

Managing Document Save

Ability to add a prefix or a suffix to a set of documents directly from the Save Management dialog box.
Opening Existing Documents
You can open documents in SVG format.
Saving Documents In Other Formats
Ability to save CATDrawing documents in SVG format.

Customizing Workbenches
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 24

Administering the Worbench List

The list of workbenches displayed in the Start menu can be managed by administrators in order to
restrict the access for end users.

Managing Document Links

Editing Document Links

Ability to reroute publications.

Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass

Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass

The letters representing the compass axes are displayed with a more readable font when dragging and
dropping the compass onto an object.
Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command
Compass axes are highlighted when using the translation or rotation buttons in the compass edition
dialog box.

Power Input Mode

Searching by Color
Each color in the color palette is associated to a name to make it easier to search for colored objects.
Searching by Symbol
You can search for point symbols when running a search via the power input field.
Searching Using Predefined Favorites
Ability to run default favorite queries using shortcuts.
Using a Default Prefix
Ability to use a default prefix to run queries or commands. This new prefix can be customized via the
Search tab in Tools > Options > General.
Using a Default Search Scope
Ability to use a default search scope to run queries or commands. This new prefix can be customized via
the Search tab in Tools > Options > General.
Using Search Scopes
A new alias is provided to search for objects visible on screen.
Combining Queries Using Operators
Ability to combine predefined favorite queries, standard favorite queries and standard queries.

Printing Documents

Customizing Print Settings

Ability to print images in a multi-view configuration.
On Screen mode enables you to print raster images.

Selecting Objects

Selecting Objects Using the Search command

The Search and Select button enables you to select automatically the objects found by the search
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 25
(General, Favorites and Advanced modes).
The Visible on screen scope is now available. This scope lets you search for objects displayed in the
current window only.
You can search for point symbols when running a search in General mode.
Selecting Using a Filter
A new selection mode enables you to select intersection edges.

Using Rendering Styles

Colored Edges from Faces Option

The new "Colored edges from faces" option lets you display the object like in Wireframe (NHR) mode but
with colored edges.
No Vertices Option
The new "No vertices" option lets you display edges without their vertices.

Viewing Objects

Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration

Two new standard configurations are provided for tiling the viewer horizontally and vertically.
Using Layer Filters
Ability to visualize a Version 4 object instantiated in different dittos with different layer filters.

Knowledgeware

About the Formula Editor

The Formula editor was improved.

Customizing Settings
Graphic Formats
You can define advanced configuration parameters when saving documents in SVG format.
Performances
New option for disabling back face culling for all objects.
Search
This new tab lets you customize the default prefix to be used when running commands or queries via the
power input field.
Knowledge Environment
This tab, which was called Language tab until this release, contains a new field that lets you specify the
directory containing the data you want to use in the application you created using Knowledgeware
workbenches.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 26

Basic Tasks
Starting Version 5
Getting Help
Editing in Context Within the Product Structure
Creating, Opening, and Saving Documents
Viewing the Specification Tree and the Geometry Area
Selecting Objects
Manipulating Objects
Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass
Measuring
Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects
Printing Documents
Capturing and Managing Images for the Album
Viewing Objects
Navigating
Hiding and Showing Objects
Using Rendering Styles
Setting Lighting and Depth Effects
Using Standard and User-Defined Views
Using Layers and Layer Filters
Recording, Running, and Editing Macros
Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications
Transferring Version 5 Data
Managing Document Links in Version 5
Running Batches
Working With Technological Packages
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 27

Starting Version 5
Starting a Session on Windows
Starting a Session on UNIX
Starting a Session Using Document Icons
Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on Windows
Starting a Session in a Language Other than English on UNIX
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 28

Starting a Session on Windows

This task explains how to start the default CATIA Version 5 environment on Windows.

Method 1: Using the Desktop

1. On the Windows desktop, double-click the CATIA V5R16 default environment shortcut

Warning: These shortcuts are created via the official tools (for example,

CATIAENV, setcatenv). Consequently, the application (CATIA, for example)

runs normally without any blank DOS window in the background, because

the official tools ensure that the blank DOS window does not appear.

However, if you create your own shortcut with customized properties, then

an empty DOS window will appear, because CATSTART.exe is a batch

executable and Windows automatically generates this window. If you close

this empty DOS window, it kills CATIA session also.

Method 2: Using the Programs Menu

1. On the taskbar, select the Start->Programs-> CATIA->CATIA environment shortcut.

Method 3: Using the Start->Run... Command

1. On the taskbar, select the Start->Run... command, enter the command:

cnext
or:
cnext.exe

2. Click OK.

This method lets you start a session using the last environment installed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 29

Method 4: From the Command Line

1. Open an MS-DOS window.

2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\code\bin

3. Enter the command:

cnext
or:
cnext.exe

The options are:

● -e: starts Version 5 and passes the name of the command to start
● -env: specifies the name of the environment with which to start a session (for more
information, refer to Managing Environments); by default, the default environment is
started
● -direnv: specifies the folder containing the environment
● -batch: starts a session in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed)
Used with "-e", it specifies that you want to run a batch utility. For example, you would
run a batch utility like this:
CNEXT -batch -e CATV4ToV5Migration
● -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting CATIA ; for example, the
following command runs CATIA and loads a document:

cnext -object "e:\users\steve\Product.CATProduct"

If the program you want to start requires parameters, you must enclose the program name
and the parameters between " ". For example: -object "arg1 arg2"
● -macro: starts the specified macro
● -admin: starts a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings

● -workbench "workbench_name": starts a session and directly opens the workbench

specified. The string "workbench_name" is the name of the workbench as it appears in the
Start menu.
For example, when using CATIA, the command:
cnext -workbench "Part Design"
starts a session and opens the Part Design workbench directly.
● -h: displays help.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 30

Method 5: Using the catstart Command

The principal command you will use is the catstart command.

This command is used to launch other programs for:

● starting a Version 5 session (for example, CNEXT)

● running Version 5 environment administration tools (catiaenv, setcatenv, delcatenv, lscatenv,
chcatenv, readcatenv)
● running Version 5 software management tools (CATSoftwareMgt, CATNodelockMgt, CATOptionsMgt
and the equivalent batch commands).

1. Open an MS-DOS window.

2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\code\bin

3. Enter the command:

catstart -run CNEXT

or:
catstart

to start a session using the default global environment created at installation.

The options are:

● -batch: used with "-object", this argument runs macros in batch mode (an interactive session is not
displayed)
● -env: specifies a new environment name (for more information, refer to Managing Environments); if
you do not specify an environment, the default global environment created at installation is used
● -direnv: specifies the directory created at installation containing the environment (which may be
different from the default environment directory)
● -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session; for example, the following
command runs a session and loads a document:

catstart -direnv E:\CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -object "E:\Product1.CATProduct"

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 31
If the program you want to start requires you to specify options, you must enclose the
parameters between " " (for example, -object "arg1 arg2"). For example:

catstart -run CATSoftwareMgtB -object "-L"

● -run

This option is used to launch other programs for:

❍ starting a Version 5 session (for example, CNEXT)

❍ running Version 5 environment administration tools (catiaenv, setcatenv, delcatenv, lscatenv,
chcatenv, readcatenv)
❍ running Version 5 software management tools (CATSoftwareMgt, CATNodelockMgt, CATOptionsMgt
and the equivalent batch commands).

The "-run" option is followed by the name of the program to start. If this option is not specified,
a CATIA session is started by default.

These commands also have their own options. If the program you want to start requires you to
specify options, you must enclose the program name and the parameters between " ". For
example, the following command:

catstart -direnv E:\CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -run "CATSoftwareMgtB -L"

lists the installed configurations and/or products on your workstation.

Note:

Include a referenced path inside backslashes (before the double quotation marks) if the path
contains blanks like this:

catstart -run myAppli -object "-open \"C:\My Documents\file0001.txt\" "

Running Macros Using the CNEXT Command

To start a session and run a macro automatically, run the command like this:

cnext -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

or like this:

cnext -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -macro -batch E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

if you want to run the macro in batch mode.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 32

Starting a Session in Administrator Mode To Lock Settings

1. Enter the command:

cnext -env "my_env" -admin

where "my_env" is the name of the environment, if you want to run a session in administrator
mode for the purpose of locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from
changing the settings you locked.

For more information, refer to Locking Settings.

Note: "Administration Mode" in now displayed in the title bar when starting a session in
administration mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 33

Starting a Session on UNIX

This task explains how to start the default CATIAVersion 5 environment on UNIX.

Method 1: Using the Desktop

1. On CDE desktops (AIX, HP-UX and Sun Solaris), open the Application Manager cabinet on the front

panel.

2. Open the CATIA directory.

3. Double-click the CATIA V5R16 icon.

On IRIX, access the CATIA tab Application Manager in the desktop, then double-click the
CATIA.V5R16.B16 icon.

You can also double-click document icons in your file manager to start Version 5. Note,
however, that this starts a new Version 5 session each time: the document is not added to a
Version 5 session which is already running.

Method 2: From the Command Line Using the catstart

Command
The principal command you will use is the catstart command.

This command is used to launch other programs for:

● starting a Version 5 session (for example, CNEXT)

● running Version 5 environment administration tools (catiaenv, setcatenv, delcatenv, lscatenv,
chcatenv, readcatenv)
● running Version 5 software management tools (CATSoftwareMgt, CATNodelockMgt, CATOptionsMgt
and the equivalent batch commands).

1. Log on as either root or end user.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 34

2. Enter the command:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/catstart -run CNEXT

or:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/catstart

where "OS_a" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_a
● irix_a
● solaris_a

to start a session using the default global environment created at installation.

You can also run the command by changing to the directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/

If you do so, run the command like this:

./catstart -run CNEXT

or:
./catstart

The options are:

● -e: starts Version 5 and passes the name of the command to start
● -batch: used with "-object", this argument runs macros in batch mode (an interactive session is not
displayed).
Used with "-e", it specifies that you want to run a batch utility. For example, you would run a batch
utility like this:
./catstart -run "CNEXT -batch -e CATV4ToV5Migration"
● -direnv: specifies the directory created at installation containing the environment (which may be
different from the default $HOME/CATEnv directory)
● -env: specifies a new environment name (for more information, refer to "Managing Environments"); if
you do not specify an environment, the default global environment created at installation is used
● -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session; for example, the following
command runs a session and loads a document:

./catstart -direnv /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -object "/tmp/Part1.CATPart"

If the program you want to start requires you to specify options, you must enclose the
parameters between " " (for example, -object "arg1 arg2"). For example:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 35

./catstart -run CATSoftwareMgt -object "-L"

● -run

This option is used to launch other programs for:

❍ starting a Version 5 session (for example, CNEXT)

❍ running Version 5 environment administration tools (catiaenv, setcatenv, delcatenv, lscatenv,
chcatenv, readcatenv)
❍ running Version 5 software management tools (CATSoftwareMgt, CATNodelockMgt, CATOptionsMgt
and the equivalent batch commands).

The "-run" option is followed by the name of the program to start. If this option is not specified,
a CATIA session is started by default.

These commands also have their own options. If the program you want to start requires you to
specify options, you must enclose the program name and the parameters between " ". For
example, the following command:

./catstart -direnv /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -run "CATSoftwareMgt -L"

lists the installed configurations and/or products on your workstation.

● -s: non-verbose mode

● -h: displays help
● -remote: remote environment
● -user: user environment

Exporting the runtime variables of the default global environment in the

current window
Another quick way of running a program also exists:

1. Log on as either root or end user.

2. Enter the command:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/catstart -run ksh

which exports the runtime variables of the default global environment in the current window.

3. Run the command, for example:

CATSoftwareMgt
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 36

Method 3: Running Macros Using the catstart Command

1. Log on as either root or end user.

2. Go to the directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command

where "OS_a" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_a
● irix_a
● solaris_a.

3. Start a Version 5 session and run a macro automatically by running a command like this:

./catstart -run CNEXT -object "-macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

./catstart -run CNEXT -object "-batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

./catstart -run "CNEXT -batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

./catstart -run "CNEXT -batch -macro "/tmp/Mymacro.CATScript""

./catstart -run "CNEXT -admin"

if you want to run in administrator mode (using the default environment) for the purpose of
locking settings. This prevents all users of that environment from changing the settings you
locked.

You could also enter the command:

./catstart -run "CNEXT -env my_env -admin"

where "my_env" is the name of your environment. For more information, refer to Locking
Settings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 37

Note: "Administration Mode" in now displayed in the title bar when starting a session in administration
mode.

Options for the CNEXT Program

The program:

CNEXT

also has the following options:

● -admin: starts a session in administrator mode for the purpose of locking settings

● -batch: starts a session in batch mode (an interactive session is not displayed)
● -c: starts a session and activates the workbench you specify
● -env: starts a session and executes an environment you specify
● -macro: used with "-object", this argument starts a session and runs the macro whose name you
specify
● -object: followed by object to load (between " ") when starting a session; for example, the following
command runs a session and loads a document:

./catstart -run CNEXT -object "/tmp/My.CATPart"

Or, followed by arguments between " "; for example, -object "arg1 arg2"

● -workbench workbench_name: starts a session and directly opens the workbench specified. The
string "workbench_name" is the name of the workbench as it appears in the Start menu.
For example, when using CATIA, the command:
./catstart -run "CNEXT -workbench Part Design"
starts a session and opens the Part Design workbench directly.
● -h: displays help.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 38

Starting a Session Using Document Icons

This task explains how to start a session using icons for existing documents.

Method 1

1. Locate the document icon using your platform's Explorer (Windows) or File Manager (UNIX).

● this is a Product Structure document icon:

● this is a Part Design document icon:

● this is a Generative Drafting document icon:

● this a CATIA Version 4 model icon:

2. Double-click the icon.

This will run Version 5, open the document and activate the workbench used to create the
document originally.

Method 2

1. Drag and drop a document icon onto the CATIA V5R16 environment icon on your desktop

(Windows only).

Method 3

1. Drag and drop a document icon onto an open Version 5 window.

Note that this possibility is not available on IRIX.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 39

Starting a Session in a Language Other than

English on Windows
This task explains how to start Version 5 in a language other than English on Windows.

Locales for which Version 5 delivers user interface files

Installing Version 5 installs the user interface files for the following languages:

● English (default language)

● French
● German
● Japanese
● Korean
● Simplified Chinese
● Italian.

You then simply use the tools on your operating system to choose the language in which you want to
start your session. If no language is chosen, your session will be started in English.

1. Select the Start->Settings->Control Panel command, double-click the Regional Options

control, then click the General tab (if it is not displayed by default).

The following dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 40

In our example above, English is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 41

2. Select the desired language from the languages available on the list.

For example, selecting any of:

● French (Belgian)
● French (Canadian)
● French (Luxembourg)
● French (Standard)
● French (Swiss)

will start the session in French. The same applies to the other language variants.

Note that the General tab does not activate your input locale: for example, it does not activate
the keyboard map for the language you selected.

3. Click the Input Locales tab if you want to select the input locale for your language.

The Input Locales tab is displayed.

4. Click the Change... button then select the appropriate input locale.

In our example below, you selected French (Standard):

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 42

5. Click OK twice, then start Version 5.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 43

Translating user interface files

You can translate user interface files in a language for which Version 5 does not deliver user interface
files. For example, you can do the following:

1. Open the following file:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\reffiles\NLS\SUPPLANG

Note that this file contain the following lines:

*NT*
...
Portuguese Portugal 0816 1252
2. Copy the message catalog folder from the installation folder to your folder:

C:
C:\> cp -r "Program Files"\"Dassault Systemes"\B16\intel_a\resources\msgcatalog
"Program Files"\"Dassault Systemes"\MyB16\intel_a\resources

3. Reference this new folder in the environment (update the CATMsgCatalogPath environment
variable using the Environment Editor, see "Managing Environments", so that it point to the
preceding folder).
4. Create a Portuguese folder in the CATMsgCatalogPath environment variable root folder:

C:
C:\> cd "Program Files"\"Dassault Systemes"\MyB16\intel_a\resources\msgcatalog
C:\> mkdir Portuguese

5. Create translated versions of user interface files in the Portuguese language

The General.CATNls user interface file, at least, must be translated. The files will be placed in the
following folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\MyB16\intel_a\resources\msgcatalog\Portuguese

6. In the regional options (see above), choose the Portuguese language.

7. Start Version 5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 44

Locales Whose Use with Version 5 has been Validated

The locales (see the General\"Your locale (location)" field in the "Control Panel"\"Regional Options"
above) whose use with Version 5 has been validated are as follows:

Czech
Danish
Dutch (Belgium)
Dutch (Netherlands)
English (Canadian)
English (United Kingdom)
English (United States)
Finnish
French (Belgian)
French (Canadian)
French (Standard)
French (Switzerland)
German (Austria)
German (Standard)
German (Switzerland)
Icelandic
Italian (Standard)
Italian (Switzerland)
Japanese
Korean
Norwegian (Bokmal)
Polish
Portuguese (Portugal)
Russian
Chinese (PRC)
Spanish (Spain, Traditional Sort)
Swedish
Chinese (Taiwan)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 45

Starting a Session in a Language Other than

English on UNIX
This task explains how to start Version 5 in a language other than English on UNIX.

Locales for which Version 5 delivers user interface files

Installing Version 5 directly installs the user interface files (message catalogs) for the following
languages:

● English (default language)

● French
● German
● Japanese
● Korean
● Simplified Chinese
● Italian.

The user interface files for these languages are already translated for you. If you install in the default
installation directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/

where "OS" is:

aix_a
hpux_b
irix_a
solaris_a

the following default environment is set up:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog (containing the English files)

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog/French
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog/German
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog/Japanese
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog/Korean
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog/Simplified_Chinese
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog/Italian

This default environment (/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/resources/msgcatalog) is pointed to by the

environment variable: CATMsgCatalogPath.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 46

Translating user interface files

You can translate user interface files in a language for which Version 5 does not deliver user interface
files. For example, you can do the following:

1. Open the following file:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/aix_a/reffiles/NLS/SUPPLANG

Note that this file contain the following lines:

*AIX*
...
Portuguese Portugal pt_PT ISO8859-1

2. Copy the message catalog folder from the installation folder to your folder:

cd /home/myadm
cp -r /usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/aix_a/resources/msgcatalog
/home/myadm/aix_a/resources

3. Reference this new folder in the environment (by updating the CATMsgCatalogPath environment
variable) so that it points to the preceding folder.

4. Create a Portuguese folder in the CATMsgCatalogPath environment variable root folder:

cd /home/myadm/aix_a/resources/msgcatalog
mkdir Portuguese

5. Create translated versions of user interface files in the Portuguese language

The General.CATNls user interface file, at least, must be translated. The files will be placed in the
following folder:

/home/myadm/aix_a/resources/msgcatalog/Portuguese

6. Export the LANG variable for the desired locale before starting a session.

You will enter the following command on AIX:

export LANG=pt_PT
this command on HP-UX:
export LANG=pt_PT.iso88591
this command on IRIX:
export LANG=pt
this command on Sun Solaris:
export LANG=pt_PT.ISO8859-1

7. Start Version 5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 47

What about fonts?

The installation also sets up in each language directory a file named "Dialog.CATNls".

This file contains all the font declarations for use as is, for the language and locale you want to use (we
have chosen the same fonts as used in Version 4 to facilitate the transition to Version 5).

If you want to use other fonts, comment out the previous font declarations and declare the new fonts.

The file also contains other user interface texts.

You then simply use your operating system tools to choose the locale in which you want to start your
session. If no locale is chosen, your session will be started in English.

1. Open a shell window.

2. Export the LANG variable for the desired locale before starting a session.

For example, for the French language, enter this command on AIX:

export LANG=fr_FR

this command on HP-UX:

export LANG=fr_FR.iso88591

this command on Sun Solaris and IRIX:

export LANG=fr

3. Start Version 5.

Locales Whose Use with Version 5 has been Validated

The locales whose use with Version 5 has been validated are as follows:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 48

IBM AIX
User Interface Name in English $LANG environment variable Language
environment
Czech ISO8859-2 cs_CZ Czech
Danish ISO8859-1 da_DK Danish
Dutch Belgium ISO8859-1 nl_BE Dutch (Belgium)
Dutch ISO8859-1 nl_NL Dutch (Netherlands)
English (United States) ISO8859-1 en_US English (United States)
English (United Kingdom) ISO8859-1 en_GB English (United Kingdom)
Finish ISO8859-1 fi_FI Finnish
French ISO8859-1 fr_BE French (Belgian)
French ISO8859-1 fr_CA French (Canadian)
French ISO8859-1 fr_FR French (Standard)
French ISO8859-1 fr_CH French (Switzerland)
German ISO8859-1 de_DE German (Standard)
German (Switzerland) ISO8859-1 de_CH German (Switzerland)
Icelandic ISO8859-1 is_IS Icelandic
Italian ISO8859-1 it_IT Italian (Standard)
Japanese (PC) IBM-943 Ja_JP Japanese
Korean IBM-eucKR ko_KR Korean
Norwegian ISO8859-1 no_NO Norwegian (Bokmal)
Polish ISO8859-2 pl_PL Polish
Portuguese ISO8859-1 pt_PT Portuguese (Portugal)
Russian ISO8859-5 ru_RU Russian
Chinese (Simplified EUC) IBM-eucCN zh_CN Chinese (PRC)
Spanish ISO8859-1 es_ES Spanish (Spain, Traditional
Swedish ISO8859-1 sv_SE Sort)
Chinese (Traditional) IBM-eucTW zh_TW Swedish
Chinese (Taiwan)

HP-UX
User Interface Name in English
$LANG environment variable Language
environment
cs_CZ.iso88592 cs_CZ.iso88592 Czech
da_DK.iso88591 da_DK.iso88591 Danish
nl_NL.iso88591 nl_NL.iso88591 Dutch (Belgium)
nl_NL.iso88591 nl_NL.iso88591 Dutch (Netherlands)
en_US.iso88591 en_US.iso88591 English (United States)
en_GB.iso88591 en_GB.iso88591 English (United Kingdom)
fi_FI.iso88591 fi_FI.iso88591 Finnish
fr_CA.iso88591 fr_CA.iso88591 French (Canadian)
fr_FR.iso88591 fr_FR.iso88591 French (Standard)
de_DE.iso88591 de_DE.iso88591 German (Standard)
de_DE.iso88591 de_DE.iso88591 German (Switzerland)
is_IS.iso88591 is_IS.iso88591 Icelandic
it_IT.iso88591 it_IT.iso88591 Italian (Standard)
ja_JP.SJIS ja_JP.SJIS Japanese
ko_KR.eucKR ko_KR.eucKR Korean
no_NO.iso88591 no_NO.iso88591 Norwegian
pl_PL.iso88592 pl_PL.iso88592 Polish
pt_PT.iso88591 pt_PT.iso88591 Portuguese (Portugal)
ru_RU.iso88595 ru_RU.iso88595 Russian
zh_CN.hp15CN zh_CN.hp15CN Chinese (PRC)
es_ES.iso88591 es_ES.iso88591 Spanish (Spain, Traditional
sv_SE.iso88591 sv_SE.iso88591 Sort)
zh_TW.eucTW zh_TW.eucTW Swedish
Chinese (Taiwan)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 49

SGI IRIX
User Interface Name in English
$LANG environment variable Language
environment
The Czech Republic (Czech/Latin2 cs Czech
ISO8859-2) da Danish
Denmark (Danish/latin1 ISO8859-1) nl_BE Dutch (Belgium)
Belgium (Dutch/Latin1 ISO8859-1) nl Dutch (Netherlands)
The Netherlands (Dutch/Latin1 ISO8859- en_CA English (Canada)
1) en_US English (United States)
Canada (English/Latin1 ISO8859-1) en English (United Kingdom)
The United States (English/Latin1 fi Finnish
ISO8859-1) fr_BE French (Belgian)
Great Britain (English/Latin1 ISO8859-1) fr_CA French (Canadian)
Finland (Finnish/Latin1 ISO8859-1) fr French (Standard)
Belgium (French/Latin1 ISO8859-1) fr_CH French (Switzerland)
Canada (French/Latin1 ISO8859-1) de_AT German (Austria)
France (French/Latin1 ISO8859-1) de German (Standard)
Switzerland (French/Latin1 ISO8859-1) de_CH German (Switzerland)
Austria (German/Latin1 ISO8859-1) is Icelandic
German (German/Latin1 ISO8859-1) it Italian (Standard)
Switzerland (German/Latin1 ISO8859-1) it_CH Italian (Switzerland)
Iceland (Icelandic/Latin1 ISO8859-1) ja_JP.SJIS Japanese
Italy (Italian/Latin1 ISO8859-1) ko_KR.euc Korean
Switzerland (Italian/Latin1 ISO8859-1) no Norwegian
Japan pl Polish
Korea (Korean/euc charset) pt Portuguese (Portugal)
Norway (Norwegian/Latin1 ISO8859-1) ru Russian
Poland (Polish/Latin2 ISO8859-2) zh_CN.ugb Chinese (PRC)
Portugal (Portuguese/Latin1 ISO8859-1) es Spanish (Spain, Traditional
Russia (Russian/Cyrillic ISO8859-5) sv Sort)
China (Chinese/Simplified) zh_TW.ucns Swedish
Spain (Spanish/Latin1 ISO8859-1) Chinese (Taiwan)
Sweden (Swedish/Latin1 ISO8859-1)
Taiwan (Chinese/Traditional)

SUN Solaris
User Interface Name in English
$LANG environment variable Language
environment
cs_CZ.ISO8859-2 cs_CZ.ISO8859-2 Czech
da_DK.ISO8859-1 da_DK.ISO8859-1 Danish
nl_BE.ISO8859-1 nl_BE.ISO8859-1 Dutch (Belgium)
nl_NL.ISO8859-1 nl_NL.ISO8859-1 Dutch (Netherlands)
en_CA.ISO8859-1 en_CA.ISO8859-1 English (Canada)
en_GB.ISO8859-1 en_GB.ISO8859-1 English (United Kingdom)
fi_FI.ISO8859-1 fi_FI.ISO8859-1 Finnish
fr_BE.ISO8859-1 fr_BE.ISO8859-1 French (Belgian)
fr_CA.ISO8859-1 fr_CA.ISO8859-1 French (Canadian)
fr_FR.ISO8859-1 fr_FR.ISO8859-1 French (Standard)
de_DE.ISO8859-1 de_DE.ISO8859-1 German (Standard)
de_CH.ISO8859-1 de_CH.ISO8859-1 German (Switzerland)
is_IS.ISO8859-1 is_IS.ISO8859-1 Icelandic
it_IT.ISO8850-1 it_IT.ISO8850-1 Italian (Standard)
ja_JP.PCK ja_JP.PCK Japanese
ko ------- Korean ko Korean
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 50
no_NO.ISO8859-1@bokmal no_NO.ISO8859-1@bokmal Norwegian (Bokmal)
no_NO.ISO8859-1@nynorsk no_NO.ISO8859-1@nynorsk Norwegian (nynorsk)
pl_PL.ISO8859-2 pl_PL.ISO8859-2 Polish
pt_PT.ISO8859-1 pt_PT.ISO8859-1 Portuguese (Portugal)
ru_RU.ISO8859-5 ru_RU.ISO8859-5 Russian
zh ------- Simplified Chinese zh Chinese (PRC)
es_ES.ISO8859-1 es_ES.ISO8859-1 Spanish (Spain, Traditional
sv_SE.ISO8859-1 sv_SE.ISO8859-1 Sort)
zh_TW ---- Traditional Chinese zh_TW Swedish
Chinese (Taiwan)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 51

Getting Help
Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages
Using the What's This? Command
Accessing the Online Help Library
Searching the Online Help Library
Getting Contextual Help
Displaying Easy Warnings
Accessing the Dassault Systemes User Galaxy
Displaying Copyright Information
Accessing Sample Documents
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 52

Displaying Tooltips and Help Messages

This task explains how to display tooltips and the corresponding help messages.

1. Point to an icon.

The tooltip is displayed in a small box, with the corresponding message in the status bar.

You can switch tooltip display on or off by selecting or clearing the Tooltips check box in the Options
tab. This tab can be accessed either by selecting Tools > Customize or by right-clicking any toolbar
then selecting Customize... .
Note that you have to restart a session to take the new settings into account.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 53

Using the What's This? Command

This task explains how to use the What's This? command to get help on toolbar icons.

1. Click What's This? in the Standard toolbar or select Help > What's This?.

The cursor takes on the shape of the What's This? icon.

2. Point to an icon, then click the icon.

This displays a long help message in a box:

In some cases, the What's This? command gives you help on dialog boxes. To do so, just click the icon
in the top right corner of the dialog box then point to the desired area to display the long help message.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 54

Accessing the Online Help Library

This task explains how to access the online help library.

The Version 5 documentation is totally Web oriented, using HTML, GIF and JPEG standard formats, allowing easy access and navigation using
a standard Web browser. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the table of contents
to the information.
The online help library can be installed either at the same a time as you install the code, or later after the code has been installed.

For detailed information about the former, refer to "Installing the Online Documentation" in Installing Version 5 on Windows for the First
Time, and for the latter, refer to Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Software on Windows (or on UNIX).

1. Select the Help->Contents, Index and Search command.

The welcome page of the Version 5 online help library is displayed:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 55

If you installed the online documentation in the default location, the welcome page will be displayed immediately. If you installed the online
documentation elsewhere, you must first update the CATDocView variable in your environment to reference the environment containing the
online documentation.
If you do not reset the CATDocView variable, a dialog box will prompt you to specify the location:
● if you installed the online documentation locally on your computer, you can specify a path like this, for example, on Windows:

C:\online_doc_folder

where "online_doc_folder" is the name of the folder in which you installed the online documentation.
● if you installed it elsewhere on the network, you must first map the appropriate network drive before starting a session, then specify a
path as above when prompted.
Location

Via the Tools->Options command, in the General category, select the Help tab. The Location field for the CATIA Documentation Location
option displays the path of the folder in which the online documentation is installed. The path is the same path you entered when installing
the online documentation: the path displays the value of the CATDocView environment variable.

When there are no settings, the value for the CATDocView variable is not displayed in the Location field, but in the directory chooser

accessible by clicking the Path(s) selection icon.

When you request help using the Help->Contents, Index and Search command (or press the F1 key for contextual help), the online
documentation may not be displayed. This may be because the online documentation may have been physically moved to another location. If
the online documentation is not found, the following dialog box appears:

Browse to select the online documentation location. Selecting the location updates the Location field for the CATIA Documentation Location
option, in the Help tab accessible via the Tools->Options command.

Note: You can also type the location in the Location field for the CATIA Documentation Location option. You must enter the real location;
otherwise, the path you enter will be ignored.

Note that UNC (Universal Naming Convention) names on Windows is allowed. For example, you can specify the following path type:

\\remote_computer\online_doc_folder

2. Point to the different icons to the left to display the icons for the corresponding online users guides, then click on the icon of your

choice to access the documentation.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 56

3. Click the Infrastructure icon to get familiar with Version 5 fundamentals, or the icon for the workbench you need information about.

In each case, the information you require is displayed in a framed layout:

4. Select the Home button to return to the home page.

The Home page provides access to the following:

● the full online documentation library

● the Index button to access the indexes for all the workbench documentation
● the Search button to perform a full text search throughout the online library: for more information about searching, refer to
Searching the Online Help Library

● automation documentation.

The Print PDF icon is no longer available. PDFs are no longer installed automatically, but are delivered on a separate CD-ROM.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 57

Searching the Online Help Library

This task explains how to perform full-text searching in the online help library.

The online documentation is totally Web oriented, using HTML, GIF and JPEG standard formats, allowing easy access and navigation
using a standard Web browser. Navigation aids includes full text searching and a framed layout allowing a direct access from the
table of contents to the information.

This scenario shows you how to use the online documentation search engine on CATIA documentation for illustration
purposes. The user interface and search functions described are common to all Version 5 product lines.

Note that, when using the search function, the following special characters should not be used in the search string:

/\&

but the following characters are allowed:

-_:

The search is not case-sensitive.

Warning: in order to be able to use the Search function on Internet Explorer, you must first activate the option IE Java(Sun).
Otherwise, the Java applet will not appear, and will be replaced by a grey box.

To do so:

1. Start Internet Explorer.

2. Select Tools->Internet Options...
3. Select the Advanced tab.
4. Check the the Java (Sun) option.
5. Click OK and restart Internet Explorer.

When using the Mozilla 1.4 browser, a Java plug-in is necessary for access to the Documentation search applet. The recommended
plug-in on Windows, at level 1.3.1.8 is available from SUN at:

http://java.sun.com/products/archive/j2se/1.3.1_08/

Performing Simple, Fuzzy Searches

1. Select the "Search" button to perform a full text search throughout part or all of the online documentation library.

Search indexes are loaded the first time you use the Search button: once the indexes have been loaded, searching is
faster.

After you have performed the first search, the upper part of the window looks like this by default:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 58

The lower part of the window contains help on using the Search function the first time you access the Search function.
Once you perform a search, it is then used to display the document containing search results.

The default settings let you perform a basic fuzzy search throughout the entire online library.

2. For example, if you are looking for information about the CATDocView environment variable throughout all the

documentation, enter the string CATDoc in the "Search for" field, then click the Go button.

The search engine searches for the string CATDoc, and all words containing the string CATDoc at the beginning of the
word. The search results are displayed in the "Found in" list.

Entering the string CATDocView produces the same results.

In the search result list, the name of the user guide in which the string has been found precedes the title of the task
containing the search string.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 59

3. Double-click an item in the "Found in" list to open the document containing the search string.

Once you have performed your first search, double-click a document: the searched string is highlighted against a blue

background, in the document containing the string. Opening a document activates the Find Next button. Click on the Find

Next button to locate the next occurrence of the search string in the current document.

The page containing the search string is then displayed at the bottom of the browser window, so your search query is kept.

The Scope button can be toggled between Scope and Results:

● toggling to Scope redisplays the list of solutions and/or products in the Found in field. Check the All Documents option
to perform a search throughout the whole library, or uncheck the option and check the Solutions or Products option in
the Search scope field to restrict your search to solution or product documentation only
● toggling to Results to redisplays the search results.

Click the Reset button to reset the selection after selecting solutions and products.

Searching Across Solution and/Or Product Documentation

1. Check the "All Documents" and "Solutions" options to search all online documentation for all solutions.

This is the default setting. When these options are checked, the solutions list is grayed out.

2. Check the "All Documents" and "Products" options to search all online documentation for products.

Once again, the products list is grayed out.

3. In either case, uncheck the "All Documents" option to access either individual solution or product documentation, and select

the documentation from the list.

Click an item in the list to select it, click again to deselect it. Multiple selection is also possible.

Searching for Exact Words

1. Check the "Match whole word" option.

2. Enter the exact whole word you are searching for, then click the "Go" button.

This time, if you search for the string CATDo, the search engine will not find any matches because the string CATDo is not

a whole word.

However, the string CATDocView will find matches.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 60

Searching for Exact Phrases

1. In the "Search mode" pulldown list, select the "Exact phrase" option.

2. Enter the exact phrase you want to search for.

For example, enter the phrase "running in demo mode", then click the "Go" button.

Only those documents containing exactly the phrase you searched for will be listed.

Searching Using AND and OR Operators

You can use operators to search for several words or strings not forming a phrase (AND), or one of a list of words or strings you
specify (OR).

1. In the "Search mode" pulldown list, select the "AND" option.

2. Specify the words you want to search for, then click the "Go" button.

For example, search for documents containing both the strings "cnext" and "admin".

To search for either "cnext" or "admin", select "OR" in the "Search mode" pulldown list, enter the words "cnext" and

"admin", then click the "Go" button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 61

Getting Contextual Help

This task explains how to get contextual help on the current command.

1. Select the Help-> CATIA V5 Help command, or press the F1 key.

For example, if you are using the Edge Fillet command, the online help library is displayed in HTML format in a Web browser
window, at the topic explaining how to use the Edge Fillet command:

Pressing the F1 key also lets you access the Companion, provided that the Computer-Based Training module and the Companion have been
previously installed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 62

Displaying Easy Warnings

This task explains how to get help on a command using the Easy Warning capability.
Once activated, this capability gives you information on the command icon you click by displaying a furtive long help
message in the bottom right part of the window.
You also have the ability to get the history of the last five easy warnings displayed during your Version 5 session.

This capability is only available with a VPM Navigator or a VPM Instant Collaboration license. Note also that not all the
commands of these products are associated to an easy warning. For detailed information on VPM Navigator, refer to
the Version 5 - VPM Navigator User's Guide (on the ENOVIA V5 VPM/LCA Documentation CD-ROM) and for information
on Instant Collaboration, refer to the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide.

In our scenario, we take the VPM Instant Collaboration product as an example. We also assume that at least two users
have been identified in the Identification tab in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Collaboration Infrastructure
(as explained in the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide).

1. Start a Version 5 session.

2. Select Start > Digital Mockup > DMU Navigator to enter the DMU Navigator workbench.

3. Select View > Toolbars > Instant Collaboration to display the Instant Collaboration toolbar:

4. Click Community to connect to instant collaboration and access the community. In our example, two
users are connected:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 63

5. Open a new product by selecting File > New... then choosing Product in the New dialog box.

6. Click Annotated View in the DMU Review Creation toolbar to create a 2D annotation then select, for
instance, the Draw Circle icon in the DMU 2D Marker toolbar that appears and drag your mouse in the

geometry area. The result looks like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 64

7. Start another Version 5 session then repeat steps 3 to 5 detailed above.

8. In the first Version 5 session, click 3D conferencing then select the Annotated Views tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 65

9. Select a view from the list then click the Send button. An easy warning is sent to the second Version 5 session:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 66

10. In the first Version 5 session, click 3D conferencing again, select the Annotated Views tab then send
another view. Another easy warning is sent:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 67

You will notice that the icon in the bottom right corner is now activated and looks like this: .

11. If you want to display again the long help messages, click the icon to get the history:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 68

Note that each warning is displayed once in the history, even if a command has been run several times.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 69

Accessing the Dassault Systemes User Galaxy

This task explains how to connect to the Dassault Systemes user galaxy.

1. Select the Help->User Galaxy command.

A Web browser appears displaying the User Galaxy, a full online information package helping
you to find all the general information you expect to find about existing and upcoming
products, partners, training, hardware, R&D, services, and much more.

You can also click the CATIA P2 Solutions logo in the bottom right corner of the main window
to access the User Galaxy.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 70

Displaying Copyright Information

This task explains how to get background information about the product you are using.

1. Select the Help->About CATIA V5 command.

A dialog box appears providing you with copyright information about the product, version and
release number, build date, etc.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 71

Accessing Sample Documents

This task explains how to access sample documents.

Sample documents (installed along with the online help library) are provided in many (but not all) cases, to support the topic scenario
explaining how a specific command works.

1. Access the online help library using any of the usual methods.

2. Locate a help topic containing a prerequisite step prompting you to open a sample document.

For example, the topic "Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer" looks like this:

The step highlighted in red prompts you to open the document "Select.CATProduct". The name of the document is a hypertext
link.

3. Click the link.

If your default browser is Internet Explorer, the browser then prompts you to choose one of the following:

If your default browser is Mozilla, the browser then prompts you to do one of the following:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 72

4. Check the option "Open" if you using Internet Explorer, then click OK. Simply click OK if you are using Mozilla because the option

"Open it with the default application" is already checked.

Your session is opened and the sample document is loaded:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 73
The online documentation is installed by default on Windows in:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16doc\English

The sample documents are installed in user guide-specific sample folders. In the online documentation filetree, there is one samples
folder for each users guide, in the following location:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16doc\English\online\xxxug_C2\samples

where "xxx" represents the three-letter code for the product. For example, the folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16doc\English\online\prtug_C2\samples

contains the sample documents for the Part Design User's Guide.

Wherever you install the documentation, if you attempt to activate the sample documents from within the online documentation without
first installing the code, the samples will not work: the Version 5 document extensions must be registered on a computer where the
code is installed. The registering of extensions in the registry is performed automatically on the computer during the installation of the
code on Windows.

Problems Encountered with Sample Documents Containing Links to Other

Documents
Sample documents can be either self-contained (for example, CATPart documents), or contain links to other documents (for example,
CATProduct documents can contain links to CATPart documents). When you open a document containing links to other documents, note
that the document location strategies you set using the Document tab (via the Tools->Options... command) determine where the
software looks for the pointed documents.

One strategy, "Folder of the pointing document", must be activated. Otherwise, the linked documents will not be located when you open
the sample.

Furthermore, after installing the samples along with the online documentation, we recommend that you do not copy the samples
elsewhere. If you do, do so using the appropriate Version 5 tools (File->Send To->Directory, File->Save Management..., etc) and not
operating system tools.

For more details about document location strategies, refer to Document.

Problems Encountered with Sample Documents when Using Mozilla

Declaring MIMEtypes on UNIX

Users of Mozilla in a UNIX environment who want to open sample documents (for instance .CATProduct documents containing .CATPart
documents, .model documents, .CATDrawing documents, and so on) need to register these extensions by setting MIMEtypes using
Mozilla preferences. If you do not do so, the documents appears as garbage text.

On Windows, this step is not necessary because the appropriate extensions are registered in the Windows registry.

To do so:

1. Select Edit->Preferences.

2. Click Navigator->Helper Applications in the Category frame of the window that appears.

3. Click the New Type... button.

This displays the New Type window:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 74

4. Start declaring the MIMEtypes (begin with CATPart) by entering the following information:

● CATPart in the Description field,

● "application/catia" in the MIMEType field

● CATPart in the Suffixes field.

5. Click the Application button in the Handled By frame.

6. Enter the application path in the field. For a default installation, the application path is:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/catstart -object %s

7. Click OK when done.

8. Repeat the same steps for each type of data your sample documents may contain. Note, however, that in the MIMEType field,

you should increment the application number like this for each MIMEType created:

application/catia2

application/catia3

because specifying "application/catia" for each MIMEType will overwrite the previous application setting.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 75

Problems Encountered on Mozilla when Opening Documents Containing Links to Other

Documents

On both Windows and UNIX, you may encounter problems opening certain sample documents (for instance .CATProduct documents
containing .CATPart documents, .model documents, .CATDrawing documents, and so on). When you open a .CATProduct, for example,
the CATProduct document is successfully opened but a warning dialog box informs you that the documents it points to cannot be located.

This is because Mozilla copies the documents to a temporary directory before opening them.

When this occurs, you can open the sample manually and recover all the links using one of following two recommended solutions:

● use the File->Open... command in Version 5

● or, when reading the online documentation containing the link to the sample in the Mozilla window:
❍ on UNIX, right-click and select the "Copy Link Location" command, then paste the command in Version 5 in the File ->Open...
command dialog box, then remove the characters "File:" (if you don't, you will not be able to open the sample)
❍ on Windows, right-click and select the "Copy Link Location" or "Copy shortcut" command, then paste the command in Version 5
in the File ->Open... command dialog box without modifying it.

If you check the option "Save to Disk" instead of "Application", the sample document will be saved on your workstation and will not open
directly in a Version 5 session.

Accessing Sample Documents via a HTTP Server

Internet Explorer

When accessing sample documents via a HTTP server, Internet Explorer replaces a file extension containing more than 8 characters by
the default extension ".txt". Consequently, it is not possible to open by double-clicking with the mouse any documents whose extension
exceeds 8 characters such as: CATProduct, CATAnalysis, ...

To open them, you must use the File->Open menu.

Furthermore, if you try to use the " Save this file to disk" option, the file will be saved with no extension, rendering the file useless.
Consequently, if you want to save the document, you have to type the full name of the document with the appropriate Version 5
extension.

For example, if "xxxxx" is proposed by the File->Save dialog, then you must complete it like this: "xxxxx.CATProduct" before saving.

Mozilla

On Mozilla, all document samples are considered as text documents, so you have to use the File->Open menu.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 76

Editing in Context Within the Product Structure

What Is the Product Structure?
Accessing the Navigation Tools
Creating a New Workbench Document in the Product Structure
Activating a Different Workbench in the Product Structure
Creating a New Document for a Different Workbench
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 77

What Is the Product Structure?

Every industrial product can be organized in as a logical structure comprising a large number of
assemblies, sub-assemblies and parts: for example, a car (the product) has a bodywork sub-assembly
(roof, doors,...), a wheel sub-assembly (comprising four wheels), and a large number of other parts.

The Version 5 infrastructure provides you with a set of product structure management and navigation
tools designed to help you structure and organize your products logically, and navigate within your
product structure: the Product Structure workbench.

If the configuration you are using provides access to the Product Structure workbench, when you open a
Version 5 session, you are automatically placed in a product structure context, and an empty product
structure document (a .CATProduct document) like this is opened by default:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 78

The added value of this approach is not simply the possibility to structure and organize your products
logically. You can also work exclusively on one type of the document, the Product Structure document.

Inside this document, you can navigate from one sub-assembly or part to another, and edit them using
the workbench used to create them, directly inside the product structure. This is referred to as "editing in
context".
Saving the product structure document also saves all the data inside the product structure. However, data
created using the Part Design, Analysis and Generative Drafting workbenches is created and saved in
separate documents outside the product structure.

What Is the Product Structure Workbench?

The Product Structure workbench is activated by default, and the product structure icon is
displayed as the current workbench.

An Assembly toolbar is also displayed (beneath Products selection ):

The Product Structure workbench also provides commands on the Edit and Insert menus. These
commands are also available when you activate the Version 5 - Assembly Design workbench. They allow
you to organize, structure and manipulate your product by:
● inserting new and existing components
● inserting new parts
● moving parts and components
● establishing context-specific representations, or hierarchical designs of assemblies in specific contexts
(engineering, manufacturing, etc.)

For more information about these commands, refer to the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 79

Accessing the Navigation Tools

Understanding the Navigation Assistant

The product structure contains a specification tree. The easiest way to navigate in the tree is by simply clicking on a branch.
Double-click an object in the tree to activate the object-specific workbench.

The navigation assistant manages transitions between different workbenches. Three situations are possible when navigating
from one workbench to another. Depending on:

● which workbench you come from

● to which workbench you want to go
● and what you selected before navigating

the navigation assistant will:

● create a new workbench document in the current product structure

● activate a different workbench in the product structure
● or create a new document for a different workbench.

The navigation assistant will always privilege the creation of a new document in the current product structure. Note that
activating the Analysis or Generative Drafting workbenches creates new documents in a new window, not in the Product
Structure.

1. You can navigate from one

workbench to another using the

"Welcome to CATIA V5" dialog

box, which appears when you

start a session or when you click

the icon representing the

current workbench.

This contains the icons for

the workbenches belonging
to the configurations and/or
products you installed.

In our example, the

workbenches illustrated are
the result from installing the
Mechanical Design
configuration.

If you do not want to display this dialog box at the start of each session, clear the appropriate check box Do not
show this dialog at startup.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 80

2. You can also access the

workbench icons by right-

clicking the current workbench

icon:

3. Select the Start menu to access

the same icons:

● the workbench names

and the associated icons
are displayed at the top
of the menu
● the second area in the
menu contains the list of
the solutions containing
the
configurations/products
you installed. These
entries in turn provide yet
another means of
accessing the same
product workbenches
● a check list lets you
switch between document
windows
● the User Galaxy lets you
access the Dassault
Systemes Galaxy online
information package
accessible via html
browser (refer to
Accessing the Dassault
Systèmes User Galaxy for
more information).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 81
Note that, on SGI workstations, the icons do not appear next to the names on the Start menu.

When the user exits the Start menu, the display area is redrawn, but on the SGI platform, a special technique has
been implemented to improve display redraw performance. The use of this technique prevents icons from appearing
on the menu.

If you want the icons to be visible, export the following variable before starting a session:

SGI_NO_OVL=YES

Keep in mind, however, that if you are displaying a large model, this will degrade display performance when exiting
the menu.

4. To customize the list of

workbench icons available, right-

click any icon in any toolbar to

display the Customize dialog

box, or select Tools >

Customize.

The Favorites list contains

the workbenches available on
the Start menu, the
Welcome dialog box and by
right-clicking the current
workbench icon.

To remove icons from these

locations, drag the icon name
from the Favorites list and
drop it on the Available list,
or select the icon and click

the arrow.

To add icons, do the reverse:

drag them from the
Available list and drop them
onto the Favorites list, or
select the icon and click the

arrow.

Then click Close to confirm.

Note that the Available list remains the same because it contains all available workbenches. The list varies according
to the configurations and/or products installed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 82

Creating a New Workbench Document in the

Product Structure
This task explains how to create a new document inside the current product structure document, and
activate the workbench for the new document.

1. Double-click the Product document in the specification tree to activate

the product structure workbench and select it.

Selecting it indicates your intention to create a new document inside

the product structure.

2. Select the workbench using the Start menu, the Welcome dialog box or from the list accessed

by right-clicking the current workbench icon.

For example, if you select Part Design, a Part Design component is

added to the product structure, and the Part Design workbench is
activated.

Note that the symbol next to "Part1" is a product structure symbol.

3. Expand the tree (by clicking the "+" symbol) to see the Part document

itself:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 83

Activating a Different Workbench in the Product

Structure

This task explains the how to activate a different workbench inside the same product structure document.

1. Identify the current workbench.

For example, in this product structure document, the Product Structure workbench is active:

and the product structure document is active:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 84
To activate the Part Design workbench, for
example, insert a new part by selecting
Insert > New Part then double-click the
Part document, or select the Part document
and access the Part Design workbench.

You can use the Start menu, the Welcome

dialog box or the list accessed by right-
clicking the current workbench icon.

The Part Design workbench is activated in the same product structure window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 85

Creating a New Document for a Different

Workbench
This task explains how to create a new document and activate the corresponding workbench.

1. Click the Product document in the specification tree to activate the product structure workbench.

Note that the document color is blue in the tree.

2. Select the workbench using the Start menu, the Welcome dialog box or from the list accessed by right-

clicking the current workbench icon. For example, if you select the Part Design workbench, a new Part

Design document is created in a separate window, and the Part Design workbench is activated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 86

Creating, Opening, and Saving Documents

About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX
About Filenames
Creating New Documents
Creating a New Document from an Existing One
Opening Existing Documents
Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window
Opening Most Recently Used Documents
Closing Documents
Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name
Saving Existing Documents
Saving Documents In Other Formats
Saving All Documents
Managing Document Save
Displaying Document Properties
Using the Version 5 Compatibility Batch
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 87
About Data Sharing Between Windows and UNIX
A communication protocol such as ftp, http or NFS is required for sharing data between Windows and UNIX.

The ftp and NFS protocols can be used for sharing data between these environments. Several implementations of NFS exist, provided by different
vendors.

The following products have been tested using different scenarios:

● HummingBird NFS Maestro Version 6.1

● Intergraph DiskAccess Microsoft 2.0.

Limitations

Whatever technical solution you choose for sharing your data, make sure you are aware of the system limitations on file names described in About
Filenames.

Data Sharing Scenarios

To illustrate the data sharing possibilities from UNIX to Windows , different kinds of scenario have been performed:

1. Transferring data by ftp.exe on a command window.

2. Transferring data using the Hummingbird ftp graphic Interface.
3. Transferring data by TAR, ftp and WinZip command successively.
4. Reading data using NFS Hummingbird.
5. Reading data using DiskAccess Microsoft.

Note: all these scenarios are based on exchanges from UNIX to Windows for filenames containing National or Special characters and Windows forbidden
characters.

Transferring Data from UNIX to WINDOWS by ftp Protocol

Scenario 1: By ftp.exe on a Cmd.exe Window

ftp.exe transfer Mput *.model Put 'real filename'.model Get 'real filename'.model Mget *.model
AB+CD.model on UNIX** KO KO KO KO
AB CD.model on UNIX KO KO KO KO
AB+CD.model on Windows OK KO KO OK
AB CD.model on Windows OK OK OK OK

** (+ ) in the filename corresponds to the Plus/Minus character (0xb1)

Scenario Description
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 88
The first two V4 models were transferred from a UNIX login (Windows server is inetinfo). The last V4 models were transferred from a Windows login
by ftp.exe client.

Conclusion:

Transferring V4 data must be done only from Windows . Data exportation from UNIX must be excluded if some special characters ( like 0xb1) have been
frequently used on the V4 site.

Scenario 2: By Hummingbird ftp on Windows (Graphic Interface)

ftp.exe transfer Mput *.model Put AB+CD.model Get AB+CD.model Mget *.model
AB+CD.model on Windows OK OK OK OK
ftp.exe transfer Mput *.model Put AB CD.model Get AB CD.model Mget *.model
AB CD.model on Windows OK Not done Not done OK

Scenario Description

The V4 models have been transferred from Windows login using the ftp graphic command provided by Hummingbird. Conclusion: the graphic interface
can be useful for a small numbers of transfers.

Note: Concerning national character transfer, the ftp configuration must be in mode "NO filename verification" (which is the default).

Scenario 3: Transferring by TAR UNIX IBM 932 / FTP / WINZIP Windows ISO1

Model name IBM932 Model name ISO1 Windows V5 reads model

AB'Japanese'CD.model OK (Garbaged characters) OK
AB+CD.model OK OK

**The characters obtained after transferring Japanese filenames are garbaged because the resulting code page on Windows is ISO1.

Scenario Description

The V4 models were created on UNIX IBM932. The first one contains Japanese katakana SBCS characters and the second one the Plus/Minus character.

The TAR command is run on UNIX.

The FTP.exe command is run on Windows for transferring data.

The WinZip utility is run on Windows to extract the above mentioned data.

Scenario 4: Transferring by TAR UNIX IBM 932 / FTP / WINZIP Windows IBM932
Model name IBM932 Model name IBM932 V5 reads model
AB'Japanese'CD.model OK OK
AB+CD.model OK OK
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 89
Scenario Description

The V4 models have been created on UNIX IBM932 . The first one contains Japanese katakana SBCS characters and the second one
the Plus/Minus character.

The TAR command is run on UNIX.

The FTP.exe command is run on Japanese Windows for transferring data.

The WinZip utility is run on Japanese Windows to extract the above mentioned data.

Conclusion: mixed environments can lead to unpredictable behavior on the filename. Our recommendation is to use the same code page (ISO 646
subset). Consequently, V4 models have to be read in the same code page where WinZip utility has been performed.

Reading UNIX data from Windows

Scenario 5: Using HUMMINGBIRD NFS

Model name under UNIX Model name read in V5 Windows
AB+CD.model KO : Strange unicode character
AB>CD.model KO : Invalid name in File/Open box
AB<CD.model KO : Invalid name in File/Open box
AB*CD.model KO : Does nothing
AB?CD.model KO : Does nothing
AB"CD.model KO : Invalid name in File/Open box
AB:CD.model KO : 'AB' result

Scenario Description

A few V4 models containing Windows forbidden characters are read directly using NFS MAESTRO HUMMINGBIRD.

Conclusion

If the model name contains:

● national characters ( and especially +- 0xb1)

● metacharacters * and ?
● special characters

the CATIA V5 File/Open box rejects them.

Using NFS Hummingbird 6.1 can be recommended only if the NT_COMPATIBILITY value has been employed in the V4 CATIA
declaration file to prevent future data corruption.

Scenario 6: Using DISK ACCESS Microsoft

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 90
Model name under UNIX Model name read in CATIA V4 Windows
AB+CD.model OK
AB>CD.model KO : Invalid name in File/Open box
AB<CD.model KO : Invalid name in File/Open box
AB*CD.model KO : Does nothing
AB?CD.model KO : Does nothing
AB"CD.model KO : Invalid name in File/Open box
AB:CD.model KO : AB resulting

Scenario Description

A few V4 models containing Windows forbidden characters are read directly by DiskAccess.

Conclusion:

Although DiskAccess refused also the forbidden Windows characters, it is possible to read National ones ( for instance, Plus/Minus character ).

The same scenario has been performed between a Japanese UNIX and a Japanese Windows machine: equivalent results were obtained .The Plus/Minus
character and Japanese directories containing V4 models can be read directly by DiskAccess.

General Recommendations

We recommend that, when using these products, you activate the lock mechanism and keep the same case in file names.

We also recommend that you evaluate the product within the context and environment of your company before deploying it, in order to check that it
meets your needs and is appropriate for your processes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 91

About Filenames
This section specifies what you need to know about file names. There are a certain number of file naming
constraints you need to be aware of.

Different Document Types

The types of documents involved are as follows:

● Version 5 documents (CATPart, CATProduct, etc.): these documents can be created and saved using
Version 5
● interface files (IGES, DXF, etc.) and text files (XML): these files can be opened and converted to
Version 5 document types
● Version 4 legacy documents (model, session, etc.): these documents can of course only be opened,
not created.

Which Characters Are Legal and Illegal When Saving

Version 5 Documents?
If you want to be sure that your documents can be opened and read in all cases, on both Windows and
UNIX, and when the filename uses all regional characters, use the ISO-646 subset of characters: only the
ISO-646 subset of characters is authorized (with the limitations described below).

What is the ISO-646 Subset?

ISO-646 provides the subset of characters common to all code pages, and is included in all industry
standard code pages such as ISO8859-x, EUC-xxx, etc.

The ISO-646 subset contains the principal symbols you characters you may need to use for naming
documents:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 92

This corresponds to an encoding of characters on 7 bits. The preceding illustration must be read the
following way:

column, line

For example, the "LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A" possess the hexadecimal code 41 . The character set
contains the following:

● characters A to Z (upper and lower case)

● numbers 0 to 9
● and certain special characters.

Control characters (the "0" and "1" columns in the illustration above) are not supported.

What About National Accented Characters?

Do not use national accented characters: they are simply not supported.

What About Special Characters?

The following special characters are not supported on Windows:

● > (greater than)

● < (less than)
● * (asterisk)
● : (colon)
● " (quotation mark)
● ? (question mark)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 93

● \ (backslash)
● | (vertical bar)

and the following special character is not supported on both Windows and UNIX:

● / (slash).

This means that you cannot use national accented characters or any of the forbidden special characters
listed above when creating and saving documents. In any case, on UNIX, to enhance document
interoperability between the UNIX and Windows platforms, a filter is activated to prevent you from
creating CAT documents whose names contain special characters not supported on Windows.

Consequently, avoid the temptation to rename your documents with operating system tools (for example,
using the Windows Explorer) and because you run the risk of adding national accented characters or
forbidden special characters: you will not be able to read them.

Working with Interface-Type Documents

There are slightly more intricate problems you should be aware of when importing Multi-CAD data into
Version 5 (for example, IGES files). When you do so, a conversion is performed. Depending on the way
you want to use the data, you can choose to create different types of output files (cgr, CATPart, etc.).

For example, when you open an IGES file it converts the data into a CATPart. However, when you save
the file, a specific item of information in the CATPart, the Part Number, is saved. The part number uses
the name of the original IGES file. If this name contains illegal characters, you will not be able to save the
document.

You can always re-save the document as an IGES document.

Working with Version 4 Documents

The following table specifies, for each Version 4 data type listed, any problems in reading the data due to
forbidden characters in the data name:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 94

UNIX Data from

On UNIX On Windows
Version 4
model (or PRJMODEL) You can read Version 4 model Impossible to read.
documents containing either
national accented characters or
Example: MY***.model You can read Version 4 model
any of the forbidden special
documents containing national
characters.
accented characters, but you cannot
read Version 4 documents containing
forbidden special characters.

You must rename the model before

reading it, so it does not contain
special characters.

*MASTER You can read them. Impossible to read.

*LISTFAM

PRJ tables using ":"

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 95

Creating New Documents

This task shows you how to create a new document when Version 5 is already running.

Using the File > New Command

1. Click New in the Standard toolbar or select File > New (or press CTRL+N):

The new document types you can create are listed.

The list contains only the document types for the configurations/products you installed and for
which you have a license.

2. In the New dialog box, double-click the document type or select it then click OK. Choose the

document type from the following:

● Part

A document like this appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 96

Bear in mind that the geometry you create in Version 5 is contained in a "box" whose

dimensions are 2.e+6mm (the coordinates can vary from -1,000,000 mm to +1,000,000
mm). Therefore, creating elements exceeding these dimensions may lead to unpredictable
results.

For more information about the Part Design workbench, see the Version 5 - Part Design User's

Guide.

● Drawing

After selection of the standard to be used, a dialog box like this appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 97

For more information about the Generative Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches, see

the Version 5 - Generative Drafting User's Guide and Interactive Drafting User's Guide.

● Product

A document like this appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 98

For more information about the Assembly workbench, see the Version 5 - Assembly Design
User's Guide.

● Analysis

A document like this appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 99

For more information about the Generative Structural Analysis workbench, see the Version 5 -

Generative Structural Analysis User's Guide.

● CatalogDocument

A document like this appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 100

● Process
● ProcessLibrary
● ZipMill

For more details about the above three document types, refer to the Version 5 - Prismatic
Machining User's Guide and the Version 5 - Surface Machinist User's Guide.

Using the New Contextual Command on the Desktop

This task shows you how to create a new document whether or not Version 5 is already running.

1. Either on the Desktop area of Windows or in the appropriate directory of the Windows Explorer

(making sure you do not select any items when doing so), right-click once then select New:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 101

2. Select the document type you wish to open:

An empty icon indicating the document type is created (see Starting a Session Using Document
Icons).

3. Click in the name field that appears with the icon just created and replace the default name with a

name of your own choosing (for example, replace NewPart.CATPart with MyFile.CATPart).

4. Double-click the icon that is created.

The new document is created. If you do not have a session running, a session is opened.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 102

Creating a New Document from an Existing One

This task shows you how to create a new document based on a copy of an existing one via the File > New from
command.
This command lets you generate a new document with a new name and a new UUID (Unique Universal IDentifier)
but keep in mind that it does not modify attribute values (such as the Part Number, for instance).

1. You may want to create a new document whose basic characteristics are the same as an existing document.

To do this, close the document you want to copy if not already closed and select File > New from.

The File Selection dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 103

2. Select the existing document from which you want to create a new one then click the Open button.

An exact copy of the existing document is displayed with a default name using the following method:

● in mono-document mode, a file named "MyPart.CATPart" is renamed to "MyPart_1.CATPart"

● in multi-document mode, files named "MyPart.CATPart", "NewPart.CATPart" and "Test.CATDrawing"
are renamed to "MyPart_1.CATPart", "NewPart_1.CATPart" and "Test_1.CATDrawing" respectively.
Note that in multi-document mode, the new document will be based on a copy of the multiselection as
a whole and not of each document individually.

If the documents you select point to other documents for which the action can be performed, the New
From dialog box is displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 104

The upper frame of the dialog box displays a list of documents to which at least one of the selected
documents points to (directly or not). The name, type and location of the files are indicated as well as the
status (where you see "Found" right now).
These documents will not be taken into account by the New From action, i.e. they will just be loaded in
your current session and thus, will not be visualized in the new document window. They are identified by

the icon in the specification tree.

Note that documents that are not found (because of a broken link, for instance) are not displayed at all in
the upper frame.

The lower frame of the dialog box displays a list of documents for which the New From action will be
performed along with file information (name, type, etc.).

3. Use the buttons to transfer documents from one frame to another:

moves the whole list to the lower frame

moves the selected file to the lower frame

moves the whole list (except the CATProduct document) to the upper frame

moves the selected file to the upper frame.

When a document is selected in the lower frame, the Rename document button is activated. Clicking

this button opens the following dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 105

Enter the new name of the selected document then click OK to validate. The new file name is displayed in

the New Name column.

4. Click OK to open the new document.

5. Save the new document giving it a name other than the default.

You can give the new document the same name as that of the already existing one if you wish but if you
do this you must put the new document in another directory.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 106

Opening Existing Documents

This task shows you how to open an existing document when Version 5 is already running.

Several methods are available to open an existing document:

● File > Open... command

● Insert > Existing Component... command

● Start > Documents command on Windows

● Windows Explorer or My Computer (Windows) or File Manager (UNIX)

● drag and drop a document icon

● Open in New Window contextual command

● Open the Pointed Document contextual command

What you should know before you start

● Dassault Systèmes guarantees upward compatibility for Version 5 data

● As far as downward compatibility is concerned, Version 5 data can be reused from one service pack to another,
provided that they belong to the same release. If the Version 5 data do not belong to the same release, they
can still be reused in case of CATPart documents but this implies the use of a specific process detailed in Using
the Version 5 Compatibility Batch

● You will not be allowed to open a document created using Version 5 if its name contains national characters or
forbidden special characters. For a reminder, refer to About Filenames

● When a .CATPart document containing a Sheet Metal Design feature is opened on a configuration level (i.e. P1,
P2 or P3) lower than the level on which the feature was created, all the icons of all the workbenches available in
your configuration are grayed out. Note that this may also occur when working with Generative Shape Design or
Part Design features.

Accessing V4 data

If you wish to access V4 data such as V4 models, PROJECT files and library objects on Windows or UNIX or access
CDMA objects on UNIX you can do so provided you purchase the V4 Integration product.

V4 models, PROJECT files or library objects residing on UNIX can be accessed from Windows using the http protocol.
(Make sure beforehand that an http server has been installed on the computer where the V4 data resides.

The address to be specified can be something like this:

http://UNIXserver: port/V4datalocation

Using File > Open

1. Click Open in the Standard toolbar or select File > Open (or press CTRL+O).

The File Selection dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 107

Note: depending on the document environments you allowed in the Document settings, an additional
window might appear simultaneously to let you access your documents using an alternate method. For
detailed information, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window.

2. In the File Selection dialog box, select the file location.

3. Click the Files of type: list.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 108

Note that you can select the Show Preview check box to display a preview of the selected file (only on
Microsoft Windows workstations).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 109

4. Select the document type.

The list of document types you can open depends on the configurations/products installed and for which
you have a license.

Note: On UNIX workstations, the File Selection dialog box lets you sort your files by date or size.
This dialog box also lets you rename or delete the selected file or folder by right-clicking it then selecting
Rename or Delete.
After clicking Delete, a confirmation dialog box appears: click OK to delete the selected item.
When renaming a file or folder, if the new name you entered is already used, the item is not renamed
and a warning message is displayed.

The following list contains all possible document types (in alphabetical order):

● All Bitmap Files

Lets you browse raster formats (more than 70 formats are supported) from within a session, without
having to use another application
● All CATIA V4 Files
Lets you open V4 documents such as .model, .session or .library files
● All CATIA V5 Files
Lets you open V5 documents such as .catalog or .CATAnalysis files, for example
● All CATIA CAA Files
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 110
Lets you browse CAA files such as .CAABsk or .CAADoc files
● All Standard Files
Lets you browse files such as .igs, .wrl, .step or .stp files
● All Vector Files
Lets you browse files such as .cgm, .gl, .gl2 or .hpgl files
● 3dmap
Lets you browse 3dmap (i.e. spacemap representation) files. Note that you cannot open these files on
AIX platforms
● 3dxml
Lets you open files in 3D XML format.
When you open a 3D XML document, a V5 product structure is built in memory. If the 3D XML
document you open contains EXACT geometry, then the geometry is automatically converted in
TESSELLATED geometry.
Once a 3D XML document has been opened, it can be saved into a .CATProduct or .3dxml file. Refer
to Saving Documents In Other Formats for more information.
Some settings dedicated to 3D XML are also provided in the 3D XML tab to let you define options such
as the export accuracy or the visualization format
● act
Lets you browse process libraries which contain a number of different classes
or types of activities interactively defined by the user. For more information, see
"Managing a Process Document with Process Libraries" in the DELMIA - DPM
Process Planner User's Guide
● asm
V4 Assembly Modeling document saved as an Assembly Design document i.e. CATProduct. For
more information, see the Version 5 - Assembly Design User's Guide
● bdf
Allegro specific format. For more information, see the Version 5 - Circuit Board Design User's Guide
● brd
Mentor Graphics specific format
● catalog
Catalog documents. For more information, see the Version 5 -
Component Catalog Editor User's Guide
● CATAnalysis
Analysis document. For more information, see the Version 5 - Generative Structural Analysis User's
Guide
● CATDrawing
Generative Drafting or Interactive Drafting document. For more information about the Generative
Drafting and Interactive Drafting workbenches, see the Version 5 - Generative Drafting User's Guide
and Version 5 - Interactive Drafting User's Guide
● CATfct
Feature Dictionary and Business Knowledge Template files. Refer to Starting the Feature Dictionary
Editor and to the Version 5 - Business Process Knowledge Template User's Guide

● CATMaterial
Material library. For more information, see the Version 5 - Real Time Rendering User's Guide
● CATPart
Part Design document. For more information about the Part Design workbench, see the Version 5 -
Part Design User's Guide
● CATProcess
Process document. For more information, see the Version 5 - Prismatic Machining User's Guide
● CATProduct
Assembly Design document. For more information about the Assembly workbench, see the Version 5 -
Assembly Design User's Guide
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 111
● CATShape
Physical shape of the part. CATShape files can be exported to STEP or 3D IGES. For more information,
refer to "Managing Shapes" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide
● CATSystem
Functional system management file. For more information, refer to the Version 5 - Product
Function Definition and Version 5 - Product Function Optimization User's Guides
● cdd
CATIA-CADAM file
● cgm
ANSI/ISO standardized platform-independent format used for the interchange of vector and bitmap
data
● dxf/dwg
Autocad DXF and DWG formats. Creates a CATDrawing document. For more information, see
"Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" in the Version 5 - Generative Drafting User's Guide
● idf
Document generated by an IDF application. For more information, see the Version 5 - Circuit Board
Design User's Guide
● ig2
2D IGES file, saved as a CATDrawing document. For more information, see "Importing a 2D IGES File
into a CATDrawing" in the Version 5 - Data Exchange Interface User's Guide
● igs
IGES file saved as a Part Design document, i.e. a CATPart document. For more information, see the
"2D IGES Interface" and the "3D IGES Interface" sections in the Version 5 - Data Exchange Interface
User's Guide
● jpg
Lets you browse JPEG files from within a session, without having to use another application
● library
V4 library document storing objects such as details, symbols, NC mill and lathe tools and beam
sections. For more information, see the Version 5 - V4 Integration User's Guide
● model
V4 model document. For more information about the V4 Integration workbench, see the Version 5 -
V4 Integration User's Guide
● pdb
PDB files
● picture
Lets you browse CATIA Version 4 picture files from within a Version 5 session
● ps
Lets you browse PS (PostScript) and EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) documents. Before opening a .eps
document, you need to rename it with the extension ".ps".
Note that to be able to modify a .ps document, you need to import it in the Drafting workbench using
the Tools->Import External Format command: this converts the document to a Drafting object
which can then be edited and saved as a .CATDrawing document
● rgb
SGI format for pixel images
● session
V4 session document containing several CATIA V4 models converted to a CATProduct document. For
more information about the V4 Integration workbench, see the Version 5 - V4 Integration User's
Guide
● stbom
Imports a SmartBOM (Bill Of Material) Briefcase in Version 5. For more information, refer to "Export
SmartBOM from Version 5" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide
● step, STEP, stp and STP
Creates a CATProduct document. For more information, see "Importing a STEP AP203 Document" in
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 112
the Version 5 - Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide
● stl
Lets you browse stereolithography documents. For more information, see the Version 5 - STL Rapid
Prototyping User's Guide and to "Exporting CATPart Data to an STL File" in the Version 5 - Data
Exchange Interfaces User's Guide
● svg
Lets you open documents in SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) format. By default, .svg documents open
in the DMU 2D Viewer workbench but you can import them as an image in a Drafting sheet via the
Insert > Picture command, or as a Drafting entity via the Tools > Import External Format
command. For more information on these commands, refer to the Version 5 - Generative Drafting
User's Guide
● tdg and TDG
STRIM/STYLER files
● tif
Lets you browse TIFF files from within a Version 5 session, without having to use another application
● wrl
Lets you browse VRML (Virtual Reality Modeling Language) files. Note that you cannot open these files
on AIX platforms.

5. If you are sure you do not intend to modify the document in any way, you may want to open the document

in read-only mode. If so, select the Open as read-only check box.

The Open as read-only option is intended for preventing users from overwriting a document
accidentally: when this option is activated for a document, you can read this document in your Version 5
session but you cannot save it unless you change the document path (by selecting another folder or
accessing another document environment) or the document name (by entering another name in the File
name box).
However, keep in mind that this option does not supersede access right management functionalities
provided by your operating system.

When opening a document pointing to other documents with the Open as read-only check box selected,
the read-only mode only applies to the selected root document. The pointed documents are loaded in
read-write mode and might be loaded independently from the root document.

6. Click Open.

In case an error occurs when opening a file (e.g. unknown document name, non-supported file format,

corrupted file, etc.), an Incident Report window opens. It displays the error history and indicates for

each error its type, object and description. This history is maintained throughout the whole session, the

errors being classified by degree of severity.

Using the Insert > Existing Component... Command

This command is only available in DMU Navigator. Refer to "Setting Up Your Session" and "Inserting Components"
in the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 113

Using the Start > Documents Command on Windows

This task shows you how to access an existing document without running a Version 5 session.

1. Before you open a session, click Start and select Documents.

2. Select the document you wish to open.

A Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed.

Using the Windows Explorer or My Computer (on Windows) or the File Manager
(UNIX)
This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when no Version 5 session is already
running.

1. Before you open a session, click My Computer or run the Windows Explorer and find the location of the

document you wish to open.

2. Double-click the document icon.

A Version 5 session is opened and your document is displayed.

On UNIX, you can use the File Manager.

Dragging and Dropping a Document Icon

This task shows you how to open an existing document via a document icon when a Version 5 session is already
running.

1. If a Version 5 session is already open, drag and drop the icon in your Version 5 application window.

Your document is opened for editing.

Note that this method is not available on IRIX.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 114

Using the Open in New Window Contextual Command

This task shows you how to open an existing document in a new window.

1. If a document is already open in a Version 5 session, select the item you wish to open from the specification

tree.

2. Right-click then select xxx object > Open in New Window.

The document associated to the selected item is opened in a new window.

More about the Open in New Window command

● In CATIA V5, each window is associated to a document. As far as volatile documents are concerned, they cannot
be opened using Open in New Window (an error message is issued). For instance, you cannot open in a new
CATIA V5 window a Product Root Class created in ENOVIA V5 because a "PRC" is an ENOVIA V5 concept which
has no equivalent in CATIA V5
● If you modify a document open in a new window then decide not to save the modification when closing the new
window, this does not imply that the modification will not appear in the parent window: it only means that the
document will not be saved at the end of the session.
The reason is that the modification you made has been loaded in memory. Therefore, after closing the new
window, the only way to restore the document in the parent window is to use the Undo command.

Using the Open the Pointed Document Contextual Command

This task shows you how to open a pointed document in a new window.

1. If a document is already open in a Version 5 session, select the item pointing to a

referenced document from the specification tree.

Note: this command is available for geometrical external references and external parameters only.
For instance, you can use this command when selecting a geometry pasted "As Result With Link" in a
CATPart document different from the one in which it has been copied (the geometry is identified by the

following symbol: ).

2. Right-click then select xxx object > Open the Pointed Document.

The document pointed to by the selected item is opened in a new window.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 115

Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window

This task shows you how to use the Browse window which provides alternate methods to access your documents.

This window will appear in addition to the File Selection dialog box when using the commands listed below, provided you have
allowed the necessary document environments in your Document settings:
● File->Open...
● Edit->Links...
● Replace Component
● Instantiate From Document
● Catalog Browser.

The list of document access methods available from the Browse window will vary according to the document environments you
defined.

Open the document Links.CATProduct.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command then the General category and finally, the Document tab:

The Document Environments area lets you define the method(s) you will use to access your documents by allowing
the desired environment(s) selected from the list.
These document environments are:

● Folder: default document environment (indicated by the status "Current") in which the dialog accesses the
folders containing the documents
● DLName: document environment which lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical
names referred to as "DLNames".
● SmarTeam: lets you access SmarTeam projects stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Integration
● SmarTeam Query: lets you access SmarTeam projects stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Integration using queries
● SmarTeam CIX: lets you access documents stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Xtended Integration
● ENOVIA: lets you access documents stored in ENOVIA V5
● Catalog: lets you access documents stored in catalogs
● Loaded document: lets you access documents loaded in the current session.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 116

2. To allow a document environment, select it from the list then click the Allowed button. Repeat this step as many

times as necessary to allow the desired document environments.

For detailed information on document environments, refer to the Document tab (section entitled "Document
Environment" in the Version 5 - Infrastructure User's Guide).

3. Click OK to validate and close the panel.

4. Select the Edit->Links... command.

5. Select the item to be replaced then click the Replace button.

The File Selection dialog box and the Browse window (displayed in the background) open simultaneously as shown

below:

6. Click Cancel to close the File Selection panel and activate the Browse window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 117

Note that the icons displayed in the Browse window will vary with the document environments you have allowed in
step 2. The above picture is just an example.

In addition to that, some methods are discarded by default when using specific commands because they are not
relevant (for instance, "Catalog" is not available from the Catalog Browser command).
Let's have a look at the following matrix in which red symbols identify the discarded methods in relation to the
corresponding commands:

Commands File->Open Edit- Replace Instantiate Catalog

>Links Component From Browser
Document
Environments

Folder

DLNames

SmarTeam

SmarTeam
Query

SmarTeam CIX

ENOVIA V5

Catalog X X
Loaded
document
X X

Bear also in mind that other methods may be discarded by your Version 5 administrator and thus, may impact the
look of the Browse window.

7. Select the desired method by clicking the corresponding button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 118

● Logical File System

Lets you access the folders containing documents using DLNames. This method implies that DLNames have
been previously defined in the Document settings, otherwise a warning message appears.
After clicking the Logical File System button, the following dialog box opens:

Refer to the Document tab (section entitled "DLName Integration") to learn how to define DLNames and
use the File Selection dialog box in the Version 5 - Infrastructure User's Guide.

● File
Opens the usual File Selection dialog box which lets you browse your folders containing the documents:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 119

Refer to "Opening Existing Documents" in the Version 5 - Infrastructure User's Guide for detailed
information on this dialog box.

● Catalog
Opens a catalog browser which lets you browse then instantiate components stored in catalogs:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 120

Note that after clicking the icon to access the document to be browsed, you must select the type
"*.catalog" from the "Files of type" list before selecting the element you want to instantiate.

For detailed information on the Catalog Browser, refer to "Browsing a Catalog Using the Catalog Browser"
in the Version 5 - Component Catalog Editor User's Guide.

● Loaded document
Opens the Session document dialog box which enables you to preview and select documents opened in your
current Version 5 session:

Note the following:

● in the context of the Edit->Links... command, the selected element will open and replace the
element highlighted in the first place and the new element name will be displayed in the Links dialog
box.
Refer to "Editing Document Links" in the Version 5 - Infrastructure User's Guide for detailed
information on links between documents
● in the context of the catalog browser, the object to be accessed must be of type "*.catalog".
The selected catalog will then open in the browser.

● ENOVIA V5
Lets you perform a query for document-type objects in the ENOVIA V5 database.

This document environment is only available with a VPM Navigator license.

● SmarTeam
Lets you access documents stored in SmarTeam.

This document environment is only available with a SmarTeam license.

● SmarTeam Query
Lets you access SmarTeam projects stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Integration using queries.

This document environment is only available with a SmarTeam license.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 121
● SmarTeam CIX
Lets you access documents stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Xtended Integration.

This document environment is only available with a SmarTeam license.

8. Once you have accessed the desired document, click OK or Open (depending on the method) to validate.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 122

Opening Most Recently Used Documents

This task shows you how to open a recently used file.

1. Select File and click, at the bottom of the menu, the name of the file you wish to open:

The selected file opens.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 123

Closing Documents

This task shows you how to close a document.

1. Select File > Close.

2. If changes have been made since the last save, the Close dialog box appears.

Specify whether the file is to be saved or not.

Closing a document does not always unload its associated documents (whether they
are modified or not). In fact, if some documents are pointed to by documents edited in
other windows, they stay in memory and keep their modified status.
In this case, when reopening the closed document, a warning message is displayed to
indicate that the document has already been loaded and modified in the current session
and that the already loaded document will be edited.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 124

Saving Documents For the First Time or Under

Another Name
This task shows you how to save a document for the first time or under another name.

Before you begin, note that files in STL format cannot be saved using File > Save As when working in Wireframe
mode. The reason is that STL files are generated from the visualization tessellation and tessellation triangles are not
available when switching to Wireframe mode.

1. Select File > Save As to open the following dialog box:

2. In the Save As dialog box, specify the location of the document to be saved as well as its name and type.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 125

The Save as new document check box lets you save an existing document under a new name but with
a new UUID (Unique Universal IDentifier).
This option is effective only when the document is saved in its native format, i.e. when the document
type (displayed in the Save as type box) has not been modified. Otherwise, this option is ineffective.

Note that when using File > Save As on a new document, the Save as new document check box is not
displayed in the Save As dialog box because it is irrelevant in this context.

3. Click the Save button.

If the name you give the file already exists, a message appears to ask you if you really want to overwrite
the already existing document.

You are not allowed to use national characters or forbidden special characters in the document name. For
a reminder, refer to About Filenames.

On Windows, documents cannot be stored in a folder for which delete authorization is not set.

If the document you are trying to save points to parts, a pop-up is displayed to warn you that these parts
will also be saved and you are prompted to click either Yes to confirm or Cancel if you do not want to
save these pointed parts. In that case, you need to select File > Save Management to choose which
documents you want to save:

This pop-up message is not displayed if you select File > Save All.

Note that the Save As dialog box lets you rename or delete the selected file/folder by right-clicking it
then selecting Rename or Delete.
After clicking Delete, a confirmation dialog box appears: click OK to delete the selected item.
When renaming a file or folder, if the new name you entered is already used, the item is not renamed
and a warning message is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 126

More about the Save As mechanism

When you save a file by giving it the name of another existing file, this does not mean that the new file is
identical to the original one. As a matter of fact, a file is identified by its name but also by its UUID
(Unique Universal IDentifier) which differs from one file to another (except when a file is a copy of
another one, for instance).
To illustrate this, let's suppose a CAProduct containing two CATParts, Part1.CATPart and Part2.CATPart:

1. Product1 and the two parts it points to are saved using File > Save As, then the Product1 is
closed
2. A new part is created using File > New
3. The new part is saved as "Part2" in the same folder then Part2 is closed
4. When re-opening Product1, you are informed that Part2 cannot be found.

The reason is that the new document saved as "Part2" has been given a new UUID when using File >
New and this new UUID is different from the one assigned to the original Part2. Therefore, the link
between Product1 and Part2 is considered as broken, even if there is a Part2.CATPart document, because
the original Part2 does not exist anymore.
If you want to reroute the link to the new Part2.CATPart, you need to select Edit > Links then click the
Replace button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 127

Saving Existing Documents

This task shows you how to save an existing document.

1. Click Save in the Standard toolbar or select File > Save (or press CTRL+S).

A message appears in the status bar to confirm that the document is saved.

If the document you are trying to save points to parts, a pop-up is displayed to warn you that
these parts will also be saved and you are prompted to click either Yes to confirm or Cancel if
you do not want to save these pointed parts. In that case, you need to select File > Save
Management to choose which documents you want to save:

(Note that this pop-up message is not displayed if you select File > Save All).

If you are trying to save a document that is currently modified and saved by another user, a
message appears to warn that your modifications will be lost if you proceed.

When a document is saved, it is stored in the UTF8 Unicode format. This ensures that the data
contained in it can be read on both Windows and UNIX whatever the session code page used.

You can choose to set an automatic save for your file using the General tab in Tools >
Options. For more information, see Customizing General Settings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 128

More about the Save command

● When saving an existing file in another directory without changing the file name (which
means that you have now two files), note that you can open only one of these files at a
time. If one of them is already open, you cannot open the other. The reason is that both
files have the same UUID (Unique Universal IDentifier).
To avoid this, each file must have its own UUID. This can be done by selecting File > New
from. For detailed information, refer to Creating New Documents from Existing Documents

● If you open a read-only document, make no changes then try to save it, no pop-up
message is displayed to inform you that the document is read-only.
On the contrary, if you modify a read-only document then try to save it, a pop-up message
is displayed to inform you that the document cannot be saved with the same name because
it is a read-only document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 129

Saving Documents In Other Formats

This task shows you how to save a document in another format.

1. Select File > Save As.

2. In the Save As dialog box, select the location of the document to be saved.

3. Click the Save as type: list.

4. Select the document type from the list displayed.

For example, you might wish to save:

● a Part Design or Assembly document as a STEP AP203 document (.stp):

see "Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 File" in your Version 5 - Data Exchange Interface
User's Guide
● a CATDrawing document as a:
❍ DXF document (.dxf): see "Exporting a CATDrawing into a DXF/DWG File" in your Version 5 - Data Exchange
Interface User's Guide
❍ CGM document (.cgm): see "Exporting a CGM File" in your Version 5 - Data Exchange Interface User's Guide
❍ SVG document

❍ JPEG or PDF document

❍ TIFF document (.tif).

The list of available formats may vary depending on the context you are working in. For detailed information on all
possible formats, refer to the list in Opening Existing Documents.

The Save As dialog box lets you rename or delete the selected file/folder by right-clicking then selecting Rename
or Delete but note that:
● after clicking Delete, a confirmation dialog box appears: click OK to delete the selected item
● when renaming a file/folder, if the new name you entered is already used, the item is not renamed and a
warning message is displayed.

5. Click the Save button to save the document in the chosen format.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 130

More about other formats

3D XML

The Save as type: list displays the 3dxml type for saving .CATProduct documents in 3D XML format. You cannot
save .CATPart, .CATProcess and .CATDrawing documents in 3D XML format.

The save in 3D XML format is available for:

● File-based products
● ENOVIAVPM products
● ENOVIA V5 products.

When saving a CATProduct as a 3D XML document, the following formats are available for the geometry:

● TESSELLATED geometry: you cannot specify the accuracy of the resulting 3D XML file.
If the assembly you want to save is in Design mode, then the accuracy that is used is the one specified in the
visualization settings via Tools > Options.
If the assembly is in Visualization mode, then the accuracy varies for each component as it is the one of each
associated cgr in the V5 cache. In any case, the component is re-tessellated.
● EXACT geometry: available only if the CATProduct references CATParts and instances in Design mode only.
Otherwise, an error message is displayed.

Note also the following information:

● When saving an assembly made of several inserted CATProducts, a single file (with the extension .3dxml) is
generated. This file contains both the product structure and the geometry
● The applicative data you can save in 3D XML format are detailed below:
❍ current viewpoint
❍ Show/Hide
❍ activation state
❍ graphic properties: when saving in EXACT mode, graphic properties of CATParts are saved globally are
correspond to those of the first body encountered in the CATPart introspection. For instance, if a CATPart
contains a solid with two faces, a green one and a blue one, then the geometry corresponding to the CATPart
will be either fully green or fully blue
❍ DMU Scenes: refer to the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide for more information on DMU Review.

Some settings dedicated to 3D XML are provided in the 3D XML tab to let you define options such as the export
accuracy or the visualization format.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 131

CATDrawing

You can save a .CATDrawing document in:

● HPGL2 format
● SVG (.svg) format using File > Save As. Before using this command, you need to access the Graphic Formats
tab to define the parameters to be applied when saving your document in .svg format.
● JPEG (*.jpg) or PDF (*.pdf) format using File > Save As.
By default, saving a CATDrawing document in PDF format generates as many .pdf files as there are sheets. Each
file name is suffixed with "_Sheet_sheetnumber.pdf", e.g. "MyDrawing_Sheet_1.pdf",
"MyDrawing_Sheet_2.pdf", etc.
If you want the Save As command to generate a single .pdf file containing all the sheets of your CATDrawing
document, select the Save as one PDF file check box in the Graphic Formats tab. There is no need to export
the SAVE_AS_ONE_PDF variable anymore.
● as explained above, CATDrawing documents can also be saved in TIFF format using File > Save As.
However, this functionality requires external settings to be defined either by setting or exporting environment
variables, or by editing an external configuration file.
The environment variables you need to set or export are detailed hereafter:

NAME DESCRIPTION VALUE

TIFF True color uncompressed

True color PackBits
TIFFTCPB
compressed
Indexed (256 colors)
TIFFINDEX
uncompressed
PRINT_CAPTURE_RASTERFORMAT Raster format Indexed (256 colors) PackBits
TIFFPB
compressed
TIFFGREY Greyscale PackBits compressed

Bilevel (black and white)

TIFFBWPB
PackBits compressed
TIFFG4 Bilevel G4 Fax compression
0.0 < DPI <= 450.0 (default is
PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI DPI value
150.0)
External
path name Set PRINT_SETTING_PATH="e:\temp".
PRINT_SETTING_PATH for The file e:\temp\CATPrint.ini will be
print/capture used as configuration file.
settings
The file is saved using a print
mechanism. For instance,
when saving a Drafting
PRINT document in TIFF format, only
the sheet will be saved and not
the grid and the elements
Save
PRINT_CAPTURE_MODE outside the sheet.
mechanism
The file is saved using a
capture mechanism. For
instance, when saving a
TILED
Drafting document in TIFF
format, the grid and the sheet
border will be saved.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 132

To export a variable, run the following command:

set variable_name=variable_value (e.g. "set PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI=200") (on Windows)

or

export variable_name=variable_value (e.g. "export PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI=200") (on UNIX)

To set a variable, refer to Customizing Your Environment on Windows or Customizing Your Environment
on UNIX, according to your operating system.

The configuration file is named CATPrint.ini and is located by default in a temporary directory. If you wish
to modify the default location, use the PRINT_SETTING_PATH environment variable as explained above.

The following is a syntax example of the configuration file to save a TIFF CCITT Grp4/T6 compression file
at 200.0 DPI from a CATDrawing document:

//
// Print configuration file
// ------------------------
//
<CAPTURE_SECTION>
// For RASTERFORMAT (ALL TIFF: Other for internal use)
// "TIFF" * True color uncompressed TIFF file.</dd>
// "TIFFTCPB" * True color PackBits compressed TIFF file.</dd>
// "TIFFINDEX" * Indexed (256 colors) uncompressed TIFF file.</dd>
// "TIFFPB" * Indexed (256 colors) PackBits compressed TIFF file.</dd>
// "TIFFGREY" * Grey scale PackBits compressed TIFF file.</dd>
// "TIFFBWPB" * Bilevel (black and white) PackBits compressed TIFF file.</dd>
// "TIFFG4" * Bilevel G4 Fax compression
<PRINT_CAPTURE_RASTERFORMAT>TIFFG4</PRINT_CAPTURE_RASTERFORMAT>
<PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI> 200.0 </PRINT_CAPTURE_DPI>
<PRINT_CAPTURE_MODE_>PRINT</PRINT_CAPTURE_MODE>
</CAPTURE_SECTION>

Note: when saving a large CATDrawing format with a high resolution (i.e. > 250.0 DPI), memory and
CPU consumption increase very quickly. As a consequence, generating such a raster output may be
impossible on low system environments unless you work with an optimized configuration (CPU +
memory).

STL

As far as STL format files are concerned, they cannot be saved using the Save As command when working in
Wireframe mode. The reason is that STL files are generated from the visualization tesselation and tesselation
triangles are not available when switching to Wireframe mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 133

Saving All Documents

These tasks show you how to save some or all of the documents you opened and how to control their names and locations. In
addition to this, the Save All command lets you save very easily all modified or read-only documents.

1. Select File > Save All.

If all the documents modified in the session can be saved without further interaction, a warning window appears to indicate
the number of documents to be saved and prompts you to confirm or not the save:

Click the Yes button to save automatically all the documents or the No button to cancel the command.

If all the documents cannot be saved, the following dialog box appears when some of the documents are new or read-only:

If you did not make any changes to any of the documents you want to save or if these documents are read-only files, this
dialog box do not appear.

2. Click OK to open the Save All dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 134

3. Click the Save As... button to specify a name for each read-only or new document.

The number of unsaved files is indicated at the bottom of the dialog box and a preview is displayed on the right.

4. Click OK to confirm.

If symbolic links exist between files, for example if a .CATDrawing document has been created from a Part document, the
names of each of these files also appear and the files are saved if the Part document is saved. However, if you want to be
able to save all files independently regardless of any existing links between files, select the Enable independent saves
check box at the bottom of the dialog box.

Note: Clicking the Save As... button is mandatory if you want to save your document under another name.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 135

Managing Document Save

The Save Management command lets you save all your modified documents under a new name and a new location.

Before you start, note the following information:

● This command is relevant for loaded documents only. For unloaded documents, select File > Send To.

● This command cannot be recorded via Tools > Macro.

1. Select File > Save Management.

The Save Management dialog box appears:

The State column indicates the original state of each currently used document. For instance, if a document has been modified since
last load, the corresponding state (i.e. "Modified") is displayed in the State column.
The Location column indicates all documents that are currently used along with their paths.
The Action column enables you to check the actions you are performing on your documents (save, modification, etc.). Bear in mind
that the State column keeps on displaying the document original state and do not reflect the actions you performed.
The Access column indicates the access rights for each document.

Below are listed the various states that can be assigned to a document:

● New: identifies a newly created document. You have to select a file name in order to save it
● Open: identifies a non-modified document open in your session
● Modified: identifies a document modified in your session
● Modified by synchronization: identifies a document modified at opening in order to be synchronized with a modified pointed
document
● Read Only: identifies a modified and read-only document. You have to specify a new name for this document if you want to
save it.

Below are listed the actions that can be displayed in the Action column:

● Open Read Only: identifies a non-modified, read-only document open in your session
● Save: identifies a document that will be saved
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 136
● Save Auto: identifies a dependent document that will be saved.

Note that from V5R14 onwards, modifications made to a CATPart do not propagate to its CATProduct and have no impact on the
state of the CATProduct. Therefore, a "dirty" CATPart is identified as "Modified" whereas the CATProduct it is linked to is identified
as "Open".
For more information, refer to "About Modified Status when Editing a CATProduct" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's
Guide.

The Enable independent saves check box lets you save documents independently regardless of any existing links between files,
i.e. dependent documents will not be automatically saved when the document they are linked to is saved.

2. Select the files to be saved.

At this point, you can add a suffix and/or a prefix to the name of the documents you are going to save. To do so, enter the

character string to be added to each file name in the Pattern Name box.

The character * is used as a wildcard to replace the file name and you can set the following pattern values:

● yyy* (where yyy is the character string) means that the names of the selected files will be prefixed with yyy, e.g.

yyyMyPart.CATPart

● *xxx (where xxx is the character string) means that the names of the selected files will be suffixed with xxx, e.g.

MyPartxxx.CATPart

● yyy*xxx means that the names of the selected files will be prefixed and suffixed respectively with yyy and xxx, e.g.

yyyMyPartxxx.CATPart

The last pattern used is stored in preference files (which are identified by the suffix *.CATPreferences, and are created in the same

location as settings, referenced by the CATUserSettingPath variable).

You can add a prefix or a suffix to one document only or to multiple documents. To select multiple documents, you can use one of

the following methods:

● heterogeneous selection by pressing Ctrl

● continuous selection by pressing Shift+Ctrl

● computed selection by right-clicking a document in the list then select one of these two contextual commands:

❍ Select All Pointed to select all the impacted pointed documents. In that case, all documents links are taken into account,

especially contextual ones, which means that the resulting graph can be larger than the object's product tree

❍ Product Tree to select the entire depending product tree. In that case, neither contextual links (for design in context) nor

relational links (from part to part) are taken into account but only structure links (for the product structure's composition).

However, note that if the document you select when using this command is not a CATProduct, then the selection is not

extended. Note that shape representations other than CATParts (cgr, model, CATShapes, etc.) are also included in the

resulting selection.

In the example below, right-clicking Links.CATProduct and choosing Select All Pointed automatically selects Part1.CATPart

which is referenced by Links.CATProduct:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 137

3. If you decided to add a prefix in step 2, click the Apply Pattern button to propagate the pattern you set in the Pattern Name box to

all the selected documents (otherwise, jump to the next step). In our example, *xxx has been entered in the Pattern Name box:

The validity of the each new document identification is checked. If another document in the session or in the file system has the

same computed name, a pop-up message is displayed to indicate which documents cannot be renamed and you are asked whether

you want to proceed or not. If you choose to proceed, the pattern value will be assigned only to documents that can be renamed.

If no problem occurs, all the files are renamed and the new names are displayed in the Name column. To ensure data consistency,

all document links are automatically updated in session, which means that applying a prefix or a suffix to a single document may

lead to an automatic save of other documents.

This is illustrated by the picture below: when the suffix xxx is applied to Part2.CATPart, the "Save Auto" action is assigned to

Product1.CATProduct to indicate that this linked document will be saved as well:

When you click the Apply Pattern button, only the file name is modified, features such as part number or root products are not

impacted.

Clicking the Apply Pattern button has no effect on disk ; this only checks and initializes the new names in memory. The files are
physically saved on disk with their new names when you click OK.
You can cancel the pattern application by clicking the Reset button but note that the reset applies to the whole Save
Management dialog box and not only to the suffix or prefix propagation.

4. Click the Save As... button to open the following dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 138

5. Indicate the name of the new created file in the File name box as well as the destination folder. If a suffix xxx has been applied, it is

also displayed in the File name box.

6. Click the Save button.

Selecting File > Save As for a .CATProduct document containing other modified components means that these components are
assigned the "Save Auto" state and are saved when clicking OK.
However, some "document-to-document" links are not be taken into account, such as links that are not design prerequisites. For
instance, when saving a .CATDrawing document pointing to a modified .CATPart document, the state of the .CATDrawing document
remains unchanged.

7. Once you have saved a document in a new directory, you can use the Propagate directory button to save the files linked to this

document into the same directory:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 139

Note that new documents with the "Auto Save" status are saved in the directory of the document selected in the list when clicking
the Propagate directory, Save or Save As... button.
If we take the above capture as an example, a new document with the "Auto Save" status would be saved in "E:\users" since
"Car.CATProduct" is selected.

To go back the document original state, select the document then click the Reset button.

8. Click OK to confirm.

The Save Management... command automatically saves impacted files as well. If there are still unsaved files left when you click
OK, the following message is displayed:

However, do not forget that two different documents open in session cannot have the same persistent location because the system
cannot have two documents with the same identification. In this case, a warning is issued and you cannot save conflicting
documents.
This might happen, for instance, when a new document has been assigned the location of another document already loaded in
session (with overwrite request) either using explicitely the Save As... button, or using implicitely the Propagate Directory
button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 140

More about the Save As mechanism

When you save a file by giving it the name of another existing file (by selecting File > Save As that lets you overwrite an existing
file), this does not mean that the new file is identical to the original one. As a matter of fact, a file is identified by its name but also
by its UUID (Unique Universal IDentifier) which differs from one file to another (except when a file is a copy of another one, for
instance).

To illustrate this, let's suppose a CATProduct containing two CATParts, Part1.CATPart and Part2.CATPart:

1. Product1 and the two parts it points to are saved using the Save As... button then the Product1 is closed
2. A new part is created by selecting File > New
3. The new part is saved as "Part2" in the same folder then Part2 is closed
4. When re-opening Product1, you are informed that Part2 cannot be found.

The reason is that the new document saved as "Part2" has been given a new UUID when selecting File > New and this new UUID
is different from the one assigned to the original Part2. Therefore, the link between Product1 and Part2 is considered as broken,
even if a Part2.CATPart document do exist, because the original Part2 does not exist anymore.
If you want to reroute the link to the new Part2.CATPart, you need to select Edit > Links then the Replace button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 141

Displaying Document Properties

This task shows you how to display properties for a document loaded in Version 5.

Note: the properties displayed under the Document tab can also be accessed from the FileDesk
workbench by right-clicking a document then selecting Properties.

1. Open a document in your Version 5 session.

2. Select File > Document Properties.

The Properties dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 142
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 143

The following information is displayed under the Document tab:

● Name of the document along with a symbol identifying the document type (a CATDrawing
in our example)
● Path: folder in which the document is saved
● Size: size of the document are indicated
● Last Change: date and time of the last modifications
● Attributes: indicates if the document is read-only or not.

In addition to this, the version and release number (including Service Pack number, if
applicable) and the build date of the code level used for the last document save are displayed.

Note that no version and build date information are displayed:

● if the document has never been saved (i.e. a new document) or if it has been saved prior
to V5R10
● if the document is not a Version 5 document (for instance, a V4 model
document).

Some applications do not display all the properties available when the Properties dialog box is
first displayed.
You can click More... to access any other tabs: a progress bar appears and you can either
wait until more properties are displayed or interrupt the command by clicking Cancel.
If interrupted, the Properties dialog box returns to its original state, i.e. as if More.... had
not been clicked.
In both cases (interruption or not), More... then disappears.

3. Click the Standards tab to display the standards (if any) that have been defined for the

documents.

Standards are defined by your administrator in XML (Extensible Markup Language) files and let
you set default values for element properties.

In our example, we display the standards applied to a .CATDrawing document and stored in
CATDftStdLayerAndFilter.xml:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 144

4. Click the + sign next to the desired node to display the corresponding structure.

In our example, we want to learn more about the current layer applied to the document:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 145

As you can see in the above capture, the current layer applied to the document is a new layer
named "My New Layer".

If you need to customize some of these parameters, you can make your modifications directly
in the Standards tab or using an XML editor, provided that you are logged as administrator.

For detailed information on customizing standards for layers and filters, refer to Customizing
Standards for Layers and Filters in this guide.
For detailed information on customizing drafting and generative standards (ANSI.xml,
ISO.xml, etc.), refer to "Standards Administration" in the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting
User's Guide.

5. When finished, click OK to close the dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 146

Viewing the Specification Tree and Geometry

Area
About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area
Setting Document Window Layout Preferences
Using the Full Screen
Using Document Windows
Using the Specification Tree Overview
Using the Geometry Overview
Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree
Opening Sub-Trees
Viewing Sub-Trees
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 147

About the Specification Tree and Geometry Area

Version 5 provides a unique specification-driven and generative modeling approach, which captures and
reuses process specifications, ultimately accelerating the design process. Version 5 offers a specification
modeler which lets you concentrate the design effort on establishing the proper design specifications,
while leaving it to the system to compute or update the resulting geometry when required. This approach
is implemented as a generalized mechanism for all Version 5 applications, for instance feature-based part
design, assembly design and drawing generation.

Version 5 model, part, drawing and assembly documents consequently allow you to view and edit data
either in the specification tree, the geometry area, or in both at the same time.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 148

Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

This task explains how to set document window layout preferences.

1. Select View > Specifications (or press SHIFT+F2).

This is the default layout option. It displays both the specification tree and the geometry
together:

2. Select View > Specifications again.

This removes the specification tree:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 149

You can also press F3 to toggle more quickly.

3. Select View > Geometry to display 2D and 3D representations of the geometry then clear it to

hide representations.

When View > Geometry is cleared, the whole geometry is hidden (whether it is in the

Show/No Show space) and only the specification tree is displayed.

Be careful not to confuse View > Geometry with Swap visible space which lets you display

objects transferred to the No Show area. For detailed information, refer to Displaying Hidden

Objects.

4. If you want to swap the focus between the tree and the geometry, select View > Commands List

> Swap view/tree or enter c:swap view/tree in the power input field:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 150

This enables you, for instance, to resize the specification tree as desired.

To deactivate the command, simply re-select View > Commands List > Swap view/tree or

re-enter c:swap view/tree in the power input field.

Using this command is equivalent to clicking the axis system displayed in the bottom right
corner which is another method to swap the focus between the specification tree and the
geometry.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 151

About the font size

You can also customize the default font size of the tree by exporting the following variable

which lets you set the size by yourself:

export CATGraphSize=font_size (on UNIX)

or

set CATGraphSize=font_size (on Windows)

where "font_size" is the new default font size in millimeters.

For instance, "export CATGraphSize=5".

Let's have a look at the two examples below:

Example 1
Default font size without exporting the CATGraphSize variable:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 152

Example 2
New default font size after exporting the variable with a size set to "5":
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 153

Using the Full Screen

This task explains how to make the geometry area fill the whole screen.

1. Select View > Full Screen.

The geometry area fills the whole area of your screen.

2. To restore the document window to its original size, right-click then clear Full Screen.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 154

Using Document Windows

This task explains how to use document windows.

1. Select Window > New Window.

A new window is opened containing the document you are editing.

The remaining commands on the Window menu let you organize your windows horizontally or
vertically with respect to each other, so that they do not overlap, (Window > Tile
Horizontally and Window > Tile Vertically) or in a cascading arrangement in which they
overlap each other (Window > Cascade).

Note that you can switch from one document window to another by selecting the window
name at the bottom of the Window menu.

On the Sun Solaris platform, we recommend that you set the following desktop resource to
always keep your Version 5 window on top:

Allow primary always on top

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 155

Using the Overview on the Specification Tree

This task explains how to use the overview to zoom in or out on the specification tree.

1. With the specification tree visible, select View > Specifications Overview (or press Shift + F2) to

display the Overview on specifications window containing a view of a portion of the specification tree:

2. Point to the overview window to display the cursor, and drag.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 156
This drags the
overview viewport
through which you
view part of the
specification tree.

While dragging, the

cursor changes to

You can zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located in the upper-right and
lower-left corners of the viewport.

Only that part of the tree you see inside the overview viewport is visible in the document window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 157

Using the Geometry Overview

This task explains how to use the overview to view the geometry.

1. With geometry visible in the geometry area, select View > Geometry Overview.

The geometry is displayed in the Overview on geometry window, but not the specification
tree:

2. Point to the overview window to display the cursor, and drag.

This drags the overview viewport through which you view the geometry. Only that part of the
geometry you see inside the overview viewport is visible in the document window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 158

Note that you can resize the overview window itself to see the whole of the viewport.

3. Zoom the size of the overview viewport by dragging the handles located in the upper-right and

lower-left corners of the viewport.

While you drag, the cursor changes to: . This lets you zoom the geometry in and out in
the document window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 159
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 160

Expanding and Collapsing the Specification Tree

This task explains how to expand and collapse the specification tree.

1. Open a any document with geometrical data, for example:

2. Select View > Tree Expansion > Expand First Level to see the first level of the tree:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 161

3. Select View > Tree Expansion > Expand Second Level to see the second level of the tree:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 162

4. Select View > Tree Expansion > Expand All to see all the levels of the tree.

5. When an object is selected in the tree, you can select View >Tree Expansion > Expand

Selection. A dialog box opens and prompts you to indicate the number of levels to expand:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 163

Note that the dialog box keeps the last selection you made.

6. Select View > Tree Expansion > Collapse All to collapse the tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 164

Opening Sub-Trees
This task explains how to open the sub-tree of the selected item in a specific window. This functionality is not available
for all workbenches. For instance, you cannot use it when working with Drafting, V4 Integration, Material Library or
Catalog Editor.

Open the Seat.CATProduct document.

1. With the specification tree visible, click the part instance named "seat" then right-click and select Open Sub-

Tree.

A new window containing the sub-tree of "seat" is displayed:

The window that opens is named after the top-level element contained in the window from which the
command has been run. In our example, the top-level element is "Product1".

The sub-tree window is just a pop-up window: it is used for visualizing sub-trees during the session but it is
not kept from one session to another.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 165

You cannot open the same sub-tree several times. If you try to do so, the window of the sub-tree you are
trying to re-open will be displayed in foreground.

2. Press F3 to hide the specification tree. You notice that the sub-tree window is still visible.

3. Press F3 again to show the specification tree again.

4. In "Product1" window, click the + sign next to "Geometrical Set.1" then select "Surface.3": the selected element

is highlighted in both the sub-tree window and the specification tree but also in the geometry area.

You can also right-click an element from the sub-tree window then use the contextual commands. The

commands available from the contextual menu are identical to those displayed when right-clicking the

element directly from the specification tree.

5. In the specification tree, select "PartBody" then right-click and select Open Sub-Tree: the new window is

superposed onto the window you opened previously and appears in foreground.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 166

6. When several sub-trees are open, they are superposed onto one another. To display the desired sub-tree

window in foreground, double-click the corresponding element in the specification tree.

7. To close a sub-tree, click the cross in the top-right corner of the window.

More about the Open Sub-Tree Command

● multi-selection is not supported
● the standard size of the window is 250x400 pixels but you can resize it if needed. However, this customized size
only applies to the current window, each new window you may open afterwards will have the standard size
● selecting Window > Tile Horizontally/Vertically or Window > Cascade has no effect on the windows displaying
the sub-trees
● when working with several document windows, you need to activate a window to show all the sub-trees that have
been opened for this window, the last activated sub-tree being displayed in foreground. Inversely, when a window is
not active anymore, all the sub-trees linked to this window are hidden.
In the example below, the window named "Seat.CATProduct" is active and so, the sub-trees linked to this window
are displayed whereas those of the "Seat.CATPart" window are not visible:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 167

Viewing Sub-Trees
This task explains how to hide or show all the sub-trees that have been opened using the Open Sub-Tree contextual
command.
This command is not available when working with the Drafting or V4 Integration workbench.

This scenario assumes that you are already familiar with the Open Sub-Tree contextual command.

Open the Seat.CATProduct and the Select.CATProduct documents.

Single window

1. Activate the Select.CATProduct window.

2. With the specification tree visible, click the part instance named "Part1" then right-click and select Open Sub-

Tree.

3. Select the part instance named "Part1.1" then right-click and select Open Sub-Tree.

The result looks like this:

4. Click the View menu. You can see that a check mark is displayed next to the Sub-Trees command as shown

below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 168

When the Sub-Trees command is selected, all the sub-trees opened for the current window are displayed.

5. Clear Sub-Trees to turn off the display of sub-trees:

If you select the View menu again, you see that no check mark is displayed anymore which means that all the
sub-trees linked to the current window are hidden:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 169

6. Select Sub-Trees: the two sub-trees you opened previously are now shown.

Multi-window
7. Activate the Seat.CATProduct window.

8. Select Window > Tile Vertically.

9. Activate the Seat.CATProduct window. You notice that the two sub-trees opened for the Select.CATProduct

window are not displayed since sub-trees are visible only for the current window, i.e. Seat.CATProduct right now:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 170

You can also see that when you select View > Sub-Trees, the command is grayed out because no sub-tree
has been opened yet for this window.

10. With the specification tree visible, select the part instance named "seat" then right-click and select Open Sub-

Tree. A new window containing the sub-tree of "seat" is displayed and the Sub-Trees command is now activated

in the View menu:

11. Activate the Select.CATProduct window. The two sub-trees opened for this window are now displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 171

12. Still with the Select.CATProduct window active, click the View menu then clear Sub-Trees to turn off the display

of sub-trees in the current window:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 172

13. Now, if you activate the Seat.CATProduct window again, you can see that the sub-tree opened for this window is

displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 173

The reason is that View > Sub-Trees only affects the current window. Therefore, you can work
simultaneously with a window in which sub-trees are shown and with a window in which sub-trees are hidden.

More about the Sub-Trees command

● Running the Open Sub-Tree contextual command for the first time automatically selects the Sub-Trees command
and displays a sub-tree window.
However, when sub-trees are already hidden, the Sub-Trees command remains cleared when you run the Open
Sub-Tree contextual command and only the last opened sub-tree is visible.
The reason is that the Sub-Trees command impacts only sub-trees created at the time the command is run.
● Selecting View > Specifications has no effect on sub-trees because this command hides/shows only the
specification tree of the current window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 174

Selecting Objects
Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer
Selecting Using the Selection Traps
Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator
Selecting Using the Other Selections... Command
Selecting Using the Search... Command (General Mode)
Selecting Using the Search... Command (Favorites Mode)
Selecting Using the Search... Command (Advanced Mode)
Storing Selections Using Selection Sets
Selecting Selection Sets
Selecting Using a Filter
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 175

Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer

This task explains basic selection techniques using the pointer.

Whenever you are not using an application command, the Select command is active. Using this
command, you can select any object in your document. All the selection tools are available using this
command.

Open the document Select.CATProduct.

1. Click Select to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

2. Point to the part of the object you want to select.

As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted, in the geometry area,
and the object name is highlighted in the specification tree:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 176

The identity of the preselected element is displayed in the status bar:

Highlighting is active only if you selected Preselect in geometry view (active by default) in
Tools > Options > General > Display > Visualization. You can also set the preselected
element linetype using the Preselected element linetype check box.

The face on the object opposite, for example, is highlighted in red.

You can also use the same tab to set a variety of useful selection features including selected
element color and pre-selected (highlight) linetype. Note that the selection color and pre-
selection color are the same.

In the geometry area, you can select the constituent

elements of objects, in other words:

● faces
● vertices
● edges
● planes
● axes.

Whenever you are using an application command, you can only select objects required as
input for the command. For example, when creating a hole in a pad, you are prompted to
select a face or a plane: no other elements can be selected.

3. Once the element is highlighted, click on the object to select it.

In our example, the selected face now changes color because we changed the selection color:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 177

4. Hold down Ctrl and select another face to add it to the initial selection:

Holding down Ctrl + selecting can be done in:

● the geometry area

● the specification tree
● lists in dialog boxes.

Holding down Shift + selecting can be done in:

● the specification tree

● lists in dialog boxes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 178

5. To deselect, click anywhere in the background.

Edges are highlighted as you point them and arrows are displayed to indicate to which
element the edge belongs to.
This is especially useful in case of overlapped elements as shown in our example:

On certain objects, note that hidden faces and edges are also
highlighted as you point at them. Hidden faces and edges are
displayed in a different color.

Refer to Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator for a more

powerful method for selecting hidden or coincident elements.

Pressing Esc deselects all selected elements.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 179

Selecting Using the Selection Traps

This task explains how to select objects using the selection traps.

Note that selection traps do not allow you to select sub-elements (e.g. edges, faces, vertices and so on).

Using the Bounding Outline

1. Click Select to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

2. Drag (using the left mouse button).

A bounding outline appears as you drag.

3. Drag the bounding outline until the object(s) you want to select is(are) completely inside the

bounding outline.

The objects must be completely inside the bounding outline: if not, they are not be selected.

4. Release the mouse.

The objects are highlighted to indicate they have been selected.

When using the bounding outline in the Part Design workbench, you can only select the last
feature you created, not the whole part.

The Selection Trap

Note that you can also select Selection Trap in the Select toolbar to perform the same function.
You access this icon by clicking the Select icon to see the Select toolbar:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 180

Press and hold down the left mouse key, and slide it to the right to select the icon.

The principle is the same: drag (using the left mouse button) to create the trap around the objects.
Furthermore, you can start creating the trap by pointing to an existing object, and then dragging your
mouse in the geometry area: as soon as you start dragging your mouse, the selection trap is displayed.

The Intersecting Trap

Intersecting Trap in the Select toolbar also allows selection using a trap. Any objects intersected
by the trap will be selected.

The Polygonal Trap

Polygonal Trap works like the other traps, except that the trap you can draw is a closed polygon.
Drag to define the polygon around the object to be selected, then double-click to close the polygon.

Paint Stroke Selection

Paint Stroke lets you select objects by simply drawing a paint stroke across them. Drag to create
the paint stroke. Any object crossed by the paint stroke will be selected.

Outside Trap Selection

Outside Trap Selection lets you select objects located strictly outside the trap. Drag using the
left mouse button: all objects out of the trap are selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 181

Intersecting Outside Trap Selection

Intersecting Outside Trap Selection is different than the above-detailed Intersecting Trap

since it lets you select objects intersecting the trap as well as objects located outside the trap. Drag
using the left mouse button: all objects out of the trap or intersecting the trap are selected.

Regarding intersection with points, note that only point symbols whose middle point is located inside the
trap are selected as shown below:

Example 1 Example 2

Point in Example 1 will not be selected even though it intersects the trap (in red) since its middle point
(in green) is not included in the trap, whereas point in Example 2 will be selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 182

Selecting Using the Preselection Navigator

This task explains how to use the preselection navigator (or the keyboard arrows) for selecting hidden or coincident elements,
or elements located elsewhere in the specification tree.

Note: the preselection navigator cannot be used with selection filters.

Open the document Select.CATProduct

Displaying the Preselection Navigator

Method 1
1. Click anywhere in the geometry area.

2. Position your pointer over the object you want to select.

3. Press any keyboard arrow (up, down, right or left) or Ctrl + F11.

Note that you can now display the preselection navigator by pressing Alt + the left mouse button (except when

working on Sun Solaris operating systems).

The preselection navigator appears.

Method 2
1. Select Tools > Options. In the General category, select the Display sub-category then the Navigation tab.

2. Select the Display the preselection navigator after ... seconds check box, set the spinner to the time delay.

The spinner sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after
pointing at an object.

3. Make sure that the following three check boxes are selected as well:

● Display immersive list for preselection navigator

● Prehighlight faces for preselection navigator

● Display immersive viewer for preselection navigator.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 183

4. Click OK to close the Options dialog box.

5. Point to the part of the object you want to select.

The selection tool is displayed after the time delay you set in step 2:

About display options

As explained above, a certain number of options are available for customizing the display of your preselection navigator. Below
are examples of what you see in the geometry area when these options are activated or deactivated:

● Prehighlight faces for preselection navigator

You can activate/deactivate the highlight of preselected faces by selecting/clearing the Prehighlight faces for
preselection navigator check box under the Navigation tab.
By default, this option is deactivated and in that case, the preselected face looks like this:

When the Prehighlight faces for preselection navigator check box is selected, the preselected face looks like
this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 184

● Display immersive list for preselection navigator

You can activate/deactivate the immersive list's display by selecting/clearing the Display immersive list for preselection
navigator check box. The immersive list displays all the stacked elements you can preselect.
By default, this check box is activated which means that the immersive list is displayed as shown below:

● Display immersive viewer for preselection navigator

You can activate/deactivate the immersive viewer's display by selecting/clearing the Display immersive viewer for
preselection navigator check box. The immersive viewer provides a visual feedback on the preselected element and lets
you validate your selection.
By default, this check box is selected which means that the immersive viewer is displayed as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 185

When the Display immersive viewer for preselection navigator check box is cleared, the result is as follows:

● Display auxiliary viewer for preselection navigator

You can activate/deactivate the auxiliary viewer's display by selecting/clearing the Display auxiliary viewer for
preselection navigator check box. The auxiliary viewer lets you perform viewing operations with the mouse such as zoom,
rotate or pan.
By default, this check box is cleared. When the option is activated, you see something like this in the geometry area:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 186

The use of this check box is detailed further in this scenario.

● Color
The default color used to highlight selected and preselected elements is "orange" but you can choose other colors using the
Selected elements and Preselected elements lists available in the Visualization tab.

Using the Preselection Navigator

The following diagram describes graphic selection tool features:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 187
The preselection navigator is made up of the following elements:
● a circle providing a visual feedback for the pointed object. This circle with an opaque background shows the preselected
element and displays the surrounding elements in transparency. The circle keeps the proportions of the current viewer
● arrow controls to navigate:
❍ "in-depth" using up/down arrows
❍ up and down in the object hierarchy using left and right arrows

● a cross pinpoints the preselected location. Four arrows are used for navigating or scrolling through the object you point at.
These arrows turn black when you reach an extremity
● a list of all the stacked elements you can preselect. This list indicates the selection path and the identity of each element.
This information is identical to the one displayed in the status bar.
You can choose to display or not the immersive list of elements you can preselect (shown in the example below). To do so,
select or clear the Display immersive list for preselection navigator check box in the Navigation tab

● an auxiliary viewer displaying the preselected object. This viewer also lets you perform viewing operations with the mouse
such as zoom, rotate or pan. By default, this viewer is not displayed and has to be activated via the Navigation tab as
explained further in this task.

An invisible area around the selection tool determines selection tool sensitivity.

1. Once the preselection navigator is displayed, click the up arrow to navigate "in-depth", in other words, from the front to

the back of the object, to highlight hidden, superposed or coincident elements.

This method is particularly useful for large parts since it lets you select, for example, edges, faces, etc. which are not
visible or accessible near the front of the part.

The cursor shape changes according to the type of the preselected element as shown below:

point... edge...

or face:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 188

The identity of the preselected element is

displayed in the status bar:

Note: the preselection navigator lets you use the contextual menu.

You can also navigate between different objects, not just inside single objects. When one object hides another, the
preselection navigator also lets you select elements belonging to the hidden object.

2. Click the down arrow to navigate in the opposite direction, towards the front of the object.

There are two other ways to navigate using the mouse:

● position your cursor over the circle, then click with the middle mouse button to navigate inside the object. As you
click, the corresponding element path is highlighted in the list displayed to the right
● move the mouse over the list of element paths. As you do this, the element corresponding to each path you point
at is pre-highlighted in the circle. Then, click the desired path to select the corresponding element.

Moreover, when pointing at an element in the circle or at a path in the list, you can right-click to display the
contextual menu as shown in the following two examples:

Example 1 - when pointing at an element in the circle

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 189

Example 2 - when pointing at a path in the list

To select a contextual command, simply right-click it. You can also press the up and down arrows to achieve the
same effect, and validate your selection by pressing Enter. Using any of these keys displays the selection tool
automatically.

The navigation is cyclic: when you reach the end of the selection path using the up and down keys, the preselection
navigator automatically goes back to the starting point (i.e. the highest element in the hierarchy) and you can then re-
start navigating.

3. Click the left and right arrows to navigate up and down in the object hierarchy.

For example, click the left arrow and look at the specification tree to see that each click on the left arrow takes you to
the top of the tree, then click the right arrow to navigate downwards.

Similarly, you can also press the left and right keys to achieve the same effect, and validate your selection by
pressing Enter or using the left mouse button.

When preselecting an edge, a prehighlight is also

provided which is especially useful in case of
overlapped elements:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 190

4. Select Tools > Options > General > Display then access the Navigation tab and select the Display auxiliary

viewer for preselection navigator check box.

5. Click anywhere in the geometry area, then position your pointer over the object and restart navigating by clicking the up

or left arrow.

An additional window opens and displays the object with the element you have preselected:

The Auxiliary Viewer window lets you manipulate the object and perform viewing operations with the mouse such
as rotate, zoom or pan as shown below:

Rotate Zoom
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 191

To hide the viewer, simply re-access the Navigation tab then clear the Display auxiliary viewer check box.

6. To validate your selection and exit the preselection navigator, use one of the following methods below, depending on the

display options that have been activated:

● click the circle in the center of the immersive viewer

● or, click the desired item in the immersive list

● or, click the element directly on the object.

The item is selected:

The selection tool disappears, in any case, once a selection has been made, or if you point or click outside the
selection activation area around the selection tool.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 192

Selecting Using the Other Selection... Command

This task explains how to display an object's structure in a separate window to facilitate alternative
selections.

Open the document OtherSel.CATProduct

1. Click Select to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

2. Point to the object to highlight the element you want to select.

In this example, point to the circular face at the end of the cylindrical part to highlight it:

3. Right-click and select Other Selection... or select Edit > Other Selection.

The element is selected, and the Other Selections window appears.

The window contains the location of the selected element in the specification tree, and
describes the path to the top of the tree.

The name of the circular face is: "Face".

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 193

You can also navigate up and down the tree inside the Other Selections window using the
preselection navigator or the keyboard arrows, and select other objects.

4. This time, point to the body of the cylinder to highlight the surface.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 194

5. Right-click and select Other Selection....

The element is selected, and the Other Selections window appears.

Note that, this time, an additional element (highlighted in blue) has been detected: Axis. This
is the axis used when the cylindrical part was created.

This type of element is a characteristic element.

The Other Selection... command is the only tool that lets you select characteristic elements.

6. Click "Axis" to select it.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 195

Selecting Using the Search... Command

(General Mode)
This task explains how to use the Search command to search for and select objects. You can search for:
● objects with a specific name, or of a specific type or color
● visible or hidden objects, or lines with specific linetypes or thicknesses
● product properties
● elements through the value of a specific attribute (material name, dimensions, etc.)
● objects created using a specific workbench, in the current document or throughout the whole document, in
the selection list, visible on screen
● model documents created using CATIA Version 4.

Several scenarios are provided to illustrate the different kind of searches you can carry out:
● Quick search for a named object

● Quick search for a color

● Quick search for a type

● Using the More... button

● Using a specific search scope.

Open the document Search1.CATProduct.

Performing a quick search for a named object

1. Select Edit > Search (or press Ctrl+F).

The Search dialog box appears.

2. Click the General tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 196

If the Select command was active before selecting Edit > Search, it remains active.

The Search command does not prevent you from running other commands on the search results
(once selected). So you can also work with other commands while the Search dialog box remains
open. This means that you can:

● run commands using the menus and icons

● and also apply commands in contextual menus to selected search results using the power input
field: for example, you can manipulate selected specification tree elements using the c:center on,
c:center graph or c:cut command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 197

If you select:

● the Search button now, all items in the specification tree are found

● the Search and Select button now, all items in the specification tree are found AND
selected. This means that you do not need to click the Select button anymore, objects that have
been found are automatically selected after the search and the Search dialog box is closed.

Include topology

When searching for topological objects (by selecting Topology in the Workbench list), the search
criterion Topology can be combined only with an object type. You cannot combine it with a color or a
name, for instance.

Another method to search for topological objects is to select the Include Topology check box This
option includes topological objects (faces, edges, vertices), whatever the query, when performing a
search and it also lets you search for objects with a color, contrary to the search criterion Topology.
The other difference between selecting Topology in the Workbench list and the Include Topology
check box is that Include Topology also searches for objects other than topological objects.
When the Include Topology check box is selected, there is no need to select Topology in the
Workbench list.
However, bear in mind that when using this option, the search takes more time.

Published elements only

If you select the Published elements only check box, this restricts the number of loaded elements
and therefore, the number of elements on which the search is performed.
In that case, you only see the elements that have been published (i.e. elements that have been
made available to different users).
For detailed information on how to publish elements, refer to "Publishing Elements" in the Version 5 -
Part Design User's Guide.

Deep search

When working in Visualization mode (i.e. when Work with the cache system is activated in Tools
> Options > Infrastructure > Product Structure > Cache Management tab), the Deep search
check box appears in the Search dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 198

Selecting this check box lets you take advantage of the geometry selective loading: all the geometry
is loaded before performing the search then when the search is over, the elements that are not
required anymore are unloaded.

Note that when working in Visualization mode and with the Deep search activation check box selected
in Tools > Options > General > Search, the Deep search check box is automatically selected.

For detailed information on the cache system, refer to About Working with a Cache System.

3. Enter the name sketch* in the Name list.

Searching using the object name is particularly useful if you renamed objects in the Feature
Properties tab using Edit > Properties, or the Properties contextual command.

The list below Name stores the names you entered during previous searches so you can select them.
The names are stored only as long as the session is active: closing the session clears the list.

4. Click the Search button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 199

The Search dialog box is resized to include a list containing the search results at the bottom of the
dialog box. You can deselect items in the list by clicking on them.

In our example, three objects and the corresponding path are highlighted in the list in the dialog
box.

Click the corresponding column header (i.e. Name or Path) to sort the search results alphabetically.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 200
A query is also generated in the Query list and Sketch.3 (which is the only sketch visible, the other
two are hidden) is preselected in the geometry area:

Note: If several elements with the same name are found, whatever their type, a warning message is
displayed.

5. Click the Select button to select the sketch.

The sketch is selected:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 201

6. Click OK to exit search mode.

Note that clicking OK has the same effect as clicking both the Select and Close buttons.

7. Run the Search command once again by pressing Ctrl+F.

8. Display the Query list by clicking the black arrow.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 202

The Query list displays the search query formulated in the search language. This helps you to
become familiar with the search language, which can be used for searching without using the Search
command. For a complete description of the search language, refer to Using the Search Language.

When you click the down arrow at the end of the Query list, this displays previous search queries.
Selecting a search query executes the search (with the same criteria and the same scope).
Queries are also stored across sessions because they are stored with your settings. This enables you
to recover queries from one session to another.

You can also use this language in power input mode. The object found is then directly selected.

9. Enter the following names in the Name box then click the Search button each time to compare the

results:

● *sketch gives the following result:

● *sketch* gives the following result:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 203

● sketch* with the Case sensitive check box selected gives the following result:

● Sketch* with the Case sensitive check box selected gives the following result:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 204

As shown in the above examples, you can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard. For example, entering:

and using the default settings for the other options in the Search dialog box searches for and select
all objects in the document. Similarly, entering:

Sketch*

selects all objects whose names begin with the character string "Sketch". Select the Case sensitive
check box if you want the search to be case sensitive.

Note, however, that the other options allow you to filter your searches progressively.

To search for a name as it is displayed in the specification tree, select the As displayed in graph
check box.
To illustrate this, suppose you have a part named "My_Part_Number"...

... whose name usually appears the following way in the specification tree:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 205

Let's suppose you customize the display in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Product Structure >
Nodes Customization tab by entering the following data:

The name displayed in the specification tree will now look like this:

Searching for the name *part* gives no result...

... since the search is based on the name displayed in the Instance Name box.

Whereas searching for the name *part* with As displayed in graph selected gives the following
result:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 206

You can also sort the results alphabetically by Name and Path in the Search dialog box by clicking
the corresponding column header.

Double-clicking an element from the search result list enables you to edit this element. For instance,
double-clicking an element of type "Pad" opens the Pad Definition dialog box to let you modify its
parameters.

Performing a quick search for a color

1. Run the Search command by pressing Ctrl+F.

2. In the Color list, select From Element as shown below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 207

As soon as From Element is selected, an Acquisition Agent is activated...

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 208

... and the Search dialog box disappears.

3. In the geometry area, click the object whose color you want to search: the Search dialog box reappears

and you can then click the Search button.

Clicking in the geometry area means that the pixel color is used to perform the search, whereas
clicking in the specification tree means that the search uses the color displayed in the object's graphic
properties.
Whichever method you choose, note that the Search capability always uses the color defined the
graphic properties. Therefore, if you click an object in the geometry, the search result might not be
as expected.

Inheritance is not taken into account by the Search capability and therefore, when searching for a
product with a specific color, the search might return a result which seems to have a color different
from the one you specified. The reason is that, for Assembly objects, the color you see is not always
the color that has been applied. For detailed information, refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic
Properties.

4. Click OK to exit search mode.

Performing a quick search for a type

1. Run the Search command by pressing Ctrl+F.

2. Enter the workbench Sketcher in the Workbench list and the type Line in the Type list.

If you select From Element in the Type list, the Search dialog box disappears and an acquisition
agent is activated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 209

Select the type you desired in the geometry area: the Search dialog box reappears.
If you do not want to select an object, click Close to stop the agent.

3. In the Color list, select From Element from the list then select a line from the geometry area before

clicking the Search button. In our example, we are searching for lines having the same color than line 2

(i.e. "Dark Grey Green"):

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 210

The result shows that Line.2 is the only line with "Dark Grey Green" color.

When you select From Element in the Type box then select an element in the geometry area, the
system automatically displays the workbench and type of the selected element.

4. Click the Add to favorites... button to add this query to your favorites. The Favorites mode is
detailed in another task.

5. Click OK to validate.

Selecting a workbench filters the list of types in the Type list: for example, if you select the
workbench Part Design, the Type box is filtered to contain only the element types available in Part
documents and if you select the type " ", the corresponding workbench is displayed. The same
principle applies to the other document or workbench types.
If the type belongs to several workbenches, a warning message is displayed.

When you leave * in the Workbench box, the Type list displays all the types corresponding to the
workbenches that had been previously selected.
If you want the Type list to display all the types available, you can click the Load all types button.
This button provides an exhaustive list of all the types available to you without having to select all
workbenches one by one. Note that this button is also available in Advanced mode.

When you select a new workbench, by default * remains in the Type list. This means that the search
will be performed on all types of elements created by all workbenches.
Whichever workbench is selected in the Workbench list, you can search for element types belonging
to any other workbench by typing the name of the type in the Type list. If the element type belongs
to only one workbench, the correct workbench name is displayed in the Workbench list.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 211

If you type only the first few characters of an object type, then press Enter, the system
automatically displays the full name of the type. If several types contain the same characters, the
first name containing these characters is displayed.
Note that the object type is NOT necessarily the name you see in the specification tree.

More advanced searching using the More... button

1. Run the Search command by pressing Ctrl+F.

2. In the General tab, click the More... button:

The More... button becomes the Less... button and the Search dialog box looks like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 212

3. In the Line properties area, define the line properties to be searched for:

● Dashed (lets you choose the type of line to be searched for): choose "4"
● Weight (lets you choose the line thickness): choose "48"

or if you want to search for a specific point symbol, use the Symbol list in the Point properties area

to select the symbol to be searched for.

For instance, searching for the symbol in our sample document gives the following result:

These lists of general graphic properties are identical to those available in the Graphic Properties
toolbar. For detailed information, refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 213

You can also specify the layer and visibility in the Layer and Visibility boxes:

● in the Layer box, select the layer number in which you want to perform the search
● in the Visibility box, choose either
❍ Visible (searches for visible elements for which Shown check box is selected in the Graphic
tab of the Properties dialog box. One parent of the searched element can be invisible)
❍ Hidden (searches for objects for which the Shown check box is cleared in the Graphic tab of
the Properties dialog box)
❍ Shown (searches for elements in the visible space. These elements, as well as each of their
ancestors, has the Visible status and is in the visible space)
❍ Invisible (searches for elements hidden in the No Show space, i.e. these elements or at least
one of their ancestors have the Invisible status).

For more information about visible and hidden elements, refer to Hiding and Showing Objects.

5. Click the Search button to start the search.

The result shows that only one line matches these criteria:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 214

6. Select the Less... button to return to the original Search dialog box.

7. Click OK to exit search mode.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 215

Searching using a specific search scope

Open the document Search1.CATProduct.

1. Run the Search command by pressing Ctrl+F or by selecting Edit > Search.

The Search dialog box appears.

2. Click the General tab:

3. Enter *1 in the Name list.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 216

4. Set the search scope in the Look list.

The search scopes are:

● Everywhere: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created

using all workbenches; if you are performing the search in a product structure document (in

design mode), the search is performed throughout the whole product structure, inside all the

documents integrated in the product structure (if these documents are accessible in design mode)

For example, to understand how this option works in our document:

❍ activate "Product" in the specification tree by double-clicking it

❍ press CTRL+F
❍ select Everywhere
❍ enter the name of what you are searching for, *1 in our example to search for all objects
whose names end with "1"
❍ click the Search button:

● Now activate "My Part Number"

● keep the same scope and name options
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 217

● In "Element": the scope only locates objects belonging to "Element", and those that can be
created using the current workbench, where "Element" is the name of the active object.

For example, if you are using a Part document, objects created using the Part Design workbench
are searched, but NOT objects created using the Sketcher workbench.

For example, to understand how this option works in our document:

❍ activate "My Part Number" in the specification tree

❍ press CTRL+F
❍ select In "Element"
❍ enter the name of what you are searching for, *1 in our example to search for all objects
whose names end with "1"
❍ click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 218

● now activate "Sketch.1" in the specification tree

● keep the same scope and name options
● click the Search button:

Selecting this scope enables you to locate only the objects that can be created in the Part
Design workbench and that belong to "Product". The search does not reach the lower levels
in the tree: the individual elements that make up the different parts are not searched.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 219

● From "Element" to bottom: searches the elements in the active "Element", to the bottom of
the tree, regardless of the workbench used to create them.

For example:

● activate "My Part Number" in the specification tree

● press CTRL+F
● select From "Element" to bottom (From My Part Number to bottom in our
example)
● enter the name of what you are searching for, *1 in our example to search for all
objects whose names end with "1"
● click the Search button:

● now activate "Sketch.1" in the specification tree

● keep the same scope and name options
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 220

● Visible on screen: searches for objects visible in the current window. Selecting this search
scope means that elements that are not activated or not represented in the geometry area are
not taken into account.
Elements that are not represented in the geometry area are, for instance, elements transferred to
the No Show space, elements that are not in the current filter or not in the current mask, features
used to build other features that appear in the specification tree but not in the geometry area,
etc.

When working in 2D mode, elements that are not in the active plane are excluded as well.

For example:

● activate "Product" in the specification tree by double-clicking it

● press CTRL+F
● select Everywhere
● enter the name of what you are searching for, *2 in our example to search for all
objects whose names end with "2"
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 221

● now right-click "My Surface" in the specification tree then select Hide/Show to hide
the pocket
● select Visible on screen and enter *2 to search for all objects whose names end with
"2"
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 222

● From current selection: this scope is only available if you already selected objects before
running the Search command, and searches inside the selected objects to the bottom of the tree.
This is particularly useful when you know the object in which you want to search: you simply
select the object, then search inside the object.

For example:

● press CTRL+F
● select Everywhere
● enter the name of what you are searching for, *1 in our example
● click the Search button:

● now, select From current selection

● in the result list, select Pad.1 and Hole.1 then click the Select button: Pad.1 and
Hole.1 are selected in the specification tree
● enter the workbench Part Design and the type Hole
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 223

● From search results: the search is performed on the list of objects preselected in the list at the
bottom of the Search dialog box.

To illustrate this, let's have a look at the following example:

● activate "Product" in the specification tree

● press CTRL+F
● select Everywhere
● enter the name *e*
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 224

● now erase the name *e*

● select White color
● select From search results
● click the Search button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 225

By default, * appears in the Color list. This means that the search is performed on elements of any
color.

Select the desired color, or click More Colors... at the bottom of the Color list to access the color
chooser and select basic or previously custom colors, or add new custom colors.

The scope From Element lets you use the color of an existing element. To do so, select the element
whose color you want to use in your search. The selected color is displayed in the Color field.

Refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for a full description of how to use the color
chooser.

When you apply basic and custom colors to elements, and search for elements using these colors, a
search query is generated. However, the RGB code is used instead of the color name for custom
colors. This is useful, for example, if you modify your color palette (for example, by deleting the
custom color, or deleting the color settings file in your settings folder) then retrieve a search query.
Because the query references the RGB values of the color and not the color name, changes made to
the color palette do not affect the search: the search always finds elements referencing a color
expressed using RGB values. The names of basic colors, however, remain the same.

5. Click OK to exit search mode.

When the object is selected in the search result list, you can also right-click and select Center graph
or Center view.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 226

Selecting Using the Search... Command

(Favorites Mode)

This task explains how to use the Favorites mode of the Search command.

The Favorites mode lets you save your favorite queries in order to reuse them as many times as you
wish, without having to reenter your search criteria. But keep in mind that you cannot create favorite
queries requiring a selection. However, you can include predefined favorite queries.

Open the document Search1.CATProduct.

1. Select Edit > Search (or press Ctrl+F).

The Search dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 227

2. Enter the workbench Sketcher in the Workbench list and the type Line in the Type list.

3. In the Color list, select From Element from the list then select a line from the geometry area

before clicking the Search button. In our example, we are searching for lines having the same

color than line 2 (i.e. "Dark Grey Green").

4. Click the Add to favorites... button to add this query to your favorites then click OK.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 228

5. Select the Favorites tab.

Your query is displayed in the Favorites list. You can click the column headers to sort the queries

alphabetically.

Favorites are stored across sessions because they are stored with your settings in the
SearchFavoriteQueries.CATSettings file. This enables you to recover your favorite queries from
one session to another.
Note that your search queries can be stored independently from the language (they are called
"transformat queries"), thus enabling you to run queries created by other users whatever the
session language provided that they were not created before V5R9 SP1.

You can select a query then use one of the three icons displayed to move up , move down

or delete this query.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 229

6. Double-click the query to begin the search.

The scope option in the Look list is automatically updated to match your search criteria.

The query is also generated in the Query box. Note that the generated query is not editable
and is displayed for information only.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 230

Double-clicking a query in the Favorites mode automatically updates the data displayed under
the General tab accordingly and the objects are preselected in the geometry area.

A query may be modified directly in the Favorites list by clicking its name or its content under
the corresponding column.

7. Click the query syntax in the Query column then replace the color Dark Grey Green with Pink

Salmo.

8. Click the Search button to run the search. You can also click the Search and Select
button which lets you run a search AND select automatically the objects that have been found.

However, note that the Search dialog box is closed once objects are selected.

A warning message informs you that the color does not exist.

9. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to edit the query syntax once again but, this time, the color name to enter

is Pink Salmon.

10. Click the Search button to run the search:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 231

11. Click the query syntax in the Query column then enter the following query:

NAME=Sketch*,all
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 232

12. Click the query name in the Name column then enter:

MyQuery1

13. Click the Search button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 233

14. Modify the query syntax once more by entering:

(NAME=Sketch* & Color=Black),in

This time, we also modify the search scope.

15. Click the Search button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 234

16. Click OK to exit search mode.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 235

You can use the power entry field to run a query.

For instance, you can enter:

favorite=MyQuery1 or f=MyQuery1

This gives a result but you may need to modify the scope option. This can also be done in the
power input field by entering, for instance:

favorite=MyQuery1, all or f=MyQuery1, all

The search result is selected in the specification tree.

For detailed information on the search language using your favorite queries, refer to Using the
Search Language.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 236

Selecting Using the Search... Command

(Advanced Mode)
This task explains how to use the Advanced mode of the Search command. The Advanced search mode
lets you compose more precise queries using a combination of search criteria as well as the "And", "Or"
and "Except" operating signs.

Any information entered in the General tab is reported in the Advanced tab as well as the name of the
last workbench on which you performed a search.

You can record and run your search queries using macros. The recorded macro is stored in a .CATScript
file containing a transformat query, which means that the query can be run whatever the session
language.
For detailed information on macros, refer to Recording, Running, and Editing Macros.

Open the document Search1.CATProduct.

The following scenarios are provided:

● Advanced search for specific attributes

● Advanced search for dynamic attributes

● Searching using a combination of search criteria.

Performing an advanced search for specific attributes

1. Press CTRL+F or select Edit > Search then click the Advanced tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 237

2. Select the workbench Product Structure.

3. Select an attribute from the Attribute list. Each workbench corresponds to a list of types and each

type corresponds to a list of attributes, among which:

● Name: indicate the name of the searched element

● Name In Graph: indicate the name of the searched element as displayed in the
specification tree. This attribute is equivalent to the As displayed in graph option available
from the General tab
● Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element.
Note that inheritance is not taken into account and therefore, when searching for a product
with a specific color, the search may return a result which seems to have a color different
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 238

from the one you specified. The reason is that for Assembly objects, the color you see is not
always the color that has been applied. For detailed information, refer to Displaying and
Editing Graphic Properties

● Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure
● Visibility: indicate if the searched object is visible, shown, invisible or hidden
❍ Visible
The visibility attribute is "true". One parent of the searched element can be invisible.
An object is said to be Visible if the Shown check box is selected in the Graphic tab of
the Properties dialog box
❍ Shown
The visibility attribute is "true" and the whole hierarchy of the searched element is also
visible.
An object is said to be Shown if this object and each of its ancestors have the Visible
status and if this object is in the visible space. No object can have both Invisible and
Shown statuses
❍ Invisible
The visibility attribute is "false" or one parent of the searched element is hidden.
An object is said to be Hidden if it is in the invisible space, i.e. if this object or at least
one of its ancestors has the Invisible status
❍ Hidden
The visibility attribute is "false". (Replaces the former attribute Hidden).
An object is said to be Invisible if the Shown check box is cleared in the Graphic tab of
the Properties dialog box

● Layer: indicate the layer of the searched element. Setting this attribute to "None" means
that you will search for any object which is not assigned to a layer.

Note that the Layer and Visibility lists displayed here are identical to those displayed in the
Graphic Properties toolbar.

The above mentioned attributes are permanent attributes, i.e. associated to any element type.

Depending on the value you select, the corresponding Attribute Criterion dialog box is
displayed.

In our example, select the attribute Name then enter the following value:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 239

If you are searching for a character string whose value is empty, leave the box in the Attribute
Criterion dialog box empty so that the query syntax looks something like this:

'workbench'.type.attribute=

where

"workbench" is the workbench in which you are performing your search

"type" is the type of the object containing the string you are searching for
"attribute" is the attribute containing the empty string.

For instance:

'Product Structure'.Product.Product Description=

4. Click OK then click the Or button.

5. Select the attribute Color from the Attribute list.

6. Click More Colors... at the end of the list then choose the color "Pink Salmon" as shown:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 240

7. Click OK twice then click the Search button to run the search (you can also click the Search

and Select button to run the search AND select automatically the objects that have been
found):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 241
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 242
When running a query with a color as search criterion, you can either:

● pick a color among the 16 colors available in the list

● or pick a color among the 48 colors available by default in the Basic Color area of the Color
chooser (displayed when you click More Colors... at the end of the list)
● or pick a color among the 16 custom colors available in the Custom Colors area of the Color
chooser
● or, if this color is one of the 48 colors available by default, enter directly its name in the
Composed query box.

Each color displayed in the list or in the Basic Colors area is identified by a name.
For more information on the names assigned to these colors, refer to Color Palette.

8. Click the button to delete your query.

You are now going to learn how to perform a search on specific attributes.

9. Select the workbench Part Design then the type Hole.

10. Select the attribute Diameter then enter the value 10mm.

11. Select the operating sign in the list box then enter a value in the box. You can also use the default

value (*) as a wildcard.

In our example, we selected the = operating sign and the value "5mm; 10mm" in order to

search for any element whose diameter is comprised between "5mm" and "10mm".

The number of operating signs displayed in the list depends on the attribute you chose. Here is

an exhaustive list of the available operating signs:

● =
● != (different)
● <
● <=
● >
● >=
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 243
You can select Case sensitive check box if you want the search to be case sensitive. The
attribute name appears then in capital letters in the query.

12. Click OK to validate then click the Search button to run the search:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 244
Depending on the attribute you select, the Attribute Criterion dialog box may display a list of
attributes. The example below shows a list of criteria corresponding to a hole type:

This dialog box may also let you choose a boolean attribute, in case you are searching for a
threaded hole, for instance:

If you select the Drafting workbench, you can search for specific attributes such as dimensions
by selecting Dimension in the Type box then entering your value or scale of value in the
Attribute Criterion dialog box.

For example:

● Drafting.Dimension.Value<=140mm

searched for all objects created using the Drafting workbench, of type Dimension with
a value equal to or lower than 140 millimeters

● Drafting.Dimension.Value='137mm;138mm'

searches for all objects created using the Drafting workbench, of type Dimension with
a value between 137 and 138 millimeters. These two values are separated by ";".

The Drafting workbench also lets you search for elements of type Geometry such as 2D lines,
2D curves and so on. Refer to "Edit/Search Dimension Status" in the Version 5 - Interactive
Drafting User's Guide for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 245

13. Click OK to exit search mode.

Performing an advanced search for dynamic attributes

1. Press CTRL+F or select Edit > Search then click the Advanced tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 246

The Product Structure workbench lets you search for elements which possess certain properties
(dynamic attributes) you defined for a product.

You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by selecting an element from the
Product property list box.

The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are:

● Part Number
● Revision
● Definition
● Nomenclature
● Product Description
● Component Description.

If you type only the first few characters of a property, then press Enter, the system
automatically displays the full name of the property.

Once you have chosen the property, type in the value of the property in the "of value" box. For
example, if you assigned a description to the element, you must select the Production
Description property then enter text included in the description.

You can also define additional product properties such as Real, Integer, String, etc. by clicking
the Define other properties... button. For detailed information, refer to "Modifying
Component Properties" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide.

2. Select Product Structure in the Workbench box, Product in the Type box. The query syntax is

displayed in the editor:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 247

In our example, the Product Structure product has the following user-defined attributes:

These attributes can be visualized by right-clicking the product in the specification tree then
selecting Properties.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 248

3. Edit the query manually in the editor to add to search for the attribute Real.2. You can perform

your search using these four different queries:

● 'Product Structure'.Product.'Real.2'=12.3

means that you search for an attribute named "Real.2" with a value equal to 12.3

● 'Product Structure'.Product.'Real.2'='10;40'

means that you search for an attribute named "Real.2" with a value comprised
between 10 and 40

● 'Product Structure'.Product.'Real.2'!='12;12.25'

means that you search for an attribute named "Real.2" with a value comprised
between 12 and 12.25

● 'Product Structure'.Product.'Real.2'<13

means that you search for an attribute named "Real.2" with a value lower than 13.

4. Click the Search button once the query is edited:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 249

The search result indicates that Real.2 has been found in Product.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 250

You can also search for specific attributes such as materials.

In our example, the "Steel" material has been applied to My Part Number. To search for this
material, enter the following query:

'Product Structure'.Material.Name=Steel

5. Click OK to exit search mode.

Searching using a combination of search criteria

1. Press CTRL+F keyboard shortcut or select Edit > Search then click the Advanced tab:

The And, Or and Except buttons lets you combine several search criteria and refine your

query.

The query is displayed in the Composed query box and can be modified, for example to add
brackets and group queries together.

2. In our example, we are searching for holes and pads created using the Part Design workbench or

whose names end with "1".

3. To do so, select Part Design in the Workbench box, Hole in the Type box then Name in the

Attribute box (enter the value 1* for the name).

4. Click the Or button the select Pad in the Type box then Name in the Attribute box (enter the

value 1* for the name).

The query syntax is displayed in the editor:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 251

For more information on the search language, refer to the Using the Search Language task in
this guide.

5. Set the scope option in the Look list.

6. Click the Search button to start the search.

A list containing the search results is displayed at the bottom of the Search dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 252

You can add your query to your favorites by clicking the Add to favorites... button.

For more information on favorites, refer to the Searching Using the Favorites Mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 253

7. Click the Select button to select the objects in the geometry area (note that you do not have to

do this if you clicked the Search and Select button to run your search).

8. If you wish to modify the query, you can do it very quickly by typing a new query in the editor as

shown below:

'Part Design'.Sketch.name!=*2

or

'Part Design'.Sketch - name=*2

means that you search for all sketches except those whose names end with "2".

Another example:

'Part Design'.Hole.name=*1 & 'Part Design'.Hole.Diameter<50mm

means that you search for all holes whose names end with "1" and whose diameters are lower
than 50 mm.

You can copy one of the above-detailed queries, paste it directly to the query editor then start
the search.

9. Click the Search button to start the search.

10. Click OK to exit the search mode.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 254

Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

This task explains how to group selections and store them in selection sets.

Selection sets are saved with your documents. You can then use the Selection Sets Edition command to add
objects, rename the selection set, or delete it.

As an example, selection sets are already stored in the sample document but that does not prevent you from
creating other sets using the instructions below.

Open the document SelectionSets.CATProduct.

1. Select Edit > Selection Sets Edition (or press CTRL+G):

2. Click the Create Set button.

A selection set named "Set1" is created.

Each time you create a new selection set, the number is incremented. You can also rename the selection
set using the text field at the bottom of the Selection Sets Edition dialog box.

Once a selection set has been created, just double-click the corresponding line in the list to reuse it.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 255

3. Point to the selected objects to be included in the set.

For example, select two of the lines:

You can use the selection traps to add and remove objects grouped in a selection set.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 256
The size (i.e. the number of elements included in the set) is displayed as well as the new name given to
the set. In our example, we called it "Lines".

Note that the default mode is "Add element" which means that clicking an element in the geometry
automatically adds it to the set.

4. To add more elements to your selection set, click the selection set name in the list, check that the "Add

element" mode is active then continue selecting elements.

In our example, add the hole to the selection set :

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 257

You can add objects to any selection set.

If you want to delete an element from a selection set, click Remove element, select the selection set
then select in the geometry area the element to be deleted.

If you want to delete selection sets that do not contain any element, click the Delete empty Sets button.

5. Select the Select a face, edge, axis or vertex check box to be able to store sub-elements (such as faces

or edges) in the selection set.

6. Click OK.

The Find owning Sets option lets you find the set an element belongs to. To do so, click the desired
element then select Find owning Sets to highlight the corresponding group in the list.

Note: you can also find the set an element belongs to by selecting the desired element, then Edit > Find
Owning Selection Sets. The Selection Sets Selection dialog box appears and displays the name of the
set as shown:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 258

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Selecting Selection Sets.

About geometries
The Selection Sets Edition command also indicates the number of geometries included in the set, if necessary.
This information is given in the Size box and is intended to match the information given in the status bar as well as
the number of highlighted elements in the geometry area.
This is illustrated in the example below:

1. Let's suppose a pad whose top face is stored in a selection set called "Set1":

As you can see, the Size box indicates that "1" element is stored in the set.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 259
2. After clicking OK to close the Selection Sets Edition dialog box, a pocket is created and the pad looks like
this:

3. Selecting Edit > Selection Sets Edition then "Set1" now gives the following result:

The information "(2 geometries)" has been added in the Size box to specify that the top face, however
still considered as a single element, is now made of two geometries because of the transformation it
underwent in step 2.

4. If you select Edit > Selection Sets then "Set1", you can check that this corresponds to the information
displayed in the status bar ("2 elements selected") and to what is displayed in the geometry area: there are
two highlighted elements.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 260
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 261

Selecting Selection Sets

This task explains how to select groups once they have been stored in selection sets.

Open the document SelectionSets.CATProduct.

1. Select Edit > Selection Sets (or press CTRL+G):

The above picture shows 3 selection sets: Surfaces, Lines and Group.

2. Click one of the selection sets from the list. You can also press Ctrl to select more than one

selection sets in the list.

The elements included in the selection set are highlighted in the geometry area:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 262

3. Click the Select button or double-click the selection sets to select the highlighted elements.

The number of selected elements is displayed in the status bar.

If you want to reset the filter, i.e. remove a selection set from the list, just select the set to be
removed then click the Reset button.
However, note that elements stored in this set will still be highlighted in the geometry area
and in the specification tree.

Using selection sets is very useful for identifying very quickly a selected group of elements.

For instance, selecting "Group" then clicking Hide/Show in the View toolbar (to
transfer hidden objects to the No Show space) hides the elements belonging to "Group"...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 263

... whereas clicking Swap visible space lets you display the hidden elements in the No
Show space:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 264

Selecting Using a Filter

This task shows how to manage and customize the sub-geometry selection in order to avoid any ambiguity.

From now on, this toolbar is available in any workbench dealing with .CATPart and .CATProduct documents.

Note that this scenario takes the Generative Shape Design workbench as an example but the look and
number of icons available from the User Selection Filter toolbar varies according to the workbench you are
working in.
For detailed information on icons dedicated to a specific workbench, you need to refer to the documentation of
this workbench.

● You need a Version 5 - P2 Generative Shape Design configuration to follow this scenario.
● A .CATProduct containing a .CATPart must be open and one or more features created.
You can also open the SelectionFilter.CATProduct document

● You need to activate the User Selection Filter toolbar by selecting View > Toolbars > User Selection
Filter.

The toolbar is divided into 4 sections:

● the icons on the left let you filter elements according to their type:

❍ Point Filter to filter points

❍ Curve Filter to filter curves

❍ Surface Filter to filter surfaces

❍ Volume Filter to filter volumes.

● the next two icons correspond to the filter modes:

❍ Feature Element Filter selects the whole feature whether it is a sketch, product, pad, join, etc.

❍ Geometrical Element Filter enables to sub-elements of a feature such as faces, edges or vertices
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 265

● Work on Support selection state is used in conjunction with the Work on Support command and
lets you select sub-elements from the grid. Refer to "Working with a 3D Support" in the Version 5 -
Generative Shape Design User's Guide for detailed information. This command is only available with
the Automotive Body in White Templates product

● Quick Select lets you perform a quick selection of geometry. Refer to "Quick Selection of Geometry"
in the Version 5 - Generative Shape Design User's Guide for detailed information. This command is only
available with the Generative Shape Design 2 product

● Intersection edges activation enables to create an intersection edge: the selection of the edge is
propagated to the whole intersection. It ensures a better stability as the intersection edge is automatically
recomputed when the shape of the feature on which it lies is modified.
The intersection edge can only be applied on a modification feature. Refer to "Creating Edge Fillets" in the
Version 5 - Generative Shape Design User's Guide for detailed information. This command is only available
with the Generative Shape Design 2 or Part Design products.

● Reset Selection Filters: you can also use this command anytime to deactivate all the icons that have been
previously activated in the User Selection Filter toolbar. To use this command, you can choose between
the following three methods:
❍ type c:Reset Selection Filters in the power input field: all the icons are deactivated
❍ select View > Commands List then select Reset Selection Filters from the list before clicking OK to
validate: this deactivates all the icons in the toolbar
❍ select Tools > Customize, access the Commands tab, select All Commands in the Categories list
then drag and drop the Reset Selection Filters command onto the User Selection Filter toolbar (or
any other toolbar):

You can then check Reset Selection Filters when needed to deactivate the toolbar icons.

By default, all the icons are deactivated which means that no filter is applied but you can restrict the selection to
specific element types by clicking the corresponding icons.
For instance, if you want to select only points and surfaces, you need to activate the Point Filter and Surface
Filter icons as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 266

Bear in mind that:

● If you deselect a type, it cannot be selected in the geometry anymore unless all other types are deselected
● If you deselect a mode, it cannot be selected anymore for each active type unless other modes are
deselected
● It is not possible to activate both filter modes simultaneously (it does not make sense anyway). Only two
states are available: either Feature Element Filter or Geometrical Element Filter is activated or both
modes are deactivated.

1. Activate the Feature Element Filter as shown:

Depending on the filter you select, the following cursors are used:

● When the selection is forbidden, the shape is used and this, whatever the filter you select
● When a filter other than Geometrical Element Filter (e.g. Feature Element Filter, Point

Filter, etc.) is activated , the cursor shape is when pointing at an element and the
hourglass is displayed after selecting the element

● When Geometrical Element Filter is activated, the cursor shape is when pointing at an
element and the hourglass is also displayed after selecting the element.

2. Click Extrude in the Surfaces toolbar.

The Extruded Surface Definition dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 267

3. Select "Sketch 1" as the profile and xy plane as the direction.

4. Click OK to create the surface.

5. Click Offset in the Surfaces toolbar.

The Offset Surface Definition dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 268

6. Click Geometrical Element Filter : as soon as you click the icon, the Feature Element Filter
mode is deactivated in the User Selection Filter toolbar:

7. Select any face of the extruded surface.

8. Enter 20mm as the offset value.

9. Click OK to create the surface.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 269

10. Double-click the extruded surface.

The Extruded Surface Definition dialog box is displayed.

The Feature Element Filter mode is still deactivated.

11. Select any edge of Sketch 2.

The Update Error dialog box appears: an element of the part is no longer recognised and needs to

be updated.

12. Click OK.

13. Click OK in the Extruded Surface Definition dialog box to create the surface.

The Update Diagnosis: Part1 dialog box appears.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 270

14. Click Edit.

The Offset Surface Definition dialog box is displayed.

15. Select the extruded surface of Sketch 2.

16. Click OK in the Offset Surface Definition dialog box.

The offset surface is created for Sketch 2.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 271

Manipulating Objects
Undoing Actions
Redoing and Repeating Actions
Cutting and Pasting Objects
Copying and Pasting Objects
Using the Paste Special... Command
Deleting Objects
About the Properties Command
Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties
Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar
Using the Graphic Properties Wizard
Measuring Objects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 272

Undoing Actions

This task shows you how to reverse the last action.

1. Click Undo in the Standard toolbar or select Edit > Undo xxx (or press CTRL+Z), "xxx"
corresponding to the name of the last action performed.

This cancels the action.

2. If you want to undo one or more actions preceding the last one you simply have to repeat step 1.

Sometimes no action can be undone. When this is the case, the Undo icon is grayed out.

By default, a maximum of 10 global undo actions is possible. This maximum can be changed in
Tools > Options > General > Performances.

3. If you want to display an history of actions that can be undone in the active document, click

Undo with history :

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 273
The name of the document in which you are about to undo actions is displayed at the top of
the dialog box (where you can see "Links.CATProduct").

The Undo with history dialog box lets you choose the actions you wish to undo from the
numbered list displayed in the bottom part, the most recent action being displayed at the top
of the list.

Each action is identified by its name, for instance "Properties Edition" refers to Edit >
Properties. Action names corresponding to an internal transition inside a command (e.g.
"Select search results...") are followed by ... to distinguish them from global commands.
You can undo then redo internal transitions as long as you are in the command. If several
undo actions are performed successively until the command itself is undone, then you cannot
redo its internal transitions.
For instance, suppose the following scenario with two different cases:

● step 1: copy an object

● step 2: paste the object
● step 3: select the object then move it

Case 1
Click Undo: this moves the object back to its original position in step 2.
Click Redo: this moves the object to the location defined in step 3.
You can undo then redo the move since you are still in the Select command.

Case 2
Click Undo: this moves the object back to its original position in step 2.
Click Undo once again: the paste action is canceled and you go back to step 1.
Click Redo: the object is pasted.
But you cannot redo step 3 after this and if you display the history, you can see that it is
empty. You cannot redo the move since the second undo impacts the Paste command and not
the Select command anymore.

If you want to undo the first action only, you just need to click the Undo button since
the first action is already highlighted in the list: the action is undone and removed from the
history.
If you want to remove the first four actions, all you need to do is to click the last action to be
undone (i.e. the fourth one in our example): clicking an action implies that all former actions
are selected as well and thus, undone in order to keep the history.
If you change your mind and decide to undo the first two actions instead, click the second
action in the list: only the first two actions are selected and not the first four anymore.

Bear in mind that one history is used per document ; the history of actions is not forwarded
from one document to another. As a consequence, undoing actions in a document opened
several times simultaneously (e.g. when opening a CATPart and a CATProduct containing this
CATPart) may corrupt data. It is recommended not to undo actions in a document that has
been modified in another window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 274

4. When satisfied with your selection, click the Undo button to undo all the selected actions.
The dialog box stays open and you can keep on undoing actions if needed.

5. To close the Undo with history dialog box, click Close.

More about the Undo capability

● Clicking Cancel in a dialog box triggers the undo mechanism, i.e. any action you may have
performed between the command creation and the click on Cancel is undone

● Clicking Undo cancels the last action only (i.e. the last single click) and therefore, if a
command has been run by double-clicking, it cannot be undone via the Undo command
● You can undo the UI-Activation of an object, however this also cancels any other action
performed during the object activation
● UI-Activation (User-Interface Activation) means that you edit or double-click an object in
order to make it UI-Active (User-Interface Active). The UI-Active object appears in blue
color in the specification tree

● Clicking Undo does not enable you to restore the default settings (after changing

them via Tools > Options). This can only be done using the Reset button displayed
at the bottom of the Options dialog box. For more information, refer to Resetting Default
Settings Without Locks.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 275

Redoing and Repeating Actions

This task shows you how to recover the last action undone, and repeat actions.

The Redo action can only be used to recover what you have cancelled by performing an Undo. It cannot
be used to perform actions not cancelled by an Undo.

1. Click Redo in the Standard toolbar or select Edit > Redo xxx (or press Ctrl+Y), "xxx"
corresponding to the name of the last action undone.

2. If you want to redo the last action more than once, simply repeat step 1 as many times as

required.

When there is no action to redo, Redo is replaced by Repeat, enabling you in the right
conditions to restart a command that you just used.
However, when a command run in repeat mode is interrupted, it is automatically restarted
afterwards and this, even if you click Cancel. The only way to interrupt a command in repeat
mode is to select another command (such as Select, for instance).

3. If you want to display an history of actions that can be redone in the active document, click Redo

with history :
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 276
The name of the document in which you are about to redo actions is displayed at the top of the
dialog box (where you can see "Links.CATProduct").

The Redo with history dialog box lets you choose the actions you wish to redo from the
numbered list displayed in the bottom part, the most recent undone action being displayed at
the top of the list.

Each action is identified by its name, for instance "(Paste Special)" refers to Edit > Paste
Special. Action names corresponding to an internal transition inside a command (e.g. "Select
search results...") are followed by ... to distinguish them from global commands.
You can undo then redo internal transitions as long as you are in the command. If several undo
actions are performed successively until the command itself is undone, then you cannot redo its
internal transitions.
For instance, suppose the following scenario with two different cases:

● step 1: copy an object

● step 2: paste the object
● step 3: select the object then move it

Case 1
Click Undo: this moves the object back to its original position in step 2.
Click Redo: this moves the object to the location defined in step 3.
You can undo then redo the move since you are still in the Select command.

Case 2
Click Undo: this moves the object back to its original position in step 2.
Click Undo once again: the paste action is canceled and you go back to step 1.
Click Redo: the object is pasted.
But you cannot redo step 3 after this and if you display the history, you can see that it is
empty. You cannot redo the move since the second undo impacts the Paste command and not
the Select command anymore.

If you want to redo the first action only, you just need to click the Redo button since the
first action is already highlighted in the list: the action is redone and removed from the history.
If you want to redo the first four actions, all you need to do is to click the last action to be
redone (i.e. the fourth one in our example): clicking an action implies that all former actions are
selected as well and thus, redone in order to keep the history.
If you change your mind and decide to redo the first two actions instead, click the second action
in the list: only the first two actions are selected and not the first four anymore.

Bear in mind that one history is used per document ; the history of actions is not forwarded
from one document to another. As a consequence, redoing actions in a document opened
several times simultaneously (e.g. when opening a CATPart and a CATProduct containing this
CATPart) may corrupt data. It is recommended not to redo actions in a document that has been
modified in another window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 277

4. When satisfied with your selection, click the Redo button to redo all the selected actions.
The dialog box stays open and you can keep on redoing actions if needed.

5. To close the Redo with history dialog box, click Close.

More about the Redo capability

● Some actions cannot be redone. When this is the case the Redo icon is grayed out
● Sometimes, the Redo icon is not grayed out but when you run the command, no action is
redone. The reason is that a modification has been registered meanwhile and therefore, no
Redo action is allowed. In that case, the Redo stack is emptied after clicking the Redo icon
which is then grayed out.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 278

Cutting and Pasting Objects

This task shows you how to remove the selection and paste it to the desired location.

Keep in mind that the application workbenches offer a variety of specific cutting and pasting scenarios.
Contextual features such as fillets or extracts cannot be pasted if their parent element (edge, face, etc.)
has not been previously selected.

1. Select the object(s) you want to cut.

2. To cut, you can either:

● click Cut in the Standard toolbar

● select Edit > Cut
● press Ctrl+X
● right-click then select Cut, or
● in the geometry area or the specification tree, drag the selection (although not a graphical
cut, this is equivalent to the cut operation).

Note: This places what you cut in the clipboard.

3. To paste, you can either:

● click Paste in the Standard toolbar

● select Edit > Paste
● press Ctrl+V
● right-click then select Paste, or
● in the geometry area or the specification tree, drop what you are dragging (see above).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 279

More about the Cut command

When cutting new, modified or pointed documents, a warning message gives you a list of unsaved
documents that will be removed and prompts you to:

● click Yes if you want to edit these modified documents. This opens in a new window each document
listed in the warning message
● click No if you do not want to keep the modifications
● click Cancel to cancel the cut operation and restore the previous state.

"Pointed documents" implies directly pointed documents as well as documents indirectly pointed by a
document about to be cut. For instance, when cutting a sub-product, all the modified CATPart documents
included in this sub-product will be listed in the warning.

Nevertheless, note that documents may not be listed in the warning message. This is the case when a
document is:

● edited in another editor. For instance, if you open a CATPart document using the Open in New
Window contextual command then cut one of its instances, you will not be asked to edit the
document
● pointed by another document edited in another editor.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 280

Copying and Pasting Objects

This task shows you how to copy the selection and paste it to the desired location.

1. Select the object you want to copy.

2. To copy, you can either:

● click Copy in the Standard toolbar

● select Edit > Copy
● press Ctrl+C
● right-click then select Copy, or
● in the geometry area or the specification tree, press and hold down the Ctrl key and drag
the selection.

This places what you copy in the clipboard.

3. To paste, you can either:

● click Paste in the Standard toolbar

● select Edit > Paste
● press Ctrl+V
● right-click then select Paste, or
● in the geometry area or the specification tree, drop what you are dragging (see above).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 281

Note that:
● The application workbenches offer a variety of specific copying and pasting scenarios.
● Contextual features such as fillets or extracts cannot be pasted if their parent element (edge, face,
etc.) has not been previously selected.

More about the Paste command

When pasting several kinds of features simultaneously, these features are be pasted with the first paste
format available in the Paste Special list, provided that each of the pasted features accepts this format.

Let's suppose you multi-select then paste three features: "Body.1", "Body.2" and "GeometricalSet.1":

● the Paste Special formats available in this case are "As Result With Link" and "As Result" (in order of
appearance in the list of the Paste Special dialog box)
● "GeometricalSet.1" does not accept the "As Result With Link" format.

As a consequence, the features are pasted "As Result".

For more information on pasting object using special formats, refer to Using the Paste Special...
Command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 282
Using the Paste Special... Command

Pasting Solid Objects Using the Specification Tree

Pasting Surface Objects Using the Specification Tree
Pasting Contextual Features and Surface Objects Using the Geometry Area
General Rules for Managing the Paste Destination
How Are Sub-Elements Copied?

This task explains how to use the Paste Special command. This implies the understanding of the type of features you can paste using this command as well
as the various formats available for pasting these features.

Open the CCP.CATProduct document:

 In our example, the CCP.CATProduct document contains
CATIA Infrastructure some
Version 5 of the
Release 16types of features you can paste using the Paste
Page 283 Special... command. Here is the
detailed list of the features:
● Part body
● Body.n (provided that it contains a solid feature such as a pad)
● Pad
● Sketch
● Geometrical set
● Points, lines, planes, etc., i.e. surface elements
● Constraints
● Parameters.

Depending on the type of object that you are pasting, you can choose between the following formats:
● As specified in Part document: the object is copied as it has been created but generally without its design specifications. For instance, surface features
cannot be copied with their design specifications whereas pads can
● As Result With Link: the object is copied without its design specifications and is linked to the original object. In other words, whenever the original
object is modified, the copied object may be manually updated to reflect the changes
● As Result: the object is copied without its design specifications and without any link with the original object. It is considered as an autonomous entity.
However, note that as far as ordered geometrical sets, hybrid bodies and part bodies are concerned, only the final result is copied
● As Specified in Product Structure: the source instance is duplicated and the link to the source reference is kept. A new instance of the source is
created and it has the same reference as the source. For detailed information, refer to "Paste Special" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide
● As Specified in Assembly
● As Result With Link Flat Mode (to paste a flattened object).

The following table sums up which feature can be pasted "as special" using which format:

Features Part Body.n Pad Sketch Geom. Surface Parameter Constraint

body set feature
Formats

As specified in Part document

As Result With Link

As Result

As Specified in Assembly

As Specified in Prod. Structure

As Result With Link Flat Mode

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 284

Now let's go to copying objects!

Pasting Solid Objects Using the Specification Tree

This scenario assumes there are two documents: CCP.CATProduct, containing the elements to be copied, and the target document.

1. Select PartBody.

2. Select Edit > Copy.

3. Select Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens and displays three paste options, detailed hereafter.

● if you select As Result, a solid is created under:

a body named "Body.n", n being or under a body with an identical name if the original
incremented according to the number of body has been previously renamed via
existing bodies: Edit > Properties > Feature Properties:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 285

When the In the main object check box is selected in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Part Infrastructure > Display, a solid
is created under a body named "Result of BodyUserName" if the original body has been renamed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 286

This solid can, in turn, be copied on the condition that it is pasted onto a mechanical body and in the first position in the mechanical body
(in case there is no body to paste the solid, a new body is created).

Note that wif you select a location for the copied element, the result is the same.

However, if you paste "PartBody" As Result in a new CATPart document, the result is as follows:

The reason is that pasting As Result objects such as ordered geometrical sets, part bodies or hybrid bodies means that only the final
result (a solid named "Solid.1" in the example above) is copied.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 287
● if you select As specified in Part document:

The object is copied with its design specifications, each component number being incremented.

In case of a solid with surface features, we recommend that you use the multi-selection to select individually each object to be copied. In order to
make sure to copy all the desired objects, you can select Tools > Parent Children or Tools > Show Historical Graph to display the genealogical
relationships between the different components.
Another method is to use PowerCopies. For more information on using PowerCopies, refer to Version 5 Generative Shape Design User`s Guide -
Managing Power Copies.

● if you select As Result With Link:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 288

The object is copied without its design specifications. The pasted object is identified by one of these two symbols:

● a blue arrow indicates that the geometry has been pasted to the same document and is still linked to the original object.
The pasted object can be manually updated whenever the original object is modified.
This copy is located under a body named "Body.n", "n" being incremented according to the number of existing bodies.
In case the original body has been previously renamed by the user via Edit > Properties > Feature Properties > Feature Name
and if the In the main object check box is selected in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Part Infrastructure > Display, the
copy is located under a body named "Result of BodyUserName"
● a circle indicates that the geometry has been copied from a document different from the document to which it has been pasted.

For more information on the various referenced geometry symbols, refer to Symbols Used in the Specification Tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 289

More about solids pasted As Result with Link

● when opening a document containing a body pasted As Result with Link, the corresponding symbol displayed in the specification tree will be

. This symbol means that the pointed document has been found but not loaded. To correct this, right-click the object in the tree then select
Load or select Edit>Links... then the Load button.

The symbol will then change to to indicate that the object has been copied from a document different from the document it has been
pasted to and that it is synchronized with its reference

● if you deactivate a solid pasted As Result with Link, its symbol in the specification tree changes from to to indicate that the external
link is deactivated (the solid is isolated just like a datum) but not the geometry
● when a feature is pasted As Result with Link, the color (if any) is kept. However, note that this color is not considered as a synchronizable
information: the color is only copied when the feature is pasted and therefore, you will not be able to update it if the color of the original feature
is modified.

Pasting Surface Objects Using the Specification Tree

This scenario assumes that there are two documents: CCP.CATProduct, containing the elements to be copied, and the target document.

Open the CCP.CATProduct document.

1. Select Point.1.

2. Select Edit > Copy.

3. Select Edit > Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box opens and displays three paste options:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 290

Depending on the paste location you select, the result is as follows:

● if you select PartBody, the point is copied under the current body (if suitable), then
the first available Geometrical Set if there is one. The number of the copy is incremented, whatever Paste option you choose

In case no Geometrical Set exists, a new Geometrical Set is created to paste the point.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 291

● if no paste location has been previously selected, the result is identical to the one detailed above, i.e. the point will be copied under the current
Geometrical Set (if suitable), then the first available Geometrical Set if there is one, whatever Paste option you choose:

the point is copied under the current body or in case no Geometrical Set exists, a new
(if suitable), then the first available Geometrical Set is created to paste
Geometrical Set if there is one. The the point
number suffixing the name is incremented
accordingly

● if you copy the point to a new document using As specified in Part document:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 292

the point is copied under the current body or under a new Geometrical Set if no
(if suitable), then the first available Geometrical Set exists
Geometrical Set if there is one. The
number suffixing the name is incremented
accordingly

● An external reference cannot be pasted As specified.

If you want to paste an internal import, make sure that the geometry has been copied with its reference, otherwise you will not be
able to paste it
● An element aggregated by a geometrical feature cannot be pasted As specified. In the example below, if you copy Split.2 then paste
it onto Geometrical Set.2, the Paste Special dialog box only displays As Result and As Result With Link. The reason is that Split.2
is not an autonomous element and belongs to Split.1.
However, if you copy Split.1 with Split.2, you can paste both elements As specified (as shown in the picture to the right) because
Split.1 and Split.2 are considered as a single entity:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 293

If you copy then paste Split.1 As Result (or As Result With Link), only Split.1 is pasted.

● if you select As Result With Link:

the point is copied under a node named or under the Geometrical Set if you select an
"External References" if you select the Part Geometrical Set
Body, the part itself or no destination at all
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 294

In both cases, the pasted element contains a green symbol indicating that it has been copied from a document different from the
document it is pasted to and that it is synchronized with its reference.

Note:

❍ Copy > Paste is an explicit action. As a consequence, a feature pasted "As Result With Link" can be pasted as an external reference
but will always appear in Show mode, even if the Create external references in Show mode check box is not selected in Tools >
Options > Infrastructure > Part Infrastructure > General
● when a feature is pasted As Result with Link, the color (if any) is kept. However, note that this color is not considered as a
synchronizable information: the color is only copied when the feature is pasted and therefore, you will not be able to update it if the
color of the original feature is modified.

● if you select As Result:

the point is copied under the current body or under a new Geometrical Set if no
(if suitable), then the first available Geometrical Set exists:
Geometrical Set if there is one. The object
number is incremented.

In both cases, the pasted element contains a red symbol indicating that the pasted element is isolated, i.e. it can no longer be edited.

Note: pasting a geometrical set As Result is recursive, i.e. all the elements located below the geometrical set are also be pasted.
In the following example, when copying then pasting "Geometrical Set.1" As Result onto "Part1", you can see that the resulting copy
(named "Geometrical Set.1") contains all the elements included in Geometrical Set.1:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 295

If the In the main object check box is selected in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Part Infrastructure > Display, the
"Result of" prefix is added to the resulting copy. In our example, it would be named "Result of Geometrical Set.1".

More about pasting surface objects

● If a surface or wireframe feature has been renamed via Edit > Properties > Feature Properties prior to copying it, this feature is pasted
as "Result of SurfaceUserName" when using As Result or As Result with Link, and as "Copy of SurfaceUserName" when using As
Specified in Part Document only when the In the main object check box is selected in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Part
Infrastructure > Display.
This "Copy of ..." or "Result of ..." prefix is used only if the document in which the element is pasted already contains a feature
renamed "SurfaceUserName". If the name "Copy of SurfaceUserName" conflicts with the name of an existing feature, the system will
try to name the pasted feature "Copy (2) of SurfaceUserName" and if this new name is already used, it will try "Copy (3) of
SurfaceUserName" and so on.
If the user pastes in an empty CATPart, the name "SurfaceUserName" does not conflict with any other name and thus, can be kept as
is.
When the No name check or Under the same tree node check box is selected, no prefix is added

● If you copy then paste As Result a surface element which is not a point, a line, a surface or a plane, the result will be a line, a curve, a
circle or a surface according to the geometrical dimension and the type of the element.
If the dimension cannot be determined (this is the case for features containing several geometrical domains with a different dimension such as a
point and a line or a line and a plane), the result is a 3DDatum.
In the example below, when "Split.1" is copied then pasted As Result onto "Part1", the resulting element is a surface ("Surface.2"):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 296

● If you copy then paste As Result With Link a surface element which is not a point, a line, a surface or a plane, then the result is a curve or
a surface according to the geometrical dimension.
The result can be neither a line, nor a circle because it is not possible to synchronize a line or a circle with a general curve.

Pasting Contextual Features and Surface Objects Using the Geometry Area

This scenario aims at explaining how to paste contextual features and surface objects by selecting an object in the geometry area.
In our example, we assume there are two documents: CCP.CATProduct, containing the elements to be copied, and the target document.

Open the CCP.CATProduct document.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 297

Contextual Features

1. In the CCP.CATProduct document, select EdgeFillet.1.

2. Select Edit > Copy.

3. Access the target document.

Three results might occur depending on the paste location and the elements contained in the target document:

a. if you try to paste the edge fillet onto a part body with no pad, an error occurs since a fillet needs an element of type "Pad" to be pasted to.
The following window appears:

b. if you try to paste it to a pad with its sketch and you select one or more edges, the edge fillet is correctly pasted:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 298

c. if you try to paste it to a pad with its sketch without selecting any paste location, an error occurs since several edges exist and the following
dialog box is displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 299

● Click Edit then OK to close the Feature Definition Error dialog box
● In the Edge Fillet Definition dialog box opens, select the objects to fillet as well as the radius value and the propagation. (Refer to the
Version 5 - Part Design User's Guide for more information on creating an edge fillet)

Note that if you select the line Edge.1, the Edit dialog box appears instead of the Edge Fillet Definition dialog box to let you
select the element to paste the fillet to.

● Click OK to validate.

The edge fillet is pasted:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 300

Selecting the Deactivate button results in the deactivation of the edge fillet representation, i.e. it appears in the specification tree only
with the following symbol:

Selecting the Delete button amounts to clicking the Close button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 301

Note: As far as contextual features with multiple entries are concerned, we recommend that you use PowerCopies to copy/paste multiple elements
or single elements taking multiple features as entry specifications. For more information on using PowerCopies, refer to the Version 5 Generative
Shape Design User`s Guide - Managing Power Copies.

Surface Objects

1. In the CCP.CATProduct document, select Line.1.

2. Select Tools > Parent/Children:

This window displays the dependencies between the elements to be copied.

For detailed information on the Parent/Children... command, refer to the Version 5 Generative Shape Design User`s Guide - "Parents and
Children".
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 302

3. Once these dependencies are displayed, you can either select only the necessary elements (using the multi-selection) or select the whole Open Body

before pasting them using Edit > Paste Special.

General Rules for Managing the Paste Destination

Below are detailed the general rules that are applied when pasting an element using the Paste Special command:
● if the paste destination you select is not appropriate, an error window is displayed
● if the paste destination is a geometrical feature, the element is pasted after the selected geometrical feature (if applicable)
● if the paste destination is a body (e.g. part body, geometrical set), the application pastes the element in the body and in last position
● if the paste destination is a part
❍ for a geometrical feature, the application tries to find a destination based on the current feature
❍ for a body or a set, the element is pasted under the part

● if no paste destination has been selected or if you are working with power copies, the application tries to paste the element in or after the current feature.

The rules that apply when creating geometrical features also apply when pasting them as shown in the following table:

Can be pasted in Part body Part body Geometrical Ordered

(created (created from set
before V5R14
Geometrical set feature V5R14) onwards)
Part body No No No No

Geometrical set Yes No Yes No

Ordered geometrical set No Yes No Yes

As far as power copies are concerned, the rules that are applied are the following if the feature to be pasted is a geometrical set or an ordered geometrical
set:
● if the geometrical set was located under the part as defined in the power copy, the feature is pasted under the part
● if the geometrical set was a sub-geometrical set (i.e. located under a body or under another set), the feature is pasted according to the current feature.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 303

How Are Sub-Elements Copied?

The Copy command works as follows when dealing with sub-elements:
● if you select a sub-element such as a face, an edge or a vertex in the geometry then copy it, the copy will include the first element that can be copied and
not only the sub-element itself.
For instance, if you copy a face of a pad, the whole pad will be included in the copy
● you cannot copy a publication of a sub-element (edge, face or vertex). If you try to do so, an error message will appear.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 304

Deleting Objects

This task shows you how to delete an object.

1. Select the object(s) you wish to delete, either in the specification tree or in the geometry tree.

The object(s) selected are highlighted in both the geometry area and the specification tree.

2. Select Edit > Delete or right-click then select Delete.

Deleting objects may lead to deleting other objects dependent on the object to be deleted.

When this is the case, a dialog box appears identifying which features are impacted by the deletion, and
prompting you to decide whether to delete the impacted features or not.

For detailed information on the options displayed in this dialog box, refer to "Deleting Features" in the Version 5 -
Part Design User's Guide.

3. Click More>> when necessary for more advanced deletion possibilities:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 305

For instance, you can replace "Sketch.1" with another sketch. To do so, click "PartBody\Sketch.1": this displays
"Sketch.1" in the Replace box and you can then select the replacing sketch in the geometry area or in the
specification tree.
The sketch is deleted and the name of the replacing item is now displayed in the With box as shown below:

4. When finished, click OK to confirm.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 306

More about the Delete command

When deleting new, modified or pointed documents, a warning message gives you a list of unsaved documents that will be
removed and prompts you to:

● click Yes if you want to edit these modified documents. This opens in a new window each document listed in the warning
message
● click No if you do not want to keep the modifications
● click Cancel to cancel the delete operation and restore the previous state.

"Pointed documents" implies directly pointed documents as well as documents indirectly pointed by a document about to be
deleted. For instance, when deleting a sub-product, all the modified CATPart documents included in this sub-product will be
listed in the warning.

Nevertheless, note that documents may not be listed in the warning message. This is the case when a document is:

● edited in another editor. For instance, if you open a CATPart document using the Open in New Window contextual
command then delete one of its instances, you will not be asked to edit the document
● pointed by another document edited in another editor.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 307

About the Properties Command

The Properties command lets you access the properties (graphic, mechanical, drafting, piping, etc.) of an
object. This object can be a feature (such as a pad), a body, a part, and so on.

To display the properties of an object, first select the object, either in the geometry area or in the
specification tree, then select Edit > Properties (or press ALT+Enter) or right-click then select
Properties.

A Properties dialog box similar to the one below is displayed:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 308

The various properties available for the selected object are grouped together in several tabs according to
their category.
In our example, when selecting a part body, we can access the following tabs: Feature Properties,
Graphic and Mechanical.
However, as explained above, the name and number of tabs displayed in the Properties dialog box
varies according to the type of object you select. For instance, when accessing the properties of a sheet,
the Properties dialog box looks like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 309

All these tabs are detailed in the documentations of the workbenches in which they are implemented.
Regarding the example below, the Sheet tab is detailed in the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting User's
Guide.

About the More... button

Some applications, Drafting for example, do not display all available tabs in the Properties dialog box
when it is first displayed. Click the More... button to access any other tabs. A progress bar appears:

You can either wait until more properties are displayed (and this may take a long time), or interrupt the
command by clicking Cancel.
If interrupted, the Properties dialog box returns to its original state, i.e. as if the More... button had
not been clicked.
In both cases (interruption or not), the More... button then disappears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 310

About the Define other properties... button

You can also add properties to a .CATPart or a .CATProduct document by clicking the Define other
properties... button displayed in the Product tab. This tab is displayed only when displaying the
properties of a part or a product.
Clicking this button opens the following dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 311

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to "Modifying Component Properties" in the Version 5 -
Product Structure User's Guide.

About preselected objects

Note that when displaying the properties of a preselected object (for instance, you point at an object in
the specification tree without clicking it then press ALT+Enter), the Properties command lets you
access the object properties but OK and Apply are grayed out as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 312

This means that even if the values contained in the dialog box can be modified, you will not be able to
apply your modifications to the preselected object.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 313

Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

This task shows you how to display and edit the graphic properties of a selected object using the
Properties dialog box.

Before you start, note the following general information:

Inheritance for Assembly objects

The following properties can be inherited: color, transparency, line type and line weight. This inheritance
can be deactivated by doing one of the actions below depending on the property you do want to inherit:

● select No Color in the Color list

● select No Linetype in the Line Type list
● select No Width in the Thickness list
● clear the option next to the Transparency slider.

For detailed information on graphic properties applied to products, refer to "Managing Graphic Properties
in Products" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide.

Inheritance for Mechanical Modeler objects

● When a mechanical object (a pad, for instance) has been assigned a color, this color is used to
display the object. Otherwise, the object is displayed using the color of its father element (i.e. the
Part Body).
To reset the inheritance from the father to the children, select the Reset properties command from
the Edit menu or from the pad contextual menu. Bear in mind that this command cancels any local
modification applied to the graphic properties of the pad (including color and transparency)
● The following properties are set at the Part Body level and cannot be inherited: point symbol, line
thickness and line type.

Materials

When a material has been applied onto a part with Material selected in View > Render Style >

Customize View (or with the Shading with Material icon selected in the View toolbar), the
graphic properties defined in the Properties dialog box have no impact on the part display anymore.
As a consequence, if you need to modify the transparency, for instance, this must be done in the
material properties. For detailed information on modifying material properties and on materials in
general, refer to the Version 5 - Real Time Rendering User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 314

1. Select the object.

The object to be selected when using the Part Design application is the PartBody item in the
specification tree.

2. Select Edit > Properties command (or press ALT+Enter) or right-click then select Properties.

A Properties dialog box similar to the one below is displayed:

3. Click the Graphic tab to display the graphic properties of the current object:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 315

In the above dialog box, the graphic properties available for editing are:

● Color (colors the current object) and Transparency for the fill
● Color, Linetype and Thickness for edges
● Line, Linetype and Thickness for lines and curves
● Color and Symbol for points
● Show and Pickable attributes
● LowInt
● Layers
● Rendering Style.

However, do not forget that the look of the Properties dialog box varies according to the type
of the selected object.
When displaying the graphic properties of an Assembly object, the dialog box looks like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 316

4. To set object colors, use the Color list.

A list appears containing:

● a blank color box (No Name)

● a list of sixteen default colors from the color palette, ready for use
● More Colors...
● No Color (for Assembly objects only).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 317

No Color lets you deactivate the color inheritance for Assembly objects. You can then apply a
color onto a face without having to modify the product color. To do so:

a. select the product

b. access the Properties dialog box
c. choose No Color in the Color list
d. select the face onto which you want to apply the color
e. access the face's graphic properties
f. select the desired color from the Color list.

5. Select the desired color.

The selected color is now displayed in the field in the list. Pointing the cursor over the list
displays the name of the selected color.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 318

Color on Assembly objects

When applying a color onto an Assembly object, any other element located at a lower level in
the specification tree inherits this color and the list displays the color of the Assembly object.
However, the color modification impacts only the display at rendering level and not the graphic
properties. This can be useful, for instance, to highlight an object among others without
altering its graphic properties.
If you want to deactivate the inheritance mechanism, click the Color list: all the elements
located at a lower level have their own color back and No Color is displayed in the list.

When working with Edges and points and Shading selected, the color applied to the product
is also applied to the mesh but not to lineic elements (edges, sketches, etc.) which turn black.
In this case, it not possible to modify the color of these lineic elements.
However, when working with the Edges and points check box selected, the color applied to
the product is also applied to lineic elements.

Color on surfaces

You can apply a color on surfaces' sub-elements. Let's suppose the following model:

If you select the the sub-element "EdgeFillet.1" then access its graphic properties, you see
that the fill Color list is available:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 319

You can then select the desired color from the combo box and click Apply or OK to confirm.
The color is applied to the selected face only:

Note:

● if you modify the geometry, the sub-element keeps its color when the geometry is updated
● if you create a new feature using the sub-element's surface, the color of the sub-element
is not propagated to the new feature.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 320

6. To access more colors, or to create your own colors, click More Colors... at the bottom of the list

to access the Color palette:

In the Basic Colors area, among the 48 colors provided, 16 are the same as those in the
previous list. The remaining are extra colors.

The Custom Colors area contains sixteen free boxes in which you can place your custom
colors.

7. Click the Define Custom Colors >> button to display the full color palette and color

customization tools:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 321

The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum.

Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below
the spectrum.

The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary
according to where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields
provided to suit your exact color specifications.

Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 322

8. Once you are happy with the color, click one of the free boxes in the Custom Colors area, then

Click the Add to Custom Colors button to add the custom color.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 323

9. Click on the custom color, then OK.

The color is now displayed in the Color fill box of the Graphic Properties tab.

10. Click Apply in the Properties dialog box.

The color of the selected object is changed.

11. To make the part more or less transparent, drag the Transparency slider to set the appropriate

value (between 0 and 255).

Note that you can set either of two transparency modes:

● Screen Door
● Alpha Blending

via the Performance tab in Tools > Options. For more information, refer to Customizing
Performance Settings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 324

As far as .asm documents are concerned, you can select or clear the Transparency check box
to apply or not a transparency inheritance independently from the color of the selected object.

12. To set color edges on parts, use the Color list for edges and proceed the same way.

13. To set edge line type and thickness, use the appropriate lists.

14. If you have selected a line or a curve, you can set the line and curve color, the linetype and

thickness the same way as for parts.

15. If you have selected a point, you can set the point color in the same way as for parts. To select

the symbol used to represent the point, select the symbol from the Symbol list.

16. In the Show, Pick and Layers area, the Shown check box indicates if the object is always visible

(i.e. in Show mode) or always hidden (i.e. in No Show mode).

This check box is displayed for information only and cannot be modified.

For more information about the show and no show modes, refer to Hiding and Showing
Objects.

17. Still in the Show, Pick and Layers area, select the Pickable check box if you want the object to

always be selectable.

18. The Layer list indicates the number of layers the selected objects are assigned to. Otherwise

(when nothing is selected) it indicates the current layer.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 325

When pointing to the Layer list, a tootip indicates whether the layer definition location is
stored in the document or in the user settings (i.e. the CATSettings directory).
However, bear in mind that this tooltip is displayed for information only, you cannot modify
the storage location which has been set as explained below:

● for CATProduct documents, the definition is stored in the user settings

● for CATPart documents, the definition (if there is one) is stored in the document. If no
definition is stored in the document, the CATPart documents use the definition stored in
the user settings
● for CATDrawing documents, the definition is stored in the document.

Use the list to choose among the list of named layers and assign the chosen layer to the
selected objects: None, 0 General, 1-999 (according to the number of layers in the Layer list).
For more information, refer to Assigning Objects to Layers.

The Layer box also contains the Other Layers... command which lets you create your own
named layers. Refer to Creating New Layers for more details.

19. You can select the Low Intensity check box to apply the low-intensity color to the selected

object. The color to be applied to low-intensity elements can be modified defined in Tools >

Options > General > Display > Visualization.

20. The Rendering Style list lets you select the rendering style you want to apply to the selected

element, provided that this element supports rendering styles.

This rendering style will then be used to visualize the object independently from the rendering

style applied to the 3D window when using the Enable object view mode visualization mode.

Note that this option is identical to the one provided in the Graphic Properties toolbar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 326

Rendering styles can be applied only on .CATPart documents or on .CATPart documents

embedded in .CATProduct documents:

● Part Body

You can apply a rendering style to each body composing the part body and this, even if a

body is embedded into another one.

All the elements gathered in the part body or in the body inherit the rendering style of

their parent. As a consequence, you cannot apply a rendering style to the child solid

features (such as a pad or a fillet)

● Geometrical Set

You can apply a rendering style to the Geometrical Set as a whole and to each child

feature in the graph ; each feature may be applied a different rendering style. If no

rendering style has been applied to a feature, this feature will be displayed with the

rendering style applied to the father element or, if no father exists, with the rendering

style of the viewer used to display the feature

● Shape Body

The behavior is identical to the one of the Geometrical Set except that different child

features may share the same visual representation and therefore, the same rendering

style.

By default, no rendering style is applied but you can choose among the following styles:

● No Specific Rendering

This is the default mode. You can use it to remove a rendering style that has been

previously applied

● Transparent

Displays the selected element in transparent mode:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 327

● Wireframe

Displays the selected element in wireframe mode:

● Shading

Displays the selected element in shading mode:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 328

● Shading with Edges

Displays the selected element in shading with edges mode:

20. Click Apply or OK to confirm.

About Automation

Macros are provided to retrieve and change the following graphic properties:

● color
● opacity
● line type
● line thickness
● symbol
● show
● pick
● layers.

Refer to "Infrastructure Automation Objects" in the Enterprise Architecture Automation - 3D Visualization

documentation for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 329

Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

This task shows you how to display and edit the graphic properties of a selected object using the Graphic
Properties toolbar.

Graphic Properties vs. Edit > Properties

The graphic properties available in this toolbar are identical to those of the Properties dialog box,
except for the Layer list.
However, do not forget that this toolbar does not behave like the Properties dialog box: when
modifying a color, the Properties dialog box modifies the color of the selected object whereas the
Graphic Properties toolbar may sometimes modify the color of a non-selected object in order to make
the color displayed on screen change.
For instance:
● when changing the color of an object inheriting the color from its product via the Properties dialog
box, this change is not displayed on the object. You need to deactivate the inheritance for the
product to see the result

● when changing the color of an object inheriting the color from its product using the Graphic
Properties toolbar, this modifies the product color (and not the one of the object).

1. To display the Graphic Properties toolbar (which is hidden by default), select View > Toolbars

> Graphic Properties.

The Graphic Properties toolbar is displayed:

The capture below illustrates the relation between the displayed boxes and the display they
impact:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 330

2. Painter lets you apply graphic properties from one object to another. To do so:

● select the object(s) on which you want to apply new graphic properties

● click Painter
● select the reference object, i.e. the object from which you will copy the graphic properties.

Painter does not allow you to copy all the graphic properties of an object, but only a set of
graphic properties for each list.
In case of a part body, for instance, it is not possible to modify the color of edges, or the color
of edges and faces at the same time. Only the color of faces can be modified.
The reason is that the Painter has the same effect as the lists displayed in the Graphic
Properties toolbar. When you use the fill Color list, you modify only the color of faces.
Therefore, when you use the Painter to modify a color, only the color of faces is impacted.

When you modify one of the graphic properties for a pad, the new graphic property
supersedes the one applied to the father element (i.e. the Part Body). The pad will no more
inherit the Part Body graphic properties, even if you reset the modified graphic property to its
original state.
To reset the inheritance from the father to the children, set the modified graphic property to
Auto in the Graphic Properties toolbar.

3. Choose the color to be applied to the object using the fill Color list.

A list appears containing:

● a blank color box (No Name)

● the Automatic option (which lets you make the color standard)
● a list of sixteen default colors from the color palette, ready for use
● the More Colors... option
● the No Color option (for Assembly objects only).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 331

The No Color option lets you apply a color onto a face without having to modify the product
color. To do so:

a. select the product in the specification tree

b. choose No Color in the Color list
c. select the face onto which you want to apply the color
d. select the desired color from the Color combo box.

4. Select the desired color.

The selected color is now displayed in the list. Pointing the cursor over the combo box displays
the name of the selected color.

5. To access more colors, or to create your own colors, click the More Colors... option at the

bottom of the list to access the color palette.

Refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for detailed information.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 332

6. Click the custom color, then Apply.

The color is now displayed in the Color fill list of the Graphic properties tab.

7. To display an object as transparent, use the Transparency list.

For instance, "100%" corresponds to a full visibility, "50%" to a semi-transparency and "0%" to a

non-transparency (the object is opaque).

Note that the visual feedback differs according to the transparency mode you set:

● Alpha Blending: similar to looking through clear glass. You can choose a value between 1
and 255
● Screen Door: similar to viewing an object through a mesh or a screen. This mode lets you
use only two values:
❍ "0" (the object is opaque)
❍ between 1 and 255 (1 pixel out of 2 is represented, which gives the illusion that the
transparency has been set to "50%" or "127/255").

via the Performance tab in Tools > Options. For more information, refer to Customizing
Performance Settings.

8. Set edge line type and weight using the appropriate lists.

If you have selected a line or a curve, you can set the line and curve color as well as the

linetype and weight the same way as for parts.

9. Set the point symbol you want to use to represent the point using the appropriate list.

You can set the point color in the same way as for parts.

10. The Rendering Style list lets you select the rendering style to be applied to the selected object,

provided that is supports rendering style attributes.

By default, no specific style is applied. You can choose among the following styles:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 333

● Auto
● Transparent
● Wireframe
● Shading
● Shading with Edges.

This option is identical to the one provided in the Properties dialog box.

Refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for detailed

information.

11. Use the Layer list to choose among the list of named layers and assign the chosen layer to the

selected objects: "None", "0 General", "1-999" (according to the number of layers in the Layer

list).

The Layer list indicates the number of layers the selected objects are assigned to. Otherwise

(when nothing is selected) it indicates the current layer.

Refer Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties for detailed information.

When pointing at the Layer list, a tooltip displays the layer name (if any), the layer number
as well as the storage location of the layer definition:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 334

The layer definition location is stored either in the document or in the user settings (i.e. the
CATSettings directory).
However, bear in mind that you cannot modify the storage location which has been set as
explained below:

● for CATProduct documents, the definition is stored in the user settings

● for CATPart documents, the definition (if there is one) is stored in the document. If no
definition is stored in the document, the CATPart documents use the definition stored in
the user settings
● for CATDrawing documents, the definition is stored in the document.

When using the list, you can also select Other Layers... to open the Named Layers dialog
box in which you can create and rename layers but also modify layer numbers.
For instance, to rename a layer, slowly click twice the line containing the layer name. This
makes the field editable and you can enter the new layer name as shown below:

Then, click anywhere outside the editable box to confirm the name before clicking OK to
validate.
For detailed information on how to use the Named Layers dialog box, refer to Adding and
Naming Layers.

When pointing again at the Layer list, you can see that the tooltip information is updated and
the new layer name is displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 335

12. Click the icon to access the Graphic Properties Wizard. Refer to Using the Graphic
Properties Wizard for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 336

Using the Graphic Properties Wizard

This task shows you how to access and use the Graphic Properties Wizard. This wizard is a viewer that displays the graphic
properties of the selected object and its parents and thus, makes it easier to identify which parent each object's graphic property
derives from.

Note: The Wizard cannot be used for Drafting documents.

Open the document Select.CATProduct.

1. To display the Graphic Properties toolbar (which is hidden by default), select View > Toolbars > Graphic Properties.

The Graphic Properties toolbar is displayed:

For detailed information on this toolbar, refer to Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar.

2. In the specification tree or geometry area, select the item on which you want information. In our example, we select

PartBody (in Part1.2).

Note that you cannot select multiple objects.

3. Click to open the Graphic Properties Wizard.

4. Use the list displayed in the bottom right part of the window to select the graphic property on which you want information

(Show in our example):

If do not select any item prior to launching the Graphic Properties Wizard, the window displays No Selection and lets
you select an element from the specification tree or the geometry area.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 337

The wizard is made up of the following elements:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 338
● Path of the selected object
Displays the hierarchy tree of the selected object. You cannot select multiple objects therefore one path only is
displayed
● Result path
Displays the "result" of the graphic property you have selected in the list. If no graphic property has been defined for
the selected object, Not Defined is displayed
● Global result
Shows the global result for the path displayed above. This result corresponds to what you see on screen
● Result arrow
Indicates which object the global result comes from
● Graphic Properties icon box
Lets you select the graphic property on which you want information by clicking the corresponding icon. An alternate
method is to use the Graphic Properties list
● Graphic Properties list
Lets you select the graphic property on which you want information by selecting the desired property in the list. An
alternate method is to use the Graphic Properties toolbar.

5. Click the icons available in the Graphic Properties icon box or use the Graphic Properties list to select the graphic property on

which you want more information.

Note: when no information is found on a graphic property, Not Defined is displayed next to the object name.

The Graphic Properties icon box lets you use the following icons (you can click the desired icon on the picture below to

access directly the corresponding description):

Color: indicates the color of each object in the path (equivalent to Color in the list) in the box displayed
to the right.
In our example, the color of PartBody displayed in the global result area is "green":

Opacity: displays the opacity value applied to each item in the path (equivalent to Opacity in the list).
The background color also reflects the opacity. The lighter the color, the less opaque the object:

LineType: displays the line type applied to edges (equivalent to LineType in the list). The boundary of
the box displayed to the right of each item is drawn according to the associated type as shown by the
following two examples:

Thickness: displays the line thickness (equivalent to Thickness in the list). When a thickness has been
defined, a line is displayed next to the object along with the corresponding value in millimeters. The
higher the value, the thicker the line:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 339

Symbol: displays the symbol used to represent the object, if any (equivalent to Symbol in the list):

Show: indicates whether an object is displayed in Show or NoShow mode (equivalent to Show in the
list). These two different modes are identified by two different background colors and two different
pictures:

Pick: indicates whether an object can be selected or not (equivalent to Pick in the list). These two
different modes are identified by two different background colors and two different pictures:

Layer: indicates which objects are visible or invisible (equivalent to Layer in the list). To assign objects
to layers, refer to Assigning Objects to Layers and to learn how to make objects visible or invisible, refer
to Using Visualization Filters.
The layer to which each object is assigned is identified by a different background color and the layer
number is displayed opposite the visibility information:

As you can see in the above picture, no layer number is indicated for the global result.

LowInt: indicates whether a low-intensity color has been applied to an object or not (equivalent to Low
Intensity in the list).
The default low-intensity color is "dark green" but you can change it in Tools > Options > General >
Display > Visualization.
When a low-intensity color has been applied, it is displayed in background. Otherwise, there is no
background color and the state is "Normal":
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 340

6. Select another object in the specification or in the geometry area.

The Graphic Properties Wizard window is automatically updated to display the graphic properties of the selected object.

7. When finished, click Close to close the window.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 341

Measuring Objects
This task introduces the Scale Planes command which lets you measure objects directly on screen with a
1:1 scale (i.e. real size display) or with a lower/greater scale according to your needs.

Note that you cannot use this capability when working with a multi-view configuration.

For an optimized accuracy, you need to store your screen dimensions (in millimeters), in the following two
variables:
● set CATWidthMMOfScreen = width_in_millimeters (on Windows)
or
export CATWidthMMOfScreen = width_in_millimeters (on UNIX)
● set CATHeightMMOfScreen = height_in_millimeters (on Windows)
or
export CATHeightMMOfScreen = height_in_millimeters (on UNIX)

Otherwise, the measured dimensions may vary depending on the operating system.

Open the ScalePlanes.CATProduct document.

1. Select View > Render Style > Perspective or View > Render Style > Parallel to display the

object in a perspective or parallel view, respectively.

In our example, the object is displayed in Parallel view:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 342

Note: Perspective is related to the size of the object being viewed and the distance from the
object to the observer.

2. In the power input field, key in the following command:

c:Scale Planes

then press Enter.

The Scale Planes command is also accessible via the Commands tab of the Customize dialog
box.
For more information on customizing commands, refer to Customizing Command Properties in
this guide.

The Scale Plane Properties dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 343

3. Click Apply to display the scale plane and keep the Scale Plane Properties dialog box:

As shown in the picture, the scale plane is represented by a transparent grid which lets you
visualize the object displayed behind.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 344
This grid is divided into squares and the space between these squares as well as the width and
height (in millimeters) correspond to the values displayed in the Scale Plane Properties
dialog box.

In our example, the width is 200 mm and the height is 100 mm. In the picture above, you can
see that:

● the width is divided into 20 squares, each of them being equal to 10 mm (as indicated in
the Vertical spacing box)
● the height is divided into 10 squares of 10 mm each (as indicated in the Horizontal
spacing box).

If you set the space between vertical and horizontal lines to "20 mm", the grid looks like this:

The width is now divided into 10 squares of 20 mm each and the height into 5 squares of 20
mm each.

4. In the Scale Plane Properties dialog box, key in a Scale value.

The default value ("1") provides a real size display whereas "0.5" corresponds to a halfsize
display. You can thus measure small objects by entering a scale factor greater than 1 as well as
big objects by entering a scale factor lower than 1.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 345

5. Set the scale plane Width and Height in millimeters.

In our example, we keep the default values.

6. Set the space between vertical and horizontal by entering a value (in millimeters) in the Vertical

spacing and Horizontal spacing boxes, respectively.

In our example, we keep the default values.

If the value you enter is not a multiple of the value set for Width or Height, the space

between squares are approximated to give a round number (and this may make it more difficult

to measure directly on screen).

Note: The Show the grid check box lets you activate or deactivate the grid display.
It is recommended to display the grid when you are working in a conical projection.

7. Click OK (or Apply then OK) to validate and close the dialog box.

8. Adjust the viewpoint so that the object is correctly snapped on the grid. To do so, follow the

instructions below according to the view you selected:

● if you are working in a parallel view (i.e. cylindrical projection), running the Scale Planes

command moves the user viewpoint so that the object is automatically displayed in the

selected scale.

You just have to translate the viewpoint horizontally or vertically to align the object on the

grid:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 346

The zoom mode is locked when running the Scale Planes command in a parallel view.

● if you are working in a perspective view (i.e. conical projection), zoom progressively until
the object is displayed in front of the grid then translate the object as necessary to align it
with the grid and facilitate the measurement:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 347

Let`s have a look at our model which has been correctly positioned.
We are now able to measure the hole diameter and we see that the size is comprised between
60 and 100 mm:

100 mm - 60 mm = 40 mm

We can also count the number of squares:

4 squares of 10mm each = 4 x 10 = 40 mm

according to the values defined in steps 3 to 5.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 348

Note: Translating or zooming the object does not affect the grid size since its dimensions are
defined in the Scale Plane Properties dialog box.

9. To exit the command, click Close in the Scale Plane Properties dialog box.

You can also key in c:Scale Planes once again in the power input field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 349

Moving Objects Using the 3D Compass

About the 3D Compass
Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass
Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass
Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command
Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects Automatically
Locking the Current Compass Orientation
Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the Screen
Locking the Compass to the Local Axis System
Swapping the Privileged Plane
Keeping the Privileged Plane the Most Visible during Viewpoint Manipulations
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 350

About the 3D Compass

You can use a graphic manipulator referred to as the 3D compass to perform a certain number of
manipulations on certain objects created and managed by certain applications (for example, Product
Structure, Assembly, FreeStyle Shaper, DMU Navigator, etc.).

You can also use the compass to manipulate viewpoint representations ("cameras") used to capture
viewpoints and materials (in P2 mode using the Real Time Rendering application).

The 3D compass is always active. You can show and hide the compass by toggling the View->Compass
command. Note that hiding the compass does not deactivate it.

The compass is displayed by default in the top right corner of the document.

The letters X, Y and Z represent the axes. The Z axis is the default orientation. The point close to the Z
axis is the free rotation handle used for freely rotating the compass and the document's objects at the
same time.

The red square is the compass manipulation handle you use to drag the compass and place on
objects to be manipulated. You can also rotate objects around this point.

The base of the compass, the XY plane, is the privileged plane. This concept is not useful when simply
using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators
which require working planes (for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points
using the FreeStyle Shaper).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 351

What Can You Do With the 3D Compass?

The 3D compass lets you:

● manipulate viewpoints using the mouse and compass: this is just another way of panning and
rotating all objects in the document at the same time
● move and rotate non-constrained objects using the mouse and compass

Moving objects in this context means physically moving them so as to redefine their spatial
coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system in a document. Moving must not be confused
with panning an object, which simply modifies the viewpoint from which you look at an object: the
position of the object in the document remains the same.
● move and rotate non-constrained objects using the Edit... contextual command
● lock the compass orientation
● snap the compass automatically onto a selected object
● set the plane in which you move objects parallel to the screen
● switch the privileged plane to the XZ or YZ planes of the compass
● use the privileged plane as a working plane in applications such as the FreeStyle Shaper application,
for example, when manipulating control point manipulators on planar patches and curves.

If you are also using the Assembly Design application, which provides a number of advanced positioning
tools, consider the 3D compass as a preliminary tool for positioning components in space prior to fine
positioning of those components within the assembly.

If you are using a space mouse, you can also manipulate the 3D compass when it is in the scene,
otherwise the space mouse lets you manipulate the viewpoint.

Which Objects Are We Talking About?

You can use the 3D compass to manipulate non-constrained objects, in other words, objects not linked
together by constraints. However, you can manipulate groups of objects in assemblies which are linked
to each other by constraints.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 352

About Moving Objects with the Compass

When you create a pad, for example, you create it from a sketch which itself is located in a fixed plane,
either a reference plane or a plane you create.

When you drag and drop the compass onto the pad (refer to Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and
Compass for more details), a message will inform you that certain elements in the pad are fixed (the
plane from which the sketch was created), and therefore you cannot move the pad.

If you right-click the sketch, then select Parent/Children, you see that the parent of the sketch is a
fixed plane. You cannot move the pad until you have either isolated the fixed element (using the Isolate
contextual command).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 353

Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and

Compass
This task explains how to manipulating viewpoints by simply dragging certain parts of the compass using
the mouse. This is just another way of panning and rotating all objects in the document at the same
time. You can:
● pan along the direction of any axis (X, Y or Z) of the compass
● rotate in a plane
● pan in a plane
● rotate freely about a point on the compass
● view the document perpendicular to any of the axes of the compass.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

Note: the 3D compass and the absolute axis at the bottom right of the document are aligned identically
by default.

1. Rotate to see how the objects, 3D compass and the absolute axis are rotated together.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 354

2. Point to the compass.

The cursor shape changes to: . You will also notice that the following parts of the compass
are highlighted as you point to them:

● compass axes
● arcs on the planes of the compass
● and the planes themselves.

When you drag any part of the compass, the cursor shape changes to: .

If you selected the Display manipulation bounding box check box in Tools > Options >
General > Display > Navigation, a box appears around the selected object if it can be
manipulated by the compass:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 355

The edges of the bounding box around a selected object always remain aligned with the
compass axes.

Note that the manipulation bounding box differs from the manipulation handle which looks like
this:

The display of this manipulation handle is controlled by the Manipulation Handle command
available in DELMIA products. For more information, refer to "Using the Manipulation Handle"
in the Version 5 - 3D Simulation for Manufacturing User's Guide on the DELMIA Documentation
CD-ROM.

3. Drag any axis on the compass.

The viewpoint is panned along the direction of the axis. For example, dragging the Z axis
upwards pans up along the Z axis like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 356

4. Drag an arc on the compass.

For example, dragging the arc YZ to the right rotates the objects in the plane subtended by
the arc YZ like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 357

Dragging close to the red square rotates the objects quickly; dragging further away from the
red square rotates more slowly. The rotation axis used is the same as that used when rotating
using the other rotation tools.

5. Drag a plane on the compass.

For example, dragging to the right the plane subtended by the arc ZY moves the objects on
the same plane like this:

Select View > Render Style > Perspective to perceive the effect more easily.

6. Drag the free rotation handle (the point at the top of the compass) to rotate the objects freely

like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 358

7. Point to either X, Y or Z to highlight the letter, then click the letter to make that axis

perpendicular to your eye-point.

Clicking the same letter reverses the point from which you view the objects. For example,
clicking the letter Z lets you view the document along the Z axis like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 359
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 360

Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and

Compass
Using the mouse and compass, you can manipulate not only viewpoints but also non-constrained objects
recognized by the compass, by moving or rotating them. You do so by dragging and dropping the
compass onto the object to be manipulated.

Object manipulation using the compass is also available for P1 users, except for those working in Part
Design and Generative Shape Design workbenches.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

The default compass orientation and the initial cursor shape are as follows:

1. Point to the compass manipulation handle (the red square located on the privileged plane at the

base of the compass).

The cursor shape changes to:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 361

2. Drag the compass.

As you drag the compass, the cursor shape changes to: , and the compass now looks like
this:

The axis is the Z axis by default. The square base represents the current privileged plane.

The privileged plane is realigned with one of the planes on the object and is snapped to the
object.

3. Release the mouse button to drop the compass onto the object.

Dropping the compass onto the object snaps the compass to the object and selects it. The
compass changes color; the default color is light green. You set this color using the Handles
list in Tools > Options > General > Display > Visualization.

In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the part. One possible result could look like
this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 362

In our example, the compass could also be oriented differently, depending on where you drop
the compass.

Note that the X axis is now w|x, the Y axis u|y, and the Z axis v|z; an extra letter is added is
this way to indicate that the axis in question is no longer oriented the same way as the
absolute reference axis in the bottom right corner.

When the compass is snapped onto an object, the letters identifying the compass axes are
displayed differently from the usual color and size: they are white (with a dark surrounding)
and their size is bigger for greater readibility whatever the background color.
This enables you to see more clearly the compass orientation, which is especially useful when
the compass is snapped onto objects with many different colors or with many small details.

Once the compass is snapped to the object, you can begin to manipulate the object. You do so
by simply dragging certain parts of the compass, exactly as you do to manipulate viewpoints
as explained in Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass. This time, the object
(and not the viewpoints) will be manipulated.

4. In our example, drag the X axis of the compass to move the part to the other side of the block,

then drop to reposition the part.

While dragging, the compass and a representation of the part are moved.

The distance from the origin of the axis (the red square or compass manipulation handle
located on the compass base) is displayed in real time as you move the object. The value
displayed will be preceded by the "-" sign (negative) if you move the object in the direction
opposite to the compass orientation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 363

The translation increments are preset: you cannot reset the translation increments displayed.

When you drop the compass, the pad is now positioned approximately like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 364

You can also:

● rotate the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass arcs): the degree of rotation
is also displayed in real time
● move the object in a plane (by dragging one of the compass planes): the distance from
the origin to the new location (along both axes in the plane) is displayed in real time
● rotate freely about a point on the compass (by dragging the free rotation handle at the top
of the compass)

as explained in Manipulating Viewpoints Using the Mouse and Compass.

5. Drag the compass away from the selected object and drop it.

The compass is now disconnected from the object, but maintains its orientation:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 365

6. To reorient the compass the same way as the absolute reference axis, and restore the compass

to its original position in the top right corner of the document, drag and drop the compass onto

the absolute reference axis.

The compass is repositioned at its original position and takes its original orientation:

To achieve the same effect, you can also press and hold down Shift, then drag and drop the
compass. Release the left mouse button before releasing Shift.

Selecting View > Reset Compass also restores the compass to its original position, but does
not restore the default orientation.

If you selected the Display manipulation bounding box check box in Tools > Options >
General > Display > Navigation, a box appears around the selected object if it can be
manipulated by the compass.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 366

In our example, click on an object to see the bounding box appear:

You can then drag any of the edges of the box to move the object in the corresponding
direction. Note also that the bounding box remains oriented the same way as the compass.

You can also align the compass on objects that the compass cannot manipulate: this technique
is useful if you want to detect a direction on the object for manipulating non-constrained
objects.

In our example, you could drag the compass onto the pad and align it with one of the pad
edges like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 367

Click OK when warned that you cannot move the pad.

You can then select the pad and drag the compass to move the pad in the same direction as
the edge of the pad. This is the ideal solution for manipulating several objects at a time. To do
so, select the first object, then press Ctrl and click other objects to add them to your
selection.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 368

Manipulating Objects Using the Edit... Command

This task explains how to manipulate objects precisely, using the Edit... contextual command. You can:
● reset the position of the compass (and selected object) via its manipulation handle (red square), by specifying
its X, Y and Z coordinates and rotation coordinates with respect to the center of the 3D scene
● translate the object (or just the compass) to a new position in increments along the X, Y and Z axes
● rotating the object (or just the compass) about the X, Y and Z axes in increments
● translate over a specified distance in the direction of the privileged plane
● translate over the distance between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select
● rotate through an angle you set, or an angle between two elements (line/edge/plane) you select.

You can only use the Edit... contextual command with the same objects as those with which you can use the
compass (for example, a planar patch).

You need access to a Version 5 - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. Drag and drop the compass onto the object, then point to the compass and right-click to display the 3D

compass, or double-click the compass to display the contextual menu.

In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the planar patch and right-click:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 369

2. Right-click then select Edit to display the Parameters for Compass Manipulation dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 370

The Parameters for Compass Manipulation dialog box stays open during manipulation.

Note that:

● the current coordinates of the compass manipulation handle (red square), with respect to the center
of the 3D scene, are displayed in the corresponding fields for the Position option. In our example, the
center of the 3D scene, in this case, is the point of intersection of the 3 planes located on the pad
● when the compass is snapped onto an object (whether the Parameters for Compass Manipulation
dialog box is open or not), the letters identifying the compass axes are displayed differently from the
usual color and size: they are white surrounded with dark-blue border and their size is 50% bigger for
greater readibility whatever the background color.
This enables you to see more clearly the compass orientation, which is especially useful when the
compass is snapped onto objects with many different colors or with many small details.

3. In the Coordinates area, select the axis system with respect to which you will edit the coordinates of the

compass. You can select:

● either the Absolute axis system: allows you to move the part with respect to the absolute axis

system of the product containing the part

● or the Active object: allows you to move the part with respect to the object which is active. To define

an object as being "active", double-click it in the specification tree: the object isl then highlighted in

blue to indicate it is active.

For instance, let's suppose the active object is a part with a local axis system defined as current: in

that case, choosing Active results in displaying the coordinates of the compass with respect to the

local axis system of the part.

4. Reset the X, Y and Z coordinates of the compass to zero, using the Position options, then click Apply.

In our example, because you dropped the compass onto the planar patch, the compass and the planar
patch are moved to the center of the 3D scene as follows:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 371

The Increment options let you translate or rotate the compass about the X, Y and Z axes in increments.
When using these options, axes are highlighted according to the increment button you click as shown
below:

Translation along U Rotation about U

Translation along V Rotation about V

Translation along W Rotation about W

Once an axis is highlighted, it remains so until:

● you highlight another axis by clicking it with the mouse

● you move the compass to another location using any interaction other than a click on one of the
increment buttons
● you close the Parameters for Compass Manipulation dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 372

5. To translate the compass and planar patch by increments along an individual axis (U, V or W), set the

translation values for an axis, then click the button or the button to translate in forward or reverse
direction, respectively.

6. To translate an object along a vector derived from two objects you select, click the Distance button in the

Measures area and select the two elements.

When you click the Distance button, all options in the dialog box are grayed out.

You can select any of the following:

● a point
● a line
● or a plane.

The value for the detected distance is highlighted in the appropriate fields, expressed in the units of the
compass. Note that, depending on the compass orientation, some or all of the X, Y and Z coordinates
might be calculated.

If the first element is a line or a plane, you can then select a second element or enter a distance. For
example, selecting a line implies that you want to translate the object in the direction of the line, and you
can enter the distance for the translation in the Distance field. However, if you just select the two
elements, the distance between the two is displayed in the Distance field, and the object will be
translated over this distance and in the same direction. If the second element is a plane, the direction of
translation is normal to the plane.

Then, click either the button or the button to the right of the Distance box to translate the
object in the reverse or forward direction, respectively.

7. To rotate, set the rotation angle and click the button or the button for the axis about which you
want to rotate.

For example, with the object still located at the center of the 3D scene, rotating about the U axis
produces this result:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 373

8. To rotate the object through the angle between two elements, click the Angle button and select the two

elements.

You can select a line or a plane. The angle value is displayed in the Angle box.
If the rotation axis is parallel to one of the compass axes, the value is also displayed in the appropriate
box in the Rotation increment area, the 2 other ones being reset to 0.

Then click the button or the button to rotate the compass and the object about the computed
rotation axis.

Bear in mind that you can reset entered increments at any time simply by clicking the button.

Once the compass is snapped to the object, you can drag its arcs to translate or rotate the object
according to the increments you entered in the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, the increments
are kept for the compass and bounding box motions.

When you wish to reset the compass and move it freely according to one direction, access the
Parameters for Compass Manipulation dialog box and set the corresponding value to 0.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 374

Snapping the Compass to Selected Objects

Automatically
This task explains how to snap the compass to a selected object, as an alternative to dragging and
dropping the compass onto the object.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

2. Select Snap automatically to selected object.

3. Select an object (either in the geometry area or in the specification tree).

In our example, we select the part named "Manipulators2":

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 375

The compass is snapped automatically only onto non-constrained objects recognized by the
compass. The compass keeps its current alignment.

As long as Snap automatically to selected object remains activated, the compass is

snapped automatically. To deactivate the command, right-click the compass then clear Snap
automatically to selected object.

Note that if a new axis system has been created, selecting it in the geometry area or in the
specification tree will make the compass disappear. To make it re-appear, simply select any
other element in the geometry or in the tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 376

Locking the Current Compass Orientation

This task explains how to lock the current compass orientation.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

2. Select Lock Current Orientation.

3. Drag the compass.

Note that as you drag the compass over objects, the

compass symbol remains oriented the same. For
example, if the default orientation was current before
dragging, the symbol remains like this while you drag:

When you drop the compass onto an object, this orientation is kept.

When Lock current orientation mode is selected, the compass orientation cannot be
changed (either manually or automatically) whatever actions are done with the compass. In
particular, the compass orientation is kept even if Use Local Axis System is selected.

4. To reorient the compass, right-click then clear Lock Current Orientation.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 377

Locking the Privileged Plane Parallel to the

Screen

This task explains how to force the privileged plane to be parallel to the screen plane.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. In our example, drag and drop the compass onto the part like this:

2. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

3. Select Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen.

This forces the privileged plane parallel to the screen. This works even if you change
viewpoints in the document. The compass is now oriented like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 378

4. Manipulate the object as desired.

The privileged plane remains parallel to the screen as you manipulate the object.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 379

Locking the Compass to the Local Axis System

This task explains how to lock the compass to the local axis system. This capability is relevant in any
workbench defining local axis systems (such as Part Design, FreeStyle, Generative Shape Design, etc.)

You need access to a Version 5 - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. Create a new local axis system then set it as current.

To learn how to define a new three-axis system locally and how to set is as current, refer to

Axis System.

The result could look like:

2. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 380

3. Select Use Local Axis System.

The compass is oriented according to the local axis system defined as "current". In our
scenario, the current axis system is the one created in step 1:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 381

If no axis system has been defined by the user, the compass is oriented according to the
global axis system displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 382

Swapping the Privileged Plane

This task explains how to swap to a different privileged plane (XZ or YZ). This command is not useful when
simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application commands that use manipulators
which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or modifying control points using the
FreeStyle Shaper.

You need access to a Version 5 - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario.

Open the document Manipulators2.CATProduct.

1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench.

2. Select the planar patch.

3. Click New Control Points in the Shape Modification toolbar: control points appear on the patch,
and the Control Points dialog box appears.

4. Point to a control point on the patch.

Manipulators appear:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 383

Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the
compass, in the XY plane.

5. Click anywhere in the geometry area then drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following

direction:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 384

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 385

The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch.

7. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words, not on another

object).

The compass keeps the same orientation:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 386

8. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

9. Select Make VW the Privileged Plane.

This means that you now want to orient the manipulators in the YZ plane of the compass. The
manipulators are now located in the YZ plane:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 387

Do not be confused by the fact that the compass axes do not change: the compass is reoriented to
make the YZ the privileged plane, even though the axes on the compass still indicate that the
privileged plane is XY.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 388

Keeping the Privileged Plane the Most Visible during

Viewpoint Manipulations

This task explains how to keep the privileged plane visible during viewpoint manipulations.

This command is not useful when simply using the Select command. It is only useful when using application
commands that use manipulators which require working planes, for example, when creating planar patches or
modifying control points using the FreeStyle Shaper.

You need access to a Version 5 - P2 FreeStyle Shaper configuration to follow this scenario.

Open the document Manipulators2.CATProduct.

1. Activate the FreeStyle Shaper workbench.

2. Select the planar patch.

3. Click New Control Points in the Shape Modification toolbar.

Control points appear on the patch, and the Control Points dialog box appears.

4. Point to a control point on the patch.

Manipulators appear:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 389

Note that the manipulators, by default, are oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the
compass, in the XY plane.

5. Click anywhere in the geometry area then drag the compass onto the patch and align it in the following

direction:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 390

6. Drop the compass onto the patch as follows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 391

The compass has now detected the orientation of the patch. Note that the manipulators, by default, are
oriented in the same plane as the privileged plane of the compass.

7. Drag the compass away from the patch and drop it into empty space (in other words, not on another

object).

The compass keeps the same orientation:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 392

8. Manipulate the viewpoint by, for example, rotating.

Because rotating the viewpoint also rotates the compass, the privileged plane may be more or less
visible. When you work with commands that use manipulators which require working planes, it may be
difficult to work if the privileged plane is not always clearly visible:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 393

9. Point to the compass and right-click to display the contextual menu.

10. Select Make Privileged Plane Most Visible.

This time, the privileged plane is forced to be the most visible: the compass and the manipulators are
reoriented accordingly:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 394

11. Continue to rotate.

You notice that, as you rotate, the privileged plane switches, the compass is reoriented accordingly, so
that the privileged plane always remains clearly visible. Each time this happens, the manipulators are
also repositioned in the new privileged plane.

This function is useful for both creation and modification commands.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 395

Measuring
Measuring Distances between Geometrical Entities
Measuring Properties
Measuring Inertia
CATIA Infrastructure
Measuring Distances between Geometrical Page
Version 5 Release 16
Entities
396
( )
The Measure Between command lets you measure distance between geometrical entities.

You can measure:

Minimum distance and, if applicable angles, between points, surfaces, edges, vertices and entire products

Or,

Maximum distance between two surfaces, two volumes or a surface and a volume.

This section deals with the following topics:

● Measuring minimum distance and angles

● Dialog box options

● Accessing other measure commands

● Defining measure types

● Defining selection 1 & selection 2 modes

● Defining the calculation mode

● Sectioning measure results

● Measuring maximum distance

● About maximum distance

● Between two G-1 continuous surfaces

● Between Wireframe entities

● Step-by-step scenario

● Measuring distances in a local axis system

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 397
● Customizing measure between

● Editing measures

● Creating geometry from measure results

● Exact measures on CGRs and in visualization mode

● Measuring angles

● Updating measures

● Using measures in knowledgeware

● Measure cursors

● Restrictions

Insert the following sample model files: ATOMIZER.model, BODY1.model, BODY2.model, LOCK.model, NOZZLE1.model, NOZZLE2.model,
REGULATION_COMMAND.model, REGULATOR.model, TRIGGER.model and VALVE.model. They are to be found in the online documentation file tree in the
common functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

Measuring Minimum Distance and Angles

This task explains how to measure minimum and, if applicable, angles between geometrical entities (points, surfaces, edges, vertices and entire products).

1. Click Measure Between . In DMU, you can also select Analyze > Measure Between from the menu bar. The Measure Between dialog box

appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 398

By default, minimum distances and if applicable, angles are measured.

By default, measures made on active products are done with respect to the product axis system.
Measures made on active parts are done with respect to the part axis system.

Note: This distinction is not valid for measures made prior to Version 5 Release 8 Service Pack 1 where all measures are made with respect to the

absolute axis system.

Dialog box options

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 399
❍ Other Axis check box: when selected, lets you measure distances and angles with respect to a local V5 axis system.

❍ Keep Measure check box: when selected, lets you keep the current and subsequent measures as features.

This is useful if you want to keep the measures as annotations for example.

Some measures kept as features are associative and can be used to valuate parameters or in formulas.

Note that in the Drafting and Advanced Meshing Tools workbenches, measures are done on-the-fly and are therefore not persistent nor

associative and cannot be used as parameters.

❍ Create Geometry button: lets you create the points and line corresponding to the minimum distance result.

❍ Customize... button: lets you customize display of measure results.

Accessing other measure commands

❍ Measure Item is accessible from the Measure Between dialog box.

❍ In DMU, the Measure Thickness command is also accessible from the Measure Between dialog box. For more information, see the DMU Space

Analysis User's Guide.

2. Select the desired measure type.

Notice that the image in the dialog box changes depending on the measure type selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 400

3. Set the desired mode in the Selection 1 and Selection 2 mode drop-down list boxes.

4. Set the desired calculation mode in the Calculation mode drop-down list box.

5. Click to select a surface, edge or vertex, or an entire product (selection 1).

Notes:

❍ The appearance of the cursor has changed to assist you.

❍ Dynamic highlighting of geometrical entities helps you locate items to click on.

6. Click to select another surface, edge or vertex, or an entire product (selection 2).

A line representing the minimum distance vector is drawn between the selected items in the geometry area. Appropriate distance values are displayed

in the dialog box.

Note: For reasons of legibility, angles between lines and/or curves of less than 0.02 radians (1.146 degrees) are not displayed in the geometry

area.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 401

By default, the overall minimum distance and angle, if any, between the selected items are given in the Measure Between dialog box.

7. Select another selection and, if desired, selection mode.

8. Set the Measure type to Fan to fix the first selection so that you can always measure from this item.

9. Select the second item.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 402

10. Select another item.

11. Click Ok when done.

Defining measure types

● Between (default type): measures distance and, if applicable, angle between selected items.

● Chain: lets you chain measures with the last selected item becoming the first selection in the next measure.

● Fan: fixes the first selection as the reference so that you always measure from this item.

Defining selection 1 & selection 2 modes

● Any geometry: measures distances and, if applicable, angles between defined geometrical entities (points, edges, surfaces, etc.).

By default, Any geometry option is selected

Note: The Arc center mode is activated in this selection mode.

This mode recognizes the axis of cylinders and lets you measure the distance between two cylinder axes for example.

Selecting an axis system in the specification tree makes the distance measure from the axis system origin.

You can select sub-entities of V5 axis systems in the geometry area only. For V4 axis systems, distances are always measured from the origin.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 403

● Any geometry, infinite: measures distances and, if applicable, angles between the infinite geometry (plane, line or curve) on which the selected

geometrical entities lie. Curves are extended by tangency at curve ends.

Line Plane Curve

The Arc center mode is activated and this mode also recognizes

cylinder axes. For all other selections, the measure mode is the

same as any geometry.

Any geometry, infinite

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 404

Any geometry

● Picking point: measures distances between points selected on defined geometrical entities.

Notes:

● The picking point is selected on visualization mode geometry and depends on the sag value used. It may not correspond

to the exact geometry.

● The resulting measure will always be non associative.

In the DMU section viewer, selecting two picking points on a curve gives the distance along the curve between points (curve length or CL) as well as the

minimum distance between points.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 405
Notes:

● Both points must be located on the same curve element.

● The minimum distance option must be set in the Measure Between Customization dialog box.

● Point only: measures distances between points. Dynamic highlighting is limited to points.

● Edge only, Surface only: measures distances and, if applicable, angles between edges and surfaces respectively. Dynamic highlighting is limited to

edges or surfaces and is thus simplified compared to the Any geometry mode. All types of edge are supported.

● Product only: measures distances between products.

Products can be specified by selecting product geometry, for example an edge or surface, in the geometry area or the specification tree.

● Picking axis: measures distances and, if applicable, angles between an entity and an infinite line perpendicular to the screen.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 406
Simply click to create infinite line perpendicular to the screen.

Notes:

❍ The resulting measure will always be approximate and non associative.

❍ Elements placed in No Show are taken into account in measure operation.

● Intersection: measures distances between points of intersection between two lines/curves/edges or a line/curve/edge and a surface. In this case, two

selections are necessary to define selection 1 and selection 2 items.

Geometrical entities (planar surfaces, lines and curves) are extended to infinity to determine the point of intersection. Curves are extended by tangency

at curve ends.

Curve-plane
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 407
Line-plane

Curve-curve

Notes:

❍ Only intersections which result in points of intersection are managed.

❍ The resulting measure will always be approximate and non associative

● Edge limits: measures distances between start and end points of an edge. Only start and end points can be selected with this option checked. The

extremity nearest the selected point is taken for the measurement.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 408

● Arc center: measures distances between the centers of arcs. To define arc center, click three points on the geometry.

Note: The resulting measure will always be approximate and non associative.

● Center of 3 points arc: measures distances between the centers of arcs defined by 3 points.

● Coordinate: measures distances between coordinates entered for selection 1 and/or selection 2 items.

Note: The resulting measure will always be non associative.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 409
Defining the calculation mode

● Exact else approximate (default mode): measures access exact data and wherever possible true values are given. If exact values cannot be

measured, approximate values are given (identified by a ~ sign).

● Exact: measures access exact data and true values are given. Note that you can only select exact items in the geometry area or specification tree.

In certain cases, in particular if products are selected, a warning dialog box informs you that the exact measure could not be made.

After some geometric operations, vertices (and corresponding macro points) may combine several representations on different supports (curves or

surfaces). These representations are not all located in the same position in space which means that the exact position of the vertex cannot be

determined. Only one vertex representation is visualized.

Measure Between measurements are made with respect to the visualized representation. Measuring distance between two points therefore depends on

the chosen representation. Any calculation errors are due to the fact that the exact position of the vertex cannot be determined.

● Approximate: measures are made on tessellated objects and approximate values are given (identified by a ~ sign).

Notes:

❍ You can hide the display of the ~ sign using the Tools > Options command (General > Parameters and Measure > Measure Tools).

❍ The number of decimal places, the display of trailing zeros and limits for exponential notation is controlled by the Units tab in the Options dialog box

(Tools > Options, General > Parameters and Measure). For more information, see the Infrastructure User's Guide.

❍ Using the Other Selection... command in the contextual menu, you can access the center of spheres.

❍ Elements in No Show mode are not taken into account in the approximate calculation.

If you checked the Keep Measure option in the Measure Between dialog box, your measures are kept as features and your specification tree will look

something like this if measures were made on the active product.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 410

Or like this, if measures were made on the active part.

Note: If the product is active, any measures on parts are placed in No Show.

Some measures kept as features are associative. In Design Mode, if you modify a part or move a part in a product structure context and the measure is

impacted, it will be identified as not up-to-date in the specification tree. You can then update it locally have it updated automatically.

When measures are used to valuate parameters, an associative link between the measure and parameter is created. Measures can also be used in formulas.

Sectioning measure results

Having made and kept your measure, select it then click Sectioning to section measure results. The plane is created parallel to the direction

defined by the measure and sections entities selected for the measure only. All section plane manipulations are available.

Note: You may need an appropriate license to access the Sectioning command
.

P1-Only Functionality
In P1, the Measure Tools toolbar appears.

This toolbar has two icons:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 411

● Measure Dialogs : lets you show or hide the associated dialog box.

● Exit Measure : lets you exit the measure. This is useful when the dialog box is hidden.

Customizing Measure Between

Customizing lets you choose what distance you want to measure:

● Minimum distance (and angle if applicable)

● Maximum distance

● Maximum distance from 1 to 2.

Note: These options are mutually exclusive. Each time you change option, you must make your measure again.

By default, minimum distances and if applicable, angles are measured.

You can also choose to display components and the coordinates of the two points (point 1 and point 2) between which the distance is measured.

What you set in the dialog box determines the display of the results in both the geometry area and the dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 412

Measuring Maximum Distance

About Maximum Distance

You can measure the maximum distance between two G-1 surfaces, two volumes or a surface and a volume.

Distance is measured normal to the selection and is always approximate. Two choices are available:

● Maximum distance from 1 to 2: gives the maximum distance of all distances measured from selection 1.

Note: This distance is, in general, not symmetrical.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 413

● Maximum distance: gives the highest maximum distance between the maximum distance measured from selection 1 and the maximum distance

measured from selection 2.

Note: All selection 1 (or 2) normals intersecting selection 1 (or 2) are ignored.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 414
Between two G-1 continuous surfaces on a part in Design mode (result is exact)
You can now calculate the maximum distance between two G1 (continuous at the tangency level) surfaces (planar or not). The resulting measure is

exact.

Notes:

● G-1 stands for geometric tangency, it basically means: surfaces which are continuous at the tangency level.

● You can measure maximum distance only with exact geometries (i.e. in Design Mode).

Between Wireframe entities

You can now calculate the maximum perpendicular deviation between point, lineic and surfacic elements (except surface/surface which uses max

perpendicular distance see table below)

The table below lists the possible wire frame selections for measuring maximum distance:

Entity surface Curve Point

Surface
No Yes Yes

Curve
Yes Yes Yes

Point
Yes Yes MIN

Maximum Perpendicular Deviation Behavior:

● The second element is discretized (with a tessellation independent from the visualization sag)
● A minimal distance is then, measured between each point of discretization and the first selected element
● Are kept: only the minimal distances which project orthogonally.

The final value given is the maximum distance value of all kept minimal orthogonal distances.

Consequences:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 415
● The behavior is not symmetric when "Maximum Distance from 1 to 2" is used (except for point selection)
● The result is approximate
● If the minimal distance measured between a point of selection 2 and selection 1 is not orthogonal, it is not taken into account. In other words, cases in
which there is no orthogonality between the direction given by the two points of the minimal distance and selection 1 are excluded.
● Required orthogonality to keep the minimal distance within the result is not modeler-tolerant (Logical G1 continuity is not taken into account)
● Some scenarios do not provide any solution (see example below)

In this scenario, the left part does not return any solution since minimum distances in this zone are obtained at the curve left extremity point and are not
orthogonal to the curve.

Step-by-Step Scenario

1. Click Customize... and check the appropriate maximum distance option in the Measure Between Customization dialog box, then click OK.

2. Make your measure:

❍ Select the desired measure type

❍ Set the desired selection modes

❍ Set the desired calculation mode

❍ Click to select two surfaces, two volumes or a surface and a volume.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 416

3. Click OK when done.

Measuring Distances in a Local Axis System

The Other Axis option in the dialog box lets you measure distance in a local axis system.

This type of measure is associative: if you move the axis system, the measure is impacted and can be updated.

You need a V5 axis system to carry out this scenario

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 417
1. Select the Other Axis check box in the dialog box.

2. Select a V5 axis system in the specification tree or geometry area.

3. Make your measure.

In the examples below, the measure is a minimum distance measure and the coordinates of the two points between which the distance is measured

are shown.

Same measure made with respect to absolute axis system:

Note: All subsequent measures are made with respect to the selected axis system.

4. To change the axis system, click the Other Axis field and select another axis system.
 5. To return to the absolute axis system, click
CATIA Infrastructure to clear
Version the Other
5 Release 16 Axis check box Page 418

6. Click OK when done.

Restrictions

● Neither Visualization Mode nor cgr files permit selection of individual vertices.

● In the No Show space, the Measure Between command is not accessible.

● Measures performed on sheet metal features provide wrong results. In unfolded view, volume elements are not taken into account when measuring Part

Bodies.

● Measures are not associative when switching between folded view and unfolded view (using the Fold/Unfold icon in the Sheet Metal toolbar).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 419

Measuring Angles
The following section describes:

● Exact angles

● Complementary angles

Exact Angles
The Measure Between command lets you measure exact angles between the following geometrical entities that have (at

least) one common point.

Two lines (even if not in the same plane): A line and a curve:

Two curves:

Note: In the above three cases, if entities intersect more than once, the measure is made at the point of intersection
nearest the point at which selection 1 is made.

A curve and a surface:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 420

Note: If the curve and surface intersect more than once, the measure is made at the point of intersection nearest the
point of the selection on the curve.

A line and a surface: A line and a plane:

Two surfaces: You can also measure the angle between two surfaces provided both surfaces are planar.

Complementary Angles
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 421
You can obtain the complementary angle (360° - the initial angle measured) when measuring between two curves: drag

the angle line to show the complementary angle.

Note: The dialog box and knowledge parameters are refreshed. The value of the complementary angle is stored along with

the measure.

For any two geometrical entities that meet, the choice of measurement between a given angle or its complementary angle is

performed with respect to where you select the entities in the 3D area:

Note, If you select entities in the specification tree, the measured angle is given arbitrarily (A or 180 degrees - A)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 422

Measure Cursors
The appearance of the Measure Between and Measure Item cursor changes as you move it over items to

reflect the measure command you are in and to help you identify the selection. Dynamic highlighting of

surfaces, points, and vertices, etc. also helps you locate items to click on.

Measure Between Measure Item Geometry

Surface

Planar surface

Line

Curve

Point

Circle

Sphere
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 423

Cylinder

Volume

In Measure Between, a number (1 for

selection 1 and 2 for selection 2)

identifies where you are in your

measure.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 424

Measuring Properties ( )
The Measure Item command lets you measure the properties associated to a selected item (points, edges, surfaces and entire

products).

This section deals with the following topics:

● Measuring properties

● Measuring in a local axis system

● Customizing the display

● Editing measures

● Create Geometry from measure results

● Exact measures on CGRs and in visualization mode

● Updating measures

● Using measures in knowledgeware

also read Measures and Knowledge

● Measure cursors

● Important

Insert the following sample model files: ATOMIZER.model, BODY1.model, BODY2.model, LOCK.model, NOZZLE1.model,

NOZZLE2.model, REGULATION_COMMAND.model, REGULATOR.model, TRIGGER.model and VALVE.model.

They are to be found in the online documentation file tree in the common functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

Measuring Properties

This task explains how to measure the properties associated to a selected item.

1. Switch to Design Mode (Edit > Representations > Design Mode).

2. Set View > Render Style to Shading with Edges.

You cannot use this command, if Shading only is selected

3. Click the Measure Item icon . In DMU, you can also select Analyze > Measure Item from the menu bar. The

Measure Item dialog box appears.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 425

By default, properties of active products are measured with respect to the product axis system.
Properties of active parts are measured with respect to the part axis system.

Note: This distinction is not valid for measures made prior to Version 5 Release 8 Service Pack 1 where all measures are

made with respect to the absolute axis system.

Dialog box options

❍ Other Axis check box: when selected, lets you measure properties with respect to a local V5 axis system.

❍ Keep Measure check box: when selected, lets you keep current and subsequent measures as features.

This is useful if you want to keep measures as annotations for example.

Some measures kept as features are associative and can be used to valuate parameters or in formulas.

In the Drafting and Advanced Meshing Tools workbenches, measures are done on-the-fly. They are not persistent. This

means that they are not associative and cannot be used as parameters.

❍ Create Geometry button: lets you create you create the center of gravity from measure results.

❍ Customize... button: lets you customize display of measure results.

Accessing other measure commands

❍ The Measure Between command is accessible from the Measure Item dialog box. Simply click one of the Measure Between

icons in the Definition box to switch commands.

❍ In DMU, the Measure Thickness command is also accessible from the Measure Item dialog box. For more information, see

the appropriate task in the DMU Space Analysis User's Guide.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 426

4. Set the desired measure mode in the Selection 1 mode drop-down list box.

5. Set the desired calculation mode in the Calculation mode drop-down list box.

6. Click to select the desired item.

Note: The appearance of the cursor has changed to assist you.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 427

The dialog box gives information about the selected item, in our case a surface and indicates whether the result is an exact

or approximate value. The surface area is also displayed in the geometry area.

The number of decimal places, the display of trailing zeros and limits for exponential notation is controlled by the Units tab in

the Options dialog box (Tools > Options, General > Parameters and Measure). For more information, see the

Infrastructure User's Guide.

7. Try selecting other items to measure associated properties.

Note: For reasons of legibility, angles measured by Angle by 3 points or on an arc of circle of less than 0.02 radians

(1.146 degrees) are not displayed in the geometry area.

8. Click OK when done.

If you checked the Keep Measure option in the Measure Item dialog box, your measures are kept as features

and your specification tree will look something like this if properties of the active product were measured.

Or like this, if properties were those of the active part.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 428

Notes:

❍ If the product is active, any measures made on the active part are placed in No Show.

❍ Elements placed in No Show are taken into account in measure operation.

Some measures kept as features are associative. In Design Mode, if you modify a part or move a part in a product

structure context and the measure is impacted, it will be identified as not up-to-date in the specification tree. You

can then update it locally have it updated automatically.

When measures are used to valuate parameters, an associative link between the measure and parameter is

created. Measures can also be used in formulas.

Defining the Selection 1 Mode

❍ Any geometry (default mode): measures the properties of the selected item (point, edge, surface or entire

product).

❍ Point only: measures the properties of points. Dynamic highlighting is limited to points.

❍ Edge only: measures the properties of edges. All types of edge are supported.

❍ Surface only: measures the properties of surfaces.

In the last three modes, dynamic highlighting is limited to points, edges or surfaces depending on the mode
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 429
selected, and is thus simplified compared to the Any geometry mode.

❍ Product only: measures the properties products.

Products can be specified by selecting product geometry, for example an edge or surface, in the geometry area

or the specification tree.

❍ Angle by 3 points: measures the angle between two lines themselves defined by three points.

❍ To define lines:

❍ Select three existing points in the geometry area or in the specification tree.

Note: You cannot select picking points. Smart selection is offered. This means that a sphere or circle, for

example, are seen as points.

❍ The resulting angle is always positive. It is measured in a counterclockwise direction and depends on the order

in which points were selected as well as your viewpoint (the normal to the plane is oriented towards you).

You can drag the angle line to show the complementary angle (360° - the initial angle measured).

You can also obtain the complementary angle when measuring the angle on arcs.

Note: The dialog box and knowledge parameters are refreshed. The value of the complementary angle is stored

along with the measure.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 430

❍ Thickness (DMU only): measures the thickness of an item. For more information, see the appropriate task in

the DMU Space Analysis User's Guide.

The Measure Item command:

❍ lets you access the radius of an exact cylinder or sphere.

❍ recognizes ellipse-type conic sections.

❍ Using the Other Selection... command in the contextual menu, you can access the axis of a cylinder as well as

the center of a sphere to, for example, measure between two cylinder axes.

Defining the Calculation Mode

❍ Exact else approximate (default mode): measures access exact data and wherever possible true values are

given. If exact values cannot be measured, approximate values are given (identified by a ~ sign).

❍ Exact: measures access exact data and true values are given. Note that you can only select exact items in the

geometry area or specification tree.

In certain cases, in particular if products are selected, a warning dialog box informs you that the exact measure
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 431

could not be made.

❍ Approximate: measures are made on tessellated objects and approximate values are given (identified by a ~

sign). In design mode, the canonical type of surfaces (plane, cylinder, etc.) is not recognized.

❍ Note: You can hide the ~ sign using the Tools -> Options command (General ->Parameters and Measure -

>Measure Tools).

P1-Only Functionality

In P1, the Measure Tools toolbar appears.

This toolbar has two icons:

❍ Measure Dialogs : lets you show or hide the associated dialog box.

❍ Exit Measure : lets you exit the measure. This is useful when the dialog box is hidden.

Customizing the Display

Customizing lets you choose the properties you want to see displayed in both the geometry area and the dialog box.

1. Click Customize... in the Measure Item dialog box to see the properties the system can detect for the various types

of item you can select. By default, you obtain:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 432

Edges
The system detects whether the edge is a line, curve or arc, taking model accuracy into account and displays the

properties as set in the Measure Item Customization dialog box.

Notes:

❍ If the angle of an arc is less than 0.125 degrees, only the arc length is displayed in the geometry area. The

angle and radius are not displayed.

❍ The system arbitrarily assigns end points 1 and 2, however, once assigned, these points are persistent. The

direction is oriented from point 1 to point 2.

Surfaces
❍ Center of gravity: The center of gravity of surfaces is visualized by a point. In the case of non planar surfaces,

the center of gravity is attached to the surface over the minimum distance.

❍ Plane: gives the equation of a planar face. The equation of a plane is: Ax + By + Cz + D=0.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 433

Note that there is an infinite number of equations possible (and an infinite number of solutions for values ABC and

D). The result given by Measure Item does not necessarily correspond to that in the feature specification. This is

because the measure is based on topology and does not know the feature specification associated with the

measured item.

❍ Perimeter: Visualization mode does not permit the measure of surface perimeter.

2. Set the properties you want the system to detect, then click Apply or Close. The Measure Item dialog box is updated

if you request more properties of the item you have just selected.

3. Select other items to measure associated properties.

Measuring Properties in a Local Axis System

An Other Axis option in the dialog box lets you measure properties in a local axis system.

This type of measure is associative: if you move the axis system, the measure is impacted and can be updated.

You will need a V5 axis system.

1. Select the Other Axis check box in the Measure Item dialog box.

2. Select a V5 axis system in the specification tree or geometry area.

3. Make your measure.

Measure made with respect to local axis system:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 434

Same measure made with respect to absolute axis system:

Note: All subsequent measures are made with respect to the selected axis system.

4. To change the axis system, click the Other Axis field and select another axis system.

5. To return to the main axis system, click to clear the Other Axis check box.

6. Click OK when done.

Measures and Knowledge

When performing a measure operation, Knowledge parameters are created along with the calculated values. You customize

their display in the Measure customization dialog box.

Note: No knowledge parameters are created for the equation of a plane.

● Also read Using measures in knowledgeware

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 435

Important

● Neither Visualization Mode nor cgr files permit selection of individual vertices.

● In the No Show space, Measure Item is not accessible.

● Measures performed on sheet metal features provide wrong results. In unfolded view, volume elements are not taken into

account when measuring Part Bodies.

● Measures are not associative when switching between folded view and unfolded view (using the Fold/Unfold icon in the
Sheet Metal toolbar).

● When measuring an entity with a given dimension, all geometries contained with lower dimension are ignored for the calculation.

For example, edges, surfaces are ignored under a PartBody if this PartBody contains a volume (see illustration below, i.e. the

difference is illustrated in Generative Shape Design and Part Design workbenches).

When translating a PartBody containing a measure in Generative Shape Design

(using Insert > Operations >Translate...) this is what you obtain:

When translating a PartBody containing a measure in Part Design (using Insert >Transformation Features > Translation) this is

what you obtain:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 436

Measuring Inertia ( )
The Measure Inertia command lets you measure:

● 3D inertia properties of surfaces and volumes (explained below)

● 2D inertia properties of plane surfaces.

This section deals with the following topics:

● Measuring 3D inertia

● Measuring 2D inertia

● Customizing your measure

● Exporting measure inertia results

● Creating geometry from measure results

● Notations used

● Inertia equivalents

● Principal axes

● Inertia matrix with respect to the origin O

● Inertia matrix with respect to a point P

● Inertia matrix with respect to an axis system

● Moment of inertia about an axis

● Updating measures

● Using measures in Knowledgeware

● Restrictions

Measuring 3D Inertia

This task explains how to measure the 3D inertia properties of an object.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 437

You can measure the 3D inertia properties of both surfaces and volumes, as well as retrieve the density or surface density if valuated

from V4 model type documents. You can also retrieve inertia equivalents set in Knowledgeware formulas.

The area, density, mass and volume (volumes only) of the object are also calculated

Insert the Valve.cgr document from the samples folder. It is to be found in the online documentation file tree in the common
functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

1. Click Measure Inertia . In DMU, you can also select Analyze > Measure Inertia from the menu bar. The Measure

Inertia dialog box appears.

By default, 3D inertia properties are measured.

The Measure 2D Inertia icon lets you measure 2D inertia properties of plane surfaces.

Dialog box options

❍ A Keep Measure option in the dialog box lets you keep current and subsequent measures as features in the specification

tree. Some measures kept as features are associative and can be used as parameters.

❍ A Create Geometry option lets you create the center of gravity and the axis system for principal axes in a part from inertia

results.

❍ An Export option lets you write results to a text file.

❍ A Customize... option lets you define what will be computed and displayed in the dialog box.

In the Drafting workbench, the Keep Measure option is not available. Measures are done on-the-fly. They are not

persistent. This means that they are not associative and cannot be used as parameters.

Note: When you move the cursor over the geometry or specification tree, its appearance changes to reflect the measure

command you are in

2. Click to select the desired item in the specification tree, for example Valve.

Selecting Items
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 438

In the geometry area, you can select individual faces and edges on cgr files and in Visualization mode.

To... Then

make a multiple selection Shift-click in the specification tree

add other items to the initial selection Ctrl-click in the geometry area or the specification tree

select items using the bounding outline Drag (using the left mouse button)

make your multiple selection.(P2 only) Use the Group command

Notes:

❍ Only items of the same type can be included in a multiple selection or a bounding outline; you cannot
mix volumes and surfaces.
❍ Inertia measures made on a multiple selection of items are not associative.

Dialog Box
The Dialog Box expands to display the results for the selected item.

The measure is made on the selection, geometry, assembly or part. To measure the inertia of individual sub-products

making up an assembly and see the results in the document window, you must select the desired sub-product.

In our example, the item selected has no sub-products.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 439

The dialog box identifies the selected item and indicates whether the calculation is exact or approximate:

❍ In Design mode, measures access exact data and wherever possible true values are given. Note that it is possible to

obtain an exact measure for most items in design mode.

❍ In Visualization mode, measures are made on tessellated items and approximate values are given.

In addition to the center of gravity G, the principal moments of inertia M and the matrix of inertia calculated with respect to

the center of gravity, the dialog box also gives the area, volume (volumes only), density and mass of the selected item.

You can also compute and display the principal axes A. To do so, you must first activate the appropriate option in the

Measure Inertia Customization dialog box.

The density is that of the material, if any, applied to a product, part or part body:

❍ If no density is found, a default value (1000 kg/m3 for volumes and 10 kg/m2 for surfaces) is displayed.

You can, if desired, edit this value to re-calculate all the other inertia values and display them in the dialog box. Note: re-

calculated inertia values are not stored in the measure feature.

❍ If sub-products or part bodies have different densities, the wording Not uniform is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 440

To make sure, you retrieve the density on any possible selection (surface and / or volume), you must select the item

(part or part body) in the specification tree and not in the geometry area.

Notes:

❍ You can access the density of parts saved as CGR files and opened in visualization mode. This functionality is

available in both a part and a product context.

❍ To do so:

■ Select the Save density in cgr option in the Cgr Management tab (Tools > Options > Infrastructure >

Product Structure).

■ Open a part to which material has been applied and save as CGR type.

The density is stored in the CGR file.

Important: The material must be applied to the part node. If materials are applied to part bodies, no density is
saved.

3. Close the Part document.

4. Open the CGR file or switch to DMU Space Analysis and insert the part saved as CGR, then measure the inertia.

5. You must be in design mode to access the density of part bodies to which materials have been applied.

6. Unless specified otherwise, material inheritance is taken into account.

7. Density is a measure of an item's mass per unit volume expressed in kg/m3; surface density is a measure of an

item's mass per unit area expressed in kg/m2.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 441

The number of decimal places, the display of trailing zeros and limits for exponential notation is controlled by the Units

tab in the Options dialog box (Tools > Options, General > Parameters and Measure).

Elements placed in No Show are taken into account in measure operation.

Geometry area
In the Geometry Area, axes of inertia are highlighted and a bounding box parallel to the axes and bounding the selected

item also appears.

Color coding of axes:

❍ Red: axis corresponding to the first moment M1

❍ Green: axis corresponding to the second moment M2

❍ Blue: axis corresponding to third moment M3.

8. Click Customize... to customize the inertia computation and define what will be exported to the text file.

9. Click OK when done.

10. If you checked the Keep Measure option in the Measure Inertia dialog box, your measures are kept as features and your

specification tree will look something like this.

Some measures kept as features are associative and can be used as parameters.

You can write a macro script to automate your task. See Space Analysis on the Automation Documentation Home Page.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 442

Customizing Your Measure

1. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization dialog box opens.

Notes:

❍ The inertia properties check boxes selected here are also the properties exported to a text file.

❍ You can, at any time, define what will be computed and displayed in the Measure Inertia dialog box.

2. Click the appropriate options to compute and display in appropriate tabs of the Measure Inertia dialog box the:

❍ Inertia equivalents

❍ Principal axes

❍ Inertia matrix with respect to the origin O

❍ Inertia matrix with respect to a point P

❍ Inertia matrix with respect to an axis system

❍ Moment of inertia about an axis

3. Click Apply or OK in the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box when done.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 443

Restrictions

● In the Drafting workbench, the Keep Measure option is not available. Measures are done on-the-fly. They are not persistent. This

means that they are not associative and cannot be used as parameters.

● You cannot measure inertia properties of either wire frame or infinite elements.

For examples showing 3D inertia properties measured on surfaces.

To find out more about notations used.

● In the No Show space, the Measure Inertia command is not accessible.

● Measures performed on sheet metal features provide wrong results. In unfolded view, volume elements are not taken into account

when measuring Part Bodies.

● Measures are not associative when switching between folded view and unfolded view (using the Fold/Unfold icon in the
Sheet Metal toolbar).

● When measuring inertia on a feature (PartBody, Product, CATPart) which is applied a material:

❍ if you modify the density value on the material, all inertia measures previously created on this particular feature are not

updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 444

Measuring 2D Inertia

This task explains how to measure the inertia properties of plane 2D surfaces.

You can measure the area, center of gravity, principal moments, inertia matrix as well as the principal

axes.

You can measure the inertia properties of plane surfaces including DMU sections. The area of the surface

is also calculated.

● Step-by-Step Scenario

● Customizing Your Measure

Notes: You cannot measure inertia properties of either wireframe or infinite elements.

Step-by-Step Scenario

No sample document provided.

1. Click Measure Inertia . In DMU, you can also select Analyze > Measure Inertia from

the menu bar. The Measure Inertia dialog box appears.

2. Click Measure 2D Inertia .

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 445

Dialog box options

❍ A Keep Measure option in the dialog box lets you keep current and subsequent measures

as features. Some measures kept as features are associative and can be used as

parameters.

Note: This option is not available in the Drafting workbench.

❍ An Export option lets you write results to a text file.

❍ A Customize... option lets you define what will be computed and displayed in the dialog

box.

3. Click to select a plane 2D surface in the geometry area or the specification tree. The Dialog Box

expands to display the results for the selected item.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 446

The dialog box identifies the selected item, in our case a DMU section, and indicates whether

the calculation is exact or approximate:

❍ In Design mode, measures access exact data and wherever possible true values are given.

Note that it is possible to obtain an exact measure for most items in design mode.

❍ In Visualization mode, measures are made on tessellated items and approximate values

are given.

In addition to the center of gravity G, the principal moments of inertia M and the matrix of

inertia, the dialog box also gives the area of the selected item.

The center of gravity G is computed with respect to the document axis system. The matrix of

inertia is expressed in an axis system whose origin is the center of gravity and whose vectors

are the axes of inertia.

Notes:

❍ The matrix of inertia and the principal moments do not take density into account.

❍ You can also compute and display the principal axes A. To do so, you must first activate

the appropriate option in the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box.

The number of decimal places, the display of trailing zeros and limits for exponential notation

is controlled by the Units tab in the Options dialog box (Tools ->Options, General -

>Parameters and Measure).

To find out more about notations used

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 447

In the Geometry Area

The axes of inertia are highlighted and a bounding box parallel to the axes and bounding the

selected item also appears.

Color coding of axes:

❍ Red: axis corresponding to the first moment M1

❍ Green: axis corresponding to the second moment M2

When you move the cursor over the geometry or specification tree, its appearance changes to

reflect the measure command you are in.

4. Click OK in the Measure Inertia dialog box. If you checked the Keep Measure option in the

Measure Inertia dialog box, your measures are kept as features.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 448

Customizing Your Measure

You can, at any time, define what will be computed and displayed in the tabs of the Measure Inertia

dialog box.

When measuring 2D plane surfaces, in addition to the properties computed by default, you can

compute and display the principal axes.

1. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization

dialog box opens.

Note: The inertia properties checked here are also the properties exported to a text file.

2. Click the appropriate options:

❍ Principal axes
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 449

3. Click Apply or OK in the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box when done.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 450

Exporting Measure Inertia Results

This task shows you how to export both 3D and 2D inertia results to a text file.

Insert the Body1.cgr and the Body2.cgr documents.

They are to be found in the online documentation file tree in the common functionalities samples folder cfysm/samples

1. Select the root product and click the Measure Inertia icon. The dialog box expands to display the results for the selected item.

2. Click Export to write the results to a text (*.txt) file.

Results shown in the Measure Inertia dialog box only are exported. Exported results are given in current units.

3. Identify the file name and location in the Export Results dialog box that appears, then click Save.

Notes:

❍ The examples given below concern 3D inertia results.

If an assembly comprises sub-products or a part comprises part bodies, individual results for all sub-
products or part bodies are also exported and written to the text file.

4. If the principal axes A are exported, bounding box values are also exported.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 451

where BBOx,y,z defines the origin and BBLx,y,z the length along the corresponding axis.

Note: When importing the text file into an Excel spreadsheet, do not forget to identify the pipe character (|) used as

separator in the Text Import Wizard dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 452

Notations Used for Inertia Matrices

This section will help you read the information given in the Measure Inertia dialog box for Inertia Matrix /

G, Inertia Matrix / O, Inertia Matrix / P and Inertia Matrix / Axis System A.

● Moments and Products of 3D Inertia

● Moments and Products of 2D Inertia

● Matrix of Inertia

● Additional Notation Used in Measure Inertia Command

Moments and Products of 3D Inertia

Iox Moment of inertia of the object

about the ox axis:

Ioy Moment of inertia of the object

about the oy axis:

Ioz Moment of inertia of the object

about the oz axis:

Pxy Product of inertia of the object

about axes ox and oy:

Pxz Product of inertia of the object

about axes ox and oz:

Pyz Product of inertia of the object

about axes oy and oz:

(where M is the mass of the object; units: kg.m2)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 453

Moments and Products of 2D Inertia

Iox Moment of inertia of the

surface about the ox axis:

Ioy Moment of inertia of the

surface about the oy axis:

Pxy Product of inertia of the

surface about axes ox and oy:

(where A is the surface; units: m4)

Matrix of Inertia

3D Inertia: 2D Inertia:

where I is the matrix of inertia of the object with respect to orthonormal basis Oxyz
Expression in Any Axis System:

I is the matrix of inertia with respect to orthonormal basis Oxyz.

Huygen's theorem is used to transform the matrix of inertia: (parallel axis theorem).

Let I' be the matrix of inertia with respect to orthonormal basis Pxyz

where
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 454

M = {u,v,w}: transformation matrix from basis (Pxyz) to basis (Puvw)

TM is the transposed matrix of matrix M.

J is the matrix of inertia with respect to an orthonormal basis Puvw:

J = TM.I'.M

Additional Notation Used in Measure Inertia Command

Ixy = (-Pxy)

Ixz = (-Pxz)

Iyz = (-Pyz)

Note: Since entries for the opposite of the product are symmetrical, they are given only once in the

dialog box.

IoxG Moment of inertia of the object about the ox axis with respect to the

system Gxyz, where G is the center of gravity.

IoxO Moment of inertia of the object about the ox axis with respect to the

system Oxyz, where O is the origin of the document.

IoxP Moment of inertia of the object about the ox axis with respect to the

system Pxyz, where P is a selected point.

IoxA Moment of inertia of the object about the ox axis with respect to the

system Axyz, where A is a selected axis system.

etc.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 455

Inertia Equivalents
This section deals with the following procedures:

● Understanding Inertia Equivalents

● Displaying Inertia Equivalents in the Measure Inertia dialog box

● Importing Inertia Equivalents

Understanding Inertia Equivalents

Equivalents are user parameters set using the Knowledgeware formula command under parts

or products and imported from text (*txt) or Excel (*xls) files.

If your document contains inertia equivalents set using Knowledgeware capabilities, then the Inertia

command will not calculate the inertia properties of the selected geometry but return the equivalent

values.

The Equivalent box of the Measure Inertia dialog box indicates whether or not equivalents have been

used:

● 0: the measure is made on the selection, geometry or assembly

● 1 or more: One or more inertia equivalents are taken into account.

Displaying Inertia Equivalents in the Measure Inertia dialog box

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 456

1. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box.

The Measure Inertia Customization dialog box appears.

2. Select Equivalent checkbox in the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box.

3. Click Apply.

Sets of equivalent parameters must be valid to be taken into account. To be valid, all the

properties shown in the example below must be listed.

An example of a text file follows. In text files, the name of the property and the value are

separated by a tab stop.

Equivalent_IsSurface false
Equivalent_IsVolume true
Equivalent_Area 6m2
Equivalent_Volume 1m3
Equivalent_Mass 1000kg
Equivalent_COGx 75mm
Equivalent_COGy -10mm
Equivalent_COGz -25mm

Equivalent_MatGxx 50000gxmm2
Equivalent_MatGyy 50000gxmm2
Equivalent_MatGzz 50000gxmm2
Equivalent_MatGxy 0gxmm2
Equivalent_MatGxz 0gxmm2
Equivalent_MatGyz 0gxmm2

In Excel files, simply list property names and values in two separate columns.

Importing Inertia Equivalents

1. Select the product to which you want to associate inertia equivalents.

2. Click formula .
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 457

3. Click Import... in the Formulas dialog box.

4. Select the text or Excel file containing the inertia equivalents in the file selection dialog box, then

click Open.

Parameters to be imported are listed

5. Click OK to import all the parameters listed into the document.

Imported parameters are now displayed in the Formulas dialog box

6. Click OK in the Formulas dialog box. You are now ready to run your inertia calculation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 458

❍ Having imported inertia equivalents, you no longer need the representations of the

product or sub-products and you can de-activate them (Edit > Representations). De-

activated representations are unloaded. This frees the geometry area and improves

system response time.

❍ To display parameters in the specification tree, select the Parameters checkbox Display

in Specification Tree in the Display tab of the Options dialog box (Tools > Options >

Infrastructure > Part Infrastructure).

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 459

Measuring the Principal Axes A about which

Inertia is Calculated
1. Select Measure Inertia .

2. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization dialog

box is displayed.

3. In the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box, select Principal axes check box

4. Click Apply. The Inertia / G tab in the Measure Inertia dialog box becomes available.

5. Click the Inertia / G tab to display the principal axes about which inertia is calculated.

Note: If you checked the Keep Measure option, bounding box values are also displayed in the

specification tree

6. You can create the axis system corresponding to the principal axes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 460

Measuring the Inertia Matrix with respect to the

Origin O of the Document
1. Select Measure Inertia .

2. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization

dialog box is displayed.

3. In the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box, click Inertia matrix / O.

4. Click Apply. The Inertia / O tab in the Measure Inertia dialog box becomes available. Entries for

the inertia matrix appear in the specification tree.

5. Click the Inertia / O tab to display the inertia matrix of selected items with respect to the origin

O of the document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 461

Measuring the Inertia Matrix with respect to a Point

P
Insert or open the InertiaVolume.CATPart from the common functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

1. Select the Measure Inertia .

2. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization dialog box

opens

3. In the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box, select Inertia matrix / P checkbox.

4. Click Apply. The Inertia / P tab in the Measure Inertia dialog box becomes available.

5. Click the Inertia / P tab.

6. Select the Select Point checkbox.

7. Select a point in the geometry area: The coordinates of the point and the inertia matrix are given in the

dialog box.

Note: Once you select a point in the geometry area, the Select Point check box is cleared.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 462

Note: Only points created in the Part Design workbench are valid.

8. Selecting another item calculates the inertia matrix of the selected item with respect to the same point.

To change point, select the Select Point check box again, then select another point.
 Measuring the Matrix
CATIA Infrastructure
of Inertia with respect toPagean
Version 5 Release 16 463
Axis System
Insert or open the InertiaVolume.CATPart from the common functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

1. Select the Measure Inertia .

2. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization dialog box opens

3. In the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box, Select Inertia matrix / Axis System checkbox.

4. Click Apply. The Inertia / Axis System tab in the Measure Inertia dialog box becomes available.

5. Click the Inertia / Axis System tab.

6. Select the Select Axis system check box.

7. Select an axis system in the specification tree:

Note: You must select the axis system in the specification tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 464

The name of the axis system as well as the origin O, (U, V, W) -vectors and the matrix of inertia with respect to the axis system are given in the dialog box.

Entries for the matrix of inertia appear in the specification tree.

Note: Only axis systems created in the Part Design workbench (Axis System command accessible in the Tools toolbar) are valid.

8. Selecting another item measures inertia properties of the selected item with respect to the same axis system.

To change axis system, click the Select Axis System check box again, then select another axis system.

If you checked the Keep Measure option in the Measure Inertia dialog box, your matrix of inertia measures are kept as features and, if made with

respect to a V5 axis system, are associative.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 465

Measuring the Moment of Inertia about an Axis

Insert or open the InertiaVolume.CATPart from the common functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

1. Select the Measure Inertia .

2. Click Customize... in the Measure Inertia dialog box. The Measure Inertia Customization dialog box opens

3. In the Measure Inertia Customization dialog box, select Moment / axis checkbox to measure inertia with respect to an axis.

4. Click Apply. The Inertia / Axis tab in the Measure Inertia dialog box becomes available.

5. Click the Inertia / Axis tab.

6. Select the Select Axis checkbox.

7. Select an axis in the geometry area:

The equation and direction vector of the axis as well as the moment of inertia Ma about the axis and the radius of
gyration are given in the dialog box.

Note: Only axes created in the Part Design workbench are valid.

8. Selecting another item measures the inertia of the selected item about the same axis. To change axis, click the Select axis check

box again, then select another axis.

CATIA Infrastructure
3D Inertia Properties of a Surface
Version 5 Release 16 Page 466

You can measure 3D inertia properties on exact and tessellated surfaces. Examples showing a surface and a DMU section are given below.

Insert or open the InertiaVolume.CATPart from the common functionalities sample folder cfysm/samples.

The DMU section is a tessellated surface.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 467
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 468

Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects

Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects
Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 469

Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects

This task explains how to drag and drop icons onto objects to run commands, which is a quicker alternative to
selecting commands or icons.

Open the document Manipulators.CATProduct.

1. Click Select to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

2. Drag the Edge Fillet icon from the toolbar onto an edge of the pad.

As soon as you point at the edge, it is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape :
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 470

3. Release the mouse button.

This displays the Edge Fillet dialog box, and you can proceed to create the fillet:

The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your
workbench documentation for more details.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 471

Dragging and Dropping Objects Onto Objects

This task explains how to drag and drop objects onto objects, which is a quick way to copy objects.

Open the document DragObject.CATProduct.

1. Click Select to enter selection mode, if it is not already activated.

You are going to select a fillet and copy it to another location on the same part.

2. Point to the element to be copied ("EdgeFillet" in our example), so as to highlight it.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 472

3. Press and hold down Ctrl and drag the fillet to another edge on the part.

As soon as you point at the pad face, the face is highlighted and the pointer changes to this shape:

4. Release Ctrl and the mouse button.

The fillet is copied to the selected edge:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 473

You can also move the object, instead of copying it. To do so, simply drag the object to the new

location. When you drag the object, the following symbol appears:

The drag and drop method of running commands is not available everywhere: refer to your
workbench documentation for more details.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 474

More about the Drap and Drop capability

● In certain cases, an object may be copied without pressing and holding down the Ctrl key before
dragging, when you were expecting the object to be moved. In this case, you will be informed that a

copy is being performed (and not a move) by the appearance of the symbol. This is typically the
case when you attempt to drag an object created in one context (in one workshop) onto an object
created in another context (workshop). So, within the same document window, the move is only allowed
if the object onto which you drop your object can be edited in the current context (workshop). For
example, you cannot drag (move) a part onto a line in a sketch: the part and the sketch were created in
different workshops
● The behavior of the drag and drop capability varies according to the workbench in which you are working.
For instance, dragging and dropping within a .CATPart document is equivalent to cutting and pasting
whereas dragging and dropping within an Assembly document is a way of reinstantiating a part.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 475

Printing Documents
About Printing, Capturing Images and the Album
Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings
Printing the Specification Tree
Previewing Documents Prior to Printing
Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents
Printing To a File
Printing Multi-Documents
Printing in Batch Mode

You may also find it useful to refer to some basic concepts about the print functionality.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 476

About Printing, Capturing Images and the Album

A certain number of identical functions are available in different parts of the software:
● you can print documents, capture and print images directly from the Capture toolbar, or print
images from the album
● you can preview documents prior to printing, or preview images in the album
● you can save images to other formats using the Capture toolbar or the album
● you can copy images to the clipboard using the Capture toolbar or the album.

The fact that these functions are shared make it easy to use the print, capture and album functions
together.

For more information about capturing images and using the album, refer to Capturing and Managing
Images for the Album.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 477

Printing a Document Quickly without

Customizing Print Settings

This task explains how to print a document quickly to the default printer using default print settings.

You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print using the
default printer (declared by your Windows system administrator). However, on UNIX, you will only be
able to print once you have set up a printer, as explained in Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX and
Windows.

1. Once your document is open, click Quick Print from the Standard toolbar.

The current document is sent to your default printer using the current print settings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 478

Printing the Specification Tree

This task explains how to obtain a paper version of the specification tree (also called "graph").

Note that the tree structure is printed as displayed on screen. To print the complete structure, for instance, you need to
expand all the levels of the tree.

Open the document Print.CATProduct.

1. Expand the specification tree to display the following structure:

2. Click the axis system displayed in the bottom right corner of the screen to swap the focus from the geometry to

the tree (you can also select View > Commands List > Swap view/tree or enter c:swap view/tree in the

power input field).

3. Right-click anywhere in the geometry area (do not position your mouse over the tree) then select Print whole:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 479

This opens the Print dialog box which lets you define the print parameters to be applied:

4. Once your parameters are defined, click OK to print the document and close the dialog box.

For detailed information on how to use the Print dialog box, refer to Customizing Print Settings Before Printing
Your Documents.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 480

Previewing Documents Prior to Printing

This task explains how to preview documents prior to printing.

Open the document Print.CATProduct

1. Select File > Print (or press CTRL+P) to display the Print dialog box:

2. Click the Preview... button to display the Print Preview window:

Note that when previewing documents with a Rendering Mode set to On Screen, a progress bar might appear
before the Print Preview window opens.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 481

You can click Fit All In and use zooming commands inside the Print Preview window, or click Quick Print
to print.

You can also preview the document size in real size by zooming.

To zoom, press and hold down the middle mouse button in the Print Preview window, then click the left mouse button
and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down). Zoom up or down to increase or decrease the document size; the
percentage of the real size is displayed top right as you zoom. For example, if you want to display the document at its
real size, zoom to reach 100%.

The Print Preview window is also available via:

● the Print button in the Capture Preview window you access by selecting Tools > Image > Capture
● the Preview contextual command when selecting Tools > Image > Album.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 482

Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your

Documents
This task explains how to print documents.

As of V5R16, you can print documents displayed using a Manual or Automatic multi-view configuration.

You can only print a document if a default printer has been set up. On Windows, you print using the default printer
declared by your Windows system administrator. However, on UNIX, you can only print a document if a default printer
has been set up by selecting File > Printer Setup, as explained in Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX and Windows.

Open the document Print.CATProduct.

1. Select File > Print (or press Ctrl+P) to display the Print dialog box.

The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 483

This dialog box is also available via:

● the Print button in the Capture Preview window you access by selecting Tools > Image > Capture
● the Print contextual command when selecting Tools > Image > Album.

The area to the right is a preview area displaying a shaded rectangle representing the size of the image to be
printed, using the default paper format with the default margins. The image size matches the real size of the
geometry area in your document window, with respect to the selected paper format. Any changes you make to
page orientation, page setup (paper format, paper margins), image scale and position are instantaneously
displayed in this area.

Resizing the document window resizes the image accordingly. You can also resize the image by dragging the
image handles (using the left mouse button). The proportional relationship between image width and height is
always maintained. Note that these handles are not available if you click Fit in Page (the default setting).

2. Select a printer, or select the Print to file check box and enter the name of a file. Refer to Printing To a File for

more information.

When selecting a printer on Windows, you can use the printers provided by Dassault Systèmes, these printers
being managed with dedicated plot configuration files. Dassault Systèmes Printer Manager is part of the Version
5 Windows environment, combined with the native Microsoft printer manager.

To choose a printer, you can also click the Printer Name button to search for a printer using a filter:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 484
The list of printers that have been defined is displayed under "Printer List". By default, all the printers are
highlighted.

In the Filters area, enter the string to be searched for and select the driver on which you want to perform the
search.
You can also indicate a printer type by selecting the appropriate option.

When finished, press Enter to run the search: the list of printers is updated and displays only the printer(s)
corresponding to your search criteria.
If you are not satisfied with your search, you can click the Reset button to go back to the default options.
When satisfied, click OK to validate and close the Printer Selection dialog box. The list of printers is filtered
according to your search criteria:

3. You can use the combo box displayed next to the Printer Name list to filter the list of printers according to

groups that have been previously defined in the Printers tab.

To do so, just select a group in the list. The printer list to the right is automatically updated and displays only

the printers included in the selected group:

Note: General is the default value and displays all the printers set up by your administrator.

4. In case you wish to set up your printer, click the Properties... button to access the printer properties. The look of

the dialog box changes according to the driver. Modify the desired parameters then click OK to validate.

In case the driver is provided by Dassault Systèmes, clicking the Properties... button displays the Printer

Properties dialog box described in Adding a Printer.

5. Set the page orientation.

The current page setup (page format and page size) set using the Page setup... button is displayed as a
reminder. Below are thee examples of orientation settings:

Portrait: sets portrait orientation

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 485

Landscape: sets landscape orientation

Best orientation: if you resize the image beyond the page margins (displayed in red in the image to the
right), Best orientation keeps the image to be printed at its original size, but automatically changes the page
orientation (as displayed in the preview area on the right of the dialog box) to fit the image into the page.

Orientation settings differ from one printer to another. For instance, some printers might offer a Rotated
Landscape orientation in addition to Portrait and Landscape.

6. Set the image position and size of the image to be printed.

This involves changing the position of the image on the selected paper format, and scaling the image. To do so,
you need to clear the Fit in Page option first (if it is selected) to access the position and size options.

To scale the image, enter the scale percentage or use the Scale box.

Whichever method you use, the Scale box and the image Width and Height boxes are updated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 486

You can also click Fit in Page which centers the image and scales it up to the largest size so that it fits into the
margins. Clicking this option deactivates the other options in the Position and Size area, and the image resize
handles are no longer available.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 487

The No Fitting option leaves the document to be printed to its original size, i.e. a scale 1:1.

The Fit to option lets you set the Scale of the image. You can specify the distance from the Left and Bottom
margins as well as the image dimensions in the Width and Height boxes (changing Width automatically
updates Height, and inversely, in order to keep ratio constant).

Note: any modification to the scale, width or height automatically impacts simultaneously these three
parameters.

To position the image, you can:

● click the Center button (to center the image)

● click the Origin button (to position the image bottom left, at the origin)
● drag the image to the new position
● or enter the position of the bottom and left corner of the image, with respect to the paper margins.

7. Click the Page Setup... button to display the Page Setup dialog box, and click OK when finished.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 488

You can:

● choose a standard paper format

● reset paper margins
● or reset printer defaults.

The Use Image Format check box is relevant for CATDrawing documents only. Refer to Printing Multi-
Documents for detailed information on this option.

To set the paper format, select the format from the Name list. If you set a new format, the image of the paper
format and the image to be printed are resized accordingly. If the format selected is incompatible with the
printer currently selected, a message informs you that the format cannot exceed the dimension for the printer.
However, this does not prevent you from setting the paper format.

In our example, the first image uses the A4 ISO format, and the second the A5 ISO format:

The new paper format and corresponding page size are displayed in the Position and Size area.

To set the paper margins, enter values for the Left, Right, Top and Bottom margins,

The example shows how the new margins (represented by dashed lines) affect the position of the image:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 489

8. Select the image orientation:

● Best Rotation: used in conjunction with Fit in Page, scales the image up to the largest size which still fits
into the current paper format
● Rotation: 90º
● Rotation: 180º
● Rotation: 270º.

9. Select the Print Area from the list:

● Whole Document: print the entire image

● Display: print the image as seen on screen

● Selection: prints the area selected using the Select Mode button. For more information, refer to
Capturing Selected Areas of Images part in this guide.

● Document Area: this option is relevant for .CATDrawing documents only. Refer to Printing Multi-
Documents.

10. Click the Options... button to access the Options dialog box and set the Color options determining the type of

color output.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 490

● Set the color type for the image to be printed:

❍ True color: true color image
❍ Greyscale: grayscale image (produces a smaller print file)
❍ Monochrome.

The gamma factor (between 0.1 and 5.0). A gamma factor of 0.1 produces a dark image, whereas a factor
of 5.0 produces a lighter image.
● Select the Print White Vectors as Black check box if you want to print white vectors as black on the
resulting printout.
By default, this option is activated.
● Select the Print Text Blanking check box if you want to print the text blanking (i.e. the white frame onto
which the text is displayed).

11. Click the Banner tab and set the banner options:

● if you want to show a banner on the printed output, use the banner box to print information about the
current print job in the banner ; this box contains the $USER, $DATE and $TIME variables which, by
default, print your username, and the current date and time in the banner at the bottom of the printed
output. This box is editable: you can delete the variables if required and replace them with a text of your
choice
● Position: setting the position to None removes the banner ; you can also position it Top Horizontal,
Bottom Horizontal, Left Vertical or Right Vertical
● Insert logo: select this check box if you want to insert a graphic logo in the banner, and select the button
to navigate in your file system and select the graphic file to be used as the banner.

The banner option is also available when using the Generative Drafting application.

12. Click the Various tab and set the various options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 491

Set the Rendering Mode to be used for printing:

● Default: means that the output is printed according to the rendering style defined in the Custom View
Modes dialog box. However, bear in mind that if the defined style is not supported, some discrepancies
might occur between the version displayed on screen and the printed version
● Wireframe: corresponds to the Wireframe rendering style

● Hidden Line Removal: corresponds to the Hidden Line Removal (HLR) style you apply by selecting
Tools > Customize then the Commands tab and the All Commands category. However, note that when
printing faces or edges with a great number of points, lines or triangles, the result might not be as expected
● Shading with Triangles: corresponds to the Triangles rendering style

● Dynamic Hidden Line: corresponds to the Dynamic hidden line removal rendering style

● On Screen: lets you print raster images (like if you use Tools > Image > Capture to capture an image in
Pixel Mode then print it afterwards). This rendering mode is especially relevant for Drafting documents
with a shading.
Note that when using 3D PLM raster printers, you will not be able to print JPEG images if the allocated
memory is not sufficient.

Set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of printed output:

● Low (screen): the quality of the printed output matches the screen resolution
By default, this option is selected
● Medium
● High
● Custom: selecting this factor lets you define precisely the print quality by indicating the desired dpi value.
The maximum value you can enter is 680 dpi for A4 format and 170 dpi for A0 format.

The higher the setting, the longer the print time, the larger the print file, the higher the image quality. This
option does not impact print previewing.

Note: You can also choose to scale or not the text to be printed by selecting or clearing the Text Scaling
check box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 492

Set the Line Width Specification:

● Absolute: original linetype specifications are preserved

● Scaled: the print image scale is applied to linetypes
● No thickness.

and Line Type Specification: Absolute or Scaled.

Set the Line Cap option to choose how line ends are drawn (useful for drafting):

● Flat
● Square
● Round.

This option does not impact print previewing.

You can select the Line Type Overlapping check box in order to get a correct plotting when lines overlap.
This option is especially relevant when working with CATDrawing documents.

Below are two examples:

Line Type Overlapping is activated Line Type Overlapping is deactivated

13. Select the Tiling option if you want to tile the image and print it on several pages.

Once the Tiling option is selected, you can define more precisely the tiling options for your image by clicking

the Define... button to open the following window:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 493

● Tile Count lets you specify the number of tiles to be used to cut the image horizontally or vertically (enter
the desired number in the corresponding box)
● Center tiles allows you to center the tile on the paper
● Paper overlap enables you to define the horizontal and vertical paper overlap using the appropriate boxes
● Position tiles lets you indicate the position of the tile on the paper by entering its coordinates in the X and
Y boxes. You can also specify the tile size by entering its dimensions in millimeters in the Width and
Height boxes
● The Tile Outline Printout check box enables you, when activated, to print the outline of each tile.

When Selection Mode is activated, you can click any tile in the preview window to display the
corresponding part of the document:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 494

Note that you can click Fit All In and use zooming commands inside the preview window. The Remove

Tile Mode button lets you select the tile(s) to be removed from the printout. The selected tile(s) are
then identified in the preview window by a red cross as shown below:

Clicking the Remove Tile Mode button grays all the fields displayed to the left. When the tiles have been

removed, click the Selection Mode button to activate the boxes and go on defining your tiling options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 495

14. Select OK successively in each dialog box to confirm all your print settings then in the Print dialog box click:

● Apply to print the document without closing the Print dialog box.

● OK to print the document and close the Print dialog box.

Each time you print a document, a log output file is generated. The traces contained in the file give you
information on the printing date and time, the user name, the log file name, the printer name along with the
print mode (i.e. to a file or a device).
By default, this file is named Print.log and is located in a temporary directory:

On Windows

C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

On UNIX

Print.log is also located in the CATTemp directory, in your home directory.

However, the default location and name may be modified by your administrator using the CATPRINTLOG
external variable.
For instance, setting

CATPRINTLOG='c:\test\MyPrint.log'

means that the log file named "MyPrint.log" will be located in the directory "test"...

...whereas

CATPRINTLOG=NONE

means that the log file will keep its default name and location.

Here is a log output sample:

<Start Print
User: AJT
Date: 04/14/2005
Time: 16:31:17
Host: MYMACHINE
Printer: \\Printer1
Document: C:\Manipulators3.CATPart
Result: 1
End Print>
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 496

Printing To a File
This task explains how to print to a file.

Open the document Print.CATProduct.

1. Select File > Print (or press CTRL+P) to display the Print dialog box.

The type of printer you choose determines the default settings in the dialog box.

You can also print to a file via:

● the Print button in the Capture Preview window you access by selecting Tools > Image > Capture
● the Print contextual command when selecting Tools > Image > Album.

2. Select a printer name.

3. Select the Print to File check box:

Note: when selecting a printer on Windows, you can use the printers provided by Dassault Systèmes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 497

4. Enter a file name, or click the File Name... button to display the Print to File dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 498

5. Type the name of the file in which you will store the image printout, then click the Save button to save the file and return

to the Print dialog box.

The file is saved with the .prn extension (the only extension available). The information in the file depends on the printer
you selected in the Print dialog box.

Note that the More... button is relevant only when printing multiple pages. Refer to Printing Multi-Documents for
detailed information.

6. When printing to a 3D PLM Printer (refer to Adding a Printer for detailed information), you can click the Properties...

button to access the printer properties:

7. In the Submission Scripts area, click Custom next to "Declaration" to specify the default output file name: each time you

print a document, an output file is created at the location you specify in the text box.

8. Click the Edit Script... button which is now activated. This button lets you access the Runtime Script in the window

below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 499

9. You can use the following environment variable contained in the default script to create your own script:

● CATOUT=C:\DOCUME~1\ajt\LOCALS~1\Temp\catout_%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.out indicates the location,

name and number of the document to be printed where:

❍ "C:\DOCUME~1\ajt\LOCALS~1\Temp\" is the location of the document

❍ "catout_%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.out" indicates the name (stored in "catout.out") and number (stored in

"%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.out") of the document.

For instance, when using a PostScript printer, you can use this variable the following way:

set CATOUT=e:\Temp\test_ %CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.ps

to specify that the name of the document to be printed is "test.ps" and is located in "e:\temp".

10. Click OK to validate your modification in the script window then OK again to close the Printer Properties dialog box.

11. Click Apply or OK to save the file.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 500

12. To print the file, access the folder in which the file has been saved and use the copy command, for example:

copy myfile.prn LPT1

where "LPT1" is the local print port,

or if the printer is on a network:

copy myfile.prn \\servername\printername

where servername is the name of the print server, and printername is the name of the printer.

On UNIX, use the operating system command appropriate for your platform.

Texts created with a bold Stroke font are printed with a 0.7 mm thickness and therefore, they may not be read correctly if their
size is small. This behavior is applicable for the Print to File option as well as for any other print capability (i.e. Quick Print,
printing without selecting the Print to File check box, etc.).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 501

Printing Multi-Documents
This task explains how to print one or more sheets inserted in your document.

In addition to Drafting documents, this functionality is available for V4 documents (.model) and multipage image formats (such as
TIFF, JPEG, BMP, etc.).

Open the document PrintMultiDocs.CATDrawing.

1. Select File > Print (or press CTRL+P) to display the Print dialog box.

2. Click the MultiDocuments tab:

3. If you want to print to a file instead of a printer, select the Print to File check box then enter a file name or click the File

Name... button. This file will contain your image printout will be saved with a .prn extension.

When printing multiple sheets to a file, click the More... button to open the File Name Selection dialog box which
displays the file name you have entered in step 3:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 502

You have two options:

● if you want to print all your sheets to a single file, you just have to select the Print to One File check box.
Selecting this option automatically grays the field below since it is not relevant anymore.

You can then click OK to validate and close the File Name Selection dialog box.

● if you prefer storing each image printout in a separate file, i.e. generate as many .prn files as there are sheets, use
the Set the name of the file box.
This field lets you specify the name of the .prn file (if not already specified). It also lets you indicate the position of
the number in the file name by inserting the # character where desired. The "#" character is used as a wildcard and
is incremented for each .prn file generated.

For instance, printing 3 sheets using the following syntax:

print#.prn

creates 3 .prn files named "print1.prn", "print2.prn" and "print3.prn".

Whereas printing 3 sheets using the syntax:

#print.prn

creates 3 .prn files named "1print.prn", "2print.prn" and "3print.prn".

Bear in mind that you have to print each generated .prn file individually. Refer to Printing To a File for detailed
information on printing .prn files.

Note: if you do not use the "#" character in the .prn file name, a single .prn file is created even if the Print to One
File check box has not been selected and only the last sheet is printed (whichever option has been selected in the
Range area).

When finished, click OK to validate and close the File Name Selection dialog box.
After clicking OK, the Print to File box reflects the changes you have made as shown below:

The location ("E:\users" in our example) and name

("print${CATPRT_DOC_SHEETS_NUM}" where "${CATPRT_DOC_SHEETS_NUM}"
represents the file number) of the .prn files is indicated. The number of documents to
be printed is stored in the variable.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 503

4. In the Range area, indicate whether you want to print All Sheets or only the Active Sheet by sleecting the appropriate

option.

In case you want to print a given number/range of existing sheets, click Sheet Numbers before entering the
corresponding sheet numbers in the field below.

5. If you clicked Sheet Numbers, you can click the Sheets... button to open the Image Selection dialog box which lets you

select the sheets you wish to print:

By default, all the sheets are selected but you can deselect the sheets you do not want to print by clicking them in the
list. The Reset button lets you re-select all the sheets displayed, if needed.

You can select the Clip to Sheet Format check box if you want the drawing representation to be clipped to the sheet
format.

You can also select the Print Detail Sheet check box if you intend to print sheets of type Detail.

6. Select the number of Copies as well as the area to print.

7. Click the Preview... button to display the Print Preview window.

For more information about print preview, refer to Previewing Document Prior to Printing in this guide.

8. Click the Options... button to access the Options dialog box and set the Color options determining the type of color

output then the Page Setup... button to display the Page Setup dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 504

Note: you can select the Use Image Format check box to automatically adapt the printer format to the current format
of the CATDrawing document to be printed. This option is especially useful when printing sketches.

Selecting this check box automatically activates No Fitting (in the Position and Size area under the Layout tab) in order
to leave the document to be printed to its original size.

Once the option is selected, all the fields are grayed out in the dialog box and the Form Name list displays the value
User to indicate a specific format.
In the Print dialog box, the printer format changes to the current document format:

9. Click the Layout tab to select the required options.

For detailed information about defining layout, page setup and options refer to Customizing Print Settings Before Printing
Your Documents in this guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 505

10. Select the Print Area:

● Whole Document: prints the entire image

● Display: prints the image as seen on screen

● Selection: lets you define on screen a rectangular zone to be printed with respect to the drawing scale

Click the Select Mode button then drag and drop the mouse to define the clipped zone. For more information,
refer to Capturing Selected Areas of Images part in this guide

● Document Area: prints the area that has been previously defined for each sheet of your .CATDrawing document in

the Drafting workbench.

This area is defined using the Print Area option displayed in the sheet properties. For detailed information, refer to

"Editing Sheet Properties" in the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting User's Guide.

Note that:

❍ if you did not define any print area prior to accessing the Print dialog box, Document Area do not appear in the

list

❍ the sheets for which no print area has been defined are printed according to the options set in the Position and

Size area (under the Layout tab).

11. Click the Tiling to tile the image to be printed. Once this option is activated, you can click the Define... button to set the

tiling options. Refer to Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents for more information.

12. If you print to a 3D PLM printer (refer to Adding a Printer for detailed information), you can click the Properties... button

to access the printer properties:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 506

13. In the Submission Scripts area, click Custom next to "Declaration" to specify the default output file name: each time you

print a document, an output file is created at the location you specify in the text field.

14. Click the Edit Script... button which is now activated. This button lets you access the default Runtime Script displayed in

the window below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 507

15. You can use the following two environment variables contained in the default script to create your own script:

● %CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_COUNT% indicates the number of sheets to be printed. This variable is automatically

updated by the application

● CATOUT=C:\DOCUME~1\ajt\LOCALS~1\Temp\catout_%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.out indicates the location,

name and number of the sheet where:

❍ "C:\DOCUME~1\ajt\LOCALS~1\Temp\" is the location of the sheet to be printed

❍ "catout_%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.out" indicates the name (stored in "catout.out") and number (stored in

"%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.out") of the sheet.

When printing multiple sheets, the sheet number is incremented automatically, you do not need to bother about

it.

For instance, when using a PostScript printer, you can use this variable the following way:

set CATOUT=e:\Temp\test_%CATPRT_DOC_SHEET_NUM%.ps

to specify that the name of the sheet to be printed is "test.ps" and is located in "e:\temp".

16. Click OK to close the Runtime Script window then Apply to validate your print settings and print the document without

closing the dialog box.

Note that clicking OK also validates your settings and print the document but closes the dialog box.

Information on V4 Sheets

A new utility named "CATPrtSheet" lets you print information on your V4 sheets from the command line.

1. Open a Command Prompt window.

2. Change to the installation folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\code\bin (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/code/bin/ (on UNIX)

(where n is the current release number)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 508

3. Enter the following command line:

CATPrtSheet sheet_name.sheet output_file.txt

sheet_name is the name of the .sheet file and output_file is the name and path of the text file

containing information on the V4 sheet.

For instance:

CATPrtSheet sheet1.sheet e:\users\output.txt

4. Access the folder in which the output file has been generated then open this file to see the sheet-related information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 509

Printing in Batch Mode

This task describes how to use the Print Batch utility in order to print documents without running Version 5.
These documents may be Version 5 files (such as .CATProduct, .CATParts documents, etc.), raster files (bmp, tiff, etc.), vector
files (CGM, HPGL, HPGL2) and Version 4 models.

This scenario explains how to:

● access the batch interface

● define your batch parameters

● run the batch directly from the command line

● run the batch directly from the Batch Monitor.

Provided that you have a graphic board (on Windows) or an X server (on UNIX), the rendering style (i.e. "Shading", "Shading
with Edges", etc.) can be taken into account when printing in batch mode. To do so, you need to set the following variable as
shown below:

set PRINT_BATCH_WITH_GRAPHIC_CARD=1 (on Windows)

or

export PRINT_BATCH_WITH_GRAPHIC_CARD=1 (on UNIX).

Accessing the Batch Interface

Method 1: Accessing the batch interface from the command line

1. Open an MS-DOS Window.

2. Access the following folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\code\command (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/ (on UNIX)

3. Enter the command:

CATUTIL -Name PrintBatch (on Windows)

or

./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name PrintBatch" (on UNIX)

The Print Batch window opens.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 510

Method 2: Accessing the batch interface from the Batch Monitor

You can also access the print batch interface using the Batch Monitor in a Version 5 session. In that case, some additional
options are available to you.

Remote mode

You can choose whether you want to run the batch locally or on a remote computer by activating the corresponding option:

● Run Local: default option. When selected, the batch is run in local on your local computer

● Run Remote: select this option then indicate the name of the remote computer on which the batch will be run. The remote

computer uses the printers set up on your local computer.

Note that:

❍ when using Windows printers, you can run the batch in remote mode on Windows computers only

❍ when using 3DPLM printers, you can run the batch in remote mode either on UNIX or on Windows computers.

For detailed information on running batches in remote mode, refer to Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor in this guide.

Licensing

You also have the ability to select a license using the Licensing Setup... button.

Getting Help

The batch-specific online documentation can be accessed directly from the Batch Printing interface by clicking the icon in
the top right corner (on Windows) or the Help button (on UNIX).

In this scenario, we assume that the batch interface has been accessed using Method 1 detailed above. The batch interface looks
as follows (click the thumbnail below to see the full-size picture):

Defining the Batch Parameters

1. Select a printer using the list displayed next to the Printer Name button. This list lets you filter the list of printers

displayed to the right. You can choose either:

● General: default mode. All the printers you have set up are displayed in the printer list to the right

● a printer group you defined in the Printers tab. In that case, only the printers included in the selected group are

displayed in the printer list.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 511

You can also select the Print to file check box and enter the name of a file.

Refer to Printing To a File for more information.

2. In case you wish to set up your printer, click the Properties... button to open the printer properties dialog box. The look

of the dialog box changes according to the driver. Modify the desired parameters then click OK to validate.

In case the driver is provided by Dassault Systèmes, clicking the Properties... button displays the Printer Properties

dialog box described in Adding a Printer.

3. Click the icon then navigate to the file(s) you want to print then click Open to validate.

The File Selection box lets you access your CATDrawing documents more easily. To do so, select CATIADrawing in
the Files of type box so that only CATDrawing documents are displayed.

Note that if you set the DLName environment as "Current" in Tools > Options > General > Document, the usual
File Selection dialog box is replaced by the following one dedicated to the DLName environment:

The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names
referred to as "DLNames" (each folder is assigned a logical name).
In this mode, the different file opening and saving commands only allow end users to access documents in directories
referenced by DLNames.

The File Selection dialog box displayed above lets you navigate to the DLName in which the parameter file to be

used is stored. You can also search for DLNames using a specific interface by clicking the icon.
For detailed information on how to use this dialog box, refer to the Document task.

Click OK when finished selecting your documents.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 512

The selected file names are displayed along with their path, parameters and printer:

When at least one file is selected in the list, some icons are activated to let you modify the printing order:

● moves a file up in the list

● moves a file down in the list

● deletes a file from the list.

4. Click the Default Printing Parameters button to define the parameters used by default for all printed documents in the

Printing Parameters dialog box.

The Layout tab lets you define the page orientation, the image size and position, etc. and is identical to the Print
dialog box accessed via File > Print.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 513

5. Click the Page Setup... button to open the Page Setup dialog box. Refer to Customizing Print Settings for detailed

information.

6. Click the Options... button to access the Options dialog box. Refer to Customizing Print Settings for detailed

information.

The Printing Parameters dialog box also enables you to define the visualization mode used for printing by selecting
the desired mode from a list in the Visualization tab:

If you are printing CATDrawing documents, you can access the MultiDocuments tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 514
● In the Range area, indicate whether you want to print All Sheets or only the Active Sheet by selecting the
appropriate option
● Select the Clip to Sheet Format check box if you want the drawing representation to be clipped to the sheet
format
● Select the Print Detail Sheet check box if you intend to print sheets of type Detail.

7. In case you want to use parameters which are different from the default ones for a specific file, right-click the file from

the list then select Parameters... to open the Parameters dialog box:

This dialog box enables you to apply parameters other than the default one proposed by selecting another printer,
another orientation and so on.
The Printing Parameters button gives you access to the above-detailed Printing Parameters dialog box except for
the Visualization and MultiDocuments tabs which gives you access to more parameters:

In the Visualization tab, you can click the Layer Filter... button: this opens the Visualization Filters dialog box
which lets you edit or create visualization filters:

The default current filter "All visible" is applied automatically: it lets you see all the contents of the document. This
filter cannot be deleted.
Refer to Using Visualization Filters for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 515

When printing CATDrawing documents, you can print a given number/range of sheets by clicking Sheet Numbers
then:

● enter the corresponding sheet numbers in the field below

● click the Sheets... button to open the Image Selection dialog box which lets you select the sheet(s) you wish to
print.

You can now use the MultiDocuments tab to print the drafting of Version 4 models.
To do so, select Sheet Numbers then enter the numbers of the workspaces to be printed in the box below.
You can also click the Sheets... button then select the desired workspaces in the Image Selection dialog box:

By default, all the documents are selected but you can deselect the documents you do not want to print by clicking
them in the list. The Reset button lets you re-select all the elements displayed, if needed.

Click OK to validate your selection and close the window.

Once the parameters have been modified, the status of the customized file changes from "Default" to "Customized" in
the Parameter column and the printer name (if different from default printer) is displayed in the Printer column.

Note: if needed, you can reset the customized parameters to the default parameters by right-clicking the desired file
from the list then selecting Reset Parameters. In that case, the status of the file changes from "Customized" to
"Default".
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 516

8. If you want the corresponding CATScript file to be saved in a specific location, click the CATScript Generation... button.

A CATScript window displaying the content of the CATScript file: click the Save As... button then indicate the name and

location of the file before clicking Save to validate.

By default, the CATScript file is saved in a temporary folder.

Running a batch printing using the PrintBatch command will automatically generate a file named
"PrintBatchParameters.xml" and saved in a temporary folder by default. If you want to save this file under another
name and in another location, just click the Print Batch Parameters Saving... button.
The generated XML file can be edited manually. Refer to Editing the XML file for detailed information.

You can preview the file(s) to be printed simply by selecting a file from the list then clicking the Preview contextual
command. However, note that you will not be able to use zooming commands for CATDrawing, CATProduct and
CATPart documents.

9. Click the RUN button to print the selected documents then the CANCEL button to close the Batch Printing window.

Editing the XML File

You can also define your print parameters directly in the "PrintBatchParameters.xml" file using your favorite text
editor.
Click the thumbnail below to see an example of XML file:

Should you need to modify the name of the printer to be used, this can be done very easily in the XML file by
indicating the new printer name in the <PRINT_OUTPUT_PRINTER> parameter:

If you are printing CATDrawing documents, you can edit the sheet name and number in
<PRINT_VISU_IMAGE_NAME> and <PRINT_VISU_IMAGE_NUM> respectively:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 517

Running the batch directly from the command line via the Batch
Monitor
The XML file detailed above can be used later on to run the batch printing without having to access the Batch Printing dialog
box.
To do so:

1. Access the default folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\OS_a\code\bin (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/ (on UNIX)

2. Run the following command:

CATUTIL -Name PrintBatch e:\users\parameters.xml (on Windows)

or

./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name PrintBatch /u/usr/parameters.xml" (on UNIX)

where e:\users\ or /u/usr/ is the path of the file PrintBatchParameters.xml.

Note: bear in mind that you can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using File >
Printer Setup.

Running the batch directly from the Batch Monitor

If you already have an XML file containing all the necessary inputs, there is no need for you to define the batch parameters and
you can run the batch directly. To do so:

1. Access the Batch Monitor by selecting Tools > Utility... in your Version 5 session.

Note that you can also access the Batch Monitor from the command line.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 518

2. In the Utilities tab, click "PrintBatch" then select the File > Associate a parameter file (or right-click the batch name

then select Associate a parameter file).

Note that if you set the DLName environment as "Current" in Tools > Options > General > Document, the usual
File Selection dialog box is replaced by the following one dedicated to the DLName environment:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 519
The File Selection dialog box displayed above lets you navigate to the DLName in which the parameter file to be
used is stored.
For detailed information on how to use this dialog box, refer to the Document task.

3. Navigate to the directory in which you saved the XML file then click Open to validate.

4. Access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the XML file you associated to the batch.

Note that you can associate several parameter files in order to create a list of batches that you can run later on when

needed:

5. Still in the Start tab, right-click the file associated to the batch you want to run then select Run.

Note that if you run the Print Batch via the Batch Monitor, the generated report looks slightly different.
This report can be accessed by double-clicking the desired line under the Processes tab.
Then, click Close to close the window and go back to the Batch Monitor.

Running your batch via the Batch Monitor also generates a file in a temporary folder. This file is named
"PrintBatchParameters" suffixed with the hour at which the batch was run (for instance,
"PrintBatchParameters_14.41.25.xml" to indicate that the batch was run at 14.21.25 PM). To save this file under
another name and in another location, click the SAVE button.
The generated XML file can be edited manually. Refer to Editing the XML file for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 520

Capturing and Managing Images for the Album

Capturing Simple Images
Capturing Selected Areas of Images
Capturing Images in a Multi-View Configuration
Previewing Images in the Album
Editing Images in the Album
Renaming Images in the Album
Deleting Images from the Album
Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only)
Saving Images In Other Formats
Printing Images from the Album
Replaying Videos from the Album
Recording Interactions in Video Format
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 521

Capturing Simple Images

This task explains how to capture simple images as a whole.

1. Select Tools > Image > Capture to display the Capture toolbar:

Note that the command activated by default in the Capture toolbar depends on the command last used
for capturing:

● if the Pixel Mode command was activated last, then it is activated by default when displaying the
Capture toolbar
● if the Vector Mode command was activated last, then it is activated by default when displaying the
Capture toolbar.

2. Click Pixel Mode or Vector Mode to choose between a pixel or a vector image.

Before you start capturing images, note that:

● in Pixel Mode, cast shadows cannot be captured
● in Shading rendering mode, in which edges are not displayed, capturing vector images is not
useful, and produces images that cannot be viewed in the album: you capture only lines and edges
in vector mode, not shaded surfaces
● in HRD (Dynamic Hidden Line Removal) rendering mode, vector images are captured in real HLR
mode and thus, may look rather different from what you see on screen.

3. Click Options to access the Capture Options dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 522

4. In the General tab, set the following options:

● select the Show Banner check box if you want to show a banner on the capture. This activates the
Banner box containing the $NAME, $DATE and $TIME variables which, by default, print your
username, and the current date and time in the banner at the bottom of the capture. This box is
editable: you can delete the variables if required and replace them with a text of your choice
● select the Capture Only Geometry check box if you want to capture the geometry without
background. Note that this option cannot be used for vector images
● choose the Color mode from the list: either Color, Greyscale or Monochrome
● select the Capture White Pixels as Black check box if you want to print white pixels in black on
the resulting capture.

5. Access the Pixel tab if you are capturing pixel images, otherwise jump to step 7:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 523

● select the White Background check box if you want the capture to be taken on a white
background
● select the Anti-Aliasing check box to modify the appearance of lines in order to make the jagged
edges look smoother
● select the Constant Size Capture check box if you want the captured images to be the same size
when displayed to a scale of 1:1, whatever their resolution
● set the Rendering Quality factor which determines the quality of the output:
❍ Low (screen): the quality of the output matches the screen resolution. This is the default value
❍ Medium
❍ Highest
❍ Custom.

The higher the setting, the greater the quality of the capture.

When working in Pixel Mode, setting a quality other than Low captures the geometry but not the
specification tree and this, even if Capture Only Geometry is selected in the General tab.

Selecting Custom in the Rendering Quality list (where you see Low (screen) right now),
activates the More... button which lets you access the Image Size dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 524
This dialog box enables you to define the print Width, Height and Resolution:

● first, choose the Resolution, either in pixels/inch (.dpi) or in pixels/cm. The highest the
resolution, the longer the capture generation (and with a price to pay in performance)
● define the print Width and Height. The maximum value you can set for Width is 30000
on Windows and 10000 on UNIX. If the value you set exceeds the amount of allocated
memory, captured images are stored in temporary files in C:\Documents and
Settings\user\Local Settings\Temp on Windows and /tmp on UNIX. These files are named
capture_hour.bmp, for instance, "capture_15.42.30.bmp".
Then, when you click OK to validate and close the Image Size dialog box, one or many
progress bars might appear and impact performances.

The values indicated in the Pixel Size area are displayed for information only to give you an
idea of the image size in pixels, according to the print size you defined.

6. Click the Album... button to define your preferences for storing the images you are going to capture in

the album:

First, select the desired file format from the Format list. Then, select the compression type:

● Packbits (default option)

● No compression (if you do not want to compress the file)
● JPEG
● HUFFMAN
● Fax Group 4.

When you select the JPEG compression type, the Quality slider is activated to let you define more
precisely the compression quality (from 0 to 100 %). The higher the value, the better the quality.

7. The Vector tab lets you set the following options:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 525

● select the Semantic Level type which enables you to choose the rendering mode:
❍ Discretized (i.e. when the image suffers from a lack of points, points are distributed to fill the
gaps and ensure linearity)
❍ Low
❍ Polyline
❍ Polyline and Conic
❍ Polyline and Spline.

● select the format from the list: either CGM or Generic PostScript,
then set the properties for the chosen format if necessary:

. if you select CGM, clicking the Properties... button opens the Advanced Configuration
dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 526

This dialog box contains four tabs which let you define the various parameters associated to
the CGM format.

. if you select Generic PostScript, clicking the Properties... button opens the following
dialog box:

You can choose the desired level for PostScript generation and activate the Encapsulated
PostScript (EPS) format as well. EPS does not contain page description directives and is
designed for portable exchange between applications and platforms. It may also be included
in a larger PostScript document.

8. Once you are satisfied with the parameters, click OK to validate.

9. Click Capture to capture the image and store it in the album. A progress bar appears while the
captured image is generated.

Once the captured image is generated, the Capture Preview window opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 527

This window provides a preview of the captured image that will be stored in the album when you click

Album .

This window also enables you to use the following icons to:

● cancel the image (and close the Capture Preview window)

● save the image under another name and/or another format. To do so, click the Save As
button, give a name to the image then navigate to the desired location before clicking OK to confim
the save. Refer to Saving Images to Other Formats for detailed information

● print the image. Clicking this button opens the Print dialog box. Refer to Customizing Print
Settings Before Printing Your Documents for detailed information

● copy the image to the clipboard

● open the album.

10. Click Album to store the image in the album.

11. Click Open Album or select Tools > Image > Album to display the album.

The album is displayed, listing the current contents of the album.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 528

For detailed information on how to display and edit images in the album, refer to Previewing Images in
the Album and Editing Images in the Album.

The contents of the album are stored on your system in a non-editable file in the location defined by
the CATTemp environment variable. Deleting this file deletes the contents of the album.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 529

Capturing Selected Areas of Images

This task shows you how to capture selected areas of images.

1. Select Tools > Image > Capture to display the Capture toolbar:

Two capture modes are available: viewer mode and screen mode.

Viewer mode

2. Click Select Mode in the Capture toolbar to activate the selection tool.

The Capture toolbar now looks like this:

3. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bounding outline around the area to be captured:

4. Release the mouse button.

The bounding outline now displays handles and a symbol in the center to let you:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 530

● drag the outline by dragging the "X" symbol at the center of the outline
● or resize it by dragging the handles at each corner, or the sides of the outline.

5. Click Capture to generate the captured image and display it in the Capture Preview window which
opens:

6. Click Album to store the image in the album.

7. Click Open Album or select Tools > Image > Album to display the album.
You can either select the image from the list to display it in the small preview area at the lower left of the

Album window or you can double-click the image to display it in the preview window.

The selected area of the image has been captured:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 531

Screen mode

This "multiviewer" capture mode lets you perform an extended selection of images, which is especially useful to
capture several windows or dialog boxes simultaneously, for instance.

2. Click Screen Mode to activate the Screen mode.

3. Click Select Mode to activate the selection tool.

4. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bold bounding outline around the area to be captured.

You can select any elements of the screen, not only those displayed in the Version 5 application window. In
our example. As you drag, the height and width of the outline you are drawing (expressed as the number of
pixels) are displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 532

5. Click Capture to generate the captured image and display it in the Capture Preview window which
opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 533

6. Click Album to store the image in the album.

7. Click Open Album or select Tools > Image > Album to display the album, and double-click the image
to preview it.

The selected area of the image has been captured.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 534
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 535

Capturing Images in a Multi-View Configuration

This task shows you how to capture images when working in a multi-view configuration, either manual or
automatic.

Open the Views.CATProduct document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization to open the Views and Layout

dialog box then select the Manual tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 536

2. In the Configuration Selection list, make sure that Four-View is selected then click OK. The viewer

is divided into four equal views as shown below:

3. Select Tools > Image > Capture to display the Capture toolbar:

4. Click Pixel Mode to capture a pixel image (but note that you can also capture images in Vector
Mode when working in a multi-view configuration).

At this point, you can set capture options specific to pixel and vector images. For detailed
information, refer to Capturing Simple Images.
In this scenario, we leave the default values.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 537

5. Click Capture to capture the image and store it in the album.

A progress bar appears while the captured image is generated and the Capture Preview window

opens:

For more information on this window, refer to Capturing Simple Images.

6. Click Album to store the image in the album.

7. Click to cancel the image and close the Capture Preview window.

You are now going to capture only a portion of the image displayed in a multi-view configuration.

8. In the Capture toolbar, click Select Mode to activate the selection tool. For detailed information
on this mode, refer to Capturing Selected Areas of Images.

9. Click in the geometry area and drag to create a bounding outline around the area to be captured:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 538

10. Release the mouse button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 539

11. Click Capture to generate the captured image. The image is then displayed in the Capture
Preview window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 540

12. Click Album to store the image in the album.

13. Click Open Album or select Tools > Image > Album to display the album.

The two images you captured are listed:

For detailed information on how to display and edit images in the album, refer to Previewing Images
in the Album and Editing Images in the Album.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 541

Previewing Images in the Album

This task explains how to display images in the album once they have been captured.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents.

The system automatically assigns names to each image. Images are named "Capture_xxx", where
"xxx" is a number from 001 to 999.

For each captured image, the name, class (Raster, Vector 2D, etc.) and type (TIFF, BMP, AVI, MPEG,
etc.) are displayed.
You can also preview images in SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) format.

To sort images by class or type, click the corresponding column title.

To display more information (such as the size and the modification date), select Details in the View
Mode list:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 542

Selecting an image from the list lets you display it in the preview area in the bottom part of the dialog
box. This allows you to identify easily the image content.

You can also perform the following viewing operations using your mouse:

● center the display at a specific location: click the middle mouse button
● pan: drag using the middle mouse button
● zoom: press and hold down the middle mouse button, then click the left (or right) mouse button
and drag (still holding the middle mouse button down).

2. By default, captured images are stored in the Album temporary folder located in:

C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\ on

Windows and in the CATTemp directory, in your home directory on UNIX.

This path is displayed at the top of the Album dialog box when selecting an image from the list.

However, you can use the file tree to the left to navigate to the folder containing images you want to
view in the Album. In the example below, the Album displays images stored in the folder "E:\users":
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 543

If you want to reaccess the images stored in the default folder, you do not need to browse the file tree

again, you can click the button: the path to the default folder is displayed in the Path field and the
images contains in this folder are displayed in the image list below.

Note: clicking the Refresh button lets you update in real time the list of files stored in the current
path. This is especially useful, for instance, when an image displayed in the Album is opened and
modified simultaneously in another editor.

3. Right-click a raster image then select Properties to open the image information window which gives you

information on the selected pixel image (name, path, creation date and time, etc.) under the File tab...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 544

... as well as memory information (memory size, pixel format, pixel width and height, etc.) under the
Memory tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 545

The look of the information window varies according to the image format you selected. For instance,
when selecting a vector image, the information window is slightly different from the one above but also
gives file and memory information:

Just click OK to close the information window and go back to the album contents.

4. Right-click an image from the list and select Preview or double-click the image name in the list to display

the Print Preview window:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 546

5. Select OK to exit the Print Preview window.

6. This time, select several images in the list.

You can perform multiple selections by holding down Ctrl then clicking, holding down Shift then
clicking or dragging using the left mouse button.

Our example shows that three images in the album have been selected:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 547

7. Right-click then select Preview.

All selected images are now displayed together in the Print Preview window. Performance and image
quality is determined by the number of images on the preview page.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 548

You can use the Fit All In button and the viewing commands detailed above inside the Print
Preview window.

Note that when you right-click an image you can also use the following contextual commands:

● select Copy to copy the desired image from the album to the clipboard. For detailed information,
refer to Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only)

● select Edit to open the Image Editor window which lets you edit pixel images. For detailed
information, refer to Editing Images in the Album

● select Rename to rename images in the album. For detailed information, refer to Renaming Images
in the Album

● select Erase to delete images from the album. For detailed information, refer to Deleting Images
from the Album

● select Print to print images from the album. For detailed information, refer to Printing Images from
the Album

● select Play to replay your video in the Video Player window. This additional command only
appears when selecting a video file. For detailed information, refer to Replaying Videos from the
Album.

However, keep in mind that depending on the image format you select, some contextual commands
might be grayed out. For instance, when right-clicking a MPEG or AVI file, you are not able to select
Edit, Print, Save As and Copy.

8. To save the edited image under another name and/or another format, right-click it then select Save As.

Then, give a name to the image and navigate to the desired location before clicking OK to confim the

save.

Refer to Saving Images to Other Formats for detailed information.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 549
Editing Images in the Album

This task explains how to edit pixel images in the album once they have been captured.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents.

2. Choose the image to be displayed in the preview area in the lower left part of the dialog box by selecting it in the list.

3. Right-click then select Edit to open the Editor window.

Note that depending on the image format you select, the Edit command may be grayed out. This is the case when right-clicking a MPEG or
AVI file, for instance.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 550

The icon displays general information on the image file (size, type, etc.) and memory (memory information are identical to those
displayed when displaying the Image information window).

4. Click the button to adjust the color brightness, contrast and gamma using the corresponding slider as shown below:

After clicking OK to validate, the result is displayed in the preview area to the left.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 551

The button removes the image display and the button flips the image vertically.

Note: clicking the button opens a warning window which prompts you to confirm the removal. Click Yes to validate or No (or
Cancel) to cancel the removal and go back to the Editor.

5. Use the Effects palette to:

● zoom in (the zoom ratio is 1:2)

● zoom out (the zoom ratio is 1:2)

● resize the image to scale 1:1 (i.e. real size display), there is no pixel interpolation

● fit the image into the space available in the display area

● translate the image up, down , to the left or to the right (when the image does not fit into the display area)

You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts:

Shortcut Action

Page Up Zoom In

Page Down Zoom Out

Ctrl + Page Up Zoom Best

Ctrl + Page Down Zoom 1:1

Left, Right, Up or Down arrow Smooth horizontal or vertical move

Shift + Left, Right, Up or Down arrow Faster horizontal or vertical move

Ctrl + Left, Right, Up or Down arrow Move from one border to another

6. Use the button from the Effects palette to open the Navigator:

The Navigator lets you visualize the image and zoom in or out either using the and buttons, respectively, or the horizontal
scrollbar.
Any visualization change you have made in the Navigator simultaneously updates the image displayed in the Editor as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 552

You can also pick wherever you want in the Navigator preview to set the position of the viewpoint center in the Editor preview:

When finished, click OK to exit the Navigator and go back to the Editor.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 553
7. Use the Tools palette to:

● pick the color to be used for painting. To do so, just click the icon to activate the picking mode then choose the painting color
either from the color palette or from the image.

The current color square displayed at the lower left is then modified accordingly:

In case you do not wish to use a color picked from the image, you can make your choice directly from the color palette using the
mouse:

● select a paint tool:

❍ to draw custom brushes

❍ to draw custom airbrushes

brush airbrush
❍ to draw interrupted segments

❍ to draw uninterrupted segments

interrupted segments uninterrupted segments
❍ to draw rectangles

❍ to draw ellipses

filled rectangle filled ellipse

❍ to apply a fill color.

● depending on the tool you choose you can select:

❍ a brush type from the Brushes palette if you draw brushes or segments:

❍ a fill mode (either outline, filled or blank) if you draw rectangles or ellipses:

To save the edited image under another name, click the button then give a name to the image and navigate to the desired location
before clicking OK to confim the save.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 554
8. Click OK to validate and go back to the album.

If the image has been modified, a window appears to prompt you either to:

● overwrite the already existing image with the modified one by clicking "Yes"
● or to save the image under a new name ("capture_000" by default) in TIFF format by clicking "No".

Clicking Cancel lets you exit the editor without saving the image.

The image is automatically saved in the album with a name identical to the original image:

To save the edited image under another name, right-click it then select Save. Then, give a name to the image and navigate to the desired
location before clicking OK to confim the save.

Note that you can also copy the desired image from the album to the clipboard by right-clicking it then selecting Copy. For detailed
information, refer to Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 555

Renaming Images in the Album

This task explains how to rename images in the album. Do not forget that you can only modify the name, you
cannot modify the class or the extension, for instance.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents:

2. Select the images to be renamed then right-click and select Rename.

In our example, we are going to rename "Capture_002".

When Rename is selected, the name of the selected image becomes editable to let you type the new
image name:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 556

3. Key in the new name then press Enter to validate.

The new image name is displayed in the list:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 557

Deleting Images from the Album

This task explains how to delete images from the album.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents:

2. Select the images to be deleted from the album.

In our example, we want to delete "Capture_000".

3. Right-click then select Erase to delete the selected image.

A warning window opens to prompt you to confirm the removal. Click Yes to validate or No to cancel
the removal and go back to the Album.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 558
If you click Yes, the selected image is removed and the image list is updated.

In our example, "Capture_000" has been deleted and therefore, it is no longer displayed in the list:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 559

Copying Images to the Clipboard (Windows Only)

This task explains how to copy images from the album to the clipboard, for integration into OLE-compliant
application documents.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album.

2. Select the images to be copied to the clipboard.

3. Right-click then select Copy.

The selected image is copied to the clipboard, from where it can then be pasted into another application
document (for example, a word processing package).

Note that depending on the image format you select, Copy might be grayed out. This is the case when
right-clicking a MPEG or AVI file, for instance.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 560

4. Paste the image into the external application.

In our example, the selected image has been pasted into Microsoft Word:

You paste data into OLE-compliant documents using either the Paste or Paste Special contextual command:
● Paste simply copies the data into the OLE-compliant application
● Paste Special offers two modes: you can either paste (embed) the data as normal, or link the copied data to
its source.

For general information about linking and embedding data from Version 5 documents in OLE-compliant
applications, refer to Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant Applications.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 561

Saving Images In Other Formats

This task explains how to save images stored in the album in other formats.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents.

2. Select the images to be saved to another format.

The formats to which you can save depend on the format (pixel or vector) of the image you selected.

3. Right-click then select Save As.

Note that depending on the image format you select, Save As might be grayed out. This is the case
when right-clicking a MPEG or AVI file, for instance.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 562

4. Enter a name for the file.

5. Select a format from the list.

The formats you can save to depend on the format (pixel or vector) in which the image was originally
saved.

Regarding images stored in a temporary folder, note that you can save them only in BMP format on
Windows and UNIX.

For pixel images, the formats are:

● Adobe Photoshop Format (*.psd)

● Apple Macintosh File Format (*.pic)
● Amiga IFF (*.iff)
● CALS Group 4 (*.cals)
● HP/RTL (UNIX only)
● JPEG Fair Quality (*.jpg)
● JPEG Medium Quality (*.jpg)
● JPEG High Quality (*.jpg)
● PNG (Portable Network Graphics) (*.png)
● Silicon Graphics File (*.rgb)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 563

● Sun Raster File (*.ras)

● TIFF CCITT Group 4 (*.tif)
● TIFF True Color (*.tif)
● TIFF Indexed Packbit (*.tif)
● TIFF True Color Packbit (*.tif)
● TIFF Indexed (*.tif)
● TIFF Grey Scale Packbit (*.tif)
● TIFF BW Packbit (*.tif)
● Truevision Targa (*.tga)
● RGB (SGI Format) Not Compressed (*.rgb)
● ZSoft Paintbrush (.pcx)
● Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
● X-Window Pixmap (*.xpm)
● X-Window Dump (*.xwd).

For detailed information about JPG and TIFF format, browse the following Internet sites:

http://www.jpeg.org and http://www.ijg.org

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/pdfs/tn/TIFFphotoshop.pdf

A bitmap is a set of pixels arranged in lines and columns and is fully described by its width and height, its
color depth (bits per pixel) and its compression scheme. The format common format is true color (24 bits
per pixel). An additional color component, called Alpha component, may be used to define the
transparency of each pixel. The bitmap format generally supports compression (either lossless or lossy).
Some of these bitmaps are coded on 8 bits and the pixels are indexed on a color table, called the palette.

The advantage of bitmap files is that they can reproduce complex scenes (for instance photographic or
photo-realistic images) that could not be reproduced using basic geometrical shapes.

The following table summarizes information about bitmap files and the various formats you can use to
save your images in the album:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 564

Bit depth Compression Max. Comments

size
in
1 8 16 24 32 None RLE JPEG ZLIB CCITT
pixels
Standard bitmap
BMP X X X X X X X 2G*2G storage on MS-
Windows
Very few
applications support
JPEG X X X X X 64K*64K
the lossless JPEG
mode
Successor of the
PNG X X X X X X 2G*2G
GIF format
Supported by very
RGB X X X X X X X 64K*64K
few applications
Very popular and
general format
TIFF X X X X X X X X 2G*2G recognized by most
imaging
applications

For vector images, the formats are:

● Windows Metafile (Windows only)

● PostScript: PostScript is a page description language that supports text, vector graphics and bitmaps.
It is device-independent and implements an industry standard for communicating graphic information
between applications and hardware devices such as printers.
For detailed information about PostScript, browse the following Internet site:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/pdfs/tn/PLRM.pdf
● PDF: Portable Document Format is a platform-independent page description file format designed for
platform exchange. It may contain text, vector graphics and bitmaps.
For detailed information about PDF, browse the following Internet site:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/pdfl/PDFS/PDFLibraryFAQ.pdf

● HP-GL/2-RTL: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language file format is an instruction set developped for
controlling plotters. HP-GL, which as been developped for pen plotters, is now obsolete. HP-GL/2-RTL
is an evolution of HP-GL providing more graphic primitives (such as polygons or curves) and a support
for bitmaps
● SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics): this format is an XML (Extensible Markup Language) grammar for 2D
graphics.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 565
The following CGM vector formats are supported:

● CGM
● CGM CALS
● CGM ATA
● CGM Graphic Software.

CGM (Computer Graphics Metafile) is an ANSI/ISO standardized platform-independent format used for
the interchange of vector and bitmap data.
Version 5 supports the CGM Version 1 and Version 3 standards. CGM Version 3 adds vector primitives
such as Bezier and Nurbs, improved font and text support as well as bitmap compression.
The CGM-ATA and CGM-CALS profiles which are specific subsets of the Version 3 standard are also
supported.
For detailed information about CGM formats, browse the following Internet site:

http://www.cgmopen.org

Vector files contain geometrical descriptions of the image elements.These elements may be lines, dots,
rectangles, circles, polygons, splines, text with font information or bitmaps (only in metafiles) and are
used to reconstruct the final image. Each element has its own attributes specifying its size, its relative
position in the whole image, its color and filling type.

The advantage of vector files over bitmap files is that image scaling does not affect image appearance.
When zooming bitmap files, pixels become visible as shown in the example below:

Vector image Bitmap image

The table below summarizes the purposes of the above mentioned formats:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 566

Purpose Printing/Plotting Data

Exchange
Format
HPGL/2-
X
RTL
PS X

EPS X

PDF X

CGM X

Note that high quality images require longer computation time.

6. Click the Save button.

You do not need to open the album first to save images to other formats. The Save As button is also
available in the Capture Preview window, allowing you to save to a file directly (without saving the image
in the album).

Compressing Images
Here are listed the several methods you can use to compress images:

● RLE
Run-length encoding is the easiest and fastest compression method. However, it cannot achieve high
compression ratios like those of more sophisticated compression algorithms. The compression ratio mainly
depends on the data content.
This method is suitable for images with large uniformly colored areas, typically found in computer graphics. Most
bitmap files support run-length encoding (such as TIFF, BMP, etc.)
● JPEG lossy compression
This method looses information by removing details the human eyes can hardly perceive. The reconstructed
image is not identical to the original one. The loss of visible details may be minimized at the expense of the
compression factor.
Typically, you can compress images by a factor of 20 without losing the subjective quality. The lossless JPEG
compression is also part of the JPEG file format but is supported by very few applications
● LZW
This method is used for GIF and TIFF files and removes redundancies in the picture. The LZW algorithm and the
GIF format are both patented. Note that this method is not available in Version 5.
● ZLIB
This lossless compression method belongs to the same category as the LZW method. It is used for PNG format
which is meant to be a non-patented successor of the GIF format. Note that this method is not available in
Version 5.
● CCITT/Fax encoding
CCITT Group 3 and CCITT Group 4 are lossless data compression methods for black and white (bi-level) images,
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 567
which are typically scanned images with a great size. These two methods are mainly used for TIFF files.

The table below shows the most appropriate compression method for a specific image type:

Image type Computer Photographic Bi-level Typical

Graphics ratio
Compression
Lossy JPEG X X 20:1
ZLIB X 5:1
CCITT G4 X 15:1
None X X X 1:1

You can save images in bitmap format without having to compress them. There is no loss of information but the file
size is impacted, since it is bigger.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 568

Printing Images from the Album

This task explains how to print images.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents:

2. Select the images to be printed.

3. Right-click then select Print to display the Print dialog box.

Depending on the image format you select, Print might be grayed out. This is the case when right-clicking a
MPEG or AVI file, for instance.

Note that you can also print images in SVG format.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 569

Images are printed the same way as any other document. Refer to Printing Documents for a full description of
how to print.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 570

Replaying Videos from the Album

This task explains how to replay video files (such as MPEG or AVI files) stored in the album.

1. Select Tools > Image > Album to display the album contents:

2. Select the video file to be replayed.

3. Right-click then select Play to display the Video Player dialog box.

Note that this additional command only appears when selecting a video file.

The window that opens is empty but you just need to click the Playing button to start replaying
the video:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 571

You can use the Video Player buttons to:

● pause the replay

● stop the replay

● display information on the recorded video (width, height and number of frames).

For detailed information on videos, refer to Recording Interactions in Video Format.

4. When finished replaying your video, click Cancel to close the Video Player.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 572

Recording Interactions in Video Format

You can record sequences of interactions and store them in standard and proprietary video formats, depending on your operating
system.

A player is now provided for replaying video captures but the video replay tools (Windows Media Player, Quicktime, etc.)
provided on your system can still be used.

Note that cast shadows cannot be recorded.

1. Select Tools > Image > Video to display the Video Recorder dialog box:

Note that the name of the video file to be generated and the current video format are both indicated. In our example,
the video file name is "movie00000.avi" and the video format is "Microsoft AVI".

The Video command is available whether a document is open or not. In case no document is open, the Document
Window option is grayed out.

Setting Up the Capture Session

2. Click the Setup button to access the Video Properties dialog box which lets you set up the video capture
parameters prior to recording the video:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 573

Choosing the Video File Format and Location

3. Choose the Format of the video file to be recorded.

The video formats supported vary according to your operating system:

● Microsoft AVI and Microsoft MPEG (Windows). The Video functionality is now based on the DirectShow multimedia
architecture. However, you need to install DirectShow on your computer to be able to use all CODECs and
compression options provided by this architecture. You also need to have DirectX, at minimum level 9.0, on your
computer, otherwise the MPEG format will not be displayed in the list.
Note that you can now read on Windows MJPEG files generated by Version 5 on UNIX workstations.
● Generic AVI (SUN) with two options: Uncompressed and Motion JPEG (or M-JPEG)
● Still Image Capture: available on all operating systems, this format is not generated by operating system-
dependent libraries and provides still, compressed JPG captures
● SGI Movie (IRIX)
● Quicktime (IRIX)
● MPEG (IRIX).

If you install the appropriate CODEC for the MPEG format, you will be able to generate MPEG format files on Windows
(you can download video CODECs from the Microsoft Support Internet site).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 574

4. If you want the video file name (and number) to be set automatically, select the Automatic File Name check box, which

is activated by default.

If you do so, the system automatically names the video file starting with the prefix "movie00000" and appends the
video extension (avi, jpg, etc.). In our example, the video file name is "movie000.avi" when you set the video format
to "Microsoft AVI".

Each time you generate a new video file using the Recording button, the file number will be incremented
(movie001.avi, movie002.avi, etc.).

If you clear this option, the Name box becomes editable and the prefix changes to "MOVIE", for example "MOVIE.avi".
You can then rename the file in the Name box, along with a drive and folder (or directory) name, like this for example
on Windows:

c:\Videos\MyMovie.avi

You can also click the button, navigate to the appropriate location and rename the file.

When you first access the dialog box, it specifies the default folder:

● C:\\Document and Settings\user\Local Settings\Temp\ (Windows)

● /tmp (UNIX).

If you choose another folder or directory, its name is displayed:

● C:\Videos\ (Windows)
● /u/users/ajt/videos (UNIX).

Specifying which part of the screen to record

5. In the Capture tab, select which part of the

screen you want to capture.

A preview area opposite the list of options

illustrates which part of the screen will be
captured.

Note that you can zoom and pan the selection

in the preview area.

The Fixed Area option lets you choose a predefined capture format. To do so, click Fixed Area then click the button
below to open the Capture Sizes dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 575

This dialog box lets you choose among a list of predefined video and screen standards using the following lists:

Video standards:

● VCD (PAL or NTSC)

● SVCD (PAL or NTSC)
● DV (PAL or NTSC)
● TV Full (PAL or NTSC)
● TV 1/4 (PAL or NTC)
● TV 1/8 (PAL or NTSC).

However, note that you can also customize the selected video standard by entering your own dimensions in the
Custom boxes. In that case, the push button under Fixed Area displays "CUSTOM" along with the entered dimensions
to indicate that the size has been fixed by the user.

Screen standards:

● VGA (640 x 480)

● SVGA (800 x 600)
● XGA (1024 x 768)
● SXGA (1280 x 1024)
● UXGA (1600 x 1200).

When satisfied, click OK to validate and go back to the Video Properties dialog box.

Recording interactions in the current document window

● Document Window: records viewpoint

manipulations in the current document window, but
does not record interactions in menus, dialog boxes,
etc.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 576

Recording interactions in any window area containing the focus

● Window: lets you shift the focus to any window in

any application on the screen which accepts the
focus, then capture that window.

Select Window to activate the selection arrow

above the preview area.

Select the arrow to display the hourglass

pointer:

Select the arrow again to see your pointer

change to the shape of a cross:

Still holding down the left mouse button, drag the "+" pointer. As you drag, each part of each application window is
highlighted.

In the example below, dragging the "+" pointer inside the Version 5 window highlights the frame of the window...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 577

...and displays it in the preview area when you

release the button.

Practice dragging the "+" pointer around your

screen to see the different areas that can be
highlighted.

All interactions are recorded.

Note that when you release the mouse button, the selected window is highlighted like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 578

Recording interactions in any rectangular area you draw

● Area: lets you draw a rectangular area anywhere on the screen, for capturing what happens inside this area only.

Click Area to activate the selection arrow

above the preview area.

Then, select the arrow to display the hourglass

pointer:

Drag (using the left mouse button). As you drag, you draw a rectangle like this, and the size of the rectangle is
displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 579

Release the mouse button to close the

rectangle and define the part of the screen to
be recorded. The area inside the rectangle is
displayed in the preview area.

All interactions are recorded.

Note that when you release the mouse button, the selected area is highlighted like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 580

Recording interactions anywhere on the whole screen

● Full Screen: specifies that you want to capture the

whole screen.

All interactions are recorded.

6. Select the Timer check box if required:

● using the timer records a frame every "n" milliseconds (you set the value using the editable field or spinner): note

that if you set a low value, the system will record a high number of frames, which will consequently impair

performance and create a larger video file

● if you do not select the Timer check box, the system records a frame only each time the viewpoint is updated (by

rotating, zooming, etc.).

7. On Windows only, select the Include Cursor check box if you want the cursor to be visible in the recorded sequence.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 581

Setting Movie Replay Parameters

Using the Movie tab, set the movie playback parameters.

8. Set a value for Rate in Frames per Second.

This option defines the video replay speed: a high value displays a large number of frames per second, so the
recording is replayed more quickly; a low value displays a smaller number of frames per second, so the recording is
replayed more slowly.

9. Select the Compressor Setup... button to set

up your video compression/decompression

parameters.

Clicking this button displays a dialog box

allowing you to choose a CODEC from the list
of CODECs installed on your computer, then
configure it. The role of the CODEC is to
compress your video files.

Installing Version 5 does NOT install CODECs on your computer. The list of CODECs differs from one platform to
another. For information about how to configure the CODEC (using the Configure... button), refer to the CODEC
supplier's documentation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 582
On Windows, the Compressor list contains several options among which Full Frames (Uncompressed). Selecting
this option prior to recording has the following effects:

● the resulting video file is larger (because it is not compressed)

● but performance during the recording is enhanced (because each frame is not compressed as soon as it is
recorded).

If you do not select Full Frames (Uncompressed), you can specify the data rate as well as the number of key
frames:

● Key Frame Every ... frames: defines how often the entire frame is restored. The process is as follows: the entire
frame (i.e. key frame) is stored once at the beginning of the video and then, only the section of the frame where
the object was moved will be modified, the rest of the frame will be kept as is. The entire frame will be stored
again after a number of frames you specify in this field.
The higher the number of key frames, the higher the quality but the bigger the file (and therefore, there is a price
to pay in performance)
● Data Rate: lets you set the amount of data transferred in kilobytes per second and thus, the size of the generated
images. The higher the rate, the bigger the images and the lower the quality.

For detailed information on the Choose Compressor dialog box, you can refer to the Microsoft documentation.

10. Click the Recording button to start the recording.

Messages in the status bar and the Video Recorder dialog box inform you each time a frame is recorded:

11. Click the Pause button to pause, or the Stop button to stop the recording.

12. Once the video has been recorded, the Preview button is activated and you can click it to open the Video Player
which lets you preview your video.

The window that opens is empty but you just need to click the Playing button to start replaying the video:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 583

You can use the Video Player buttons to:

● pause the replay

● stop the replay

● display information on the recorded video (width, height and number of frames). Note that the Properties
button is grayed out when the video is replaying, you have to click the Pause or Stop button to activate it.

Clicking this button opens the Movie Properties dialog box:

The data shown in this dialog box are displayed for your information only, you cannot modify them.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 584
When replaying the video, a slider at the bottom of the player window indicates the progression and displays the
corresponding frame number.

13. When finished replaying your video, click Cancel to close the Video Player.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 585

Viewing Objects
Activating Viewing Tools
Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area
Panning
Zooming In
Zooming Out
Zooming In On An Area
Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane
Rotating
Editing the View Angle
Creating a Multi-View: Automatic Configuration
Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration
Creating a Multi-View: Standard Views' Customization
Defining the Level of Detail and the Pixel Culling
Testing the Visualization Performance
Testing the Visualization Time
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 586

Activating Viewing Tools

You do not have to use the viewing tool commands or icons to perform all viewing operations. For quick
access, you can also use just the mouse, the keyboard or the pen to activate a certain number of
viewing tools, as indicated in the table below:

Mouse
To use the mouse to... Do this...

Center the display at a Click the middle mouse button.

specific location

Pan Drag using the middle mouse button.

Rotate Press and hold down the middle mouse button, then the left (or
right) mouse button, and drag (still holding both buttons down).

Zoom Press and hold down the middle mouse button, then click the left
(or right) mouse button and drag (still holding the middle mouse
button down).

The following example shows how to transform this element in three steps:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 587

Clicking the corresponding icon runs the corresponding command once only. Selecting View > Modify or pressing
and holding down the middle mouse button activates a permanent viewing mode for each command, until you
click to exit.

Note: See Hiding and Showing Objects for information about showing and hiding, and Using Rendering Styles for
hidden line rendering.

The 3-button mouse is recommended for usability reasons.

On Windows computers:

● the IntelliMouse (two buttons plus a wheel) is an alternative to the 3-button mouse: pressing and hold down
the wheel the same way as the middle mouse button (but rolling the wheel is not supported)
● a 2-button mouse may alternatively be used (the third button is emulated using a key combination).

This key combination using a ... and this key combination Do this...
2-button mouse ... on a 3-button mouse...

Press Alt and right button, then drag.Press and hold down middle button, Pan
then drag.

With Alt and right button held down, Press and hold down the middle mouse
press and hold down Ctrl or left button, then the left (or right) mouse
button, then drag. button, then drag.
Rotate
(3D/zoom/2D)

Then:

Release the Ctrl or left button. Press and hold down the middle mouse Zoom
button, then click the left mouse
button, then drag (still holding the
middle mouse button down).

Press and hold down Ctrl, Alt and Press and hold down Ctrl and the Zoom
the right button, then drag. middle mouse button, then drag.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 588

SpacePilot
The SpacePilot can be used, in addition to the mouse, to perform graphic viewing manipulations
(zoom, pan, rotate, etc.).
To download the latest 3DConnexion software, browse the following Internet site:

http://www.3DConnexion.com

SpacePilot is supported on Windows 2000 and Windows XP. It requires a 3DConnexion driver 3DxWare 5.0.7
(minimum level).
To install the appropriate driver, access the 3DConnexion Internet site, click the Download tab then indicate the
device you are using and the operating system you are running.

This new device developed by 3DConnexion is an advanced SpaceMouse equipped with an LCD panel which labels
the functions of the device buttons. You can thus keep track more easily of the current function set just by looking
at the information displayed on the LCD panel.

It also enables you to control the manipulation calibration from Version 5, whatever the 3DxWare driver
configuration on your computer. There is no need anymore to analyze both Version 5 and 3DxWare configurations
to figure out the current calibration.

Below is a graphic sketch of the new device:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 589

The buttons you can map to a Version 5 command or a 3DxWare function are: buttons 1 to 6, Esc, Shift, Ctrl, Alt,
T, L, R, F and Fit buttons. Note that only the functions of buttons 1 to 6 are displayed on the LCD panel.
The other buttons cannot be customized:
● the Panel button toggles on/off the 3DxWare device driver panel or the Version 5 Button Customize dialog
box
● the Config button cycles through the defined button configuration
● the - and + buttons tune the device sensitivity
● the DOM button toggles on/off the dominant mode
● the 3D button toggles on/off the device rotation.

Device buttons are mapped using the dedicated Button Customize dialog box. Whenever you change a button
function in the 3DxWare driver, this change appears on the LCD panel and in the Button Customize dialog box.
Inversely, whenever a change is made in the Button Customize dialog box, the new button function is displayed
on the LCD panel and in the 3DxWare driver.

For detailed information on the Button Customize dialog box, refer to Customizing Buttons.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 590

Keyboard
You can use these shortcuts in Examine mode only.

This keyboard ... and this keyboard Do this...

shortcut shortcut for 3D objects...
for 2D objects ...

Press Ctrl and arrows Press Ctrl and arrows Pan

: With Shift and left or right arrow Rotate about the vertical axis
with respect to the monitor
screen (3D only)

With Shift and up or down arrow Rotate about the X axis (3D
only)

With Ctrl and Shift and left or right Rotate about the Y axis (3D only)
arrow
(Auto-repeat when pressing and
holding down the keys)

Press Ctrl and Page Up Press Ctrl and Page Up Zoom In

Press Ctrl and Page Press Ctrl and Page Down Zoom Out
Down

Then:

Press the left arrow Move to the left view (2D only)

Press the right arrow Move to the right view (2D only)

Press the up arrow Move to the up view (2D only)

Press the down arrow Move to the down view (2D only)
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 591

Tablet Pen (for Tablet PCs)

When working with a Tablet PC, you can perform viewing operations without the mouse or the keyboard using
a Tablet Pen. From now on, you do not need to first activate the corresponding viewing tool command
anymore, you can perform actions directly in the geometry area using a specific pad dedicated to Tablet Pens.

Prior to using the pad, some settings need to be defined in the Tablet Support tab.

Drag the pen over... To...

Rotate

Pan

Zoom out
(from left to right)

Zoom in
(from right to left)

Note that the viewing operation performed when double-clicking depends on the option you selected in the
Action on double-click list available in the Tablet Support tab.

About text annotations

You can write annotations directly on the 3D viewer using your Tablet PC by clicking the Add Annotation

Text icon in the DMU 2D Marker toolbar.

From now on, you do not need to activate the text recognition pad anymore, you only need to click OK or
Apply. Furthermore, once the automatic recognition starts, the handwritten text is automatically replaced by
the recognized text which is placed at the same location:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 592

Optionally, you can then drag the annotation to another location if needed.
For detailed information on how to write annotations, refer to the "Annotating" section in the Version 5 - DMU
Navigator User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 593

Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area

This task explains how to fit the current document contents into the geometry area.

1. Select View > Fit All In, or click Fit All In in the View toolbar.

Fit All In zooms the current view out so that all the document contents fit into the space available in the
geometry area.

Before After
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 594

Panning

This task explains how to move the current document contents by panning the camera viewpoint.

1. Select View > Pan, or click Pan in the View toolbar.

2. Drag the left mouse button to a new location, then release the mouse button.

After
Before
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 595

Zooming In
This task explains how to zoom in by predetermined increments.

1. Select View > Modify > Zoom In, or click Zoom In in the View toolbar.

You zoom in by one increment each time you click on the icon. To zoom up close (as
illustrated), click on the icon several times in succession.

Before After

You can also select View > Zoom In Out and drag (left mouse button) to zoom in
progressively, not by increments.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 596

Zooming Out

This task explains how to zoom out by predetermined increments.

1. Select View > Modify > Zoom Out, or click Zoom Out in the View toolbar.

You zoom out by one increment each time you click on the icon. To zoom out (as illustrated),
click the icon several times in succession.

Before After

You can also select View > Zoom In Out and drag (left mouse button) to zoom out
progressively, not by increments.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 597

Zooming In On An Area

This task explains how to zoom in on an area.

1. Select View > Zoom Area.

2. Drag (left mouse button) to draw the bounding outline containing the area on which you want to

zoom in.

The area now viewed is the area you captured inside the bounding outline.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 598

Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane

This task explains how to view an object along a perpendicular to a selected plane

1. Select View > Modify > Normal View or click Normal View in the View toolbar.

2. Select a plane.

The object is projected onto the selected plane so you can now view along a normal to the
plane.

Before After

Note: if you select an element other than a plane, the object is projected onto an imaginary
plane tangent to the selected element. This plane is created at the point where you clicked and
is set parallel to the screen.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 599

Rotating
This task explains how to rotate an object.

1. Select View > Rotate, or click Rotate in the View toolbar.

2. Press and hold down the left (or right) and middle mouse buttons to see the rotation sphere

symbol appear around the object.

3. Still holding the buttons down, drag to rotate.

Note that do not have to use the viewing tool commands or icons to rotate an object. For quick
access, you can also use just the mouse: press and hold down the middle mouse button, then
the left (or right) mouse button, and drag (still holding both buttons down).

4. Click to stop rotation.

Before After
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 600

Editing the View Angle

This task explains edit interactively the view angle. The view angle sets the angle of the pyramid-like
shape with which you look at the geometry (available in perspective views only):

1. Select View > Commands List then choose View Angle from the list or enter directly c:view

angle in the power input field.

The View Render Style dialog box prompts you to choose the desired view mode: either
Perspective or Parallel.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 601

2. In our example, we select Perspective.

A green circle appears with an arrow indicating the current view angle as shown below:

Note that the current view angle is identical to the view angle you define in the Camera
properties when working with user-defined views.

3. Drag the green arrow (which turns red) to change the view angle. Bear in mind that the angle

cannot exceed 90°.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 602

At this step, you can click Cancel to close the View Render Style dialog box and go back to
the current view angle.

4. Change the view angle as needed then, when you are happy with the result, click OK to apply the

new view angle and close the View Render Style dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 603

Creating a Multi-View: Automatic Configuration

The multi-view mode is a capability allowing you to customize the multi-view configuration within a 3D viewer.
The automatic configuration is defined in the Automatic tab of the Views and Layout dialog box.

For detailed information on the other tabs provided in this dialog box, refer to Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration
and Creating a Multi-View: Standard Views' Customization.

Before you start

In order to take full advantage of this scenario, you need to be familiar with the basic vocabulary:

● "Viewer" is the screen area in which 3D objects are drawn

● "View" is a part of the viewer. Usually, the viewer has one single view but it can also be divided into 4 parts
representing a different view each. When a viewer is split into several views, it is identified as a "multi-view" viewer
● "Viewpoint" is the set of parameters required for defining a 3D view volume, i.e. the eye of the user, the view
direction, the focus point and the axis system defining the position of the user. It can be defined as the position in
model coordinates at which the eye is looking
● "Layout" defines how the viewer is divided into different areas (= views) and how these areas are located
● "Configuration" is a layout made up of views, each of them being defined with a viewpoint.

Bear in mind that the multi-view configuration remains active throughout the whole Version 5 session but it is not saved
when selecting File > Save As. For instance, if you apply a multi-view configuration then save and close your document
before reopening it, this document is displayed in a single-view configuration using the last active view before the save.

However, the configuration is stored in the CATSettings directory and therefore, you can reuse it from one session to

another by clicking Create Multi-View in the View toolbar. If no customization has been defined, the default
configuration is applied.

Open the Views.CATProduct document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization to open the Views and Layout dialog box then

select the Automatic tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 604

This dialog box is made up of three areas:

● View Selection lets you select a group of views as well as their location and orientation
● Viewpoint Manipulation lets you manipulate the viewpoint using the following options:
❍ Rotation Lock: locks the viewpoint rotation
❍ Translation Lock: locks the viewpoint translation
❍ Viewpoint Synchronization: imposes a synchronization between the views when a viewpoint
transformation (rotation, translation or zoom) is made in one of them. Note that you cannot activate
both Translation Lock and Viewpoint Synchronization

● Confirmation: lets you validate or cancel the configuration.

For any 3D object, there are six standard views according to the coordinate system of the object. These views
mapped onto a cube, each face of this cube being perpendicular to one of the directions of the 3D axis.
Whatever the orientation of the cube, the observer can see three faces (i.e. three standard views) as shown
below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 605

An isometric view can be added to these views. The direction of this isometric view starts from the vertex
formed by the three faces towards the center of the cube.

The View Selection area represents the unfolded cube of standard views: each square represents a standard
view and the one placed at the center is the base view around which adjacent views are automatically
generated.
In the default configuration displayed below, the base view is the standard Left View:

ISO = Isometric View

TP = Top View

BK = Back View

LF = Left View

FR = Front View

BM = Bottom View

2. Select the standard view to be used as base view using one of these two methods:

● select directly in the View Selection area the view to be set as the base view: the selected view is placed at
the center and all the adjacent views are regenerated accordingly.
In the example below, Back View is selected:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 606

● click the right translation arrow to shift Back View to the center (or any other translation arrow
depending on the standard view you want to set as base view).
Clicking a translation arrow shifts the views in the arrow's direction.

3. Click Apply to apply the configuration to the current 3D viewer and keep the Views and Layout dialog box

displayed:

As soon as you apply a configuration to the current viewer, the Create Multi-View icon in the View

toolbar changes to to indicate that the multi-view mode is now active.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 607
When you manipulate a viewpoint in one of the four views, the other three viewpoints are not modified and you
can manipulate them independently:

4. Select a group of views by clicking an Isometric View in one of the four corners of the View Selection area.

This amounts to selecting a vertex of the cube and the user will then see the three adjacent faces.

The selected Isometric View is computed from its three adjacent views and the four views (Isometric +

adjacent) will be highlighted:

Another example when the Isometric View in the top-right corner is selected:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 608

The View Selection area also contains four rotation arrows (such as ) enabling you to change the orientation
of the current base view: one click on an arrow rotates the base view by 90 degrees in the arrow's direction.
When the base view is rotated, all the adjacent views as well as the isometric view are recalculated.

5. Click the arrow repeatedly and check the result in the View Selection area. Below is an example with starting
position displayed to the left:

6. Activate the lock options (+ click Apply) if needed:

● Rotation Lock locks the rotation in all the views, except the Isometric View

● Translation Lock locks the translation in all the views, except the Isometric View.

7. Select the Viewpoint Synchronization check box then click Apply if you want the other three viewpoints to be

modified simultaneously when you manipulate one of them.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 609

8. When satisfied with your configuration, click OK (or Apply then OK) to validate and close the Views and Layout

dialog box.

To go back to the standard viewer, click the Create Multi-View icon in the View toolbar.

Note that when you reselect View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization, the Views and Layout

dialog box the last used tab is activated with the last applied configuration.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 610

Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration

The multi-view mode is a capability allowing you to customize your multi-view configuration within a 3D viewer.
The manual configuration is defined in the Manual tab of the Views and Layout dialog box.

For detailed information on the other tabs provided in this dialog box, refer to Creating a Multi-View: Automatic Configuration
and Creating a Multi-View: Standard Views' Customization.

Before you start

In order to take full advantage of this scenario, you need to be familiar with the basic vocabulary:

● "Viewer" is the screen area in which 3D objects are drawn

● "View" is a part of the viewer. Usually, the viewer has one single view but it can also be divided into 4 parts representing a
different view each. When a viewer is split into several views, it is identified as a "multi-view" viewer
● "Viewpoint" is the set of parameters required for defining a 3D view volume, i.e. the eye of the user, the view direction, the
focus point and the axis system defining the position of the user. It can be defined as the position in model coordinates at
which the eye is looking
● "Layout" defines how the viewer is divided into different areas (= views) and how these areas are located
● "Configuration" is a layout made up of views, each of them being defined with a viewpoint.

Bear in mind that the multi-view configuration remains active throughout the whole Version 5 session but it is not saved when
selecting File > Save As. For instance, if you apply a multi-view configuration then save and close your document before
reopening it, this document is displayed in a single-view configuration using the last active view before the save.

However, the configuration is stored in the CATSettings directory and therefore, you can reuse it from one session to another

by clicking Create Multi-View in the View toolbar. If no customization has been defined, the default configuration is
applied.

Open the Views.CATProduct document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization to open the Views and Layout dialog box then select

the Manual tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 611

This dialog box is made up of five areas:

● Configuration Selection lets you select a predefined multi-view configuration from the list
● View Selection lets you set the current view as well as the orientation of the selected viewpoint
● Viewpoint Manipulation lets you manipulate the viewpoint using the following options:
❍ Rotation Lock: locks the viewpoint rotation
❍ Translation Lock: locks the viewpoint translation
❍ Viewpoint Synchronization: imposes a synchronization between the views when a viewpoint transformation
(rotation, translation or zoom) is made in one of them. Note that you cannot activate both Translation Lock
and Viewpoint Synchronization

● Standard Views icons let you set the desired standard view as the current view. The standard views displayed in
the left part of the dialog box are identical to the one of the Quick View toolbar
● Confirmation: lets you validate or cancel the configuration.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 612

2. In the Configuration Selection area, select the desired configuration from the list of predefined configuration.

As soon as a configuration is selected, the four views displayed in the View Selection area are automatically updated

accordingly.

Each view composing the configuration represents a standard view and the current view is identified by a lighter

color.

You can choose among the following configurations:

● Four-View

In this configuration, the viewer is divided into four equal views, each of them being identified as follows:

RI = Right View

TP = Top View

FR = Front View

ISO = Isometric View

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 613

● Main view to the right

In this configuration, the viewer is divided into two parts. The main view is displayed to the right and three auxiliary
views are displayed to the left:

RI = Right View

TP = Top View

FR = Front View

ISO = Isometric View

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 614

● Main view on top

In this configuration, the viewer is divided into two parts. The main view is displayed on top and three auxiliary views
are displayed at the bottom:

RI = Right View

TP = Top View

FR = Front View

ISO = Isometric View

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 615

● Two-view horizontal tiling

In this configuration, the viewer is divided into two parts. The views are organized horizontally with respect to each
other. The first view is displayed on top and the second is displayed at the bottom:

FR = Front View

ISO = Isometric View

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 616

● Two-view vertical tiling

In this configuration, the viewer is divided into two parts. The views are organized vertically with respect to each
other and are displayed in the right and left part of the screen, respectively:

FR = Front View

ISO = Isometric View

In our example, we select Main view to the right.

3. Click Apply to apply the selected configuration to the current 3D viewer and keep the Views and Layout dialog box

displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 617

As soon as you apply a configuration to the current viewer, the Create Multi-View icon in the View toolbar

changes to to indicate that the multi-view mode is now active.

When you manipulate a viewpoint in one of the four views, the other three viewpoints are not modified and you can
manipulate them independently:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 618

4. To set a view as the current view, click it in the View Selection area. In the example below, the isometric view has been

set as the current view:

5. Select one of the standard views displayed to the left to apply it to the current view: for instance, click the Back View

button to set the Back View as the current view as shown below:

When you click Apply, the selected standard view is applied to the corresponding view you in the viewer.

Another way to apply a standard view in the viewer is to select in the viewer the view you want to modify (in that
case, the compass is displayed in the top-right corner of the selected view) then select a standard view from the
Quick View toolbar.
However, do not forget that if you do not also change the corresponding view in the View Selection area, the
modification you made in the viewer is not kept when clicking Apply.

The View Selection area also contains four rotation arrows (such as ) enabling you to change the orientation of
the current base view: one click on an arrow rotates the base view by 90 degrees in the arrow's direction.

6. Click the arrow repeatedly and check the result in the View Selection area. Below is an example with starting
position displayed to the left:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 619

Note that if the current view is an isometric view, the rotation step will be 60 degrees and not 90 degrees:

You also have the ability to use the four view selectors (such as ) to change the view direction by predetermined
increments.

7. Click the arrow repeatedly and check the result in the View Selection area. Below is an example with Back View as
the current view and the starting position displayed to the left:

● If the current view is not an isometric view:

❍ clicking the left or right selector makes the view's horizontal axis change by a predetermined increment. If
you click a selector then the opposite afterwards, the view direction is reversed
❍ clicking the up or down selector makes the view's vertical axis change by a predetermined increment. If you
click a selector then the opposite afterwards, the view direction is reversed

● If the current view is an isometric view: clicking one of the four selectors makes the view direction change to one
of the eight possible isometric views by predetermined increments.
Note that the view direction for an isometric view is always the direction from the eye point (= the location of the
viewer's eye within the 3D scene) to the axis origin.
The picture below illustrates the eight eye points for the different isometric views:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 620

Therefore the result will be as follows when clicking the arrow repeatedly for an isometric view:

8. Activate the lock options (+ click Apply) if needed:

● Rotation Lock locks the rotation in the view you select (i.e. the current view)

● Translation Lock locks the translation in the view you select (i.e. the current view).

Note: Rotation Lock or Translation Lock and Viewpoint Synchronization cannot be activated simultaneously.
Activating Rotation Lock or Translation Lock automatically deactivates Viewpoint Synchronization, and
inversely.

9. Select the Viewpoint Synchronization check box then click Apply if you want the other three viewpoints to be

modified simultaneously when you manipulate one of them.

In the example below, the main viewpoint has been modified and the three others have been updated accordingly:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 621

10. When satisfied with your configuration, click OK (or Apply then OK) to validate and close the Views and Layout dialog

box.

Note that when you reselect View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization, the Views and Layout

dialog box the last used tab is activated with the last applied configuration.

To go back to the standard viewer, click Create Multi-View in the View toolbar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 622

Creating a Multi-View: Standard Views' Customization

The multi-view mode is a capability allowing you to customize the default standard views within a 3D viewer.
This customization is defined in the Standard Views tab of the Views and Layout dialog box.

For detailed information on the other tabs provided in this dialog box, refer to Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration and
Creating a Multi-View: Automatic Configuration.

Before you start

In order to take full advantage of this scenario, you need to be familiar with the basic vocabulary:

● "Viewer" is the screen area in which 3D objects are drawn

● "View" is a part of the viewer. Usually, the viewer has one single view but it can also be divided into 4 parts representing a
different view each. When a viewer is split into several views, it is identified as a "multi-view" viewer
● "Viewpoint" is the set of parameters required for defining a 3D view volume, i.e. the eye of the user, the view direction, the
focus point and the axis system defining the position of the user. It can be defined as the position in model coordinates at
which the eye is looking.

Bear in mind that the configuration remains active throughout the whole Version 5 session but it is not saved when selecting
File > Save As. For instance, if you apply a specific configuration then save and close your document before reopening it, this
document is displayed using the last active view before the save.

However, the view direction and orientation you define in this tab are stored in the CATSettings directory and therefore, you can

reuse your customization from one session to another by clicking Create Multi-View in the View toolbar. If no
customization has been defined for a standard view, the default standard view is applied.

Open the Views.CATProduct document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization to open the Views and Layout dialog box then select

the Standard Views tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 623

Note that you can also access the Standard Views tab by selecting View > Named Views then choosing a view from

the list before clicking the Properties button.

This dialog box is made up of six areas:

● Standard Views icons let you select the standard view to be customized
● View Selection lets you modify the direction and orientation of the selected standard view
● View Direction lets you manipulate the viewpoint
● Apply to axis lets you specify the axis to which the modification will be applied
● Reset All lets you restore all the standard views to their original default direction and orientation
● Confirmation: lets you validate or cancel the configuration.

2. Select a standard view to customize by clicking one of the icons displayed to the left. By default, Front View is

selected. In our example, we click the Back View button.

When a standard view is selected, the preview displayed in the View Selection area is updated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 624

The standard views displayed in this dialog box are identical to those available in the Quick View toolbar:

Isometric View

Front View

Back View

Left View

Right View

Top View

Bottom View

3. Click Apply then OK to apply Back View to the current viewer:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 625

4. Re-select View > Navigation Mode > Multi-View Customization to re-open the Views and Layout dialog box: the

Back View button is still selected and we can now start customizing the view.

5. Use the four translation arrows (such as ) to shift the selected standard view by 90 degrees in the arrow's direction.

Below is an example of the result you can obtain when clicking repeatedly the arrow with Back View as the
selected view and starting position displayed to the left:

Note that if the current standard view is an isometric view, the isometric view's direction changes to one of the eight
possible isometric views using predetermined increments.

Below is an example using repeatedly the arrow with starting position displayed to the left:

6. Use the four rotation arrows (such as ) to change the orientation of the current view: one click on an arrow rotates
the view by 90 degrees in the arrow's direction.

Below is an example using repeatedly the arrow with starting position displayed to the left:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 626

Note that if the current standard view is an isometric view, the view is rotated by 60 degrees:

7. Use the three fields displayed in the View Direction area to change the direction of the current view.

This area indicates the direction of the selected standard view along the X, Y and Z axis (as shown below):

To change the direction, you can enter one of these three values in the desired field: -1, 0 or 1 before clicking Apply.
Note that if the selected view is not an isometric view, you can enter a value only in one of the tree fields: as soon as
a value is entered in a field, the other two are automatically filled with the value "0". On the contrary, if the selected
view is an isometric view, you can enter a value in the three fields.

If you enter a positive value other than "1", it is changed to "1" and if you enter a negative value other than "-1", it is
changed to "-1".
For instance, entering "-1" instead of "1" in the first box to the left inverts the view direction along the X axis:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 627

8. Use the Apply to axis area to position the selected standard view according to the local axis or to the axis you select:

● when Use local axis is displayed, it means that the standard view is positioned according to the active (i.e.

current) local axis.

If no local axis is active, the standard view is positioned according to the global axis system (displayed in the

bottom right corner of the screen) of the UI-active object. For instance, if a part is activated, the standard view

uses the part's axis as reference.

To set an axis as current, right-click it in the specification tree or in the geometry area then select xxx object >

Set As Current.

● select the Select axis check box lets you position the standard view according to a specific axis: to select the

axis to be used, first select the text No Selection then click the axis to be used in the geometry area. The name

of the selected axis is displayed in the box:

The directions of the selected axis are saved in the CATSettings directory and are applied to the standard view.
As these directions are stored in the settings, this means that the standard view is always positioned according to
them and this, whatever the orientation changes you might make afterwards (for instance, if you change the
compass orientation). If you want to apply new directions to the standard view, you need to select another axis.

Note that the Select axis option remains activated even if you select another standard view. Therefore, do not forget
to deactivate the option if you want to use the local axis.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 628
In case your current axis sytem is left-handed, the standard views are positioned according to the global axis
system.
For detailed information about defining a three-axis system locally, refer to Axis System.

If you want to restore all the standard views to their original direction and orientation, click the Reset All button.

9. When satisfied with your configuration, click OK (or Apply then OK) to validate and close the Views and Layout dialog

box.

10. In the View toolbar, click the icon of the standard view you have just customized (Back View in our example).

The modified standard view is applied to the current viewer and you see that the result is totally different from the

one in step 3 where the original standard Back View has been applied:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 629

Defining the Level of Detail and the Pixel Culling

This task explains how to define dynamically (in order to improve visualization performance):
● the level of detail you want to view in your geometry while moving using the Define Dynamic Level of
Detail command
● the size in pixels of objects to be hidden/displayed in your geometry while moving using the Define
Dynamic Pixel Culling command.

Dynamic level of detail and dynamic pixel culling allow you to modify more quickly the values set in the
Performances tab.
However, bear in mind that the values you define here apply only to your current Version 5 session,
contrary to the values defined via the Performances tab which are stored in your settings files and thus, are
kept from one session to another unless they are explicitly modified.

You can use these two commands simultaneously or separately, as needed.

However, note that if the Level of detail or the Pixel culling option has been locked by your administrator
in the Performances tab, you cannot define dynamically the level of detail or the pixel culling because the
corresponding command (Define Dynamic Level of Detail or Dynamic Pixel Culling) is grayed out.

Open your sample document.

Before you begin, you also need to do the following:

● LODs are used in a product context in Visualization mode: as a consequence, you must activate the
cache for your LOD settings to be taken into account (select the Work with the cache system check
box in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Product Structure > Cache Management)
● select the Save level of details in cgr check box in the Cgr Management tab.
● activate at least the Triangles mode in the Custom View Modes dialog box.

1. Select Tools > Customize.

2. Click the Commands tab to list the commands available.

3. Select the category All Commands that lists all commands available.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 630

4. Select Define Dynamic Level of Detail from the command list.

5. Drag the command from the command list to the toolbar to which you want to add the command.

6. Drop the command onto the desired toolbar.

Note that some toolbars (such as the View toolbar) cannot be customized. As a consequence,
you cannot drag and drop commands onto them.

For detailed information on how to customize toolbars, refer to Customizing a Toolbar by

Dragging and Dropping.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to drag and drop the Define Dynamic Pixel Culling command.

In our example, the two commands have been added to the Standard toolbar:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 631

These commands are identified by two different icons:

● identifies the Define Dynamic Pixel Culling command

● identifies the Define Dynamic Level of Detail command.

8. Set your own values either by entering them directly in the corresponding field or by using the box:

● for pixel culling, you can enter a value comprised between 0 and 40. The higher the value, the

more quickly you can move large parts

● for level of detail, you can also enter a value comprised between 0 and 40. The higher the

value, the lower the level of detail.

9. Perform a viewing operation, for instance pan or rotate your model.

You can see that your new values have been taken into account.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 632

Testing the Visualization Performance

This task explains how to test the 3D visualization performance, more precisely the rotation of the 3D
document you are currently displaying in your Version 5 session with the rotation angle and step number you
defined.

Open the Select.CATProduct document which looks like this:

1. In the power input field, enter the following command:

c:TestVisuPerfoDraw

The Rotation Performances dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 633

2. In the Rotate Axis area, select the desired rotation axis by clicking the appropriate option:

● Vertical: corresponds to the default axis which is vertical and parallel to the screen
● Horizontal: corresponds to the horizontal axis, parallel to the screen
● Sight: corresponds to the axis which is perpendicular to the screen.

3. In the Parameters area, you need to define:

● the angle for each rotation step (in degrees) in the Angle box
● the number of steps in the Repeat box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 634

4. In the LOD Selection area, select the desired level of details:

● Static Mode
● Dynamic Mode.

Depending on the mode you select, the test is performed according to the value you set in Level of
Details area available in Tools > Options > General > Display > Performances:

● selecting Static Mode means that the test is performed using the value set with the Static
slider.
● selecting Dynamic Mode means that the value used for the test is the one defined with the
While Moving slider.

5. Click Apply to start testing.

The parameters you defined are applied and the corresponding result performance is displayed in

the Visualization Time box shown below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 635

The time displayed corresponds to the average visualization time per frame (in milliseconds).

This average value is computed as follows: for instance, if you display 40 times your model
(whatever the Angle value), the average visualization time will be the total
visualization time (i.e. is the sum of all milliseconds spent to draw the 40 frames)
divided by 40.
The total visualization time is not displayed in this dialog box but you can compute it very easily.
To do so, multiply the value displayed in the Visualization Time box by the value displayed in
the Repeat box.

6. Click Close to exit the command.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 636

Testing the Visualization Time

This task explains how to test the visualization time for the 3D document you are currently displaying in
your Version 5 session.

Open the Select.CATProduct document.

1. In the power input field, enter the following command:

c:performance gauges

A gauge appears in the lower-left part of the geometry area and displays the visualization time in
milliseconds (ms) of the previous frame:

2. Manipulate your model, for instance by rotating it. The gauge is updated and displays the new

visualization time:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 637

3. To exit the command, re-enter c:performance gauges in the power input field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 638

Navigating
Navigating in Examine Mode
Navigating in Walk Mode
Navigating in Fly Mode
Changing Views
Viewing Objects against the Ground
Magnifying
Looking At Objects
Turning Your Head To View An Object
Snapping the Viewpoint
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 639

Navigating in Examine Mode

Navigating in Examine Mode is the default mode. You can examine your document as you would from
the outside by moving around the document's perimeter, or as you would from within, turning your head
to view or moving closer (zoom in, zoom out) to different objects.

For more information, see Activating Viewing Tools Using the Mouse.

You can also access the Examine mode by clicking Examine Mode in the View toolbar, available
when using the beginners walk and fly modes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 640

Navigating in Walk Mode

In Walk mode, you can walk forward and backward (backward in advanced mode only) as well as turn right or left
as you walk along the horizontal plane.

Two walk modes are available:

● Beginner's mode

● Advanced mode for experienced users.

Before using the Walk navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (select View > Render Style >
Perspective). If you attempt to activate Walk mode, you are prompted to switch to a perspective view.

Beginners Walk Mode

This task shows you how to navigate in beginner's walk mode.

Beginner's walk mode commands are single-action commands. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the
command. You can only move forward in beginner's walk mode.

Open the document Platform.model.

You need a V4 Integration license to open this document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Walk.

The icons used in the beginner's

walk mode appear in the View
toolbar:

These commands are also available via View > Modify.

2. Click Turn Head in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position
(the direction in which you look at the object).

3. Release at the desired location.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 641

4. Click Walk , then click the left mouse button to begin to walking.

You begin to walk straight forward in the chosen direction.

A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view.

The figure below the arrow

specifies the speed at which you
are walking:

The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object, and is
calculated automatically. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in approximately
10 seconds.

5. Still holding the left button down, drag to the right or left, or up or down, to change direction.

You walk in the direction in which you drag. The further you drag away from the center of the view

(represented by the circular symbol), the greater the change in direction.

Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the
right produces the same effect in the opposite direction.

As you drag, the shape of the

arrow changes to reflect the
direction in which you are walking:

6. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue walking straight forward in the new

direction.

7. To modify your speed, click Accelerate or Decelerate one or more times, then click Walk

again followed by the left mouse button to pursue your walk.

8. To return to the default navigation mode, click Examine Mode in the View toolbar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 642

You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in Tools > Options >
General > Display > Visualization.

Advanced Walk Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Walk mode.

Before using the Walk navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (select View > Render Style>
Perspective).

It is easier to walk through documents in contexts where you would find a virtual ground, i.e. in buildings, planes or
ships for example.

Open the document Platform.model.

You need a V4 Integration license to open this document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Walk.

2. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the horizontal view plane.

3. Still holding the button down, drag to the left or to the right to determine the direction in which you wish to

walk.

In the Walk mode, press and hold down the middle mouse button until you have finished navigating.

4. When in the direction in which you wish to walk, click the left mouse button to begin walking.

You begin to walk forward in the chosen direction.

A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view, like when using the
beginner's walk mode:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 643

5. Still holding the middle button down, drag left or right to change direction:

Dragging to the left lets you view the object as if you had turned your head to the left; dragging to the
right produces the same effect in the opposite direction.

6. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue your walk straight forward in the new

direction.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 644

Pressing Page Up and Page Down modifies your speed. Speed is indicated in the status bar.

7. Click the left mouse button again to reverse the direction.

You begin to walk backward, away from the target.

Note: The left and right directions are now defined as if you were walking away from the target with your
back towards it.

When a collision is detected, the green arrow turns red, whether you navigate in beginner's or advanced
Walk mode:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 645

You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in Tools > Options >
General > Display > Visualization.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 646

Navigating in Fly Mode

In Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward
(backward in advanced mode only).

Two fly modes are available:

● Beginner's mode

● Advanced mode for experienced users.

Before using the Fly navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (select View > Render Style >
Perspective). If you attempt to activate Fly mode, you are prompted to switch to a perspective view.

Beginner's Fly Mode

This task shows you how to navigate in beginner's fly mode.

Beginner's fly mode commands are single-action commands. Releasing the mouse button means you exit the
command. You can only move forward in beginner's fly mode.

You need a V4 Integration license to open this document.

1. Click Fly Mode in the View toolbar or select View > Navigation Mode > Fly.

The icons used in the beginner's fly mode appear in the View toolbar:

These commands are also available via View > Modify.

2. Click Turn Head in the View toolbar then drag (left mouse button) to define your starting position
(the direction in which you look at the object).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 647

3. Release at the desired location.

4. Click Fly , then click the left mouse button to begin to flying.

You begin to fly forward in the chosen direction.

A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view:

The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you are flying:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 648

The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object, and is
calculated automatically. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in
approximately 10 seconds.

5. Still holding the left button down, drag to the right or left, or up or down, to change direction.

You fly in the direction in which you drag. The further you drag away from the center of the view

(represented by the circular symbol), the greater the change in direction.

As you drag, the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are flying:

6. Drag the cursor back towards the center of the view to continue flying straight forward in the new

direction.

7. To modify your speed, click Accelerate or Decelerate one or more times, then click Fly

again, then drag to pursue your fly.

Each click on the icon increases or decreases the speed by approximately 40%.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 649

When you collide with a solid object when flying, you slide along the object's surface, and you no longer
fly through the object, providing a more realistic effect. This feature is also available in Advanced Fly
mode.

Pressing the Shift key and dragging lets you bank left or right.

You can also change the mouse sensitivity and activate the collision detection using the appropriate
options in the Navigation tab.

8. To return to the default navigation mode, click Examine Mode in the View toolbar.

Advanced Fly Mode

This task shows you how to navigate through a document in Advanced Fly mode.

Before using the Fly navigation mode, you must be in a perspective view (select View > Render Style >
Perspective).

Fly is used in exactly the same way as Walk, the only difference being that in Fly mode you can move upward or
downward on any horizontal plane as you move forward or backward.

However, note that when using a Space Mouse, you can fly with six different degrees of freedom, which means
that you can navigate through a document in a direction other than the one in which you are looking at the
object.

Open the document Platform.model.

You need a V4 Integration license to open this document.

1. Click Fly Mode in the View toolbar or select View > Navigation Mode > Fly.

2. Press and hold down the middle mouse button to define the initial horizontal view plane.

3. Still holding the button down, drag to the left or to the right, or up or down, to determine the direction in

which you wish to fly.

In the Fly mode, press and hold down the middle mouse button until you have finished navigating.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 650

4. When in the direction in which you wish to fly, click the left mouse button to begin flying.

You begin to fly straight forward in the chosen direction.

A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view, like when using
the beginner's fly mode.

The speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance from the object, and is
calculated automatically. The speed is optimized so that you reach the point you target in
approximately 10 seconds.

5. Still holding the middle button down, drag left or right to change direction.

You fly in the direction in which you drag. The further you drag away from the center of the view, the
greater the change in direction.

6. Drag the cursor towards the center of the view to continue flying forward in the new direction:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 651

Pressing Page Up and Page Down modifies your speed. Speed is indicated in the status bar.

Each press of the key increases or decreases the speed by approximately 40%.

7. Click the left mouse button again to reverse direction:

You begin to fly backwards, away from the target. When flying backwards, the up and down are
reversed.

Note: You can select the Gravitational effects during navigation check box in Tools > Options >
General > Display > Navigation, to fix the X, Y or Z axis during navigation. While turning in Fly
mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with respect to the fixed axis,
as in a real plane.

You can also set mouse sensitivity and collision detection using the appropriate options in the same
Navigation tab, like when using the beginner's fly mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 652

Changing Views
Individual views are created as you navigate through your design in examine, walk and fly modes. Views
are stored and can be reviewed. In walk and fly modes, views are created each time you pause during
your walkabout or fly around.

This task shows you how to change views.

Open the document Search1.CATProduct.

1. Navigate in Examine mode (zoom, pan, etc.) to create and save several different views.

2. Select View > Modify > Previous View.

The previous view is displayed in the geometry area:

3. Select View > Modify > Previous View again:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 653

4. Select View > Modify > Next View.

The next saved view is displayed in the geometry area.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 654

Viewing Objects against the Ground

Ground lets you visually insert a plane at the ground level of your document, thus enabling you to recognize when your
document is viewed the right way up.

When you first access a document, the plane parallel or tangent to the bottom point of your document is considered to be
the ground.

This task shows you how to show and hide the ground.

Open the document Search1.CATProduct.

1. Select View > Ground.

The ground plane is displayed in the geometry area.

Note that if you want to hide the ground, simply repeat the same step.

2. Drag (left mouse button) the ground up or down to a new location...

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 655

3. ...then release the mouse button: the ground is repositioned as defined.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 656

Magnifying

This tasks explains how to obtain a magnified view of your document in a separate window.

1. Select View > Magnifier.

The Magnifier window opens containing a magnified section of your document:

The section magnified is defined by the magnifier viewport which appears over the object in your document:

Note that the magnifier viewport has handles:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 657

● the "+" symbol lets you move the viewport

● the handles in the corners let you resize the viewport.

2. Point to the + symbol and drag it to move the viewport and magnify another area of the document:

3. Point to one of the handles and drag it to size the magnified area up and down.

While you drag, the symbol appears.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 658

All the viewing and manipulations performed in the document window are also reflected in the Magnifier
window. For example, rotate the object to see how the object is also rotated in the Magnifier window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 659

Looking At Objects

This tasks explains how to look at the document in a specific direction by targeting through a user-defined viewport.

1. Select View > Modify > Look At.

2. Drag (left mouse button) slowly to display the viewport.

As you begin to drag, a rectangle with two diagonals appears and continues to grow as long as you continue to drag. This
rectangle represents the viewing window of the future view.

Before After

3. Continue dragging to move around, resize and reposition the viewport.

The viewport is then shaped like a pyramid: your eyepoint is located at the vertex of the pyramid. You can resize the viewport
by dragging the middle mouse button.

Before After
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 660

4. Release the button.

You now see what is targeted inside the viewport.

You can also press and hold down both Shift then the middle mouse button for a quicker result.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 661

Turning Your Head To View An Object

This tasks explains how to view an object by simulating what happens when you turn your head to look at the scene.

1. Select View > Modify > Turn Head, or click Turn Head in the View toolbar.

2. Drag (left mouse button).

A navigation symbol appears to help you understand what happens as you drag:

Before After

3. Release at the desired location.

In our example, dragging to the right lets you view the object as if you had turned your head.

Before After
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 662

Snapping the Viewpoint

This tasks explains how to adjust the viewpoint automatically after rotating it so that it matches the
standard view it comes closest to.

Open the DragObject.CATProduct document.

1. Select View > Navigation Mode > Viewpoint Snapping.

2. Manipulate the current viewpoint by rotating the object using the mouse (press and hold down

the middle mouse button then press the left or right button and drag still holding both buttons

down):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 663

Note that the viewpoint is not snapped if you use the compass to manipulate the viewpoint.

3. Release the mouse buttons.

The viewpoint is adjusted and snapped to the nearest standard view (Top View in our

example) is applied:

To deactivate viewpoint snapping, clear Viewpoint Snapping in View > Navigation Mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 664

Hiding and Showing Objects

Hiding Objects
Displaying Hidden Objects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 665

Hiding Objects

This task explains how to hide objects by transferring them to the No Show space (they are no longer
displayed).

1. Select an object.

In our example, select the line.

2. Click Hide/Show in the View toolbar, or select View > Hide/Show > Hide/Show.

Note that you can also right-click the object then select Hide/Show.

The object (the line in our example) is no longer displayed: it has been transferred into the No
Show space.

Note also that if you have several document windows open containing the same objects, the
object is transferred to the No Show space in each document window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 666

Note: In case you select multiple elements, only the space of the first selected element is
taken into account by the Hide/Show command. For instance, if the first element of the multi-
selection is in the No Show space, the Hide/Show command transfers all the selected
elements to the Show space, whatever their original space.

3. Click Hide/Show again to display the object in the Show space.

After selecting an object, you can select Edit > Properties, click the Graphic tab, and look at
the Shown check box to know whether the object is hidden or not:

● means that the object is in the Show space

● means that the object is in the No Show space.

This check box is displayed for your information only, the Properties dialog box does not let
you modify the object visibility.

A component placed in the No Show space in the product structure appears in low highlighting
in the tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 667

Displaying Hidden Objects

This task explains how to display objects transferred to the No Show area.

1. Display the same geometry as in the preceding example,

In our example, a line which was originally displayed is now in the No Show area.

2. Click Swap visible space in the View toolbar to display the contents of the No Show area.

In our example, you now see only the line.

The geometry area changes color to indicate you are now viewing the No Show space.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 668

Note: In case you select multiple elements, only the space of the first selected element is
taken into account by the Hide/Show command. For instance, if the first element of the multi-
selection is in the No Show space, the Hide/Show command transfers all the selected
elements to the Show space, whatever their original space.

3. Click Swap visible space again to return to the Show space.

You can continue working on objects in the No Show space. You can also select objects and

transfer them back to the Show space by clicking Hide/Show or by right-clicking then
selecting Hide/Show.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 669

Using Rendering Styles

Shading (SHD)
Shading with Edges
Shading with Edges without Smooth Edges
Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges
Shading with Material
Wireframe (NHR)
Rendering Style per Object
Customizing the View Mode
Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views
About Stitching Effect
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 670

Shading (SHD)

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode.

1. Select View > Render Style > Shading (SHD) or click Shading in the View toolbar.

Setting a part in Dynamic hidden line removal mode to Shading mode has the following
effect:

Dynamic hidden line removal Shading

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 671

Shading with Edges

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with all edges, whatever their type (smooth or
hidden).

1. Select View > Render Style > Shading with Edges or click Shading with Edges in the
View toolbar.

Setting a model from Shading to Shading with Edges has the following effect:

Shading Shading with Edges

More about the Shading with Edges style

If you modify the element color, bear in mind that in Shading mode, lineic elements (such as edges or
sketches) do not inherit the new color and turn black as shown in the example below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 672

Shading with Edges mode: Edges and Points mode:

"red" color is not applied to lineic elements "red" color is applied to lineic elements

For detailed information on color inheritance for Assembly objects, refer to Displaying and Editing Graphic
Properties.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 673

Shading with Edges without Smooth Edges

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges but without smooth edges using a specific
composite rendering style.

A smooth edge is an edge that does not define a break in the geometry, contrary to a sharp edge that breaks the
continuity of the geometry.

Three basic rendering styles are also provided in the Customize View Modes dialog box to let you manage more easily the
visualization of edges. Refer to the corresponding documentation for detailed information.

1. Select View > Render Style > Shading with Edges without Smooth Edges or click Shading with Edges

without Smooth Edges in the View toolbar.

Setting a shaded model from Shading with Edges to Shading with Edges without Smooth Edges has the
following effect:

Shading with Edges Shading with Edges without Smooth

Edges
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 674

Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges

This tasks explains how to display objects in shading mode with edges, whether they are hidden or not.

1. Select View > Render Style > Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges or click Shading with Edges and

Hidden Edges in the View toolbar.

Setting a model from Shading with Edges to Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges has the following
effect:

Shading with Edges Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 675

Shading with Material

This tasks explains how to display materials that have been applied onto objects.

Refer to "Applying Materials" in the Version 5 - Real Time Rendering User's Guide for detailed
information on how to use materials.

1. Select View > Render Style > Shading with Material or click Shading with Material
in the View toolbar.

Note that you can also select View > Render Style > Customize View Parameters then
click Material.

Setting a shaded part to Shading with Material has the following effect:

Shading only Shading + Material

(Roughcast material has been applied)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 676

Wireframe (NHR)

This tasks explains how to display objects in wireframe mode (i.e. only objects' edges are displayed).

1. Select View > Render Style > Wireframe (NHR) or click Wireframe (NHR) in the View toolbar.

Setting a shaded object to Wireframe has the following effect:

Shading Wireframe

The Version 5 wireframe mode does not correspond to the Version 4 wireframe mode. The full equivalence
may be obtained by selecting the Edges and points and Outlines check boxes in the Custom View Modes
dialog box.
For more information on customizing view modes, refer to Customizing the View Mode in this guide.

More about the Wireframe style

The Wireframe mode shows only edges and lines. As fas as edges are concerned, when displayed in
Wireframe, they are applied the color of the mesh and not the one of the "edges + mesh" mode.
For instance, when you display a blue pad with black edges in Wireframe, edges turn blue:

Shading with Edges Wireframe

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 677

The reason is that for each surface or solid, the visualization algorithm retrieves the color of all the faces the
object is made of and looks for the dominant color (i.e. the color that is most used). This dominant color will
then be used for the display in Wireframe.

Now if we take a more complex example: a pad with one red face and the rest of the pad is in blue. When
setting the pad to Wireframe, the pad edges are displayed in blue which is the dominant color.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 678

Rendering Style per Object

Usually, rendering attributes are ignored when drawing objects within a 3D window. The Rendering style per object option
takes into account the rendering styles that have been defined for V5 elements using Edit > Properties or the Graphic Properties
toolbar.

The rendering styles you can apply in the graphic properties are:

● Shading
● Shading with Edges
● Transparent
● Wireframe.

When V5 elements have been assigned one of the above-mentioned rendering styles, this style supersedes the one of the 3D
window.

Rendering styles are taken into account in the following order: first, the rendering style of the parent document and then, the
rendering style of the child document. For instance, if you apply the Wireframe rendering style to a product and the
Transparent rendering style to its part, activating Rendering style per object displays the whole object in Wireframe. But if
you select the product then set it to No Specific Rendering, then the object is displayed as Transparent. This is also true for
geometrical sets.

This scenario assumes that at least two different rendering styles have been defined for the various elements contained in your
sample document.

In the example below, two surfaces have been selected and assigned the following rendering styles:

Surface 1: Surface 2:
Wireframe rendering style Shading with Edges rendering style

1. Select View > Render Style > Customize View Parameters.

The Custom View Modes dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 679

2. Check that Shading is selected and see the result in the geometry area:

The whole object is displayed in Shading mode even though some elements have been assigned a different rendering
style.

3. Now, activate Rendering style per object in the Options area. This displays each element with its specific rendering

style.

In our example, Surface 1 is displayed in Wireframe mode and Surface 2 in Shading with Edges mode:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 680

For detailed information on the various rendering styles available in the Custom View Modes dialog box, refer to
Customizing the View Mode.

4. When finished, click OK to validate and close the dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 681

Customizing the View Mode

This tasks explains how to use the customize and apply view parameters.

1. Click Customize View Parameters in the View toolbar.

Note that you can also select View > Render Style > Customize View Parameters.

The Custom View Modes dialog box appears.

If this is the first time you are using the command, the view settings for the current document are
selected in the dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 682

In our example, the Shading check box is selected: this means that the view mode for the current
document is Shading.

2. Customize your own view parameters by selecting or clearing the appropriate options.

In certain cases, selecting one option may also select other options. Each time you select or clear an
option, the current view is updated dynamically to take your settings into account.

Lines and points

Edges and points

This area lets you display objects in shading mode with points and edges. You can choose among the
following visualization modes (do not forget to activate Edges and points to be able to activate the
visualization modes available in this area):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 683

All edges

Displays objects with all edges, whatever their type (smooth or not). You can also use the Shading
with Edges command.

All edges

When All edges is activated, you can deactivate the Shading mode to display the object in
Wireframe (NHR) mode. In this mode, only the object's edges are visible.
Note that you can also use the Wireframe (NHR) command.

Wireframe (NHR) mode

Half visible smooth edges

Displays partially smooth edges:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 684

All edges Half visible smooth

edges

Note that if Shading is cleared, Half visible smooth edges has no impact (all edges are displayed).

No smooth edges

Hides smooth edges on your objects. You can also use the Shading with Edges without Smooth
Edges command:

All edges No smooth

edges

All points

Displays edges and all their points, including vertices. By default, this mode is activated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 685

No vertices

Deactivates the display of vertices for edges. Only free points are displayed and can be selected.
This enhances the overall readibility when working with complex models because it can be confusing
when all the vertices are displayed.
Clicking this option has a positive impact on performances since some elements in the model are not
visible:

Note that this option, as any other customizable option (e.g. Outlines), does not alter the behavior of
predefined rendering styles (Wireframe, Shading With Edges, etc.). For instance, if you activate
No vertices then select Shading in the View toolbar, vertices reappear.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 686

Colored edges from faces

Colors edges (border edges, internal smooth or sharp edges) according to the color applied to the
object's faces.

Colored edges from faces has no effect:

● if you are working with CATPart and CGR files created earlier than V5R15.
To make this visualization mode effective on .CATPart documents earlier than V5R15, you need to
upgrade them by running the CATAsmUpgrade batch with the --force-new-visu option. For more
information on how to run this batch, refer to the Version 5 - Assembly Design User's Guide -
"Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances".
CGR files earlier than V5R15 cannot be upgraded
● if the Optimize cgr for large assembly visualization option is activated in Tools > Options >
Infrastructure > Product Structure > Cgr Management.

When the option is selected, each edge color is identical to the one of its adjacent faces.
Regarding internal edges, if the two adjacent faces have a different color each, the edge is colored
according to the color of the face whose bounding sphere's radius is the smallest. The real surface is
not taken into account.
The bounding sphere of a face is a virtual sphere-shaped bounding volume surrounding the face and
whose center and radius are such that the face is completely within the sphere. Depending on the
underlying feature, there are two possibilities. This is illustrated by the pictures below showing two
different bounding spheres for the same object.

In most cases, the Version 5 bounding But in some cases, the Version 5 bounding sphere may also be
sphere of a face is the smallest sphere larger than the smallest surrounding sphere:
that includes the face:

Example 1:
Edges between the green and grey faces of the trapezoid turn grey when set to Colored edges from
faces because "grey" is the color of the face with the smallest bounding sphere:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 687

Example 2:
The small square in the center turns red when set to Colored edges from faces because the
bounding sphere of the red face is smaller than the one of the green face:

More about Colored edges from faces

● If you are working with V4 models, internal smooth edges are not drawn.
● This option increases the amount of memory used in order to compute the color for each edge in
the model.
● Selecting this option automatically activates Edges and points
● You cannot activate both Colored edges from faces and Outlines options, they are mutually
exclusive.
● Colored edges from faces cannot be used in conjunction with the options available in the Mesh
area: selecting one of these options automatically clears the Colored edges from faces check
box, and inversely.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 688

Outlines

This option is useful if you always want to display outlines for parts created from surfaces of
revolution, for example, shafts, and cylinders. This setting determines whether you see outlines or
not.

Outlines selected Outlines cleared

No shading No shading

Whereas edge display is computed by your workstation's graphic adapter, outline display is computed
by the display software.
Note that there is a price to pay in memory usage and, in large assemblies, displaying outlines might
affect display performance. You may want to switch outline display off in this case.

Line-on-line

This option enables you to visualize superimposed lines by displaying them in a different color. It is
recommended to set a dark color background for better visibility.

Let's have a look at the example below:

Example 1
Line-on-line activated with light color background: superimposed lines cannot be distinguished:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 689

Example 2
Line-on-line activated with dark color background: superimposed lines can be distinguished
(identified by the red arrows in our example):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 690
Note that when this option is activated, you cannot select the Shading check box

Isoparametrics

This option is used in conjunction with Enable isoparametrics generation available in the
Performances tab.

No isoparametrics Isoparametrics are displayed

Mesh

Shading

This area lets you define the type of shading to be used when displaying objects. You can choose
among the following modes:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 691

Gouraud

Displays objects in Gouraud shading. This surface-shading technique interpolates linearly a color or a
shade across a polygon in order to make the object appear smoother. This is the default visualization
mode:

Gouraud shading

Material

Lets you visualize materials that have been applied onto your objects. You can also use the Shading
with Material command.
Refer to "Applying Materials" in the Version 5 - Real Time Rendering User's Guide for detailed
information on how to use materials.

Gouraud shading Material shading

(with Roughcast
material)

Triangles

Displays the triangles on the object's faces as shown below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 692

Gouraud shading Triangles shading

Transparent

Enables you to display the whole object in transparency mode provided that Shading is activated.

"Gouraud" shading "Transparent"

shading

Hidden edges and points

This option displays objects in shading mode with points and edges, whether they are hidden or not.
You can also use the Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 693

Gouraud shading Hidden edges and

points

Dynamic hidden line removal

This option displays objects in quick hidden line removal mode. In this mode, 3D faces visually blank
out any element located behind them, including 1D elements (such as wireframe elements).
Selecting the Dynamic hidden line removal check box has the following effect:

Gouraud shading Dynamic hidden line removal

Options
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 694

Rendering style per object

This option lets you take into account the rendering style of V5 elements when visualizing them in a
3D window.
Refer to Rendering Style per Object for detailed information.

3. Select OK if you want to save your customized view parameters, or Cancel to exit without saving them.

When you click OK, your view parameters are stored with your settings.

You can then apply these settings to the current document by clicking Customize View Parameters

in the View toolbar or by selecting View > Render Style > Customize View Parameters :
this re-opens the Custom View Modes dialog box with the options you have previously activated.
Click OK to validate and apply the view parameters to your document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 695

Displaying Perspective and Parallel Views

This tasks explains how to display objects in perspective or parallel views.

1. Select Render Style > Perspective or Render Style > Parallel to display the object in

perspective or parallel view, respectively.

Perspective View Parallel View

Perspective is related to the size of the object being viewed, and the distance of the object
from the observer.

Note that, before using the Walk and Fly navigation modes, you must be in a perspective
view.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 696

About Stitching Effect

"Stitching" is a visual effect totally independent from Version 5 and combines one or more objects on a
single one, thus giving a pattern looking like stitches.

How does it happen?

When two triangles (say, a red one and a blue one) are displayed at the same location in 3D, the two
colors are mixed. This is what we call "the stitching effect" and it is due to the 3D OpenGL renderer.

However, there is an exception in a very specific case: when the two triangles have the same vertices,
only one color is displayed since the it is exactly the same triangle which is displayed twice (in blue and
in red). The color of the last triangle displayed prevails over the rest.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 697

Setting Lighting and Depth Effects

Setting Lighting Effects

Setting Depth Effects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 698

Setting Lighting Effects

This tasks explains how to vary ambient lighting effects.

1. Select View > Lighting to display the Light Sources dialog box.

The default light source settings look like this...

... and produce a lighting effect, for example, like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 699

Note that the Single Light button is activated by default. The sphere indicates the current
lighting direction. The handle on the sphere indicates the direction from which the light is being
projected: by default, the light is coming from the top left.

You can drag the handle around (using the left mouse button) to change the lighting direction. The
new lighting effect is created instantaneously as you drag the handle.

The three sliders at the bottom of the dialog box control respectively (from top to bottom):

● ambient coefficient: defines the intensity of light emitted in any direction by the object, even if
not lit by any light source. The ambient light is essentially used to show objects or parts of
objects that are not illuminated directly by the light source.

Ambient = 0.50 Ambient = 1.00

● diffuse coefficient: defines the intensity of light diffused by the object when lit by a light source:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 700

Diffuse = 0.50 Diffuse = 1.00

● specular coefficient: defines the intensity of light reflected in one particular direction. This
coefficient affects the highlight on shiny surfaces. The higher the value, the bigger the the
specular spot:

Specular = 0.50 Specular = 1.00

To define the desired value, you can drag the desired slider or use the spin box next to it either by
clicking the up and down arrows or by entering a value directly in the field.

2. Drag the handle down and towards the bottom right: the light is now coming from the bottom right:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 701

3. Click the Two Lights button to add another light source.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 702

In our example, using two light sources means that the lighting is now too bright.

4. Drag the brightness slider (the first slider in the list) to the left or use the spin box next to it to reduce

the brightness.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 703

5. Now drag the lower handle up towards the top left to change the direction of the corresponding light

source.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 704

6. Click the Neon Light button to produce a neon light effect.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 705

7. Click the No Light button to switch off all light sources.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 706

Using the Color Chooser To Color Light Sources

You can also color light sources using the color chooser.

1. Double-click a light source handle.

The Color chooser appears:

The colored area with the cross represents a color

spectrum.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 707

2. Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the

spectrum.

The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to
where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your
exact color specifications.

Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.

3. Click Apply or OK to apply the changes.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 708

Setting Depth Effects

This tasks explains how to achieve 3D depth effects, namely, clipping geometry between clipping planes
and creating fog effects.

1. Select View > Depth Effect to display the Depth Effect dialog box.

The orange sphere completely encompasses the objects in your document. The white cross
represents the center of the objects in the geometry area.

The color of the area behind the orange sphere is the background color of your document.

The vertical lines represent the front (near) and back (far) clipping planes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 709

By default, depth effects are deactivated: if you zoom in and out, you will see that for the
moment the geometry is not clipped.

You can keep the Depth Effect dialog box open and continue working with other commands.
You will be able to understand the results obtained by setting depth effects by zooming in and
out.

2. Set the Near Limit and Far Limit by selecting the Fixed check box for each option, entering values

and pressing Enter in each case.

Note that location of the vertical lines representing the clipping planes has changed.

You can also drag the vertical lines representing the near and far clipping planes to produce the
same effect.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 710

The back (far) section of the geometry is clipped. You now only see what is located between the
near and far clipping planes.

3. Zoom out to see all the geometry.

4. Select the Foggy check box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 711

The foggy option introduces a foggy effect.

5. Zoom out again.

As you zoom out, the fog effect is increased. The fog gets thicker as you continue to zoom out
beyond the back clipping plane.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 712

Using Standard and User-Defined Views

Using Standard Views
Creating, Modifying and Deleting User-Defined Views
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 713

Using Standard Views

This task explains how to apply default standard views. Standard views are predefined viewpoints you can use to display
your document.

1. Select View > Named Views.

You can also access the Named Views diaog box by clicking Named Views in the View toolbar.

The Named Views dialog box appears:

The list provides a number of default standard views you can use to display the document:

● *front
● *back
● *left
● *right
● *top
● *bottom
● *iso.

2. Double-click the desired view.

For example, double-clicking *front obtains the front view:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 714

You can also use the quick access icon bar (accessed via the View toolbar) for applying standard views more
quickly.

When pulled away from the View toolbar, the Quick view toolbar looks like this:

When you apply standard views, the views are no longer rezoomed. Note also that, if the Animation during
viewpoint modification check box is selected in the Navigation tab, the change of view is animated.

The other views are:

3. You can modify the standard view properties by selecting a view in the list then clicking the Properties button. The

Views and Layout dialog box is displayed:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 715

For detailed information on how to use the Standard Views tab, refer to Creating a Multi-View: Standard Views'
Customization.

The other two tabs (Automatic and Manual) are grayed out because they are not relevant here. These tabs are
used to define a Manual or Automatic configuration when working in multi-view mode.

4. When finished, click Apply then OK to validate your parameters and close the dialog box.

5. In the Quick view toolbar (or in the View toolbar if you did not pulled the Quick view toolbar away), select the

standard view you customized: the view is applied with its new properties to your current viewer.

If no customization has been defined for a standard view, the default standard view is applied.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 716

Creating, Modifying and Deleting User-Defined

Views
This task explains how to create, modify and delete user-defined views. Note that user-defined views are
stored with the document.

Open the document NamedViews.CATProduct.

Your license must provide access to the product structure functions to open this document.

1. Select View > Named Views and double-click the desired view.

You are now ready to customize the view.

2. Adjust the different view parameters (zoom, rotation, etc.) until you are happy with the result.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 717

3. Click the Add button to add the view to the list.

The default name of the view is "Camera 1", and the name is also displayed in an editable box
below the list.

4. Rename the view in the editable field as required and press Enter, or click Apply.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 718

5. If you want to set the camera properties (the properties of the view), click the Properties button

to access the Camera Properties dialog box.

The settings are as follows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 719

● Name: name of your user-defined view (cannot be modified)

● Type: lets you set a Parallel or Perspective view projection
● Origin: coordinates of your eye position
● Target: coordinates of the center of rotation of the camera (the point located at the
center of the viewport). You can set the center of rotation by clicking the middle mouse
button on the desired point: the coordinated are memorized with the camera
● View angle: sets the angle of the pyramid-like shape with which you look at the geometry
(available in perspective views only). A large angle has the effect of zooming out to make
the geometry look small; a small angle has the reverse effect
● Zoom: zoom factor (available in parallel views only).

6. If you want to modify any customized view you already saved, select it, modify the view

parameters again, then click the Modify button to save your changes.

When working in P3 mode, you can use an alternate method to define the view angle. Refer to
Editing the View Angle for detailed information.

You can also delete views by selecting the view from the list and clicking the Delete button.

The Reverse button lets you view the object from the reverse angle.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 720

Exporting User-Defined Views to VRML Format

You can now save your user-defined viewpoints in VRML files in order to use these viewpoints in a VRML
viewer (such as Cosmo Player). However, note that not all VRML viewers can read user-defined
viewpoints.
Bear also in mind that when reopening your VRML document in Version 5, you will not be able to use
your customized views, only the standard views will be available.

Only the VRML 97 format is supported and therefore, you need to check that the "VRML 97" option is
activated in the VRML tab before saving your document.

1. Select File > Save As then choose the wrl format in the "Save as type" list.

Your file has been exported to VRML.

Below is an example of the syntax used to export data to VRML:

Viewpoint
{
position 0.980386 0.548146 0.603133
orientation 0.300869 0.556138 0.774718 2.061790
fieldOfView 0.471225
description "Main Viewpoint"
}

Viewpoint
{
position 0.690322 0.784519 0.790794
orientation 0.187054 0.451587 0.872399 2.448075
fieldOfView 0.471225
description "Iso View"
}

2. Open your document in a VRML viewer: the named views defined in Version 5 are accessible.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 721

Using Layers and Layer Filters

Assigning Objects To Layers
Adding and Naming Layers
Using Visualization Filters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 722

Assigning Objects To Layers

This task explains how to assign objects to layers.

Once you have assigned objects to layers, you then create visualization filters (refer to Using Visualization Filters) which
allow you to display only those objects located on specific layers referenced by the visualization filter.

Open the document Layers.CATProduct.

The document looks like this when you first open it:

1. Click the "+" symbol next to Layers, then the "+" symbol next to PadandCylinder, Pad, etc. until you see the

following:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 723

You can now see clearly that the two features are named PadandCylinder and Pad.

2. Select View > Toolbars > Graphic Properties to display the Graphic Properties toolbar:

None in the Layer list: indicates that there is no current layer, which guarantees that all the
contents of your document are visible. You can assign objects to None: any object assigned to None is always
visible.

For the moment, you have not yet assigned any objects onto a layer.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 724

The following layers are always available:

● None
● 0 General
● 1 - 999 (even though they are not visible at first in the Layer list).

These layers cannot be deleted.

The Layer list also contains the Other Layers... command which lets you create your own named layers. Refer
to Creating New Layers for more details.

3. Select PadandCylinder in the tree, click the arrow on the Layer list, then select 0 General from the list.

PadandCylinder is assigned to the layer 0 General. The Layer list now looks like this: . You see
only the number because all layers are identified primarily by their number.

4. Click on the "+" symbol next to PadandCylinder.

PadandCylinder is expanded.

5. Select the different features in PadandCylinder (Pad.1, Pad.2).

Note that these features are also located on the layer 0. This is because the features inside a part body inherit
the part body properties.

6. This time, still in PadandCylinder, select any of the sketches.

Note, however, that the sketches from which the features are built remain on the current layer None.

7. Select Pad in the tree.

Pad is still located on the current layer: .

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 725

More about layers

● The current layer is always visible whatever the visualization filter. This implies that objects located on this layer are
visible as well
● If no objects are selected, the current layer is displayed in the Layer list. If an object is selected, the name of the
layer on which the object is located is displayed in the list. Consequently, to find out which layer an object is assigned
to, select the object and look at the Layer list
● New objects are always created on the current layer. If you want to create new objects on a specific layer, you can do
so by setting the appropriate layer in the Layer list first: any new objects will be created on this new current layer
● To change the current layer, first make sure no object is selected, then enter the layer number in the list
● The link between a given feature or object and a given layer is stored with the document
● When pointing to the Layer list, a tooltip indicates whether the layer definition location is stored in the document or in
the user settings (i.e. the CATSettings directory).
However, bear in mind that this tooltip is displayed for information only, you cannot modify the storage location which
has been set as explained below:
❍ for CATProduct documents, the definition is stored in the user settings
❍ for CATPart documents, the definition (if there is one) is stored in the document. If no definition is stored in the
document, the CATPart documents use the definition stored in the user settings
❍ for CATDrawing documents, the definition is stored in the document.

About opening existing documents

When opening existing documents (whatever the release level on which they have been created), existing geometry will
be migrated to the current layer. To prevent geometry from being assigned to a layer, set the current layer to None
before opening existing documents.

Furthermore, if you open existing documents with a current layer set to a layer other than None then close the document
without making any changes, you will be prompted to save the document because the geometry was assigned to the
current layer when opening the document.

About Version 4 documents

When opening Version 4 documents containing layers, all existing layers are preserved as is: the layers are stored in the
Version 4 document.
Regarding dittos, refer to Layers and Layer Filters for Dittos.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 726

Adding and Naming Layers

This task explains how to add and name your own layers.

Using the Named Layers Dialog Box

1. Select View > Toolbars > Graphic Properties to look at the Graphic Properties toolbar.

2. Click the arrow on the Layer list, then select Other Layers... from the list.

The Named Layers dialog box appears:

3. Click the New button.

The layer 1, is added to the list, and the name Layer 1 is assigned automatically:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 727

4. Click OK.

The layer you just added (Layer 1) is now the current layer, and it is displayed in the Layer

list like this: .

The list of layers in the Layer list now looks like this:

If you select an object before creating the new layer, it will be transferred automatically to the
new layer created.

If you want to rename a layer when creating it, after clicking the New button, slowly click
twice the line containing the layer name to make the field editable.

You can also edit the layer number. This enables you to set up named layers to comply with
your company's layer conventions.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 728

Then, enter the new name and click anywhere outside the editable field to confirm the name.

In our example, the new layer name is My_Layer.

Note: the Delete button lets you remove the name of the layer you selected from the list
(except if this is the name of the current layer). Clicking the Delete button do not delete the
layer itself since a layer cannot be removed.
However, naming a layer is totally independent from assigning objects to it. As a
consequence, you can edit or remove the layer name without impacting the geometry.
Visualization filters referencing this layer will still be valid as well as any objects you may have
assigned to it.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 729

Clicking "Num" and "Name" columns presents the lists in numerical and alphabetical order.

The information related to the list of named layers, the current layer, the current filter and the
filter description (refer to Using Visualization Filters) is stored the following way:

● for CATProduct documents, the information is stored in the user settings. This means that
your data is kept throughout the whole session and from one session to another
● for CATPart documents, the information (if there is one) is stored in the document. If no
definition is stored in the document, the CATPart documents use the definition stored in
the user settings
● for CATDrawing documents, the information is stored in the document.

Using the Layer Box

1. Click inside the Layer list.

2. Enter a number between 0 and 999.

3. Rename the layer as desired by using the Other Layers... command as described in Using the

Named Layers Dialog Box.

Whatever the method you choose, note that you do not create any new layers as such: the
layers 0 - 999 are automatically provided. Adding layers adds them to the list in the Named
Layers dialog box, and to the list in the Layers list.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 730

Using Visualization Filters

This task explains how to use visualization filters.

A visualization filter is a group of layers. You then apply the filter to visualize (or not) only those objects
located on the layers in the filter.

Open the document Layers.CATProduct.

The document looks like this when you first open it:

1. Select Tools > Visualization Filters.

The Visualization Filters dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 731

The default current filter All visible is applied automatically: it lets you see all the contents of
the document. This filter cannot be deleted.

2. Click the New button.

The Visualization Filter Editor dialog box appears, allowing you to build the filter from the
following building blocks:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 732

● Criterion: this list box contains the operators you can use: =, !=, >, <, <= and >=;
The default operator is "="
● the list to the right displays the named layers (you can type any layer number between 0
and 999)
● the And and Or buttons provide you with the corresponding logical functions for combining
layers:
❍ And lets you add criteria (for instance, Layer>0 & Layer<10 means that objects
displayed in layers 1 to 9 will be displayed)
❍ Or lets you filter according to at least one of the criteria you define (for instance,
Layer=0 + Layer=1 means that objects contained in layer 0, or in layer 1 will be
displayed).

● The Filter field specifies the final filter syntax.

3. Click in the Criterion box (where you see 0), delete 0 then type 1 so that the filter syntax now

looks like this:

Layer = 1

4. Click OK.

This creates a new filter Filter001 (with the default filter syntax) in the Visualization Filters
dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 733

When pointing to the desired filter name, a tooltip indicates whether the filter definition location
is stored in the document or in the user settings (i.e. the CATSettings directory).
However, bear in mind that this tooltip is displayed for information only, you cannot modify the
storage location which has been set as explained below:

● for CATProduct documents, the definition is stored in the user settings. This means that your
visualization filters will be kept throughout the whole session and from one session to
another
● for CATPart documents, the definition (if there is one) is stored in the document. If no
definition is stored in the document, the CATPart documents use the definition stored in the
user settings
● for CATDrawing documents, the definition is stored in the document.

Note that you can also customize the filter application. For more information, refer to Layer
Filter.

5. Select the root object PadandCylinder in the tree, then select View > Toolbars >

GraphicProperties to display the Graphic Properties toolbar.

6. Click the Layer list, then type 0.

The root object is now assigned to the layer number 0.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 734

7. Select Pad.1 in the tree, click the arrow on the Layer list, then select 0 Layer General from the

list.

Pad.1 is assigned to the layer 0. The Layer list now looks like this: .

8. Select Sketch.1 in the tree, click inside the Layer list, then type 1.

Sketch.1 is assigned to the layer Layer 1. The Layer list now looks like this: .

9. Select Filter001 in the Visualization Filters dialog box and click Apply.

The objects under PadandCylinder are no longer displayed, and the filter remains active.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 735

Why are these objects no longer displayed?

All the features below the root object in the tree are considered to be on layer 0 if applying the
visualization filter makes the objects invisible. This remains the case even if you assign the
objects to layers other than layer 0.

10. This time, select the root object PadandCylinder in the tree, click the Layer list, then type 1 to

assign it to layer 1.

The filter is still active, but this time only the object Sketch.1 becomes visible:

Why is only one object displayed?

Both the root object and the Pad object are both on layer 1, but this time applying the
visualization filter has the effect of making objects visible, so the Pad object becomes visible.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 736

To see all the objects again, select the All visible filter then click Apply.

About Version 4 documents

If you apply Version 5 visualization filters to Version 4 elements, note that Version 4 elements have their
own way of managing such filters (this is done via a specific menu named Layer Filter).
Depending on the visualization mode you are using, there are two different behaviors:

● in Design mode, the .cgr format of the component is changed into the original editable component
document (geometry is available). Therefore, the assembly contains the real Version 4 data and, as
explained above, Version 4 elements are visualized according to their own filter even though the
Current filter on all documents option in Tools > Options > General > Display > Layer Filter is
activated. This is why some elements might not be filtered as expected
● in Visualization mode, documents appear in .cgr format. Only the external appearance of the
component is visualized (geometry is not available). As .cgr elements are Version 5 data, visualization
filters can be applied as for any other Version 5 element and the result will be as expected.

Regarding dittos, refer to Layers and Layer Filters for Dittos.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 737

Recording, Running, and Editing Macros

Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros
Recording a Macro
Running a Macro
Editing a Macro
Creating a Macro From Scratch
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 738

Automating Repetitive Tasks Using Macros

If you perform a task repeatedly, you can take advantage of a macro to automate it. A macro is a series
of functions, written in a scripting language, that you group in a single command to perform the
requested task automatically.

You can, for example, use a macro to automate:

● the creation of a series of holes in a part

● the extraction of bills of materials from an assembly
● the addition of a standard title block to a series of drawings
● the printing of a series of documents.

You can create macros either by recording an interaction sequence or by editing a file (written in a
scripting language) to insert the functions you wish. You can also modify an existing macro, either
recorded or created from scratch, to best fit your needs. Once the macro is created, you can run it by
selecting Tools->Macro->Macros..., selecting the macro, and clicking Run.

Macros can be stored in the current document or in a file in an external library. If a macro is created
while a document is current, either by means of recording an interaction sequence or editing a file, and is
stored in an external file, a link is kept in the current document to the file containing the macro.

Script Development Tools and Languages

You can use the following scripting tools and languages, depending on the platform you are running on.

On Windows
● CATScript: these macros are written in Basic Script, stored in CATScript-type documents, and can be
run on both Windows and UNIX
● Visual Basic Script (VB Script), at minimum level 5.0 , which is part of the operating system: macros
written in Visual Basic can be run on both Windows and UNIX.
The use of VB Script is recommended for developing Windows/UNIX-compatible macros. Although
CATScript macros written in previous releases continue to work, we recommend that you prefer VB
Script to CATScript
● Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) Version 6.0: this product is installed with Version 5: macros
written using VBA can only be run on Windows. Among the advantages of using VBA, note that:
❍ IntelliSense editing facilitates editing
❍ VBA contains a debugger
❍ you can develop graphic user interfaces using VBA (this is not possible with CATScript or VB Script
macros).

On UNIX

Visual Basic Script 3.0 for UNIX (from Mainsoft) (shared libraries are installed when installing Version 5).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 739

Recording a Macro
This task explains how to record a macro from a dialog sequence.

You can store the recorded macro in the current document or in a file. Even if you choose to store the
macro in a file, if a document was current when you began to record the macro, a link is created in this
document to the file storing the macro, and the macro can afterwards be selected and run using this link
from the document. If you want to record a macro that is not pointed to by any document, you need to
store the macro in a file, and you can either start recording with no current document, or delete the
created link from the current document when the macro is recorded.

1. Select the Tools->Macro->Start Recording... command.

This displays the Record Macro dialog box:

2. Specify the current macro library or document.

This means deciding where the macro is going to be stored:

● in a macro library: the macro will be stored in a directory (or a VBA project if it exists)
● in a document: the macro will be stored in the current document.

What macro types you can store and where you can store them are summarized in the
following table:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 740

Where Stored
Language
Editor File Extension In Document In Directory In VBA Project
Used
CATScript Default or
.CATScript Yes Yes No
(Basic Script) external
VB Script Default or
.catvbs Yes Yes No
(Visual Basic) external
Visual Basic
VBA .catvba No No Yes
Editor only
Opening the list for this option displays the following by default:

By default, the only macro library library available is your E: folder. You can also choose to
store the macro in the current document (a CATProduct document in our example).

3. Click the Macro libraries... button if you want to add, create or remove macro libraries.

The Macro libraries dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 741

Only the E: folder is available because you have not yet created any other macro libraries.

4. Click the Library type field to display the following:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 742

The choices are:

● All libraries: displays all directories and VBA projects

● Directories: displays only directories
● VBA projects: displays only VBA projects.

5. Click the Add existing library... button and navigate to select the library or VBA project, or click

the Create new library... button and create the new macro directory of VBA project, and provide

names when prompted.

You can also select a library from the list then click the Remove selected library button to
delete it.

6. Make sure the Language used: option is set to the desired language.

7. Provide a name for the macro.

8. Click Start to begin recording the macro.

A Warning box is displayed if the macro already exists. Click Yes to start recording the macro
while overriding the existing one. The dialog boxes related to the macro recording disappear
and the Stop Recording dialog box appears.

9. Perform the dialog sequence you want to record.

10. When this is complete, click Stop in the Stop Recording dialog box, or select the Tools->Macro-

>Stop Recording command. Your macro is now ready for replay.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 743

Running a Macro
This task explains the different methods of running a macro.

Method 1

1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macros dialog box:

In our example, we already created "Macro1.vbs" using VB Script, which is preselected and
listed in the available macros list.

Use the "Current macro library or document" field or the "Macro libraries" button if you have
other macros available.

2. Click the Run button to replay the selected macro.

Method 2

1. Explore your file system and locate the .CATScript file.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 744

2. Double-click the .CATScript file, or select the file and select the Open contextual command.

A session is started and the macro is executed.

Double-clicking a .catvbs macro does not run the macro.

Method 3

1. On Windows, run a command like this:

cnext -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

or like this:

cnext -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -batch -macro E:\tmp\Mymacro.CATScript

to run the macro in batch mode, where "Mymacro.CATScript" is the name of the macro file.

On UNIX, run a command like this:

CNEXT -macro "/tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

CNEXT -batch -macro "/tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

or like this:

./catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -object "-macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

./catstart -d /CATEnv -env CATIA.V5R16.B16 -object "-batch -macro /tmp/Mymacro.CATScript"

to run the macro in batch mode, where "Mymacro.CATScript" is the name of the macro file.

You can add macros to a toolbar using the Tools->Customize... command. Select the Commands tab,
then the Macros category: all the macros will be detected and listed. You can then drag and drop them
onto toolbars for convenient access.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 745

Editing a Macro
This task explains you how to edit a macro.

1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macros dialog box.

In our example, we already created "Macro1.vbs" using VB Script, which is preselected and listed in the available macros list.

Use the "Current macro library or document" field or the "Macro libraries" button if you have other macros available.

2. Click the Edit... button to edit the macro.

If the macro is a CATScript document or a VB Script file, the default editor is displayed like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 746

You can change the editor for CATScript and VB Script macros by using the Macros tab. For more information, refer to Macros.

If the macro is a .catvba project module, the VBA editor is displayed like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 747

On UNIX

By default the emacs is opened by default. You can always replace it by your favorite editor by exporting the EDITOR variable.

Use the Rename... button to rename the selected macro, the Delete button to delete it.

Use the Select... button and navigate to select a macro if it is not stored in a macro library.

3. Modify the macro instructions as you want, and save the macro, or cancel the modifications.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 748

Creating a Macro From Scratch

This task explains you how to create a macro from scratch.

1. Select the Tools->Macro->Macros... command to display the Macros dialog box.

2. Set the current macro library or document for storing the macro.

3. Click the Create... button, select the type of macro to create and name it.

4. Click the Edit... button to edit it.

Depending on which language you chose, the appropriate editor is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 749

Using Version 5 Data in OLE-Compliant

Applications
About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)
Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications
Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container Applications
Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant Applications
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 750

About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

Certain applications (e.g. Microsoft Office) support what is known as Object Linking and Embedding
(OLE). Such applications, referred to as OLE-compliant or OLE container applications, allow you to
retrieve a Version 5 document i.e. a part, a drawing or an assembly (referred to, in an OLE context, as
the OLE document server).

You can either link or embed the contents of the geometry area of a Version 5 document:

● Linking the document means that all changes made to it in a Version 5 session are also made to the
document inserted in the OLE-compliant application.
However, if you move the target file to another directory the link is severed. The graphic
representation still exists but can no longer be edited (unless the link is repaired via the Edit>Links
menu in the OLE-compliant application.
● Embedding the document means that a copy of the document is inserted in the document within the
OLE-compliant application. As no links are created, any changes made to the document in the Version
5 session are not made to the document in the OLE-compliant application.

The linked or embedded document appears as an image (or, if you specify otherwise, as an icon). When
the document is double-clicked, a normal Version 5 session is displayed.

OLE is available on Windows only.

Version 5 documents may be linked or embedded in host container documents. Linking is always allowed.
Embedding is forbidden in demo mode. Embedding of CATIA V4 models is also forbidden.

Only .CATPart, .CATProduct, .CATDrawing, .CATAnalysis and .model documents implement OLE document
server.

Version 5 supports the Microsoft /regserver and /unregserver options for OLE. If you experience
problems with OLE features, for example, if double-clicking a document icon does not start a session as
expected:

1. Log on as administrator.

2. Open a command prompt window.

3. Go to the folder where Version 5 is installed, typically:

C:\Program Files\DassaultSystemes\Bn\intel_a\code\bin)

(where n is the current release number)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 751

4. Run the following command once only:

cnext /regserver

If you have installed several levels of Version 5, running this command activates (for OLE purposes) the
level of Version 5 installed in the folder in which you run the command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 752

Embedding Existing Version 5 Data in OLE-

Container Applications
This task shows you how to embed Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application.

1. In the OLE-compliant application, place the cursor where you wish to embed the data and select

Insert > Object .

The Object dialog box appears:

2. In the Object dialog box, click on the Create from File tab.

3. Click the Browse... button.

4. In the Browse dialog box, specify the file location and click OK to confirm.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 753

5. A frame containing OLE.CATProduct is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file:

6. If you want to work on the Version 5 document, double-click on this frame. A normal Version 5

session is displayed.

However, the opened document is not the original one you inserted in your OLE-compliant

application: it is a temporary document (with a different name) stored in your temporary settings

located in the CATTemp folder.

When you have finished making the changes, close and save the Version 5 document. Bear in
mind that any changes you might make and save in Version 5 are saved in this temporary
document.

You see that the changes you have just made are reflected in the OLE-container document.

If you click again the frame in the OLE-container document, you see that the temporary
document re-opens in Version 5 (with the modifications you have saved, if any). If a session is
already running, the document re-opens in the current session, otherwise a new Version 5
session starts.

Note: deleting the frame in the OLE-container document closes the document in Version 5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 754

In the Object dialog box, there are two check boxes:

● Link to file: see About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

● Display as icon: if you prefer the Version 5 document to appear iconified, select this
check box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 755

Creating Version 5 Data in OLE-Container

Applications

This task shows you how to embed Version 5 data into an OLE-compliant application.

1. In the OLE-compliant application, place the cursor where you wish to insert the new data and

select Insert > Object.

The Object dialog box appears:

2. In the Object dialog box, check that the Create New tab is selected.

3. Select the type of document you want to create.

Note that the document type CATIA Model is listed but cannot be selected (because it is non-
editable).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 756

4. Click OK to confirm.

5. A gray frame is inserted at the desired location in your OLE-container file and a normal Version 5

session appears:

6. When you have finished working on the new document close and save it.

In the Object dialog box, there is the option Display as icon. If you prefer the Version 5
document to appear iconified, select this option.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 757

Copying Version 5 Images to OLE-Compliant

Applications

This task shows you how to copy images of Version 5 data to an OLE-compliant application.

Open the OLE.CATProduct document.

1. In the Version 5 document, select Tools > Image > Capture to display the Capture toolbar.

2. Click Select Mode in the Capture toolbar to activate the selection tool.

3. Click in the geometry area and drag your cursor to draw a rectangle around the part you see in

OLE.CATPart:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 758

4. Click Capture to capture the image and store it in the album. A progress bar appears while
the captured image is generated.

5. Once the captured image is generated, the Capture Preview window opens and you can then

click Copy to copy the image to the clipboard.

The selected image is now in the clipboard from where it can be pasted into an OLE-compliant
application.

6. Open the OLE-compliant application.

7. Place the cursor where you wish to insert the image.

8. Select Edit > Paste Special then click OK to confirm in the Paste Special dialog box.

The image you selected is pasted at the desired location in the file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 759

In the Paste Special dialog box, there is the Link to file check box.

For more information about this check box, see About Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 760

Transferring Version 5 Data

Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail (on Windows Only)
Copying Version 5 Data To a Directory or Diskette
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 761

Sending Version 5 Data In the Mail (Windows

Only)
This task shows you how to send Version 5 data in the mail. Note that this functionality is available on
Windows only.

All the data, including linked documents, is included in the send, provided it can be found. Any data that
can be opened in a Version 5 session, including V4 models, can be sent.

1. Open the Version 5 document you want to copy.

Before doing anything, make sure you have saved all the files you intend to send.

2. Select File > Send To Mail. The Send To Mail dialog box appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 762

In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the
document you selected for the send operation. The four columns provide information about the
file name, the file type, the location and whether or not the file was found.

3. Click the icon between the two lists. The dialog box then looks something like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 763

The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files
that will be sent.
In the upper list remain those files that were not found. This can be remedied by selecting
either Tools > Options > General > Document or Edit > Links (see Linked Document
Localization or Editing Document Links).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 764

If you prefer, you can select the files in the upper list individually and transfer them to the

lower list using the icon.

If you want to select the files by type, place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display
the list of file types and then select the appropriate type. (Selecting by type in this way
operates of course in the lower list as well.)

Before sending your documents in the mail, you may want to check the size of the documents
to be sent. You will find this in the lower left-hand corner.

The OK button may be grayed out. This means that problems shown in the Problem column
have not been resolved.

As well as the information provided in the upper list, the lower list also contains a column
showing potential problems such as duplicate file names. There are different ways of resolving
this. You can:

● select one of the identically named files and click the icon to move it to the upper list
i.e. not include it in the files to be sent
● rename one of the files using the Rename Target button.

4. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory, select the file and click

the Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box. The dialog box

opposite appears specifying the name of the file selected:

Enter the new name and click OK.

To cancel the rename, select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box, delete it
and click OK. The old name is restored.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 765

You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon .

5. Click OK. You are now prompted to give the name of your e-mail system.

If Lotus Notes has been set as your default e-mail system, an error message is displayed after
clicking OK because from version 6.x onwards, Lotus Notes Client installations no longer
support MAPI.
In that case, you need to specify another e-mail system in your favorite web browser. For
instance, if you are working with Internet Explorer, select Tools > Internet Options >
Programs then choose another system in the E-mail box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 766

Copying Version 5 Data To a Directory or Diskette

This task shows you how to copy Version 5 data to a directory or diskette.

If the document to be copied is linked to others, those documents are also copied to the directory (or diskette) you
choose, provided they can be found.

Any data that can be opened in a Version 5 session, including V4 models, can be copied.

Before doing anything, make sure you have saved all the files you intend to include in the copy.

Note: you do not need anymore to open the documents before sending them to a directory.

1. Select File > Send To Directory command. If no file has been previously opened, the File Selection

dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 767

If you opened files prior to selecting File > Send To Directory command, the Send To Directory dialog

box directly appears. Jump to step 3. to follow the scenario.

2. Select the Version 5 document you want to copy as shown above.

3. Click the Open button. The Send To Directory dialog box opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 768
In the upper part of the dialog box you can see a list of all the different documents linked to the
document you selected for the copy operation.
Note that all documents are displayed, whether they are directly or recursively linked to the selected one.

The four columns provide information about the file name, the file type, the location and whether or not
the file was found.

4. Click the icon between the two lists. The dialog box then looks something like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 769
The files have now been sorted. The list in the lower part of the box shows a list of those files that will be
copied. In the upper list remain those files that could not be found. This can be remedied by selecting
either Tools > Options > General > Document or Edit > Links command (see Localizing Linked
Documents or Editing Document Links).

If you prefer, you can select the files in the upper list individually and use the icon to transfer them
to the lower list.
If you want to select the files by type, place the cursor inside the list and right-click to display the list of
file types and then select the appropriate type. (Selecting by type in this way operates of course in the
lower list as well.)

5. If you want to keep the same directory structure in the target directory, select Keep Directory Structure

between the two lists. Once selected, this check box remains selected when you next select File > Send To

Directory.

Bear in mind that this option is not available or has no effect if the files to be copied have no directory
structure in common.

It might be useful, especially if copying files to a diskette, to know the size of the documents to be
copied. You find this just above the Copy to box.

OK might, as in the case shown above, be grayed out. This means that problems shown in the Problem
column have not been resolved.

As well as the information provided in the upper list, the lower list also contains a column showing
potential problems such as duplicate file names. In case of duplicate file names, you have different ways
of resolving this:

● select one of the identically named files and click the icon to move it to the upper list i.e. not
include it in the files to be copied
● select the Keep Directory Structure check box thus avoiding having files with the same name in the
same directory
● rename one of the files using the Rename Target button.

6. If you want to give one of the files a different name in the target directory, select the file and click the

Rename Target button in the lower right-hand corner of the dialog box.

The following dialog box appears specifying the name of the file selected:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 770

Enter the new name and click OK.

To cancel the rename, select the new name just entered in the Rename dialog box, delete it and click
OK. The old name is restored.

You can of course move all files to the upper list at any time by using the icon .

7. Enter the path of the target directory in the Copy to box using the Browse... button if necessary and click

OK.

This field is in fact a list and contains the nine destinations last used.

8. Click OK.

If you copy to an as yet non-existent directory, the following message appears:

If the target directory contains any files with the same name as any copied, the Confirm File
Replacement dialog box is displayed. Click the appropriate button:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 771

A progress box appears as each file is copied:

When the copy has been performed the Files Copied dialog box appears telling you the number, size and
type of the files copied.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 772

Managing Document Links in Version 5

Using the FileDesk Workbench
Displaying Document Links
Editing Document Links
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 773

Using the FileDesk Workbench

This task shows you how to view the relationships between different documents and to obtain information
about their properties.

Open the document NamedViews.CATProduct.

The original document looks like this, with a part loaded:

1. Select Tools > Options.

2. In the General category, select the General tab, clear the Load referenced documents check

box, then click OK.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 774

3. Close then reopen the same document.

The part is no longer loaded (indicated by a special symbol in the specification tree):

4. Select File > Desk.

The Desk window appears (the document stays open):

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 775

As you can see, the relationships between the document opened and any others are clearly

shown. You might have to click Fit All In in the View toolbar to see everything, especially
with complex relationships. All types of V5 data and V4 models can be viewed in this way.

Only relationships between documents with a File persistency can be shown. Therefore,
dependency links between ENOVIAVPM or ENOVIA V5 documents are not displayed in the Desk
window.
To visualize dependency links between objects, you have to use the Impact Graph workbench
provided in the VPM Navigator product. For detailed information, refer to "Using the Impact
Graph Workbench" in the Version 5 - VPM Navigator User's Guide (on the ENOVIA V5 VPM/LCA
Documentation CD-ROM).

You can leave the Desk window open when you modify the relationships or add or delete any of
the documents in the view. As the view is automatically updated, you can see the changes as
you make them.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 776

The relationship in our sample document includes a child document that has not been loaded
(see Load Referenced Documents). Unloaded documents are shown in reverse video.

The colors used to identify the various document types are the following ones:

● white for loaded documents

● black (reverse video) for documents that are not loaded in the current session
● red for documents that have not been found.

The example below illustrates a document including a child document that has not been found.

You can also display the Desk toolbar by selecting View > Toolbars > Desk:

Most of the commands provided in this toolbar are available in the contextual menu as well and
will be detailed further in this task.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 777

5. In the Desk window, right-click the document Part1.CATPart, then select Load or click Load
in the Desk toolbar.

The specification tree is updated as a result, i.e. the symbol representing the document will
change to that of a loaded document: the part is now loaded.

Note that you can right-click then select Open or click Open in the Desk toolbar
whenever you want to open a document, loaded or not.

6. If you want to see the properties of any loaded or unloaded document, right-click the document

then select Properties.

The Document Properties dialog box below appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 778

Refer to Displaying Document Properties for detailed information on the Document tab.

You can also click the Standards tab to display the standards which may have been defined for
your document.
The Standards tab is used mainly to display drafting and generative standards (when working
with .CATDrawing documents) but it can also be used to display standards defined for general
parameters such as graphic properties or layers and filters.
Refer to Displaying Document Properties for detailed information on the Standards tab.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 779

7. If you want to open a loaded or unloaded document, right-click it then select Open. This opens

the document in a new window.

As far as temporary documents are concerned, they cannot be opened in a new window. For

instance, you cannot open in a new CATIA V5 window a Product Root Class created in ENOVIA

V5.

8. You can also unload loaded documents. Unloading a document means that this document is not

stored in memory anymore.

When working with the cache system, do not forget to activate the Design mode (by default,
you are in Visualization mode), otherwise you will not be able to use the Unload command.
For detailed information on the Design mode, refer to "Setting Up The Design Mode" in the
Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide.

Select the documents to be unloaded in the Desk window then click Unload icon or right-
click then select Unload. This opens the following dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 780
The List of documents about to be unloaded dialog box gives you information on the
documents you are going to unload. Selecting an item from the list displays its preview to the
right.
Click OK to validate the unload and close the dialog box or Cancel to close the dialog box
without unloading the documents.

If one of the documents to be unloaded has been modified, a warning message appears instead
of the List of documents about to be unloaded dialog box and prompts you to:

● click No if you want to save the modified document (using File > Save Management)
before unloading it.
● or click Yes if you do not want to save your modifications and open directly the List of
documents about to be unloaded dialog box. In that case, your modifications will be lost.

The documents that are unloaded appear in black (reverse video) in the Desk window to
indicate that they are not loaded in the current session anymore:

● When an unloaded document points to other documents, the pointed documents are also
unloaded
● When unloading a part that belongs to several products, the Unload command applies to all
the products containing this part.

Once a document has been unloaded, you can load it again using the Load command.

You can also use the Desk File Management toolbar...

... to move, rename and delete documents. Note that this toolbar can be used either in Folder
or DLName document environment.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 781

9. To move one or several documents, you can either:

. select the desired documents from the Desk then click Move .

A warning window informs you that only the persistent file names will be moved. This means

that the selected documents will be physically moved to the location of your choice but the links

to these documents will not be relocated and thus, may no longer work.

Click OK to close the warning window then use the dialog box that opens to navigate to the

target directory:

After clicking OK to close the dialog box, a pop-up message prompts you to validate the new

location and warn you that some links might be broken. Bear in mind that the Move command

neither check nor relocate links between documents, you have to do it manually using Edit >

Links.

Note: the content of the moved documents remains unchanged.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 782

. or click directly Move to browse your file tree and select the documents to be moved.

A warning window informs you that only the persistent file name will be moved. This means

that the selected documents will be physically moved to the location of your choice but the links

to these documents will not be relocated and thus may no longer work.

Click OK to close the warning window then use the File Selection dialog box that opens to

access the directory from which the documents will be moved:

Select the desired documents then click the Open button to access the FILE RECEPTION BOX

which lets you navigate to the target directory:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 783

After clicking OK to close the dialog box, a pop-up message prompts you to validate the new

location and warn you that some links might be broken. Bear in mind that the Move command

neither check nor relocate links between documents, you have to do it manually using Edit >

Links.

Note: the content of the moved documents remains unchanged.

10. To rename a document, select the document to be renamed then click Rename or click

directly Rename then use the File Selection dialog box to navigate to the file to be
renamed.

In both cases, a warning window informs you that only the persistent file name will be modified,

the name of the loaded document will not be impacted. This means that the new document

name will appear in your Explorer window, for instance, but the original name will still be

displayed when loading your document in a Version 5 session. As a consequence, links may no

longer work.

Click OK to close the warning window then enter the new name in the Rename dialog box that
opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 784

Bear in mind that the Rename command neither check nor relocate links between documents.

If links are broken, you have to relocate them manually using Edit > Links.

Note: the content of the renamed documents remains unchanged.

11. To delete one or several documents, select the documents to be deleted then click Delete or

click directly Delete then use the File Selection dialog box to navigate to the files to be
deleted.

Be careful not to select any loaded or open document, otherwise a warning message will inform

you that the removal is not allowed.

After selecting the files to be deleted, a warning window informs you that some links might no

longer work.

Bear in mind that the Delete command neither check nor relocate links between documents,

you will have to do it manually using Edit > Links.

12. To find a document, select it then click Find in the Desk toolbar to open the File Selection
dialog box which lets you navigate to the desired document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 785

13. To upgrade or check a document, right-click it then select CATDUAV5. This opens the Data
Upward Assistant in your Version 5 session.

For detailed information on how to use the Data Upward Assistant, refer to Using CATDUA V5 in

Interactive Mode in this guide.

14. To reconcile a document, right-click it then select Launch Document Reconciliation. This
opens the Reconcile Window that enables you to exchange CATIA designs stored in a VPDM:

ENOVIAVPM, ENOVIA LCA, or SmarTeam.

For detailed information on how to use the reconciliator, refer to the Version 5 - Work Package

Exchange documentation.

The FileDesk workbench also lets you use the following commands:

● File > Send To > Directory once you have selected a document in the Desk

● Edit > Links once you have selected a document shown in white (i.e. loaded) in the Desk

then the Links contextual command or Link Edition in the Desk toolbar.
Note that while using the Links command, you can select other documents from the Desk
to display their related items interactively in the Links dialog box
● File > Save All

● File > Save Management.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 786

Displaying Document Links

This task shows you how to display document links.

Only direct links i.e. external documents directly pointed to by the active document can be displayed using Edit > Links. Thus, inactive
documents must be activated before displaying their links.

Note that you can also select an element from the graph to display its links.

Open the document Links.CATProduct.

1. Select Edit > Links.

The Links dialog box appears:

The file-related information in the bottom left-hand corner of the Links dialog box indicates the Pointed document, i.e. the
path and name of the document pointed to in the session.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 787

Under the Links tab, several columns are displayed to provide link-related information:

● From element: the pointing element

● To element: the pointed element
● In Instance: the product instance in which the pointed element has been selected (this column is displayed for products
only)
● Pointed document: the document containing the pointed element
● Link type: the type of the link, e.g. Instance, ViewLink, Import, CCP and so on
● Owner: the element to which the link belongs to
● Status: the status of the link. A link may be assigned the following statuses:
❍ OK
❍ Not synchronized
❍ Reference not found
❍ Document not found
❍ Document not loaded
❍ Isolated

● Last synchronized: indicates when the last synchronization (using the Synchronize button) was performed
● Activate status: indicates whether the link to a pointed element is activated or deactivated.

Note: when working with a disconnected network, any linked document loaded in your current Version 5 session before
disconnection is still found and thus, has the status "OK".
However, an error message is displayed when trying to load the document.
If the linked document has not been loaded before disconnection, the status is "Document not loaded" and an error message
is also displayed when trying to load or save the document.

2. Use the Link type filter and the Owner Filter lists to filter the information to be displayed respectively in the Link type and

Owner columns.

By default, these lists contain the value "All" which means that no filter is applied and thus, all links are displayed regardless
of their type and owner.

3. Click the Pointed documents tab to display only the documents pointed to by the current object. By default, the document

selected in the Links tab is also selected when accessing Pointed documents.

As soon as one of the displayed lines is selected, the Open button is activated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 788

For detailed information about managing document links using this tab, refer to Editing Document Links.

4. Click the Open button.

The Links dialog box disappears and the file CHC.CATPart, i.e. the file pointing to Links.CATProduct, is displayed.

Note that you can also open a pointed document using xxx object > Open the Pointed Document.
For detailed information on this command, refer to Opening Existing Documents.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 789

You can view the links of a specific element (without displaying those of the current document viewed as a whole) just by
selecting the desired item in the geometry before running Edit > Links.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 790

Editing Document Links

This task shows you how to edit document links.

Open the document Links.CATProduct.

1. Select Edit > Links.

The Links dialog box appears, confirming that two links have been found to the documents CHC.CATPart and Part2.CATPart:

2. Click OK and exit your session.

3. Move the document CHC.CATPart to another folder.

4. Restart your session, then reopen the document Links.CATProduct.

The Open dialog box appears, explaining that the document CHC.CATPart was not found:

Whenever a document is opened and one or more of its links are invalid, the Open dialog box appears along with the document
opened and a broken link icon appears in the specification tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 791
There are several reasons why a link might no longer work:

● the files were not found which means that they have been moved, renamed or deleted
● or the files contain the wrong information which means they still have the same name but a content different from the files
originally pointed to.

5. At this point, you have two options:

● if you click the Close button, you can then select Edit > Links and the dialog box displays the following information in the

Pointed documents tab:

Just select the element that has not been found then click the Find button to access the missing file via the File Selection dialog
box.

● if you click the Desk button (or double-click the file path inside the field in the Open dialog box), the Desk window appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 792

You can check link validity at any time using this command.

In our scenario, we click the Desk button.

6. Click the document shown in red in the Desk window.

7. Right-click then select Find.

The File Selection dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 793

8. Explore your file system to find the file, select it, then click Open.

The File Selection dialog box disappears and the file CHC.CATPart, i.e. the file pointed to by Links.CATProduct is now displayed in
white.

9. If you want to open the CHC.CATPart from the Desk, right-click it then select Open:

For more information on the Desk, refer to the Using the FileDesk Workbench in this guide.

10. If you now select Edit > Links, the Links dialog box indicates that the right file has been found and loaded ("OK" in the Status

column).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 794

The Links tab lets you manage individually each link you select from the list:

● the Load button lets you load parts (and parts only) that are not loaded. If you do so, the status changes from "Document not
loaded" to "Loaded"
● the Synchronize button lets you update links in your document.

For instance, suppose you have copied then pasted As Result with link a pad from one document to another document. You
have then two pads linked together in two different documents.
When you modify the original pad, the status of its copy changes to "Not Synchronized" to indicate that there is a discrepancy
between the two pads.
If you want the copy to be applied the changes you have made to the original, you need to click the Synchronize button. The
status of the copy then changes from "Not synchronized" to "OK".

However, be careful when replacing elements because not all element types are compatible. For example, a line cannot be
replaced by a circle or curve as their specifications are different, and the synchronization will not be allowed
● the Activate/Deactivate button lets you avoid or allow the synchronization of linked elements during part update. A symbol in
the specification tree identifies any "activated" ( ) or "deactivated" ( ) element.

For instance, if you do not want a linked object to be synchronized, click the Activate/Deactivate button: the "Activate" status
of the linked object changes to "Deactivated" which means that it will not be impacted by the changes made to the parent
element when performing an update.
Inversely, if you want a deactivated linked element to be synchronized during a part update, click the Activate/Deactivate
button: the status of the linked element changes to "Activated" and you will be able to synchronize it.

Note that this command is also available from the contextual menu by right-clicking the object to be activated/deactivated then
selecting xxx object > Activate or xxx object > Deactivate
● the Isolate button lets you remove a link. The status of the linked element changes to "Isolated" to indicate that the link to the
pointed element is broken. This means that the pointed element cannot be synchronized anymore.

Note that this command is also available from the contextual menu by right-clicking the object to be isolated then selecting xxx
object > Isolate
● the Replace button lets you replace the selected link with another one. This button opens the File Selection dialog box to let
you navigate to the desired file. Once the element has been replaced, the new element name and its status are displayed in the
Links dialog box.

Note that when working with .catalog documents, this functionality is relevant only for replacing a link from one catalog
to another. You cannot use the Replace button to replace a link to a part pointed to by a catalog, for instance.
If you want to replace the link to a part or a product pointed to by a catalog, you need to modify the catalog description.
For more information, refer to "Creating a Catalog Using the Catalog Editor (paragraph entitled "Adding a Component to a
Family") in the Version 5 - Component Catalog Editor User's Guide

● the Change Publication button lets you replace the pointed publication by a new one. Clicking this button closes the Links
dialog box so that you can select the new publication to be used, either in the geometry area or in the specification tree.
If the publication you select is not valid, then the selection is stopped and a message appears in the status bar to explain why
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 795
the publication is not valid.
Once the new publication is selected, the information displayed in the To element, Pointed document and Publication columns is
modified accordingly. Do not forget that an update will also be required.

To be able to use the Change Publication button, the following three conditions must be fulfilled:

● only one link must be selected in the Links dialog box

● the selected link must correspond to a link between two references without any context notion (e.g. a link bewteen
two parts)
● the selected link must be a link to a publication.

For information on how to publish elements, refer to "Publishing Elements" in the Version 5 - Part Design User's Guide.

Depending on the document environments you allowed in the Document tab, an additional window may appear simultaneously to
the File Selection dialog box to let you access your documents using alternate methods.
For detailed information, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window.

The Refresh button lets you update links related to the document without having to close then reopen the Links dialog box.
This is especially useful when trying to re-access pointed documents that are not found (for instance, after a network
disconnection): in that case, clicking the Refresh button avoids re-selecting Edit > Links to display an updated view of the links.

11. Access the Pointed documents tab which also enables you to edit links but this time, you manage a list of documents and not a list

of links:

● the Replace button lets you replace a pointed document with another one and reroute any links that may exist to this
document.
To do so, select the pointed document to be replaced from the list, click the Replace button to open the File Selection dialog
box, navigate to the desired file then click Open: the selected file opens and the links from all pointing documents loaded in
session are rerouted to the replacing document. Pointing documents which are not loaded in session still point to the replaced
document.
If a problem occurs during the replacement, a diagnosis window is displayed.

However, bear in mind that a replacement needs to be performed under certain conditions to succeed:

● the names of the replaced document and of the replacing one must be different
● the links to the replacing document must allow the replacement, i.e. they can be modified to match the path of the
replacing document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 796
Ddo not forget that the replaced and replacing documents must have the same internal identifier (UUID), which means
that the replacing document must have been created as a copy of the original document using File > Save As.
Otherwise, an error message is displayed.
However, note that this do not apply to links between two references (e.g. a link between two parts) based on
publications.

More about the Replace button:

● If you are working with a standalone CATIA V5 and try to replace a file-based .CATPart document with another file-
based .CATPart document having a different UUID, an error message is displayed to indicate that the link is refused
● If you are working in an ENOVIA V5 document environment and try to replace a file-based .CATPart document with
another .CATPart document having a different UUID and saved in ENOVIA V5, an error message is displayed to
indicate that the referenced instances cannot be found in the new document.

● the Find button is relevant for broken links only: clicking this button opens the File Selection dialog box to let you browse your
file system and find the missing files.

Note: depending on the document environments you allowed in the Document tab, an additional window might appear
simultaneously to the File Selection dialog box let you access your documents using an alternate method. For detailed information,
refer to Opening Existing Documents using the Browse Window.

● the Load button lets you load pointed documents which have been found but not loaded in your current session

● the Open button lets you open a pointed document in a new window. To do so, select the document to be opened from the list
then click Open.

You can also open a pointed document using xxx object > Open the Pointed Document contextual command.
For detailed information on this command, refer to Opening Existing Documents.

As far as temporary documents are concerned, you cannot open them in a new window. For instance, you cannot open in
a new CATIA V5 window a Product Root Class created in ENOVIA V5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 797

Running Batches

Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor

Running the Data CATDUAV5 Batch
Running the Print Batch
Running the Downward Compatibility Batch
Running the Data Life Cycle Batch
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 798

Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor

This task shows you how to run and use the CATUTIL functionality which lets you either open the Batch Monitor providing
the list of available batches, or access a specific batch interface or run a batch directly from the command line.
Note that this functionality is available on both Windows and UNIX.

Bear in mind that:

● the Batch Monitor does not run within the Version 5 process, whether it is accessed from a Version 5 session or from the
command line. The Batch Monitor is a standalone process which means that it remains open after closing your Version 5
session
● batches can also be submitted for execution on a remote computer, on both Windows and UNIX. Refer to Running Batches
in Remote Mode.

● you must not run batches using the root userid on UNIX (if you do so, the batch returns an error code 45).

The four different methods you can use to run CATUTIL are detailed below:

Method 1: Accessing the desired batch interface

On Windows

a. Open a command prompt (MS-DOS) window.

b. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product:

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\code\bin

c. Enter the command:

CATUTIL -Name batch_name

(for instance CATUTIL -Name PrintBatch)

The corresponding batch interface opens.

On UNIX

a. Change to the directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS_a/code/command/

b. Run the command:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 799
./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name batch_name"

Method 2: Running a batch from the command line

On Windows

a. Open a command prompt (MS-DOS) Window.

b. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\OS_a\code\bin

(where n is the current release number)

c. Still in the default folder, enter the command:

CATUTIL -Name batch_name name_of_xml_file.xml

(for instance CATUTIL -Name PrintBatch MyBatch.xml)

The batch executes.

Two reports (one in .txt format and one in .xml format) are generated with the name batchID.txt and batchID.xml
where "batchID" is the number identifying the batch.
These two files are saved by default in c:\temp\batchID.
However, you can modify the default storage location by exporting the following variable:

set BATCH_HOME=new_path

where "new_path" is the path of the new storage location.

On UNIX

a. Change to the installation folder.

b. Enter the following command:

./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name batch_name name_of_xml_file.xml"

Two reports (one in .txt format and one in .xml format) are generated with the name batchID.txt and batchID.xml
where "batchID" is the number identifying the batch.
These two files are saved by default in /temp/batchID.
However, you can modify the default storage location by exporting the following variable:

export BATCH_HOME=new_path

where "new_path" is the path of the new storage location.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 800

Method 3: Accessing the Batch Monitor from the command line

On Windows

a. Open a command prompt (MS-DOS) Window.

b. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\BnOS_a\code\bin

(where n is the current release number)

c. Still in the default folder, enter the command:

CATUTIL

The Batch Monitor window opens.

On UNIX

a. Change to the installation folder.

b. Enter the following command:

./catstart -run CATUTIL

The Batch Monitor window opens.

Method 4: Accessing the Batch Monitor from a Version 5 session

a. Start a Version 5 session.

b. Select Tools > Utility.

The Batch Monitor window opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 801

A list of Version 5 batches along with their description is displayed in the Type column.
This list varies according to the licenses you set up during installation:

● ABFBatchExReport: lets you generate all types of report files (report, flat report, export). Refer to the
Version 5 - Automotive Body In White Fastening User's Guide - "Reporting Using CATUTIL"
● AnalysisUpdateBatch: lets you update and compute a CATAnalysis document.

Refer to the Version 5 - Generative Structural Analysis User's Guide - "Computing Using a Batch"
● Batch-DXF-IGES-STEP: lets you exchange data between Version 5 and DXF, IGES/STEP. Refer to the Version
5 - Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide - "STEP/3D IGES Batch Processing"
● CATAsmUpgradeBatch: lets you reduce the amount of memory required for an assembly in specific scenarios.
Refer to the Version 5 - Assembly Design User's Guide - "Data Upgrade for Large Assemblies Performances"
● CATDMUBuilder: lets you build CATProducts using given product structures and feed the cache with these
product structures. Refer to the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide - "Running the CATDMUBuilder Batch
Process"
● CATDMUUtility: lets you generate cgr, 3dmap, hcg, wrl and NCGM formats from a CATIA file or from a
MULTICAD file. Refer to the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide - "Running the CATDMUUtility Batch
Process"
● CATDUAV5: lets you use the CATIA Version Data Upward Assistant allowing you to have a support for CATIA
level changes, to make a diagnostic, and eventually a healing of CATIA Version 5 data. Refer to "Using
CATDUAV5 Batch" in this guide
● Data Life Cycle: provides a user interface and capabilities common to all batches dealing with data life cycle,
i.e. CATDUAV5, Downward Compatibility and Extract Model From Sequential. Refer to "Running the Data Life
Cycle Batch" in this guide
● DownwardCompatibility: lets you reuse Version 5 data from one release to another. Refer to "Running the
Version 5 Compatibility Batch" in this guide
● ExtractModelFromSequential: lets you extract CATIA Version 4 models from CATIA Version 4 sequential
files. Refer to the Version 5 - V4 Integration User's Guide - "Extract Version 4 Models from Sequential Files in
Batch Mode"
● MigrateV4ToV5: lets you convert CATIA Version 4 models into CATIA Version 5 models. Refer to the Version 5
- V4 Integration User's Guide - "How to Launch the V4 To V5 Migration Batch: via the Batch Monitor"
● PrintBatch: lets you print your documents without running Version 5. Refer to "Printing in Batch Mode" in this
guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 802

● UpdateBatch: lets you update a list of CATDrawing documents. Refer to the Version 5 - Generative Drafting
User's Guide - "Updating Drawings via the Batch Monitor"

Getting Help
You cannot use the F1 key to access contextual help. The methods available for displaying the online
documentation are detailed below:

Selecting Help > Batch Monitor Help lets you access the general online documentation on the Batch Monitor.
This menu item is available in all tabs, i.e. Utilities, Start and Processes. Note that in the Utilities tab, the
Batch Monitor Help command opens the general documentation if no batch is selected in the list.

When a batch is selected in the Utilities tab, you can use the Batch Monitor Help contextual command or select
Help > Batch Monitor Help to open the batch-specific online documentation.
This batch-specific documentation can also be accessed when clicking the icon in the top-right corner (on
Windows) or the Help button (on UNIX) in the corresponding batch interface.

However, when accessing the online documentation from the batch monitor, the framed layout containing the
Home Page, Full-Text Search, Workbench Indexes, Automation, Conventions and Copyrights buttons is not
available.

At this point, you can either run the batch directly (provided that you already defined all the necessary data in the
corresponding XML file) or you may need to define the batch parameters before running the batch (if this is the first time you
are using the batch monitor).

Running the batch directly from the Batch Monitor

If you already have an XML file containing all the necessary inputs, there is no need for you to define the batch
parameters and you can run the batch directly by associating this XML file to the batch to be run. To do so:

1. In the Utilities tab, click the batch then select File > Associate a parameter file (or right-click the batch then select

Associate a parameter file), navigate to the folder in which you saved the XML file then click Open to validate.

If you set the DLName environment as "Current" in Tools > Options > General > Document, the usual File
Selection dialog box is replaced by the following one dedicated to the DLName environment:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 803

The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names
referred to as "DLNames" (each folder is assigned a logical name).
In this mode, the different file opening and saving commands only allow end users to access documents in
directories referenced by DLNames.

The File Selection dialog box displayed above lets you navigate to the DLName in which the parameter file to be

used is stored. You can also search for DLNames using a specific interface by clicking the button.
For detailed information on how to use this dialog box, refer to the Document task.

Click OK when finished selecting your documents.

2. Access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the XML file you associated to the batch:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 804

3. Select File > Run (or right-click the batch to run then select Run): the batch execution starts.

Note: you can instantiate another batch while the current batch is running.
The Start tab also lets you delete a batch from the list by selecting it from the list then selecting Edit > Delete (or
by right-clicking then selecting Delete).

4. Access the Processes tab to get some information on the batch execution (click the thumbnail below to see the full-

size picture):

The following batch-related information are displayed:

● name of the batch

● name of the parameter file used to run the batch
● status of the batch ("Ended", etc.)
● start and end time, respectively in the "Beginning at" and "Ending at" columns
● return code: "0" means that the batch executed correctly, "1" means that an error occurred
● result of the batch execution (either "Succeeded" or "Failed")
● batch identification number.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 805
The Processes tab also lets you interrupt the batch execution. To do so, right-click the desired batch in the list
then select Interrupt.

Note: selecting Interrupt on UNIX generates an abnormal end. Ignore it.

You can also delete a batch from the list by right-clicking the corresponding line then selecting Delete.

5. To display the report of the batch execution, double-click the desired batch in the list to open the Results window:

This window indicates the beginning and end date and time of the batch execution as well as the name and path of
the documents that have been processed.

You can then:

● click the Save button to save your results (i.e. the data displayed in the Results window) in the folder of your
choice. The file formats available are .txt and .xml
● click the Close button to close the window and go back to the Batch Monitor.

6. Select File > Exit to exit the Batch Monitor.

Defining the batch parameters

1. Double-click the batch to run from the list. This opens the corresponding batch interface, as shown below with

PrintBatch as an example:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 806

You can also access the batch interface by:

● right-clicking the desired batch then selecting New parameter file

● or selecting the batch from the list then File > New parameter filed.

2. Set the batch parameters as explained in the corresponding documentation.

In our example, the following parameters have been defined:

3. Click the Licensing Setup... button and select a license authorizing the use of the batch you want to run.

If you run a batch without previously selecting a license, the system reads the License.CATSettings file and tries to

run the batch with the licenses found in this file.

Because this file does not contain the licenses acquired in Tools > Options > General > Shareable Products, if

the batch monitor was started using Tools > Options > Utilities, the batch will not acquire any licenses of this

type.

If you do not succeed in running the batch due to a licensing problem, click the Licensing Setup... button and

select a license from the list.

When you click on this button, the system searches for both nodelock licenses installed on your computer and

network licenses accessible from your computer and displays the list of licenses found. The list displayed contains

the same licenses visible in Tools > Options > Licensing.

Then, select the appropriate license from the list.

The license is only acquired temporarily for the duration of the batch execution.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 807

4. Click the Save button then navigate to save your XML file in the desired location.

Of course, the content of this XML file varies according to the batch you run since it contains the values you set for

the parameters displayed in the batch interface.

Once saved, this file can be edited manually and used later on to run the batch directly without having to re-access

the batch interface.

You can now either click Run to run the batch from the interface of the selected batch or click Cancel to close the

batch window and go back to the Batch Monitor window (if you want to start other batches for instance).

5. In the Batch Monitor window, access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the XML file

containing the batch parameters you defined in step 5 (as well as the name of the host computer if you run the batch

in remote mode):

6. If you did not run the batch at step 5, select File> Run (or right-click the batch to run then select Run): the batch

executes.

Note: the Start tab lets you instantiate another batch while the current batch is running. It also lets you delete a
batch from the list by selecting it from the list then choosing Edit > Delete command (or by right-clicking then
selecting Delete).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 808

7. Access the Processes tab to get some information on the batch execution:

The following batch-related information is displayed:

● name of the batch

● name of the parameter file used to run the batch
● name on the host computer (if you run the batch on a remote computer)
● status of the batch ("Ended", "Running", etc.)
● feedback on the batch completion in the "Progress" column. "100%" is displayed when the batch is ended
● start and end time, respectively in the "Beginning at" and "Ending at" columns
● return code: "0" means that the batch executed correctly, "1" means that an error occurred
● result of the batch execution (either "Succeeded" or "Failed")
● batch identification number.

The Processes tab also lets you interrupt the batch execution. To do so, right-click the desired batch from the list
then select Interrupt.
You can also delete a batch from the list by right-clicking the corresponding line then selecting Delete.

8. To display the report of the batch execution, double-click the desired batch in the list to open the Results window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 809
This window indicates the beginning and end date and time of the batch execution as well as the name and path of
the documents that have been processed.

You can then:

● click the Save button to save your results in the folder of your choice. The file formats available are .txt and
.xml.
Note that this file is different from the one you save from the batch interface: the Save button in the Batch
Monitor window lets you save the batch results (i.e. the data displayed in the Results window displayed
above) whereas the Save button available in the batch interface lets you save the batch parameters.
● click the Close button to close the window and go back to the Batch Monitor window.

9. Select File > Exit to exit the Batch Monitor.

Running Batches in Remote Mode

You have already learnt how to run batches on your local machine.

However, certain batches are CPU-intensive, so in certain cases it may be advisable to distribute batch processing to optimize
CPU time on the local machine. The batch monitor lets you submit certain batches on remote machines accessible on your
network.

Two implementations for remote batch execution are supported:

● with the first implementation, the batch monitor requires no external software as a prerequisite since it can work using
the communications backbone packaged with the core Version 5 software
● if you install and configure the IBM MQSeries Version 5.2 product, you will be able to run and monitor batches on a
remote computers using both the batch monitor and the MQSeries command line syntax.

This section concentrates on running remote batches using the batch monitor.

For full details about the administration tasks involved in setting up both the local and remote machines using both
implementations, refer to Setting Up Batch Monitoring Using the Communications Backbone and MQSeries in your
Infrastructure Installation Guide.

Documents containing links to other documents (for example, CATProducts) cannot be processed in remote batch mode.

Using the Communications Backbone

1. Log onto the remote machine on which you want to run the batch.

2. Start the server monitor as follows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 810

On Windows

1. Open a Command Prompt window and go to the following Version 5 installation folder, for example:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\code\bin

2. Run the command:

catstart -run "CATBatSrvMonitorExe BB"

A message will confirm that the BB service has been started.

On UNIX

1. Open a window and go to the following Version 5 installation folder, for example:
/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/os_a/code/command

where "OS_a" is:

❍ aix_a
❍ hpux_b
❍ irix_a
❍ solaris_a.
2. Run the command:
catstart -run "CATBatSrvMonitorExe BB"

3. Log onto the local machine and start a Version 5 session.

4. Select the Tools > Utility to access the Batch Monitor.

5. Select a batch which can be run on a remote machine (for example, the Downward Compatibility batch) by double-

clicking it in the list.

As is the case for all batch dialog boxes supporting remote batch execution, the dialog box contains the following
area:

By default, the "Run Local" option is active.

6. Check the "Run Remote" option and enter the hostname of the remote machine on which you started the server

monitor:

7. Click the Licensing Setup... button.

If the following error message occurs:

Client Batch Monitor ERROR : cannot connect to xxxx

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 811

it is due to one of the following causes:

● the remote machine "xxxx" to which you are trying to connect does not exist
● the server monitor was not started on the remote machine "xxxx".

The list of licenses installed on or accessible to the remote machine is displayed:

It is essential to understand that the list of licenses comes from the remote machine.

8. Select a license and click OK:

If you run the batch without selecting a license using the Licensing Setup… button, the software uses the
Licensing.CATSettings file located on the local machine, transmits the license requests to the remote machine,
and tries to locate the license on the remote machine.

If no license is found, it will try to locate and use a nodelock license on the remote machine.

9. Submit the batch.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 812
Using IBM MQSeries

Using IBM MQSeries for running batches is more complicated than using the communications backbone, as far as setting the
product up is concerned.

On the local machine from which you submit the batch for remote execution:

● you need the Version 5 core software

● the local machine must be configured as an MQSeries client
● and the remote machine must be configured as an MQSeries server
● the server monitor must be started on the remote machine
● and a variable must be exported on the local machine before starting Version 5.

1. Once all the IBM MQSeries setup tasks on both the client and server have been performed (including starting the

server monitor as was the case for the communications backbone) log onto the local machine.

2. Export the following variable on the client:

CATBATCHMQ=1

to specify that you are using the MQSeries communications driver.

3. Start a Version 5 session.

4. Select Tools > Utility to access the Batch Monitor.

From here onwards, you submit remote batches in exactly the same way as described above for the

communications backbone.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 813

Running the Downward Compatibility Batch

This task aims at explaining how to use the Version 5 Downward Compatibility Batch. This batch provides downward compatibility
between the most recent release (including service packs) down to V5R6, which means that Version 5 data can be reused from
one release to another.

You can process file documents, CATIA-type documents stored in ENOVIA LCA and, only when working on UNIX, CATIA-type
documents stored in ENOVIAVPM.

This scenario explains how to:

● access the Downward Compatibility interface

● define your batch parameters

● run the batch from the command line

● run the batch from the Batch Monitor

● run the batch from the command line via the Batch Monitor.

Bear in mind that downward compatibility is relevant for .CATPart documents only.

If you select a CATPart document, the PartBody is copied and pasted AsResultWithLink to the target document.
Open Bodies are not converted as a whole. Only the feature defined as an external view in the Generative Shape Design
workbench is copied and pasted AsResultWithLink to the target document.

Accessing the Downward Compatibility interface

Method 1: Accessing the batch interface from the command line

1. Open an MS-DOS Window.

2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\code\bin (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/code/command/ (on UNIX)

(where "n" is the current release number)

Before running the batch, make sure that your environment is correctly set up:

● on Windows, the batch environment is installed during Version 5 installation

● on UNIX, you have to set up this environment before running a session. For more information, refer to Starting a
Session on UNIX.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 814
3. Enter the following command:

CNEXT -batch -e CATUIDownwardCompatibility

The CATIA V5 Downward Compatibility Batch window opens:

Method 2: Accessing the batch interface from the Batch Monitor

You can also run the Downward Compatibility Batch using the Batch Monitor which lets you access a specific batch interface or run
a batch directly from the command line.

In that case, an additional area is displayed at the bottom of the window to let you select a license using the Licensing Setup...
button.

The batch-specific online documentation can be accessed directly from the batch interface by clicking the icon in the top right
corner (on Windows) or the Help button (on UNIX).

Defining the batch parameters

In this scenario, we assume that the Downward Compatibility interface has been accessed using Method 1 detailed above.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 815

Selected Operation

1. Select the action to be performed from the list (where you see "Convert" right now):

Convert

Converts a document into a format which can be read on the target release.
For each selected document, the Report informs you about the process (i.e. converted or not) and the result (i.e.
success or failure).

Note that there are particular cases when selecting the documents to be converted:

Case 1

The document to be converted is already a conversion of another document. In that case, it is recommended to select
rather the father document than the converted document to avoid the conversion of a converted document:

● if the father document is accessible and readable, the selection of the child document cannot be performed. A pop-
up warning is displayed to prompt you to select the father document instead.

You cannot force the conversion of the child document, unless the father document is removed or renamed.

● if the father document can be neither accessed nor read (release posterior to the execution release), a pop-up
warning informs you that the document is already a converted document.

However, the selection is accepted and the document will be considered as any other document. The
converted document will then point to the father document and not to the original document.
In the Report window, you will be informed that the document is already a converted document and the
status of the father document (name, availability and minimum release to be read) will be indicated.

Case 2

● If the pointed document cannot be found (or has been removed), it is displayed as being selected.
The Report window informs you that the document cannot be accessed
● If a selected or pointed document is not readable in the execution release, it is selected. The Report window informs
you that the document is unreadable and gives you the minimum release to read the document.

In case a selected document cannot be converted, a pop-up warning is displayed to explain why the conversion cannot

be performed. You just have to re-select the document in the Document Selection area then click the button. The
selected document and all its related files will be removed from the list, provided that these related files are not linked
to another document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 816

Synchronize

Synchronizes a document. This action is relevant for converted documents whose original documents have been
modified.
Selecting this option deactivates the incompatible fields which are Target Directory (since documents are written in the
same location after synchronization) and the field indicating the target version.
For each selected document, the Report window gives you information about the process (i.e. synchronized or not) and
the result (i.e. success or failure).

Note that there are particular cases when selecting documents to be synchronized:

Case 1

The document to be synchronized is not a converted image of another document: in that case, a pop-up warning is
displayed to indicate that the selection cannot be performed.

Case 2

The document to be converted is already a converted image:

● if the father document is accessible and readable, the selection can be performed. The father document is not
displayed in the list of pointed documents
● if the father document is not accessible, the selection cannot be performed and a pop-up
warning is displayed.

All pointed documents (except the father document) are displayed in the list of documents to be synchronized, whether
they are converted images, accessible, readable in the execution release or not. The Report window indicates the status
of each document.

Info

Provides general information about the document.

Selecting this option deactivates the incompatible boxes which are Target Directory (no document is written when the
Info check box is selected) and the box indicating the target version.

For each document to be converted, the report indicates

● the minimum release version enabling the document to be read without any conversion
● if the document is already a converted image:
❍ the name of the father document along with its availability
❍ the minimum release version for reading the father document without conversion.

When swapping from one action to another, do not forget that the selected documents must comply to the selection
rules of the new action.

2. Select the CATIA V5 release to which the documents will be converted: CATIAV5R6, CATIAV5R7, CATIAV5R8, and so on.

This list can be accessed in Convert action only, otherwise it is grayed out.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 817

Document Selection

3. Use the Document Location list to select the type of documents to be processed: either File, ENOVIAVPM or ENOVIA

LCA.

4. Still in the Document Selection area, click the button to select the documents to be converted.

Each document type is associated to a specific search interface:

File

When searching for File documents with the Convert action selected, the search is performed via the File Selection
dialog box:

If the Synchronize action is selected, the File Selection dialog box slightly differs because this action does not require
as many data as the Convert action:

If the Info action is selected, the File Selection dialog box slightly differs because this action does not require as many
data as the Convert action:

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Searching for File Documents.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 818

ENOVIA V5

When searching for ENOVIA V5 documents, the search is performed via the Search Documents in ENOVIA LCA dialog
box:

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Searching for Documents in ENOVIA LCA.

ENOVIAVPM (UNIX only)

When searching for ENOVIAVPM documents, the search is performed via the Search Documents in ENOVIAVPM
dialog box:

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Searching for Documents in ENOVIAVPM.

This scenario takes the File document location as an example.

5. Enter your search criteria in the search dialog box.

Once documents have been selected, their names are displayed in the Name list as shown below:

When working with File documents, note that the former Pointed document option allowing to convert all the

documents pointed to by the document to be converted has been replaced by the Select pointed documents option

available in the File Selection dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 819

If you change your mind afterwards and decide not to process one or several documents displayed in the Name list,

select them (you can use the multi-selection) then click the button to remove the documents from the list.
As long as no document is selected, the button is grayed out.

Output

6. In the Target Directory box, key in the output directory or DLName or, click the button to navigate through the file
tree to the desired directory.

This field is mandatory and is initialized with the current or temporary directory by default.

If you set the DLName environment as "Current" in Tools > Options > General > Document tab, the usual File
Selection dialog box is replaced by the following one:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 820
The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names referred
to as "DLNames" (each folder is assigned a logical name).
In this mode, the different file opening and saving commands only allow end users to access documents in directories
referenced by DLNames.

DLNames are identified by the string CATDLN://, for instance "CATDLN://DLNAME3".

Use the Look in: list to select the root DLName in which you want to navigate. The sub-folders (if any) stored in the
selected root DLName are then displayed in the DLName list below and you can choose a DLName in list: the selected
DLName is displayed in the "Selected DLName" field and will be set as the target directory.

Note that once you are in a sub-folder, you can re-access the upper level by clicking the button.

You can also click the icon to access the Search Results dialog box which lets you search for DLNames using a
specific interface.

Once you have found the desired DLName, click OK to validate.

7. Enter the name of report in the Report Name box. By default, the report is named "GlobalResults".

For each processed document, the batch creates a document report in the target directory. By default, the name of the

report is the name of the document suffixed with ".htm". You can change this default name by suffixing the document

report name with the string of your choice. To do so, enter the string to be added at the end of the name in the Append

String to Document Report box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 821

8. Click the Execute button to run the batch. In case one of the above boxes is not correctly filled, the Execute button is

grayed out.

The completion is indicated by the progress bar at the bottom of the dialog box (when no batch is running, the prograss

bar is identified as "Inactive"):

Note that when you access the Downward Compatibility batch interface via the Batch Monitor, there is no progress bar.

Once the conversion is over, the Report window opens.

The report indicates if each of the selected documents has been processed or not along with the result (success or
failure).
The report contains only text and cannot reference images, URL links, etc.

At the end of the report, one of the following return codes will be displayed:

● ReturnCode = 0 the batch ended successfully

● ReturnCode = 4 at least one document could not be processed

● ReturnCode = 8 the batch aborted.

To save the report, click the Save As Text button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 822
In case you want to modify your conversion parameters, you must close the Report window first then run the batch
once again.

9. Exit the Report window by clicking the cross in the top right corner or the OK button.

10. To display an HTML version of the report, click the Open HTML Report button. This button is activated only once a
report has been generated, otherwise it is grayed out.

However, you can still use the former method to visualize the report, i.e. open the HTML file from the directory in which
it has been saved.

Running the batch from the command line

This scenario shows you how to run the Downward Compatibility batch without accessing the batch interface.

1. Open an MS-DOS Window.

2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\code\bin (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/code/command/ (on UNIX)

(where "n" is the current release number)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 823
Before running the batch, make sure that your environment is correctly set up:

● on Windows, the batch environment is installed during Version 5 installation

● on UNIX, you have to set up this environment before running a session. For more information, refer to Starting a
Session on UNIX.

3. Enter the following command:

CATDownwardCompatibility -arg

CATDownwardCompatibility [-h / -id inputDirectory [-if inputfile/-il inputlist] -od outputDirectory -action
[Convert/Synchro/Info] -version CATIAV5Rn -report reportFile.txt]

Authorized arguments are detailed below:

Argument Description

-h Online help

Writes in the standard output the list of valid arguments.

CATDownwardCompatibility [-h / -id inputDirectory [-if inputfile /

-il inputlist] -od outputDirectory -report reportFile

● -h: help
● -id: input directory or DLNAME
● -if: input file containing a list of documents to process
● -il: input list of documents to process. (-if or -il argument is mandatory)
● -action: this argument is mandatory. Requests an action such as
❍ "Convert": converts a document to a document readable in the version defined in -
version argument
❍ "Synchro": synchronizes a converted document with the original file
❍ "Info": gives information on the selected members

● -version: targeted Version 5 version is mandatory for "Convert" action (not used in
"Synchro" and "Info" action modes)
● -od: output directory or DLNAME is mandatory for "Convert" action (not used in "Synchro"
and "Info" action modes)
● -report: report file name.

-id Input Directory

Defines the path name or the DLNAME containing the documents to process.

This argument is optional. It is useful if all the documents are extracted from the same
directory.

-if Selection Criterion

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 824

Input file containing a list of documents to process with the appropriate file name extension.
If a document is a concatenation of path (or DLNAME) and name, the input directory is ignored.

At least one of the (-id/-if) arguments is mandatory, (-id/-if) arguments can be defined several
times.

The batch aborts if no selection criterion is defined.

-il Selection Criterion

Input list of documents to process with the appropriate file name extension.
If a document is a concatenation of path (or DLNAME) and name, the input directory is ignored.

At least one of the (-id/-if) arguments is mandatory, (-id/-if) arguments can be defined several
times.

The batch aborts if no selection criterion is defined.

-od Output Directory

Defines the pathname or the DLNAME where the converted documents are written.

This argument is mandatory for "Convert" action. The batch aborts if no output directory is
defined.

-action Requested Action

The action can be:

● "Convert": Converts a document into a format which can be read on the target release
● "Synchro": Synchronizes a converted document with the original file
● "Info": Gives information on the selected members.

This argument is mandatory. The batch aborts if no action is defined.

-version Targeted CATIA version for the "Convert" action

This argument is mandatory for "Convert" action. The batch aborts if no version is defined.

-report Report Filename

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 825

Lets you save the "report" in the desired file and directory. This report provides the following
information on the processed documents:
● name of the processed document
● corresponding return code:
❍ ReturnCode = 0 the batch ended successfully
❍ ReturnCode = 4 at least one document could not be processed
❍ ReturnCode = 8 the batch aborted.

The report file can be a concatenation of path (or DLNAME) and name. It is automatically
suffixed with ".txt".

This argument is optional. If no report file is defined, the report is written in the standard
output.

Running the batch directly from the Batch Monitor

If you already have an XML file containing all the necessary inputs, there is no need for you to access the Downward Compatibility
batch interface to define the batch parameters and you can run the batch directly. To do so:

1. Access the Batch Monitor by selecting Tools > Utility in your Version 5 session.

Note that you can also access the Batch Monitor from the command line.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 826

2. In the Utilities tab, click "DownwardCompatibility" then select File > Associate a parameter file (or right-click the batch

name then select Associate a parameter file).

Note that if you set the DLName environment as "Current" in Tools > Options > General > Document, the usual File
Selection dialog box is replaced by the following one dedicated to the DLName environment:

The File Selection dialog box displayed above lets you navigate to the DLName in which the parameter file to be used
is stored.
For detailed information on how to use this dialog box, refer to the Document task.

3. Navigate to the directory in which you saved the XML file then click Open to validate.

4. Access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the XML file you associated to the batch.

Note that you can associate several parameter files in order to create a list of batches that you can run later on when

needed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 827

5. Still in the Start tab, right-click the file associated to the batch you want to run then select Run.

Note that if you run the Downward Compatibility Batch via the Batch Monitor, the generated report looks slightly
different as shown below (this report can be accessed by double-clicking the desired line under the Processes tab):

Running the Downward Compatibility Batch via the Batch Monitor generates an XML file in a temporary folder. This file is
named "BatchParameters" suffixed with the hour at which the batch was run (for instance,
"BatchParameters_10.33.12.xml" to indicate that the batch was run at 10.33.12 AM).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 828

6. To save the XML file under another name and in another location by clicking the Save button.

You can then use this XML file to run the Downward Compatibility batch directly from the command line as explained
below.

7. Click Close to close the Results window and go back to the Batch Monitor.

Running the batch directly from the command line via the Batch
Monitor

If you already have an XML file containing all the necessary inputs, this file can be used later on to run the batch using the Batch
Monitor capability but without having to access the Downward Compatibility and the Batch Monitor interface.

1. Access the default folder

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\OS_a\code\bin (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/code/command/ (on UNIX)

where "n" is the current release number.

2. Run the following command:

CATUTIL -Name DownwardCompatibility xml_file (on Windows)

or

./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name DownwardCompatibility xml_file" (on UNIX)

where xml_file is the path and name of the XML parameter file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 829

Running the Data Life Cycle Batch

This task shows you how to run the Data Life Cycle batch. The main purpose of this batch is to provide a user interface and
capabilities common to migration batches, i.e. MigrateV4ToV5 and MigrateV5ToV4.

This scenario explains how to:

● access the Data Life Cycle interface

● define your batch parameters

● run a batch directly from the Batch Monitor

● run a batch directly from the command line.

You must first access the Data Life Cycle interface: to do so, you can use one of the methods detailed below.

Accessing the Data Life Cycle interface

Method 1: Accessing the Data Life Cycle interface from the command line
On Windows

a. Open a command prompt (MS-DOS) Window.

b. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\code\bin

(where n is the current release number)

c. Still in the default folder, enter the command:

CATUTIL -Name DataLifeCycle

The Data Life Cycle window opens.

On UNIX

a. Change to the installation folder.

b. Enter the following command:

./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name DataLifeCycle"

The Data Life Cycle window opens.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 830

Method 2: Accessing the Batch Monitor from the command line

On Windows

a. Open a command prompt (MS-DOS) Window.

b. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\code\bin

(where n is the current release number)

c. Still in the default folder, enter the command:

CATUTIL

The Batch Monitor window opens.

On UNIX

a. Change to the installation folder.

b. Enter the following command:

./catstart -run CATUTIL

The Batch Monitor window opens.

Method 3: Accessing the Batch Monitor from a Version 5 session

a. Start a Version 5 session.

b. Select Tools > Utility.

The Batch Monitor window opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 831

A list of Version 5 batches along with their description is displayed in the Type column. For detailed information on
this list, refer to Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor.

At this point, you may need to define the batch parameters before running the batch or you run the batch directly
from the Batch Monitor of from the command line (provided that you already defined all the necessary data in the
corresponding XML file).

Defining the batch parameters

1. Double-click DataLifeCycle from the list to open the corresponding batch interface (click the thumbnail below to see

the full-size picture):

You can also access the batch interface by:

● right-clicking DataLifeCycle from the list then selecting New parameter file
● or selecting DataLifeCycle from the list then File > New parameter file.

The batch-specific online documentation can be accessed directly from the Data Life Cycle interface by clicking
the icon in the top right corner (on Windows) or the Help button (on UNIX).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 832

Document Selection

This area lets you select the documents to be processed in batch mode.

Note: you can still access the former File Selection dialog box instead by exporting the
DataLifeCycle_FileBoxR12=1 environment variable.

2. Use the Document Location list to select the type of documents to be processed:

● File or ENOVIA LCA (on Windows)

● File, ENOVIA LCA or ENOVIAVPM (on UNIX).

Bear in mind that appropriate licenses are required to be able to access documents in ENOVIA LCA and
ENOVIAVPM.
For instance, if you do not have the license required for using ENOVIA LCA, you will not be able to select the
ENOVIA LCA type.

The document search is made via a dedicated interface. For detailed information, refer to Searching for File
Documents or Searching for Documents in ENOVIAVPM or Searching for Documents in ENOVIA LCA.

If you change your mind afterwards and decide not to process one or several documents displayed in the list, select

them (you can use the multi-selection) then click the button to remove the documents from the list.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 833

Selected Operation

3. In the Selected Operation area, select the utilities you want to run from the Name list.

The two utilities available are MigrateV4ToV5 and MigrateV5ToV4 and this, whatever domain you select in the

Domain list: both utilities are always displayed.

You can use the multi-selection (press Ctrl) to make your choice.

Do not forget that only utilities that are highlighted in the list will be run.

Note: once the two utilities have been selected in the list, you can cancel a selection by clicking again the desired
utility or by selecting the other one. However, when only one utility is selected, you have to press Ctrl to cancel
the selection.

4. Depending on the selected utility, an additional dialog box is displayed to prompt you to enter the necessary data. For

instance, selecting MigrateV5ToV4 opens the following dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 834

Please read the corresponding documentation for detailed information on the available batches:

● MigrateV4ToV5: refer to "Converting CATIA Version 4 Models into CATIA Version 5 Models with the Data Life
Cycle Batch" in the Version 5 - V4 Integration User's Guide
● MigrateV5ToV4: refer to "V5/V4 File-Based Migration Batch" in the Version 5 - V4 Integration User's Guide.

5. Once the required data are entered, click OK to validate.

Output

6. Specify the target directory either by entering its path directly in the Target Directory box or by clicking the
button.

The Target Directory box contains the path of the directory in which the reports and, eventually, the processed

documents will be stored.

This field is mandatory to run the Data Life Cycle batch. By default, it is initialized with the current or temporary

directory, depending on your configuration and on the write access.

However, note that when searching for File documents, the directory specified in the Default target directory field

prevails.

As DLNames are supported, you can specify a DLName as target directory by entering the string CATDLN://
followed by the target DLNAME as shown below:

CATDLN://DLNAME2

or directly

DLNAME2

However, if you click the button, the DLName Chooser dialog box opens to let you navigate to the desired
DLName:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 835

Use the Look in list to select the root DLName in which you want to navigate. The sub-folders (if any) stored in the
selected root DLName are then displayed in the DLName list below and you can choose a DLName in list: the
selected DLName is displayed in the Selected DLName box and is set as the target directory.

Note that once you are in a sub-folder, you can re-access the upper level by clicking the button.

You can also click the icon to access the Search Results dialog box which lets you search for DLNames using a
specific interface.

Once you have found the desired DLName, click OK to validate.

7. Enter the name of report. By default, the report is named "GlobalResults" but you can enter another name if needed.

This report is a global report dealing with all the documents that have been processed.

In addition to this global report, the Data Life Cycle batch also creates a report for each processed document in the

target directory. By default, the name of the report is "name_of_the_document.htm".

You can change this default name by suffixing the document report name with the string of your choice. To do so,

enter the string to be added at the end of the name in the Append String to Document Report.

8. Click OK to validate.

When a batch has been run at least once or when you click the SAVE button, an XML file containing the batch

parameters is generated. In that case, you can reuse these parameters by right-clicking then selecting Read input

from parameter file:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 836

This opens the File Selection dialog box which lets you navigate to the desired XML file.
Note that you can also use DLNames to access your XML file. In that case, the File Selection dialog box will slightly
differ as explained in step 7.

Once the file has been selected, click OK to validate and close the dialog box.

The Data Life Cycle window is then updated and displays all the data contained in the parameter file.

The next step is not mandatory and concerns users who want to save the batch parameters in a location other than
the default one (which is in a temporary folder). This may be useful if you want to postpone the batch execution or
reuse these parameters later on, for instance.
If you do not want to save the batch parameters in a specific location, skip this step and jump to the next.

9. To save your batch parameters in a specific location, click Save.

A dialog box opens to let you enter a name for the XML file and choose the directory in which the file will be saved.

Click OK when finished to validate and close this dialog box.

10. Click the Licensing Setup... button to select a license authorizing the use of the batch you want to run. Refer to

Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor for detailed information on selecting licenses.

11. Click Run to start the batch execution.

After the batch execution, an XML file containing the batch parameters is generated in a temporary folder. This file
is named BatchParameters suffixed with the hour at which the batch was run (for instance,
BatchParameters_14.41.25.xml to indicate that the batch was run at 14.21.25 PM).

Some general information on the Data Life Cycle batch execution as well as a report containing the global results
of the batch are generated in the target directory you have previously specified.

12. To access information on the Data Life Cycle batch execution, click the Processes tab in the Batch Monitor window

(click the thumbnail below to see the full-size picture):

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 837
The following batch-related information is displayed:

● name of the batch

● name of the parameter file used to run the batch
● name on the host computer (if you run the batch on a remote computer)
● status of the batch ("Ended", "Running", etc.)
● feedback on the batch completion in the "Progress" column. "100%" is displayed when the batch is ended
● start and end time, respectively in the "Beginning at" and "Ending at" columns
● return code: "0" means that the batch executed correctly, "1" means that an error occurred
● result of the batch execution (either "Succeeded" or "Failed")
● batch identification number.

13. To display the results of the batch execution, double-click the line under the Processes tab:

The following information is displayed in the Results window:

● status of the batch execution

● path of the processed document(s). This path is the one you specified in the Target Directory box
● return code
● path of the html file (named "GlobalResults.htm") containing the global results of the batch execution.

Click Close when finished reading these results.

14. Click the Open HTML Report button to open directly the GlobalResults.htm file. This button is activated only
once a report has been generated, otherwise it is grayed out.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 838
However, you can still use the former method to visualize the report, i.e. open the result file from the directory in
which it has been saved.
Below is an example with the MigrateV5ToV4 batch:

Note that if a GlobalResults.htm file already exists, it is automatically replaced by the new one unless you specify a
new save location in the Target Directory box.

The GlobalResults.htm file contains a status for each processed document. You can click the hyperlinks (for
instance "OK" next to the name of the processed document) to display more data.
The report also displays information on the creation date and the creation version.
However, note that no information is available for linked documents and for documents created prior to V5R10.

For detailed information on report results specific to a batch, refer to the corresponding batch documentation.

Running a batch directly from the Batch Monitor

If you already have an XML file containing all the necessary inputs, there is no need for you to define the batch parameters
and you can run the batch directly. To do so:

1. In the Utilities tab, select the batch then File > Associate a parameter file (or right-click then select Associate a

parameter file).

2. Navigate to the directory in which you saved the XML file then click Open to validate.

3. Access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the XML file you associated to the batch.

Note that you can associate several parameter files in order to create a list of batches that you can run later when

needed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 839

4. Still in the Start tab, right-click the file associated to the batch you want to run then select Run.

Running the batch generates a report containing information on the batch execution and general data are also
displayed in the processes tab.
Refer to Defining the batch parameters above then repeat steps 12 to 14 to access the various data related to the
batch execution.

Running a batch directly from the command line

If you already have an XML file containing all the necessary inputs, this file can be used later on to run the batch using the
Batch Monitor capability but without having to access the Data Life Cycle interface.

1. Access the default folder

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\OS_a\code\bin (on Windows)

or

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/code/command/ (on UNIX)

(where n is the current release number)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 840

2. Run the following command:

CATUTIL -Name DataLifeCycle folder_of_xml_file (on Windows)

or

./catstart -run "CATUTIL -Name DataLifeCycle xml_file" (on UNIX)

where xml_file is the path and name of the BatchParameters_xxx.xml file.

Two reports (one in .txt format and one in .xml format) are generated and named batchID.txt and batchID.xml,
respectively, where batchID is the number identifying the batch.
These two files will be saved by default in c:\temp\batchID (on Windows) or /temp/batchID (on UNIX).
However, you can modify the default storage location by exporting the following variable:

set BATCH_HOME=new_path (on Windows)

or

export BATCH_HOME=new_path (on UNIX)

where new_path is the path of the new storage location.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 841

Working With Technological Packages

This section provides an overview of technological packages. If you need specific information regarding
the use of technological packages in the workbenches in which they are implemented, refer to the
corresponding workbench documentation.

"Technological package" is a new notion that enables you to group and manage design specifications as
well as DMU applicative data in order to save them in ENOVIA V5 VPM context.

Technological packages can be created in CATIA Version 5 products using ENOVIA V5-based resources.
However, they can be saved and deleted in ENOVIA V5 only.
This means that you need to be connected to the ENOVIA V5 database and have both a CATIA V5 and
ENOVIA V5 session running.

Each technological package is considered as a single entity and can contain the following elements:

● CATIA Version 5 product specifications

❍ parameters, formulas and rules
❍ tolerances and annotations
❍ etc.

● DMU applicative data

❍ groups
❍ measures
❍ etc.

A technological package is always linked to a product structure and therefore, it is not possible to
configure a technological package outside a product.

Technological Package Creation

Technological packages can be created under any product in Explode mode (i.e. Structure Exposed -
Document not kept).

How are technological packages created?

● Manually via Insert > New Technological Package. This command is available in all Knowledge
workbenches, in the DMU Navigator workbench and in the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation
workbench. For an example, refer to Creating a Technological Package

● Automatically:
❍ when no technological package exists: this is the case for instance when creating new data for the
first time in the Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench
❍ when using the Review command (in the DMU Navigator workbench), Knowledgeware capabilities
(Formulas, Parameters, Design Tables) or when entering the Knowledge Advisor workbench.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 842

You can create, display and manage in context several technological packages in the same product or in a
single CATIA Version 5 session or in sub-levels of the product that is currently open.
In all cases, the technological package is always created in the UI-active product.

When creating a technological package, you can specify:

● its name (optional). By default, the name is New

● its category: you can choose a predefined category according to the workbench in which you are
working. For instance, when working in the DMU Navigator workbench, you can choose between:
Default (the default category), Review and Design Intent
● its context.

As soon as a technological package is created, it is displayed as a node named "Technological Package"

preceded by its category in the specification tree:

This node will be made up of several sub-nodes, each sub-node corresponding to a type of data. The
example below shows a technological package into which a DMU Review (named "DMU Review.1") has
been created:

Note that there is no semantic relation between the category of a technological package and the data it
contains. For instance, a "DMU" technological package may contain or not DMU specifications AND other
data such as Knowledgeware rules:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 843

More than one technological package can be saved in a single structure (either a product or a PRC) with
the same name and the same properties. A technological package can therefore not be made unique in
the ENOVIA V5 database.

Technological Package Activation

To set a technological package as active, you need first to select in the specification tree the technological
package to be activated then right-click and select Set as current.

You can create as many technological packages as needed but bear in mind that only one can be set as
current, i.e. considered as active in the active product. Any new data will be created in the active
technological package.
The name of the active technological package is underlined in the specification tree ("Review - New" in our
example):

For an example, refer to Setting a Technological Package as Current.

Each time you set a new product as "active", one of the technological packages it contains (if any)
becomes active using the following process:
● if this is the first time, in the current CATIA Version 5 session, that this product is active, the first
technological package in the specification tree becomes active
● if the new active product has already been set as active during your CATIA Version 5 session, the
active technological package is the one that was last active.

Note that the active technological package is not a persistent data.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 844

In case no technological package exists, a new one is automatically created (without having to access the
Technological Package Creation dialog box) when creating data for the first time.

Technological Package Storage

All the data contained in a technological package are automatically saved when you do a save in ENOVIA
V5 VPM using the Save data in ENOVIA V5 command.

● File-based resources
Technological packages cannot be stored in a file-based environment.
Therefore, when opening a .CATProduct document in CATIA V5, only the technological packages that
have been selected in ENOVIA V5 then sent to CATIA V5 are loaded.
You cannot open a technological package on its own
● ENOVIA V5-based resources
Technological packages are stored as specific entities independently from the product.

About File>Desk... and Edit>Links...

The following table sums up the information displayed in the Desk or in the Links dialog box when working
in an ENOVIA V5-based environment:

File > Desk Edit > Links

Command

Environment

ENOVIA V5 The name and category of the ● Links from and to the technological package
(workpackage technological package are displayed are displayed
mode) but its links to other documents
appear as links of the .CATProduct ● If the pointed object is included in a
document in which the technological package:
technological package has been ❍ the technological package is displayed in
created the "Pointed document" column
❍ the Open button is grayed out
❍ the Load button is available and lets you
load the technological package into the
right product (if the product is in session)

ENOVIA V5 The name and category of the Same as above

(Explode technological package are displayed
mode) but not its links to other documents
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 845

Where To Find More Information?

More specific information on technological packages can be found in the following documentations:
● Version 5 - VPM Navigator User's Guide (on the ENOVIA V5 VPM/LCA Documentation CD-ROM)
● Version 5 - Infrastructure User's Guide (regarding the interoperability between Knowledgeware and
ENOVIA V5 VPM)
● Version 5 - 3D Functional Tolerancing and Annotation User's Guide
● Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide
● Version 5 - Generative Drafting User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 846

Advanced Tasks
Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX and Windows
Using Power Input Mode
Virtual Reality Configurations
Using and Customizing Fonts
Using Knowledgeware Capabilities
Using the Feature Dictionary Editor
Using the Data Upward Assistant (CATDUA V5)
Conferencing
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 847

Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX and Windows

About Setting Up Printers on UNIX and Windows
Adding a Printer
Removing a Printer
Configuring an Existing Printer
Testing the Printer
Customizing Print Driver Plug-Ins
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 848

About Setting Up Printers on UNIX and Windows

You can only print a document (by selecting either File > Print or Quick Print from the Standard
toolbar) if a default printer has been set up.
On Windows, you print using the default printer declared by your Windows system administrator.
However, on UNIX, you will only be able to print once you have set up a printer.

You can set up two types of printers:

● Windows Printers
● 3DPLM Printers.

Setting up a Windows printer creates a printer configuration file, needed for printing, in
$HOME/CATSettings/Printers.

Setting up a 3DPLM printer creates a configuration file containing the printer and the driver configuration
settings in $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.xml.

If you attempt to print on UNIX before setting up a printer, the following message appears:

The objective of this section is to show you how to set up your environment to get your printer operational,

which is performed by creating and customizing a file called a printer configuration file. The role of this file is to

declare your printer so it is recognized by Version 5. Once at least one printer has been declared, the above

message will no longer appear.

We assume that

● the physical printing device has been installed and connected to the system
● your system administrator has already declared your printer to your UNIX operating system.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 849

On both UNIX and Windows, the default printer is defined by selecting File > Printer Setup which opens the
Printers dialog box (note that the image below shows a Windows dialog box but the look on UNIX is more or
less the same):

This dialog box displays a list of available and installed printers. Note that if you are working on a UNIX
workstation, you will not be able to access Windows printers.

Double-clicking one of the printers displayed in the list will open the standard setup dialog box corresponding to
the selected printer type. Refer to your Windows documentation for detailed information about using this dialog
box.

On Windows, you can also double-click Add Printer at the top of the list to open the Add Printer Wizard dialog
box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 850

This dialog box enables you to choose between:

● Windows Printer: in that case, selecting this option then OK opens the Connect to Printer dialog box in
which you can select the Windows printer you wish to add
● 3D PLM Printer: this option lets you add printers provided by Dassault Systèmes. When clicking OK, the
Printer Properties dialog box is displayed to let you define the parameters for your new printer. Refer to
Adding a Printer for detailed information.

Once a printer has been added, it is displayed at the end of the list and is identified by a specific icon.

Refer to the following tasks in this section to learn more about adding, removing, configuring and testing a
printer.

If you want to set another printer as the default printer, select it from the list then right-click and select Set As

Default. The selected printer will be set as the default printer and identified by the following icon: .
However, keep in mind that on Windows, the default printer you set is kept throughout your current Version 5
session but not from one session to another. As soon as you exit then restart a new session, the printer set by
default is the one defined in Start > (Settings >) Control Panel > Printers.

You can also set up your printers without having to run a Version 5 session.
To do so:

On Windows
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 851

1. Open an MS-DOS window.

2. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

The default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bnintel_a\code\bin

where "n" is the current release number

3. Enter the command:

CATPrinterManager

On UNIX

1. Change to the directory:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/code/command/

where "n" is the current release number

2. Run the command

CATPrinterManager

The Printers dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 852

You can then set up your printers as explained above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 853

Adding a Printer

This tasks explains how to set up your printer on Windows and UNIX.

You can only print a document on UNIX if at least one printer has been set up using the File > Printer Setup... command.

1. Select File > Printer setup... to open the Printers dialog box then double-click Add Printer on top of the list.

If you are working on Windows, an additional dialog box named Add Printer Wizard opens:

This dialog box enables you to choose between:

● Windows Printer: in that case, selecting this option then OK opens the Connect to Printer dialog box in which you
will select the Windows printer you wish to add
● 3D PLM Printer: this option lets you add printers provided by Dassault Systèmes. When clicking OK, the Printer
Properties dialog box is displayed to let you define the parameters for your new printer.

Just click OK to access the Printer Properties dialog box.

If you are working on UNIX, the Printer Properties dialog box opens directly:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 854

The above capture takes a 3D PLM Printer as an example. If you add a Windows printer, the properties dialog box will
display standard setup parameters corresponding to the selected printer type. In that case, refer to your Windows
documentation for detailed information about using this dialog box.

2. Click the Driver button (on UNIX) or the black arrow (on Windows) and choose the appropriate driver for the printer.

Ask your system administrator which printers require which drivers. The list of available drivers is:

● PostScript
● HP-GL/2 RTL
● HP-GL
● HP DesignJet 1000 Series
● CGM Software
● CGM
● OCE
● Raster
● V5 Print Plugin Driver
● Windows Enhanced Metafile
● PDF

● SVG.

This list varies with your operating system. For instance, some of the above-mentioned drivers are not available on
UNIX.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 855

Note:

● SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is a language used for describing two-dimensional graphics in XML
(Extensible Markup Language) format. Three types of graphic objects can be read in this format:
vector graphic shapes, images and text.
SVG files can be visualized by external applications such as ADOBE products, JASC or BATIK.
For detailed information, browse the following Internet site:

http://www.w3c.org

● CGM Software is intended for viewing applications but bear in mind that some restrictions apply such as: pixel
images are not supported, the image size is fixed, polylines are converted into polybeziers (provided that their curves
can be modified).

3. In the Paper Format box, set the desired paper format options: default and maximum paper size, margins and orientation

(portrait or landscape).

4. In the Submission Scripts box, set the desired options activated when the print job is submitted.

This box lets you specify:

● the default output file name: each time you print a document, an output file is created at the location you specify in
the text field
● the default queue name: this field lets you choose which print queue to send the print job to.

The Custom options let you specify the location of your own submission scripts. Clicking these buttons activates the
Edit Script... buttons to let you modify the script in the Runtime Script window:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 856

The Advanced Configuration... button lets you define advanced configuration settings for the driver. Note that once a

printer has been added to the list of printers, you can also access advanced configuration settings by right-clicking the

printer in the list then selecting Configure.

Refer to Configuring an Existing Printer for detailed information.

5. Click OK to return to the Printer Setup dialog box.

A printer configuration file containing all the settings you set in the Printer Properties dialog box is created in
$HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.xml which is the default location. The numbers of additional printers created are
incremented by one, as follows: PLOT0001.xml, PLOT0002.xml, etc.
However, note that when printing to 3DPLM printers, you can now modify the default location of the configuration file via
the Printers tab.

The format of Version 4 plot configuration files is not compatible with the Version 5 format.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 857

Removing a Printer

This tasks explains how to delete a printer.

At least one printer must have been set up using the File > Printer Setup... command.

1. Select File > Printer setup... to open the Printers dialog box:

2. Select the printer to be deleted from the list of printers

3. Right-click then select Remove to remove the printer.

The printer configuration file located in $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.xml (the default

location) is deleted. However, note that when printing to 3DPLM printers, you can modify the default
location for the configuration file via the Printers tab.

Note: you cannot remove Windows printers.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 858

Configuring an Existing Printer

This tasks explains how to reconfigure an existing printer.

About Configuration Files for 3D PLM Printers

For the sake of convenience, a single configuration file in XML format is used to configure the printer and the
driver. Moreover, this configuration file is totally independent from the Version 5 settings which means that it
can be exchanged between two different operating systems, for instance, without any problem.

By default, the configuration file will still be stored in the permanent settings created in a location referenced by
the CATUserSettingPath variable. This location is:

● $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOT0000.xml (on Windows)

● $HOME\CATSettings\Printers\PLOTxxxx.xml (on UNIX).

However, you will see further in this guide that you can choose a directory other than the default one proposed.

Any modification entered in the Printer Properties dialog box (detailed below) is written in XML language in the
configuration file.
There are as many .xml files are they are 3D PLM Printers and the numbers of additional printers are
incremented by one as follows: PLOT0000.xml, PLOT0001.xml, PLOT0002.xml, etc.

Note that configurations from previous releases are also supported, which means that, if your printer
configuration file is in .plot_cfg format, you can translate it into XML format.

About Configuration Files for Windows Printers

As far as Windows printers are concerned, the application uses the driver and printer setting files installed on
your computer.

Configuration Example
The following gives an example with a CGM printer. For a description of the configuration of other printer types
(such as HPGL, raster, etc.), refer to Configuration Scenarios.

At least one printer must have been set up using the File > Printer Setup command.

1. Select File > Printer setup to open the Printers dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 859

You can also access the Printers dialog box using one of these two methods:

● by selecting Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools > Printers V5Rn

where "n" is the current release number

● by accessing the directory /usr/Dassault Systemes/B0n (on UNIX) or C:\Program Files\Dassault

Systemes\B0n\intel_a\code\bin (on Windows) then entering the following command:

CATPrinterManager

2. Select the CGM printer to be reconfigured from the list of printers.

3. If the printer you are configuring is associated to a .plot_cfg file, right-click the printer from the Printers

dialog box then select Convert to XML:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 860

A configuration file in XML format replaces the .plot_cfg configuration file.

4. Right-click the printer from the list then select Configure (or double-click the printer name) to access

the Printer Properties dialog box.

The above capture takes a 3D PLM Printer as an example. If you add a Windows printer, the
properties dialog box displays standard setup parameters corresponding to the selected printer type.
In that case, refer to your Windows documentation for detailed information about using this dialog
box.

5. Modify the necessary data in the properties dialog box.

Refer to Adding a Printer for detailed information on the printer properties.

6. Click the Advanced Configuration... button to configure the CGM driver.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 861

7. Access the Specifications tab:

● In the CGM Level area, activate the Allow CGM Version 3 Generation if you want to generate CGM
Version 3
● In the CGM Profile area, select the profile to be used by checking the corresponding option
❍ ISO: CGM is a graphic format defined by the International Standards Organization ISO/IEC
8632:19999

❍ ATA (Air Transport Association): part the ATA Specification 2100.

GREXCHANGE, for technical documentation of the manufacture and operation of
commercial airplanes, supports the binary and clear text encodings at the CGM Version 3
functionality level. It is appropriate for the exchange of technical manuals, publishing
applications, and visualization.
IGEXCHANGE provides for the transfer of intelligence associated with graphical data. This
profiles supports the application structuring defined in CGM Amendment 2.
Both profiles are developed and maintained by the ATA/AIA (Airline Transport Assoc. and
Airline Industry Assoc.)

❍ CALS (Continuous Acquisition and Life-Cycle Support): part of the CALS family of
standards which is an initiative of the U.S. Department of Defense for technical
illustrations and publications. This profile supports the binary encoding at the CGM Version 3
functionality level.

8. Access the Delimiters tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 862

● Begin Metafile: all CGM files start with the same identifier, BEGIN METAFILE, and you can enter
the data to be used as identifier. The default is "3D PLM CGM Driver"
● Begin Picture: sets the default state the CGM interpreter will return to at the beginning of each
new picture. The default is "Picture #1".

9. Access the Descriptors tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 863

● Metafile Description: enter the description text to be used for the metafile (e.g. author, date,
version, etc.)
● VDC Type: Specify the type of coordinates for the metafile, either Real or Integer
● Scaling Mode: Select the mode to be used by activating the corresponding option
❍ If you select Metric, you need to enter the physical size of the CGMs in millimeters
❍ If you select Abstract, it means that CGMs are dimensionless (they do not have an actual
physical size you can measure in pixels, inches, etc.). In that case, Virtual Device Coordinates
(VDC) are used as units of measure

● Line Width Specification Mode

❍ Absolute: activate this option if you want line width to be measured in VDC units
❍ Scaled: activate this option if you want the line width on the printer to be automatically scaled
to the screen line width set as a scale factor to be applied to a device-dependent nominal line
width.

10. Access the Graphics tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 864

In the Font Substitutions list, select a font then set the property of your choice by selecting the
appropriate option:

● Discretized means that when the image suffers from a lack of points, points are distributed to fill
the gaps and ensure linearity
● Not Substituted means that the font is kept as is, it is not replaced by any font
● Substituted lets you replace the selected font by a suitable replacement font you select in the list
displayed to the right of the options. This list is activated as soon as the Substituted option is
selected.

Note that you need to define these properties for each font used in the document to be printed.

11. When finished defining your parameters, click OK to validate and close the Advanced Configuration

dialog box then click OK again to close the Printer Properties dialog box.

The printer configuration file ($HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.xml) is modified.

When printing to a 3DPLM printer, the default location for the configuration file (containing the

configuration settings for the driver and the printer) can be modified if needed in the Printer Creation

Directory area under the Printers tab.

9. Access the printer configuration file then open it, you see that your modifications have been written in

XML format in the file.

In our example, we changed the paper format from "A4 ISO" to "B ANSI" and the CGM Profile from
"ISO" to "ATA". These modifications have been highlighted in red in the sample file below for greater
clarity. Click the thumbnail to see the full-size picture:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 865

Note that a .dtd file containing the description of the XML configuration file is provided in:

● C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\resources\printerDTD\printer.dtd (on Windows)

● /usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/OS_a/resources/printerDTD/printer.dtd (on UNIX)

where "n" is the current release number

and

"OS_a" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● irix_a
● solaris_a.

10. Re-select the advanced configuration settings to check that your modifications have been taken into

account:

As shown in the above screen grab, your settings have been saved and the CGM Profile is now "ATA"
and not "ISO".
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 866

About V4 Line Types

Version 5 lets you choose between two methods for the line type print definition:
● V5 process (the default one) which uses standards defined via the Tools > Standards command

● V4-type process: in Version 5, you can create the V4LineFontType environment variable which lets you use
line types similar to those used in Version 4. The V4LineFontType variable is based on seven standard types
detailed below:

ISO/ANSI JIS CATIA Version 4

Solid [] [] []

Dotted [1:1] [1:1] [2:1]

Dashed [4:1:5] [3:1] [8:2]

Dot-Dash [7:1:1:1] [9:1:1:1] [10:1:2:1]

Phantom [7:1:1:1:1:1] [15:1:1:1:1:1] [35:1:2:1:2:1]

Small Dotted [0.5:0.5] [0.5:0.5]

JIS Axis [2:1:10:1] [2:1:10:1]

These data are similar to the default data contained in the LINEDEF file (a Version 4 external file used
to create a mapping between the line type and the plotting).
The last two types in the list are "V5 only" (they did not exist in Version 4) and are defined using
Tools > Standards.

For detailed information on how to set an environment variable, refer to Customizing Your
Environment on Windows or Customizing Your Environment on UNIX (depending on your operating
system).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 867

Testing the Printer

This tasks explains how to test your printer on UNIX.

You need to have already set up at least one printer.

1. Select File > Printer setup... to open the Printers dialog box:

2. Select the printer to be tested.

3. Right-click then select Test.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 868

Customizing Print Driver Plug-Ins

You can use print drivers other than those provided with Version 5. This task provides a step-by-step scenario describing
how to plug-in your own print drivers in your Version 5 environment without CAA context using CATPrtDrvPlugins.

A CATPrtDrvPlugin is made of one group of 10 functions and one shared data structure:

● Plug-in methods are functions you implement in the plug-in. These functions will then be called by Version 5. Their
names all begin with "CATPDP_", for instance CATPDP_Begin
● Data structures are plug-in-specific types defined for use in the plug-in API. Their names begin with "CATPDP", for
instance CATPDPParameters. All plug-in API structures and definitions are found in CATPDPluginAPI.h located in
$CATStartupPath\startup\PrintServices\PrintDriverPlugIn.

Click the thumbnail below to find a description of the structure of CATPDPParameters:

A plug-in is a native code library whose source conforms to standard C syntax.

The plug-in file type depends on the platform you are working on:

● Windows: .DLL (Dynamic Link Library) files

● UNIX: .SO or .DSO (Shared Objects) files.

You can use the template file (CATPluginTemplate.cpp) located in

$CATStartupPath\startup\PrintServices\PrintDriverPlugIn and adapt it to your needs by implementing the plug-in
methods provided by Version 5.

When the code has been written, you will have to compile and build the module then declare the resulting module to the
Print Driver Manager File. The file CATPDPlugin.mak provided in
$CATStartupPath\startup\PrintServices\PrintDriverPlugIn\BUILD\WINDOWS can help you build your library module.

1. Access the file CATPluginTemplate.cpp located in:

$CATStartupPath\startup\PrintServices\PrintDriverPlugIn

2. Write the code corresponding to the interfaces to implement the plug-in methods that will be called by Version 5.

For information about the syntax and use of C or C++ language, refer to your language documentation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 869

The provided methods are listed in the table below. Click the desired method to access the corresponding

description:

Method Name Description

Driver initialization with parameters provided by user
CATPDPP_Begin
interface
Indicates if the plug-in driver is about to be closed or
CATPDP_End
removed
CATPDP_DefineColor Defines a RGB color in the palette
CATPDP_SelectDrawColorSelects the drawing color
CATPDP_SetDrawWidth Selects the drawing path
CATPDP_MoveTo Moves the pen without drawing
CATPDP_LineTo Draws a line
CATPDP_SelectFillColor Selects the filling color for polygon primitives
CATPDP_FillArea Fills a polygon
CATPDP_DrawBitmap Draws a bitmap

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CATPDP_Begin
Provide global initialization for the plug-in driver.

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_Begin(const CATPDPParameters& iParam);

Parameters
iParams Global structure data parameters.
Various user printing options

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
This is the first call used from the V5 Printer Manager to inform the driver plug-in the the printing
is started. The Printer Manager fills the CATPDPParameters according to the user choices. This
structure is then passed to the plug-in by calling the CATPDP_Begin function.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 870
CATPDP_End
Provide global deinitialization for the plug-in driver.

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_End(void);

Parameters
No parameters

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
The V5 Printer manager calls this function once the printing is done. Be sure to release
allocations , instances or file I/O flushing in this function. After this call the plug-in driver is
unloaded and the printing stopped.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CATPDP_DefineColor
Defines a color in the palette

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_DefineColor(int iIndex , float iRed, float iGreen, float iBlue);

Parameters
iIndex Index in the color table (between 0 and 255)
iRed Red color in RGB coordinates (between 0 and 1)
iGreen Green color in RGB coordinates (between 0 and 1)
iRed Blue color in RGB coordinates (between 0 and 1)

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Defines a color in rgb coordinates. This index is used for function CATPDP_SelectDrawColor or
CATPDP_SelectFillColor.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 871
CATPDP_SelectDrawColor
Selects the drawing color

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_SelectDrawColor(int index);

Parameters
iIndex Index of the current drawing color (between 0 and 255)
used for next drawing primitive

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Selects the current drawing color related to the index defined by the CATPDP_DefineColor.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CATPDP_SetDrawWidth
Selects the current draw width

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_ SetDrawWidth (float iWidth);

Parameters
IWith Thickness in mm of the current drawing with
used for next drawing primitives

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Selects the current draw width. The width is in mm.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 872
CATPDP_MoveTo
Moves the pen without drawing

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_MoveTo(float iX, float iY);

Parameters
iX X coordinate to move
iY Y coordinate to move

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Moves the pen to (x, y) in device coordinates without drawing. Coordinates are in mm.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CATPDP_LineTo
Draws a line

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_LineTo(float iX, float iY)

Parameters
iX X coordinate to draw
iY Y coordinate to draw

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Draws a line from the current pen position to (x, y) in device coordinates with current draw color,
line type and draw width.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 873
CATPDP_SelectFillColor
Selects the filling color

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_SelectFillColor (int iIndex )

Parameters
iIndex Index of the current Fill color (between 0 and 255)
used for next Fill primitive

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Selects the current filling color related to the index defined by the CATPDP_DefineColor.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CATPDP_FillArea
Fills a polypolygon

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_FillArea(int iOutlines, const int* iCorners, const float* iCoord)

Parameters
IOutlines number of polygons in the polypolygon.
iCorners Array of outlines integers giving the number of corners in each polygon.
iCoord array of floats giving the coordinates of alls corners of each polygon

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Fills a polypolygon in device coordinates with current fill color.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 874
CATPDP_DrawBitmap
Draws a bitmap

Syntax
#include < CATPDPluginAPI.h >
CATPDPError CATPDP_DrawBitmap(float iX, float iY, const int iTypeOfBitmap, const unsigned
char* iPixels, const int iSize);

Parameters
iX X coordinate of the bitmaps to draw
iY Y coordinate of the bitmaps to draw
iTypeOfBitmap color mode of bitmap: 0 = RGB , 1 = Black and White bitmap
iPixels array of pixels
iSize size in bytes of the pixel array

Returns

● If successful, the function returns CATPDP_NO_ERROR

● If unsuccessful, the plug-in the function returns an error code.

Description
Draws a bitmap in device coordinates at the given (x, y) position.

Back to Method summary

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. Compile and build the module.

Note: you can use the file CATPDPlugin.mak provided in

$CATStartupPath\startup\PrintServices\PrintDriverPlugIn\BUILD\WINDOWS.

4. In your Version 5 session, select File > Printer Setup... to open the Printers dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 875

5. Double-click Add Printer.

● If you are working on Windows, an additional dialog box named Add Printer Wizard opens:

This dialog box enables you to choose between:

● Windows Printer: in that case, selecting this option then OK opens the
Connect to Printer dialog box in which you will select the Windows printer you
wish to add
● 3D PLM Printer: this option lets you add printers provided by Dassault Systèmes.
When clicking OK, the Printer Properties dialog box is displayed to let you define
the parameters for your new printer.

Click OK to access the Printer Properties dialog box.

● If you are working on UNIX, the Printer Properties dialog box opens directly:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 876

6. Select V5 Print Plugin Driver from the Driver list.

7. Click the Advanced Configuration... button to access the following dialog box:

8. In the Plugin Driver selection box, enter the path of the library module you built in step 3 or click the Plugin...

button which enables you to browse your file tree.

9. Select File > Print... to open the Print dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 877

10. Indicate the name of the new custom printer in the Printer Name box.

11. Modify the desired print settings (refer to Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents for detailed

information) then click OK to confirm and print your document.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 878

Using Power Input Mode

About Power Input Mode

Entering Data
Running Commands
Using the Search Language
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 879

About Power Input Mode

Power input mode is a user-friendly productivity assistant allowing you to:

● enter numeric data more easily in editable fields and spinners (but cannot be used in combo lists); as
such, it is intended as an alternative to typing values in dialog boxes (dialog boxes are however still
available)
● enter commands directly (by typing the c: followed by the name of the command)
● entering selection queries using the query language available when using Edit > Search.

Power input is available in certain (but not all) application commands. Note also that prefixes used to run
commands or selection queries vary according to the language. For information on prefixes dedicated to
languages other than English, refer to the documentation written in the language you are interested in.

To activate power input mode, select Tools > Options, click the General tab, and click the P2 option,
then restart your session.

The power input field is located in the bottom right corner of the status bar:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 880

Entering Data

This tasks shows you how to enter data more rapidly and more productively.

1. Select a command that allows you to use the power input field for data entry.

For example, in the Part Design application, you can click Chamfer in the Dress-Up
Features toolbar.

In the lower right corner of the window, the power input field is displayed:

If we zoom on the lower right corner of the window, note that:

● the area to the left of the power input field displays the names of the dialog box options
for which power input is possible: this is the case only for editable fields and spinners (but
not for combo lists)
● the power input field contains the default values for those options, separated by commas

● the icon appears to the right of the power input field: when this icon is displayed, you
know that the command you are using supports power input.

The dialog box remains open by default.

2. Enter the values for all the options in the power input field, making sure that you separate each

entry using the separator appropriate for your language environment, then press Enter to

validate your input.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 881

Even if the cursor focus is in a document window, you do not need to click in the power input
field to transfer the focus to the power input field:

● any characters you type will be directed to the power input field automatically
● press Tab to scroll from the power input field in the main application window to the data
input fields in application dialog boxes
● press Esc to return the focus to the document window.

This mechanism is also implemented in drafting documents when you enter text: as soon as
you start typing, the focus is transferred automatically to the text editor window.

On Windows, you can set the separator you want to use. To do so, select Start > Settings >
Control Panel, double-click the Regional Settings control, then click the Number tab. Set the
separator using the List Separator option. The default is the comma (",") for the English,
Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other
supported environments.

On UNIX, you cannot set the separator. The separator is the comma (",") for the English,
Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments, and the semi-colon (";") for all other
supported environments.

The values you enter in the power input field are updated instantaneously in the fields in the
dialog box.

If the dialog box is still open, click Apply or OK in the dialog box. However, you can also
remove the dialog box by clicking the icon. If the dialog box is no longer visible, pressing
Enter validates your input and executes the command (equivalent to Apply and OK).

If the color of the text you enter in the power input field changes to red, this means that you
have made a mistake: for example, the number of values you enter may exceed the number
of options for which power input is possible.

Use the up and down keyboard arrow keys if you want to recover any input you previously
entered.

Finally, if a dialog box provides contextual commands, right-clicking over the power input field
also accesses the same commands.

Using power input helps you to be more productive because it provides an alternative to using dialog
boxes for inputting data. In dialog boxes, you have to click in each editable field, or press Tab, to move
from field to field. The power input field lets you concentrate on just the data you have you enter, and
thereby facilitates data input.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 882

Running Commands

This task explains how to run commands from the power input field.

1. To run a command from the power input field, enter a command like this:

c:command_name

where "command_name" is the name of the command as it appears in the menus.

For example, enter the following command:

c:New...

or:

c:New

to run File > New.

2. Press Enter to run the command.

When pointing at icons, the syntax for running the associated command is displayed to the left
of the power input field, to remind you that you can also run the command from the power

input field. For example, when you point at New in the Standard toolbar, the following
message is displayed:

c:New
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 883

Using the Search Language

This section explains how to use the search language to search for objects.

The search language offers almost all of the search functions available with Edit > Search described in
Selecting Using the Search... Command. Searching using this command generates a search query
(expressed in the search language) displayed in the Generated query box of the Search dialog box.

The search language can be used both in the power input field and in the Advanced tab of the Search
dialog box but also in macros. The search query both searches for the elements and automatically selects
them.

Any generated query can be run via the power input field or in macros, whether transformat or not.
However, the transformat query is the only usable query whatever the session language,
therefore any query you expect to run in different session languages must be written in this
format.
If you are not familiar with this format, you can display its content and identify the syntax to be used prior
to writing your transformat query using a hidden column (you need to drag the column separator next to
the Query column to display it) in the Favorites tab of the Search dialog box:

For instance, CATDrwSearch.DrwText.Name=test,in means that you will search for objects named "test"
in the Drafting workbench using the "In <UI-Active object>" scope.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 884
This scenario deals with the following sections:
● Search Language: Syntax

● Using Operating Signs

● Searching by Name

● Searching by Name in Graph

● Searching by Type

● Searching by Color

● Searching by Product Properties

● Searching for Objects Belonging to a Selection Set

● Searching for Objects Belonging to a Layer

● Searching for Visible or Hidden Elements

● Searching for Line Thickness or Linetype

● Searching by Symbol

● Searching Using Favorites

● Searching Using Predefined Favorites

● Using Special Characters

● Using Operators

● Priority

● Using Search Scopes

● Using a Default Prefix

● Using a Default Search Scope

To run a search via the power input field, proceed as follows:

1. Enter the search string.

2. Press Enter.

The searched objects are sent to the current command. If the current command is the Select
command, the objects are selected.

The language to be used when entering your query is detailed hereafter:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 885

Search Language: Syntax

You can search for objects using the same criteria as with Edit > Search.

The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls sets up the power input search syntax, and search language
shortcuts. The localized version of this message catalog determines the exact syntax and shortcuts for
each language.

Using Operating Signs

The search language uses the following separators (whose role you will discover in the examples below):
● : and = (these separators are interchangeable)
● != (different)
● <, <=, >, =>

Searching by Name
You can search for an object name. This is particularly useful if you renamed objects using Edit >
Properties, or the Properties contextual command. The name can also contain special characters.

To search for an object by its name, enter the following command:

name:object_name or name=object_name

or a command using an abbreviation referred to as a "shortcut" as follows:

n:object_name

where "object_name" is the name of the object.

You can also use the "*" character as a wildcard to replace any number of characters. For example, the
command:

name:wheel*

searches for all objects starting with the string "wheel".

The message catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls sets up unambiguous default shortcuts. For example, there is
no ambiguity between the shortcut c: (used in the power input area to enter a command), and col: (used
for searches on color). In localized versions of the catalog, check that there are no identical shortcuts for
two different items.

If you want the search to be case sensitive, enter the following command:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 886

NAME:Wheel*

searches for all objects starting with the string "Wheel".

Note: the keyword used for queries that are not case sensitive is always in lowercase whereas for case
sensitive queries, the keyword is in uppercase.
For languages that do not make any difference between uppercase and lowercase characters, you can
either add the string _CAP to the keyword to specify that the query is case sensitive, or use the
Name_CAP transformat keyword.

Searching by Name in Graph

You can search for an object name. This search is different from searching by name since it deals with the
name as it is displayed in the specification tree.

To search for an object by its name as displayed in the specification tree, enter the following command:

name in graph=object_name

If you want the search to be case sensitive, enter the following command:

NAME IN GRAPH=object_name

This name may be customized and thus, may differ from the name you entered in the Properties dialog
box. For instance, suppose a part with named "My_Part_Number"...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 887

whose name is displayed as follows in the specification tree:

Let's suppose you customize the display in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Product Structure > Nodes
Customization tab by entering the following data:

The name displayed in the specification tree now looks like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 888

Entering:

name=*part*

gives no result since the search is based on the name displayed in the Instance Name box.

But entering:

name in graph=*part*

finds the part.

Note that the tree item size defined in the Tree Appearance tab is not taken into account.

Searching by Type

Use the Type box in the Search dialog box to display a list of types (the types are translated in each
language).

To search for an object by its type, enter the following command:

type:type or type=type

or:

t:type

You can also search for types using the "." (period) as follows:

For example, entering the command:

Part Design.Pad
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 889
searches for all objects of type Pad created using the "Part Design" workbench.

The following syntax is also allowed:

workbench.type.attribute=

For example, entering:

Part Design.Pad.Color=Sea Green

searches for all objects of type Pad created using the Part Design workbench, and of the color Sea Green.

You can omit the workbench name if the type exists only for this workbench:

Part Design.Pad

and:

.Pad

are equivalent.

Similarly:

Part Design.Pad.Color=Sea Green

and:

type=Pad & Color=Sea Green

are also equivalent.

Here are some more examples using other operators described in Using Operators:

workbench.type.name=point*

workbench.type.name!=point*

workbench.type.name:point*

and:

workbench.type.color='sea green'

workbench.type.color!='sea green'

workbench.type.color:'sea green'
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 890

Searching by Color
You assign colors to objects using the Color list in the Graphic tab, when using Edit > Properties or the
Properties contextual command. For a reminder about how to use this list, refer to Displaying and
Editing Graphic Properties.

To search for an object of a specific color, enter the following command:

color:color_name

or:

col:color_name

where "color_name" is the color of the object.

If the name of the color contains a blank (which is the case with most of the colors available), you can
type the full name as follows:

color:Sandy Brown

You can also surround the blank or the color name with a single quote (by default) like this:

color:Sandy' 'Brown

or like this:

color:'Sandy Brown'

You can also search for colors using their RGB values. For example:

color:'(211,178,125)'
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 891

In addition to this, each color displayed in the Color list or in the color palette is identified by an index in
the color table. Therefore, when searching for the "Salmon" color for instance, you can enter either:

col:Salmon

or:

col:17

since "Salmon" is the 17th color in the color palette.

The 16 colors available in the Color list are:

In the color palette, 48 colors are provided, among which 16 colors are the same as those displayed in the
Color list. The remaining are extra colors.
These colors are numbered as follows, from top to bottom: on the first row are colors #1 to #8, on the
second row are colors #9 to #16 and so on til color #48 in the lower right corner:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 892

To see the table listing the 48 colors along with their name, index and RGB code, refer to Color Palette.

Searching by Product Properties

You assign properties to products (and parts in products) by right-clicking an element in the specification
tree and selecting Properties, clicking the Product tab in the Properties dialog box, and setting the
properties in the Product frame.

The properties you can search for (the same as those you assigned to the element) are:

● Part Number
● Revision
● Definition
● Nomenclature
● Product Description
● Component Description.

For example, the search queries:

Product Description:completed

Product' 'Description:completed
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 893

'Product Description':completed

'Product Description'=completed

search for all elements whose Product Description is the text "completed".

The property name is case sensitive.

Searching for Objects Belonging to a Layer

To search for an object belonging to a specific layer (as seen in the Graphic Properties toolbar), enter
the following command:

l:layer_number or l=layer_number

or

layer:layer_number or layer=layer_number

where "layer_number" is the number of the layer.

Searching for Objects Belonging to a Selection Set

To search for an object belonging to a selection set, enter the following command:

s:selection_set_name

or

set:selection_set_name

where "selection_set_name" is the name of the selection set.

If you want the search to be case sensitive, enter the following command:

SET=selection_set_name

The strings "name", "type", "color" and "set" are appropriate for the English language only. The message
catalog KeyboardInput.CATNls determines the exact syntax for your language.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 894

Searching for Visible or Hidden Elements

You can search for visible, invisible, shown elements, or elements hidden in the No Show space using the
following syntax:

visibility:visible

vis:visible

and:

visibility:hidden

vis:hidden

Searching for Line Thickness or Linetype

You can also search for objects with a specific line thickness or linetype (as seen in the Graphic
Properties toolbar) like this:

weight:

w:

or:

dashed:

d:

When searching for lines with a specific weight, you can specify the weight index like this:

weight:6,all

to search for all lines which are 2.0000 mm thick.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 895

Searching by Symbol

To search for a point symbol, enter the following command:

symbol:small full square or symbol=small full square

or

symb:small full square or symb=small full square

searches for the following point symbol: .

Capital letters are meaningless for the symbol name and you can also type:

symbol:Small Full Square or symbol=SMALL FULL SQUARE

The point symbols you can search for are:

Cross
Plus
Circle
Double Circle
Dot
Full Square
Star
Small Full Square
Small Dot

Searching Using Favorites

You can search for objects using your favorite queries defined via the Favorites tab in the Search dialog
box. To do so:

favorite=favorite_query_name or favorite:favorite_query_name

but you can also enter:

f=favorite_query_name or f:favorite_query_name

where "favorite_query_name" is the name of the favorite query. Note that the language used in favorite
queries is case sensitive.

When you press Enter, the search results are selected in the specification tree.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 896

You can use any of the special characters such as !. For example, let's use the query defined in Searching
Using the Favorites Mode. This query searches for any element named "My Sketch". Now, suppose you
want your search to select all elements whose names are other than "My Sketch", you just have to type:

favorite!=Query_1

or

f!=Query_1

In that case, the search scope is not modified.

To modify the search scope, indicate the new scope after the favorite query name in the power input field:

favorite=Query_1, from

searches for any element named "My Sketch" From Search to bottom and not Everywhere as
originally defined in Query_1. The new scope supersedes the previous one.

You can also combine favorite queries with predefined favorite queries.

Searching Using Predefined Favorites

Before you start, note that these predefined favorite queries (which deal with V5 objects only) can be
neither modified, nor deleted contrary to standard favorite queries you define in the Favorites tab of the
Search dialog box.

The shortcuts used to run these predefined queries have been defined to search "Everywhere". However,
if the scr as Visible on screen option is selected in the Default Search Scope for Power Input list and if
the Replaces scope defined in favorite queries option is selected, the queries will search for visible
elements only.

Search with no selection required

You can search for objects using predefined favorite queries. These predefined queries are run by entering
the following shortcuts:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 897

Shortcut for Searches for

* t:*,all all objects everywhere (i.e. in the whole specification tree from
top to bottom)

*PLN .Plane,all all planes everywhere

*SUR .Surface-.Plane,all all surfaces (except planes) everywhere

*FAC .Face,all all topological faces everywhere

*VOL .Volume,all all volumes everywhere

*LN .Line-.Sketcher.Line,all all lines (except sketcher's) everywhere

*PT .Point-.Sketcher.Point,all all points (except sketcher's) everywhere

*CRV .Curve-.Line- all curves (except sketcher's and lines) everywhere

.Sketcher.Curve,all
*SKT .Sketch,all all sketches everywhere

*AXS .Axis System+.AbsoluteAxis,all all axis systems (including sketcher's) everywhere

*FTA .Functional Tolerancing & all Functional Tolerancing & Annotation elements everywhere
Annotation Element

For instance, to search for all sketches everywhere, enter the appropriate shortcut after the prefix used to
run favorite queries:

f:*SKT or f=*SKT

but you can also enter

favorite:*SKT or favorite=*SKT

If the option f: as favorite: is selected in the Default Prefix for Power Input list, you do not need to type
the prefix before the shortcut. You simply enter:

*SKT

to search for all sketches everywhere.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 898

Search with selection

Predefined shortcuts are provided to search for elements having a characteristic in common with the
element you select:

Searches for

*COL all objects with the same color as the selected object

*LAY all objects included in the same layer as the selected object

*LNW all lines with the same thickness as the selected object

*LNT all lines with the same linetype as the selected object

*PTT all points with the same point type as the selected object

*PRT all objects included included in the same part as the selected object

*PBD all objects included included in the same part body (or hybrid body) as the selected object

*GST all objects included included in the same geometrical set (named "open body" before V5R13)
as the selected object

*OGS all objects included included in the same ordered geometrical set (named "shape body" before
V5R13) as the selected object

To run a predefined favorite query involving a selection, you need to select the object before or after
entering the appropriate shortcut.

For instance, to search for all objects with the same color as the selected object ("blue" in our example),
select a "blue" object then enter:

*COL

or enter

*COL and select the object. In that case, when you press Enter after entering the shortcut is entered, an
acquisition agent opens:

Select the object then click Close to close the acquisition agent.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 899

Search with arguments

You can run predefined favorite queries with arguments. These predefined queries are run using the
following shortcuts:

Shortcut for Searches for

*COL<xxx> Color=xxx,all all elements with the color xxx everywhere, where xxx is the RGB code
(e.g. *COL'(0,0,255)' when searching for the "blue" color) or the color
name (e.g. *COLblue) or the color index (e.g. *COL45)

*SST<xxx> Set=xxx,all all objects in the selection set xxx everywhere (where xxx is the name
of the set, e.g. *SST'Set1' or SSTSet1)

*LAY<n> Layer=n,all all objects in the layer n everywhere (where n is the layer number, e.g.
*LAY2)

*LNW<n> .Line & all lines drawn with the thickness index n, as displayed in the Weight
Weight=n,all list of the Search dialog box, everywhere (e.g. *LNW3 to search for a
0.7000 mm line: )

*LNT<n> .Line & all lines drawn with the dashed index n, as displayed in the Dashed list
Dashed=n,all of the Search dialog box, everywhere (e.g. *LNT2 to search for a
"Dotted" line: )

*PTT<n> .Point & all points drawn with the symbol n, as displayed in the Symbol list of
Symbol=n,all the Search dialog box, everywhere (e.g. *PTT8 to search for the eighth
symbol in the list, from top to bottom: )

For instance, to search for all lines of type "Dotted" everywhere, enter the appropriate shortcut after the
prefix used to run favorite queries.:

f:*LNT2 or f=*LNT2

but you can also enter

favorite:*LNT2 or favorite=*LNT2

If the option f: as favorite: is selected in the Default Prefix for Power Input list, you do not need to type
the prefix before the shortcut. You simply enter:

*LNT2

to search for all lines of type "Dotted" everywhere.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 900

Using Special Characters

Characters & + - ( ) play a special role in the search syntax:

To be interpreted literally in names, those characters or text strings containing those characters must be surrounded
by the character '(apostrophe by default).

For example:

n:*')' searches for all names ending with )

n:*'&' searches for all names containing &

n:*'(1)' searches for all names ending with (1).

The following line in the KeyboardInput.CATNls resource file :

Quote = " ' ";

specifies the default character for surrounding strings.

The character * is always interpreted as a wild card except if surrounded by two characters '.

For example:

n:*''*'' searches for all names ending with *

n:*''*''* searches for all names containing *

n:*'&'''*''* searches for all names containing &*

n:'*)' searches for all names ending with ). This is identical to n:*')'
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 901

The character ' must be doubled twice to be interpreted literally.

For example:

n:*''''* searches for all names containing a '

n:P''''* searches for all names beginning with P'

n:P''''''''* searches for all names beginning with P''

n:P''''''''''''* searches for all names beginning with P'''

n:P''''''''''''''''* searches for all names beginning with P''''.

Using Operators

The supported operators are: &, +, and - (for AND, OR and EXCEPT respectively) and ( ).

Blanks are not considered as separators. They may be surrounded by ', but this is not mandatory.

Combining standard queries

The following examples:

name:*wheel'&'door&type:Part
name:*wheel'&'door & type:Part
name:*'wheel&door' & type:Part
name:*'wheel&door'& type:Part
name:*wheel'&'door &type:Part

all search for parts whose names end with "wheel&door".

The command:

name:wheel1 + name:wheel2

searches for objects named "wheel1" and objects named "wheel2".

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 902

Combining predefined favorite queries, favorite queries and standard queries

Before you start, note the following information:

● If you do not specify any search scope when entering your query, the scope used is:
❍ either the one defined in the Default Search Scope for Power Input list

❍ or the scope of the predefined favorite query or of the favorite query (provided that the Replaces
scope defined in favorite queries option is not selected. Otherwise, the scope defined in the
Default Search Scope for Power Input list prevails)

● If a defaut prefix has been set in the Default Prefix for Power Input list, you do not need to type it in
the power input field. For instance, if f: has been set as the default prefix, you just have to enter
*LN+*PT instead of f:*LN+f:*PT
● If at least one shortcut in the query requires a selection, you must select an object before or after
running the query. If there is more than one shortcut requiring a selection, then you must select only
one object ; the properties of the selected object will be used for all the shortcuts involved in the
query.

You can try by yourself the sample combinations provided below using the Search1.CATProduct document.

Combining predefined favorite queries

Let's suppose you want to search for all lines or all points. You enter:

f:*LN+*PT

but you can also use any other favorite prefix (f=, favorite: or favorite=).

This query searches for all lines and points everywhere since no scope has been specified and, as
explained above, the scope of the predefined query is used.

If you want to use another search scope, you need to specify it after the query. For instance, to search for
all lines and points visible on screen, you can either set scr as Visible on screen as the default scope in
the Default Search Scope for Power Input list (do not forget to select the Replaces scope defined in
favorite queries option as well) or enter:

f:*LN+*PT, scr

Combining predefined favorite queries and favorite queries

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 903

Let's suppose a favorite query named "Query_1". This query searches for all elements whose color is
"black".
If you want your search to select all lines and whose color is "black", you just have to type:

f:*LN&Query_1

but you can also use any other favorite prefix (f=, favorite: or favorite=).

Combining predefined favorite queries and standard queries

Let's suppose you want to search for all sketches except those whose name ends with "1". You enter:

f:*SKT-(n:*1) or f:*SKT-(name:*1)

but you can also use any other favorite prefix (f=, favorite: or favorite=).

Combining predefined favorite queries, favorite queries and standard queries

Still using a favorite query named "Query_1" (which searches for all elements whose color is "black"), let's
suppose you want to search for all lines and whose color is black or whose name ends with "3". You enter:

f:*LN&(Query_1+n:*3) or f:*LN&(Query_1+name:*3)

but you can also use any other favorite prefix (f=, favorite: or favorite=).

Priority
There is no priority among operators, but there is a priority in their order of appearance (from left to
right).

For example, the query:

type:Part* & name:toto + type:Hole & Color:Black

is interpreted as:

type:Part* & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) )

and thus searches for elements of type "Part" among the objects in the document that are
"black holes" or named "toto".

To avoid ambiguity, use parentheses like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 904

type:Part* & (name:toto + (type:Hole & Color:Black) )

to obtain the same result.

Using Search Scopes

You can use the same search scopes (except In List) as with Edit > Search, by using the context aliases
all, in, from, sel and scr:
● all: searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created using all
workbenches.
● in: locates the appropriate elements in the active object and in the workbench you are currently using
● from: searches the elements in the active object to the bottom of the tree. For example, in a Part
document, both parts and sketches are searched.
● sel: if you already selected objects before selecting Edit > Search, this option searches from the
selected objects to the bottom of the tree.
● scr: searches for objects visible in the current window. Elements that are not activated or not
represented in the geometry area are not taken into account.
Elements that are not represented in the geometry area are, for instance, elements transferred to the
No Show space, elements that are not in the current filter or not in the current mask, features used to
build other features that appear in the specification tree but not in the geometry area, etc.

The default is in. Scope aliases must always be placed at the end of the search string, and after the
separator "," like this:

type:Hole, all

The separator is the comma (",") for the English, Japanese, Korean and simplified Chinese environments,
and the semi-colon (";") for all other supported environments.

Using a Default Prefix

A prefix is required to run a command or a query via the power input field. One prefix (c:) is already
provided to run commands and several prefixes are dedicated to search queries.
When searching for a name for instance, the value you type must be prefixed by n: or with name:, e.g.
n:wheel.

By default, no default prefix is defined. But if you use a default prefix, this avoids having to type the prefix
when entering your query in the power input field, you just have to enter the search string.
The default prefix is defined in the Search tab which provides a list of predefined prefixes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 905

Suppose you select the prefix n: as name: in the Default Prefix for Power Input list then in the power
input field, you enter only the name you are searching for such as:

wheel

to search for objects named "wheel".

Using a Default Search Scope

As explained above in Using Search Scopes, the default scope is in when running a query in the power
input field. This means that if no scope alias is entered at the end of the search string, the search locates
the appropriate elements in the active object and in the workbench you are currently using.

Using a default search scope avoids having to type the scope in the power input field. The default search
scope is defined in the Search tab which provides a list of predefined search scopes.

For instance, if the scope all as Everywhere is selected in the Default Search Scope for Power Input
list, you just need to enter:

type:Hole

instead of

type:Hole, all

to search for objects of type "Hole" in the whole specification tree from top to bottom.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 906

Virtual Reality Configurations

About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5

Stereoscopic Viewing
Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session
Working With the Immersive System Assistant
Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5
Using the Joystick Control Panel
Navigating in Examine Mode
Navigating in Fly Mode
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 907

About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5

What is Virtual Reality?

Clicking and dragging your way through a 3D graphics application may be interactive, but it's not virtual
reality. It's not Virtual Reality because it's not immersive. "Immersion" (or "presence") is the goal of
virtual reality.

Immersion refers to your sense of engagement with the virtual model or environment. When you're
immersed, you focus directly on your subject and disregard everything else. In virtual reality, an
"immersive" application lets you focus on the task at hand, so you don't deal with a mouse, or the UNIX
command line, or a GUI, or the fact that you're actually looking at something made from digital bits
instead of physical atoms.

Virtual reality essentially moves the computer out of your way, so you can interact directly with your
data or information. Unlike interactive 3D graphics (which can consist of a series of still images coming
off disk), virtual reality lets you intuitively manipulate and navigate through a real-time simulation of an
object, or a process, or a place.

Where is Virtual Reality technology useful?

Virtual reality adds value to virtually any application where it's vital to experience spatial relationships,
and analyze, design, engineer and understand such relationships. Any project in which 3D information
must be navigated or closely examined will benefit from virtual reality technology.

If you are working in two dimensions (web design, word processing, etc.), you don't need virtual reality.

What are the different types of Virtual Reality configurations?

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 908

Virtual reality technology can be recognized by the presence of specific I/O devices which can be
organized into five categories, each creating a different impression of immersion. These categories are
not mutually exclusive:
● Simulators

Simulators use a physical mockup of vehicle with real controls (steering, throttle, pedals,
etc.), with which you can navigate through virtual environment, and are ideal for applications
such as pilot training, driver training and games. Simulators can also involve multiple
participants.

● Wearable devices

Wearable devices provide direct, "body contact" input/output to virtual models or

environments through such devices as head-mounted displays, boom-mounted displays, data
gloves, data suits, haptic feedback systems, motion platforms. These are ideal for digital
prototyping, and provide a highly immersive experience. However, they are limited to single
users.

● Desktop devices

The traditional monitor serves as a window into virtual world, with which you interact using
shutter glasses and 3D input. This is a low-cost alternative to wearable devices, and are
suitable for scientific data visualization. They are also flexible (easily switch from monoscopic
to stereoscopic; easy keyboard access). This range of equipment includes stereoscopic
workbenches, tables and desks.

However, desktop devices suffer from the following drawbacks:

● they are based on the single user approach

● they do not provide a full immersion experience.

● External devices

External devices are used to interact with your Version 5 session. Those devices consist of a
hand held equipment in which a tracker and a set of buttons have been integrated. Hand
tracking allows you to add a virtual hand in the model to perform interactive functions such as
selection, command run or navigation.

● Display systems

Large virtual models and environments are projected onto flat or curved screens, using such
technologies as virtual reality walls (for example, in Silicon Graphics Reality Centers). They
can also be projected onto vertical and/or horizontal surfaces in special chambers like "caves"
(for example, the Fakespace CAVE) or "walk-in domes".

These devices are the most sophisticated (and most expensive). They are ideal for digital
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 909
prototyping, provide high resolution, and allow groups of participants to get involved and
collaborate. They also require a lot of physical space.

Which Virtual Reality tools/technologies can be used in Version 5?

In the myriad of tools and configurations available, we can already identify a short-list of hardware
useful for navigating through or manipulating CAD data in real time, and capable of providing some level
of immersive experience:
● Stereoscopic viewing

Stereoscopic viewing of 3D images is built in Version 5. It can be achieved either in active or

passive stereo mode, depending on the display system abilities.

In an active stereo display system, left eye and right eye images are alternatively displayed on
the screen at twice the refresh rate. An active pair of glasses with two shutters working in
synchronization with the images is needed. Synchronization is often achieved using an infrared
emitter: the left eye shutter is closed when the right eye image is displayed, and reciprocally.

In a passive stereo display system, left eye and right eye images are displayed simultaneously
on the screen. Image separation is performed by filtering glasses using polarized light, for
instance.

Stereoscopic viewing is extremely easy to implement. All hardware manufacturers provide now
graphic boards supporting OpenGL quad-buffered stereo on Windows and UNIX based
systems. Stereoscopic shutter glasses, such as the CrystalEyes® manufactured by
StereoGraphics, provide a partially immersive experience of digital mock-up visualization at
lowest price investment. Another possibility is to use a StereoGraphics Z-Screen mounted on
top of a standard monitor and viewed wearing non-expensive and lightweight passive stereo
glasses.

● Head mounted display

Head mounted display (HMD) afford a more immersive experience. Equipped with position-
tracking capability, it displays output imagery based upon the position of your head.

To use a head mounted display, you can have either:

● an image generator computing left eye and right eye image separately such as an SGI
Onyx workstation. Those are high-end systems providing high performance and high
quality 3D viewing

or

● an active to passive stereo converter such as Cyviz XPO2 box. This solution allows you to
use an head mounted display on any platform supporting active stereoscopy.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 910
In addition to head mounted display, a standard joystick can be added to the virtual reality
configuration, providing a very easy way to navigate in the digital mock-up.

● Projector tables, projection walls, Immersive Rooms

Digital prototyping is served well by using a large projection systems going from the single
screen projection table, such as Fakespace Systems ImmersaDesk or Barco Baron, to the
multi-projector and multi-sided projection room, such as the FakeSpace Systems CAVE or the
Barco I-Space. Version 5 also supports reconfigurable immersive display systems such as the
Fakespace RAVE or the Barco MoVE. Those systems are ideal for scale one digital mock-up
review or designing large assemblies and facilities.

Displaying the Version 5 on a single screen/single projector display system requires no specific
Version 5 service. You just need to plug your computer graphic board video output to the
display video input.

When you have a multi-projector display system, for instance as in a TAN Holobench or in a
SGI Reality Center, you need a specific hardware and specific Version 5 functionalities. Using a
multipipe SGI Onyx workstation, Version 5 can support any kind of immersive environment,
that is to say any number of screens and projectors, in passive or active stereo vision mode.

In such environments a better immersion is achieved using head tracking, providing a 3D

image depending on the exact user point of view, as well as hand tracking for immersive
interaction. To do so, Version 5 supports:

● Trackers such as Polhemus Fastrak®, Intersense IS-900 and any devices compliant with
the Fastrak Protocol
● Hand held devices with integrated tracker and buttons such as Virtual Presence
SpaceStick, Fakespace Neowand or Intersense Wand
● 3D Connexion Spaceball and Space Mouse which could dramatically increase your work
productivity by helping you manipulating the model with your second hand. Please note
that those devices are not specific to virtual reality and can be used in any standard
desktop configuration.

What does Version 5 support natively?

The Version 5 infrastructure provides support for:

● stereoscopic viewing: refer to Stereoscopic Viewing for more information

● multipipe and multithread rendering: refer to Running a Multipiped, Multithreaded Version 5 Session
for more information
● head and hand tracking: refer to Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version 5 for more
information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 911

Stereoscopic Viewing

This section provides background information about stereoscopic viewing.

Computer technology uses stereoscopic viewing to recreate the way we naturally see depth -
stereoscopically. Stereoscopic viewing describes how we use both eyes, each with a slightly different
perspective, to perceive depth in a physical environment. It delivers the most realistic visual
representation possible of complex digital models, giving engineers, architects and scientists the best
possible understanding of three-dimensional information, and yielding levels of technical proficiency not
available using a typical 3D view.

These images can be perceived by a user wearing special glasses which continuously transmit separate
images to the left and right eyes, creating a view of computer or video-based objects that have depth,
perspective and presence in three-dimensional space.

We do not intend to describe here all the possible hardware configurations which support stereoscopic
viewing for Version 5. Consider the examples of hardware configurations mentioned in this section as no
more than that: just examples.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 912

What Do You Need?

Stereoscopic viewing is possible on both entry-range and high-end configurations: you do not
automatically need expensive equipment to enter the realm of stereoscopic viewing.

Entry-Range Configurations

On entry-range configurations, you need at least a graphics board supporting stereoscopic viewing on
your platform, and a set of special glasses.

The CrystalEyes® range of glasses (designed by StereoGraphics, Inc.) is an example of the type of special
glasses supported allowing you to benefit from stereoscopic viewing capabilities.

Many graphics boards are supported. For detailed information about supported hardware configurations if
you are running Windows, and general information about StereoGraphics, Inc. products, browse the
following Internet site:

http://www.stereographics.com/boards/brd-chrt.htm

In case you want to use a standard computer with only one graphic board, two video inputs (one per eye)
are required to manage a stereoscopic display system. If you have a computer with only one graphic
board providing a single video output, the Cyviz XPO2 is a solution.

The Cyviz XPO2 is a small electronic box converting one active stereo video input into the two
corresponding plain video outputs (one per eye). A typical application would be a projection wall with
passive stereo (two projectors) or a head mounted display.

You can click the thumbnail if you want to display a full-size picture of the XPO2.

For detailed information about XPO2, please browse the following internet site :

http://www.cyviz.com
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 913
High-End Configurations

High-end configurations typically involve not only specific graphics boards and special glasses, but also a
whole range of high-quality, immersive, stereoscopic display platforms from vendors such as FakeSpace
Systems, which allow you to manipulate, assemble, and disassemble virtual mechanical objects while
navigating through the entire digital mock-up.

For detailed information about supported hardware configurations, and general information about
FakeSpace Systems products, browse the following Internet site:

http://www.fakespacesystems.com/

http://www.barco.com/projection_systems/

How to setup stereoscopic viewing in Version 5?

This section is dedicated to stereoscopic viewing on systems that use one graphic board supporting
OpenGL quad buffered stereo.

1. Set up the appropriate hardware configuration.

2. Set up the graphic adaptor configuration for stereoscopic display.

This step depends on hardware and operating system configuration. Some systems require
administrator privileges to change the graphic adaptor display mode.

You are required to determine the height, width and frequency characteristics of the graphic
interface.

On IRIX:

With root privilege, from the command line, you can use the setmon command, for instance:

$ ls /usr/gfx/setmon -x 1024x768_96s

For this to be taken into account, restart the graphic subsytem:

$ (/usr/gfx/stopgfx;/usr/gfx/startgfx)&
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 914
On SGI Onyx2 or SGI Onyx 3000 system, you should rather use the ircombine command. For
detailed information, please refer to the SGI documentation.

On Solaris:

On Solaris 8 use the fbconfig command, first to know the available configurations:

$ /usr/sbin/fbconfig -res ?

Choose a configuration, for instance 1280x1024x114s, then use the fbconfig command once
again:

$ /usr/sbin/fbconfig -res 1280x1024x114s

Logout to restart the X server.

On previous Solaris versions, the configuration command may depend on the kind of graphic
adaptor you have: ffbconfig for Creator 3D, afbconfig for Elite and SUNWifb_config for Expert
3D.

On AIX:

On AIX systems, you can use the smit utility:

● log as root
● run smit
● choose "Devices"
● choose "Graphic Displays"
● choose "Select the Display and Resolution refresh Rates", then the correct graphic board if
more than one are on the system
● choose a stereo visual. The "list" button provides a list of all available graphic modes.
Stereo modes are at 120Hz, for instance 1024x768@120Hz.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 915

On HP-UX:

With root privilege, use the setmon command to know the available configurations:

$ /opt/graphics/common/bin/setmon -r

This gives a table on which each line corresponds to an available graphic mode. To choose a
graphic mode, type:

$ /opt/graphics/common/bin/setmon -s n

where "n" is the entry number of the chosen graphic mode.

To avoid a bad colormap effect between CATIA V4 and CATIA V5, some modifications need to
be done in the X server file as explained below:

First, logon as "super user". Then,

create:

mkdir -p /etc/dt/config

copy:

cp /usr/dt/config/Xservers /etc/dt/config/Xservers

edit:

/etc/dt/config/Xservers

at the end of the line beginning with ":0 Local", add:

(on Solaris) "-dev /dev/fbs/ifb0 defdepth 24 defclass TrueColor"

(on AIX) "-d24 -classTrueColor"

Then, restart the X server.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 916

On Windows based platforms

Stereo activation can be found in "Display properties" (select the "properties" contextual
command in your desktop background). Depending on the graphic adaptor, you may need to
have administrator privilege to access the stereo setting.
The location of this setting varies depending on the graphic driver vendor. If it is not directly
available in the vendor. If it is not directly available in the vendor tab page, look for "advanced
configuration" in the vendor tab page or in the "settings" tab page. In some cases, you may
need to reboot the computer to activate the new mode.

3. Start a session.

4. Select Tools > Options > General > Display > Visualization.

5. Click the Devices tab, and click On next to Stereo option to enable stereoscopic viewing.

Note the following platform-specific restrictions when enabling stereoscopic viewing:

● on AIX: you loose colors by passing from 24-bit to 12-bit colors using the GXT800 graphics
board
● on SGI: performance decreases by approximately 10%.

6. Exit your session to save your settings, then restart.

7. Display the Stereoscopic viewing dialog box as follows:

● enter the following command in the power input field:

c:Stereoscopic

● or, select Tools > Customize, click the Commands tab, select All commands from the
"Categories" list, then click Stereoscopic. You can then add the command to a toolbar for
easy access as explained in "Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping" in the
Infrastructure User's Guide. Select the command once it has been moved to the toolbar
● or select View > Commands List then click Stereoscopic.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 917

The Stereoscopic Viewing dialog box looks like this:

By default, stereoscopic viewing is disabled (Off).

8. Set the Stereo option to On to enable stereoscopic viewing.

Note that visualization performance is impaired if select On.

9. Set either Manual or Automatic mode.

This mode sets the distance between your eyes when using stereoscopic viewing (to do so,
enter the distance in the Viewpoint separation box).
The default mode is Manual.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 918

Automatic mode

When working in Examine mode, you should set the eye gap to Automatic. Use this setting if
you are viewing an object that in real life you could reasonably manipulate using your hands.
This setting is suitable for working in confined spaces requiring an accurate perception of depth,
in which you focus on the rotation point.

When automatic mode is active, the eye-distance is adjusted automatically depending on the
zoom factor.

In automatic mode, the line of sight converges on the focal point. If the focal point is far away,
and objects are located before the focal point, these objects will be viewed in a fashion more
precise than in real life, so viewing results are unrealistic in this case.

Manual mode

Manual mode provides you with precise control over the distance between your eyes, so that
you can adapt your field of vision to the working context.

The value you enter is in millimeters.

This mode is particularly suitable for working in Walk or Fly mode, when working on large-scale
assemblies or industrial plants requiring a wider field of vision. If you need to perceive a high
degree of depth, you should set the distance between your eyes accordingly.

In this mode, the line of sight is parallel.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 919

Running a Multipiped Version 5 Session

In About Virtual Reality Support in Version 5, we discussed the different types of virtual reality configurations
available. However, intensive use of virtual reality technology leads to loss of performance if you are using
only one graphics pipe.

This scenario shows you how to run a multipiped session manually, which is the basic mode. This mode
requires you to use the CATMPKConfig variable and to create and edit the configuration file referenced by the
variable.
However, an alternate (and more convenient) method is to use the Immersive System Assistant workbench
that enables you to generate automatically your configuration file.

MPK version 3.1 libraries are required to run multipiped sessions on SGI IRIX.
If these libraries are not installed, you will not be able to launch a multiscreen session.

You can also put the libmpk.so.3 library directly in your irix_a/code/bin directory.

For detailed information, you can browse the following Web site:

http://www.sgi.com/software/multipipe/sdk/

What is a "pipe" and what is the difference between a single and multipipe
system?

A "pipe" in this context refers to the graphics board associated with each single window into an application. It
also refers to the data that is placed by the application which owns the pipe.

You can also have a single pipe feeding three

display channels like this:

Nothing prevents you from using virtual reality

configurations with just one pipe, the problem is
that the overhead of running multiple applications
in a single piped system can result in very poor
performance.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 920

In a "multipipe" system, you can have several graphics boards, and each graphics board feeds a different
display channel. Each application in a " multipipe" system has its own distinct pipe to the graphics hardware.
There is a price to pay in memory usage and a very slight price to pay in computer overhead to manage the
multiple pipes, but the overall positive effect on system performance is dramatic.

Performance can be enhanced even further if you are running workstations using multiple processors, which
allow "multithreading" of applications.

Note that:
● the Version 5 infrastructure for UNIX platforms provides support for 16 windows maximum
● one window/pipe can be assigned to two threads (2 CPUs).

A typical configuration is an SGI Onyx2 or SGI Onyx 3000 workstation using four graphics pipes. You run a
main Version 5 session using one pipe from a workstation, and create three secondary windows (each one
using its own graphics pipe) for projection onto a Reality Center-type projection screen, or inside a virtual
reality CAVE.

1. Log onto the Onyx workstation.

2. Run the following command to display graphics subsystem information about your configuration:

/usr/gfx/gfxinfo

This command displays information (display name, resolution, etc.) about each graphics pipe like
this:

Graphics board 0 is "KONAL" graphics.

Managed (":0.0") 1280x1024
...
Graphics board 1 is "KONAL" graphics.
Managed (":0.1") 1280x1024
...
Graphics board 0 is "KONAL" graphics.
Managed (":0.2") 1280x1024
...
Graphics board 1 is "KONAL" graphics.
Managed (":0.3") 1280x1024
...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 921

3. Synchronize the graphics pipes with the video channels in your configuration by running the program:

/usr/gfx/ircombine

Refer to your IRIX documentation for more information about the ircombine program.

4. Export the following environment variable:

export CATMPKConfig=path/myconfigfile

where "path" is the path of a directory and "myconfigfile" is the name of a configuration file which
you must create and edit to set up the secondary windows and assign them to different graphics
pipes and displays.

Version 5 supports OpenGL Multipipe SDK technology (MPK). The MPK library is developped by SGI
to manage multi-channel display configurations.
Selecting View > Full Screen switches on and off the Version 5 multichannel and the MPK support.
The prerequisite is that the environment variable, i.e. CATMPKConfig is valuated to a configuration
file path before running the application.

Using MPK Version 5 provides powerful support for many virtual reality configurations:

● active or passive stereo

● decompositions, such as Stereo (Eye), DPLEX, 2D
● all multi-screen/multi-projector configurations such as TAN Holobench, Fakespace CAVE, etc.
● viewpoint tracking on all screens.

5. Edit the configuration file.

6. Save your changes to the configuration file, then start your main Version 5 session.

7. In your main session, run the command, select View > Full Screen.

The video output displayed inside your main session is now projected coherently across the three
windows.

8. In your main session, right-click then clear Full Screen to exit Full Screen mode and stop multipiping.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 922

Note that you can use stereoscopic viewing from within a multipiped session.

Note also that in CAVE configuration, you can increase the specular lighting accuracy by selecting
Enable OpenGL local viewer lighting in Tools > Options > General > Display >
Performances.
Be aware that this may lead to a loss of performance.

Calibrating the multi-channel support

First of all, let's remind us of the SGI pipe and channel architecture.

An SGI computer as an Octane or an Onyx may host several graphic boards, named pipes. A same application
can render images on all of these pipes. A pipe has a frame buffer in which the application write the images
they compute. More precisely, each application writes images in windows that are sub-parts of the frame
buffer.

On the video output side, the system reads the pipes frame buffer and generate video signals. There is one
video signal per active channel. Each pipe may host several channels. Each channel is positioned on a part of a
pipe frame buffer, and a video signal generated display this particular part.

The important caracteristic of the system is the number of pipes, their frame buffer size (called "managed
area"), the number of channel per pipe, their corresponding frame buffer sub area and the video signal format
they output.

You get the system information by typing /usr/gfx/gfxinfo in a shell. You can modify your system configuration
using the "setmon" or "ircombine" commands. They enable you to change the pipe-managed area size, the
activated channels on each pipe, their frame buffer part as well as their video format. Report to the SGI
documentation to use these commands.

The pipes are usually named ":0.0" , ":0.1" , ":0.2" ..., unless you have several X Servers, in which case they
are named ":0.0", ":0.1" ... on X Server 0, ":1.0", ":1.1",..., on X server 1 ....
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 923
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 924

On the scheme above, the system has two pipes and six channels per pipe. Only two are activated on each
pipe. The pipe-managed areas are 2560x2000.

The Pipe 0, channel 0 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0,0).
The Pipe 0, channel 1 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0.5,0).
The Pipe 1, channel 0 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0,0).
The Pipe 1, channel 1 is associated to an area of size 1280x1024, and located at the coordinate (0.5,0).

The channel video format are 1280x1024 at 96Hz stereo for instance.

Version 5 renders 3D images in four windows. Two of them are on pipe 0, and the other two on pipe 1. Among
these windows, one is particular: this is the main document window which appears within the application
frame. The other windows are called "auxiliary windows". If the user goes to the "FullScreen" mode, a
complete image of the model will appear on the screen.

All the information Version 5 needs for such a configuation are in a configuration file (refer to SGI MPK
support).
However, the system should also be correctly set up using ircombine or setmon.

Also, since this system outputs active stereo, the pipes need to be "genlocked". This means that their video
refresh are synchronized. This is necessary for the stereo glasses to work corrrectly. You should refer to the
SGI support for genlocking your system.

For instance, to set up the system, you can run the following script in a shell. You need the administrator
privileges. This script will log you out and may badly affect the system if there is an error in it.

echo "Pipe 0 INTERNAL (master). Setting ..."

/usr/gfx/ircombine \
-target :0.0 \
-destination eeprom \
-global syncsource=INTERNAL,size=2560x2000 \
-channel 0 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=0+0 \
-channel 1 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=1280+0
echo "done."

echo "Pipe 1 EXTERNAL (slave). Setting ..."

/usr/gfx/ircombine \
-target :0.1 \
-destination eeprom \
-global syncsource=EXTERNAL,syncformat=1280x1024_96s,size=2560x2000 \
-channel 0 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=0+0 \
-channel 1 format=1280x1024_96s,sync=RGB,sourceloc=1280+0
echo "done."
echo

(/usr/gfx/stopgfx;/usr/gfx/startgfx)&
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 925

To run V5 with such a configuration file, type in a shell:

export CATMPKConfig={complete path of the config file}

then, in this same shell, run Version 5:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn/irix_a/command/catstart -env {EnvName} -direnv {environment path name}

where "n" is the release number.

View > Full Screen uses the configuration file pointed by the CATMPKConfig environment variable.To have a
full undertanding of the MPK config file format, please refer to the MPK documentation. Only a standard display
configuration will be taken as an example and detailed here.

Let's assume we have a cubic immersive space such as a Fakespace CAVE, or a Barco Cubic Immersive Space.
This system has four walls. All of them are square. The length of each square side is 3 meters long. There are
four projectors displaying active stereo (one projector per wall).

The computer has two pipes and six channels per pipe. It is set (ircombine) so that:

● The pipe-managed areas are 2560x1024

● Pipe 0 channel 0 goes to the front wall. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (0,0)
● Pipe 0 channel 1 goes to the right wall. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (1280,0)
● Pipe 1 channel 0 goes to the left wall. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (0,0)
● Pipe 1 channel 1 goes to the floor. Its size is 1280x1024. Its location is (1280,0)

The mpk file writes as follows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 926
global This is the global section where you set some global
options.
{
MPK_WATTR_PLANES_ALPHA 1
Always specify the MPK_WATTR_HINTS_STEREO
MPK_DEFAULT_EYE_OFFSET 57 option when using stereo. Set
MPK_WATTR_HINTS_STEREO 1 thMPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_HEIGHT and
MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_WIDTH to your
MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_HEIGHT 768 manage area size when using stereo.
MPK_DATTR_QUADSTEREO_WIDTH
1024 Set the "mode" to "stereo" or "mono" to activate or
not the stereoscopic rendering.
}
config
{
name "Config"
Declare the pipes you are using and specify their
mode stereo name.
mono [ "", none ]
In each pipe section, declare the windows Version 5
stereo [ "", quad ] will manage on these pipe (including the main
document window). The main document window
should always appear first in its pipe. If your run
pipe Version 5 in pipe X, the main document window will
use the paramaters of the window declared first in
{ the pipe X section of the configuration file.
display ":0.0"
The window viewport specifies the window size and
window position within the pipe frame buffer. The figures
correspond to a ratio of the managed area size :
{
[x,y,width.height].
name "left window"
You should always declare one channel per window,
viewport [0, 0, 1, 1 ]
and only one (Version 5 only support on channel per
channel window). The term channel may be confusiong since
it does not have the same meaning as the usual
{ pipe channels. Just always declare the channel
viewport as [0,0,1,1]. Then, specify the coordinates
name "left view"
of the wall corners. This window image will then be
viewport [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ] supposed to be projected onto the corresponding
wall, fitting exactly the rectangle described by the
wall coordinates.
{
The coordinates should be expressed in the MPK
bottom_left [-1828.8, -1524, 1828.8 ] reference frame. Use the same unit as the unit.
bottom_right [-1828.8, -1524, -1828.8
] The default eye position is defined by this reference
frame. This means that if you use the View->Full
top_left [-1828.8, 1524, 1828.8 ] Screen command without head tracking, the point of
}
view will be computed for a user standing with its
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 927

head at this reference frame origin, looking along its

} -Z axis, and with its right on the positive X axis
} side.

window Since it is usually better to define the system front

{ wall as the one naturally seen by the default head
position, the MPK reference frame is chosen so that
name "front window" this front wall is on its -Z axis side.

viewport [0, 0, 1, 1 ]
Bear also in mind that the interaction with the
channel model is only possible within the main window. In
particular, this is the case of the viewpoint
{ manipulation with the mouse.
name "front view" Thus, the front wall is usually set as the main
document window.
viewport [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ]

wall Here, we get :

{
bottom_left [-1828.8, -1524, -1828.8 ]

bottom_right [1828.8, -1524, -1828.8 ]

top_left [-1828.8, 1524, -1828.8 ]

}
}
}

}
pipe
{
display ":0.1"
window
{
name "right window"
viewport [0, 0, 1, 1 ]

channel
{
name "right view"

viewport [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ]

wall
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 928
{
bottom_left [1828.8, -1524, -1828.8 ]

bottom_right [1828.8, -1524, 1828.8 ]

top_left [1828.8, 1524, -1828.8 ]

}
}
}
window
{
name "floor window"
viewport [0, 0, 1, 1 ]

channel
{
name "floor view"
viewport [ 0., 0., 1., 1. ]

wall
{
bottom_left [-1828.8, -1524, 1828.8 ]

bottom_right [1828.8, -1524, 1828.8

]

top_left [-1828.8, -1524, -1828.8 ]

}
}

}
}
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 929

Working With the Immersive System Assistant

In this task, you will learn how to access and use the Immersive System Assistant workbench in order to
configure your Virtual Reality devices and display system.

Within this workbench, the various elements (screens, trackers, etc.) any reality center hardware installation
is made of are graphically represented and this visual feedback enables you to create, edit and delete very
easily the necessary data.

These data will then be used to generate automatically an XML configuration file via a command provided by
the Immersive System Assistant workbench, thus avoiding a "painful" manual edition.
From V5R13 onwards, all drivers and brokers supported by Version 5 are threaded which means that there is
no need to run external processes anymore.
In addition to that, all the necessary MPK display configuration data (including those related to the threaded
brokers and drivers) are now grouped together into a single configuration file saved in XML format. These
data will then be used when starting up your Version 5 session to run the broker and the driver automatically
with the appropriate configuration.

However, note that you can still run drivers and brokers manually as before if needed, for instance when
using external drivers or when running a driver on a remote computer.

Real Time Rendering 2 (RTR) users can access and use the Immersive System Assistant workbench.
However, a P3 license is required to be able to use tracking stations and trackers.

1. Access the Immersive System Assistant workbench by selecting the Start menu then Infrastructure-

>Immersive System Assistant . The Immersive System Assistant workbench opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 930

This workbench lets you create and manipulate several types of objects:

● graphic board (or IG for "image generator")

● window
● view (either screen or camera)
● head
● hand picking device
● tracking station
● tracker.

Note that the head, the hand picking device and the trackers are automatically managed and thus,
cannot be deleted.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 931

2. Click the New IG icon to create a graphic board (you can modify the default name by entering
a new name in the Display field):

3. Click the Toggle the plan view on icon to display the graphic board symbol in the current
window.

You can then hide the graphic board by clicking again this icon.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create another graphic board and display it in the current window. The

geometry area now looks like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 932

5. You are now going to create a rendering specification using the New View icon. This opens the
View Properties dialog box which lets you define the type of view you wish to use as well as its

properties:

You can choose between a screen view or a camera view:

● screen: use it when the viewpoint to render is defined by the user moving
in front of a fixed screen
● camera: use it when the viewpoint to render is attached to the head of the
user, like a camera (such as a head-mounted display).

Screen View

1. Click the tab you will use to set the screen properties, either:

● Screen Corners
Enter the coordinates of three screen corners (upper left corner,
lower left corner and lower right corner)
● Field of view
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 933

The H fov and V fov fields represent the horizontal and vertical field of view (in
degrees), respectively.
The H shift and V shift fields let you translate the screen horizontally and vertically.
The Head field defines the horizontal rotation of the screen around the head.
The Pitch field defines the vertical rotation of the screen around the head.
The Distance field defines the distance (in millimeters) to the head.

● Screen size

The Width and Height fields correspond to the screen width and height, respectively.
The Head field defines the horizontal rotation of the screen around the head.
The Pitch field defines the vertical rotation of the screen around the head.
The Center area lets you set the coordinates of the screen center.

Once you entered values in a tab, the values of the two other tabs are automatically updated
accordingly. You can then pass from one tab to another very easily.

Camera View

1. Click the Frustum tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 934

"Frustum" is a truncated pyramid representing the angular definition of the field of view
for a distance equal to 1. Enter the desired values in millimeters for Left, Right, Top and
Bottom.

2. Click the Field of view tab:

The H fov and V fov fields represent the horizontal and vertical field of view (in
degrees), respectively.
The H shift and V Shift fields let you translate the screen horizontally and vertically.

6. Click OK when satisfied with your screen definition.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to create another screen view.

Note: you can modify the screen properties at anytime by double-clicking the screen in the
geometry area or in the specification tree.

The result looks something like this (depending on the values you enter):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 935

8. Click the Snap icon to snap one of the screens to the other. To to so, select an edge of the
screen to be snapped then an edge of the other screen:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 936

You can also snap the 3D compass to a screen view to manipulate it very easily as shown below:

Note that the compass cannot be snapped to camera views.

The next step is to render the specifications in a window.

A window can be defined as an OpenGL rendering zone for a defined viewpoint and is located in

the graphic board frame buffer. The specification of the viewpoint to render in a window is called a

"view". As a consequence, each window points to a view, either a screen view or a camera view

depending on the viewpoint to render.

9. Click the New Window icon to open the Window Properties dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 937

10. Give a name to the new window (or leave the default name) and set is as your referenced window by

clicking the Main Window option.

The main window is the window which is always visible in Version 5 (the other windows being

created "on the fly" when you run the View->Full Screen command).

11. Select the associated graphic board in the geometry area or in the specification tree. The IG field will

be automatically updated accordingly.

12. Select the view the window will point to. The View field will be automatically updated accordingly.

13. In the Viewport area, indicate the portion of the graphic board you are going to use. To do so, enter

the desired coordinates in the Left, Top, Width and Height fields.

"0.00" means the view will be located in top left corner

"1.00" means the view will be located in bottom right corner.

Default window User-defined window

Left=0.00 Left=0.33
Top=0.00 Top=0.15
Width=1.00 Width=0.57
Height=1.00 Height=0.68

14. Specify the Rendering Mode:

● Mono: only the cyclop viewpoint is rendered

● Left and Right eye: these modes are used for passive stereo display systems in which left eye

and right eye images are displayed simultaneously on the screen. Image separation is

performed by filtering glasses using polarized light, for instance

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 938

● Active Stereo: left eye and right eye images are alternatively displayed on the screen at twice

the refresh rate. An active pair of glasses with two shutters working in synchronization with the

images is needed. Synchronization is often achieved using an infrared emitter: the left eye

shutter is closed when the right eye image is displayed, and reciprocally.

15. Use the Mirror Mode field if you want to create a symmetry and define the axis with respect to which

the reflected image should be inverted.

Note that you can also create a symmetry using the projector.

16. Click Apply then OK to validate and close the dialog box.

Now let's go to modifying the head properties!

17. Double-click either the head in the geometry area or the Head item in the specification tree to open

the Head edition dialog box:

● indicate the distance (in millimeters) between left eye and right eye in the Inter pupillary
distance field
● the Type field is relevant only when working with devices such as trackers
● define the Head position (in millimeters) along X, Y and V axes
● define the head orientation in the Heading field
● set the vertical rotation of the head in the Pitch field
● set the horizontal rotation of the head in the Roll field.

The head position and orientation you define in this dialog box correspond to the default head
position and orientation relative to the screens when the head is not tracked.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 939

18. Click OK to validate.

If you do not use trackers, it is now time to generate your configuration file.

For those who use trackers, a few additional operations need to be carried out before generating
the configuration file. Skip the steps below and jump to step 24.

19. Click the Configure VR System icon. The following dialog box appears:

The Generate VR Configuration dialog box lets you:

● choose the directory in which the configuration file will be saved. You can either enter a path
directly in the field or click the the Browse button then navigate to the desired directory using
the Select VR Configuration dialog box

Note if you set the DLName document environment as your current environment in the Tools-
>Options->General->Document tab (by selecting "DLName" in the Document Environment column
then clicking the Allowed and Current buttons), clicking the Browse button will open the
DLName dialog box instead of the usual Select VR Configuration dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 940

The DLName dialog box displays the list of DLNames that have been defined in the Document tab.
You just need to select the DLName to be used to store your configuration file then click OK to
validate.

Refer to Defining DLNames paragraph in "Document" tab page customizing task in Infrastructure User's
Guide.

● set the configuration as the current one by clicking the "Set as current VR Configuration"
option: this means that this configuration will be used to run the driver and the broker when
restarting your session
● add the configuration to the list of configurations displayed in the Tools->Options->General-
>Devices and Virtual Reality->Devices tab.

Note that the configuration name cannot be modified in this dialog box. To modify the name,
double-click the configuration in the specification tree then, in the VR Configuration Properties
dialog box, replace the default name "Config" with the new name before clicking OK:

20. Click OK to validate and close the Generate VR Configuration dialog box.

The XML file is generated and saved in the directory you specified. A warning message informs you

that you need to restart your session to take this modification into account.

21. Exit your Version 5 session.

22. Restart a Version 5 session which is now correctly configured.

23. Switch to Full Screen mode by selecting the View->Full Screen command.

You are now ready to start!

If you want to use trackers, here are the additional steps you need to follow:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 941

24. Click the Create New Tracking Station icon to create the tracking station your trackers will
be associated to and to define the type of tracker to be used.

The tracking Station Properties dialog box opens:

25. Type a Name (or leave the default) then specify the Type of the driver you intend to use (either

Polhemus or IS900), serial communication Port number the driver is connected to as well as the

communication Baud Rate on the serial port.

You can now choose a Flock of Birds or ART driver in the Type list.

Note: in case you choose a Version 5 compatible driver of your own (i.e. a "Custom" type), a new
field will appear to the right asking you for the corresponding daemon name.

26. Indicate the Position of the tracking station.

27. Indicate the tracking station:

● orientation in the Heading field

● vertical rotation in the Pitch field
● horizontal rotation in the Roll field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 942

28. In the Trackers area, identify the trackers to be connected to the tracking station by checking the

corresponding figure.

Once you validated the tracking station definition, the tracking station and the trackers it is
associated to are displayed in the geometry area.

In our example, we created a tracking station with two trackers:

29. Double-click the head in the geometry area or the Head item in the specification tree to open the

Head edition dialog box then specify the head type.

The next step is to edit the tracker. To do so:

30. Double-click the tracker symbol in the geometry area or the number of the tracker you wish to edit in

the specification tree.

This opens the Tracker Edition dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 943

31. Select the Tracked Element from the pull-down list. The tracker may be attached to the head, the

hand or another device.

When several trackers are associated to the tracked element, activate the Viewpoint Manager
option to indicate which tracker will be used.
For hand tracking, this option is named Picking Manager.

A tracker may be set as "Button Manager" when this tracker can also be used as a button device
(for instance the IS900 or the ART tracker). Checking this option means that the button device will
be used by the VRCursor command.

When the tracked element is selected, the tracker is attached to the corresponding element
symbol in the geometry area and the color of the sphere changes according to the type of
tracking:

Hand tracking Head tracking

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 944

32. If you are tracking hand or head, click the button to automatically generate the matrices and
set the standard, i.e. right, position for the tracker depending on the type of tracking station and

tracked element.

The tracker symbol may be grayed out and dotted if the matrices can be automatically calculated

and if the information you entered does not match those we recommend.

If you want to define by yourself the tracker position, jump to the next step.

33. If you choose a "custom" tracker, the position and orientation data define the virtual tracker viewed

by Version 5. These data correspond to the offset of the virtual tracker in relation to the physical

tracker.

The button is activated to let you define the tracker position in the device as well as its
orientation:

● the Heading field lets you define the tracker orientation

● the Pitch field lets you define the vertical rotation
● the Roll field lets you define the horizontal rotation.

34. Click the New Button Device icon to access the Button Device Properties dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 945

You have to specify the following information:

● enter the name of the button device in the Name field

● select the device type in the Type pulldown list: CUSTOM, Mike, NeoWand or SpaceStick
● indicate the Dameon name.
● Button Manager: check this option if you want the button device to be used by the VRCursor
command.
This capability is relevant for hand button devices onto which a tracker has been fixed, such as
the Fakespace Neowand, the Virtual Presence SpaceStick, the ICIDO Mike, etc. In that case,
you need to define a button device independently from the tracker.

35. Generate the configuration files by clicking the Generate Configuration Files icon. For
detailed information, refer to step 19 and repeat steps 19 to 22.

36. The next step depends on the driver and broker you are using:

● if you are using a non-threaded broker and driver, you need to run them manually using the

generated XML configuration file. The broker must be run first then, the driver. For detailed

information on the commands to run, refer to Head Tracking or Hand Tracking according to the

type of tracking you want to perform.

Then, you can restart a Version 5 session

● if you are using a threaded broker and driver, you can directly restart a Version 5 session: the

driver is automatically run with the appropriate configuration.

37. In your Version 5 session, click the Test viewpoint and VR cursor tracking icon to test
either hand or head tracking, or even both if needed.

The Test tracking window appears and indicates for which tracking the current session is configured.

38. Specify the type of tracking you want to test (if your session is configured for both head and hand

tracking) then click the Start button to validate.

As you use your tracking device, the tracker representation will move accordingly on screen.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 946

Using Head and Hand Tracking Devices in Version

5

This task aims at giving you a general overview of the necessary virtual reality devices as well as two
application examples for head tracking and hand tracking. This is the basic method requiring a manual
configuration.
All the drivers supported by Version 5 can still be run as standalone processes (as explained further in this
section) but as they are now threaded, you can also activate them using the Immersive System Assistant
workbench which enables you to generate a configuration file containing all the necessary data. These data
will then be used to run the broker and the driver automatically when starting Version 5.

Device Overview
Head Tracking
Hand Tracking

Device Overview
Using efficiently Virtual Reality services implies that you fully understand the Virtual Reality architecture.
To do so, let's have a quick look at the following scheme:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 947

The virtual reality devices which can be handled are connected to Version 5 through a socket
communication mechanism involving three actors: Version 5, a broker and a device driver.

Version 5 requires a broker to be able to use device drivers. A broker is a small application holding all the
running driver communication port. This broker application always runs on the same computer as Version
5, whereas the drivers can run on another computer or another operating system.
Each driver declares itself to the broker thus implying that the broker should always be running before
running a driver.

Broker and driver applications can be standalone processes or run within the Version 5 process (they are
threaded processes). Some drivers may be threaded or not, depending on the devices. As a consequence,
you can use either a threaded or standalone driver with a standalone broker.
To run a standalone broker or driver, you need to execute it explicitly, whereas running a threaded broker
or driver only requires they be activated via the Devices tab in Tools > Options > Devices and Virtual
Reality.

Prior to using head or hand tracking in Version 5, you need to set up these actors proceeding the following
way:

1. Start the broker.

The broker role is to list and store any device declaration and to provide this list to Version 5 when

requested. The broker must be started on the same host as the one of Version 5 session.

2. Start the driver.

The driver will declare itself to the instantiated broker and will answer Version 5 when an event

enumeration or an event sending is requested.

The driver may be launched on a different host as the one of the Version 5 session.

The driver sends events to the Version 5 application. Here are the four event types used:

● POSITION_EVENT for the tracker position and orientation in space

● VIEWPORT_EVENT for the coordinates of the screen corners as well as the letf and right eye
position
● ButtonPress which for the press button number
● ButtonRelease for the released button number.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 948

3. Start a Version 5 session.

When started, Version 5 will ask the broker for a list of devices and will ask each device for an

event enumeration. In the meantime, these devices will be asked to start or stop event sending.

Head tracking

There are two kinds of head tracking:

● camera tracking in which the tracking acts as if a camera moves in the model. The displayed image is
the one filmed by the camera. In that case, the rendering projection pyramid keeps its original shape.
This tracking is typically used for head mounted display or to simulate a camera
● asymetrical tracking in which an image is computed and displayed on a screen that should be
considered as being fixed in relation to the model, although you move in relation to the screen.
This tracking is used for displaying images on fix screens and making the user feels as if the model
were steady in the room as he moves in it.

The camera tracking functionality requires a POSITION_EVENT or a symetric VIEWPORT_EVENT

(head mounted display type).
The asymetrical tracking functionality requires a POSITION_EVENT if the SGI multipipe
management system is running, otherwise a VIEWPORT_EVENT.

When using a POSITION_EVENT, the head tracking requires the POSITION_EVENT X axis to be
in the same direction as the vector defined by (Left Eye, Right Eye):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 949

If the tracker is not fixed on the stereo glasses so that X is well aligned, you will need to aks the
driver to apply an offset matrix.

If several matching events are available, a window will prompt you to choose an event when
launching the VRViewTracking command: just select the event corresponding to the tracker
dedicated to head tracking. You can also identify the convenient event thanks to its type and
emitter driver name.

The following examples detail the viewpoint tracking installation procedures using a Polhemus Fastrak
sensor and an IRIX platform.

The Version 5 driver managing the Polhemus Fastrak is a standalone (i.e. non threaded) driver named
"PolExecDaemon".

1. The first step is to edit a configuration file to adapt it to your own configuration.

The configuration file holds necessary information for the driver: the communication baud rate
on the serial port, the serial port number, the events to send, the matrix you could use to
virtually offset the trackers from their mounting point, the screen definition and the eye position
for the VIEWPORT_EVENT.

Two examples of configuration files are detailed in this task but bear in mind that there are no
specific settings for using the Polhemus Fastrak. The dip switch on the Polhemus box should
correspond to what is declared in the configuration file.
For your information, the settings used in Dassault Systèmes are:

Select (number of devices): Down Up Up Up (one sensor only)

I/O Select: Up Up Up Down Down Up (serial port 115200 bps).

Be careful to use always the same hemisphere during viewpoint tracking. Refer to the Polhemus
documentation for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 950

The Immersive Assistant workbench enables you to generate automatically the necessary
configuration file for head tracking. For detailed information, refer to Working With the
Immersive System Assistant in this guide.
However, you can still edit the configuration file manually, if desired. To do so, follow the
instructions detailed below.

Example 1

Let's describe a configuration file assuming you use a Polhemus Fastrak for tracking both head
and hand. Your display system is a bench or a multi-channel display and you use the View >
Full Screen.
In this case, you need the driver to send two POSITION_EVENTs.

The # symbol indicates a comment in the configuration file and the opposite text explains each of
the following instructions:

SERIALPORT "COM1" Specify the serial communication port

BPS 38400 number. You can use either COM1, COM2 or
TRACKER 0 POSITION_EVENT COM3.
TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT
Specify the communication baud rate with
the Polhemus Fastrak. Usual baud rates are
38400 and 115200.
#Intersense Head Tracker
MATRIX 0 Here you can type as many lines as events
[0,1,0]
you need. Specify the tracker number: a
[0,0,-1]
[-1,0,0] Polhemus Fastrak has up to four trackers
[0,0,0] plugged in. Specify the desired event for
each tracker. You can choose among four
types of events by selecting them using the
keywords POSITION_EVENTS,
VIEWPORT_EVENT, BUTTON_PRESS and
#Intersense Wand
BUTTON_RELEASE. You can ask for different
MATRIX 1
[0,1,0]
events on the same tracker number.
[0,0,-1]
[-1,0,0] Specify the matrix to be applied to the
[0,0,0] POSITION_EVENT coming from tracker 0.
This matrix means that the drivers will send
SCREEN to the application the Y-tracker axis as X
{ axis, the Z-tracker axis as Y axis and the X-
UPPERLEFT [-700, 300, -430]
tracker axis as Z axis.
UPPERRIGHT [-700, 300, 430]
LOWERRIGHT [-700, 900, 430]
} If you do not apply any matrix, use an
identity matrix.
Keep a screen section (detailed hereafter)
even though it is not used.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 951
Now, suppose you want to use the Polhemus Fastrak to track both hand and head without using
the MPK functionality. In this case, you will need asymetrical tracking just as you have done it
before but, as you will not use mpconfig, you will need the driver to send a POSITION_EVENT for
the hand and a VIEWPORT_EVENT for the head.

The configuration file will then look like this:

SERIALPORT "COM1" For the VIEWPORT_EVENT, you need to

BPS 115200 specify the corner coordinates of the
TRACKER 0 VIEWPORT_EVENT projection screens. These coordinates are to
TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT
MATRIX 1
be expressed within the same reference
[0,0,1] frame (R0) as the data sent by the tracker.
[1,0,0]
[0,1,0]
[0,0,0]

The screen is assumed to be rectangular.

SCREEN
{
UPPERLEFT [-700, 300, -430] You also need to specify the eye position in
UPPERRIGHT [-700, 300, 430] the mobile tracker reference frame.
LOWERRIGHT [-700, 900, 430] We call "mobile tracker reference frame" the
} reference frame defined by the x, y, z, h, p
and r coordinates sent by the tracker.
Express these coordinates in millimeters.
LEFTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 61.0]
RIGHTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 124.0]

Here is some additional information on the above-mentioned parameters:

● MATRIX
Polhemus will send an event to PolExecDaemon driver which has been defined in the axis
system of the transmitter. In turn, PolExecDaemon will send an event to Version 5 but this
event will be modified using the matrix you applied. Generally, the matrix is used for sending
POSITION_EVENT thus, in case you are only using VIEWPORT_EVENT, the matrix parameter
is not mandatory

● SCREEN
This parameter defines the coordinates of the visualization screen in the Polhemus axis
system. The screen coordinates have to been measured manually. The result depends on the
the position and orientation of the Polhemus transmitter.
For instance, suppose you are using a transmitter positioned in front of the screen with X
pointing out the screen, Y down and Z right (cf. the Axis system engraved on the Polhemus
transmitter box). In this case, you get coordinates where X is constant and negative and the
other values vary along the YZ plane. This corresponds to the values detailed in the above
example:

SCREEN
{
UPPERLEFT [-700, 300, -430]
UPPERRIGHT [-700, 300, 430]
LOWERRIGHT [-700, 900, 430]
}
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 952

● LEFTEYE and RIGHTEYE

These parameters lets you define the position of the eyes in the mobile tracker axis system.
The result depends on how the Polhemus sensor is attached to the user's head.
For instance, you can attach the Polhemus sensor to the left branch of the steroe glasses
which means that X points to the screen, Y is up and Z goes from left eye to right eye. This
axis system corresponds to the default as explained in the Polhemus manual (refer to the
Polhemus Fastrak User's Manual Revision F for detailed information). In that case, the eyes
are aligned exactly on the Z axis of the sensor and the coordinates you get correspond to
those detailed in the above example:

LEFTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 61.0]

RIGHTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 124.0]

These coordinates have to be measured manually.

Example 2

Let's take a look at a second example and consider the following case: you want to use the
Polhemus Fastrak to track both hand and head and your display system is a Head Mounted
Display.
You will thus need a camera type tracking. You also need the driver to send a POSITION_EVENT
for the hand and either a POSITION_EVENT or a VIEWPORT_EVENT for the head. If the driver
sends a POSITION_EVENT for the head, no stereo viewing is available and you need to adjust
the viewpoint angle for your head mounted display in Version 5. To do so, create a named view
by selecting View > Named Views then edit its properties.
Note: you cannot adjust its ratio in case the head mounted display optics are not symmetric.

This camera is saved in the .CATProduct file under the application node. The POSITION_EVENT
must have its X axis going to the right, its Y axis up and its Z axis backwards.
Otherwise (as we explained it before), you have to ask the driver to apply a rotation matrix. You
can use the first configuration file for this system.

In case you use a VIEWPORT_EVENT, the configuration file should be as follows:

SERIALPORT "COM1" Use this section to describe the HMD fields of

BPS 115200 view. Describe the desired virtual projection
TRACKER 0 VIEWPORT_EVENT pyramid.
TRACKER 1 POSITION_EVENT
MATRIX 1 All the figures are to be expressed in the
[0,0,1] mobile tracker (fixed on the head) reference
[1,0,0] frame centered between right and left eye.
[0,1,0] For instance, if the tracker is mounted such
[0,0,0] as Z is going down and Y forward, the
coordinates are as shown below:
HMDSCREEN
{
UPPERLEFT [700, -900, -720]
UPPERRIGHT [700, 900, -720]
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 953

LOWERRIGHT [700, 900, 720]

}

LEFTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 61.0]

RIGHTEYE [0.0, 0.0, 124.0]

Here, the pixel ratio is 1.25.

We recommend you to pay attention to the coordinates you enter. The more careful you are, the
better the results will be.

2. Run the Virtual Reality broker using the following command:

/.../B16/irix_a/code/command/catstart -run CATVisVRBroker

where /.../ is the Version 5 installation path. For a standard installation, the path should be
/usr/DassaultSystemes.

3. Run the tracker device driver for viewpoint tracking:

/.../B16/irix_a/code/command/catstart -run PolExecDaemon -object computer_name

configuration_file

where "configuration_file" is the full path name of the configuration you edited in step 1 and
"computer_name" is the name of the computer.

This driver may be used with any device compliant with the Fastrak protocol.

4. Start Version 5:

/.../B16/irix_a/code/command/catstart
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 954

If you want to use stereoscopic viewing, you have to perform Steps 5 to 12 otherwise, jump to
Step 13.

5. Select Tools > Options > General > Display then click the Visualization.

6. In the Stereo enable area, click On option.

7. Click OK to validate your parameters.

8. Restart Version 5.

9. In the power input field, enter the following command:

c:stereoscopic

10. Click OK.

11. In the power input field, enter:

c:VRViewTracking

The Viewpoint Tracking is activated. It can be simply deactivated by re-entering the

c:VRViewTracking command in the power input field

Before using this command, make sure that a driver is running and able to send
POSITION_EVENT or VIEWPORT_EVENT.

Intersense

Since the Intersense firmware protocol is an enriched Fastrak protocol, the PolExecDaemon
Version 5 driver can communicate with an Intersense IS900 tracker.
The above-mentioned instructions are still valid in this case.
In addition, the Intersense IS900 supports a Wand hand tracker. This specific hand tracker has
four buttons the driver is able to decode as ButtonPress and ButtonRelease events.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 955

To configure the driver with these two events, use the keywords BUTTON_PRESS and
BUTTON_RELEASE as explained above.

Use the following matrix in the PolExecDaemon driver so that the attached reference frame is as
required by the Version hand tracking functionality:

MATRIX 1
[0,1,0]
[0,0,-1]
[-1,0,0]
[0,0,0]

Ascension Flock of Birds

The Ascension Flock of Birds tracking system driver is now supported for head tracking on
Windows and UNIX. Note that from V5R13 onwards, you do not need to install the Bird.dll library
anymore.
This driver allows to measure in real time the position and orientation of several bodies in space.
It can be used as a standalone executable (called "CATFlockOfBirdsDriver") or as a threaded
driver.

To use this driver as a standalone process, follow the instructions below:

On Windows

Go to the following installation directory

\install_root\intel_a\code\command

and enter the command:

catstart -run CATFlockOfBirdsDriver [-f Frequency] [-com SerialPortNumber] [-bps

SerialPortSpeed] [-host BrokerHostName] [-m TransformationMatrix] [-n NumberofDevices] [-
mouse DeviceNumber]
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 956

On UNIX

Go to the following installation directory

/install_root/OS_a/code/command

where "OS_a" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● irix_a
● solaris_a.

and enter the command:

./catstart -run CATFlockOfBirdsDriver [-f Frequency] [-com SerialPortNumber] [-bps

SerialPortSpeed] [-host BrokerHostName] [-m TransformationMatrix] [-n NumberofDevices] [-
mouse DeviceNumber]

Below is a description of the arguments:

-f Event sending frequency from the CATFlockOfBirdsDriver to the Version 5

session.
If not specified, a default value of 100 Hz is used
-com Serial port number to which the Flock of Birds is connected.
If not specified, a default value of 1 is used, meaning "COM1" on Windows
systems.
-bps Serial port speed.
If not specified, the driver tries to connect to the Flock of Birds at the speed
of 115200 bps.
-host Name of the host on which the CATVisVRBroker is running.
If not specified, LocalHost is assumed.

-m Position and orientation received from the Flock of Birds are multiplied by
this matrix before being sent to the Version 5 session. The matrix should be
described in lines using the following format:
-m [m11,m12,m13][m21,m22,m23][m31,m32,m33]
If not specified, the Identity matrix is assumed.

-n Number of Flock of Birds running at the same time.

If not specified, one Flock of Birds is assumed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 957

-mouseDevice number of the Flock of Birds to which an Ascension 6D Mouse is

connected.
If not specified, no 6D Mouse is supposed to be used. The numbering of the
devices start with number 1.
-debug Activates the display of error messages.

However, bear in mind that this driver sends POSITION_EVENT only.

This driver is also supported for hand tracking.

ART Optical tracking system

Version 5 now supports the ART driver. This driver can be used as a standalone executable
(called "CATARTDriver") or as a threaded driver.

How does it work?

The ART Optical tracking system sends position and button information at a specific TCP/IP
address on a specified port number. The Version 5 driver reads this ethernet port and decode the
information before translating it. The translated information is then sent by the driver to the
Version 5 session in a Version 5 format.

To use this driver as a standalone process, enter the following command:

On Windows

installation_path\intel_a\code\command\catstart -run CATARTDriver -h

The "-h" option displays help information.

On UNIX

/install_path/OS_a/code/command/catstart -run CATARTDriver -h

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 958

where "OS_a" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● irix_a
● solaris_a.

Note that this driver sends:

● POSITION_EVENT
● BUTTON_EVENT
● SLIDER1_EVENT
● SLIDER2_EVENT.

This driver is also supported for hand tracking.

Hand tracking
The following two examples are designed for hand tracking using:
● a Joystick Spacestick VirtualPresence with a Polhemus sensor and the DMU Navigator 3 product
● a FakeSpace Neowand.

Note that the Immersive Assistant workbench enables you to generate automatically the necessary
configuration file for hand tracking.
However, you can still edit this file manually if desired. To do so, follow the instructions detailed below.

The VR Cursor command switches on and off the hand tracking functionality with the following
prerequisite: one or more drivers should be running and able to send a POSITION_EVENT, a ButtonPress
and a ButtonRelease. The command will look for the first driver able to send POSITION_EVENT then,
ButtonPress and ButtonEvent.

The POSITION_EVENT used for hand tracking should have its X axis pointing to the right, its Y axis up and
its Z axis backward as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 959

If the tracker is not fixed this way in the hand device, you will have to ask the driver to apply an offset
matrix.

When "On", hand tracking displays a red laser pointer. This pointer is collocated with the hand tracker so
that you really feels the pointer getting out of your hand.
This feeling is reinforced in stereoscopic display:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 960

The buttons enable you to pick within the model and to manipulate the viewpoint.
There are two manipulation modes: Examine mode and Fly mode. You can switch between the two simply
by running the VRFly command. The Examine mode is the default mode when running the VRCursor
command.

You can also move the model objects by snapping the 3D compass to them. The 3D compass will then
follow your hand moves.

Note: setting the compass to "Snap automatically to selected object" lets you snap the compass to any
objects you can pick with the laser pointer.

Now let's go to using hand tracking!

Joystick Spacestick

1. Run the PolExecDaemon.

2. Run the Joystick3DExecDaemon using the following command:

/.../B16/{OS_a}/code/command/catstart -run "Joystick3DExecDaemon brokerHost serialPort"

where

- /.../ is the Version 5 installation path. For a standard installation, the path should be
/usr/DassaultSystemes/
- {OS_a} is the name of your operating system (irix_a, etc.)
- brokerHost is the name of the computer on which the device broker and Version 5 are running
- serialPort is the port to which the joystick is connected (e.g.: COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4).

There is no configuration file for this driver.

Another method to run the driver is to first create an icon on your desktop, then drag the
Joystick3DExecDaemon.exe file from the explorer and drop it onto the desktop (this file can be
found in the installation directory, in intel_a\code\bin).
Edit the icon properties and modify the target file to
c:\...\intel_a\code\bin\Joystick3DExecDaemon.exe brokerHost serialPort.
Then, you just have to double-click the icon to run the driver.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 961

3. For the Polhemus version (a Polhemus tracker is fixed inside the joystick), use the following matrix

in the PolExecDaemon driver so that the attached reference frame matched the Version 5 hand

tracking functionality requirements:

MATRIX
[0,0,1]
[1,0,0]
[0,1,0]
[0,0,0]

The buttons are located as described on the picture below:

4. Run the DMU Immersive Review configuration then the DMU Navigator 3 product.

Fakespace Neowand

The Version 5 driver managing the Fakespace Neowand buttons is a standalone (i.e. non threaded) driver
named "CATNeoWandDriver".

1. Run the CATNeoWandDriver using the following command:.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 962

/.../{OS_a}/code/command/catstart -run CATNeoWandDriver brokerHost serialPort"

where

- /.../ is the Version 5 installation path. For a standard installation, the path should be
/usr/DassaultSystemes/Bn ("n" representing the release number)
- {OS_a} is the name of your operating system (irix_a, etc.)
- brokerHost is the name of the computer on which the device broker and Version 5 are running
- serialPort is the port to which the joystick is connected (e.g.: COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4).

There is no configuration file for this driver.

Another method to run the driver is to first create an icon on your desktop, then drag the
CATNeoWandDriver.exe file from the explorer and drop it onto the desktop (this file can be found
in the installation directory, in intel_a\code\bin).
Edit the icon properties and modify the target file to
c:\...\intel_a\code\bin\CATNeoWandDriver.exe BrokerHostName serialPort.
Then, you just have to double-click the icon to run the driver.

2. In case a Polhemus tracker is fixed inside the NeoWand, use the following matrix in the

PolExecDaemon driver so that the attached reference frame matches the Version 5 hand tracking

functionality requirements:

MATRIX
[0,1,0]
[0,0,-1]
[-1,0,0]
[0,0,0]

The buttons are located as shown in the picture below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 963

Click the thumbnail to see the full-size picture.

Icido Thready Motion Controller

In addition to the Fakespace Neowand, Version 5 supports Icido Thready Motion Controller (also known as
"Mike"). The driver managing this device is named "CATMikeDriver" and should be used the same way you
do with CATNeoWandDriver detailed above.

Ascension Flock of Birds

The Ascension Flock of Birds tracking system driver is now supported for hand tracking on Windows and
UNIX. Note that you do not need to install the Bird.dll library anymore.
This driver allows to measure in real time the position and orientation of several bodies in space. It can be
used as a standalone executable (called "CATFlockOfBirdsDriver") or as a threaded driver.

To use this driver as a standalone process, follow the instructions below:

On Windows

Go to the following installation directory

\install_root\intel_a\code\command

and enter the command:

catstart -run CATFlockOfBirdsDriver [-f Frequency] [-com SerialPortNumber] [-bps SerialPortSpeed] [-host
BrokerHostName] [-m TransformationMatrix] [-n NumberofDevices] [-mouse DeviceNumber]

On UNIX

Go to the following installation directory

/install_root/OS_a/code/command

where "OS_a" is:

● aix_a
● hpux_b
● irix_a
● solaris_a.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 964

and enter the command:

./catstart -run CATFlockOfBirdsDriver [-f Frequency] [-com SerialPortNumber] [-bps SerialPortSpeed] [-

host BrokerHostName] [-m TransformationMatrix] [-n NumberofDevices] [-mouse DeviceNumber]

Below is a description of the arguments:

-f Event sending frequency from the CATFlockOfBirdsDriver to the Version 5

session.
If not specified, a default value of 100 Hz is used
-com Serial port number to which the Flock of Birds is connected.
If not specified, a default value of 1 is used, meaning "COM1" on Windows
systems.
-bps Serial port speed.
If not specified, the driver tries to connect to the Flock of Birds at the speed
of 115200 bps.
-host Name of the host on which the CATVisVRBroker is running.
If not specified, LocalHost is assumed.

-m Position and orientation received from the Flock of Birds are multiplied by
this matrix before being sent to the Version 5 session. The matrix should be
described in lines using the following format:
-m [m11,m12,m13][m21,m22,m23][m31,m32,m33]
If not specified, the Identity matrix is assumed.

-n Number of Flock of Birds running at the same time.

If not specified, one Flock of Birds is assumed.

-mouseDevice number of the Flock of Birds to which an Ascension 6D Mouse is

connected.
If not specified, no 6D Mouse is supposed to be used. The numbering of the
devices start with number 1.
-debug Activates the display of error messages.

However, bear in mind that this driver sends POSITION_EVENT only.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 965

ART Optical tracking system

Version 5 now supports the ART driver for hand tracking. This driver is also supported for head tracking.

Tracking calibration

In case you intend to use a multi-channel display system with head tracking, you should add some
information related to the tracking sytem inside the MPK configuration file. These information should be
added at the end of the file, before the last closing bracket "}".
They should all begin with a comment symbol "#". Even though there are commented out, they are used
by Version 5. The only used information are those included in the "userdata" section. The measure unit for
all the numbers it the millimeter.

As required by the head tracking functionality, the mobile tracker reference frame should have its X axis
pointing right, its Y axis pointing up, and its Z axis pointing backward. However, it may not have its origin
located exactly between the two eyes. The "eye-offset" keyword enables you to specify the middle eye
point coordinates in this mobile tracker reference frame.

The fix tracker reference frame may be different from the MPK frame. Use the "tracker-X", "tracker-Y" and
"tracker-origin" keywords to specify it. In the example below, the fix tracker frame has its X axis pointing
backward., its Y axis pointing to the right and its origin directly 1524 mm under the MPK origin.

If you used the millimeter as unit in the MPK file, the keyword "MPK_unit_in_mm" should be valuated to 1.
If you used meter for instance, it should be valuated to 1000.

# All dimensions are to be specified in mm.

# - eye-offset specifies the eye coordinates in the mobile tracker frame
# - IPD is the inter-pupillary distance
# - the tracker related data describe the fixed tracker frame in the MPK global frame
# - MPK_unit_in_mm defines the MPK data unit.
# userdata
# {
# eye-offset [0,-20,0]
# IPD 57
# tracker-X [0,0,-1]
# tracker-Y [1,0,0]
# tracker-origin [0,-1524,0]
# MPK_unit_in_mm 1

A standard session example

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 966

Suppose the following case:

● you use a three-channel display system in a reality center
● you also use a three-pipes SGI computer. The display system has three projectors, one per channel,
projecting active stereo
● you want your head and hand to be tracked in front of the screens
● your tracking system is an Intersense IS900
● there are two trackers, one for the head and one for the hand, both plugged on the IS900
● the hand tracker is an Intersense wand with four buttons.

You have already set up the system, i.e. you have all the necessary configuration files and your
CATSettings are up-to-date.
Moreover, you have set the Virtual reality starting mode option to Manual in Tools > Options >
General > Devices since the Intersense driver is a standalone, i.e. non threaded, driver.

The scenario detailed hereafter will show you how to use the system.

1. Power up the Intersense IS900

2. Open a shell window then run the broker (this is a non threaded case)

3. Open another shell window then run the Version 5 IS900 driver.

Because of the configuration file you use, the driver will send two POSITION_EVENTs (one per

tracker), a ButtonPress and a ButtonRelease

4. Open a third shell window then run a Version 5 session

5. Open a .CATProduct model file

6. Switch to Full Screen mode by selecting View > Full Screen.

7. Key in the following command in the power input field:

c:VR View Tracking

then choose the head tracker POSITION_EVENT before clicking OK.

8. Key in the following command in the power input field:

c:VR Cursor

9. Key in the following command in the power input field:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 967

c:VRFly

to select the convenient manipulation mode for your session

10. Select the View->Full Screen command.

The system is running.

You can customize the commands entered in the power input field so that they appear as push
buttons in a toolbar. You can also assign a keyboard shortcut to them if you wish so.

When you want to open a new model or quit the session:

1. Deactivate the full screen mode and stop the multipipe management by right-clicking then

deselecting Full Screen

2. Key in c:VR View Tracking in the power input field to stop head tracking

3. Key in c:VR Cursor in the power input field to stop hand tracking

4. Select File > Open or File > Exit.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 968

Using the Joystick Control Panel

This section provides information about using the Joystick Control Panel in order to set the joystick
behavior.

If you are running Windows 2000 or Windows XP, you must setup the joystick prior to run the joystick
command. To do so, select Tools > Options > General > Devices and Virtual Reality > Devices:
● in the power input field, enter c:stereoscopic then activate the Stereo mode and set it to Automatic
● click Joystick in the Automatically Started Daemons area.

Otherwise, you can still run the joystick daemon named CATJoystickDriver. Refer to the Joystick
Spacestick part to read more on how to run a joystick daemon.

1. In the power input field, key in the following command:

c:joystick

The Joystick Control Panel dialog box opens:

2. Select your Navigation mode by selecting the appropriate option: Fly or Walk.

Note: these navigation modes are totally independent from the standard Fly and Walk modes
available in the View toolbar.

3. Click the More >> button to display detailed information about the joystick:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 969

4. In the Fly Sensitivity area, use the sliders to define the sensibility when rotating around the X, Y

and Z axes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 970

5. The Speed area lets you choose between the joystick slider or the joystick buttons to set the

maximum displacement speed:

● Use Slider enables you to enter a number comprised between 0 to the maximum speed
● Use Buttons activates the Increase and Decrease buttons to let you set the buttons
that will increase or decrease speed.

6. Still in the Speed area, enter the Increase rate by which the speed will be increased when

pressing the joystick button.

7. The Button Customization area enables you to assign an action to the button of your choice. First

select an action from the pulldown list then click Choose a Button and choose the desired

button.

8. In the Navigation Options area, you can select the appropriate options to:

● move in the sight direction. This option is used in combination with head tracking
● invert the joystick top and bottom
● invert the joystick right and left
● invert Y axis and Z rotation.

When activated, Gravitational effects during navigation indicates that gravitational effects
are enabled while navigating in Walk Mode. This option must be activated (and also
deactivated) via the Tools > Options > General > Display > Navigation tab.
Note that gravitational effects are not relevant for Fly mode navigation.

9. The TopHat options area lets you use the cursor. First click Activates the cursor to activate the

TopHat options.

A cross appears on the screen to simulate the mouse. You can then perform the same
interactions as you would do with a mouse.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 971

10. Use the Speed slider to set the cursor speed.

11. Click Double speed after a long impulse to double the cursor speed when making a long

impulse.

12. Stop at screen border enables the cursor to be snapped to the screen border you are getting

nearer. Otherwise, the cursor will reappear on the opposite screen border.

13. Click Close when satisfied with your parameters.

The Default button lets you reset the TopHat options to the default parameters.

The Walk mode options slightly differ from the Fly mode options as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 972

The Walk Sensitivity area lets you set the speed while moving along the X and Y axes and
while rotating around the Z axis.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 973

You can use the Vertical Translation area to choose whether you wish to use the buttons or
the slider. In case you use the slider, you can indicate the maximum slider speed in the Max
Speed field.

If you choose to use the buttons, clicking Go Up or Go Down then a joystick button lets you
assign this button to the corresponding direction.

Note that all these information are saved in settings files.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 974

Navigating in Examine Mode

This task shows you how to navigate in examine mode

Navigating in Examine Mode is the default mode. In this mode your object is driven by the joystick, it is
just as if you would be using remote control to position your object. You are manipulating the object
directly.

While manipulating, you can also examine your document as you would from the outside by moving
around the document's perimeter, or as you would from within, turning your head to view or moving
closer (zoom in, zoom out) to different objects.

Open the GARDENA.CATProduct document.

1. Target

Point a location and click the side button and release (simple click). This selected location will
be positioned and centered in the screen plane.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 975
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 976

2. 3D Panning and Rotating

Click the side button without releasing: you are turning around the target.

● Translating

Push the joystick forward or pull the joystick backward

● Rotating

Drag and /or rotate in 3D using the side button. See the figure below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 977

3. Rotating only

Click the side button without releasing and press the trigger without releasing (still holding
the side button down).

4. Zooming in/ zooming out

Press and hold down the side button, then press and release the trigger button and push (to
zoom in) or pull (to zoom out), still holding the side button down.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 978
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 979

5. Manipulating

● Translating

Push the joystick forward or pull the joystick backward

● Rotating

Drag and /or rotate in 3D using the side button. See the figure below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 980
CATIA Infrastructure
Navigating in Fly Mode
Version 5 Release 16 Page 981

In Fly mode you can move upward or downward on any horizontal view plane as you move forward or backward (backward in advanced mode only).

This task shows you how to navigate in fly mode with a 3D joystick.

You already opened your document GARDENA.CATProduct in DMU Navigator workbench (please refer to Loading documents in the Version 5 ENOVIA - DMU
Immersive Review documentation).

More About the joystick:

In Fly mode you will use the joystick Side button.

1. Click the Fly Mode icon in the Immersive Review toolbar. You can now begin to fly.

Note that when the fly mode is activated, the head tracking behavior is still active. It means that you can still turn head during flying operation
to look at details in a given direction.

2. Flying forwards/backwards

● if you push forward the joystick, the speed increases and you start moving forward (towards the circular symbol ),
● if you pull the joystick, the speed decreases and you start moving backwards.

Note: Try not to incline the joystick performing this operation if you want to fly straightforward
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 982

A green arrow appears along with a circular target located at the center of the view:

The speed at which you first approach the object is 0.

The further you push/pull the joystick from its starting position, the greater the speed.

The figure below the arrow specifies the speed at which you
This symbol represents the circular target towards which you fly.
are flying:

3. Flying up/down

● if you incline the joystick forward, you start flying downward

● if you incline the joystick backwards, you start flying upward
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 983

If you pull the joystick at the maximum, you will not be able to perform a complete looping, you will just continue to fly up.

If you push the joystick back to its initial position, you will stop flying upward progressively.

4. Flying right/left

● If you turn left, you change direction (left)

● If you turn right, you change direction (right)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 984

As you manipulate the joystick, the shape of the arrow changes to reflect the direction in which you are flying:

You can combine simultaneously these joystick manipulations (above described) to obtain the fly behavior you wish.

To return to the default navigation mode, click the Examine mode icon .
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 985

Using and Customizing Fonts

About Fonts
Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows
Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX
Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts
Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts
Adding Extra PostScript Fonts
Understanding Differences Between Font Display and Printed Output
Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using CATIA Version 4
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 986

About Fonts
This section contains principally conceptual information about font support in general, identifies which
areas of the Version 5 software are concerned by font support, and explains how you can customize
fonts.

The areas of the software which allow font customization are:

● user interface: menu names, command names, tooltips, dialog box names and texts, etc.
● specification tree texts
● texts you enter in certain applications, and which reference fonts: a typical example is the text you
enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting product.

You will also find information about how, in certain contexts, the text you see in the geometry area may
not look exactly the same when you print.

And finally, if you used the CATFONT utility in CATIA Version 4 to customize your own fonts, you will also
find information about how to recover the fonts for use in Version 5.

Note that when using PostScript fonts on Windows operating systems, the font display may change while
moving for performance and visibility reasons. How does it work?
● When static, the bitmap representation is generated using the corresponding TrueType font
● While moving, there are three display modes:
❍ PostScript: the polygon is displayed
❍ Stroke: the segment is displayed
❍ Bounding box: the box (i.e. four segments) is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 987

Customizing User Interface Fonts on Windows

This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on Windows.

1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel, then double-click Display and select the

Appearance tab (if it is not displayed by default).

The following dialog box appears:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 988

2. Use the Item list to select an item of the user interface you want to customize, or click on a user

interface item in the area in the center of the dialog box.

For example, select the items:

● Menu
● Message Box

if you want to customize menu command, message box, dialog box and tooltip text fonts.

3. Select the desired font, font size and color.

4. Click Apply, then OK.

5. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 989

Customizing User Interface Fonts on UNIX

This task explains how to customize user interface fonts on UNIX.

1. Go to the directory:

Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog/

where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the
software.

If you installed the software at the default location, you would go to the following directory:

/usr/Dassault Systemes/Bn/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

(where "n" is the current release number)

if you are using the English language. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported.
Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English.

2. Edit the file named "Dialog".

The "Dialog" file contains resource declarations for fonts (and foreground and background
colors) for certain user interface components. The file is delivered at installation and is ready
for use as is.

Note that you can declare Motif fonts only.

3. Customize the last line of each user interface component declaration if you want to change the

font and the font size.

4. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.

Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 990

Customizing Fonts for Displaying Texts

This task explains how to customize the fonts used, for example, to display:
● texts in the specification tree
● constraint texts in the Sketcher, Part Design, Assembly workbenches

and, in general, all 2D texts. Note that system fonts are used for displaying these types of text.

This does not concern texts you enter in drawing documents created using the Generative Drafting
product.

On Windows

1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel, click the Display control then click the Appearance

tab (if it is not displayed by default).

2. In the Item list, select Message Box, or click inside the Message Box item (on Message

Text) in the area in the center of the dialog box.

3. Select the desired font, font size and color.

4. Click Apply, then OK.

5. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 991

On UNIX

1. Go to the directory:

Install_directory/resources/msgcatalog

where "Install_directory" is the root installation directory you chose when installing the
software.

If you installed the software at the default location, you would go to the following directory:

/usr/Dassault Systemes/Bn/OS_a/resources/msgcatalog

(where "n" is the current release number)

if you are using the English language. A subdirectory is provided for each language supported.
Go to the appropriate subdirectory if you are using a language other than English.

2. Edit the file named "Visualization".

The "Visualization" file contains resource declarations for fonts for displaying annotation texts.
Each font is declared using six identical declarations which differ only in the font size. This is
required to allow end users to zoom the text size. The range of font sizes allows end users to
zoom within the limits of those font sizes.

The file is delivered at installation and is ready for use as is.

Note that you can declare Motif fonts only.

The Visualization file for the DBCS language (Japanese, Korean and Simplified Chinese)
environments contains two lines for each declaration: one line for the SBCS character set, and
one line for the DBCS character set.

3. Customize each line if you want to change the font.

4. If you have a Version 5 session open, exit the session and restart to see the changes take effect.

Make sure you exported the LANG variable for the desired locale before restarting a session.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 992

If you exchange documents with a site using a different language, text display may contain
"garbage" in 2D areas such as the specification tree and in editable fields. As explained above,
specification tree texts, for example, are displayed using system fonts. If you do not have the
same fonts installed on both sites, the text will not be lost: it will just not be displayed
correctly.

To display all text correctly, you must do the following on the receiving site:

● install and activate the appropriate locale for reading the document
● make sure that the appropriate system fonts are installed and declared correctly on the
receiving site
● Text in the geometry area points to CATIA Version 4, Bitstream or custom fonts. Make
sure that the appropriate fonts are installed and declared correctly on the receiving site.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 993

Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area

Texts
This task explains how to choose fonted texts displayed in the geometry area, for example, when using
the Generative Drafting product, and lists the fonts you can choose from.

You need access to the Generative Drafting product license to follow this scenario which shows you how
to enter text in a drawing and choose a font for the text. The objective is to present the list of fonts
supported.

1. Open a drawing you created using the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting product.

2. Click Text in the Annotations toolbar, then click a point in the drawing to position the
text.

The Text Editor dialog box is displayed.

3. Use the Text Editor dialog box to write the text, justify it, specify the text height and define the

anchor point, then click anywhere outside the Text Editor window, but inside the main

application window.

The Text Editor dialog box disappears.

4. Point to the text, right-click and select the Properties command.

The Properties dialog box is displayed:

5. Click the Font tab. This tab includes controls for setting the font, font style and size:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 994
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 995

Which Font Formats Are Supported?

Version 5 provides the following font formats:

● PostScript Type 1 format

● CATIA Version 4 FONT format
● TrueType format

With respect to the PostScript Type 1 font format, note that on Windows only, if a TrueType version of
the font exists or has been created, the TrueType version of the font can be used to optimize
visualization quality.

Which Fonts Are Provided?

The following fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization when you
install Version 5:

● all default stroke fonts delivered previously with CATIA Version 4

● 22 Bitstream Type 1 fonts
● an extra font (customized by Bitstream): CATIA Symbols; this font contains the symbols from
Version 4 fonts
● TrueType fonts provided by Windows.

Note that the Bitstream fonts are delivered in several different styles (depending on the font), whereas
the CATIA Version 4 fonts are delivered in regular style only.

Furthermore, the 22 Bitstream fonts support ISO-8859-1 environments only.

Fonts in TrueType format may be used as is, i.e. all fonts delivered will be displayed in the font list.
However, you can customize this list (for instance, to keep only the fonts you use most frequently) by
copying the desired fonts to your Version 5 environment in:

install_root\resources\fonts\TrueType

where "install_root" is the installation folder (Windows).

For TrueType fonts, a ".ttf" file is required.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 996

Which Bitstream Fonts Are Supported?

The Bitstream fonts are:

Font Name Attribute File Name

Swis721 BT roman Swiss.pfb
italic SwissI.pfb
bold SwissB.pfb
bold italic SwissBI.pfb
Swis721 LtCn BT light condensed SwissCL.pfb
light condensed italic SwissCLI.pfb
Swis721 BdOulBT bold outline SwiOuB.pfb
Monospac821 BT roman Monos.pfb
italic MonosI.pfb
bold MonosB.pfb
bold italic MonosBI.pfb
Dutch801 Rm BT roman Dutch.pfb
italic DutchI.pfb
bold DutchB.pfb
bold italic DutchBI.pfb
Courier10 BT roman Coure.pfb
italic CoureI.pfb
bold CoureB.pfb
bold italic CoureBI.pfb
UniversalMath1 BT regular Mathe.pfb
SymbolMono BT regular SymbM.pfb
SymbolProp BT regular SymbP.pfb

Note that:
● the Swiss 721 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica
● the Monospace 821 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Helvetica Monospaced
● the Dutch 801 Bitstream font family is Bitstream's version of Times Roman
● the CATIA Symbols font (not in the above list) contains the symbols from Version 4 fonts.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 997

For each of the Bitstream fonts, the following files are delivered in the location referenced by the
CATFontPath variable:
● in the Postscript folder or subdirectory: .pfb, .inf, .pfm, .afm
● in the ExtraFiles folder or subdirectory: .ttf. Note: On Windows only, installing Version 5 also installs
in the ExtraFiles environment the equivalent fonts in TrueType format. The TrueType font format
offers enhanced visualization quality. The installation adds the fonts (in TrueType format) to the list
of system fonts you can view by selecting the Start > Settings > Control Panel command and
double-clicking the Fonts control.

Which Version 4 Fonts Are Provided?

The following Version 4 fonts are supported and are installed ready for use without further customization
when you install Version 5:

● SSS1.font, SSS2.font, SSS3.font, SSS4.font: 4 simplex sans serif fonts

● ROM1.font, ROM2.font, ROM3.font: 3 roman fonts
● GOTH.font: 1 Gothic font
● SYM1.font, SYM2.font, SYM3.font, SYM4.font: 4 symbol fonts
● KANJ.font: Kanji font (Japanese)

Regarding the KANJ font, from now on, halfwidth Katakana characters are displayed with a smaller
width than the width with which they were displayed in CATIA Version 4
● KOHG.font: Hangeul font (Korean)
● TRCH.font: Traditional Chinese font
● SICH.font: Simplified Chinese font.

Note that:
● SYM1 contains annotation and tolerance symbols, and plot markup characters
● SYM2 contains ISO symbols fonts
● SYM3 contains roughness symbols
● SYM4 contains graphic and mathematical symbols as well as miscellaneous technical symbols.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 998

Adding Extra PostScript Fonts

This section explains how to add extra PostScript Type 1 fonts. A large choice of PostScript or TrueType
fonts is available from Bitstream Inc. (http://bitstream.com). You can address questions about ordering
Bitstream fonts to:

http://catia_support@bitstream.com

1. Copy the new fonts to your Version 5 environment in:

install_root\resources\fonts\PostScript

where "install_root" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX).

For Type 1 fonts, the following files are required:

● ".pfb" or ".pfa" font files

● ".afm" and ".inf" files.

To achieve enhanced font visualization (Windows only), if the associated TrueType font does
not exist, you can ask the system to generate it from the PostScript files (the following file
types are needed: .pfb, .afm, .inf).

2. To do so, select Start > Settings > Control Panel, double-click Fonts, then select File >

Install > New Font.

3. Select the font, and when prompted, check the three options, notably the first option in the

dialog box: Convert Type1 to TrueType, then click OK.

If an agreement exists between the font supplier and Microsoft, the system will then generate
the corresponding TrueType font. If not, the font will not be generated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 999

4. Edit the file:

install_root\resources\fonts\PostScriptRelatedTrueType

to map the PostScript file name with the full name of the TrueType equivalent. The "full name"
refers to the name of the font visible when selecting Start > Settings > Control Panel then
double-clicking Fonts.

If you already have the TrueType fonts, you can simply install them. To do so, select Start >
Settings > Control Panel, double-click the Fonts control, then select File > Install > New
Font and select the fonts to be installed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1000

Understanding Differences Between Font Display

and Printed Output
This section contains information about minor differences you may notice between the way text is
displayed in the geometry area and how it looks in printed output.

Text Display

In general, there is a slight difference in how text is displayed between Windows and UNIX: on Windows,
text is displayed using TrueType fonts, whereas Type 1 Postscript fonts are used on UNIX.

Differences between Text Display and Printed Output

When printing on printers using the drivers listed below, you can expect the following results:

Font Used for Printing On

Driver Font Used for Printing On UNIX
Windows

GDI TrueType N.A.

PostScript Any differences between displayed and Discretization is applied to Drafting

printed text depend on how your System texts.
Administrator set up your printer.
For 2D texts (for example, in the
Your printer may be set up in one of three specification tree), if the P2 setting is
ways: active, printing the text produces a
bitmap, whereas in all other cases, texts
are printed using the font referenced in
● the printer has all the required
the following resource file:
memory and fonts
● the printer does not have the fonts, install_folder/resources/msgcatalog/Print
but the PostScript file contains fonts
● or you may have to map your printer By default, the font is Helvetica.
to a specific font. For example, to view
your printer properties in a Version 5
session, select File > Print, click the For DBCS languages, discretization is
Properties... button and view the applied to 2D texts.
printer properties on the Advanced
tab.

CGM HP-GL2, HP- N.A. Discretization is applied to texts.

RTL CalComp C907
Oce Graphics
GPR50 Versatec:
VCGL and VGS 2.0
VRF
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1001

Recovering Custom Fonts Developed Using

CATIA Version 4
This task explains how to use CATIA Version 4 FONT files and set them up in your Version 5
environment. For more information about CATIA Version 4 FONT files, refer to your CATFONT Version 4
utility documentation.

1. Make sure that the fonts you created are in the FONT format (described using the UNICODE code

key) and not in the FONTDATA format (described using the EBCDIC code key).

The internal font format we recommend from CATIA Version 4 Release 1.8 onwards is
described using UNICODE codes.

If you did not already migrate your user FONTDATA files to FONT files and FONT CODE files,
you must do so using the CATFONT utility using, as a minimum level, CATIA Version 4 Release
1.8. Regarding FONT CODE names, refer to your CATFONT utility documentation for more
details.

Note that the following is no longer supported:

● the font described with proportional format

● the grid defined by five numbers.

In both cases, the associated orders are ignored. Note that none of the CATIA Version 4 basic
delivered fonts used any of these options.

2. Copy the Version 4 FONT files to your Version 5 environment in:

install_folder\resources\fonts\Stroke

where "install_folder" is the installation folder (Windows) or directory (UNIX).

3. Copy the FONT CODE files to your Version 5 environment in:

install_folder\reffiles\NLS\fontcode
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1002

4. Rename these FONT CODE files using the following syntax:

XXXX.fontcode renamed to FCUSERn.fontcode

where "XXXX.fontcode" represents the V4 font code file and "n" the increment (16 being the
maximum number).

For instance:

ABBK.fontcode renamed to FCUSER1.fontcode

HEL1.fontcode renamed to FCUSER2.fontcode
HEL2.fontcode renamed to FCUSER3.fontcode
SPEC.fontcode renamed to FCUSER4.fontcode
TIME.fontcode renamed to FCUSER5.fontcode

Note: the names FCUSER1 to FCUSER12 are reserved for SBCS font codes whereas
FCUSER13 to FCUSER16 are reserved for DBCS font codes.

5. Edit the V4FontInteroperability file in:

install_folder\resources\fonts\

by adding your Version 4 FONTLIB names to the list.

This file maps to a Version 4 FONTLIB name, the FONT and FONT CODE associated with it.

The example below shows two fonts (ABBK and TIME) added to V4FontInteroperability with
their corresponding font code:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1003

Regarding Korean fonts, since there are differences in Korean ideogram UNICODE codes
between the UNICODE used in Version 4 and Version 5, no Version 4 user-defined Korean font
can be used directly in Version 5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1004

Using Knowledgeware Capabilities

Parameters
URLs
Formulas
Design Tables
Law
Knowledgeware Language
Knowledge Resources
Working Through the Knowledgeware Capabilities: Use Case
Integration with Enovia V5
Useful Tips
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1005

Parameters
About Parameters
Creating a Parameter
Copy/Pasting Parameters
Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure
Importing Parameters
Specifying the Material Parameter
Creating Points, Lines... as Parameters
Applying Ranges to Parameters
Using Relations based on Publications at the Product Level
Creating an Associative Link Between Measures and Parameters
Publishing Parameters
Activating and Deactivating a Component
Creating an External Parameter
Deactivating and Activating External Parameters
CATIA Knowledgeware

If you are already familiar with CATIA and only need a quick access to information, see the CATIA
Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1006

About Parameters
● Displaying Parameters in the Specification Tree

● Parameters and National Support Languages

● Editing a Parameter

● Hiding a Parameter

● Working with External Parameters

When you create a part like a hollow cylinder, you often start by creating a sketch, then you create a pad by
extruding the initial sketch, then you add other features to the created pad. The final document is made up of
features which define the intrinsic properties of the document. Removing one of these features results in a
modification of the document. These features are called parameters. Parameters play a prominent role in
Knowledgeware applications. They are features that can be constrained by relations and that can also be used
as the arguments of a relation.

In addition to these parameters, CATIA allows you to create user parameters. These user parameters are
extra pieces of information added to a document.

User parameters are very handy in Knowledgeware applications:

● They can be used to add specific information to a document

● They can be defined or constrained by relations

● They can be used as the arguments of a relation.

A given relation may take as its arguments both types of parameters (intrinsic and user).

Displaying Parameters in the Specification Tree

The user parameters are displayed in the specification tree provided you check the Parameters box in the
Display tab in the Tools->Options->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure dialog box. The user parameter
list contains at least the Material parameter. The initial value of the Material parameter is set to None.

In addition, parameters can be displayed with their values provided you check the With Value box below the
Parameter Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure dialog box

Parameters and National Support Languages

CATIA users working with non-Latin characters should check the Tools->Options->General->Parameters
and Measure->Parameter Names->Surrounded by' option. Otherwise, parameter names should have to
be renamed in Latin characters when used in formulas.

Editing a Parameter
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1007

You can access a parameter contextual menu by right-clicking this parameter in the specification tree.

The Definition... command enables you to access

the Edit Parameter window where you can edit the
parameter value.

The Edit formula... command enables you to

access the formula editor to add a formula to the
parameter.

The Hide command enables you to hide the

parameter. In this case, it will not display in the
specification tree.

The Reorder... command enables you to reorder

parameters.

The Lock... command enables you to lock the

parameter.
When working with parameters of
Length and Angle type, you can
also use the Create Equivalent
Dimensions command. To know
more about this command, see
Getting Familiar with the
Equivalent Dimensions Interface
or Using the Equivalent
Dimensions Feature.

Hiding a Parameter
You can hide a parameter by right-clicking this parameter in the specification tree and by selecting the Hide
command.

● A visual indicator located at the parameters set level indicates that

the set contains hidden parameters. Note that this indicator is not
recursive.
● If you try to delete a parameters set containing hidden parameters, a
message is displayed asking if you want to delete the parameters set
that contains hidden parameters. Note that if you try to delete a
parameters set containing another parameters set with hidden
parameters, the message will be displayed.

Working with External Parameters

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1008

External parameters are parameters that point parameters located in another document. There are 2 types of
external parameters depending on their links:

● Reference link type: Both parameters are located in 2 different documents.

● Contextual link type: Both parameters are located in 2 different documents located in the same assembly.

External Parameters Contextual Menu

You can access the external parameters contextual menu by right-clicking the external parameter in the
specification tree. Note that these functionalities can also be accessed in the Edit links dialog box.

Hide: Enables you to

hide a parameter. In
this case, it will not
display in the
specification tree

Reorder: Enables you

to reorder parameters
(if you have created
more than 1 external
parameter.)

Lock: Enables you to

lock an external
parameter.

Open the Pointed

Document: Enables
you to open the pointed
parameter.

Isolate: Enables you to

isolate the parameter.

Activate/Deactivate:
Enables you to
activate/deactivate the
parameter. To know
more, see Deactivating
and Activating External
Parameters.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1009

Creating a Parameter

This task explains how to create a Time type parameter and assign a value to it.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Time item with Single Value in the New Parameter of type list, then click New

Parameter of type. The new parameter appears in the Edit name or value of the current

parameter field.

4. Replace the Time.1 name with Machining_Time and assign the 1000s value to this parameter.

Then click Apply. The Machining_Time parameter is added to the specification tree. The dialog

box is modified as follows:

5. Click OK when done to close the dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1010

● You can add properties to a .CATPart or a .CATProduct document by using the Properties
command from the contextual menu. You just have to click the Define other properties...
button in the Product tab then click New parameter of type. The dialog is similar to the f(x)
dialog. See the Product Structure User's Guide for more information. The properties you
define that way are also displayed in the parameter list of the f(x) dialog box.

● You can specify that a parameter is constant by using the Properties command from the
contextual menu. This command also enables you to hide a parameter.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1011

Copy/Pasting Parameters
The Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure check boxes allow you to:

● Paste a parameter without the formula which defines it.

For example:
Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15
(if the With Value box is checked)

● Paste a parameter as well as the formula which defines it, but only if the parameters referred to in
the formula are also selected in the copy.
For example:
Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = 15 if the Diameter parameter does not
belong to the items selected for the copy
but HolePlus will be pasted as Real.i = 15 = Real.j + 10 if Diameter is selected in the copy (use
multi-selection).

● Paste a parameter as well as the formula.

Holeplus= 15 = Diameter + 10 will be pasted as Real.i = Diameter + 10

When copying parameters sets containing hidden parameters, these parameters are automatically
pasted when pasting the parameters sets and appear as hidden parameters.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1012

Specifying a Parameter Value as a Measure

This scenario shows how to assign a value to a parameter deducing it from a graphic selection. In this scenario, you are
going to deduce the value assigned to the Thickness parameter by selecting 2 circular edges.

A common way to assign a value to a parameter is to use the Edit name or value of the current parameter field of
the Formulas dialog box. But there is another way to proceed. The value you assign to a parameter can be deduced
from a graphic selection.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Length item with Single Value in the New Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of

type.

The new parameter appears in the Edit name or value of the current parameter field.

4. Replace Length.1 with Thickness, then right-click in the value field of Edit name or value of the current

parameter.

5. Select the Measure Between... command from the contextual menu. The Measure Between dialog box is

displayed. Select Edge only as Selection 1 mode and Edge only as Selection 2 mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1013
6. In the document geometry area, select successively one of the inner circular edges of the part, then the outer

circular edge located on the same face. The 17.5 mm value is displayed in the Measure Between dialog box.

8. Click OK when done in the Measure Between dialog box. The 17.5 mm value is displayed in the Formulas dialog

box.

9. Click OK to close the Formulas dialog box.

The parameter is displayed below the Measure node in the specification tree and
below the Parameters node.

To edit this parameter:

● Double-click it in the specification tree. The Edit Parameters dialog box is

displayed.

● Click the icon located next to the value field. The Measure between dialog
box is displayed.
● Edit the parameter and click OK when done.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1014

Importing Parameters

This scenario shows how to import parameters from an excel or a .txt file into a CATPart document.

● Parameters and parameter values can be imported from a text file or from an Excel file
(Windows) into documents (CATPart, CATProduct, Drawings...).

● If imported parameters already exist in the document, the import process automatically
updates the document.

● Note that if 2 parameters have the same name in the import file, no clone is created and the
parameters are not renamed. Make sure that the parameters have different names before
importing them. Identical parameters names are not supported.

Please find below the formatting rules the external file should comply with:
● Column 1
Parameter names

● Column 2
Parameter values. Multiple values are allowed. Values should then be separated by a ";". The
imported value is the one delimited by the "<" and ">" tags. Use the Tab key to skip from one
column to the other in a tabulated text file.

● Column 3
Formula. If no formula is specified, the third column should be left empty. In a tabulated text file,
just press the Tab key twice from column 2 to leave column 3 empty.

● Column 4
Optional comment.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

3. Click Import.... A file selection dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the ExCompanyFile0.xls file (Windows only) or the TxCompanyFile0.txt file, then click

Open.

The list of parameters to be imported into the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document is

displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1015

5. Click OK to import the parameters from the input file into the KwrStartDocument.CATPart

document.

The imported parameters are now displayed in the parameter list of the f(x) dialog box and in

the specification tree.

6. Click OK to terminate the dialog.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1016

Specifying the Material Parameter

Whatever your document, the Material parameter is always displayed in the specification tree. The
Material parameter is created only after a material is applied to a Part or a Product. The
Mechanical_Property features are calculated from the Material value. Specify a material to set the
values of the Mechanical_Property features.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document. The Material parameter is displayed by default

in the specification tree.

2. Double-click the Material feature in the specification tree to edit the parameter. The dialog box

below is displayed.

3. Click OK and select the root feature in the specification tree.

4. Click the icon in the standard toolbar to display the available material library. Select the
Metal->Iron material.

5. Click Apply Material and OK. The Iron feature is added to the specification tree and a new

material is added under the Parameters node.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1017

Remember: To display parameter values, check the With value option in the

Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure->Knowledge tab.

6. Keep your document open and proceed to the next task.

Valuating the Mechanical Property Parameters

Once the Material value has been specified, the Mechanical_Property parameters are automatically
updated when the Properties option is selected in the contextual menu.

1. Select the root item in the specification tree and open the Properties dialog box from the

contextual menu.

2. Select the Mass tab. The document mechanical properties have been updated from the value

assigned to the Material parameter.

3. Click OK to go back to your document.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1018

Creating Points, Lines... as Parameters

The scenario below explains how to determine the position of the inertia axis of a pad. To do so, start
from a pad, then:

1. Create a line by using either method ('datum' or )

2. Use the inertiaAxis line constructor to specify that this line is to be the inertia axis of the pad.
3. Retrieve the coordinate of the point located at the intersection of the inertia axis and the pad
extrusion plane.

To create elements such as Points, Lines, Curves, Surfaces, Planes or Circles and use them in
knowledgeware relations, you can:

● Create these elements as 'Isolate' elements in the Generative Shape Design workbench. 'Isolate'

elements also called Datum are elements that have no link to the other entities that were used to

create them. For information on 'Datum' type elements, see the Generative Shape Design User's

Guide.

● Create these elements by using the f(x) capabilities and select the right type of element in the

New parameter of type list.

1. Access the Part Design workbench, create any sketch in the yz plane, then extrude this sketch

to create a pad. If need be, refer to the Part Design User's Guide.

2. Create a line intended to be used as an inertia axis afterwards.

3. To do so, click the Formulas icon , select the Line item in New Parameter of type, then click

New Parameter of type.

4. Click the Formulas icon. In the parameter list, select the line you have just created

(Geometrical Set.1\Line.1).

5. Click Add Formula and add the formula below in the editor:

Geometrical Set.1\Line.1 = inertiaAxis(3,PartBody)

The inertiaAxis function is accessible through the Line constructors. The axis number 3 is the

one which is in the extrusion direction (normal to yz). Click OK in the Formulas dialog box. The

inertia axis is displayed in the geometry area.

6. Back to . Create three length type parameters: X, Y and Z.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1019

7. Retrieve the coordinates of the point located at the intersection of the inertia axis and the 'yz

plane'. To do so, create the formulas below:

X=intersect(Geometrical Set.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(1)

Y=intersect(Geometrical Set.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(2)
Z=intersect(Geometrical Set.1\Line.1, 'yz plane').coord(3)

You get the intersect function from the Wireframe constructors and the point.coord method

from the Measures item of the dictionary.

8. Check the value displayed in the specification tree as well as in the Formulas dialog box.

The KwoGettingStarted.CATPart document used as a sample for the Product Engineering Optimizer

User's Guide illustrates this scenario.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1020

Applying Ranges to Parameters by Using a Rule

This task explains how to apply ranges to parameters by using a rule.

1. Open the KwrRangesParameters.CATPart.

2. Click the icon and select Real in the scrolling list to create two parameters of Real type:
Real.1 and Real.2.

3. Select Real.1 and right-click the field next to the Edit name or value of the current

parameter box.

4. Select Add Range … The Range of Real.1 dialog box opens.

5. Specify the Minimum and the Maximum bounds (-5 and 5 for example), and click OK twice.

6. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench and click the Rule icon ( ). The Rule editor
opens.

7. Enter the following rule: Real.2 =Real.1 .InferiorRange and click OK: Real.2 value changes

to -5.

8. Double-click the rule under the Relations node and replace the existing script with Real.2

=Real.1 .SuperiorRange and click OK: Real.2 value changes to 5.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1021
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1022

Using Relations based on Publications at the Product

Level

This scenario explains how to use relations based on publications at the product level. The scenario
described below is divided into the following steps:
● Add a parameter to the KwrScrew.CATPart called Screw_Volume, add a formula to calculate the
volume of the screw and publish the Screw_Volume parameter.

● Add a parameter to the KwrScrew1.CATPart called Screw_Volume, add a formula to calculate the
volume of the screw and publish the Screw_Volume parameter.

● Create a CATProduct file called Bolt and import the KwrScrew.CATPart

● Import KwrNut.CATPart.

● In the context of the Bolt product, create a formula calculating the bolt volume based on the screw
and the nut publications.

● In the context of the bolt, replace KwrScrew.CATPart by KwrScrew1.CATPart. The volume is

recomputed.

Before you start, make sure that the Keep link with selected object check box is checked (Tools-
>Options->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure->General).

Note that this function can be used with:

● Design Tables

● Formulas

● Rules and Checks

● Set of Equations

● The optimization

1. Open the KwrNewScrew.CATPart document.

2. Add a Volume parameter to the part.

❍ Click the icon. The Formula Editor opens. In the New parameter of type scrolling list,
select Real and click the New parameter of type button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1023

❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of the

parameter: Screw_Volume. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button. The Formula

Editor opens.

❍ Enter the following formula by using the Dictionary:

Screw_Volume=smartVolume(PartBody\Pad.1)+smartVolume(PartBody\Pad.2 ).

Click OK three times.

3. Publish the Screw_Volume parameter.

To do so, select

the Tools-

>Publication

command and

click the

Screw_Volume

parameter

under the

Parameters

node in the

specification

tree. Click OK.

The published

parameter

appears in the

specifications

tree below the

Publication

node. Save your

file and close it.

4. Open the KwrNewScrew1.CATPart and repeat the steps listed above (steps 1 to 3 included). The

part should be identical to the one below. Save your file and close it.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1024

5. Create a CATProduct file named KwrBolt.CATProduct.

6. Click the Root product and select the Insert->Existing Component... command. The File

selection box is displayed. Select the KwrNewScrew.CATPart file and click Open. The screw is

imported.

7. Select the Insert->Existing Component... command, select the KwrNewnut.CATPart file and

click Open. The nut part is inserted.

8. Add a Bolt_Volume parameter to the product to compute the volume of the bolt.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1025

❍ Click the Root product and click the icon. The Formula Editor opens. In the New
parameter of type scrolling list, select Real and click the New parameter of type

button.

❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of the

parameter: Bolt_Volume. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button. The Formula

Editor opens.

❍ Enter the following formula by using the Dictionary and by clicking the published parameters

in the specification tree: Bolt_Volume=`..!screw.2!Screw_Volume`

+`..!Nut!Nut_Volume`. Click OK, and OK. The Bolt volume is displayed

9. Replace the screw to compute a new volume: Double-click, then right-click the Screw.2

component in the specification tree and select the Components->Replace Component...

command. The File Selection window opens. Select the KwrNewScrew1.CATPart file and click

Open.

10. Click Yes and OK in the Impacts on Replace window. The new screw is inserted and the bolt
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1026
volume is updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1027

Creating an Associative Link Between Measures and

Parameters

This scenario explains how to create a persistent and associative link between a measure created using
the Measure Item or Measure Between command and a parameter.
● Measure Item allows you to get the length of a curve (edge, line, curve), radius or angle
depending on the parameter magnitude.

● Measure Between allows you to get the minimal distance or angle between two elements,
depending on the parameter magnitude.

This link can be created only if the Keep measure option is checked in the Measure Item and
Measure Between dialog boxes (if not the result is copied as a simple value.)

● No formula is created when using the Measure Item or the Measure Between commands.

● The icon located on the right of the

editor field is a measure between or
item icon. Note that you will be able to
edit the measure.

● The parameters located below the Parameters node are directly linked to the measures.

● You can invert the sign of the

parameter using the Invert value
command in the Measure Item or
Measure Between window. The sign
concerns only the valuated
parameters and not the parameter of
the measure.

● To have an associative link, you must make an associative measure. If you select the Picking
point mode and the Measure between function, the measure will not be associative. As a result,
there will be no associative geometry.
● When a measure is not associative, the value is displayed in the value field.
● Even in the case of an associative measure, if you only want to get the result of the measure,
uncheck the Keep measure check box.
● To create a "smart" customization, click the Customize... button in the Measure Item dialog box to
see the properties the system can detect for the various types of item you can select.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1028

1. Open the KwrPlaneWing.CATPart file. The following image is displayed.

Using the Measure Item... command

2. Add a parameter of Length type.

Click the Formula icon ( ). The Formulas dialog box is displayed.

❍
In the New parameter of type scrolling list, select Length and click the New

parameter of type button. Length.1 is displayed in the Edit name or value of

the current parameter field.

❍
Right-click the value field of Length.1 and

select the Measure Item... command. The

Measure Item dialog box is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1029

❍
Make sure the Keep measure option is checked in the Measure Item dialog box.

❍
In the specification tree, expand the Sketch.1 node, and select Spline.2. The selected

item is highlighted in the geometry and its measure is displayed in green.

❍
Click OK in the Measure Item dialog box and OK in the Formulas dialog box. A new

parameter is added below the Parameters node and below the Measure node. The

Length.1 parameter is now linked to the result of the measure.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1030

Using the Measure Between... command

1. Add a parameter of Angle type.

Click the Formula icon ( ). The Formulas dialog box is displayed.

❍
In the New parameter of type scrolling list, select Angle and click the New

parameter of type button. Angle.1 is displayed in the Edit name or value of the

current parameter field.

❍
Right-click the value field of Angle.1

and select the Measure Between...

command. The Measure Between

dialog box is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1031

❍
In the Selection 2 mode scrolling list, select the Edge only option.

❍
In the specification tree, select Plane xy then select the geometry as shown below.

The selected items are highlighted in the geometry and the measure is displayed in

green.

❍
Click OK in the Measure Between dialog box and OK in the Formulas dialog box.

An angle parameter is added below the Parameters node and the measure is

displayed below the Measure node.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1032

❍
Click here to display the result sample.

Note that:

● if several characteristics of the measure are computed and have the same magnitude, the system
will choose the most convenient according to predefined rules.

● To remove the link to the measure, right-click the measure item in the specification tree and
select the measure object->Remove the link with measure command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1033

Publishing Parameters

This scenario explains how to publish parameters. The scenario described below is divided into the following steps:
● Add parameters to the Screw.2 document and publish its Diameter, Depth, and Volume parameters. Repeat the same
operations with the second CATPart file.

● Create a CATProduct file and import Screw.2.

● In the context of the Bolt product, insert the Nut part that imports the Depth and the Diameter parameters by selecting
the publication MyDepth and MyDiameter of Screw.2.

● In the context of the bolt, replace Screw.2 (KwrScrew.CATPart) by Screw.2 (KwrScrew2.CATPart) that doesn't have the
same structure as the first one but owns the same publications. Both the parameters and the check are recomputed.

A publication has a name and references a geometry or parameters inside the product (or one of its sub-products).

The publication of parameters should be used when:

● Defining an import of parameters between two parts (similar to the import of geometry).

● Defining relations at the assembly level between parameters (similar to constraints).

Before you start, make sure that the Keep link with selected object check box is checked (Tools->Options-
>Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure->General).

1. Open the KwrScrew.CATPart document.

2. Add parameters to the part.

❍ Click the icon. The Formula Editor opens. In the New parameter of type scrolling list, select
Volume and click the New parameter of type button.

❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of the parameter:

MyVolume. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button. The Formula Editor opens.

❍ Enter the following formula by using the Dictionary: smartVolume(PartBody\Pad.1 ) +

smartVolume(PartBody\Pad.2 ) . Click OK, and Yes.

❍ In the New parameter of type scrolling list, select Length and click the New parameter of type

button.

❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of the parameter:

MyDepth. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1034

❍ Enter the following formula: MyDepth=PartBody\Pad.2\FirstLimit\Length and click OK.

❍ In the New parameter of type scrolling list, select Length and click the New parameter of type

button.

❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of the parameter:

MyDiameter. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button.

❍ Enter the following formula: MyDiameter=PartBody\Sketch.2\Radius.2\Radius * 2. Click OK twice.

3. Publish the MyVolume, MyDepth, and MyDiameter parameters.

To do so, select the Tools->Publication

command and select the MyVolume,

MyDepth, and MyDiameter parameters in

the specifications tree. Click OK. The

published parameters appear in the

specifications tree below the Publication

node. Close the file.

4. Open the KwrScrew2.CATPart and repeat the steps listed above (steps 1 to 3 included). The part should be identical to

the one below. Close the file.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1035

5. Create a CATProduct file. Select the Insert->Existing Component... command and click the root of the specifications

tree. The File selection box is displayed. Select the KwrScrew.CATPart file and click Open. The screw is imported.

6. Select the Insert->Existing Component... command, select the Kwrnut.CATPart file and click Open. The nut part is

inserted.

7. Double-click the inner circle of the nut, the Hole Definition window is displayed.

❍ Right-click the Diameter field and select the Edit formula... command. The Formula Editor opens.

❍ Select MyDiameter in the screw publications. The formula should be as follows:

PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter=`External Parameters\MyDiameter`. Click OK.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1036

❍ Right-click the Depth field and select the Edit formula... command. The Formula Editor opens.

❍ Select MyDepth in the screw publications. The formula should be as follows:

PartBody\Hole.1\HoleLimit.1\Depth=`External Parameters\MyDepth`. Click OK twice.

8. Double-click, then right-click the Screw.2 component in the specifications tree and select the Components->Replace

Component... command. The File Selection window opens. Select the KwrScrew2.CATPart file and click Open.

9. Click Yes when prompted to replace all instances with the same reference as the selected product. Update the nut

part: the parameters are recomputed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1037

Activating and Deactivating a Component

This task explains how to activate and deactivate a component.

In the scenario described below, the CATProduct file contains two CATPart files that you will activate
and deactivate alternatively after creating user parameters and a rule based on these parameters.

Note that:
● Relations located at the product level are not integrated to the product update. If your relation
drives the parameters of a Part, create the relation at the Part level.
● Parameters driven by rules are designed to enable you to control components activities at
assembly level.

When working in a Japanese environment, remember to check the Surrounded by the Symbol'
option (Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure->Knowledge tab).

1. Open the KwrSyringe.CATProduct file and save the following files in the same directory

(SyringePiston.CATPart, HollowSyringePiston.CATPart, and SyringeContainer.CATPart): This file

contains a syringe made up of three different parts: A barrel, and two different plungers.

2. Create a multiple value parameter of string type.

● Click the icon. The Formulas Editor opens.

● Select String in the scrolling list with Multiple Values. Click the New Parameter of type button.
The Value List dialog box opens.

● Enter two different values, Hollow and Full, and click OK.

● Edit the name of the new parameter (SyringeType in this scenario) in the Edit Name or value of
the current parameter and click OK. The new parameter is displayed under the Parameters
node of the Specification tree.

3. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench and click the Rule icon to create a rule. The script of

this rule will allow you to enable or disable one of the plungers.

4. Enter the code below in the Rule Editor, and click OK.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1038

if (SyringeType == "Hollow")
{
`S3\Component Activation State` = false
`S2\Component Activation State` = true
}
else
{
`S2\Component Activation State` = false
`S3\Component Activation State` = true
}
Note that Japanese users should enter the
following rule.

6. Double-click the SyringeType parameter

under the Parameters node and select Hollow

in the Edit Parameter window. The

SyringeBarrel CATPart and the

HollowSyringePlunger CATPart are displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1039

7. Double-click the SyringeType parameter and

select "Full" in the Edit Parameter window.

The SyringeBarrel CATPart and the

SyringePlunger CATPart are displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1040

Creating an External Parameter

This tasks shows how to create an external parameter.

● Make sure you have checked:

❍ the Parameters and the External References check boxes below the Display in
Specification tree settings in the Tools->Options->Infrastructure-> Part
Infrastructure->Display dialog box,

❍ as well as the With Formula and With Value check boxes below the Parameter
Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure
dialog box.
● Open the DeactivatingExternalParameter.CATProduct file.

Note that the external parameters created at a product level are not integrated to the update process.
Update the external parameters manually before updating your document.

1. Expand the Part1_External_Parameter(Part1.1)\Part1_External_Parameter document, right-

click the Line_Length parameter located below the Parameters node in the specification tree,

and select the Copy command.

2. Double-click, then right-click Part2_External_Parameter (Part2.1)\Part2_External_Parameter

and select the Paste Special command. In the Paste Special dialog box, select As Result

With Link and click OK to validate. The External Parameters node is added to the

specification tree and the Line_Length parameter is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1041
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1042

Deactivating and Re-activating External

Parameters
This tasks shows how to deactivate, re-activate and synchronize external parameters. In the scenario
described below, you:
● Create an external parameter

● Deactivate the external parameter

● Modify the parameter pointed by the external parameter

● Re-activate the external parameter

Until now, external parameters (external references) could be:

● synchronized (if their values were different from the values of the pointed parameter).
● isolated (external parameters become simple parameters) .

Now you can deactivate and re-activate external parameters. It means that when the external
reference is deactivated, it cannot be synchronized with the pointed value, but it keeps its last value
(the value cannot be changed any longer). The external parameter can also be reactivated: Its native
behavior is then restored.

Note that:

● A deactivated external parameter will only lose the ability to be synchronized and will keep its last
value.
● A deactivated external parameter can be re-activated using its contextual sub-menu.
● The Activate, Deactivate, Synchronize, and Isolate commands can also be accessed from the
Links dialog box (Edit->Links.)

● Make sure you have checked:

❍ the Parameters and the External References check boxes below the Display in
Specification tree settings in the Tools->Options->Infrastructure-> Part
Infrastructure->Display dialog box.

❍ as well as the With Formula and With Value check boxes below the Parameter
Tree View settings in the Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure
dialog box,
● Open the DeactivatingExternalParameter.CATProduct file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1043

Creating the external parameter

1. Expand the Part1_External_Parameter(Part1.1)\Part1_External_Parameter document, right-

click the Line_Length parameter located below the Parameters node in the specification tree,

and select the Copy command.

2. Double-click, then right-click Part2_External_Parameter (Part2.1)\Part2_External_Parameter,

and select the Paste Special command. In the Paste Special dialog box, select As Result

With Link and click OK to validate. The External Parameters node is added to the

specification tree and the Line_Length parameter is displayed.

Deactivating the external parameter

3. Right-click this external parameter and select the Part2_External_Parameter\External

Parameters\Line_Length object-> Deactivate command. A mask ( ) indicating that the

parameter is deactivated is displayed next to the parameter name.

4. Double-click Part1_External_Parameter, right-click Line_Length twice in

Part1_External_Parameter and select the Line_Length object->Formula->Edit...

command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1044

Modifying the parameter pointed by the external parameter

5. In the Formula Editor, modify the formula so that it matches the following formula:

Line_Length=Length(PartBody\Line.1)*2. Click OK when done. The Line_Length parameter

value is updated in Part1_External_Parameter. Note that it is not updated in

Part2_External_Parameter since this external parameter is deactivated.

Re-activating the external parameter

6. Go back to the external parameter you've created, right-click it and select the

Part2_External_Parameter\External Parameters\Line_Length object->Activate

command. A mask ( ) indicating that the parameter is deactivated is displayed next to the
parameter name.

7. Right-click it and select the Part2_External_Parameter\External

Parameters\Line_Length object->Synchronize command. The parameter is updated and

a mask ( ) indicating that the parameter is deactivated is displayed next to the parameter
name.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1045

CATIA Knowledgeware Infrastructure

Relations
Parameters
Formulas Tips and Techniques - Summary
Design Tables
This part is intended for those of you who need a quick answer to their questions
about the Knowledgeware capabilities. However, using this part requires a
prerequisite knowledge of the CATIA basic concepts.

Relations
Reordering Relations Sets and Parameters Sets

You can now reorder parameters sets and relations sets as you already could do for parameters and relations.

1. Select the relations set that you want to reorder in the

specification tree.

2. Right-click it and select the Relations.xxx object-

>Reorder... command.

3. In the Reorder window, select In or After and select a

relation.

❍ In: Enables you to reorder a relations set or a

parameters set in an existing set.

❍ After: Enables you to reorder a relations set or a

parameters set below an existing set.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1046

Note that:
● Your can only reorder a parameters set located under an existing parameters set and a relations set under
an existing relations set.
● The first relations set or parameters set of a document cannot be reordered.
● A parameters set or a relations set can only be reordered in the same document.
● Parameters and relations order now corresponds to the creation order. Objects are not gathered by types
any longer.

Hiding relations

You can hide a knowledge relation (formula, rule, check, ..) by right-clicking this relation in the specification
tree and by selecting the Hide command.

● A visual indicator located at the relations set level indicates

that the set contains hidden relations.
Note that this indicator is not recursive.
● If you try to delete a relations set containing hidden
relations, a message is displayed asking you if you want to
delete the relations set that contains hidden relations.
Note that if you try to delete a relations set containing
another relations set with hidden relations, the message will
be displayed.

Parameters
● Switching between Simple and Multiple Values After Creating a Parameter

● Creating a parameter

● Creating a multiple-value parameter

● Deleting a parameter

● Displaying parameters in the f(x) dialog box

● Displaying parameter values in the geometry area

● Updating parameters values

● Declaring a parameter as constant

● Editing or modifying a parameter

● Editing constrained parameters

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1047

● Adding a comment to a parameter

● Associating a URL with a parameter

● Hiding a parameter from the specification tree

● Importing parameters

● Importing parameters from a VPDM

● Ordering Parameters

● Specifying a parameter value as a measure

● Specifying a tolerance

● Specifying lower and upper bounds

● Specifying an increment/decrement amount

● Specifying the Material parameter value

● Valuating a Boolean with a Predicate

● Modifying the Part Number

● Creating a Parameters set using a macro

Creating a Parameter

Click . In the Formulas Editor, select a type in the New Parameter of type list, then click New
Parameter of type. The new parameter is added to the parameters list. A default name is given to the
parameter. If need be, rename this parameter.

Creating a multiple-value parameter

To assign multiple values to a parameter, select the Multiple values option at parameter creation and enter
the values one by one to specify the value list.

Switching between Simple and Multiple Values After Creating a Parameter

It is possible to add values to a single value parameter after creating it. To do so, use one of the 2 methods
described below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1048

First Method

1. Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. In the Formulas Editor, select a type in the New
Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of type with Single value. The new parameter

is added to the parameter list. A default name is given to the parameter. If need be, rename this

parameter.

2. Click OK when done.

3. Double-click the parameter in the

specification tree. The Edit

Parameter window is displayed.

4. Right-click the value field of the

Edit Parameter window and

select the Add Multiple Values

... command.

5. In the Value List window, enter

the new values.

6. Click OK when done.

Second Method
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1049

1. Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. In the Formulas Editor, select a type in the New
Parameter of type list, then click New Parameter of type with Single value. The new parameter

is added to the parameter list. A default name is given to the parameter. If need be, rename this

parameter.

2. Click OK when done.

3. Click the icon in the

Knowledge tool bar. In the

Formulas Editor, select the

parameter that you have just

created.

4. Right-click the Value field of the

Edit name or value of the

current parameter field and

select the Add Multiple Values

... command.

5. In the Value List window, enter

the new values.

6. Click OK when done.

Deleting a parameter

There are two ways to proceed:

● Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. In the Formulas Editor, select the parameter to be deleted,
then click Delete Parameter.

Or

● In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be deleted, then select the Delete command from the
contextual menu.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1050

Only user parameters can be deleted (the Material parameter cannot be deleted).

Displaying parameters in the f(x) dialog box

The parameter list displayed in the Formulas Editor depends on the selected feature. If you select the document
root feature in the specification tree, you display all the document parameters. If you select a given feature in
the specification tree, you display only the parameters related to this feature.

Displaying parameter values in the geometry area

To display parameter values in the geometry area, you must have the Formulas Editor open. Selecting a
parameter in the parameter list will highlight this parameter in the specification tree and display its value in the
geometry area.

Updating parameters values

To update the values of a multiple values parameter:

1. Double-click the parameter in the

specification tree. The Edit Parameter

window is displayed.

2. Right-click the value field of the window,

and select the Update Values...

command. The Value List window is

displayed.

3. Edit the values and click OK when done.

Declaring a parameter as constant

Select the Properties command from the parameter contextual menu. In the Parameter properties tab, check
the Constant option.

Editing or modifying a parameter

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1051
There are three ways:

● Click . Select the parameter to be edited in the Formulas Editor, then modify its value in the Edit
name or value of the current parameter field.
● In the specification tree, double-click the parameter to be edited, then modify its value in the Edit
Parameter editor.
● In the specification tree, right-click the parameter to be edited, then select the
Parameter object->Definition... command from the contextual menu.

Editing constrained parameters

When a parameter is constrained, a push button is provided opposite the value field of its edition box. This push
button represents the relation which constrains the parameters. Clicking this button displays the editor of the
relation which constrains the parameter (the formula editor or the rule editor for example).

Adding a comment to a parameter

There are two ways to proceed:

● Edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Edit Comment... command
from the contextual menu.
● Select the Properties command from the parameter contextual menu. In the Parameter properties tab, fill
in the Comment field.

Associating a URL with a parameter

Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench, then click the Comment & URLs icon.

Hiding a parameter from the specification tree

There are two ways to proceed:

● Edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Hide command from the
contextual menu.
● Select the Properties command from the parameter contextual menu. In the Parameter properties tab,
check the Hidden option.
● Right-click the parameter and select the xxx object->Hide command.

Importing parameters

Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. Then click Import.... A file selection dialog box is displayed.
Select either a .xls file (Windows only) or a .txt file. If the imported parameters already exist in the document,
the import process automatically updates the document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1052

Importing parameters from a VPDM

You can now directly import parameters into the Formula editor from a VPDM.

● From the Tools->Options->General category, access the General tab. In the Document environments
list, select the VPDM you want to work with and click the Allowed button. Click OK when done.

● Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar.

● click Import.... The Browse window is displayed.
● Click the Enovia button. The Search conditions dialog box is displayed. Enter the Document ID and click OK
when done. The documents display in the Results window.
● Right-click the file that you want to import and select the Open command.

Ordering Parameters

To reorder parameters, rigth-click the parameter to be reordered, and select the Reorder... command. The
Reorder dialog box is displayed. In the specification tree, select a paramater below which the parameter to be
reordered will be located. Click OK when done.

Specifying a parameter value as a measure

Edit the parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Measure Between command
from the contextual menu. The Measure Between dialog box is displayed. You can use this dialog box to
measure the distance between two edges for example. Select Between as measure type, then select
successively two edges in the geometry area. The distance between both edges is displayed in the Results pane.

Specifying a tolerance (Length or Angle parameter only)

The default tolerance specified in Parameters Tolerance tab of the

Tools->Options->General-> Parameters and Measure settings can be redefined. To do this, edit the
parameter, then in the value field of the parameter editor, select the Tolerance->Edit... command from the
contextual menu.

Specifying lower and upper bounds

Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select the Add Range... command
from the contextual menu. This capability does not apply to parameters such as booleans or strings.

Specifying an increment/decrement amount

Edit the parameter, then in the edition box, right-click the value field(s) and select the Change step...
command from the contextual menu. Select 1mm or click the New one command. In this case, the New step
dialog box is displayed and you can enter another step.

Note that:

● This capability does not apply to parameters such as booleans or strings.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1053

● This information is not stored and will be lost when closing the document.

Specifying the Material parameter value

There are two ways to proceed:

Select the part you want to apply the material to, then click the icon. Select one of the material
in the library which is displayed. Prior to doing this, check that the material catalog is installed on
your machine.

●
Edit the material parameter from the specification tree, then enter the new material in the parameter
editor.

Valuating a boolean with a predicate

It is possible to valuate a boolean with a predicate instead of using operators.

See the example provided in the KwrPredicate.CATPart file.

Modifying the Part Number of a Part in the Formula Editor

It is possible to modify the part number of a document (CATPart, CATProduct, ...).

1. Open the document.

2. Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. Select the Part Number in the parameters list.

3. Change the part number in the Edit name or value of the current parameter field.

Note that the part number can also be modified in the Parameters Explorer in Knowledge Advisor.

Creating a Parameters set using a macro

To create a parameters set using a macro, enter the following script:

set mainset = params.RootParameterSet

set SetsColl = mainset.ParameterSets
set newSet = SetsColl.CreateSet("Name of the new
set")

Note that:

● the script above enables you to assign a name to the parameters set and to retrieve it. You can also add a
new parameters set below this set.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1054

Formulas
● Creating a formula

● Quickly Accessing Parameters in the Formulas Editor

● Using the dimensions of a sketch in a formula

● Editing or modifying a formula

● Displaying only a formula definition in f(x)

● Specifying a measure in a formula

● Activating / deactivating a formula

● Importing parameters and formulas

● Deleting a formula

Please note that in the Formulas editor, the default step is 1 whatever the unit.

Creating a formula

There are three ways to proceed:

● Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. Select the parameter to be constrained, then click Add
Formula. Enter the formula in the Formulas Editor.

● Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. Double-click the parameter to be constrained and enter the
formula in the Formulas Editor.
● Edit a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Edit formula... from the contextual menu.

Quickly Accessing Parameters Values in the Formulas Editor

A new field enables you to change a parameter value when creating and especially editing a formula.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1055

This field is especially useful when you want to modify the value of a parameter valuated by a formula.

● Double-click the parameter in the specification tree.

● Click the icon located next to the parameter value field. The Formula Editor opens.

● In the Relation body, select the parameter to be modified and change its value. To get an example,

see below.

1. Open the KwrPredicate.CATPart file.

2. Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar.

3. Create 3 parameters of length type with the following values:

❍ Length.1=12mm

❍ Length.2=14mm

❍ Length.3=0mm

4. Select the Length.3 parameter in the Parameter list and click the Add Formula button. The Formula

Editor is displayed.

5. Enter the following formula into the editor and click OK when done:

Length.3=Length.2 *Length.1

6. Double-click Length.3 in the specification tree. The Edit Parameter dialog box is displayed.

7. Click the icon located next to the parameter value field. The Formula Editor is displayed.

8. In the Editor, select Length.2 in the Members of All column and set its value to 9mm in its value field.

9. Click OK when done. The Length.2 and Length.3 values are updated in the specification tree.

Using the dimensions of a sketch in a formula

Unless sketch dimensions are declared as constraints, you cannot manipulate them as parameters in relations.
This applies for example to the radius of a circular sketch or to the width and length of a rectangular sketch.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1056
Editing or modifying a formula

There are four ways to proceed:

● In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be edited,

then select the Formula object->Definition command from the contextual menu.
● In the specification tree, double-click the formula to be edited.

● In the specification tree, double-click the user parameter, then click the f(x) button in the Edit Parameter
dialog box.
● Edit a parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select Formula->Edit from the contextual menu.

Displaying only a formula definition in f(x)

When you select a formula in the specification tree, then click the Formulas icon, the parameter list displays the
constrained parameter, the formula activity and the parameters used as input in the formula.

Specifying a measure in a formula or

● Edit the parameter, right-click the value field in the parameter edition box, then select the Edit formula...

command from the contextual menu.

● In the formula editor, click the Wizard button, select the Measures item in the dictionary then select one

of the measure functions displayed in the wizard.

● Fulfill the function prototype and allow for the required number of arguments. To enter an argument value,

position the cursor where the argument is intended to be and capture the feature definition from the

specification tree or from the geometry area.

Activating / deactivating a formula

There are three ways to proceed:

● Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. In the parameter list of the Formulas Editor, select the
formula/activity parameter and modify its value in Edit name or value of the current parameter.
● In the specification tree, right-click the formula whose activity is to be modified, then select the Formula
object->(De)Activate command from the contextual menu.
● Edit the constrained parameter, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula->(De)Activate
command from the contextual menu.

Importing parameters and formulas

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1057

Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. In the f(x) dialog box, click Import, then specify the import file
path. The import file should be either a .txt file or a .xls file. The parameters and formulas are applied to the
document. If the imported parameters already exist in the document, the document is automatically updated by
the import process.

Deleting a formula

There are three ways to delete a formula:

1. Click . In the parameter list of the f(x) dialog box, select the parameter which is constrained by the
formula to be deleted, then click Delete Formula.

2. In the specification tree, right-click the formula to be deleted, then select the Delete command from

the contextual menu.

3. Editing the parameter. In the parameter editor, right-click the value field(s), then select the Formula-

>Delete command from the contextual menu.

Design Tables
● Creating a design table from the document parameter values

● Creating a design table from a pre-existing file

● Editing a design table

● Adding a column to a design table

● Adding Ranges and Values to a Design Table

● Making a query in a Design Table

● Rearranging columns in a Design Table

● Selecting the Design Table Editor on Unix

● Selecting the Design Table External file from a VPDM

● About the parameters that cannot be inserted in a design table

● Tips about selecting the parameters to be inserted in a design table

● Tips about using the access functions to the design table

● About the broken status

● Deleting a design table

Creating a Design Table from the Document Parameter Values

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1058

Click the icon in the Knowledge tool bar. Check the option Create a design table with current parameter
values. Select the parameters to insert, then specify the .xls (Windows) or .txt file where the design table is to
be created.

Creating a Design Table from a pre-existing File

Click the icon. Check the option Create a design table from a pre-existing file. Specify the file containing
the design table data, then create the necessary associations.

Editing a Design Table

There are two ways to proceed:

● In the specification tree, double-click the design table to be edited. The CATIA design table is displayed. The
active configuration is highlighted.

Or

● In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be edited, then select the
DesignTable.object->Edition command from the contextual menu.

Adding a Column to a Design Table

To add a column to a design table, open the .txt file in a text editor or the .xls file in Excel, and add a column to
the file.

Adding Ranges and Values to a Design Table

It is possible to add ranges and default values to a design table. The ranges will appear between [;], and the
default values between <> (see example below).

It is possible to specify a range:

● At the top of a column: in this case the range will apply to all cells if no other range is specified in the
cells. In the table above, the range that applies to cell A2 is [-5;5] and the one that applies to cell A3 is [-
20;20].
● In a specific cell: it is possible to add a range to a specific cell (see cell A2 in the table above). In this case,
the range specified in this cell will apply to this cell and to the cells located below if no range is specified at
the top of the column.
If a range is specified at the top of the column, the range indicated in the cell applies only to this cell. In the
table above, [-5;5] applies only to cell A2 because a range [-20;20] is specified at the top of the column. If
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1059
no bounds were indicated at the top of the column, the range indicated in cell A2 would also apply to cell
A3.

Note that:

● When specifying a range, only one of the bounds may be indicated. ([2;] in the table above for example).
● Ranges contained in the Design Table override those you might have added to your parameters by using the
Add Ranges... command.
● The default value specified between <> (see table above, column 2) indicates that the parameter is not
constrained by the Design Table.
● If a range is specified but no default value, the parameter value is not constrained by the Design Table.

Deleting a Design Table

In the specification tree, right-click the design table to be deleted, then select the Delete command from the
contextual menu.

Making a Query in a Design Table

The syntax which is authorized in the Filter field of the Design Table dialog box (Configurations tab) is the same
as for Knowledge Advisor checks. You can type the filtering relation directly in the appropriate field or click the
Edit... button to access the language dictionary.
An example of a query relation: TangE >10 deg and yE > 10mm

Rearranging Columns in a Design Table

The way columns are arranged in a design table is identical to the way the associations were defined. You can
now rearrange the columns without deassociating the parameters and the columns and associating them again
just afterwards. To do so, click the Associations tab in the Design Table window, and use the Up and Down
arrow buttons.

Selecting the Design Table Editor on Unix

The environment variable CATTermDT enables you to choose the terminal from which the design tables editor
will be started. The editor can be set up by using the environment variable CATTextEditorDT. xterm is used by
default.
This way, you can select the terminal, which can impact the way the editor behaves. For example, for Japanese
users, if vi is launched from xterm, vi will not support kanji whereas if it is launched from aixterm (AIX), kanji
will be supported.
Example: export CATTermDT=aixterm

Selecting the Design Table External file from a VPDM

You can now select your design table external file from a VPDM.

● From the Tools->Options->General category, access the General tab. In the Document environments
list, select the VPDM you want to work with and click the Allowed button. Click OK when done.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1060

● Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Knowledge tool bar. In the Creation of a Design Table window,
click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option. The Browse window is displayed.
● Click the Enovia button. The Search conditions dialog box is displayed. Enter the Document ID and click OK
when done. The documents display in the Results window.
● Right-click the file that you want to import and select the Open command.

About the parameters that cannot be inserted in a design table

Only parameters which are not already constrained by any other relation or by any other design table can be
used to create a design table. If a parameter is already constrained, it does not appear in the Parameters to
insert list in the design table dialog box.

Tips about selecting the parameters to be inserted in a design table

The Filter Name and Filter Type filters can be used to restrict the display of a parameter list. If you specify x in
the Filter Name field of the Select parameters to insert dialog box, you will display all the parameters with the
letter x in their name (xA, xB, xC, xD, xE). If you select the Renamed Parameters in the Filter Type list, you will
display all the parameters you have renamed in the Formulas Editor (yA, xB, xA, yC, xC, yB, yD, xD, yE, xE,
TangE).
Parameters to be inserted can be multi-selected. You just have to keep on pressing the Ctrl key while you select
parameters. If you do this, the group of multi-selected parameters will be carried forward onto the Inserted
parameters list in the order in which they are displayed in the initial list.
When the design table is created, the rank of the columns fits the rank of the parameters in the Inserted
parameters list. If you want to have columns ordered in a given way in the design table, you must insert the
parameters one by one.

Tips about the access functions to the design table

Once in the formula (rule or check) editor, select the Design Table item in the dictionary, the list of the methods
that can be applied to a design table is displayed. Select a method, then click F1 to display the associated
documentation.

About the broken status

When the active configuration does not fit the set of configurations resulting from a query operation, you get a
message prompting you to deactivate the filter (uncheck the filter box) or change your configuration. If neither
action is undertaken, your design table takes on a broken status. In the specification tree, a broken or invalid
design table is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1061

Searching for URLs

You can search for URLs with user parameters and relations. This task is only meaningful when
the active document contains user parameters and/or relations.

When an object has been assigned a certain number of URLs, the Explore tab of the URLs &
Comment dialog box provides you with a way to search for a given URL. Note that if you want
to assign URLs to relations, the Knowledge Advisor workbench is required.

1. Click the icon and select an object (user parameter or relation) in the specification
tree.

2. Select the Explore tab. The list of the URLs assigned to the selected object is displayed.

3. Enter the name (or a sub-string) of the URL to be searched for in the Search field. Then

click Search. If the specified URL is found, "yes" is displayed in the Found column for

every object containing a URL matching the search and only the first object to be found

is highlighted.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1062

Formulas
About Formulas
About the Formula Editor
Creating a Formula
Creating Formulas based on Publications
Specifying a Measure in a Formula
Using Geometry to Create a Formula
Referring to External Parameters in a Formula
Using the Equivalent Dimensions Feature
About the Equivalent Dimensions Interface
Controlling Relations Update

If you are already familiar with CATIA and only need a quick access to information, see the CATIA
Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1063

About Formulas
Formulas are features used to define or constrain a parameter. A formula is a relation: the left part of the
relation is the parameter to be constrained, the right part is a statement. Once it has been created, a formula
can be manipulated like any other feature from its contextual menu. The formula language uses operators and
functions of all types whereby you can perform operations on parameters.

Displaying Formulas in the Specification Tree

Formulas are relations and as such they can be displayed below the Relations node provided you check the
'Relations' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Infrastructure-> Part
Infrastructure->Display dialog box.

In addition, formulas can also be displayed below the Parameters node provided you check:

● the 'Parameters' box below the 'Specification tree' settings in the Tools->Options->Infrastructure->
Part Infrastructure->Display dialog box

● as well as the 'With Formula' box below the Parameter Tree View settings in the Tools->Options-
>General->Parameters and Measure dialog box

The Activity Parameter

A formula is a feature which is assigned a parameter called the activity. The activity value is a boolean. If the
activity is set to true, the parameter value cannot be calculated from the formula. If a formula is created for a
parameter which is not already constrained by another formula, the activity of the new formula is set to true by
default.

A parameter can be constrained by several formulas, but only one formula can be active at a time. Before
activating a formula on a given parameter, you must deactivate the other formulas defined on the same
parameter.

Activity value false true

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1064

Relation icon in the specification

tree

Importing Formulas
Parameters as well as the associated formulas can be imported from an external file. Refer to Introducing
Parameters and Importing Parameters for more information on how to import formulas.

In the Formula editor, enumerations values are nls values. For example, when working with booleans,
true and false will be displayed in your environment language.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1065

About the Formula Editor

The Formula editor is displayed when you click the icon in the Reactive Features tool bar. This editor
enables you to:

● Display the list of parameters

● Create parameters and formulas

● Import external files.

Incremental Mode Button

Selecting a feature in the specification tree or in the geometry area displays in the editor only the first level of
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1066
features right below the selected feature. In the figure above, all the parameters related to the Pad.1 and
Hole.1 features are displayed. Selecting Pad.1 in the tree (Incremental unchecked) will display the parameters
below:

PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length
PartBody\Pad.1\SecondLimit\Length
PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius

Checking the Incremental mode button ( ) restricts the list of parameters to the one below:

PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length
PartBody\Pad.1\SecondLimit\Length

Filter Name
This filter allows you to narrow the list of displayed parameters by specifying a substring. If you specify *Limit*
as filter, only the parameter with Limit as sub-string will be displayed, for example:

PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length
PartBody\Pad.1\SecondLimit\Length
PartBody\Hole.1\HoleLimit.1\Depth
PartBody\Hole.1\HoleLimit.1\Angle

Filter Type
This filter allows you to restrict the list of parameters by specifying a type. Selecting User parameters will
display only the parameters created by the New Parameter of type button. Selecting Hidden parameters will
display only the list of parameters which have been declared as hidden by using the Hide command from the
value field contextual menu.

The Hide command is only available for user parameters.

Parameters List
Basically, the parameter list displays the parameters related to the feature selected either in the specification
tree or in the geometry area. If no feature has been selected, all the document parameters are displayed. The
dialog box being open, you can select a given feature either in the tree or in the geometry area and display its
related parameters.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1067

You can restrict the list of displayed parameters by using the Filter Name and Filter Type capabilities as well as
the Incremental button.

Edit name or value of the current parameter Field

This field displays the parameter which has been selected in the parameter list. The value field on the right-
hand side is grayed out when the parameter is constrained by a formula, a design table or any type of relations.
Right-clicking this value field provides you with a number of commands whereby you can refine the parameter
definition.

New Parameter of type Button

This button allows you to create a user parameter. This user parameter can be assigned a single value or
multiple values (akin to the enum idea).

Delete Parameter Button

This capability operates only for user parameters.

Delete Formula Button

When a parameter which is constrained by a formula is selected in the parameter list, clicking Delete Formula
removes the formula.

Import Button
This capability allows you to import parameters and parameter values from a text file or from an Excel file
(Windows).

Add Formula Button

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1068

When you create a formula, you specify that a parameter, whatever its type, is to be constrained by a relation.
Clicking the Add Formula button displays the Formula editor.

Incremental Mode Button

See explanation above.

Language Browser Button ( )

When clicked, this button lets you access a browser of types. To use this browser, you can either select the
objects you want to work with in the geometry or click the ... button to select the type in the list.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1069

● The Supported/Inherited types field

provides you with a list of the types
supported by the selected type and of the
types that the selected type inherits from.
● The Attributes field lists the possible
attributes of the types and those of the
supported and inherited types.
● The Functions using type field lists the
functions and methods whose first
argument is a type of the
Supported/Inherited types list.
● The Functions returning type field lists
the functions and methods returning the
selected type.

URLs and Comment Button

Enables you to associate a URL or a comment to the formula. To find out more, refer to Associating URLs &
Comments with Parameters and Relations in the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.

Erase Button

Enables you to empty the editor.

Dictionary

To help you write a formula, the formula editor provides you with a dictionary. This dictionary exposes the list of
parameters and functions you can use to define a formula. Depending on the category of objects to be referred
to in the formula, the dictionary is divided into two or three parts. To insert any definition in the formula editor,
just double-click the object either in the dictionary or in the tree. If you double-click a function in the dictionary,
its signature is carried forward to the formula editor. Only the argument definitions are missing.

Analysis Operators Circle Constructors Design tables

Direction Constructors Electrical Functions Law
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1070

Line Constructors List Math

Measures Operators Part Measures
Plane Constructors Point Constructors String
Surface Constructors Wireframe Constructors

The formula which is created is displayed in the parameters list as well as its activity.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1071

Creating a Formula
This task explains how to create a formula specifying that the external radius of a hollow cylinder is
twice its internal diameter. Note that the radius of a sketch can be defined by a formula provided it is
declared as a constraint.

● A formula is a statement that you can write by selecting items from the editor dictionary list. To
find out more about the language to be used, see the Knowledgeware Language topic in the
Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.
● The period is generally used as a separator between the whole numbers and the fractional part of a
number. Using a comma as a separator in place of the period is not recommended in real values
intended to be used directly in relations.
Example: Real1 = 2,1 + 5,4 is not allowed whereas Real1 = Real2 + Real3 is allowed regardless of
the separator used when valuating Real2 and Real3.

Make sure the Relations option is active in the

Tools->Options...->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure->Display tab.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the icon to display the f(x) dialog box. Make sure that you have not clicked the

Incremental mode button ( ).

Method 1

❍ Double-click the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.3\Radius parameter in the parameter list. The

Formula Editor is displayed.

❍ Enter the PartBody\Hole.1\HoleLimit.1\Depth*2 relation in the formula field. Go to

Tips and Techniques for information on how to manipulate parameters and formulas.

❍ Click OK in the Formula Editor.

Method 2

❍ Select the PartBody\Sketch.1\Radius.1\Radius in the parameter list.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1072

❍ Click Add Formula. The Formula Editor is displayed.

❍ Enter the PartBody\Hole.1\HoleLimit.1\Depth*2 relation in the formula field. Go to

Tips and Techniques for information on how to manipulate parameters and formulas.

❍ Click OK in the Formulas Editor.

3. Click Apply to update the document.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1073

Creating Formulas based on Publications

This task explains how to create a formula based on publications in a CATProduct file.

1. Open the Screw1.CATPart document.

2. Add a Volume parameter to the part.

❍ Click the icon. The Formula Editor opens. In the New parameter of type scrolling list,
select Volume and click the New parameter of type button.

❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of the
parameter: ScrewVolume1. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button. The Formula
Editor opens.

❍ Enter the following formula by using the Dictionary to access the smartVolume operator:
ScrewVolume1=smartVolume(PartBody\Pad.1). Click OK three times.

3. Create another Volume parameter called ScrewVolume2 based on Pad.2.

4. Create another Volume parameter called Volume_Total. Click OK when done to exit the Formula

editor.

5. Access the Tools->Publication menu, and select the 3 parameters that display below the

Parameters node. Assign them new names (see graphic below):

6. Click OK when done. The parameters, the formulas, and the publications are created (see graphic

below).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1074

7. Save your file and close it.

8. Open the Screw2.CATPart document. Repeat the above steps (2 to 7).

9. Create a new product (File->New menu). Click OK when done.

10. Select the Insert->Existing Component... command to insert Screw1.CATPart into the product.

11. In the File Selection window, select the Screw1.CATPart file that you have just saved. Click Open.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1075

12. Create a formula that will compute the volume of the screw.

❍ Click the Root product and click the icon. The Formula Editor opens.

❍ Enter the following formula into the editor by selecting the publications in the specification
tree:

❍ Click OK when done. The screw volume is

displayed below the parameters node.

13. Double-click screw.1 in the specification tree, right-click it, and select the Components->Replace

Component command.

14. In the File Selection window, select the screw2.CATPart file that you have just saved and click

Open.

15. Click OK in the Impacts On Replace window. The new screw is inserted into the product and its

volume is computed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1076

Specifying a Measure in a Formula

The purpose of this task is to explain how to specify that the value of a Length type parameter is equal
to the curved abscissa of a point located on a curve.

Measures, i.e. values captured from the geometry area can be used in formulas. Here are some
examples of measures that can be used in formulas:
● Distance between two points.

● Total length of a curve.

● Length of a curve segment - between a point and the origin or between a point and the curve
extremity.

● Length of a curve segment - between two points.

● Area of an extruded surface.

1. Open the KwrMeasure.CATPart document. The whole document has been created using the

Generative Shape Design product. The Extrude.1 and Extrude.2 surfaces are extruded from the

Spline.1 and Spline.2 curves. The point whose abscissa is to be measured is Point.5. The origin

of the curve where Point.5 is located on is Point.8

2. Click the Formula icon. The f(x) dialog box is displayed.

3. Create the CurveLengthFromOrigin parameter.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1077

❍ Select the Length item with Single Value in the New Parameter of type list, then click New

Parameter of type. The new parameter appears in Edit name or value of the current

parameter.

❍ Replace the Length.1 name with CurveLengthFromOrigin, and click Apply.

4. Specify that the value of CurveLengthFromOrigin is the abscissa of Point.5:

a. Select the CurveLengthFromOrigin parameter in the parameters list, then click Add

Formula. The Formula editor is displayed.

b. Select the Measures item from the Dictionary list.

c. In the list of measures, double-click the length(Curve,Point,Boolean) item. The length

function is added to the Formula Editor.

d. Fill in the Formula editor field as indicated below.

1. The three arguments are: a curve to be selected from the geometry area, a point

to be selected from the geometry area and a boolean.

2. Position the cursor where the first argument is intended to be

typed. Then double-click the Spline.2 feature in the specification tree. The curve

argument is added to the length definition.

3. Position the cursor where the second argument is intended to be typed. Then

double-click the Point.5 feature in the specification tree. The point argument is

added to the length definition.

4. Type a boolean for the third argument: True if the length is to be calculated

from the origin, False if the length is to be calculated from the curve end.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1078

5. Click OK to confirm the formula definition. You are back to the Formulas dialog

box. The CurveLengthFromOrigin formula and value(47.5mm) are added to the

parameter list.

e. Click OK to add the parameter as well as its formula to the document.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1079

Using Geometry to Create a Formula

This task explains how to use geometry to create a formula.

Before performing this scenario, make sure you have checked the Keep link with selected object
option (Tools->Options-> Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure->General tab.)

1. Create a Product and add 2 parts to this product.

2. From the Start->Shape menu, access the Generative Shape Design workbench. Select the

first part.

3. Add a line to the part.

4. Select the second part and add a Length parameter to the part as well as a formula that will be

based on the line.

❍ Click the icon. The Formula Editor opens. In the New parameter of type
scrolling list, select Legnth and click the New parameter of type button.
❍ In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, enter the name of
the parameter: LineLength. Click Apply and click the Add Formula button. The
Formula Editor opens.
❍ Enter the following formula by using the Dictionary to access the length(Curve,...)
operator: LineLength=length().
❍ Position the cursor between the parenthesis and double-click the Line in the
geometry or in the specification tree. The External parameter selection window is
displayed.
❍ Select Line.1 and click OK. The formula is displayed as follows:
LineLength=length(`External References\Line.1` )
❍ Click OK when done. Click Yes in the Automatic update window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1080
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1081

Referring to External Parameters in a Formula

This scenario shows how to use external parameters in a formula.

In a formula, you can use parameters defined in external documents. This works between any types of
document. For example, in a CATPart document, you can specify a formula referring to parameters
defined in a CATDrafting document. External parameters can also be used when working within an
assembly.

Prior to performing this scenario, make sure that the Keep link with selected object option is
checked (Tools->Options...->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure->General).

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document as well as the KwrImportParameter.CATPart

document. Select the Window->Tile Vertically command from the standard menu bar to

display both documents.

2. Make active the KwrImportParameter document. Click the icon to display the f(x) dialog
box.

3. Create a parameter of Length type and click the Add Formula button. The formula editor is

displayed.

4. In the KwrStartDocument specification tree, select the Hole.1 feature. The External

parameter selection dialog box is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1082

5. In the External parameter selection dialog box, select the Diameter object in the external

parameter list. Then click OK. The Length.1 definition is carried forward to the formula editor.

(Click the picture below to enlarge it.)

6. Complete the formula definition as indicated below:

Length.1 = `External Parameters\Diameter` *0.65

7. Click OK in the formula editor. You are back to the Formula dialog box. In the parameter list,

the Length.1 parameter value is modified according to the formula specified. In the

KwrImportParameter specification tree, the External Parameters node is added. Expand this

node to display the Diameter parameter.

8. Click OK to add the formula to the KwrImportParameter.CATPart document and exit the dialog.

9. Select the Edit->Links command from the standard menu bar. The displayed dialog box

confirms that there is a link between the KwrImportParameter\Length.1 object and the

KwrStartDocument\PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter object.

10. Click Isolate in the Links dialog box, then click OK. In the KwrImportParameter.CATPart

specification tree, the External Parameters node can no longer be expanded and the Diameter
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1083

parameter is added below the Parameters node.

11. Select the Edit->Links command from the standard menu bar. A message box informs you

that the active document has no external links.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1084

Using the Equivalent Dimensions Feature

This scenario explains how to use the Equivalent Dimensions Feature. The scenario described below is
divided into the following steps:
● you apply constraints to an existing sketch.
● you use the Equivalent Dimensions feature to create a list of Length type parameters that will have
the same value.

To know more about the Equivalent Dimensions feature, see Getting Familiar with the Equivalent
Dimensions Interface.

1. Open the KwrEquivalentDimensions.CATPart.

2. In the specification tree, expand the PartBody node and double-click Sketch.1 to access the

sketcher.

3. Double-click the Constraint icon ( ) to constraint some lines of the sketch (see graphic
below).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1085

4. In the Knowledge toolbar, click the Equivalent Dimensions icon ( ). The Equivalent
Dimensions Edition window is displayed.

5. Click the Edit List... button. In the opening window, use the arrow key to select the following

parameters and click OK when done.

❍ Length.34

❍ Length.36

❍ Length.37

6. In the Equivalent Dimensions Edition window, set the value to 150mm and click OK.

7. Exit the Sketcher. The sketch is modified accordingly and the EquivalentDimensions.1 feature is

displayed below the Relations node.

8. Double-click Value=150mm twice in the specification tree. The Edit Parameter window is

displayed.

9. Enter 140mm and click OK.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1086

About the Equivalent Dimensions Interface

● The Equivalent Dimensions Interface

● The Equivalent Dimensions Contextual Menu

The Equivalent Dimensions Interface

You can create an Equivalence Dimensions feature. This feature can be accessed by clicking the Equivalent

Dimensions icon ( ) in the Knowledge toolbar. It is the equivalent of a formula applied to Length and Angle
parameters. It is designed to enable you to apply the same value to selected parameters. It can be used with
the following parameters:

● 3D parameters
● Sketch parameters

Note that this new command cannot be used in association with parameters valuated by a formula.

To create this feature:

● click the Equivalent Dimensions icon ( ). The Equivalent Dimensions window is displayed.

A new scrolling list enables you to select

the type of the Equivalent Dimensions
Feature: Length or Angle if no parameter
is already selected in the specifications
tree.

Note that this field is grayed out if a

parameter is already selected.

● Click the Edit List... button. The following image is displayed:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1087

● Note that only the parameters

having the same type as the one
selected in the Type: scrolling
list display in the Parameters
column. (The Length parameters
are selected in the opposite
picture.)
● Note that the Apply Filter
Name function enables you to
perform a search on a given
string. The result of your search
is displayed in the Parameters
list. Note that if you select a 3D
feature in the document, only
the parameters of this feature
will display in the Parameters
list.

● In the Parameters list, use the arrow key to select the parameters that will have the same value.

● Click OK when done. The EquivalentDimensions feature is displayed below the Relations node as well as the
value assigned to the selected parameters.

The Equivalent Dimensions feature can be edited by double-clicking it in the specification tree so that you can:

● Display the list of parameters belonging to the equivalent dimensions feature.

● Add or remove parameters from the equivalence list.
● Modify the value of the parameters.

Note that:

● The value of the parameters belonging to the equivalence list changes when you change the value of one of
the parameters of the list.
● If you want (for example in a reaction) to modify the parameters used in an equivalent dimensions feature,
and want this modification to be propagated to the equivalent dimensions feature itself, you should modify
the "Value" parameter of the equivalent dimensions feature and not one of the parameters of this equivalent
dimensions feature.

The Equivalent Dimensions Contextual Menu

You can access the Equivalent Dimensions contextual menu by right-clicking the equivalent dimensions feature
in the specification tree.

The Definition... command enables you to access the

Equivalent Dimensions Edition window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1088

The Deactivate... command enables you to deactivate

the equivalent dimensions feature. In this case an icon
indicates that the feature is disabled. To enable it, right-
click it and select the Activate... command.

The Hide command enables you to hide the equivalent

dimensions feature. In this case, it will not display in the
specification tree.

The Reorder... command enables you to reorder the

equivalent dimensions features (if you have created more
than one of these features.)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1089

Controlling Relations Update

This topic provides you with 2 short examples showing you how to work with relations in Synchronous
and in Update relation at global update command modes.
● In the first example, you update a formula.
● In the second example, you update an equation.

● For a given relation, it is possible to determine that it only executes in Synchronous mode using the
Edit->Properties command. Its evaluation can then be launched manually. The Synchronous
mode enables you to create synchronous relations, that is to say relations that will be immediately
updated if one of their parameters is modified. Relations based on parameters are the only ones
that can be synchronous.

● For a given relation, it is also possible to decide that its evaluaion will be launched when the part is
updated (Update relation at global update command). The relations can be asynchronous for 2
reasons:
❍ You want the relation to be asynchronous
❍ The relation contains geometry.

It is possible to change the update mode of a relation after it is created.

● Right-click the relation in the specification tree and select the Properties command.
● Check the Synchronous or the Update relation at global update command check box.

To know more about the Synchronous or the Update relation at global update command options,
see the description of the Knowledge tab in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

Updating a Formula
In this example, the document contains 2 parameters of Length type:

● Length.1 is valuated
by you.

● Length.2 is valuated
by a formula
computing the
distance between 2
points + Length.1.

1. Open the KwrUpdatingaFormula.CATPart file.

2. Expand the Relations node (if need be), right-click Formula.1 and select the Properties
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1090

command.

3. In the Properties window, uncheck the Update relation at global update command check

box. Click OK to validate.

4. Double-click Length.1. The Edit parameter window is displayed. Enter 50 in the value field. Click

OK to validate. The value of Length.2 is updated automatically and an update icon is displayed

indicating that it will also be updated at the global update.

5. Right-click Formula.1 and select the Properties command.

6. In the Properties window, uncheck the Synchronous check box and check the Update

relation at global update command check box. Click OK to validate.

7. Double-click Point.2 in the specification tree or in the geometry.

8. Enter the following values in the Point Definition window and click OK when done:

The Formula is not updated and an update icon is displayed next to the formula.

9. Right-click Formula.1 and select the Local Update command. The formula and Length.2 are

updated.

Updating an Equation
In this example, you change 3 parameters, a, b and c before solving the equation. If you use the
Synchronous mode, an error is displayed when modifying the parameters values since the update is
launched at each modification. To ensure the stability of the equation, the update must be launched
after the 3 parameters are changed. Thus you need to select the Update relation at global update
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1091
command mode.

1. Open the KwrUpdatinganEquation.CATPart file. The following image is displayed:

This document contains 4 parameters. x is a parameter

valuated by an equation based on the other 3
parameters (a, b, and c).

2. Expand the Relations node (if need be), right-click Equations.2 and select the Properties

command.

3. In the Properties window, check the Synchronous check box and uncheck the Update relation at

global update command check box. Click OK to validate.

4. Double-click a in the specification tree. The Edit Parameter window is displayed. Enter 2 in the

value field. A message is displayed indicating that the equation cannot be solved and click OK.

5. Click Close.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1092

6. Right-click Equations.2 and select the Properties command.

7. In the Properties window, uncheck the Synchronous check box and check the Update

relation at global update command check box. Click OK to validate.

8. Double-click a in the specification tree. The Edit parameter window is displayed. Enter 2 in the

value field. Click OK.

9. Double-click b in the specification tree. The Edit parameter window is displayed. Enter 5 in the

value field. Click OK.

10. Double-click c in the specification tree. The Edit parameter window is displayed. Enter 2 in the

value field. Click OK.

11. Right-click the equation in the specification tree and select the Local udpate command.

The equation is updated as well as the x value. For the equation to be solved, the Update relation at
global update command option must be checked and the relation must be either integrated to the
global update or updated manually using the Local Update command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1093

Design Tables
About Design Tables
About the Design Table Dialog Box
Creating a Design Table from the Current Parameters Values
Creating a Design Table from a Pre-existing File
Interactively Adding a Row To a Design Table External File
Generating a File From a Design Table
Controlling Design Tables Synchronization
Storing a Design Table in a PowerCopy

If you are already familiar with CATIA and only need a quick access to information, see the CATIA
Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1094

About Design Tables

A design table:

● provides you with a means to create and manage component families. These components can be for example
mechanical parts just differing in their parameter values.

● is a tool mainly intended to ease the definition of mechanical parts. It is provided to all CATIA users. But you will make
the best use of it in a Knowledge Advisor application. A design table can be created from a CATIA document, the
document data is then exported to the design table. It can also be applied to a document, the document data is then
imported from the design table.

● is designed to drive the parameters of a CATIA document from external values. These values are stored in the form of
a table either in a Microsoft ® Excel file on Windows™ or in a tabulated text file. When using a design table the trick is
to associate the right document parameters with the right table parameters. The design table columns may not all
correspond to your document parameters and you may decide to apply only part of the design table values to your
document. By creating associations, you declare what document parameters you want to link with what table columns.

● becomes a more powerful tool when it is used with the Knowledge Advisor. You are provided with functions to read the
design table parameters. These design table functions can be used when programming your checks and rules. Using
these functions spares you all the association operations. To know more, click here.

Example

Screws are a good example of mechanical parts that can be described by a design table. To simplify, imagine they are all
described by four parameters: the head width, the head height, the body width and the body height. The sets of four
parameter values that can be assigned to a screw can be easily regrouped in a design table. This design table has as many
columns as screw parameters and as many rows as sets of parameter values. In a design table, a set of parameter values is
called a configuration and it is registered in a row.

Design Table Formats

● The Excel Sheet Format (under Windows)

● The Tabulated Text File Format

● The CATIA Design Table

Design Table Status

Design Tables Formats

The Excel Sheet Format (under Windows)

The values mentioned in the sheet cells have to be expressed in appropriate units. Otherwise, the right values won't be
associated with the document parameters.

Only Excel sheets created with Excel 97 and subsequent versions are supported.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1095
If no unit is mentioned within a cell:

● the unit taken into account is the one mentioned in the first row

● and if no unit is specified in the first row, the unit taken into account is the relevant SI unit.

Here is an example of an Excel sheet:

When a configuration which contains empty

cells is selected, the parameters associated
with the empty cells are not modified. This
property enables you to modify parameters
column name column unit but only under certain conditions.

Within a given column, you can change the units. Units can be
specified in cells.
No unit = SI

Note that it is highly recommended to choose the General format and not the Cells format in Excel.

The Tabulated Text File Format

Here is an example of a tabulated file format. You can use your favorite text editor to create this design table. Use the Tab
key to skip from one column to the other. Unit rules are the same as for the Excel sheets.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1096

Under UNIX, it is possible to change the default design table editor. To do so, type:
export CATTextEditorDT=... (indicate the path of the editor.)

The CATIA Design Table

Once it has been read and processed by CATIA, the design table looks something like this:

No units in column Check box to modify the activity

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1097

Displays the design table raw data. Values with units Duplicates the design table external data into the
CATIA document. Check this box whenever you intend
to re-access your design table on another platform.

Design Tables Status:

Design tables can have different statuses:

Synchronized: The Design Table is copied into the model ("Duplicate data in CATIA model" option checked) and the
data stored in the model are synchronized with the content of the file.

Not synchronized: The Design Table is copied into the model ("Duplicate data in CATIA model" option checked) and the
data stored in the model are synchronized with the content of the file. (The .xls or .txt file was modified outside CATIA.)

Inactive: The Design Table is deactivated. The associated parameters are not driven by the design table any longer.

Broken: The Design Table is functionally KO because it cannot be used to valuate the associated parameters (data
cannot be accessed because the file is lost or there are 2 columns with the same name ...).

Light Broken: The filter is not compatible with the current configuration, or if the current configuration value does not
correspond to one of the rows of the file.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1098

About the Design Table Dialog Box

Here is the dialog box sequence you get onscreen when you click the icon in the standard toolbar.

Creation of a design table

"Create a design table from a pre-existing file" check box

Check this option whenever you want to create a design table from the values of an external file. In this case, the
created design table is made up of:

● either only the columns whose name is a document parameter name. If the external file contains a "Length"
column but no such "Length" parameter is defined in the document, the "Length" column will not appear in the
created design table. This is the "automatic" association process.

● or only the columns that have been associated one-by-one with a document parameter. If the external file
contains a "Length" column but no so-called parameter in the document, you can choose to associate the
"Length" column of the external with a parameter of the same type (a sketch radius for example).
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1099

"Create a design table with current parameter values" check box

Check this option whenever you want to create a design table from a subset of the document parameters. You just
have to select among all the document parameters the ones you want to be included as columns in the design
table. In this case, the created design table only contains a single row.

The Orientation check boxes

These options allow you to choose the design table orientation. A vertical orientation is recommended when the
design table contains many parameters.

The sheet index

You can specify an Excel or Lotus sheet number.

The Destination field

All knowledgeware relations such as design tables, rules, checks or formulas, are created by default below the
Relations node. Creating a relation below a given feature may help you organize your document. To specify a
destination, select the default destination in the Destination field, then click the feature intended to be the new
destination either in the specification tree or in the geometry area.

Selection of the parameters to insert

This dialog box pops up when you check the "Create a design table with current parameter values" check box.

There are two ways to restrict the list of parameters to be displayed in the 'Parameters to insert' list. You can use
the:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1100
1. Filter Name field
Use the * character to specify any string to be included in a parameter name. Specifying *Len* will display
in the "Parameters to insert" part of the dialog box all the parameters having the Len substring in their
name.
2. and the Filter Type field.

When you click OK in the dialog box above, the "Select the pathname of the file to be created" window is
displayed.

Selection of the file to be created

Use this dialog box to specify the .xls (Windows) or .txt file to be created. Specify the .xls extension when filling
out the 'File name' field. Then click Open to display the design table dialog box.

When working in a french environment, make sure that the decimal numbers contained in the text file linked
to the design table are not written with a comma "," but with a decimal point. (This way you will be able to
move to an english environment easily.)

Design table dialog box

The 'Configurations' tab
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1101

The current configuration as well as its number (< configuration number >) are highlighted. To change the current
configuration, you just have to click the new configuration in the design table.
A single row design table is created when you generate a design table with the current parameter values.

● The Filter
The filter is a means to help you query for a configuration meeting specific criteria. Click the "Edit... " button to
display the "Design Table Request Editor".
In a query, you can specify a condition referring to the design table parameters as well as the parameters
external to the design table.

● The "Activity" check box

A design table is created active by default. The activity check box provides you with a way to deactivate the
design table to be created.

● The "Edit table..." push button

Click this button to display the edit table to be created. Depending on whether you have selected a .xls
extension or not, you will launch a Microsoft Excel application or your default text editor for a .txt file.

● The "Duplicate data in CATIA model" check box

Check this box whenever you intend to reuse your document on an operating system different from the one
used to create the design table. That way, your design table data will be duplicated into your document.

The "Associations" tab

This tab provides you with a way to associate the document parameters with the columns of the external design
table. The left part of the dialog box allows you to associate parameters with the design table columns while the
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1102
right part displays the list of associated parameters.

● The "Create parameters..." push button

When a parameter is referred to in the design table but has not been created in the document, clicking this
button allows you to create a parameter in the document and associate it with the right column of the design
table.

● The "Rename associated parameters" push button

If a parameter does not have the same name as the column it is associated with, you can rename this

parameter so that it has the same name as the column. Clicking the "Rename associated parameters" push

button displays a dialog box which asks you whether you want to rename all the parameters or only a few of

them.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1103

Creating a Design Table from the Current

Parameters Values
A design table is a feature that you create from your document parameters or from external data. No
matter the existence of external data, you must create the design table in CATIA. There are two
ways to create a design table:
● From the current parameter values

● From a pre-existing file.

The scenario described below explains how to proceed in the first case. The design table creation
process includes the following steps:

a. Create a table from the document parameters.

b. Select the parameters to add to the design table.

c. Specify a file to contain the generated design table.

d. Edit the generated CATIA design table.

e. Apply the design table to your document.

For information on how to use the different dialog boxes related to the design table, see The Design
Table Dialog.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar. The Creation of a Design Table
dialog box is displayed. See The Design Table Dialog for further information.

3. If need be replace the default name and comment for the design table.

4. Check the Create a design table with current parameter values option.

5. Click OK. The Select parameters to insert dialog box is displayed.

6. In the Parameters to insert list, select the PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length and the

PartBody\Pad.1\SecondLimit\Length items. Then click the right arrow to add both items to the

Inserted parameters list.

7. Click OK. A file selection box is displayed.

8. Specify the pathname of the design table to be created. Click OK in the file selection dialog
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1104

box.

The design table feature is added to the specification tree and a dialog box displays the newly

created design table. This design table contains only one configuration. By default it is active.

If the file specified already exists, the Creation of a Design Table dialog box is re-

displayed as well as a message box asking you whether you want to overwrite the

existing file.

9. Click Edit table... to start an Excel application (under Windows) or open the text editor under

Unix.

Replace the PartBody\Pad.1\FirstLimit\Length parameter value with 80mm.

10. Save your Excel or .txt file and close your application. Some information messages are

displayed in a dialog box warning you about events related to the design table. Click Close.

11. Click Apply into the CATIA design table dialog, the document is updated as well as the CATIA

design table. Click OK to exit the dialog and add the design table to the document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1105

Creating a Design Table from a Pre-existing File

A design table is a feature that you create using your document parameters or external data. No
matter the existence of external data, the design table must created in CATIA. There are two ways to
create a design table:
● Using the current parameter values

● Using a pre-existing file

The scenario below describes how to proceed in the second case. Here are the main steps to follow:

a. Select the pre-existing file containing the raw data.

b. Create the associations between the document parameters and the external table columns. You
can choose to create these associations automatically.
c. Edit the generated CATIA design table.
d. Select a configuration in the generated design table. You can modify the default configuration
proposed by CATIA.
e. Apply the design table feature to your document.

For information on how to use the different dialog boxes related to the design table, see The Design
Table Dialog.

It is now possible to select a Design Table external file from a VPDM (ENOVIA LCA, ...). To do so, make
sure you have enabled the desired environment in the Document Environments field (Tools->Options-
>General->Document.) Your documents will be accessible via the Document Chooser.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the standard toolbar.

The Creation of a Design Table dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable1 for

example) and a comment.

3. Check the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option. Click OK.

4. Select the KwrBallBearing.xls file, and click Open. A dialog box asks you whether you want to

perform automatic associations between the design table columns and the document

parameters which have the same name.

5. Click Yes. The Material parameter is the only one which is common to the document

parameters and to the external design table. A multi-row design table is created. The '<' and

'>' symbols denote the current configuration.

6. Select the configuration you want to apply to the document (line 4 for example). Click Apply.

The Iron parameter value is displayed in the specification tree.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1106

7. Click OK to end the design table creation.

The scenario below illustrates how to create a design table by associating one by one the document
parameters with the input file columns.

1. Open the KwrStartDocument.CATPart document.

2. Click the Design Table icon in the standard toolbar.

The "Creation of a Design Table" dialog box is displayed. Enter a name (DesignTable2 for

example) and a comment.

3. Check the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option. Click OK. A file selection

window is displayed.

4. Select the KwrBallBearing.xls file. Click Open. The Automatic associations dialog box is

displayed.

5. Click No. The design table dialog box informs you that there is no associations between

parameters and columns.

Now, you have to associate one by one the document parameters with the design table

columns.

6. Click the Associations option. The table design dialog box now displays side by side the

document parameter list and the input file columns.

7. In the Parameters list, select the PartBody\Hole.1\Diameter item. In the Columns list, select

the d1 parameter. Then click Associate. A parameter couple is now displayed in the

Associations between parameters and columns list.

8. Repeat the same operation for the Material parameter.

Selecting a parameter or an association in the list highlights the corresponding values in the

geometry area.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1107

The parameter list can be filtered:

❍ By clicking on a feature (either in the specification tree or in the geometry area). All

the parameter values of the selected feature (and children) are highlighted in the

geometry area. The parameter list displays only the parameters of the selected

features (and children).

❍ By specifying a string in the Filter Name field. For example, typing *ength* enables

you to display all Length parameters

❍ By specifying a type in the Filter Type field.

The Create parameters... button allows you to create automatically parameters and

associations for items of the Columns list. The Rename associated parameters button

replaces the parameter name with the column name.

9. Click OK to end the DesignTable2 creation dialog.

The DesignTable2 feature is added as a relation to the specification tree. Double-click

DesignTable2 in the specification to edit the table. By default, the configuration 1 is applied to

the document. A new material (Aluminum) is applied to the document and the hole diameter is

modified.You can select another configuration and apply it to your document.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1108

Interactively Adding a Row To a Design Table

External File

The task described below explains how to add a row to a design table external file. The scenario is
divided into the following steps:
● You open the CATPart file and inserts the design table

● You deactivate the design table and creates a new configuration

● You add the configuration to the design table external file

● You activate the design table and implements the new configuration

This function enables you to add a contextual menu to design table feature (in the tree) which appears
only:
● If the design table is deactivated

● If the design table external file exists and is read/write

● If at least one parameter is associated.

The behavior of this command is to add a row at the end of the design table file with associated
parameters values. For not associated columns, an empty cell is added.
To perform this scenario, you will need the following files:
KwrAddARow.CATPart
KwrAddARow.xls

Note that this task can only be performed in an english environment.

Prior to performing this scenario, make sure the With value and With formula options are checked in
the Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure->Knowledge tab.

1. Open the KwrAddARow.CATPart file. The following image is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1109

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ).

3. Select the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK.

4. In the opening File Selection window, select the KwrAddARow.xls file and click Open.

5. Click Yes in the Automatic associations window: The design table opens. Click OK to close it.

6. Click the Asynchronous Relations Update icon to update Formula.1.

7. Under the Design Tables node, double-click Configuration=1. The Edit Parameter dialog box

is displayed.

8. Click the Design table icon in the Edit Parameter dialog box: The Design Table window is

displayed.

9. In the dialog box, select the second configuration (line 2), click Apply, and OK twice.

10. Right-click Formula.1 in the specification tree and select the Local Update command.

11. In the Specification tree, right-click DesignTable.1 and select the DesignTable.1 object-

>Deactivate command. The design table is deactivated.

12. Modify the spline:

● Double-click Point.1 twice in the specification tree or in the Geometry. Enter the
coordinates indicated below into the Point Definition dialog box.

● Modify the coordinates Point 1 Point 2 Point 3

of Point.2 and Point.3
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1110

(see table opposite) X 0 100 50

Y 0 100 50

Z 0 -100 -226

● Click OK when done.

13. Add the new configuration to the design table. To do so, right-click DesignTable.1 in the

specification tree and select the DesignTable.1 object->Add row with current values

command.

14. Right-click DesignTable.1 and select the DesignTable.1 object->Activate command.

15. Double-click Configuration=1 under DesignTable.1 and click the Design Table icon ( ).

16. In the DesignTable.1 window select the configuration that you have just added and click Apply

and OK twice. The spline is updated accordingly.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1111

Generating a File From a Design Table

This topic explains how to regenerate an external file (.XLS or .txt format) using the data contained in the
model. The data contained in the model come from an external file that was previously deleted. There are 2
ways to regenerate the file:
● Using the Create New File command: This command is available in the Manage Design Tables window
which is displayed only if the Interactive Synchronization at Load option is checked in the Knowledge
tab (Tools->Options...->Parameters and Measure).
● Using the Export Content to file command

Using the Create New File Command

1. From the Tools->Options...->Parameters and Measure command, access the Knowledge tab

and make sure the Interactive Synchronization at Load option is checked.

2. Open the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file. The following image is displayed.

3. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Knowledge tool bar. The Creation of a Design Table
window is displayed.

4. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File Selection

dialog box opens.

5. Select the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when prompted to associate the

columns of the table with the parameters.

6. In the DesignTable.1 window, Check the Duplicate data in CATIA model option. Note that if this

option is not checked, you will not be able to generate a new file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1112

7. Click OK to apply the default configuration. DesignTable.1 is displayed below the Relations node.

8. Save your file and close it.

9. Delete the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file from its current location.

10. Open the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file that you have just saved. The Manage Design Tables

window is displayed indicating that the external file has been deleted.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1113

11. Click the Create New File ... button to generate a file from the data contained in the .CATPart

document. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

12. Enter the name of the file that you want to create: DT2 in this scenario. .XLS is the default file type.

The text format is also available in the Save as type: list. Keep the default settings.

13. Click Save and Close when done. The DT2.xls containing the design table data is created.

Using the Export content to file... command

14. From the Tools->Options...->Parameters and Measure command, access the Knowledge tab

and make sure the Manual Synchronization option is checked.

15. Repeat steps 2 to 9.

16. Right-click DesignTable.1 in the specification tree and select the DesignTable.1 object->Export

content to file... command.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1114

17. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

18. Enter the name of the file that you want to create: DT3 in this scenario. .XLS is the default file type.

The text format is also available in the Save as type: list. Keep the default settings.

19. Click Yes when asked if you want this file to become the new design table source file. The DT3.xls

containing the design table data is created.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1115

Controlling Design Tables Synchronization

This topic aims at providing you with short examples when working with design tables in the following
modes:
● Automatic Synchronization At Load

● Interactive Synchronization At Load

● Manual Synchronization

Automatic Synchronization At Load

When loading a model containing user design tables, if the design table files have been modified
and the external file data is contained in the model, the design table will be synchronized
automatically if this option is selected.

1. Open the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file.

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ). The Creation of a Design Table dialog box is displayed.

3. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File

Selection dialog box opens.

4. Select the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when prompted to

associate the columns of the tables with the parameters.

5. Click OK to apply the default configuration.

6. Save your file and close it.

7. Open the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file. Change the material of row 2 to Gold. Save your file

and close it.

8. Go back to Catia. Open the part: The Part is updated accordingly to your changes.

Interactive Synchronization At Load

When loading a model containing user design tables whose external source file was deleted, this
option enables you to select a new source file or to save the data contained in the design tables
in a new file.

1. From the Tools->Options... menu, select General->Parameters and Measure and check

the Interactive Synchronization At Load option in the Knowledge tab.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1116

2. Open the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file. The following image is displayed.

3. Click the Design Table icon ( ). The Creation of a Design Table dialog box is displayed.

4. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File

Selection dialog box opens.

5. Select the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when asked if you want to

associate the columns of the tables with the parameters.

6. Click OK to apply the default configuration.

7. Save your file and close it.

8. Go to the directory containing the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file and delete it.

9. Go back to Catia. Open the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file: A dialog box is displayed asking you if

you want to select a new file. Click the Select button and select a new Excel file.

Manual Synchronization
When loading a model containing user design tables, if the design table files have been modified
and the external file data is contained in the model, the design table will be synchronized if this
option is checked. To synchronize both files, right-click the design table in the specification tree
and select the DesignTable object->Synchronize command or the Edit->Links command.

1. From the Tools->Options... menu, select General->Parameters and Measure and check

the Manual Synchronization At Load in the Knowledge tab.

2. Open the KwrBallBearing2.CATPart file. This file already contains a design table whose values

are identical to those contained in the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file (Note that the

KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file and the KwrBallBearing2.CATPart file should be located in the

same directory.)

3. Select the Edit->Links command to edit the Excel file path and select the appropriate

KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file. Save the file and close it.

4. Open the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls file and modify the material values for example. Close

the file.

5. Go back to CATIA. Open the KwrBallBearing2.CATPart file.

6. Select the Edit->Links command and click the Synchronize button to synchronize both files.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1117

If the Duplicate data in CATIA model option is checked, and if you choose another design table file
without using the Edit Table command in the CATIA session, the following message is displayed
whatever the settings:

If the Duplicate data in CATIA model option is unchecked, the synchronization occurs automatically.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1118

Storing a Design Table in a Power Copy

This task shows how to store a design table in a power copy for later use. In this scenario, you want
to instantiate the inner and the outer cages of a ball bearing in a different context. To do so, you
create a power copy only containing the outer and the inner cages of an already existing ball bearing.

This scenario is divided into the following steps:

● Inserting the Design Table into the CATPart file

● Creating the Power Copy

● Instantiating the Power Copy containing the Design Table

To perform this scenario, the Product Knowledge Template license is required.

To perform this scenario, you will need the following files:

● KwrBallBearing1.CATPart

● KwrBearingDesignTable.xls

To store a design table in a Power Copy, do not forget to select the parameters pointed by the design
table.

1. Open the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file. The following image is displayed.

Inserting the Design Table into the CATPart file

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Standard toolbar. The Creation of a Design
Table dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1119

Selection dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the KwrBearingDesignTable.xls and click Open.

5. Click Yes when asked for automatic associations and click OK. The Design table is displayed

below the Relations node.

Creating the Power Copy

6. From the Start->Knowledgeware menu, access the Product Knowledge Template

workbench (if need be) and click the Create a PowerCopy icon. The Power Copy Definition

dialog box is displayed.

7. In the Specification tree, select the following items:

❍ DesignTable.1

❍ Shaft.1

❍ Shaft.2

❍ Shaft.3

❍ Sketch.1

❍ Sketch.2
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1120

❍ Sketch.3

❍ the Material Parameter.

Click OK when done. The Power Copy is displayed below the PowerCopy node in the

specification tree.

8. Save your file and close it.

Instantiating the Power Copy

9. From the File->New menu, select Part in the List of Types and click OK.

10. If need be, from the Start->Knowledgeware menu, access the Product Knowledge

Template workbench and click the Instantiate From Document icon. The File Selection

dialog box is displayed.

11. Select the KwrBallBearing1.CATPart file and click Open. The Insert Object dialog box is

displayed.

12. Select the yz plane in the specification tree and click OK. The Design Table is instantiated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1121

Creating and Using a Knowledge Advisor Law

The scenario which is developed below illustrates how to create a Knowledge Advisor law, then use a
combination of a Generative Shape Design law and a Knowledge Advisor law in the same relation.

● The Evaluate method is to be used to calculate a parameter value when this parameter is
defined by a Generative Shape Design law.

● Note that the result you obtain on completion of this task depends on the initial lines. You can
replay the scenario with different lines and see how it affects the result.

● A Knowledge Advisor law is a relation whereby a parameter is defined with respect to another. Both
parameters involved in a law are called formal parameters. Formal parameters and laws are specifically
designed to be used in the creation of shape design parallel curves. A Generative Shape Design law can
be used in a Knowledge Advisor law.
● Laws only specify a relation between one parameter and another single parameter.

1. From the Start->Shape menu, access the Generative Shape Design workbench.

2. Define a working support using the Work on Support icon ( ).

3. Select the zx plane, for example, and click OK in the updated Work on Support dialog box without

modifying any other parameter.

4. Click the Line icon ( ). The Line dialog box is displayed.

5. Right-click in the Point 1 field, and choose the Create point command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1122

6. The Point Definition dialog box is displayed, the Point type and Plane fields being automatically

filled.

7. Create a point at H:0mm and V:0mm, and click OK.

8. Repeat the operation, right-click the Point 2 field from the Line dialog box to create another point at

H:100mm and V:0mm, then click OK in the Point Definition dialog box.

9. Click OK in the Line dialog box to create the line.

10. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench and click the icon. If need be, use the Tools-
>Customize command to access the icon. A dialog box similar to the one below is displayed. This

editor is similar to the other relation editors. If need be, replace the default values specified in the

dialog box fields.

11. Click OK. The law editor is displayed. The right-hand part allows you to create the parameters to be

used in the law. The left-hand part is the law edition box.

12. Click the New Parameter of type button to create two real type parameters FormalReal.1 and

FormalReal.2, then enter the law below into the edition window:

FormalReal.1 = 5*sin(5*PI*1rad*FormalReal.2)+ 10
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1123

To know more about the new buttons available in the Law Editor, refer to the
Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.

13. Click OK to add the law to the document. The Law.1 feature is added to the specification tree right

below the Relations node.

14. Select your document root feature and re-access the Generative Shape Design workbench.

15. Click the icon to create a curve parallel to the line created at the very beginning of the
scenario. The Parallel Curve Definition dialog box is displayed.

16. Select the line that you previously created as the reference Curve.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1124

Note that only positive laws, i.e. with positive values only, can be used when creating
parallel curves (positive is to be understood as "strictly positive").

18. Click the Law ... button. The Law Definition dialog box is displayed.

19. Click the Advanced Law type, click Law.1 in the specification tree and click Close.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1125

20. Click OK. A curve parallel to the selected one is created, taking the law into account.

The KwrCreatingaLaw.CATPart sample illustrates this scenario.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1126

Knowledgeware Language
The objects to be manipulated in formulas are available in the f(x) dictionary.

The Dictionary allows you to access the functions, operators and feature
attributes that can be used in formulas.

Analysis Operators Circle Constructors Design tables

Direction Constructors Law Line Constructors
List Literal Type Mathematical Functions
Measures Object Type Operators
Part Measures Plane Constructors Point Constructors
String Surface Constructors Wireframe Constructors

To help you write a formula, the formula editor provides you with a dictionary. This dictionary exposes the
list of parameters and functions you can use to define a formula. Depending on the category of objects to
be referred to in the formula, the dictionary is divided into two or three parts. To insert any definition in
the formula editor, just double-click the object either in the dictionary or in the tree. If you double-click a
function in the dictionary, its signature is carried forward to the formula editor. Only the argument
definitions are missing.

To get a full description of the Knowledgeware language, see the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1127

Knowledge Resources
Using the Knowledgeware Index
Managing Knowledge Applications Resources
About Application Resources Management (ARM)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1128

Using the Knowledgeware Index

Some Knowledgeware functionalities need to access types, functions, main behaviors and sub-processes. Until
V5R16, when working with functionalities based on functions belonging to other workbenches, a warning
message would display asking you if you wanted to load all libraries, which impacted performances (see picture
below.)

A default index file containing libraries is now available in the runtime view. When a relation based on a function
is run, the function is searched for in the index and is loaded. This index can also contain items you created like:

● Knowledge types that can be defined in BKT and stored in CATfct documents. For more information, refer to
the Business Process Knowledge Template User's Guide.
● Knowledge functions defined by other applications, or defined interactively in BKT and stored in CATfct
documents. For more information, refer to the Business Process Knowledge Template User's Guide.
● Sub-processes (exposed main behaviors) defined in BKT and stored in CATfct documents. For more
information, refer to the Business Process Knowledge Template User's Guide.
● User Feature types created in PKT and stored in CATGScript files. For more information, refer to the Product
Knowledge Template User's Guide.

To generate the index, the tool reads the CATGScript files located in the KnowledgeTypesCustom directory and
CATfct files located in the <CATGraphicPath> directory. If you want to make created types, functions, main
behaviors or sub-processes persistent, you must re-generate this index.

Generating the Index For the Complete Runtime View

1. Open a DOS window.

2. Enter the following commands:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1129
// Step 1
// myEnv: Absolute directory
mkdir myEnv

// Step 2
// DownloadOfCXR16: Location/absolute directory of the R16.
// IndexEnv: Valid file name without suffix.
// Workspaces_Concatenation: Valid workspaces/download paths concatenation
DownloadOfCXR16\intel_a\code\bin\setcatenv -e IndexEnv -p Workspaces_Concatenation -d myEnv -
desktop yes -new yes -a global

// Step 3
// mydirectory is a temporary directory that will contain the generated index file.
DownloadOfCXR16\intel_a\code\bin\catstart -env IndexEnv -direnv myEnv -run
"CATCkeGenerateIdx mydirectory"

If your environment is already created, execute only:

DownloadOfCXR16\intel_a\code\bin\catstart -env IndexEnv -direnv myEnv -run

"CATCkeGenerateIdx mydirectory"

3. Copy/paste the CATKnowledgeDictionary.txt file into the knowledge sub-directory of one of the

directories of the <CATKnowledgePath>. To find out more about this directory, see Creating, Managing

and Deploying Knowledge Applications Resources.

Generating the Index For One Workspace of the Runtime

View
Generating the index for one workspace of the Runtime View is especially useful if you want to deploy

your application.

If you generate the index for one workspace of the runtime view, only the resources of this workspace will be
considered.

1. Step 1 and 2 are identical as the ones described above. Enter:

// Step 3
// mydirectory is a temporary directory that will contain the generated index file.
DownloadOfCXR16\intel_a\code\bin\catstart -env IndexEnv -direnv myEnv -run
"CATCkeGenerateIdx mydirectory Workspace_Path"

2. Copy the generated index into the knowledge sub-directory of the <CATKnowledgePath> of your

workspace.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1130

Managing Knowledge Applications Resources

Knowledge workbenches provide you with different ways to define "pseudo applications" or sets of features.
Even if these applications are not C++ developed, they need to be managed like any classic C++ application. A
new directory created to ease the managing of these applications and features will help you in this task. This
management can be performed using a new environment variable, and a new setting, and possibly the RADE
tools.

● List of Managed Files

● About RADE Tools

● About the Knowledge Environment Variable and Setting

● Creating, Managing and Deploying Knowledge Applications Resources

● Creating, Managing and Deploying Knowledge Applications Resources Using RADE Tools and SCM

● Advanced Example

● Frequently Asked Questions

List of Managed Files

Knowledge products can rely on the following Knowledge resources:

.CATfct Files

.CATfct files generated by BKT and reused by BK2 products contain types, functions, methods, and exposed
main behaviors.

Index Files (.idx)

The index is used by the Knowledgeware Index and is used in the Knowledge language, in Knowledge Expert or
in BKT.

Knowledge Custom Types

.CATGscript files are generated in the User Feature type definition tab, and reused by the Knowledge index to
build a complete view of the Knowledge dictionary of types.

Application Resources Management .catalog Files

Application Resource Management .catalog files establish a link between a logical name of a resource and the
physical resource referenced through the catalog. The objective of those catalogs is to answer this simple
question: "give me the object named XXX". This is possible in BKT using the Instantiate Template, the Load, the
Knowledge Certify and the Insert Component behaviors. It is also used in PKT by the Knowledge Pattern
feature.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1131

Knowledge Resources files

Knowledge Resources can include many kinds of data used as resources in the Knowledge language or in BKT
like CATPart, CATProduct and .catalog documents.
If the user wants to open a .CATPart file and indicates the name of the file, the system will try to find this file in
the knowledgeResources directory first. If he indicates an ARMCatalogName|Resource name, and if:

● the system has not found the ARMCatalogName catalog in the KnowledgeResourcesCatalogs directory or

● if the system has not found the ARMCatalogName|Resource in the ARMCatalogName catalog
=> it will try to find the resource in this directory.

Workbenches Files

The Workbenches file called WBIM.xml is generated by BKT. It contains the local User categories and the
Deployed workbenches definition.

CATNls Files

.CATNls files are used by BKT applications, by the User Features, the BuildMessage functions, and the tool tips
translations to:

● Use the BuildMessageNLS function that can be used in any Knowledge language-based feature and that can
rely on those CATNls files to operate a translation. For example,
BuildMessageNLS("CATKneTestCatalog","Zero")) looks for the CATKneTestCatalog.CATNls file and tries to
translate the Zero keyword.
● Translate Knowledge types associated to User Features, create a CATTypeXXX.CATNls file translating the
attribute names. To find out more, see Creating a NLS User Feature in the Product Knowledge Template
User's Guide.
● Customize the yellow tool tips that appear when pre-selecting some objects in the tree. To find out more,
see Assigning a Comment to a Knowledge Feature in the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide

CATScript, CATvba and CATvbsFiles

CATVBA and .CATScript macros, edited in the CATIA macro editor or any editor, are reused by different
Knowledge products:

● The LaunchMacroFromFile function in the Knowledge language takes as first argument the name of the file
that contains the macro.
● In the Visual Basic behavior in BKT.

Icons

Icons associated to User Features and BKT Technological objects and behaviors are located in the
<CATGraphicPath>icons\normal directory.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1132

About RADE Tools

This page provides an overview of the RADE tools that can be used when working with the directories structure.
To find out more about these tools, refer to the RADE tools documentation available in the CAA V5 Encyclopedia.

Applications created using Knowledge workbenches can be managed using the RADE tools (Rapid Application
Development Environment). To be managed properly using these tools, applications components (Icons, CATfct,
and so on) must be organized in a directories structure, called a "framework structure". The products that can
be used are:

Multi-Workspace Application Tool allowing you to build C++ applications. You have to:
Builder - mkmk (MAB) ● Create a CAA code that will be used to introduce new BKT code or new
Knowledge user functions
● Build a workspace on a CATIA official release
● Compile this code to generate the right runtime dll in the runtime view of the
workspace
● Fill the workspace build time view with framework data.

Source Code Manager Tool managing the evolutions of applications, and offering collaborative and
(SCM) vaulting capabilities to the Knowledge applications and enabling you to:
● Build a hierarchy of workspaces with promotion and synchronization
capabilities
● Check in and out each object managed in MAB, including Knowledge
resources to manage concurrent access.

C++ Unit Test Manager Tool allowing you to define and replay test cases, including C++ test cases, or
(CUT) macros.
Interactive Test Capture Tool allowing you to record user scenarios and to replay them.
(ITC)
C++ Interactive Capture Tool providing a Microsoft .NET plug-in designed to gather all MAB, SCM, and
(CID) CUT functionalities in an interactive environment. (Available only under Microsoft
Windows XP or 2000.)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1133

About the Knowledge Environment Variable

and Setting
To easily deploy Knowledge applications, the administrator uses a new Knowledge environment variable and a
new Knowledge setting.

CATKnowledgePath Environment Variable

This environment variable indicates a set of directories where Knowledge resources have to be searched for
when using an application. Those directories are separated using semi colons (";") under Windows, and ":" on
Unix.

Each directory contained in this variable must contain the new directories structure. At runtime, the data
contained in this structure is used by CATIA.

To find out more about the way to modify this environment variable, see Creating, Managing and Deploying
Knowledge Applications Resources and Managing Environments in the CATIA Infrastructure Installation Guide.

CATKnowledgeBuildPath Setting
When the architect builds an application, he can use this setting to indicate the location where Knowledge
resources have to be stored and read. Using this setting is like inserting a directory at the very beginning of the
CATKnowledgePath environment variable. Resources are first searched for in the selected knowledge directory
and then in the directories indicated by the CATKnowledgePath variable. To modify this setting, access the
Knowledge Environment tab from the Tools->Options...->General->Parameters and Measure category.
The main advantage of this setting relies on the fact that it is not necessary to restart CATIA to retrieve
modified or new resources.

When working with SCM, the selected

directory must be the top directory
containing the knowledge directories
structure. If not, the data stored in this
directory will not be retrieved by the
applications.
In the picture opposite, the knowledge
directory contains the appropriate
directories structure.

Once the application is deployed, that is to say, after copying the resources where they will be retrieved through
the CATKnowledgePath environment variable, this setting becomes useless. This setting can be emptied and
locked as soon as the application is deployed on the end user computer or on a server. To find out more about
the way to lock this setting, see Locking Settings in the CATIA Infrastructure Installation Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1134

This setting is intended for those of you who create applications. It lets you save .CATfct and .CATGScript
files at the right location and reference this location.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1135

Creating, Managing and Deploying Knowledge

Applications Resources
This section describes the recommended methodology to create and deploy an application.

We assume that:
● A CATIA version (install, download, release source) is located in a <CATIA_folder> folder, where
<CATIA_folder> may be:

❍ c:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\V5R16

❍ e:\users\yyy\Download\server\CXR16
❍ \\server\CXR16.
● The architect builds only one application.

Creating the Environment

The very first thing to do consists in creating a directories structure. Data must be stored in the appropriate
directories and environment variables must be properly set.

1. Create a directories structure identical to the one below.

Note that you do not necessary have to create the structure below if you do not work with SCM,
the Runtime view structure may be sufficient.

❍ icons directory: Contains the icons associated to your

workbenches, and templates.
❍ knowledgeResources directory: Contains the CATPart
files you use in your application, the ones that contain
the templates, the CATProduct files and such files.
❍ knowledgeResourcesCatalogs directory: Contains the
ARM catalogs.
❍ knowledgeTypesCustom directory: Contains the
.CATGscript files created when typing a User Feature.
❍ msgcatalog directory: Contains the .CATNls files.
❍ automation directory: Contains the .CATScript used in
your applications.
❍ html directory: Contains the html files used (like the
ones associated to the ActiveX URL behavior in BKT for
example.)

2. From the Start menu, select the Programs->CATIA->Tools->Environment Editor V5R16

command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1136

3. Select the Environment->New from... command.

4. Check the Add a new path to this environment option and enter a new path in the NewPath field.

5. Enter the name of the application you want to create and click OK when done.

You are now ready to create your application.

Creating the Application

Create your application.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1137

Deploying the Application

1. The administrator installs the CATIA version he used to develop his application on all client computers or

on a server.

2. The administrator copies the <OS> (directories structure and content), and more generally, the whole

Runtime part of his directories structure on the client computer or on the server.

3. The administrator sets the required variables:

❍ If he copies the content ("code"/"resources"/… directories) of the <OS> structure under the
corresponding <CATIA_folder>\<OS>, he does not have to modify any environment variable since
the copied data is located in the directory known by CATIA.

❍ If he copies the directories and the structure at a location that is not known by CATIA, he has to set
up his environment i.e. modify the content of some environment variables (CATMsgCatalogPath,
CATKnowledgePath, CATGraphicPath, CATStartupPath...). To do so, he can:

■ Use the New From... command in the CATIA Environment Editor. In this case, a new path will be
added before or after all variables depending on the chosen option.

■ Use the New command in the CATIA Environment Editor. In this case, he must select the
variables to which he wants to add a new path.
To find out more about the CATIA Environment Editor, see Customizing Your Environment on
Windows in the CATIA Infrastructure Installation Guide. To find out more about these
variables, see About the Knowledge Environment Variables and Settings.

4. The administrator empties and locks the CATKnowledgeBuildPath setting on the client install. To know

more about the way to lock settings, see the Locking Settings topic in the CATIA Infrastructure

Installation Guide. The targeted user will access all knowledge resources i.e. CATIA native ones and the

new deployed application resources.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1138

Creating, Managing and Deploying Knowledge

Applications Resources Using RADE Tools and
SCM
This section describes the recommended methodology.

We assume that:
● A CATIA version (install, download, release source) is located in a <CATIA_folder> folder, where
<CATIA_folder> may be:

❍ c:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\V5R16

❍ e:\users\yyy\Download\server\CXR16
❍ \\server\CXR16.
● The architect builds only one application.

When working with SCM, you have to create a Buildtime view that is managed by SCM and a Runtime view to
launch CATIA. CATIA cannot be launched from the Buildtime view and SCM cannot deal with files stored in the
Runtime view. So both views have to be split.

Creating the Application

The very first thing to do consists in creating a CAA workspace whose structure is identical to the one shown
below.

1. Create the Buildtime view manually. It should be identical to the view below.

A Buildtime view is a workspace containing

frameworks including code modules and CNext
directories.
❍ icons directory: Contains the icons associated to
your workbenches, and templates.
❍ knowledgeResources directory: Contains the
CATPart files you use in your application, the
ones that contain the templates, the
CATProduct files and such files.
❍ knowledgeResourcesCatalogs directory:
Contains the ARM catalogs.
❍ knowledgeTypesCustom directory: Contains the
.CATGscript files created when typing a User
Feature, and the .CATfct files.
❍ msgcatalog directory: Contains the .CATNls
files.
❍ automation directory: Contains the .CATScript
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1139
used in your applications.
❍ html directory: Contains the html files used (like
the ones associated to the ActiveXUrl behavior
in BKT for example.)

The RADE tool to be used at this stage is SCM. SCM integration consists for the application
architect in locating the resource at the right place in the framework directory, and in checking in
and checking out the files.
Files like CATScript, CATGScript, CATNls can be checked-out concurrently by several users
because it is possible to merge the information. Other objects (CATPart, .catalog for example)
cannot be automatically merged. As a consequence, they cannot be concurrently checked out.
The conflicts will have to be managed outside the tool. To share the application with other users,
the architect simply promotes his work to its father workspace or publishes his work to his
children workspaces.

2. From the Start menu, select the Programs->CATIA->Tools->Environment Editor V5R16

command.

3. Select the Environment->New from... command.

4. Check the Add a new path to this environment option and enter a new path in the NewPath field.

5. Enter the name of the application you want to create and click OK when done.

6. Valuate the CATKnowledgeBuildPath setting with the path of the "knowledge" directory of your Buildtime

view.

❍ Select the Tools -> Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed.

❍ Choose the General category in the left-hand box. Click the Parameters and measure category.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1140

❍ Click the Knowledge Environment tab and select the desired directory in the Architect
Resources Creation Path field.
Note that:

■ This setting value can be modified several times during a CATIA session, so that you can
create/modify resources in all frameworks of your workspace without restarting CATIA.

■ If you use SCM, all modifications of files belonging to the Buildtime part (code and
resources) are managed by SCM, so that concurrent engineering is supported.

7. Create the Runtime view. To do so, copy the CNext directory located in the Buildtime view into the

<OS> directory of the Runtime view. The structure should be identical to the one below.

Note that you can copy the CNext directory anywhere

as long as this location is known by the environment,
that is to say, provided you set the CATKnowledgePath
environment variable properly.

The RADE tool to be used at this stage is MAB. Use the mkrtv command then the mkGetPreq
command (mkGetPreq -p <CATIA_folder>\BSF) to create the link between your code and CATIA
code. The structure should be identical to the view above.
❍ If the architect who creates and modifies an application needs to create, access, and modify
resources during a CATIA session and wants its creations/modifications to be taken into
account during the CATIA session, the resources must be located in the Runtime view.
❍ If the architect wants its creations/modifications to be taken into account during the
application delivery and wants to manage concurrent engineering of those resources (using
SCM), the resources have to be located in the Buildtime view. So, the architect must create
and modify its resources in his Buildtime view and not in the directories designated by the
CATKnowledgePath environment variable, then close CATIA, launch the mkrtv command and
restart CATIA to see his modifications.
Note that .CATfct, icons, and .CATnls files are not located in the CATKnowledgePath
environment variable. So, when working with these files, you must use the mkrtv
command so that your changes are taken into account.

Deploying the Application

1. The administrator installs the CATIA version he used to develop his application on all client computers or

on a server.

2. The administrator copies the <OS> (directories structure and content), and more generally, the whole
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1141

Runtime view of his directories structure on the client computer or on a server.

3. The administrator sets the required variables:

❍ If he copies the content ("code"/"resources"/… directories) of the <OS> structure under the
corresponding <CATIA_folder>\<OS>, he won't have to modify any environment variable since the
copied data is located in the directory known by CATIA.

❍ If he copies the Runtime directories and structure at a location that is not known by CATIA, he has to

set up his environment i.e. modify the content of some environment variables (CATMsgCatalogPath,

CATKnowledgePath, CATGraphicPath, CATStartupPath...). To do so, he can:

■ Use the New From... command in the CATIA Environment Editor. In this case, a new path will be
added before or after all variables depending on the selected option.

■ Use the New command in the CATIA Environment Editor. In this case, he must select the
variables to which he wants to add a new path.
To find out more about the CATIA Environment Editor, see Customizing Your Environment on
Windows in the CATIA Infrastructure Installation Guide. To find out more about these
variables, see About the Knowledge Environment Variables and Settings.

4. The administrator empties and locks the CATKnowledgeBuildPath setting on the client install. To know

more about the way to lock settings, see the Locking Settings topic in the CATIA Infrastructure

Installation Guide. The targeted user will access all knowledge resources i.e. CATIA native ones and the

new deployed application resources.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1142

Advanced Example
In this example, the architect creates an application on his machine and deploys it. The first level of the application, called Official V5
Installation Level in this example, is the default CATIA installation level. The second level, called Official Shared Level here, is the level created
to contain the resources used by every application. The third level, called Applications Level, is the level used to contain the created
applications. The last level used to develop the applications is the Applications Developer Level.

Note that the Applications level and the Official Shared level can be merged.

Official V5 Installation Level

This level is the default installation level. The default CATIA installation directory is: C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16. The default
environment file (CATIA.V5R16.B16D28.txt) contains variables (see below) pointing to directories located in the C:\Program Files\Dassault
Systemes\B16 directory.

● CATInstallPath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a

● CATKnowledgePath=C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\resources\knowledge
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1143

Official Shared Level

This level corresponds to the company resources level used by the deployed applications. These resources can be stored on a server. In this
example, the resources are stored in a directory called E:\KBE\Shared. A new environment called KBE_SHARED is created using the
Environment Editor.

Variables are a concatenation of the official V5 installation level and of the official shared level (see below.)
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1144

Applications Level
This level is the level dedicated to the deployed applications. In our example, the applications are stored in a directory called
E:\KBE\Applications. The administrator has created a new environment called KBE_APPLI based on the KBE_SHARED environment using the
Environment Editor. Variables are a concatenation of the previous 2 levels and of the current one (see below.)

Note that you can also work with one directory for each application and one environment for each application.

Applications Developer Level

This level corresponds to the level of the architect who develops applications. In this example, the developer directory is called
E:\users\Robert\Appli1. The developer has created a new environment called MyAppli1 based on the KBE_APPLI environment using the
Environment Editor.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1145

The variables are a concatenation of the applications developer level, the applications level, and the official shared level.

CATIA is started from this environment (MyAppli1) and data dedicated to this application is stored under E:\users\Robert\Appli1 so that the
resources (ARM catalogs, CATScript, CATVBA, HTML, exposed behaviors, exposed functions, ...) used by this application will be searched for:

1. In the E:\users\Robert\Appli1 directory

2. In the E:\KBE\Applications directory
3. In the E:\KBE\Shared directory
4. In the C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16 directory.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1146

Frequently Asked Questions

This section gives you information about questions you may have when working with ARM or the directories
structure.

● What is the Use of Creating a Buildtime View and a Runtime View?

Directories ● What is the Use of the CATKnowledgeBuildPath Setting?
Structure ● In Which Cases Do I Have to Modify Environment Variables?

● If, After Deploying the Created Applications, the Architect Adds or Modifies Resources,
How Will Those Resources Be Taken Into Account?

● How do ARM, the New Directories Structure and the Index File Work Together?

● How Can I Structure My Data if I Want to Create Several Applications in my Buildtime

View and if I Want to Deploy Them?

● Do I Need to Exit CATIA to Take My Changes Into Account?

● Do I Have to Store the Resources Stored in the ARM Catalog in Special Directories?
ARM ● Can I Use ARM Without Using the New Directories Structure?

● Can I Add Other Fields to My ARM Catalogs?

Directories Structure

What is the Use of Creating a Buildtime View and a Runtime View?

When working with SCM, you must split both views since SCM only manages files stored in the Buildtime view
and CATIA deals with files stored in the Runtime view.
If you do not use SCM or RADE tools, you don't have to split both views, you can choose to create only one
directories structure. However, when creating and deploying more than one application, it is recommended to
create a Buildtime view (or the equivalent of a Buildtime view) for each application to store the required
resources. Those resources will be merged in a single Runtime view (or its equivalent ) when deploying
applications.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1147

What is the Use of the CATKnowledgeBuildPath Setting?

When building the application, this setting can indicate the location where Knowledge resources have to be
stored and read. Using this setting is like inserting a directory at the very beginning of the CATKnowledgePath
environment variable. Resources are first searched for in the selected directories structure and then in those
indicated by the CATKnowledgePath variable. Using this setting is of interest if resources are not stored in the
Runtime view.

In Which Cases Do I Have to Modify Environment Variables?

When deploying applications, If you copy the directories at a location that is not known by CATIA, modify the
content of some environment variables (CATMsgCatalogPath, CATKnowledgePath, CATGraphicPath,
CATStartupPath...) using the Environment Editor.

If, After Deploying the Created Applications, the Architect Adds Resources,
How Will They Be Taken Into Account?
● You can store the resources on the network and modify the CATKnowledgePath environment variable on all
end-user PCs. CATIA needs to be restarted.
● If the CATKnowledgeBuildPath setting is not already used, you can use it to point a directory on the
network for example and then lock this setting (administration mode).
● You can copy the required resources in the Runtime view of all end-user PCs. CATIA needs to be restarted.

How Do ARM, the New Directories Structure and the Index File Work
Together?

If you want to work with ARM and the index file, you have to create the new directories structure since both
systems are based on this structure. But you can work with this new structure without working with ARM or the
index file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1148

How Can I Structure My Data if I Want to Create Several Applications in my

Buildtime View and if I Want to Deploy Them?

It is strongly recommended to create a framework (if you work with RADE) or a directories structure for each
application and to store the resources dedicated to each application in the corresponding framework. When
deploying applications resources are merged in the Runtime view.

Do I Need to Exit CATIA so That My Changes Are Taken Into Account?

It depends. If you work with .CATfct, icons, and .CATnls files, you must run the mkrtv command so that your
changes are taken into account.

ARM

Do I Have to Store the Resources Referenced in the ARM Catalog in Special

Directories?

ARM catalogs have to be stored in the CATIA Runtime view (in the knowledgeResourceCatalogs directory) in
order to be taken into account by the Application Resources Management system. Resources referenced by the
ARM catalog must be stored in the knowledgeResource directory or in ENOVIA. To find out more, see Creating,
Managing and Deploying Knowledge Applications Resources.

Can I Use ARM Without Using the New Directories Structure?

No you cannot.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1149

Can I Add Other Fields to My ARM Catalogs?

No you cannot. ARM is based on a fixed structure containing the following keywords:

● Name: Corresponds to the name of the resource i.e. the one created by default by the catalog application
(for selected features, this keyword cannot be filled freely).
● Logical Name: Corresponds to the logical name of the resource. It represents the resource identifier. The
value must be unique since it will be used by ARM to find the corresponding resource in the catalog.
● Type: Corresponds to the type of resource that you are trying to reach. Its value must be one of the
following values:
❍ AssemblyTemplate ❍ Table

❍ PowerCopy ❍ Drawing

❍ UserFeature ❍ Product

❍ RuleBase ❍ PartTemplate

❍ Rule ❍ Analysis

❍ Part

● Usage: Corresponds to a comment indicating what this resource is used for.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1150

About Application Resources Management

(ARM)
The Application Resources Management (ARM) System is a runtime component used by applications to ask for
physical resources. This system is based on a catalog, called ARM catalog that references physical resources.

● ARM Catalog
● Search Method

ARM Catalog
The catalog is a standard CATIA catalog created in the Catalog Editor. It must be based on a fixed structure
containing the following keywords:

● Name: Corresponds to the name of the resource i.e. the one created by default by the catalog application
(for selected features, this keyword cannot be filled freely).
● Logical Name: Corresponds to the logical name of the resource. It represents the resource identifier. The
value must be unique since it will be used by ARM to find the corresponding resource in the catalog.
● Type: Corresponds to the type of resource that you are trying to reach. Its value must be one of the
following values:
❍ AssemblyTemplate ❍ Analysis

❍ PowerCopy ❍ Drawing

❍ UserFeature ❍ Product

❍ RuleBase ❍ PartTemplate

❍ Rule

❍ Part

● Usage: Corresponds to a comment indicating what this resource is used for.

ARM catalogs are to be stored in the CATIA runtime view (in the KnowledgeResourceCatalogs directory) in order
to be taken into account by the Application Resources Management system. ARM uses the concatenation of
CATKnowledgePath and CATKnowledgeBuildPath to store (buildtime view) and retrieve (runtime view) the
Knowledge resources.

Search Method
Queries performed on the catalog are based on the logical names, on the location, and also on the resource
type. The system first finds an ARM catalog which has to be stored in the knowledgeResourcesCatalogs
directory, then finds a row where the logical name is equal to the logical name given as an input, then reaches
the physical resource attached to the catalog component. If a type of the resource is provided, it checks that the
type of the physical resource found is correct and raises an error if it is not the case. If the resource is not found
and is required, the system tries to find it under a KnowledgeResources directory (determined by the same
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1151

concatenation as the KnowledgeResourcesCatalogs one).

Depending on the type of the resource, the system looks for a file with the following extension:

● Powercopy .CATPart

● UserFeature .CATPart

● PartTemplate .CATPart

● AssemblyTemplate CATProduct

● RuleBase .CATProduct

● Rule .CATProduct

● Part .CATPart

● Drawing .CATDrawing

● Product .CATProduct

● Process .CATProcess

To get an example, see Creating an ARM Catalog. Note that examples are also provided in the BKT User's Guide
(Instantiating an Assembly Template From an ARM Catalog) and in the PKT User's Guide (Creating a Knowledge
Pattern, Generating Datum Features Using the Knowledge Pattern and Instantiating a User Feature Using the
Knowledge Pattern.)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1152

Creating an ARM Catalog

This scenario shows you how to create an ARM catalog using the CATIA Catalog Editor. It is broken
down into 2 main steps:
● Creating the Keywords

● Adding Components

Activate the Relative folder setting in the Tools->Options->General->Document tab.

Creating the Keywords

1. From the Start menu, access the Infrastructure->Catalog Editor workbench. The Catalog

Editor opens.

2. Click the Add Family icon to add a family to your catalog. Click OK in the Component Family

Definition dialog box. Double-click the family in the tree.

3. Click the Add Keyword icon or select the Insert -> Add Keyword... command from the
main menu to display the Keyword Definition dialog box.

4. Specify a name for the new keyword, Logical Name.

5. Use the drop-down list to select the keyword Type, String. This list provides all knowledge

types, i.e. Integer, String, Boolean, Angle, and so on.

6. Click the Add Keyword icon or select the Insert -> Add Keyword... command from the
main menu to display the Keyword Definition dialog box.

7. Specify a name for the new keyword, Type.

8. Use the drop-down list to select the keyword Type, String.

9. Check the With discrete list of values check box and click OK. The Legal Value Definition

dialog box is displayed. Enter the following values and click OK when done.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1153

❍ AssemblyTemplate ❍ PartTemplate
❍ PowerCopy ❍ Rule
❍ Drawing ❍ Analysis
❍ UserFeature ❍ Part
❍ Product
❍ RuleBase

10. Click the Add Keyword icon or select the Insert -> Add Keyword... command from the
main menu to display the Keyword Definition dialog box.

11. Specify a name for the new keyword, Usage.

12. Use the drop-down list to select the keyword Type, String. Click here to open the created

catalog.

Adding Components

1. Open the KwrUDF.CATPart file.

2. In the Catalog Editor, Click the Add Component icon ( ). The Description Definition dialog
box opens.

3. Click the Select external feature option and click Pad2 in KwrUDF.CATPart.

❍ If you work with Rules, Rule Bases, PowerCopies, User Features, Assembly Templates
and Part Templates, open the document that contains this feature, and use the
Select external feature command in the Catalog Editor to select it. If you don't use
this command, the document that contains the feature will be selected and not the
feature itself.
❍ If you work with files, click the Select Component button and select the file in the
File Selection window. Click Open when done.

4. Click the Keyword values tab.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1154

5. Click the Logical Name line and enter the desired logical name, UDF in the Value field. Click OK

when done.

6. Click the Type line and select the corresponding type (UserFeature) in the drop down list. Click

OK when done.

Knowledge resources can be stored:

● In a shared directory
● In SmarTeam (inside a document or not)
● In ENOVIA V5 (inside a document or not).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1155

Working Through the Knowledgeware

Capabilities
Introduction - The Design Intent
Calculating and Checking a Volume
Working with a Design Table
About Rule Firing
Knowledgeware Automation
Optimizing a Volume
Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1156

Introduction:
Design Intent

Configuration 1
of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls
applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

The bottle above is used to demonstrate the major knowledgeware techniques that can be used in CATIA
Version 5 to help you design a product. Throughout this section, most facets of the CATIA knowledgeware
capabilities are examined, from relations such as formulas and rules to optimization algorithms.
A scenario is developed in every chapter around a specific theme, and for each scenario tips and techniques are
given.

This part is intended for advanced users. Before you tackle the scenarios defined in this guide it is better to
have previous knowledge of the products listed below and have an idea of the basic tasks you can carry out with
them:

● CATIA Infrastructure

● CATIA Part Design

● CATIA Generative Shape Design

● CATIA Knowledge Advisor

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1157
● CATIA Product Engineering Optimizer.

Design Intent
When developing a product, you must first of all define your product requirements. These requirements may be
the result of mechanical, manufacturing or style considerations. The approach you follow in knowledge-based
design consists in integrating these requirements in specific tools so that, for example you can check and
validate data during the design process or observe how your document behaves depending on the context. This
chapter defines the requirements of the bottle used as an example and explains how to capture your design
intent, i.e. describe your requirements through knowledgeware features.

Design Requirements
Suppose you are designing a new bottle and you are required to make proposals to your marketing
department. Leaving aside style considerations, you are free to do what you want except for the following
restrictions:

● the thickness of the bottle is determined by manufacturing considerations. This is not a parameter you can
modify.

● you can propose any bottle shape as long as, for a first estimate, the internal volume remains in the [230
cm3 - 280 cm3] range. This is the only requirement as regards geometrical properties.

The trick for you now is to determine the volume of the bottle, have this volume updated whenever you change
the bottle's shape and be warned should the calculated volume be out of range.

The approach followed to capture this design intent relies on measures. The "measure" capabilities provide you
with a function which calculates the volume of a body. There is no real means to prevent you from designing
bottles that are too small or too large, but using Knowledge Advisor checks is a good way to be warned
whenever the volume is out of range. This is explained in Calculating and Checking a Volume.

Having on hand a series of bottles' shapes fulfilling all requirements, you are required to be able to refine your
result and search for a design so that the exact volume of the bottle is 250 cm3. To achieve this goal, we use
the Product Engineering Optimizer capabilities and both available algorithms to design the final bottle
shape. This is explained in Optimizing a Volume.

Assembly Requirements
It is planned to provide the bottle with a cap. After reviewing development plans with the marketing
department, it has been decided that selling this new perfume brand with an already existing cap would be a
saving. The cap they plan to reuse is the one below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1158

Reusing this cap affects the bottle neck design which must allow
for a certain section as well as a certain depth.

Although it is planned to re-design this cap, the marketing

department would like to have an idea of the assembly made up
of the bottle and the cap. To check the overall design of the
product, the marketing people want to be able to generate the
bottle assembly automatically on screen each time a bottle
shape meets the requirements.

A CATIA Knowledgeware answer to this problem is a Knowledge Advisor rule which can be triggered whenever
certain conditions are fulfilled and generate automatically the global assembly from a VB macro. This is
explained in detail in About Rule Firing. How you record, replay or modify a macro is discussed in CATIA
Knowledgeware Automation.

Style Requirements
The Marketing Department already has an idea about the shapes they would like to study. The proposed shapes
should be revolution bodies. The longitudinal view of the product should exhibit no edges. In other words, all
contours are intended to be smooth. Stylists want you to provide them with a flexible design, they want profiles
that are easy to be deformed by controlling one or more parameters. They want an immediate result on screen
and they also want a clue as to whether they are still working within the authorized limits.

Our initial feature is a five-point spline. The points making up the bottle neck are fixed as they must
accommodate the cap. The other points are those providing the required flexibility. You alter them to create a
new bottle shape. To create a bottle, you must create the spline, then rotate this spline. At this stage you obtain
a revolution surface open at both ends. Then you have to create a fill at the aperture which is assumed to be
the bottom of the bottle, join all the faces and thicken the resulting joined surface. All this is described in
Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body.

After a new shape has been designed and satisfies the requirements, you can store its parameters in a design
table. The design table is a way to gather in an external file all the profiles satisfying the requirements. How to
create a design table storing the data of all profiles and how to use a design table are explained in Working with
a Design Table.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1159

Calculating and Checking a Volume

Configuration 2
of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls
applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

The bottle we start from is described in Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body. First of all, we want
to be able to measure the bottle's volume, then each time the bottle's profile is modified, we want to be warned
about whether the resulting volume is still in the [230 cm3 - 280cm3] range. To achieve this goal, we will be
using two CATIA Knowledgeware capabilities, the measures and the checks.
Measures are functions provided by various applications such as Part Design or Generative Shape Design to
compute data. These functions can be used in formulas as well as in rules and checks. They can be accessed
from an interactive dictionary. Checks are relations that don't modify the document but just tell you whether
certain specified criteria are fulfilled.

Specifying the Proper Settings

Before going any further in the scenario developed in this Part, check the settings below:

● In Tools->Options->General->Parameters and Measure.

● In the Language tab, the Load extended language libraries box must be checked otherwise you
won't be able to access the Measures in the knowledgeware dictionary.

● In the Knowledge tab, check the With Value and With Formula check boxes.

● In the Units tab, specify cm3 as the default volume unit.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1160

● In Tools->Options->Infrastructure->Part Infrastructure->Display, check at least the Relations

and Parameters boxes. But it is recommended to check all the options below the specification tree
settings. Click OK to validate.

Calculating the Bottle Volume

1. Open the KwrThickSurface.CATPart document.

2. Click the icon or select the Tools->Formula command from the standard menu bar. The
"Formula" dialog box is displayed.

3. Select the Volume item in the New Parameter of type list. Then click New Parameter of type. A

parameter called Volume.1 is displayed and highlighted in the parameters list.

4. In the Edit name or value of the current parameter field, replace the Volume.1 name with

BottleVolume. Click the Add Formula button.

5. In the dictionary, select the Measures item, then double-click Volume in the measure list. If need be,

add parentheses after the function name in the formula editor. At this stage the formula must be:

BottleVolume = volume()

6. Position the cursor between the parentheses and capture the joined surface (Join.1) definition from the

specification tree. To do this, just double-click the Join.1 feature. The formula definition you should get

in the editor is something like:

BottleVolume = volume (Geometrical Set.1\Join.1)

7. Click OK in the Formula Editor. You are back to the Formulas dialog box. The new formula is displayed

in the parameter list opposite the BottleVolume parameter. It is also displayed in the specification tree

under the Parameters and Relations nodes. Click OK again in the Formulas dialog box to exit the

Formulas dialog.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1161

Checking the Volume Value

1. Select the document root feature, then access the Knowledge Advisor workbench.

To do this, select the Start->Knowledgeware->Knowledge Advisor command from the tool bar.

2. Click the icon to display the Check Editor. In the first dialog box, replace the default name with
VolumeCheck. Click OK. The Check Editor is displayed.

3. Define your check. To do this:

a. Select Information or Warning in the Type of Check list.

b. Enter the string "Volume out of range" in the message field.

c. Enter the statement below in the edition window:

(BottleVolume > 230 cm3) and (BottleVolume < 280 cm3)

4. Click OK to exit the dialog box and add the check to the document. In the specification tree, the check

icon is green.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1162

The resulting document is KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1163

Working with a Design Table

Configuration 3
of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls
applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

You now have a preliminary document. How are you going to warp the profile of the bottle and search for other
shapes? How can you capture all the data fulfilling the requirements? If need be, how are you going to proceed
to refine your design in order to obtain a given volume? Using a design table is a way to capture your design
intent and modify your document through an external file. In the scenario below, we first deform the bottle
shape interactively by manipulating the control points of the spline, then we create and enrich a design table
from the data of the documents fulfilling the requirements.

Searching Interactively for Valid Shapes

1. Open the KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart document.

2. Double-click the Sketch.1 feature and manipulate the D and E control points to deform the spline. See

Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body for a definition of the D and E control points. As soon

as you deform the spline:

a. The document color changes (by default it turns to red).

b. In the specification tree, an update icon is displayed on the root feature and on the formula.

3. Update the Part by double-clicking the root feature in the specification tree or in the geometry area.

4. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench by double-clicking the formula in the specification tree.

5. Click the Measure Update icon ( ) to update the formula. If the recalculated volume does not
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1164
satisfy the requirements, a message box is displayed informing you that the volume is out of range and

the check icon turns red. Otherwise, the check icon turns green.

Redo these interactions until you obtain a bottle satisfying both your style criteria and your volume
requirements. As soon as you find the right profile, follow the method below to create a design table intended to
store the data related to this profile as well as the data corresponding to other profiles.

Initializing and Enriching a Design Table

1. Open the KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart document and save it under a new name.

2. In the renamed document, access the Sketch.1 feature and add the xD,yD, xE and yE offset constraints

on the D and E control points. The constraints named x are defined along H while those named y are

along V. Add a tangency constraint on E with respect to H as on the figure below and name it TangE.

Refer to Appendix: Creating a Deformable Revolution Body for the definition of the control points. The

figure below is an example of a valid shape.

If need be, update the document and the formula.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1165

3. In the standard toolbar, click the Design Table icon ( ) to create a design table.

4. In the Creation of a Design Table dialog box, check the Create a design table with current

parameter values box. Click OK. The Select parameters to insert dialog box is displayed.

5. Select the xD, yD, xE, yE and TangE parameters in the Parameters to insert list. Use the right arrow

to move them to the Inserted parameters list. Click OK.

6. In the Select the Pathname of the File to be Created dialog box, specify the pathname of an .xls file

to store the design table, and click Open. A single row design table similar to the one below is

displayed.

7. Edit the created design table by clicking the Edit table... button. The Microsoft Excel application is

started. A single row table with the xD, yD, xE and yE and TangE parameter values is displayed. Click OK

in the design table dialog box to add the created design table to your document. Save and close this

document.

8. Go back to KwrVolumeCheck.CATPart, edit the sketch and search for another profile. As soon as you

think a profile is worth saving, edit the control points and carry forward the edited values to the Excel

table you have just created. Each time you do this, you add a new row to the design table.

9. After the data of all the profiles to be stored have been added to the Excel table, close this .xls file and

re-open the renamed document. Re-edit the design table, select one by one each design table
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1166

configuration in order to display the various shapes on screen.

If you enrich the created design table with the data below:

This is what you get on screen when this design table is edited in the renamed document.

The design table above is provided in the KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls sample. The bottle shape corresponding to
each configuration of this design table is depicted by the figure which starts each chapter of this part.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1167

About Rule Firing

Configuration 4
of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls
applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

This scenario explains how to write rules and gives some tips about the process which is behind the rule firing.
Two rules are created. One launches a macro which updates and saves the document whenever the design table
configuration results in a valid check. The other starts a macro which generates an assembly with constraints.

Writing the Rules

1. Open the KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart document.

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ). In the dialog box which is displayed, check the Create a design
table from a pre-existing file box. Click OK. In the file selection dialog box, select the

KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls sample. Click OK in the box which asks you whether you want to associate

automatically columns with parameters. Select Configuration 2 as the active configuration. Save the

document under the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart name.

3. Check that the KwrTipSave.CATScript and KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript macros are downloaded in

your environment as well as the KwrCap1.CATPart document. In the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript

macro, replace the path defining the assembly components in the var1(0) and var2(0) definitions.

4. Deactivate the design table from the contextual menu.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1168

5. Access the Knowledge Advisor workbench to create the UpdateAndSaveRule rule. To do this:

a. Click the Rule icon ( ).

b. In the first dialog box which is displayed, enter the UpdateAndSaveRule name. Click OK to

display the main rule editor.

c. In the rule editor, enter the rule below:

if Relations\DesignTable.1\Configuration < 7

{
Message("Document update and save")
LaunchMacroFromFile("e:\users\...\KwrTipSave.CATScript")
}

else Message("Configuration # is invalid",

Relations\DesignTable.1\Configuration)

Prior to clicking OK, replace the path specified in the LaunchMacroFromFile function with the path

where you have downloaded the KwrTipSave.CATScript macro.

d. Click OK to add the rule to the document. A message box is displayed (Document update and

save). This message box is generated by the Message function in the rule. Two Visual Basic

boxes are also displayed. They are generated by the KwrTipSave.CATScript macro.

e. Deactivate the rule.

6. Use the same procedure to create the AssemblyRule rule below:

if Relations\UpdateAndSaveRule\Activity == true
LaunchMacroFromFile("e:\...\KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript")

Prior to clicking OK, replace the path specified in the LaunchMacroFromFile function with the path where

you have downloaded the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript macro.

7. Deactivate all the features located below the Relations node of the specification tree then save your

document.

Firing the Rules

1. Reactivate UpdateAndSaveRule. The message boxes warning about the update and save operations are

displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1169

2. Reactivate DesignTable.1 and modify the design table configuration. To do this, double-click the design

table icon in the specification tree then select a new row among the displayed configurations (from 1 to

6).

3. Reactivate AssemblyRule. The macro which creates the assembly is launched. You get on screen a

message warning you that an assembly is going to be created. Click OK in the Visual Basic message

box. The assembly is generated. You can see the different steps on screen.

Once the macro has finished running, close the product which has been generated, then deactivate

AssemblyRule.

4. Go back to the initial document. Modify again the design table configuration. The UpdateAndSave macro

is launched but not the AssemblyRule macro which is deactivated. To create the assembly corresponding

to the new configuration, reactivate AssemblyRule.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1170

About Automation

Configuration 5
of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls
applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

A macro is a way to store instructions intended to be repeated many times. It can also be a good means to
store intricate interactions or describe a document in a clear text file easy to edit and requiring less memory
than a document. Knowledgeware automation provides you with a way to store operations in the form of a
.CATScript file. In this chapter we discuss the macro used to create the assembly in About Rule Firing, then we
introduce the knowledgeware automation objects. We will not dwell on the part which consists in creating an
assembly as this guide deals more specifically with knowledgeware techniques. If you need a brush up on how
to create an assembly, see the Assembly User's Guide.

Creating an Assembly using a CATScript Macro

A CATScript macro is written in a language similar to the Visual Basic language. You can record a CATScript
macro, then replay it later on or write it from scratch. The recommended method is to start from a record then,
depending on your needs, edit and modify the pre-recorded macro.

Recording the CATScript Macro

To record the macro used in About Rule Firing:

1. Close all the documents open in your session.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1171

2. Select the Tools->Macro->Start Recording... command from the standard menu bar then in the

Record Macro dialog box displayed, specify the path of an external file. Press the Start button to start

the macro recording. From now on, all the interactions are recorded in the CATScript file you have just

specified.

Start of recording

a. Select the Start->Infrastructure->Product Structure command from the standard tool bar.

The product1 root product is created.

b. Select the Components->Existing Component... command from the root product contextual

menu to add the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart component then the KwrCap1.CATPart

component.

c. In the Assembly Design workbench, specify an offset constraint of 1 mm between the Plane.1

plane of the bottle and the Pad.2 surface. Refer to the figure below to see how to select the

elements to be constrained.

d. Specify a coincidence constraint to make the cap and the bottle axes coaxial. For more

information, refer to the Assembly User's Guide. If need be, update the document.

End of recording

3. Select the Tools->Macro->Stop Recording command from the standard tool bar. This closes the file

which records all the interactions described above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1172

Taking a Look at the Macro

The CATScript macro you have just recorded is similar to the one below. For the sake of clarity and to make
lines shorter:

● Some objects have been declared while others have been renamed

● The arguments passed in functions using the generic naming method are written in italics.

Before replaying this macro, you should replace the path specified as the argument of the
AddComponentsFromFiles method.

Dim PrDoc0 As Document

Set PrDoc0 = CATIA.Documents.Add("Product")

Dim Prod1 As Product

Set Prod1 = PrDoc0.Product

Dim var1 ( 0 )
' Replace the path below before replaying the macro
var1 ( 0 ) = "E:\...\KwrCap1.CATPart"
Prod1.Products.AddComponentsFromFiles var1, "*"

Dim var2 ( 0 )
' Replace the path below before replaying the macro
var2 ( 0 ) = "E:\...\KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart"
Prod1.Products.AddComponentsFromFiles var2, "*"

Dim CstS1 As Collection

Set CstS1 = Prod1.Connections("CATIAConstraints")

Dim Ref1 As Reference

Set Ref1 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Plane.1)

Dim Ref2 As Reference

Set Ref2 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Pad.2 face)

Dim Cst2 As Constraint

Set Cst2 = CstS1.AddBiEltCst(1, Ref1, Ref2)
Cst2.Dimension.Value = 1.000000
Cst2.Orientation = 2

Dim Ref3 As Reference

Set Ref3 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Bottle axis)

Dim Ref4 As Reference

Set Ref4 = Prod1.CreateReferenceFromName(Cap axis)

Dim Cst3 As Constraint

Set Cst3 = CstS1.AddBiEltCst(2, Ref3, Ref4)

Prod1.Update
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1173
This macro can be started from a rule (see About Rule Firing) or directly by selecting the Tools->Macro->Run
command from the standard menu bar.

About CATIA Automation Learning

There is a lot to be learned before you can write a complete macro in Visual Basic, but once you understand the
basics of the language, you can be up and running in no time at all. Visual Basic is based on objects which have
their own methods and properties. To set the value of a property, you follow the reference to an object with a
period, the property name, an equal sign (=), and the new property value. At first sight, it is simple. The
tedious thing when you have no previous programming skills is that the macro you record is a raw macro with
objects and properties chained in one statement as in the extract below:

Dim ProductDocument0 As Document

Set ProductDocument0 = CATIA.Documents.Add ( "Product" )
Dim var1 ( 0 )
var1 ( 0 ) = "E:\...\KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATScript"
ProductDocument0.Product.Products.AddComponentsFromFiles var1, "*"

When you tackle automation, there are two ways to proceed:

● You already have a background in Visual Basic and you can refer to the list of Programming Interfaces
provided with the CATIA documentation to write a macro or interpret a pre-recorded macro

● You are a beginner and just record a scenario. You must replay it to check whether the scenario has been
actually recorded.

About Generic Naming

Generic naming is a CATIA technique which creates a label whenever an element has been selected
interactively. This label is a coded description of the selected element.

This generic naming label appears when you record a .CATScript macro by using the
Tools->Options->Macros command.
If you perform interactions such as selecting an edge or a face, the value specified for the arguments of some
methods are written using generic naming. When you take a look at the macro, you can see arguments which
are neither Visual Basic objects nor usual data. These arguments are written in a form similar to the simple
example below:
Brp:(Pad.1:0(Brp:Sketch.1;1)).

You don't have to worry much about generic naming as the definitions relying on this technique are
automatically inserted in CATIA macros.

Knowledgeware Automation
The objects below can be created and managed in a .CATScript macro:

● Parameters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1174
● Formulas

● Design tables

● Rules and checks

Creating Knowledgeware Objects

The knowledgeware features are created from the collection which refers to their type. For example, to create a
relation in a Part type feature, you must first retrieve the collection object containing the Part relations by using
the Relations method on the Part object. To create a parameter in a Part, you must retrieve the collection object
containing the Part parameters by using the Parameters method on the Part object.

Modifying Knowledgeware Objects

To manipulate a knowledgeware object, you just have to use the methods and properties of the relevant object.

An Example

Open the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart document and run the KwrRelations.CATScript macro.

Sub CATMain()

' Retrieve your active document - CATIA is your application

' You get the active document by using the ActiveDocument property
' on your application object
Dim myDoc As Document
Set myDoc = CATIA.ActiveDocument

' Check whether the document is a CATPart

' Analyse the pathname of the document
' If the extension .CATPart is not found, a message is displayed
' but you exit the procedure
' InStrRev is a standard VB function
Dim strPartName, strCATPart, myPos
strPartName = myDoc.Name
if (InStrRev(strPartName,".CATPart",-1) = 0)_
then MsgBox("Your document should be a .CATPart") : Exit Sub

' Retrieve the collection object which contains

' all the document relations
' Activate all the relations
' Display the relation names in a message box
' Note: Statements below could not be applied to a CATProduct
Dim strRel0 As String
Dim strRel1 As String
strRel1 = "Here is the list of relations" & vbCrLf & strRel0
Dim myRelCol As Relations
Set myRelCol = myDoc.Part.Relations
For Each myRel in myRelCol
myRel.Activate()
strRel1 = strRel1 & vbCrLf & myRel.Name
Next
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1175
Msgbox strRel1

' Make the configuration 4 active

Dim des1 As Relation
For Each myRel in myRelCol
if myRel.Name = "DesignTable.1"_
then Set des1 = myRelCol.Item("DesignTable.1"): des1.Configuration = 4
Next
CATIA.ActiveDocument.Part.Update
End Sub

This macro displays the list of relations within the document, changes the design table configuration and
updates the document.

Tips

Operations that Cannot be Recorded

There are some operations that cannot be recorded but that can be programmed in a
macro (the activation or deactivation of a relation for example). The list of objects,
methods and properties you can actually use when writing a macro is given in the
Programming Interfaces. Access to this documentation is provided on the CATIA
documentation home page.

Retrieving Collections

Collections such as the Relations and Parameters objects can only be retrieved from a
CATPart document. Prior to retrieving these collections, it is better to check the
document type in your script, otherwise the macro crashes.

Retrieving a Collection Object

When retrieving a collection object by its name, it is better to check whether the object
exists, otherwise the macro crashes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1176

Optimizing a Volume

Configuration 6
of KwrProfilesDesignTable.xls
applied to KwrBottleProfiles.CATPart

You now have a number of valid configurations. They are all stored in the form of a design table. Among the
valid configurations, there is one that catches your attention. Configuration 2 is neat, but you would like to
modify slightly its dimensions so that its internal volume is exactly 250 cm3. In the scenario below, we explain
how to use the Product Engineering Optimizer to refine the results obtained for one of the bottles' shapes.

The Gradient Algorithm

1. Open the KwrTipCreateAssembly.CATPart document.

2. Access the Product Engineering Optimizer workbench and click the Optimize icon ( ). The
Optimization dialog box is displayed.

3. Fill in the fields with the data below:

Optimization type Target value

Optimized parameter BottleVolume

Target value 250cm3

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1177

Free parameters xD initial value 82 mm

lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
yD initial value 53mm
lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
xE initial value 91 mm
lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
yE initial value 26 mm
lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
Don't specify any step.

Algorithm Gradient Algorithm Without Constraint

Termination criteria Default values

4. Click the Save Optimization data check box, otherwise you won't be able to save your optimization

data.

5. Click Run Optimization to launch the algorithm. Don't intervene to stop the process. After the process

has finished running, the target value is reached or almost reached. The values of the free parameters

are displayed in the optimization box. Note that the results depend on the platform.

The Simulated Annealing Algorithm

1. Click Cancel in the Optimization dialog box.

2. Click the icon or double click the optimization feature in the specification tree to display the
optimization dialog box.

3. Fill in the fields with the values below:

Optimization type Target value

Optimized parameter BottleVolume

Target value 250cm3

Free parameters xD initial value 82 mm

lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
yD initial value 53mm
lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
xE initial value 91 mm
lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
yE initial value 26 mm
lower bound: 0mm; upper bound: 200mm
Specify a 0.1mm step for each free parameter.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1178

Algorithm Simulated Annealing Algorithm

Termination criteria Default values

4. Click the Save Optimization data box, otherwise you won't be able to save your optimization data.

5. Click Run Optimization to launch the algorithm. Don't intervene to stop the process.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1179

Appendix:
Creating a Deformable Revolution Body

The bottle to be designed will be a five point spline rotated around an axis, and thickened. Once it is created,
the spline is rotated, the open end corresponding to the bottom of the bottle is closed and the resulting shape is
thickened.

Creating the Initial Spline

1. Create a new part.

2. In the Part Design workbench, access the Sketcher by clicking the Sketcher icon ( ).

3. Click the Spline icon ( ) to draw a five point spline looking something like the curve below.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1180

4. Specify the constraints given in the table below.

Location on spline Offset along H Offset along V Tangency constraint

Control point A Extremity on the xA = 0mm yA = 12 mm none specified
neck
Control point Next to A on the xB = 7mm yB = 10.5mm none specified
B neck
Control point C Next to B on the xC = 14mm yC = 10 mm horizontal
neck
Control point D Next to C none specified none specified horizontal
Control point E Other extremity none specified none specified none specified

5. Use the Constraint icon ( ) to specify offset constraints on the three control points making up the
bottle neck.

6. Use the Edit Multi Constraint icon ( ) to specify an horizontal tangency on points C and D.

At this stage, don't specify any offset on point D and E otherwise you won't be able to modify the bottle

profile. But if you wish to start from a spline similar to the one below, you can set the D coordinates to

59 mm (along H) and 50 mm (along V) and the E coordinates to 77 mm and 17mm.

7. Click the Formula icon ( ) to access the formulas dialog box, then modify the offset names
according to the names given in the table above.

The resulting document is KwrInitialSketch.CATPart

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1181

Creating the Revolution Surface

1. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench and click the Revolve icon ( ) to rotate the spline
created above around the H axis. Do a complete rotation (0deg - 360deg). The generated surface is

opened a both ends. This is what your revolution surface looks like from the bottom.

2. Access the Generative Shape Design workbench and click the Fill icon ( ) to close the bottle lower
part. This is now what you should get onscreen.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1182

3. Use the Join icon ( ) to join the Revolute and Fill type features.

Thickening the Revolution Surface

1. Access the Part Design workbench and click the Thick Surface icon ( ) to thicken the joined surface.
Specify a 1.5 mm as First Offset and 0 mm as Second Offset. This thickness should be an external

thickness. The arrows displayed on screen when you apply the offset values should be directed toward

the outside of the bottle (see the figure below).

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1183

2. Save the resulting document.

The resulting document is KwrThickSurface.CATPart

When applying a thickness to the joined surface, we could specify a first offset as well as a second offset. But
this would make things a bit more complicated as later on we want to measure the internal volume of the
bottle. This internal volume is to be calculated from the "Volume" measure of a surface. Adding an internal
thickness entails subtracting the volume resulting from this internal thickness to the one calculated for the
joined surface.

Now you can select the sketch feature in the specification tree to access the sketcher, drag the D and E points
and see how the global shape reacts.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1184

Optimal CATIA PLM Usability

When working with ENOVIA V5, the safe save mode ensures that you only create data in CATIA that
can be correctly saved in ENOVIA.

ENOVIA V5 offers two different storage modes: Work package (Document kept - Publications
Exposed) and Explode (Document not kept).

Please find below the list of the Knowledgeware commands along with their accessibility status in
Enovia V5.

Note that the restrictions listed below apply only when working at the Product level. They do not
apply when working in a Part context.

Accessibility in Enovia V5
Commands Comments
(Explode Mode)

Formula Editor Available in limited mode The user can only edit existing
formulas and parameters. He
cannot create new ones.

Equivalent Dimensions Not available None

Design Table Available. See Working with None

Design Tables in ENOVIA
LCA.

Law Not available None

Knowledge Inspector Available None

Check analysis toolbox Available None

Lock/Unlock Available None

Comment & URLs... Available None

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1185

Useful Tips
Parameters
● You can add properties to a .CATPart or a .CATProduct document by using the Properties command from
the contextual menu. You just have to click the Define other properties... button in the Product tab then
click New parameter of type. The dialog is similar to the f(x) dialog. See the Product Structure User's Guide
for more information. The properties you define that way are also displayed in the parameter list of the
f(x) dialog box.

● Parameters belonging to a parameter set can be reordered by using the Reorder... command from the
contextual menu.

● Parameters added by using the Parameters Explorer are displayed right below the feature they are
assigned.

● CATIA users working with non-latin characters should check the Tools->Options>Knowledge-
>Parameter Names->Surrounded by' option. Otherwise, parameter names should have to be renamed
in latin characters when used in formulas.

● You can specify that a parameter is constant by using the Properties command from the contextual menu.
This command also enables you to hide a parameter.

● When copying parameters sets containing hidden parameters, these parameters are automatically pasted
when pasting the parameters sets and appear as hidden parameters.

● Parameters have 2 different names: The local one and the global one.

❍ The local name is the name attributed to the parameter when it was created in the Formula Editor or in
the Parameters Explorer. Note that this name will not be modified if you perform a Reorder using the
contextual menu.
This name can be modified using the Parameters Explorer and the Edit->Properties command.

❍ The global name (name) is the name attributed to the parameter by Knowledge Advisor. It is the path
of the parameter + its type. If you select the parameter and reorder it, the path contained in the name
will be modified. If you double-click the parameter in the specification tree, and enter a new name in
the Edit Parameter dialog box, the global name will be changed. If, after renaming the parameter in the
Edit Parameter dialog box, you reorder the parameter the path will not appear any more.

This name can be modified in the Edit Parameter dialog box.

● When renaming parameters using the Edit->Properties command, do not apply names similar to the
parameters types available in the Formula Editor. For example, if you rename a Length parameter into
Time, the name will be converted into Time.1.

● Deleting parameters used in a relation: If you delete a parameter used in a relation, a "clone" parameter
will be created.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1186

● When renaming parameters, bear in mind that these names should not contain any special characters (/, \,
...).

● Applying the same formula to several parameters: If you want to apply the same formula to several
parameters, use the Equivalent Dimensions feature and value this feature by a formula. To know more,
see Using the Equivalent Dimensions Feature.

● External parameters created at a product level are not integrated to the update process.

Formulas
● The Incremental mode button of the formula editor

The Incremental mode button ( ) allows you to restrict the list of parameters displayed in the dictionary.
Select a feature either in the tree or in the geometry area. Only the first level of objects right below the
selected feature will be displayed in the dictionary. If the Incremental mode button is unchecked, all the
objects below the selected feature are displayed.

The Incremental mode is useful when you work with large documents and when the parameter lists are long.

● Tips about the formula editor

To help you write a formula, the formula editor provides you with a dictionary. This dictionary exposes the list
of parameters and functions you can use to define a formula. Depending on the category of objects to be
referred to in the formula, the dictionary is divided into two or three parts. To insert any definition in the
formula editor, just double-click the object either in the dictionary or in the tree. If you double-click a function
in the dictionary, its signature is carried forward to the formula editor. Only the argument definitions are
missing.
Syntax errors in relations message
When loading a document, the
message opposite can display. It
means that during the load, some
relations appeared as broken.

These relations use functions that are

not recognized by the dictionary
because the library containing the
definition of the function is not still
loaded. That's why you are asked if you
want to load all the libraries containing
functions definition. But loading all
libraries may have an impact on
performances. So, we recommend you
to load only the libraries you are
interested by. To do so, select the
required libraries in the Language tab
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1187

(Tools->Options->General-
>Knowledge->Language.)
● Working with Boolean parameters

When working with the boolean value parameters true and false, make sure to use these values in English. You should not
use the equivalent of true and false in your own language.

● When loading a Product containing a synchronous formula (located at the Product level) that valuates a
parameter located in a Part of the Product, this Part is automatically loaded even in Product mode.

Design Tables
● In terms of performance, it is recommended to use .txt design tables instead of .xls ones.

● A design table can only be created from non-constrained parameters, i.e. from parameters which are
neither referred to in an active design table nor used in any other active relation.
If you keep the Activity option checked for DesignTable0 and you try to create another design table, you will
have to select the parameters to add to your second design table among a restricted parameter list.
Uncheck the Activity option if you want to deactivate a design table and reuse its parameters in another
design table.

● Anytime you modify a design table, the relations that refer to this design table detect the modification and
turn to a to-be-updated status.

● As long as a design table is active, the parameters which are declared in it are constrained parameters and
you are not allowed to modify them.
Double-clicking a design table in the specification tree displays the design table with its set of configurations
and allows you to select a new configuration.

● Only parameters which are not already constrained by any other relation or by any other design table can be
used to create a design table. If a parameter is already constrained, it does not appear in the Parameters to
insert list in the design table dialog box.

● Selecting the parameters to be inserted in a design table

The Filter Name and Filter Type filters can be used to restrict the display of a parameter list. If you specify x
in the Filter Name field of the Select parameters to insert dialog box, you will display all the parameters with
the letter x in their name (xA, xB, xC, xD, xE). If you select the Renamed Parameters in the Filter Type list,
you will display all the parameters you have renamed in the Formulas dialog box (yA, xB, xA, yC, xC, yB,
yD, xD, yE, xE, TangE).
Parameters to be inserted can be multi-selected. You just have to keep on pressing the Ctrl key while you
select parameters. If you do this, the group of multi-selected parameters will be carried forward onto the
Inserted parameters list in the order in which they are displayed in the initial list.
When the design table is created, the rank of the columns fits the rank of the parameters in the Inserted
parameters list. If you want to have columns ordered in a given way in the design table, you must insert the
parameters one by one.

● Accessing the functions related to the design table

Once in the formula (rule or check) editor, select the Design Table item in the dictionary, the list of the
methods that can be applied to a design table is displayed. Select a method, then click F1 to display the
associated documentation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1188
● When opening the file (CATPart, CATProduct ...) which contains the Design Table, the file (.txt, .xls) content
is parsed and stored in memory. To avoid reading the file completely (there are many cells in an Excel file),
we stop parsing after the first empty cell of the first row (= row containing titles), which determines the
number of columns of the Design Table. Then:

❍ if the first cell of the first column is empty, the Design Table is supposed to have no column and no
association can be made.

❍ if the first 3 cells of the 3rd column are empty, the Design Table is supposed to have 2 columns and
only the first two ones can be associated.

● When working in a french environment, make sure that the decimal numbers contained in the text file linked
to the design table are not written with a comma "," but with a decimal point. (This way, you will be able to
move to an english environment easily.)

● Reading performances of .xls files are lower than those of .txt files. So when working with large files, it is
recommended to work with .txt files. Also, when working with independant parameters, it is recommended
to split files.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1189

Using the Feature Dictionary Editor

Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor

Creating a New Object Class
Adding Properties to an Object Class
Defining Discrete Values for a Property
Generating a Report
Creating a New Feature Dictionary
Opening a Reference Dictionary
Modifying the Object Naming Rules
Managing Colors
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1190

Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor

This task shows you how to start the Feature Dictionary Editor.

The feature dictionary editor allows you to create delete and manage object classes. Object classes are classifications under
which you create various objects, like components, for storing in the catalog. You may, for instance, want to have several
object classes under valve_function, one of them being check_valve_function, and create various types of check valve under
the class.

1. Click Start > Infrastructure > Feature Dictionary Editor.

The Feature Dictionary Editor opens.

The specifications tree displays three views. Referenced Dictionary displays under it any external dictionary files
that are referenced in the document. Feature View has under it all classes defined in the document. Classes View
displays all classes available in the document, including the predefined classes that are included with the
application.

On the right side, Inherited attributes shows attributes that a class inherited from its super class. Local Attributes
shows attributes added specifically to a class.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1191

2. To view the feature dictionary for a specific application (such as Piping Design) you need to open the .CATfct file

associated with it. The .CATfct file contains all the classes. To open it select File > Open, navigate to

intel_a\resources\graphic, select "CATfct" in the types list then open the relevant .CATfct file, such as

CATPipingSample.CATfct for Piping Design. The file will open in the feature editor and you will be able to see all

existing classes, and make changes if you need to.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1192
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1193

Creating a New Object Class

This task shows you how to create a new object class.

1. Select Start > Infrastructure > Feature Dictionary Editor then click Open Application

Dictionary . The Open Application Dictionary dialog displays:

2. Click the down arrow then select one of the categories. Enter a name in the Client ID box. This

will appear next to the classes in the specification tree.

In our scenario, we select the Equipment dictionary and enter DSA as Client ID.

3. Click OK.

4. The classes that are available to the document display in the specifications tree under Classes

View. The object classes that will be displayed are the base classes included with the application.

You cannot rename or delete them, but you can create object classes under them.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1194

5. Double-click the object class under which you want to create the new class, then click Create

Subclass . The Create Subclass dialog box displays.

6. Enter a name in the Class name field and click OK.

7. The new object class is created and displays in the specifications tree under Feature View and

Classes View.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1195
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1196

Adding Properties to an Object Class

This task shows you how to add properties to an object class.

1. In the specifications tree, double-click the class to which you want to add a property.

When you select a class its existing properties show under the Inherited Attributes and Local

Attributes areas. Inherited attributes are those inherited from the super class to which this

class belongs. Local attributes are properties added to the class itself.

2. Click Add Attribute . The Add Attribute dialog box will display.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1197

3. Enter an attribute name.

Click on the down arrow in the Attribute type field and select an attribute type.

Click on the down arrow in the With box and select Single Value or Discrete Values. If you
select Single Value, you will be able to change the value later by using Edit > Properties
and entering a new value. If you choose Discrete Values, you will only be able to select a
value from a predefined list. See Defining Discrete Values for a Property to find out how to
create and save this list of values.

Enter a default value.

4. Click OK.

The new attribute is displayed in the Local Attributes area.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1198

Defining Discrete Values for a Property

When you add properties to an object class, you have to select whether you want a single value or discrete
values. If you select discrete values, it means that the property will have predefined values - the user will not
be able to enter a value but will have to select from a predefined list. Those values have to be created in a text
file and stored in a specific directory.

You also need to be familiar with project resource management to be able to create and store those discrete
values.
Please refer to Understanding Project Resource Management.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1199

Generating a Report

This task shows you how to generate a report that displays all objects.

This function allows you to generate an external file. The report displays all the objects under the Classes View and
the Referenced View of the specifications tree. It also displays all the attributes associated with an object. See
Starting the Feature Dictionary Editor.

1. Click Generate Report . The Save User Dictionary Report dialog box opens:

2. Navigate to the directory where you want to save the file, give the file a name and save it. The report will be

saved in HTML format.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1200

3. To view the report, open it in your Web browser.

4. To view the attributes, click any of the objects. The report displays both inherited and local attributes.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1201
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1202

Creating a New Feature Dictionary

This task shows you how to create a new Feature Dictionary.

Many users finds it sufficient to add classes or attributes to the sample feature dictionary provided with
the application. Some may prefer to create one or more new dictionaries. The Feature Dictionary is
managed as a project resource management.

1. Start the Feature Dictionary Editor and click Open Application Dictionary . The Open
Application Dictionary dialog box opens.

2. Click the down arrow to select an application, such as Piping, and enter a Client ID.

3. Click OK.

A new .CATfct is created and the basic classes available to you appear in the feature editor:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1203

4. Make your additions and save the .CATfct file to the directory: intel_a\resources\graphic.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1204

Opening a Reference Dictionary

This task shows you how to a open a feature file of a different domain from your current document to the Feature
Dictionary Editor.

1. Start the feature dictionary editor and click Open Application Dictionary . The Open Application
Dictionary dialog box is displayed:

2. Click the down arrow to select an application, such as Piping, and enter a Client ID.

A .CATfct opens and the basic classes available to you appear in the feature editor.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1205

3. Click Open Reference Dictionary . The Open Reference Dictionary dialog box opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1206

4. Navigate to select the .CATfct or .feat file you wish to open then click Open.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1207

As you can see it above, the content of the reference dictionary you selected is displayed under the Reference View
in the specification tree.
The document from the Piping domain is still the active document while the reference dictionary from the
Instrument domain is displayed.

You can add attributes to the object that is under the Reference View. However, creating subclasses is forbidden.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1208

Modifying the Object Naming Rules

This task shows you how to modify or define the object naming rules.

Examples from the Piping Design product are used in this task. The procedure is the same for all products that have
this function - substitute the appropriate file or object when using another product.

Every object that you create (except a run), or part that you place, in your design document can be given a unique
identifier. This identifier usually consists of a prefix that identifies the type of object or part it is, followed by a
unique number. This enables users, for instance, to maintain a history of each part - when it was serviced, or
repaired or replaced - and schedule servicing and replacement dates.

When you create an object or place a part in your document the application will suggest a name for it - the default
name. (In many cases you have the option of rejecting this name and entering a different name, or renaming it.)
The default name is based on certain rules. A set of default rules is included with this application, but most users
will want to modify these rules to suit their own requirements. You can modify or define the naming rules in the
following way:

1. Open the Feature Dictionary Editor by selecting Start > Infrastructure > Feature Dictionary Editor.

2. Click Open User Dictionary . The Open User Dictionary dialog box displays.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1209

3. Navigate to the directory where your .CATfct files are stored. The default is .. intel_a\resources\graphic.

The CATfct files contain a list of all the object classes. Select and open the file associated with the product

you are working with, i.e. Piping or Tubing, etc. All the classes in the file are displayed in the Feature

Dictionary.

In our scenario, we open CATPipingSample:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1210

4. Select a class in the specification tree and click Define ID Schema . The Define ID Schema dialog
box opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1211

5. You have two options in the ID usage box, Instance and Reference, and you usually have to define

naming rules for each object using both options. The naming rules you define under the Instance option are

used by the application when you are placing a part in a document.

The naming rules you define using the Reference option are used by the application when you build a
component for placing in a catalog. Most users will define naming rules for an object using both options.
Depending on your needs, you can choose to simplify the procedure by defining rules for the parent
function, which is Piping Part Function in the example above, and these rules will be inherited by all the
objects under it.

If the Inherited from box contains the same value as the Class name box, it means the class does not
inherit its name from another class.

Select Yes or No for Sequence number. Yes or No cannot be selected if you have Reference as the ID
usage. Minimum length refers to the number of digits in the numbering scheme. For instance, 3 means
the number will show up as 001.

6. Click the Define/modify ID schema button . The Define/modify ID schema dialog box opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1212

7. In this dialog box, define what you want to appear in the name of an object, in this case the object being

Piping Part Function.

The dialog box has a window in the lower half which displays the current naming scheme. You can delete

one or more of the boxes using the Delete field/Delete all fields buttons .

You can also delete the ID schema of the selected class by clicking the Delete Schema button.

8. Click Add after entering or selecting a value in a box. You can choose to have more than one attribute value

displayed in a name, for instance when you want to add a Separator at more than one place. Click Add after

selecting each one.

You can select the order in which the values will appear in a name by using the Up or Down arrows or the
buttons in the Insert mode box.

9. Select one of the attributes from the list in the Attribute name box.

If you select Nominal size, for instance, the object name displays the nominal size of the object. These

attributes are for the Piping Part class only - other classes will have different attributes displayed. You can

display more than one attribute in the name.

10. Enter any value you want displayed in the Constant box. If you enter PP (for Piping Part), all piping part

names will display this value. You can add a constant to a name anywhere you require it. For instance, you

may begin a name with PP, and end it with WR for a project name.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1213

11. The Program box is used to execute a program that will then add a value to the name. You can create your

own programs, but some sample programs are provided with the application and are listed below. Enter a

program name in this box if you want it to be executed. For instance, if you enter CATPspEncSchedule in the

box, then the short value of the Encoded Schedule attribute will be added to the name (the short value of

Extra Strong is XS.). These programs are Standards-based and will execute based on the standard you have

defined in your Options. The default standard is ASTL.

The following list shows the programs provided with the application as a sample, and the attributes they
refer to:

● CATPspEncRating - Encoded Rating

● CATPspEncRating2 - Encoded Rating2
● CATPspEncRating3 - Encoded Rating3
● CATPspEncRating4 - Encoded Rating4
● CATPspEncNominalSize - Encoded Nominal Size
● CATPspEncNominalSize2 - Encoded Nominal Size2
● CATPspEncNominalSize3 - Encoded Nominal Size3
● CATPspEncNominalSize4 - Encoded Nominal Size4
● CATPspEncSchedule - Encoded Schedule
● CATPspEncMaterialCategory - Encoded MaterialCategory
● CATPspEncMaterialCode - Encoded MaterialCode

12. The Domain program box is used to execute a program that will add the name of the domain to which the

object belongs. Domain in this case refers to an object to which the object to be named is connected. For

instance, when naming a nozzle it is preferable to add the name of the equipment to which it is connected.

One sample domain program is provided with the application, and provides this function:

CATPspConnectedEquip.

13. The Separator box is used to add separators, such as a hyphen or semi colon, after the domain box.

14. Use the buttons in the Insert mode box to organize the name. Append field to list moves a box to the

end of the name. The other buttons are used when you are adding a box, to position it in the name.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1214

Managing Colors

This task shows you how to set a default color for different types and sub-types of objects using the Define Color
command.
This command will allow designers who share the same project resource management (PRM) to start out with the
same default color for each type of object. This default color will be stored in the color XML file.
Afterwards, the end user will also be able to reset the colors of the objects to the default color in its Version 5
document.

Two sample files are provided with this application, and it is best to make a copy of them and edit them. The default
location is ...OS_a\startup\EquipmentAnd Systems\StrFunctionalDesigne\DataDictionary and the files are named clr-
DeckPanel.xml and StrFunctionalDesignColorSchema.xml.

In addition to that, you must change the read/write permission of the file StrFunctionalDesignColorSchema.xml as
well as the read/write permission of the files with the prefix 'clr-' (please refer to your OS documentation).
First, you must setup the default color.

1. Select Start > Infrastructure > Feature Dictionary Editor then click Open User Dictionary . The
Open User Dictionary dialog box opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1215

2. Navigate to the directory where your .CATfct files are stored. In our scenario, we will use the

CATStrFunctionalDesignSample.CATFct dictionary stored in .. OS_a\resources\graphic.

3. Click Open.

4. Double-click a class, e.g. Deck then click Define Color :

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1216

The name of the class you selected is displayed in the Class name box (where you see "Deck"). This
means that the color you are going to choose will be assigned to all objects of this class when placing
them in your structure design using the Structure Functional Design workbench.

The Inherited from box indicates from which parent class the current class (i.e. "Deck") inherits its
color. In our example, the class name and the parent class are the same, which means that the "Deck"
class does NOT inherit its color from any parent class.

5. Click the black arrow next to Color then select a color from the list:

6. To access more colors, or to create your own colors, click the More Colors... option at the bottom of the list

to access the color palette:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1217

In the Basic Colors area, the first sixteen colors (in the top two rows) are the same as those in the
previous list. The remaining four rows contain extra colors.

The Custom Colors area contains sixteen free boxes in which you can place your custom colors.

7. Click the Define Custom Colors >> button to display the full color palette and color customization tools

then click one of the free boxes in the Custom Colors area:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1218

The colored area with the cross represents a color spectrum.

Drag the cross inside the spectrum to instantaneously change the color in the small box below the
spectrum.

The HSL (Hue, Saturation and Luminance) and RGB (Red, Green and Blue) values vary according to
where the cross is located. You can also enter HSL and RGB values in the fields provided to suit your
exact color specifications.

Move the arrow up or down to vary the brightness of the custom color.

8. Once you are happy with the color, click the Add to Custom Colors button to add the custom color:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1219

9. Click on the custom color, then OK.

The color is now displayed in the Color box of the Define Color dialog box:

10. Click OK to save the new color.

In our scenario, the following two XML files stored in ...OS_a\startup\EquipmentAnd

Systems\StrFunctionalDesign\DataDictionary\ have been modified:

● StrFunctionalDesignColorSchema.xml

● clr-DeckPanel.xml.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1220

The RGB values of the new default color are stored in clr-DeckPanel.xml and setting "Dark Green" as the
default color has made the file content change from this:

<?xml version='1.0' ?>

<!DOCTYPE Doct SYSTEM "schemacolor.dtd">

<Doct><schema_Color seq_RED = "211" seq_BLUE = "125" seq_GREEN = "178"/></Doct>

to this:

<?xml version='1.0' ?>

<!DOCTYPE Doct SYSTEM "schemacolor.dtd">

<Doct><schema_Color seq_RED = "0" seq_BLUE = "0" seq_GREEN = "128"/></Doct>

You are now ready to apply a unique color to all your Structure Functional Design classes.

11. Close the Feature Dictionary Editor workbench then enter the Structure Functional Design workbench

by selecting Start > Equipment & Systems > Structure Functional Design.

12. Place the object (i.e. "Deck" in our example) in your design. You can see that its color is the one you setup

via the Define Color command detailed above:

13. Now, right-click the Deck object then select Properties to access the graphic properties of the object.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1221

14. Select another color in the Color list then click OK to validate.

The object is now displayed in a color other than the default one:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1222

15. To reset the object to the default color you defined in the steps above, right-click the object then select

Reset color.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1223

Using the Data Upward Assistant (CATDUA V5)

The CATDUA V5 tool, also called Data Upward Assistant, allows you to have a support for CATIA level changes, to make a diagnostic, and
eventually a healing of CATIA Version 5 data. If some return codes are detected within CATIA elements, it is advisable to run the Data
Upward Assistant utility on these documents in order to check and/or clean them. And for better performances, the Data Upward Assistant
and CATIA versions should be the same.
When is the Data Upward Assistant useful?
● before recovering external data,
● when editing an existing document in a new CATIA release,
● broken links when opening CATProducts,
● incidents when updating a component (for instance, Sketch update),
● the Edit-Links window appears: some documents are found but they have no references,
● performance problems when opening a document (because some elements have lost their links).

The CATDUA V5 is also available from ENOVIA DMU.

For ENOVIA DMU, the Data Upward Assistant is P2 only.

Here is a schema explaining when it should be used:

The following tasks explain you how to launch the Data Upward Assistant in interactive mode or in batch mode, how to visualize the report of
the check/clean execution and lastly, how to interpret the return codes that can be detected by the Data Upward Assistant.

Using CATDUA V5 inside an interactive CATIA Session

Using CATDUA V5 outside an interactive Session
Viewing the Results of CATDUA V5 Execution
The Table of the Return Codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant
The List of the Return Codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant
CATIA Infrastructure
Using CATDUA V5 inside an interactive CATIA
Version 5 Release 16 Page 1224
Session
This task will show you how to launch and use the CATDUA V5 (also called Data Upward Assistant) out of or in a CATIA V5 session.

This assistant allows you to make a diagnostic and eventually a healing of CATIA documents (CATPart, CATProduct, CATProcess, CATAnalysis, CATDrawing,
CATMaterial). A report of check / clean result is available after using the Data Upward Assistant.

The Data Upward Assistant settings work with the same CATIA settings. If the Cache Activation option (in CATIA Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -
> Product Structure) or the Load referenced documents option (in CATIA Tools -> Options -> General -> General) have been selected, they will
be taken into account in the Data Upward Assistant.

In CATIA Tools -> Options -> General -> General, it is recommended to select the Load referenced documents option.

The list of processed errors may slightly differ depending on the origin of the document. For example, if the document comes from ENOVIA LCA or
ENOVIA VPM, the errors that are not processed, are clearly identified with the (*) symbol. Therefore refer to:
● the table illustrating the Return Codes detected by Data Upward Assistant,

● the list of Return Codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant.

Data Upward Assistant in a CATIA session

● The Data Upward Assistant in a CATIA session allows you to check or clean only file documents from CATIA V5 (documents which have been saved in a
CATIA V5 session).
● The Data Upward Assistant in a CATIA session allows you to check or clean only one CATIA document and not the pointed documents.
● After checking and cleaning your document, you have to save it, if desired. It is not automatically done.
● The .htm result is automatically saved in a subdirectory (CATDUAV5UI) of the default directory CATTemp of CATIA. this Output directory can be
modified by exporting the CATIA_CLEANER_OUTPUT variable to the desired directory.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1225
1. Select the Desk... submenu in the File menu.

2. Right-click the CATIA document you want to check or clean and select the CATDUAV5... contextual menu.

The CATDUA V5 dialog box appears.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1226

Description of the CATDUA V5 Dialog Box

● CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information: this field displays information about the CATIA document you are working on and several
informative messages.
● Options:
❍ Display messages: lets you choose the kind of information you need in the report.
❍ Priorities to process: lets you choose the result of priority errors you want to get (1 and/or 2 and/or 3 choices).
❍ More button: this button allows you to choose the errors you want to get according to the priorities selected. If you press this button, the Error
Selection Options window is displayed (see picture below).
❍ Open html output file: the OutputCATDUA.htm file is immediately opened when the Check or Clean process is finished. For more information
about this result report, please refer to Viewing Results of CATDUA V5 Execution.

● Check: this mode of execution lets you check the CATIA document without correcting it.
● Clean: this mode of execution lets you check the CATIA document and to correct it.
● Run: this button lets you start the check or clean execution.
● Exit: this button lets you close the CATDUA V5 dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1227

Check a CATIA document without correcting it

1. Choose the level of priority in the Priorities to process field. You can choose one, two or all the options simultaneously.

2. Choose the type of message you want to have. You can also choose a particular list of errors to process according to the selected priorities by

pressing the More button.

CATIA Infrastructure
3. Activate the Check mode. Version 5 Release 16 Page 1228

4. Click the Run button to start the CATDUA V5 execution. A message appears in the CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information field. It

explains where the check results are and a synthesis report is displayed.

The CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information field displays the path directory of the check/clean report.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1229
Clean a CATIA document

When you choose the Clean mode, the Data Upward Assistant checks previously the CATIA document.

Even if you have already executed a check, you can launch the clean execution without closing the CATDUA V5 dialog box.

1. Choose the level of priority in the Priorities to process field. You can choose one, two or all the options simultaneously.

2. Choose the type of message you want to have. You can also choose a particular list of errors to process according to the selected priorities by

pressing the More button.

3. Activate the Clean mode.

4. Click the Run button to start the CATDUA V5 execution. A message appears in the CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information field. It

explains where the clean results are and a synthesis report is displayed.

The CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information field displays the path directory of the check / clean report.

5. Save the cleaned document, if needed.

For more details about the check/clean results, see Viewing Results of the CATDUA V5 execution.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1230

Using CATDUA V5 outside an interactive Session

This task will show you how to use the Data Upward Assistant in Batch mode, also called the CATDUA V5 Batch, outside an
interactive CATIA session in both batch and interactive mode.

This batch lets you use the CATIA Version 5 Data Upward Assistant allowing you to have a support CATIA level change, to
make a diagnostic, and eventually a healing of CATIA document (CATPart, CATProduct, CATProcess, CATAnalysis,
CATDrawing, CATMaterial).

In this task, you will see how to:

● define the batch parameters,

● save the batch parameters,
● run the batch directly from the CATDUA V5 dialog box,
● run the CATDUA V5 Batch directly from the Batch Monitor,
● visualize the report of the CATDUA V5 Batch execution in the Batch Monitor.

The Data Upward Assistant settings work with the same CATIA settings. If the Cache Activation option (in CATIA Tools ->
Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure) or the Load referenced documents option (in CATIA Tools ->
Options -> General -> General) have been selected, they will be taken into account in the Data Upward Assistant.

In CATIA Tools -> Options -> General -> General, it is recommended to select the Load referenced documents option.

The list of processed errors may slightly differ depending on the origin of the document. For example, if the document comes
from ENOVIA LCA or ENOVIA VPM, the errors that are not processed, are clearly identified with the (*) symbol. Therefore
refer to:
● the table illustrating the Return Codes detected by data Upward Assistant,

● the list of Return Codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant.

Method 1: Accessing the Batch Interface from the CATDUA V5

interactive Tool

On Windows
1. In a MS-DOS window (or Command Prompt), go to the level in which CATIA is installed (example: E:Install...).

2. Enter the following command: cd intel_a code bin.

3. Enter the following command: CATDUAV5. The CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant dialog box appears.

On UNIX
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1231

1. Change the directory to: cd Install_folder/OS_a/code/command.

2. Run the following command: ./catstart -env EnvName -dirEnv DirName -run
"CATDUAV5".

Note that EnvName is the environment file and DirName is the directory in which the
environment is. The same CATDUA V5 dialog box appears.

Method 2: Accessing the Batch Interface from the CATUTIL /

CATDUA V5 Batch Tool
You can also run the CATDUA V5 Batch using the Batch Monitor which lets you access a specific batch interface or run a batch
directly from the command line.
For more information about the Batch Monitor, please refer to Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor in the Infrastructure
User's Guide.

In that case, an additional area will be displayed at the bottom of the window to let you select a license using the Licensing
Setup... button (see Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor in the Infrastructure User's Guide, paragraph Defining the
batch parameters).

The batch-specific online documentation can be accessed directly from the batch interface by clicking the icon in the top
right corner (on Windows) or the Help button (on UNIX).

For this task, you have to open the Batch Monitor dialog box either in or out of a CATIA V5 session. To know how to access to
the Batch Monitor, see Running Batches Using the Batch Monitor in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

Defining the Batch Parameters

1. Select CATDUAV5 in the Utilities tab of the batch Monitor dialog box.

2. Select New parameters file in the File menu or double-click the CATDUA V5 line in the Batch Monitor window. The

CATDUA V5 dialog box appears.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1232

Note that CATDUA V5 is able to process documents coming from ENOVIA VPM or ENOVIA LCA.

Here is the description of the CATDUA V5 window:

● Selected Operation: this section allows you to select the kind of analysis which will be processed, including:
❍ Check and Clean option,
❍ Error selection filtering.

● Document Selection: this section allow you to select the list of documents which will be processed and output
information (for Clean mode).
● Output: this section allows you to define output criteria for reports.
● Save: this button lets you save the associated xml file. This save will let you launch other executions of the CATDUA V5
Batch.
● Run: lets you start the CATDUA V5 Batch execution.
● Cancel: lets you cancel the CATDUA V5 Batch execution.
● Help: lets you open the official CATDUA V5 documentation.

Selected Operation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1233

Use the Operation pull-down list to select the operation you want to process:
● Check: if you only want to check the document.
● Clean: if you want to check and clean the document. In that case, cleaned documents will be automatically written,
depending on the output criteria you will define below (see Document Selection section).

Note that, depending on the configuration and the interactive or batch modes, some rules (i.e. KWE_5) can be detected or
not.

It is strongly recommended to select first of all the operation (Check or Clean) you want to process, as many
following options depends on the operation.

Filter the list of errors you want to detect. By default all errors are taken into account. Several filters are:
● Priority: this option lets you choose the result of priority errors you want to get (1 and/or 2 and/or 3 choices).
● Domain: this option allows you to check or clean errors from one or several specific domains.
● Keywords: this option allows you to check or clean errors with a specific impact.
❍ Dealing with GhostLink,
❍ Dealing with the Specification,
❍ Dealing with the Geometry,
❍ Impacting the PCS and performance result.

● You can combine all filters, but almost one error must be selected for processing. Else, an error pop-up is displayed and
the last filter selection is ignored.

The list of available errors according to the filters selection is dynamically computed. You can at any time go back to the initial
selection (all priorities) by pushing the "Reset Filter" button.

Then you can decide to apply:

● All but the list of selected errors,

● None plus the list of selected errors.

You can also manually exclude or add an error by selecting the error in the list.

Display messages: this option lets you choose the kind of information you need in the report (Long messages, Short
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1234
messages, Short/Long messages).

Document Selection

Use the Document Location pull-down list to select the type of documents to be processed: either File, ENOVIA VPM or
ENOVIA LCA.

Still in the Document Selection area, click the button to select the documents to be processed.

Each document type is associated to a specific search interface:

File:

When searching for File documents with the "Clean" action selected, the search is performed via the following File Selection
dialog box:

Note that this option allows you to rename automatically the cleaned documents, keeping the input directory structure, and
many more useful options.

If the "Check" action is selected, the File Selection dialog box slightly differs because this action does not require as many
data as the "Clean" action:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1235
For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Searching for File Documents in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

ENOVIA V5:

When searching for ENOVIA V5 documents, the search is performed via the Search Documents in ENOVIA LCA dialog box:

By the same way than the File selection, this panel may differ depending on the Check or Clean option.

For detailed information about this dialog box, refer to Searching for Documents in ENOVIA LCA in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.

ENOVIA VPM (UNIX only)

When searching for ENOVIA VPM documents, the search is performed via the Search Documents in ENOVIAVPM dialog box:

By the same way than the File selection, this panel may differ depending on the Check or Clean option.

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Searching for Documents in ENOVIA VPM in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.

This scenario takes the "File" Document Location as an example.

Enter your search criteria in the search dialog box. Once documents have been selected, their names are displayed in the
Name list.

When working with File documents, note that the former Pointed document option (allowing to process all the documents
pointed to by the document to be checked or cleaned) has been replaced by the Select pointed documents option available
in the File Selection dialog box.

If you change your mind afterwards and decide not to process one or several documents displayed in the Name list, select

them (you can use the multi-selection), then click the button to remove the documents from the list. As long as no
document is selected, the button is dimmed.

Output:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1236

In the Target Directory field, key in the output directory or DLName or, click the button to navigate through the file
tree to the desired directory.
This field is mandatory and is initialized with the current or temporary directory by default.

If you set the DLName environment as "Current" in the Tools -> Options -> General -> Document tab, the usual File
Selection dialog box will be replaced by the following one:

The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names,as
"DLNames" (each folder is assigned a logical name).
In this mode, the different file opening and saving commands only allow end users to access documents in directories
referenced by DLNames.

DLNames are identified by the string CATDLN://, for instance "CATDLN://DLNAME3".

Use the "Look in:" pull-down list to select the root DLName in which you want to navigate. The sub-folders (if any) stored in
the selected root DLName are then displayed in the DLName list below and you can choose a DLName in list: the selected
DLName is displayed in the "Selected DLName" field and will be set as the target directory.

Note that once you are in a sub-folder, you can re-access the upper level by clicking the button.

You can also click the icon to access the Search Results dialog box which lets you search for DLNames using a specific
interface. For more information, please refer to Searching for DLNames in the Infrastructure User's Guide (Customizing
Settings, General, Document).

Once you have found the desired DLName, click OK to validate.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1237
Enter the name of report in the Report Name field. By default, the report is named "GlobalResults".
For each processed document, the batch creates a document report in the target directory. By default, the name of the report
is the name of the document suffixed with ".htm". You can change this default name by suffixing the document report name
with the string of your choice. To do so, enter the string to be added at the end of the name in the Append String to
Document Report field.

All these information can be automatically valuated using an existing xml file, in the contextual menu "Read input parameters
from file".

Saving the Batch Parameters

You have to save the batch parameters if you want to postpone the batch execution or reuse the batch parameters for
another batch execution.

Note that you can save the xml file and run the batch execution directly from the CATDAUV5 dialog box.

1. Click the Save button.

The Save As dialog box appears and lets you save the associated xml file and save the parameters you just have defined.

This file contains information about the batch (name of the batch, name of the documents you want to check or clean, path
directory of the check/clean report, ...).

This file can also be used to valuate all the fields, using the contextual menu.

You can immediately run the CATDUA V5 Batch either from the CATDUA V5 dialog box or from the Batch Monitor.

Running the CATDUA V5 Batch from the CATDUA V5 dialog box

Note that you can perform the following action without saving the xml file.

1. Click the Run button to start the CATDUA V5 Batch execution.

Running the CATDUA V5 Batch directly from the Batch Monitor

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1238
Note that you can perform the following actions only if you already have one or several xml file containing all the necessary
information about the batch parameters.

1. Close the CATDUA V5 dialog box.

2. Select Associate a parameters file in the File menu in the Batch Monitor dialog box. The File Selection dialog box

appears to let you select the xml file you want to associate to the CATDUA V5 Batch execution.

3. Click Open in the File Selection dialog box. The name and the path directory of the file are displayed in the Start

tab of the Batch Monitor dialog box.

Note: You can associate several xml files in order to obtain a list of batches that you could run later.

4. Select the file associated to the batch you want to run in the Start tab.

5. Select Run in the File menu to start the batch execution.

At the end of the execution, one of the following return codes will be returned:

● ReturnCode = 0 -> the batch ended successfully,

● ReturnCode = 4 -> at least one document could not be processed,

● ReturnCode = 8 -> the batch aborted.

To display an HTML version of the report, click Open HTML Report in the CATDUAV5 dialog box . This button is
activated only once a report has been generated, otherwise it is dimmed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1239

Visualizing the Report of a Batch Execution in the Batch Monitor

The report of the CATDUA V5 Batch execution is stored in the Processes tab of the Batch Monitor dialog box. You can find
the following information:

● name,
● batch identification number,
● status (in progress or ended),
● start and end time,
● return codes detected,
● information (success of the execution).

In the batch mode, all levels of priority are automatically processed.

To know how to have access to the results of the check/clean execution, refer to Viewing Results of CATDUA V5 Execution in
this guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1240
Viewing the Results of CATDUA V5 Execution
This task will show you how to visualize the report of a Check / Clean execution.
You can have access to the results of the Check / Clean execution when:
● using CATDUA V5,

● using CATDUA V5 via the CATUTIL,

● using CATDUA V5 via File / Desk.

Before performing this task, you have to be familiar with the use of the Data Upward Assistant. For this, refer to:
● Using CATDUA V5 inside an interactive CATIA Session.

● Using CATDUA V5 outside an interactive Session.

Using CATDUA V5:

When using the Data Upward Assistant out of a CATIA session, when using CATDUA V5, a message appears at the end of the check / clean
process.

This message gives you the path directory of the check / clean report (path directory that you have defined above).
The check / clean results are stored in a .htm file (GlobalResults.htm). To have access to this file, you can use a Windows Explorer. The result is
the same as the CATUTIL' s.

Using CATDUA V5 via the CATUTIL:

Example 1: In check mode on one or several CATIA Documents

If you have selected one or several CATIA Documents for the Check execution, the .htm file will give you the results for all the documents.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1241

you obtain the following results files a global image: global report giving you an access to the official documentation if the "Location of the
Technical Documentation" option is correctly set up in the Tools -> Options -> General -> Help tab.

You can have access to an htm Report file (...filename.htm) per document. For this, click the hyperlinks in the Global Status OK / KO. This file is an
htm version of the .txt file and it contains a hyperlink to the official documentation for each detected errors. You can click a rule, for instance
FGM_1, and see the corresponding explanations about this rule in the documentation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1242

You can have access to the .txt Report file (....checker_traces.txt). For this, click the hyperlinks in the Report - Return Codes column of the
Report for Checked Documents table. This document delivers the check results and informs you about the status of the return codes, if they can
be repaired or not.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1243

You can have access to:

● Priority Level: corruption level of the file.

● Return codes can be corrected: the number of return codes that can be solved in the clean mode.
● a synthesis report providing the list of errors for each priority.

Example 2: In Clean mode

The .htm file looks like the one of the check mode. This is a .htm document, with a table entitled Report for Cleaned Documents containing
hyperlinks.

You can see OK in the Save column of the Report for Cleaned Documents table, it means that the cleaned documents have been automatically
saved.
If you click on a link, you can find the clean results in the file .cleaner_traces.txt, with the number of clean return codes out of the total number
of return codes:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1244

Example 3: In Check / Clean mode on one or several CATIA Documents

The selection of one or several CATIA Documents in both the Check and in the Clean sections is possible and you will obtain the same .htm file
combining both Check and Clean results.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1245

Using CATDUA V5 or CATDUA V5 via the CATUTIL, you can have several documents in the Report / Return Codes field.
The cleaned documents are automatically saved in the path directory you have previously specified. In this case, the .htm file reports that the
cleaned documents have been saved in the Save field of the Report for Cleaned Documents table.

The .txt Report file cleaner_traces.txt is available by activating the hyperlink in the .htm report or by navigating in a Windows Explorer (in the
same folder as the .htm file). This file delivers the check results and the clean results. It informs you about the status of the return codes, the
number of cleaned return codes out of the total number of return codes.

In a CATIA session, the check / clean results are stored in a .htm file. This .htm file is associated to a .txt file which gives more details (the
directory is given in the CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information message or in the CATIA V5 Data Upward Assistant Information field of
the CATDUA V5 dialog box).
After running the Check or Clean batch, you obtain exactly the same result reports and you can find details in the .txt file associated to the .htm
file.
Note that you can automatically open the report window and select the .htm output file.

In the table called Global Results: this is the synthesis of both files (.htm and .txt), the synthesis of the detected errors that have been checked
and cleaned in the CATIA Document. There is the same table in the .txt file.

Using CATDUA V5 via File / Desk in an interactive CATIA session:

The Reports are generated in a Global Report file (OutputCATDUA.htm) and in a .txt file (checker_traces.txt or cleaner_traces.txt):

You can have access to:

● Priority Level: corruption level of the file,
● Return codes can be corrected: the number of return codes that can be solved in the clean mode.
● a synthesis report providing the list of errors for each priority.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1246
The output directory is not automatically emptied by the Data Upward Assistant before launching a new check or clean execution. If you do not
wish to visualize your former results in the .html file, you need to clear the directory. Moreover, the documents (CATParts, CATProducts,
CATDrawings, CATAnalysis, CATProcess, CATMaterial...) in the output directory are not write-protected.

The delivered information is:

● name of the CATIA documents you have checked,

● number of the detected return codes,
● number of the fixed return codes,
● number of the priority1 / priority2 / priority3 return codes,
● hyperlinks pointing at a .txt file which give the details of the results for each CATPart (in the Reports - Return codes column),
● information about the save operation.
● hyperlink pointing the official documentation.
 The Table of the Return
CATIA Infrastructure
Codes detected by the Data
Version 5 Release 16
Upward Assistant
Page 1247

The Data Upward Assistant capabilities are to check structural data within a CATProduct, CATPart, CATDrawing, CATAnalysis, CATMaterial, CATProcess, and to
upward (modify) the data structure.

You can find here a description of return codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant including:

● levels of severity of the detected errors,

● symptoms (user view) of the detected errors,
● technical problems,
● CATDUA V5 operations,
● results of the CATDUA V5 execution (user view).

Priority levels
Priority Level Legend:

1: Priority One Return Code: Upgrading action may lead to data deletion.

2: Priority Two Return Code: Upgrading action may lead to data modification (without deletion).

3: Priority Three Return Code: Unimportant error. Upgrading action without huge impact on data.

(*) This symbol means that the rule is not executed on a document coming from a PDM system (ENOVIAVPM, ENOVIA LCA).

After CATDUA execution

Error Domain Symptom (User View) Technical Problem CATDUA Operation
(User View)

Deletion of the list of

Ghost Link in SendTo Inconsistency of the list of features pointed feature and No more invalid assembly
AFI_1 (3) Assembly Design
command. pointed by the Assembly Feature. rebuild it from other valid links in Send/To command.
information.

An instance of a Reuse Pattern

feature was pointing into a Unset the pointing
Some ghost links appear No more ghost links in
AFI_2 (2) (*) Assembly Design wrong document, probably attribute on the
SendTo command. Send To command.
because of a problem during instance.
feature synchronization.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16ASSYFEATPATTERN are feature Page 1248
extensions of CONNECTION feature.
the whole product structure was
instantiated in a
CATWorkSceneProdCont (container
dedicated to the old Scenes), and so
Ghost links disappear; from
was the CONNECTION and its
the ASSYFEATPATTERN point
ASSYFATPATTERN. But the instance-
of view there is no
Ghost links in File/SendTo >reference link of the Plug the instance to the
consequence because the
AFI_3 (3) (*) Assembly Design command from a ASSYFEATPATTERN had been right reference and
instance are not seen by the
CATProduct. corrupted and it was pointed to its Reset/Synchronize it
user and aren't taken into
Start-Up instead of the right
account in the Update
reference.
process.
Some links of the reference
ASSYFEATPATTERN had been
modified, but the instance
ASSYFEATPATTERN could not be
synchronized and still had links to
unnecessary documents.

Aggregated object does not Aggregated object does not know its Deletion of the
AGG_1 (1) Aggregation None.
know its aggregating object. aggregating object. aggregation.

A link Father-Son between an

Nothing happens when Use the Spec service
instance and the product is The instance can be
AGG_3 (2) Aggregation deleting an instance in a CATSpecSetFather to
deleted, which disables the deleted.
product. reset the link.
destruction of the instance.

Constraints instances
A constraint is broken when
pointing at connector
making a product flexible.
instance can retrieve it and
Before making the product Connector is set back on
In the upper document, a connector are not broken any more.
flexible there was no the right attribute of the
was not known by the Product User might need to run the
AGG_4 (1) Aggregation problem. The rule UAV_6
Instance, so it was not instantiated
Product, and instantiated
Cleaner in the documents
applied on documents on all referencing
in other documents. that reference this one:
instantiating this one documents.
UAV_6 rule might detect a
detected the problem but did
problem and correction has
not resolve it.
to be made.
Constraint is wrong Product is non up-to-date.
The start up of constraint is not Load the AsmCst.feat
ASD_0 (1) Assembly Design displayed or ignored during Document needs to be
found. catalog.
update. updated.

Unused Constraint without

Constraint is wrong Product is non up-to-date.
connection are present (when a Deletion of unused
ASD_1 (1) Assembly Design displayed or ignored during Document needs to be
connection is deleted the constraint constraints.
update. updated.
is not).

Constraint is wrong Product is non up-to-date.

Constraint is defined in a wrong Deletion of the
ASD_2 (1) Assembly Design displayed or ignored during Document needs to be
container. constraints.
update. updated.
Constraint is not Constraint is correctly
correctly displayed or Restore the type of the displayed or updated.
ASD_3 (2) Assembly Design The type of a constraint is lost.
ignored during the constraint. Document needs to be
update. updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1249
Constraint is wrong Product is non up-to-date.
Change the quality of
ASD_4 (2) Assembly Design displayed or ignored during Bad quality of constraints attribute. Document needs to be
attributes.
update. updated.

The FixTogether node in the

graph does not appear ; The Fix Together node
there is a blue CONNECTION appears in the graph, there
The corrupted Fix
node instead. Such data Inconsistency between the feature is no more CONNECTION
Together is deleted and
ASD_5 (1) Assembly Design may cause a coredump at catalog in V5R12 GA and the catalog node ; if the Fix Together
replaced by a new Fix
Open or at Close. This in later versions or service packs. was pointing another Fix
Together.
occurs on data containing a Together, this information is
Fix Together created in lost. The name is lost too.
V5R12 GA.

The constraint can be

A constraint can not be A Fix Together node without parent the corrupted Fix Together created.
ASD_6 (1) Assembly Design
created. (connection). is deleted. Document needs to be
updated.

Two parts linked with a Set the right value to The contact constraint is
An attribute of a constraint
ASD_7 (2) Assembly Design contact constraint has the attribute of the out of date. Document
contains a wrong value.
wrong orientation. constraint. needs to be updated

Valuate the Activity FixTogether is displayed in

Activity of the FixTogether is Activity parameter of the F(x).
ASD_8 (3) Assembly Design parameter of the
not displayed in F(x). FixTogether is not valuated.
FixTogether.
Impossible to reorder Some old sets, existing in no more
Delete of those old and
constraints or set of existing component, still present in It is possible to reorder
not used set of
ASD_9 (3) Assembly Design constraints in Assembly the document, disrupt the constraints or Set of
constraints.
Design. management of set and constraints. constraints.

If CATDUA is launched in a
Some constraints can be CATIA session, the user will
seen in the 3D window, but need to refresh the
they do not appear in the Aggregation problem: the
ChangeFather of the specification tree to see the
specifications tree. When the CONNECTION does not know the
ConstraintASM and constraints (e.g. launch
user adds another ConstraintASM, but the
ASD_10 (2) Assembly Design reconnect it properly to command 'Window/New
constraint, lots of ConstraintASM knows that the
the CONNECTION. Windows, or Save and
constraints appear in the CONNECTION is its parent.
Reopen the CATProduct).
specification tree, they CATProduct needs to be
disappear if the user deletes updated.
the new constraint.

No visibility (can appear

Internal (and unnecessary) attribute Unset the value of this
ATT_2 (3) Product Structure when an assembly update No visibility.
incorrectly valuated. attribute.
fails).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1250
Send To command shows a
link to a CGR in V5Cache Internal (and unnecessary ) Deletion of unnecessary Send To command does not
ATT_3 (1) Product Structure
(concern only V5R1 attribute incorrectly valuated. link. show this link.
CATProducts).

The result of an update (in Document needs to be

Internal value to determine whether
terms of position) is not Set the internal attribute updated. After the update
ATT_4 (2) Product Structure an update (in position) is needed is
correct even if no error is to the correct value. the part is correctly
incorrectly valuated.
reported. positioned.

New 2D/3D modeling would

The user will be prompt with Upgrade existing, 2D/3D
eliminate the dependency of
error window if an old modeling without direct No more error window and
BDR_0 (3) PlantShip Modeler schematic documents, reduce data
version of 2D/3D modeling pointing to schematic/fake reduced model size.
size, support ENOVIA LCA revision
exist. functions.
and configuration.

Visualization problems due Specification tree changes

BOL_0 (2) to Boolean between Solid Boolean operation between solid The operand body is since operand body is moved
Part Design
body (old) and hybrid body body (old) and hybrid body (new). moved under the part. from under boolean to under
(new). part.

Ghost link. CATIA announces In this case the internal

that a document can not be Object owner of the link is not link owner is supposed to
No more Ghost Link in the
BRK_0 (1) (*) Product Structure retrieved, and the link does aggregated and CATIA does not find be unused. Delete this is
command.
not appears in Edit/Links or information about object type. performed on this broken
File/Desk. object

Without the declaration of backup

A document created with a
startup class, the document cannot Declare object's backup
BST_0 (3) PlantShip Modeler previous version can not be The document can be loaded.
be loaded without the associated startup class.
loaded
CATfct.

An external user can not see When the startup catalog for CAA
Declare object's backup An external user can see the
BST_1 (3) Mechanical Modeler CAA features created with a features is not present, the features
startup class. CAA features.
previous version. cannot be displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1251
The pointing to the
A core-dump may occur A CatalogManager does not point a No more core-dump when
CAT_0 (2) SpecsModeler document that is not a
when accessing some data. catalog document. accessing data.
catalog is removed.

The description's name and The description's name is

CCL_0 (3) SpecsModeler the "Name" keyword value The description's name is wrong. set with the "Name" The description is renamed.
are different. keyword value.

The same chapter appears

The chapter's name is set
with a name in the
with the name that
CCL_1 (3) SpecsModeler Specifications tree and with The chapter's name is wrong. The chapter is renamed.
appears in the definition
another name in the
list.
definition list.

When a chapter's keyword is

Some ghost links appear deleted, some internal data No more ghost links in
Useless internal data
CCL_2 (3) (*) SpecsModeler in the SendTo or Save in associated with the chapter's Send To command and in
are now removed.
Enovia commands. keyword are not deleted and Save in Enovia.
remain in descriptions.

A description's keyword
value may be unlinked
with its chapter's
Removing a keyword may The keyword value is Removing a keyword will
keyword in rare cases
CCL_4 (3) SpecsModeler create ghost links if its re-linked with its remove its keywords
(CAA). An unlinked
keywords values are unlinked. keyword. values.
keyword value is not
removed if its keyword is
removed.

No descriptions are pointing to the Create a new description

Chapters cannot be viewed chapter, so it is not taken into under the root chapter Chapters are correctly
CCL_5 (2) SpecsModeler in the catalog Editor despite account in the viewer. that points to the chapter. displayed in the tree of the
they are found by batch. catalog Editor.

The user will be prompt with

Publication based on cross document Use publication to support
error window if an invalid
CDC_0 (1) PlantShip Modeler connection would support ENOVIA cross document No more error window.
version of cross document
LCA revision and configuration. connections.
connections exists.

Size of a CATPart is
abnormally huge Delete the Unreferenced Reduce the size of the
comparatively to the number Unreferenced BREP features in the BREP features. model.
CPF_0 (3) Part Design
of elements. Part design Feature.
CATIA Infrastructure Curves created outside
Version the 16
5 Release Page 1252 Sketches are seen as non up-
The resulting geometry associated Required endpoints are
CRV_0 (2) Sketcher Modeler Sketcher workbench with no to-date. Document needs
to the sketch is not consistent. added.
endpoints. to be updated.
Update result is not right
No impact, except when
because update propagation
cleaned geometries are
is wrong. Some features are Attributes of several features are set
CRV_1 (3) Set quality of curves published by output features.
Sketcher Modeler not impacted by geometries to sp_NEUTRAL instead of sp_IN.
attributes to sp_IN. Then Document needs to
modifications. Ex: Output
be updated.
features.

Some sketcher constraints Internal attribute to determine the Document needs to be

Set the internal attribute
CST_1 (2) Sketcher are not usable anymore type of the constraint is not updated. The constraint can
to the correct value.
(always broken). valuated. be used again.

CPU loop or problem with Document needs to be

Change the quality of
CST_2 (2) Sketcher activation/deactivation of a Bad quality of constraints attribute. updated. The constraint can
attribute.
constraint. be used again.

Some sketcher constraints Document needs to be

Value of a constraints attribute is
CST_3 (1) Sketcher are wrong displayed or Deletion of the constraint. updated. The constraint can
lost.
ignored during update. be used again.

Ghost Link on a CATDrawing Valuate the "blocs" No more Ghost link in Send
Ghostlink on a CATDrawing
CST_4 (2) (*) Sketcher document due to an invalid "blocs" attributes of the To command. Document
in SendTo command.
attribute of a constraint. constraint. needs to be updated.

Part is contextual to several

Part is contextual to several
products, which is not
(*) products, which is not supported by Deletion of all contexts Some external references
CTX_1 (3) Mechanical Modeler supported by several tools
several tools (Edit Links, Define except first one. may be isolated.
(Edit Links, Define
Contextual Links, etc).
Contextual Links, etc).

Ghost link on another The leader of the annotation belongs Delete the annotation and No more annotation, no more
DAC_0 (1) (*) Drafting
document from annotation. to another document. its leader. ghost Link.
The number of graphical
dimensions found by search Deletion of each graphical Only the visualized graphical
The representation of the graphical dimension that is not dimensions can be found by
command is higher than the
DAC_1 (1) Drafting dimension (dimension imported from visualized in the view. search command.
number of graphical
V4) cannot be found.
dimensions seen by the
user.

AreaFill not associated to any

DAF_0 (3) Drafting AreaFill is an empty space. Deletion of the AreaFill. AreaFill has disappeared.
geometrical elements.

An AreaFill can not be

DAF_1 (3) (*) Drafting AreaFill non aggregated. Deletion of the AreaFill. AreaFill has disappeared.
selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1253
An AreaFill disappears when
DAF_2 (3) (*) Drafting AreaFill with a missing curve. Deletion of the AreaFill. AreaFill has disappeared.
updating the view.

The drawing contains some

AreaFills that the user can
DAF_3 (3) Drafting Areafill without pattern. Deletion of the AreaFill. AreaFill has disappeared.
not see (only by using the
Search function).

A document contains Area Some Area Fill points other drawing

One or more AreaFills are
Fills with ghost links to other after copy/ paste from a document deleted.
DAF_4 (1) Drafting to another. Delete these AreaFills.
documents. Ghost link is
visible in SendTo command.

Ghost link visible in SendTo Deletion of the link

An object is erroneously referencing
DA0_0 (3) (*) Drafting command and when opening without behavior No more ghost link.
another document.
the document. modification.

Deletion of the useless

Ghost link visible in SendTo A useless drafting data is No behavior modification
drafting data and thus its
DA0_1 (3) (*) Drafting command and when opening erroneously referencing another except no more ghost link
links pointing others
the document. document. when opening the document.
documents.
Unrelated document can be
A object managing view axis origin
pointed by the drawing Deletion of the invalid No more Ghost Link in Send
has an invalid link to a 3D
DAS_0 (1) (*) Generative Drafting document (it appears using link. to command.
document.
Send To). Ghost Link.

Ghost link in SentTo Deletion of the invalid No more invalid links in

DBA_0 (2) (*) Drafting Bad link on a default feature.
command. link. SendTo command.

Not up-to-date driving

Dimension still not up-to-
dimension or invalid 3D link of constraint between 2D Delete constraint between
DCH_0 (1) Drafting date and constraint between
constraint between 2D and and 3D lost. 2D and 3D.
2D and 3D deleted.
3D.

Driving dimension or
Driving dimension or
Add subscription on constraint between 2D and
constraint between 2D and
DCH_1 (2) Drafting Bad object subscription. dimension or constraint to 3D updates correctly.
3D doesn't update at
3D geometry. Document needs to be
CATDrawing update.
updated.

The hybrid constraints (constraint

between 2D and generated element) Deletion of each hybrid
Sent to command shows of the view have not been deleted constraints which can be The drawing is no more
that an isolated view is still after isolate: an interactive view found in an interactive linked to 3D.
DCH_2 (2) (*) Drafting
linked to its part (concern should not contain hybrid view.
views isolated before R13). constraints.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1254

Dimension becomes up-to-

Not up-to-date dimension or date and constraint between
Locate right section
DCR_0 (2) Drafting invalid constraint between An invalid section operator is stored. 2D and 3D becomes valid.
operator.
2D and 3D in section view. Document needs to be
updated.

Ghost link or excessive Useless object with 3D link not Smaller CATDrawing and no
DCR_1 (3) (*) Drafting Delete useless object.
CATDrawing data size. deleted. more ghost links.

Broken dimension,
associative dress-up or Information of associative dress-up
constraint between 3D (dimension, annotation, No more GhostLink in
Deletion of element.
DCR_2 (1) Drafting assembly projection and constraint,...) for assembly SendTo command.
interactive geometry. Or positioning has been lost.
ghost link on a CATPart in
Send To command
Sent To command shows Deletion of each 3D
that an isolated view in a connector which can be
drawing is still linked to its A link to a 3D connector has not found in an interactive No more GhostLink in SentTo
DCR_3 (1) Drafting
part. been deleted after isolate. view command.

A CATDrawing document has A useless object responsible of

DCR_4 (3) Deletion of useless Reduce the size of the
Drafting an abnormally huge data associativity still exist.
element CATDrawing
size

The "Send to" command

The element which uses this
shows that a drawing is
link (constraint or dimension)
linked to another drawing. A link with a 2D drafting element is
DCR_5 (1) (*) Drafting Deletion of this link. can lose its associativity.
The problem disappears if pointing outside the document.
Document needs to be
constraints or dimensions on
updated.
2D element are deleted.
Some constraints are not
Constraints are not correctly
taken into account
aggregated in some cases and the Change the place where Constraints are taken into
(geometries can be moved
DCS_1 (2) Drafting view solver cannot find them and the constraints are account. Document needs
though they should be
take them into account. aggregated. to be updated.
fixed).

Data model with the V4 format

Drawing too large in regard Reduce the size of the
DCT_0 (1) Drafting became useless but are nevertheless Delete the useless data.
of what is actually useful. CATDrawing.
still stored.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 ThePage
visualization
1255 of the
previous elements should
Bad display of fonts, be reestablish. Note that AfterFix Reduce the size of
diameter symbol or not An important feature for the it can modify visualization the model.
DCT_1 (2) Drafting
visualization of datum annotations visualization is missing. dimensions as well (font Document needs to be
feature. display impact). updated.

There are some features in the

Ghost links appear in CATDrwCont that should have a
Drafting father but that are actually not
SendTo command. Delete the non- No more Ghost Link in
DCT_2 (1) (*) aggregated anywhere: these
aggregated feature. SendTo command.
corrupted/useless features are not
visualized but can have links to
external documents.
Chamfer dimension badly Chamfer dimension moves
DDI_0 (2) Drafting Invalid positioning data is stored. Positioning data corrected.
positioned after update. correctly after update.
Ghost link on another Chamfer dimension has a link to an
Deletion of Chamfer No more chamfer dimension,
DDI_1 (1) (*) Drafting document from chamfer external document instead of an
dimension. no more ghost Link.
dimension. internal link.
Not up-to-date driving
(*) dimension or invalid Delete dimension or No more not up to date
DDI_2 (1) Drafting Constraint data is corrupted.
constraint between 2D and constraint. dimension or constraint.
3D.
Dimension not displayed but
Deletion of the useless Document is the same but
DDI_3 (3) Drafting accessible from search Non aggregated dimensions.
dimension. smaller.
command.

Dimension value does not

An attribute of dimension The dimension display does not Update dimension go any more on the line
DDI_4 (2) Drafting
is not valuated. match dimension properties. properties. of dimension after view
update.

The number of dimension After Undo command, dimensions

found by the search can disappear from the view Only the visualized
command is higher than the because of a problem of update. Deletion of each dimensions can be found by
DDI_5 (1) Drafting number of dimension seen This problem is corrected in R15 dimension which is not search command.
by the user. After copy- level. visualized in the view.
paste, update or isolate,
dimensions can reappear.

Useless data (connector, 3D

Remove this data and
Ghost Link in SendTo feature) is erroneously No more Ghost Link in
DDU_0 (2) Drafting thus its links pointing
command. referencing another document SendTo command.
other documents
(CATPart).

Open a Drafting document

displays a panel with an After a Copy/Paste operation, some These dress-up elements are
invalid link to another copied dressup elements keep their isolated from other
DDU_1 (2) (*) Drafting drawing. Document has a link to first drawing. Remove the invalid links. CATDrawing. They are still
ghost link. visualized. No more panel
when opening the document.
CATIA Infrastructure A ghost link on
Version a
5 Release A feature (that leads to the ghost
16 Deletion
Pageof1256
the axis lines,
(*) CATDrawing document leads link) is set under of the DrwCont center lines or thread that No more ghost links in Send
DDU_2 (1) Drafting
to the detection of the container instead of being are directly under the To command.
problem. aggregated under a view. DrwCont container.

Document too big or/and Deletion of the unused 2D Document is the same but
DET_0 (3) (*) Drafting 2D component not used anymore.
extra links in Edit/Links. component. smaller.

2D component non typed through Document is the same but

Document contains unusable Deletion of the unused 2D
DET_1 (3) (*) Drafting interface. They cannot be used smaller. Extra links can
elements and/or extra links. component.
anymore. disappear

The 2D component
2D Component instance has The document is self-content
(*) Cut Copy Paste problems during reference is created inside
DET_2 (2) Drafting its reference outside its again. No problem if external
V5R11 and V5R12. the same document and
document. document disappears.
replace the wrong one.

The view that was containing

2D Component instance has Cut Copy Paste problems during
DET_3 (1) Drafting Deletion of the scale. such object recover his
too big or too small scale. V5R11 and V5R12.
frame.

After exploding all 2D Redundant local reference exists in Instances of the Document size decrease. No
component instances (i.e. the model. They cannot be deleted redundant local reference more ghost link after
DET_4 (2) (*) Drafting dittos) in a CATDrawing, by user. are redirected to the good exploding dittos.
Edit/Links shows residual one and redundant local
external links to catalog. reference is deleted.
2D Component instance can
Unpredictable behavior when There is 2D component instance that
The invalid 2D component be exploded without error or
DET_6 (1) Drafting using a drafting detail/ditto. is not structurally valid and must be
instance is deleted. crash.
discarded.

Open a CATDrawing
document, a warning with
the following error message
The fixing action consists
appears: "The files in the During the explode operation of a
in unplugging the View
following list could not be 2DComponent instance, some
sub-components with No more warning pop-up
found or contain the wrong instance/reference links were kept
ghost links from their when opening the document,
information for the active between some elements in the
DET_7 (2) (*) Drafting "ghost" reference and to and no more GhostLink in
document", but a document 2DComponent and the document
plug them again to their SendTo command.
mentioned in the list does where the 2DComponent was
startups in current
not appear when using originally created.
document.
File/Desk or Edit/links
command. The user cannot
correct the ghost link.

A CATDrawing containing
The CATDUA modifies the
isolated views has still some The breakout operator in Generative No link to 3D will exist
Drafting isolated views maintains breakout operator and
links to 3D parts/product. anymore on this operator -
DOB_0 (1) (*) Drafting some links to 3D documents, despite deletes the links to 3D
This is detected when using File/SendTo will not detect
the fact that the view is isolated and documents.
File/SendTo. these links.
no link should exist.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1257
The type is set according
A pointed document can not The type of the pointed document is Pointed document can be
DOC_1 (2) SpecsModeler to the extension of the
be loaded. not specified in the symbolic link. loaded.
pointed document.

Internal counter to determine

No visibility (can lead to the Set the counter to the
DOC_3 (2) SpecsModeler whether a link to a document has to No visibility.
lost of a link until V5R10). correct value.
be kept not correctly valuated.

Unused external links shown Internal counter not correctly Set the counter to the In Edit Links, there are no
DOC_4 (3) SpecsModeler
in Edit Links. valuated. correct value. more unused external links.
Objects located in a pointed
A link to a container in a pointed The link to the container Objects of the pointed
DOC_5 (2) SpecsModeler documents can not be
document has been lost. is rebuilt. document are accessible.
accessed.

Creation of an empty
A document cannot be Applicative container with no stream The document can be stored
DOC_6 (3) SpecsModeler stream for this applicative
stored in ENOVIAVPM. in the document. in ENOVIAVPM.
container.

The Ref-Ref links repository contains

SendTo on a CATPart shows no Input or Inputs that are no more
The meaningless SendTo does not show a link
DOC_11 (3) (*) SpecsModeler a GhostLink to an useless pointed, so the link to the other
repository is deleted. to a useless CATPart.
CATPart. CATPart owned by the repository is
useless.

When working in context of

corrupted CATProduct,
Establishes correct Need After close and reopen of
changes made to a pointed Need to save information is
DOC_7 (2) (*) Product Structure to save information in the data, modification will be
sub-product or part are not corrupted.
link.. taken into account.
saved. Undo is not working
on this sub-product or part.

When link counters in the index

table of inter-document, it goes The link that does not
down to 0 (link no more seen by the appear to end-user is
Bad performance when
DOC_8 (3) Product Structure user), ObjectModeler does not deleted in table of inter- Better performance at open.
opening a document.
delete this link in Session, only document links, the table
CATDUA is authorized to perform is just compacted.
this operation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1258
Update of a CATPart cannot Only one object should federate the
Data contained in all
be completed if there are different pointed documents by Ref-
federators are put into
DOC_9 (3) Product Structure more than one Ref-Ref link Ref link for a given CATPart. If there Update is now possible.
one federator and empty
federator in the Ref-Ref link is more than one, Ref-Ref links
federators are deleted.
container. cannot be solved.

The projection operator in

A CATDrawing containing
Generative Drafting isolated views The CATDUA modifies the No link to 3D will exist
isolated views has still some
maintains some links to 3D projection operator and anymore on this operator -
DOP_0 (1) (*) Generative Drafting links to 3D parts/product.
documents, despite the fact that the deletes the links to 3D File/SendTo will not detect
This is detected when using
view is isolated and no link should documents. these links.
File/SendTo.
exist.

Unrelated document can be

pointed by the drawing A section operator has an invalid Deletion of the invalid
document (it appears using link. link. No more Ghost Link in Send
DOS_0 (1) (*) Generative Drafting
Send To). Ghost Link. to command.

Unrelated document can be

(*) pointed by the drawing A section operator is not
DOS_1 (1) Generative Drafting No more ghost links in Send
document (it appears using aggregated. Deletion of the object.
Send To). To command.

Data model inconsistency is

now solved for this draft
Remove Rsur Features
When deleting the draft, feature. If deleting the draft
from Geometrical Set to
DRF_0 (3) PartDesign some related data are left in Data model Inconsistency. the life cycle management
PartBody under Draft
the document. will be better.
feature.
Document needs to be
updated.

When creating a new draft

Default draft pulling direction
feature the geometry Inconsistency between the vector
Default pulling direction in is changed. The next created
DRF_1 (3) PartDesign selected to define the pulling and the selected object in the
object and vector is reset. draft will use this new default
direction is inconsistent with definition of default values.
pulling direction.
the pulling direction vector.

More than one drawing in the

Deletion of the useless No impact, reduce the size of
DRW_0 (1) (*) Drafting No visibility. document. Others drawings are
drawings. the document.
useless.
CATIA Infrastructure Ghost linksVersion 5 Release
might be visible 16 Page 1259
in a part document via edit A DrwDrawing with external links is Document's ize is reduced,.
links, or a Part document's Removal of the
DRW_1 (1) (*) Drafting inside the CATPrtCont. It is not no more Ghost links. in
size might be strangely big. DrwDrawing.
visible in the specstree. SendTo command.

Balloon, datum feature,

datum target, roughness A simple text must aggregate at
DST_0 (1) Drafting Delete annotation. No more annotation.
symbol and coordinate least one sub-text.
dimension not displayed.

There isn't any ghost link

anymore. The functionality
A ghost link appears in the
The callout text kept old links after a Removes the link but that links the section view
DST_1 (1) (*) Drafting old drawing containing a
copy-paste. keeps the text as it was. name to the callout text will
section view.
not work on cleaned models,
as it was already the case.

Ghost link visible in SendTo An internal drafting data is No behavior modification

DTE_0 (3) Drafting command and when opening erroneously referencing another Deletion of the link. except no more ghost link
the document. document. when opening the document.

A Design table link found even when

An Applicative Design Table
no feature was using it. In Part
cannot be deleted. Edit- No more link in Edit/Link
Document Design table link exists The design table link is
>Link command shows a command. Applicative Design
DVB_0 (3) Part Design even though the Hole/ Thread deleted.
link on a standard file which Table can be deleted.
feature using the standard is not
should not be shown.
available.

CATDrawing is correctly
Error when saving a Deletion of the useless
DVM_0 (2) Drafting Useless viewmakeup detected. saved. Reduce the size of the
CATDrawing. viewmakeup.
document.

An object managing cut-views

Associativity between 3D
associativity is isolated and no more Deletion of the useless No impact, reduce the size of
DWA_1 (3) Drafting and section (cut) views can
used by a view (it should have been object. the document.
be wrong.
removed).

An incorrect profile section A profile section is isolated and no

Deletion of the useless No impact, reduce the size of
DWC_1 (3) Drafting can be visualized in the more used by a view (it should have
object. the document.
drawing document. been removed).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 An object managing links Page 1260
Ghost Link in SendTo
between Views and 3D
command. Unrelated
document points an unrelated
Generative document can be pointed Deletion of the useless No more ghost links in
DWE_0 (1) document. This can happen
Drafting by the drawing object. Send To command.
after replacing an assembly, if
document (using
this assembly contains different
SendTo).
structures.

Unrelated part document is An object managing dimensions Document needs to be

DWG_0 (1) Drafting pointed by the drawing generation is no more used by a Deletion of the constraint. updated. The constraint can
document. view (it should have been removed). be used again.

Unrelated part document An object managing dimensions

Deletion of the useless No impact, reduce the size of
DWG_1 (3) Drafting can be pointed by the generation is isolated (it should have
object. the document.
drawing document. been removed).

Unrelated part document A generative hatching pattern is

Deletion of the useless No impact, reduce the size of
DWH_1 (3) Drafting can be pointed by the isolated (it should have been
object. the document.
drawing document. removed).

A not referenced pattern mapping Deletion of useless No impact, reduce the size of
DWP_0 (3) Drafting No visibility.
table is useless. pattern mapping table. the document.
A pattern mapping table is not Deletion of the pattern No impact, reduce the size of
DWP_1 (1) Drafting No visibility.
aggregated. mapping table. the document.

An useless relation has been

Deletion of the useless No impact, reduce the size of
DWR_0 (3) Drafting No visibility. detected: either the in or the out of
DrwRelation. the document.
the relation is (are) not valuated.

Impossible to select a view

Internal value which determines the Internal value set
(not allowed), Grid
DWS_0 (2) Drafting order of the views is not set correctly : order of the The view can be selected.
disappear, or impossible to
correctly. views is correct.
activate Drafting workbench.

A corrupted sheet has been

detected: either it has not the
Deletion of the corrupted No impact, reduce the size of
DWS_1 (1) (*) Drafting No visibility. minimum required views
sheet. the document.
(background and main view) or it is
not under the drawing.

Ghost Link in SendTo No more Ghost Link in

DWT_1 (3) Drafting Pattern not aggregated correctly. Deletion of the Pattern.
command. SendTo command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1261

One or several rules for a view in

the drawing is not respected:
(1) a view must have a parent
CATDrawing is correctly
(2) a view of type Pure_sketch must
DWV_0 (1) (*) Drafting No visibility. Deletion of the View. saved. Reduce the size of the
not have a sheet as its parent
document.
(3) a view which is not of type
Pure_sketch must have a sheet as
its parent.

Ghost Link in SendTo A View is linked with another No more Ghost Link in
DWV_1 (2) Drafting Deletion of the Link.
command. Drawing. SendTo command.
When opening a CATDrawing
document, a warning with
the following error message
The fixing action consists
appears: "The files in the During the explode operation of a
in unplugging the View
following list could not be 2DComponent instance, some
sub-components with
found or contain the wrong instance/reference links were kept
ghost links from their No more warning pop-up
DWV_2 (2) (*) Drafting information for the active between some elements in the
"ghost" reference and to when opening the document
document", but a document 2DComponent and the document
replug them to their
mentioned in the list does where the 2DComponent was
startups in current
not appear when using originally created.
document.
File/Desk or Edit/links
command. The user cannot
correct the ghost link.
The local transformations of Local transformations are
geometries in views (like available again on
The geometrical result of the axis
translations, scaling, geometries. Reduce the size
component of a view has been lost. Update of the
rotations, offset) do not of the model.
DWV_3 (3) Drafting These geometries are necessary to SketchSupport in order to
work, usually when some 2D Document needs to be
perform operations on other rebuild the result.
Component instances have updated.
geometries in the view.
been exploded or exposed in
the CATDrawing.

Axis elements of the sketch The sketch support axis

support associated with a The sketch support is in the no-show The sketch support is put elements can be seen in the
view that have been put in space. in the show-space and its show space (provided the
DWV_4 (3) Drafting
the no-show space before axis elements are put in user puts them in it).
CXR14 cannot be visualized the no-show space.
in the show space anymore.

No more ghost link from the

Ghost links appear in A useless link exist on the view to
DWV_5 (3) (*) Remove the invalid link. drawing in
Drafting File/SendTo command from an external document.
File/SendTo/Directory.
a CATDrawing.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1262
Electrical features in part need to be
Electrical part document is Electrical part document is
updated. Update is performed during Update electrical features
EDL_1 (3) Electrical modified during the not modified during the
instantiation and the part is in the part.
Instantiation from catalog. instantiation from catalog.
modified.

Update error window

"Sketch is not valid for
Set the flexible curve
feature you want to Flexible curve attributes are not
EHI_1 (3) Electrical attributes to correct No more error window.
create" when updating correctly valuated.
value.
Bundle Segment of
MultiBranchable part.
The display of the names
New names are displayed
of electrical harness The display of the name of
Unset Reference for electrical harness
features ( Branch and electrical harness features is
Designator attribute features (Branch and
EHI_2 (2) Electrical Bundle Segments ) are given by Reference Designator
value for Branch and Bundle Segments) ,
not NLS (National attribute value and is not NLS
Bundle Segments. enabling NLS.
Language Support) compatible.
compatibility.
compatible.
In file mode, if the root
document is moved in If all formulas under the
another directory and the Electrical knowledge formulas under geometrical bundle are
geometrical bundle a geometrical bundle are not electrical, the relation set The root and geometrical
EHI_3 (2) (*) Electrical document opened, electrical correctly created. will be recreated correctly bundle documents needs to
knowledge formula will not with the correct formulas. be saved.
be visible.

No more update error

Bundle segments lead to (twisted configuration) for
The standard Rib geometrical
EHI_4 (1) twisted configuration if Replace the standard Rib bundle segments have a
Electrical feature cannot be collapsed.
minimum bend radius is by a collapsible one. bend radius smaller than the
smaller than the diameter. diameter.

A link still exists to the pointing Document needs to be

Ghost Link in SendTo Unused extensions feature
EXT_0 (3) (*) Specs Modeler documents due to unused updated.
command. are deleted.
extensions feature. No more ghost links

The startup of the

Ghost links when opening a The reference of an extension is not extension becomes also
CATProduct. A Pop up the reference of the No more ghost links to
in the same document that the
EXT_2 (3) (*) Specs Modeler message is displayed. extension. No data lost, documents containing the old
reference of its base feature
only rerouting a link. reference.
(probably after a replace).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16Some vertices have unnecessary Page 1263
geometric data (linked curves /
Size of CATPart abnormally surfaces). Remove unnecessary
FGM_1 (3) Topological Objects huge comparatively to the Part is the same but smaller.
geometric data.
number of elements.
Some surfaces are over defined
(unnecessarily extrapolated).

Support of some PointOnEdges

(used to define radius for variable
fillet) belongs to a ribbon different
from the one to which the
PointOnEdge itself belongs. Hence Some objects (the fillet
During the edition of the when the support edge is removed Move the PointOnEdge concerned and its impacted
fillet, an error "Internal error by the user (de-selection from UI), (FilletRadius object features) are seen non-
FIL_0 (2) Part Design the corresponding PointOnEdge is updated. Document needs
in mechanical modeler" is containing it) to
flashed. not removed. This PointOnEdge then appropriate the ribbon. to be updated.
remains without support and gives
an error "Internal error in
mechanical modeler" when we try to
access its support.

ENOVIAVPM User views

some ghost links pointing a Declaration of a invalid Extension. Deletion of Unwanted No more invalid V4 ghost
FS4_1 (3) V4V5integration
V4 Model in a part created Internal not used Extension. Extension. links in V4ToV5Part.
by V4toV5Interoperability.

The TTRS ( Technologically and

Sometimes, unused external
3D Functional Topologically Related Surface )
links (shape representation Deletion of the invalid In Edit Links, there are no
FTA_1 (1) (*) Tolerancing & features become invalid because
of a product) shown in Edit TTRS features. more unused external links.
Annotation their StartUp has been removed
Links or File Desk.
from the container.

3D Functional
Unused elements (RGE, Reference Deletion of unused Document is the same but
FTA_2 (3) Tolerancing & No visibility.
Geometrical Elements) are present. elements. smaller.
Annotation

3D Functional
Unused elements (TTRS) are Deletion of unused Document is the same but
FTA_3 (3) Tolerancing & No visibility.
present. elements. smaller.
Annotation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1264 Reduce the size of the
Deletion of FTA annotations document. There is no link
does not delete all Drafting anymore between drafting
internal entities (the annotations and FTA
When remove was called for FTA Delete all Drafting
3D Functional visualization of FTA annotations.They are not
FTA_4 (3) annotation, nothing was done in annotations which are not
Tolerancing & annotations is based on used anymore in CATPart,
order to delete the Drafting pointed by FTA one.
Annotation Drafting). Data size of a CATProduct, CATProcess
document is abnormally annotations. documents (they are in fact
huge regarding its elements. lost). Document needs to
be updated.

A generated item cannot be

Generated Item without any Deletion of the generated No impact, reduce the size of
GIE_0 (2) Drafting used while creating
associated reference curve. item. the document.
associative dimensions.

Unrelated document can be

An object managing graphic
pointed by the drawing
properties of generated items is not Deletion of the object. No more ghost links in Send
GME_0 (1) (*) Generative Drafting document (it appears using
aggregated. To command.
Send To).

Unrelated document can be

pointed by the drawing An object managing graphic Deletion of the invalid
document (it appears using properties of generated items has an link. No more ghost links in Send
GME_1 (1) (*) Generative Drafting
Send To). To command.
invalid link to a 3D document.

Ghost links in SendTo or Edit An internal of a Brep feature refers The external reference is Ghost links have been
GNL_1 (3) (*) Generic Naming
Links item. to a ghost external document. removed. removed.

A GenericNaming Feature is not

Abnormal size of a The useless feature is Reduce the size of the
GNL_3 (3) (*) Generic Naming aggregated, resulting in a useless
document. removed. document.
memory cost.

Sometimes, the user can Visually no impact, better

An object is aggregated under
Generative Shape only see invalid "Parent / Suppresses these useless 'Parent / Children' or impact
GSD_0 (3) "Component" attribute but it is
Design Children" or impact objects. analyses, reduces the size of
never used elsewhere.
analyses. the document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1265

Reset the datum and\or

contextual flags to 0. If a
reference plane has been
The icon of the reference
moved, a new one is
The reference planes have plane has not the datum
The reference planes are turned into created and added at the
Generative Shape the datum mask on their mask any more. A reference
GSD_1 (1) datum or flagged as contextual place of the moved
Design icon and can have been plane moved is renamed and
features. reference plane. The
moved with the compass. a new reference plane is
moved reference place is
created.
renamed with the add of
"moved by cleaner" to its
alias.

The user opens a CATPart The Start-up inheritance of the Re-plugs the broken
Generative Shape with an unidentified object object is broken, it is due to instance with the correct Object now corresponding to
GST_0 (2)
Design (broken icon) called incorrect CATHybridShape.feat start-up in the a valid Rolling Offset.
RollingOffset. catalog construction. CATHybridShape catalog.

Hierarchy problem : the father of Over sub-products are

A product instance has too
HIE_3 (3) SpecsModeler the reference is not the reference of deleted and product No more over sub-products.
many sub-products.
the father. instance is synchronized.

When opening a CATProduct

document or using the
"Send to directory"
An internal object (connector) has
command, a linked
an inconsistent state and retains an Remove the offending No more warning pop-up
HIE_4 (1) (*) SpecsModeler document is not found but
instance-reference link to a useless connectors. when opening the document
that document should not be
document.
linked as it does not
participate in the product
structure.

A change of reference is made

during save as operation when a The CATDUA change the Error DOC_3 is fixed
After first clean, DOC_3
HIE_5 (3) SpecsModeler private component can not find its reference of this completely by first pass
error is still there. reference, this change must be done component. of CATDUA.
by the CATDUA.

Instance / Reference model mapping

Impossible to update the error for CONNECTION objects leads Document is now updated or
Invalid connections
HIE_6 (1) Product Structure model: some assembly data to invalid constraints: CONNECTION can be updated, invalid
deletion.
(constraints) are invalid. reference objects aggregated by an constraints are deleted.
instance of ASMDISCIPLINE object.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1266

Unrelated document can be

pointed by the drawing
Generative Drafting A generative view is not aggregated. No more ghost links in Send
HLV_0 (1) (*) document (it appears using Deletion of the object.
Send To). To command.

The drawing document size

can be out of proportion Deletion of the non The drawing document size is
Generative Drafting regarding the useful data aggregated generative normal again. No more ghost
HLV_1 (1) (*) contained inside. Unrelated A generative view is not aggregated view. links in Send To command.
document can be pointed by
the drawing document (it
appears using Send To).

TagConnectors created on constraint

definition is not aggregated to any
When cleaning any
parent. So when cleaning up the
mechanism that has
document for any reason, the LIF_8 Aggregate the floating TagConnectors are no more
constraint created by
rules deletes all the floating TagConnectors with the deleted when cleaning the
IGP_1 (1) Robotics FramesOfReference in
connectors, that is why this TagGroup being its logical document.
Device Building, the
TagConnector is deleted too. Hence parent.
constraint is deleted.
the parts associated with the
constraints are disconnected.

Use edges created when

constraints created, then
Use edges are not deleted when
when deleting these Document needs to be
associated constraints are deleted. Deletion of unused
IGS_0 (3) Sketcher constraints, use edges are updated. Document is the
Unused elements (phantom elements.
not deleted and are same but smaller.
operators) stay in the document.
therefore unnecessary
(severity 3 since R9SP3).

Some joints are deleted. If

Mechanism cannot be One or more kinematics joint axis Deletion of the corrupted you want to play again the
JNT_1 (1) DMU Kinematics
simulated are corrupted joint. Mechanism, you have to
recreate the deleted joints.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1267
Some joints are deleted. If
Mechanism cannot be One or more geometries pointed by Deletion of the corrupted you want to play again the
JNT_2 (1) DMU Kinematics
simulated. a kinematics joint are corrupted. joint. Mechanism, you have to
recreate the deleted joints.

This Message is displayed

Deletion of all Mechanism
when trying to play a Several Mechanism containers exist All the previous Mechanisms
JNT_3 (1) DMU Kinematics containers except the first
Mechanism: "There is no in the same CATProduct document. are restored correctly.
non-empty one.
Kinematics Data".

The user opens a document

containing a mechanism, he
modifies some constraints
associated to the joints of The problem was occurring at the
the mechanism, updates the joint creation. The joint creation When clicking on the
mechanism and saves his command analyses the geometry "Mechanism Analysis"
Repair the joint and the
work. After reloading the selected by the user to create the command, the geometry
associated constraints by
document, the associated joint and convert this geometry into name is a correct name like
replacing the incorrect
JNT_4 (2) DMU Kinematics constraints are broken. "persistent" geometry. This "Point.1" or "Curve.1" for
pointed geometric
When clicking on the conversion was not correctly done element by a correct one. instance.
"Mechanism Analysis" and the geometric stored objects Document needs to be
command, you can see were not understandable any more updated.
"CATMacroPointCGM" or by the assembly model after saving
"CATSimCurveCGM" or any it and reloading it.
"CATXXXCGM" in the
"Geometry 1" or "Geometry
2" columns.
A "Point on Curve" Joint simulation
is not correct. The problem comes
from the Point on Curve Joint
creation. The Point on Curve joint as
The user opens a document a regular kinematic joint contains User can click on the
containing a mechanism among its internal data some local "Simulation with commands"
with at least one "Point on frames. These frames locate the without any strange
Curve" joint. He clicks on joint position regarding the parts Internal frames of the displacement for parts
"Simulation with and are used in the kinematic solver joint are updated. involved in a point on curve
JNT_5 (2) DMU Kinematics
commands". One part for simulation. In some rare case, joint.
involved in "Point On Curve" the internal frames of the joint can Document needs to be
joint, jumps on a wrong not be created correctly. Note that a updated
position different from its Point on Curve joint can only be
current position. repaired if the joint is not broken
(i.e. the point is effectively on the
curve.)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1268
If these objects are not
pointed, they are
destroyed. If it is a
parameter that is pointed,
KWE_1 (1) Knowledge No visible symptom. Knowledge Objects not aggregated. it is added to the No Visibility.
parameter set. If it is a
relation that is pointed, it
is added to the relation
set.

A relation in a CATPart document

a "!" information is displayed
KWE_2 (1) Knowledge points to elements in other The relation is destroyed. Broken relation disappears.
on a broken relation.
documents.

The output value of a

relation is not consistent.
The output parameter has been The output parameter is set
KWE_3 (2) Knowledge After forcing relation The evaluation is forced.
saved with a wrong value. to the good value.
evaluation, its value
changes.

A Knowledge Check is
An error in the stream involves bad The links are restored
KWE_4 (2) Knowledge broken. "!" information is The check is not broken.
pointing in the Check attributes. correctly.
displayed.

if the external Reference

Even it was not possible to
A parameter external is synchronized and has a The external Reference is
synchronize the External Ref and get
KWE_5(2) Knowledge Reference was synchronized wrong value, the value is synchronized and with a
the pointed value, the information of
but with a wrong value. updated with the good good value.
synchronization was stored.
one.

Deletion of unused
Size of CATPart abnormally
elements. Some used
huge comparatively to the
elements (such as GSD Part is the same but smaller.
number of elements or Unused Elements (Geometrical
features, Geometrical Used GSD features,
some mechanical feature) are present or used
LIF_1 (1) Mechanical Modeler Sets and PartBodies) Geometrical Sets and
features are absent from elements should appear in the
are regenerated PartBodies are all visible
the specification tree specification tree.
properly under the in the specification tree
although detected in
CATPart in the
some commands.
specification tree

Unused external links (shape

An external link is not used anymore
(*) representation of a product) The unnecessary external In Edit Links, there are no
LIF_2 (3) Product Structure by the CATProduct but has not been
shown in Edit Links or links are deleted. more unused external links.
suppressed.
FileDesk.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1269
No visibility except size of
Unused Elements (mechanical Deletion of unused Document is the same but
LIF_3 (3) Mechanical Modeler the CATProduct document
constraints) are present. elements. smaller.
(constraints deletion cases).

Unused objects are (PRDCTXREPO

No visibility except size of
and PRDCTXINPUT) persisted in to
the document (when an Deletion of unused Document is the same but
LIF_4 (3) (*) Product Structure the product container (CATPrdCont).
Isolate command has elements. smaller.
These objects are not functional,
failed).
they are pure dead weight.

After deletion of some elements in

Ghost links displayed during Deletion of useless
LIF_5 (3) (*) Mechanical Modeler Part or Product, links are kept in No more ghost links.
SendTo or Save in ENOVIA. element.
SelectionSet.

Measure has lost the link to the The measure and its
dimensions which are feature dimensions are deleted
The measure is deleted and
Measure is no more seen, pointed by measure. The link is from the measure
(*) disappears from the tree.
LIF_6 (1) Analysis not updateable. Result can CATSpecObject_Broken. If user container. Dimensions are
Document needs to be
be wrong in the edit window. delete measure in the tree stored in the measure
updated.
dimensions remain in the measure container. There are not
container. seen in the tree.

Document size is reduced,

can have an impact if
geometry access is used by a
contextual input (impact on
Internal product geometry Deletion of the Connectors
LIF_7 (3) (*) Product Structure Connector object has no owner. other documents) or is
access is corrupted. without father.
Published (impact on same
document).
Document needs to be
updated.

Document size is reduced,

Constraints are removed at
Connection linking 'Internal the same time.
Connection (old or new) object has Deletion of the Connectors
LIF_8 (3) (*) Product Structure product geometry access' is Document needs to be
no owner. without father.
corrupted. updated to handle
impacts on constraints
deletion.
CATIA Infrastructure User is prompted
Versionwith error 16
5 Release Page 1270
Some bag representation Objects No more window is
window containing some Deletion of the unused
LIF_9 (3) Product Structure are not used, not aggregated and displayed, ghost links has
ghost links with other objects.
stored in a wrong location. been removed.
documents.

Some objects of type

Destruction of the not
Ghost link in SendTo "CATAsmCstProxy" or
LIF_10(3) (*) Mechanical Modeler used "CATAsmCstProxy" No more ghost link.
command. "CATPrdInputProxy" point external
or "CATPrdInputProxy".
document but are no more used.

A link still exists to the pointing

Ghost Link in SendTo Deletion of the Unused No more ghost link in SendTo
LIF_11 (3) (*) Product Structure documents due to unused internal
command. internal feature. command.
feature of infrastructure.

When opening a product and

The Ghost Link is due to a No more ghost link.
going to save management, Unset the attribute
LIF_12 (3) (*) Product Structure publication or a constraint. The Document needs to be
there is a Ghost Link to "_ToProxy".
attribute "_ToProxy" is not unset. updated .
another document.

A Ghost link is visible in During a replace operation, an No more Ghost link in Send
Send To command. internal object (proxy) maintains a Removes the invalid To command.
LIF_13 (1) (*) Product Structure
link to a document which has been proxy.
removed from the product structure.
Abnormal behavior on some Some materials are deleted,
More than one material container in Deletion of over material
MAT_1 (1) Material materials (For edition, visualization may changed.
the document. containers.
deletion, visualization....). Model size is reduced.
Orphans elements in the material Deletion of orphan Model size can be reduced
MAT_2 (3) Material No Visible symptom.
container. members. significantly.

Reapplication of the same

material (if it has been
applied as a link and if it
can be retrieved in the
original catalog).
Wrong visualization of Note that this error could
MAT_3 (2) Material Material has lost some internal data. Visualization may change.
material. sometimes be impossible
to repair if the material
can not be retrieved (for
example, if the material is
located in an inaccessible
material catalog.

Invalid material links (In Deletion of incorrect data No more invalid material
MAT_4 (3) Material Incorrect data in material container.
Send/To command). of material container. links (In Send/To command).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1271
A material parameter
disappears from specification The material parameter contains Modify the material Document needs to be
MAT_5 (2) Material
tree after a new parameter wrong data. parameter. updated.
creation.

A Ghost Link on another Modify the material

The Ghost Link is due to an applied
document appears when application information to Document needs to be
MAT_6 (2) Material material that appears as copied
performing a SendTo obtain a correct linked updated.
material in the specification tree.
operation. material.

A material is located in a wrong

container (not the material
A blank line is displayed in No more Ghost Link in the
container). This can lead to ghost Deletion of material.
MAT_7 (3) (*) Material the window of the "SendTo" SendTo command.
links. This material is unused and
command (ghost link). should be destroyed.

No visibility except abnormal

Unused machining feature is not Delete the unused Document is the same but
MFG_0 (1) Manufacturing size of CATProcess
deleted (activities cases). machining feature. smaller.
document.

No visibility except abnormal

Unused pattern definition is not Delete the unused pattern Document is the same but
MFG_1 (1) Manufacturing size of CATProcess
deleted (pattern cases). definition. smaller.
document.

No visibility except abnormal The body referenced by a

Delete the duplicated Document is the same but
MFG_2 (2) Manufacturing size of CATProcess manufacturing geometry in SMART
body. smaller.
document. NC mode is duplicated.

No visibility except abnormal

Toolpath not referenced by an Delete the unused Document is the same but
MFG_3 (1) Manufacturing size of CATProcess
activity is not deleted. toolpath. smaller.
document.

The status activated/deactivated

(which can be seen in F(x) through The data structure is reset
Wrong behavior during Document needs to be
MFT_0 (2) Mechanical Modeler parameter activity) does not in accordance with the
activate/deactivate of solids. updated.
correspond to the data structure of active/inactive status.
the solid.

When a solid is deactivated, Reconstruction of the

Inactive feature storing the result of Document needs to be
MFT_1 (1) Mechanical Modeler the previous solid's result is internal result when
the previous feature. updated.
damaged. possible.

When a solid is deactivated, Result of a shape feature valuated Reconstruction of the

Document needs to be
MFT_2 (1) Mechanical Modeler the previous solid's result is with the result of the previous active internal result when
updated.
damaged. shape feature. possible.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1272
Trouble with
An internal attribute dealing with Attribute is regenerated or Document needs to be
MFT_3 (1) Mechanical Modeler activation/deactivation
solid's activation is unset or missing. reset with a proper result. updated.
behavior for solids.

The result of an update Document needs to be

Internal information has multiple Deletion of unnecessary
MGN_0 (2) Mechanical Modeler (geometric) is not correct. updated. The result of the
values instead of one. values.
No errors are reported. update is correct.
Information computed on a
Document needs to be
feature could be false (ex Restore a valid update
MGN_3 (2) Mechanical Modeler Invalid update state. updated. The result of the
length...). No errors are state.
update is correct.
reported.

The size of the model is

abnormally huge
comparatively to the number
The generic naming of the BRep Reduce the size of the
MGN_4 (3) Mechanical Modeler of elements. Or the size Remove duplicated data.
features duplicates data. document.
increases abnormally quickly
comparatively to the number
of interactions.

User is prompted with an

error window during Useless synchronization data remain Remove useless Reduce the size of the
MGN_5 (3) Mechanical Modeler
PowerCopy or Copy Paste on a feature. synchronization data. document.
operation.

Size of a CATPart on disk is Useless Mechanical modeler data. Reduce the size of the
MGN_6 (1) Mechanical Modeler Remove useless data.
abnormally huge. model.

All cells can be selected, and

other features may be
Some cells of Datum Feature Cells cannot be selected because applied.
MGN_7 (2) Mechanical Modeler Add a naming to the cells. Document needs to be
cannot be selected. they have no naming.
updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1273
While updating a
corrupted mirror feature
an error with message "
One or several features The reference
One or more than one reference
of the list have been elements kept in Document needs to be
MIR_0 (2) PartDesign elements kept in Generative
deleted. Data is no Generative Tool are updated.
Tool for mirroring is lost.
longer consistent. You created again.
must delete the
transformation feature."
is thrown.

One at least of the reference plane The reference planes of

Severe global malfunctioning Document needs to be
MMR_0 (1) Mechanical Modeler of the Part (xy, yz, zx) is damaged the Part (xy, yz, zx) are
in the Part. updated.
or missing. regenerated or repaired.

An old CATPart cannot be The link between the shape

The CATPart can be inserted
MMR_1 (2) Mechanical Modeler used in an assembly (Insert representation and the product is Recreation of the link.
in the assembly.
Component fails). broken.

Severe global malfunctioning

in many operations There is no main body (PartBody) in Apparition of a main body in
MMR_2 (2) Mechanical Modeler Creation of a main body.
expecting the main body to the Part. the Part.
exist.

Visualization of a part is Deletion of the invalid

MMV_1 (3) Mechanical Modeler Invalid graphic property on the part. Part is correctly visualized.
black. property.

The visualization of
previously dressed-up
geometry (used in Free Style
In some cases, dress-up properties
workbench) can be wrong: Correct visualization,
could be duplicated, so that one Restore correctly the
MMV_2 (3) Mechanical Modeler the dress-up can still be corresponding to the dress-
property remained even after dress-up properties.
visualized after removal. up properties.
removal.
This problem can only occur
for documents created
before CATIA V5R10.

If multiviewer infrastructure
is available on the PartBody
(e.g. in SheetMetal
workbenches), wrong view This problem can only happen for
names appear in the panels CATPart documents created on Both multiviewer panels
Erase the wrong attribute
MMV_3 (3) Mechanical Modeler "Views" and "Add view" of CXR10 level. On that level, wrong contain only the correct view
names.
the contextual menu of the attribute values were streamed on names.
PartBody. These view names the PartBody.
appear in addition to the
correct ones (i.e "3D View"
and "Flat View").
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1274
Generated drafting view is
not complete : some
Wrong plug of attribute from the Document needs to be
MTR_0 (2) Mechanical Modeler elements are missing Attribute reset correctly.
mechanical Body to its last solid. updated.
compared with the 3D
visualization of the Part.

Ghost Link in SendTo MechanicalTool has a reference to a Change reference to the

MTR_1 (3) (*) Mechanical Modeler No more ghost link.
command. lost part. startup.

Visualization and/or update Document needs to be

MTR_2 (2) Mechanical Modeler Wrong plug between solids. Re-plug solids correctly.
errors among solids. updated.

Wrong visualization of a
Body, i.e: an operated Body Resets the attribute Document needs to be
MTR_3 (3) Mechanical Modeler Wrong set of attribute.
is visible as if it was not correctly. updated.
operated.

When opening a CATProduct,

a warning informs you that
The attribute "_RefProduct" in the
the document contains ghost Remove the phantom No more warning pop-up
NUM_0 (3) (*) Numbering container "CATPrdNumberingCont" is
Links, or differences numbering objects. when opening the document
wrong.
between SendTo and
EditLinks commands.
The OLE startup will be
imported into the same
A DrwOLE object point to a startup drawing as the DrwOLE
OLE_0 (2) (*) Drafting No visibility. not located in the same object if necessary. The No visibility.
CATDrawing. DrwOLE object will then
point to the right OLE
startup.
Document cannot be If user pattern is having a user The instances available in
updated. Error obtained defined feature as one of its item to GenerTool of User Pattern
Redundant instances in
when update is called on the pattern and if there are any are correct. Document can
GenerTool of User Pattern
PAT_0 (1) PartDesign Part having user Pattern, redundant instances of features to be updated.
are deleted.
which has redundant pattern in GenerTool of the pattern Document needs to be
instances in its Gener Tool. object, the model is corrupted. updated.

A Drawing Picture Deletion of non

PIC_0 (3) Drafting disappears after a Non aggregated Picture. aggregated Drawing The document is smaller.
copy/paste. Picture.
Concerned Features are no
Some of the Finite element model
Missing result view of an Initialize a default result more up-to-date.
SAF_2 (2) Analysis objects are no more linked their
Analysis feature. view for next update. Document needs to be
original feature.
updated.
Concerned Features are no
Some of the Finite element model Re-initialize a valid default
Invalid result view of an more up-to-date.
SAF_3 (1) Analysis objects are not valid according to FE result view for next
Analysis feature. Document needs to be
rules. update.
updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Some mesh can no more be Page 1275 Concerned Features are no
Missing links between mesh Re-initialize a valid default
more up-to-date.
and physical data attach on referenced in order to define result view for next
SAF_4 (2) Analysis Document needs to be
mesh . preprocessing. update.
updated.

Errors in mesh or Nodes with wrong activity status

SAF_5 (2) Analysis postprocessing visualization according to mesh part activity Correct activity status. No visibility.
. status.

In some cases, the

Mismatched update state on an Document needs to be
SCH_0 (3) PlantShip Modeler connectors' locations are not Update state set to TRUE.
extension. updated.
well defined.

Sketch solving result is not Some geometrical constraints do not

SCS_0 (2) Add the missing "Help" Solving result is stable. When
stable. Geometries can have "Help" parameter. This
Sketcher parameter to sketcher editing a sketch, geometries
move when the user edits a parameter is used by the constraint
constraint. do not move.
sketch. solver to help solving the sketch.

A CATPart contains a wrong 'Shuttle'

container. When loading this
Performance issue when
CATPart, CATIA tries to load the Deletes the unwanted Correct performance when
SHC_1 (3) DMU Fitting loading a CATPart.
Shuttle container and initialize it and Shuttle container. loading the CATPart.
load the huge DMU Fitting libraries.

The information which is managing Adding the information. The activity is at Yes
Somme sheet metal object
SHM_0 (2) SheetMetal the activity is not present on some The activity will be at Yes Document needs to be
cannot be deactivate.
sheet metal object. after the operation. updated.

User is prompted with error Before V5R9, some internal BRep

Aggregate the involved
SHM_1 (2) SheetMetal window "The Extrude XXX Edges features were pointed but not No more error window.
BRep Edge features.
has a data problem". aggregated.

User cannot use sketch

absolute or a sub-element
(O,H,V) of a sketch absolute All sub-elements of the
axis to create a volumic or a sketch can be used to create
surfacic feature (ex: User CATDUA puts absolute feature. Sketch feature is not
cannot select H axis to Absolute axis, H axis, V axis and axis feature out of date. up-to-date and the user has
SKS_0 (2) Sketcher Modeler
define revolution axis of a Origin features have no result body. to update the sketch (or the
revolve volume). User part)
cannot create a projection, Document needs to be
an intersection or an offset updated
curve in the Sketcher
workbench.
Update cycles not detected
Sketches are seen as non up-
when features are using Update data structure of the origin,
Update data structure to-date.
SKS_1 (2) Sketcher Modeler origin, h direction or v h direction or v direction of the
corrected. Document needs to be
direction of the sketch sketch absolute axis is not correct.
updated.
absolute axis.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1276
Sketches are seen as non up-
Sketch absolute axis seen as
Operations within the Sketcher mark non up-to-date to-date.
SKT_0 (1) Sketcher Modeler up-to-date, but no resulting
cannot be performed properly. absolute axis. Document needs to be
associated geometry.
updated.

Sketches are seen as non up-

No visibility (severity 3 since Unused elements (Brep aggregated Deletion of unused to-date.
SKT_24 (3) Sketcher
R9SP3) under sketch) are present. elements. Document needs to be
updated.

Sketches are seen as non up-

upgrade of data structure Modify internal update
to-date.
SKT_25 (3) Sketcher Modeler updates of sketches created bad update links management. links between sketch
Document needs to be
before V5R3SP2. elements.
updated.

When opening a CATPart

document, a warning with
the following error message Unplug the geometry with
appears: "The files in the ghost links on their
After pasting in a Sketch geometry
following list could not be details/dittos in the
coming from View of a CATDrawing No more warning pop-up
found or contain the wrong CATDrawing and re-plugg
containing a ditto, the Sketch can when opening the CATPart
SKT_26 (2) Sketcher Modeler information for the active them to their startups in
contain geometry features on which document. Document
document", but a document current CATPart
some instance/reference links were needs to be updated.
mentioned in the list does document.
kept with the CATDrawing data.
not appear when using
File/Desk or Edit/Links
command. The user cannot
correct the ghost link.
Sketches are seen as non up-
Updates of use edges not Update data structure of use edges Update data structure to-date.
SMG_4 (2) Sketcher
performed properly. not consistent. corrected. Document needs to be
updated.
Sketches are seen as non up-
Updates of use edges not Update data structure of use edges Update data structure to-date.
SMG_5 (2) Sketcher
performed properly. not consistent. corrected. Document needs to be
updated.
Sketches are seen as non up-
Updates of use edges not Update data structure of use edges Update data structure to-date.
SMG_6 (2) Sketcher
performed properly. not consistent. corrected. Document needs to be
updated.
A modification of a Sketches are seen as non up-
Internal value to determine if a
constraint is not taken into Set the attribute to the to-date.
SMG_9 (2) Sketcher constraint impact a sketch is not
account by an update of the correct value. Document needs to be
correctly valuated.
sketch. updated.

The result of the update is

Updates of sketches must be correct, Sketches are seen as
Constraints re-impacted during the Constraints update data
SMG_16 (2) Sketcher performed many times to non up-to-date.
feature update. structure corrected.
get sketches updated. Document needs to be
updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1277
The result of the update is
Update errors appearing for correct, Sketches are seen as
Geometry update data
SMG_17 (2) Sketcher features using sketched Inconsistent update data structure. non up-to-date.
structure corrected.
geometry. Document needs to be
updated.

When opening a sub-product

One or several Tooling Feature
of a Tooling Assembly only,
Extensions have an attribute The pointing attribute is The symptom disappears.
some products that are not
TFC_0 (2) Mold Design pointing on non first rank instances reset on the first rank Products are no more loaded.
part of the loaded sub-
of products. instance of the product.
product are also loaded.

One or several Tooling Feature

A product takes a very long Extensions have attributes that Suppress the duplicated The symptom disappears.
Mold Design
TFC_1 (2) time to be closed. points several times on the same links. Products can be closed with a
product. correct performance.

When opening a sub-product Resets to 0 all the

of a Tooling Assembly only, Some Tooling Feature extensions attributes of the useless The symptom disappears.
TFC_2 (2) Mold Design some products that are not have been duplicated. extensions (their complete Products are no more loaded.
part of the loaded sub- removal is not possible).
product are also loaded.

Only the first standard will

Only one standard per document is
STD_0 (2) Drafting No visibility. be kept, the others will be No visibility.
allowed.
deleted.

The standard in the

document is replaced by a
The current sheet is not associated new standard (import)
STD_1 (2) Drafting No visibility. No visibility.
with the standard of the document. corresponding to the
standard of the current
sheet.

Some new instances are Synchronization mechanism does

Deletion of the newly The CATProduct has the good
SYN_1 (3) Product Structure created during the open of a not detect the newly created object,
created instance. number of instances.
CATProduct. so it creates a new one.

When working in context of

The PRDBAGREP attribute of the
corrupted CATProduct, the Reset the BagRepsList
ASMPRODUCT does not reference The CATPart is correctly
SYN_2 (1) Product Structure Parts cannot be visualized attribute of the
the PRDBAGREP of the reference visualized.
and the shapes cannot be ASMPRODUCT.
ASMPRODUCT.
activated correctly.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1278
Using SendTo Directory, a
The link between a design table and
part from CATPart, thread Send To Directory command
THD_0 (3) Part Design the standard reference file is not Break the invalid link.
reference file is also sent send the correct set of data.
broken but should be.
and should not.

A CATPart contains a wrong "Track"

container. When using "Send To" on
The name of an invalid
this CATPart, CATIA tries to load an
CATProduct appears when
unwanted Track container which Deletes the unwanted No more invalid CATProducts
TRC_1 (3) DMU Fitting using the "Send To"
points on an invalid CATProduct. Track container. listed in the SendTo.
command on a specific
Due to some earlier implementation
CATPart.
problem, the user was able to create
a Track container in CATParts.

An instance does not seem

to have exactly the same
geometry than the Correct visualization of
reference. In the worst case, Instance positioning is not an Restore the positioning instance.
UAV_0 (2) Product Structure it is not visible at all, and isometric transformation. In worst matrix to the nearest Document needs to be
CATIA is unstable in when case it cannot even be inverted. isometric transformation. updated if it contains 3D
trying to create 2D constraints.
projections or solving 3D
constraints.

The move commands are

Flexibility rules are not fully Sub-assembly containing Sub-assembly has the
not able to change position
respected even if position is the instance is made flexible icon mask, and move
of a particular instance. This
UAV_1 (1) Product Structure overloaded, thus the move correctly flexible (so works as expected.
object's position is not
command does not apply on the overloaded instance is Document needs to be
synchronized with its
good object. kept). updated.
reference.

Unused Links (connectors Internal attribute to determine the

Set the attribute to the Those links are not visible
UAV_2 (3) Product Structure from constraints) are shown constraint pointed by a connector is
correct value. anymore.
in the Send To command. not correctly valuated.

Connection with an
A constraint is not in the right Deletion of the
UAV_3 (1) Product Structure incorrect associated None.
container. constraint.
constraint.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1279

"Hole" in tk_list,tk_compo attribute.

Ghost link in the Send To or Remove aggregation in No more Ghost Link in the
UAV_4 (3) (*) Product Structure Maybe inter-document aggregation
Edit Links command. children list. command.
onto a document that is not found.

Publication node in sub- Reset the publication

Empty links attributes on instance of Publication node is OK in sub-
UAV_5 (2) (*) Product Structure product is broken whereas it instance from its
publication feature. product.
is OK in reference document. reference.

After the use of Call the

The ConnectorsFamily of the flexible
Flexible/Rigid command, the ObjectSpecModeler API
instance is pointing a connector into The model is repair.
flexible assembly can not be CATSpecSmart
UAV_6 (3) Product Structure the reference scope instead of a Assembly needs to be
correctly updated. Product SynchroAllInstances in
connector belonging to the instance updated.
instances are not positioned order to reroute the
scope.
at the correct location. pointing schema.

In some cases, the

command defined contextual Some instances overload the
link has not impact on the definition of the contextual instance.
Reset the overload The model is repair, the
contextual part. The Instead to use the definition of the
UAV_7 (2) Product Structure context for product command Define Contextual
contextual instance context at the Part level as
instance. Link will work again.
associated to the contextual expected, the system is using the
part can not be changed by context overloaded by the instance.
the command.

Attribute which is supposed to store

No visualization of instance
the object owning instance's position Restore the position and
or instance badly positioned.
matrix and reference's shape representation information Correct visualization and
UAV_8 (2) Product Structure (It depends not only of data
representation information is from the original data. position.
corruption case, but also on
overloaded. Two cases: no object at (Reset attribute).
load settings).
all, or too many objects.

A connector has in his list of usages

Ghost link in the Send To or No more Ghost Link in the
UAV_9 (3) Product Structure a link to a connection that is stored Remove the link.
Edit Links command. command.
in a missing document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1280
empty the _component The CATPart document is no
A part document is pointing _component attribute is valuated for
UAV_10 (3) (*) Product Structure attribute. A CATPart has more pointing to some
at useless components. a Part.
no children. useless component.

When working in context, The attribute Shape Connector of

the new from command is the connector is pointing an invalid
not working and/or a copy- document. The pointing document Reset the attribute Shape
UAV_11 (3) (*) Product Structure No Visibility.
paste action will create a does not belong to the Instance- connector.
ghost link on the paste reference model or reference
assembly. representation model.

When opening a product

there is a ! before a
publication. When opening The attribute _TechnoLinkAttr is Reset the attribute No more ! before the
UAV_12 (3) (*) Product Structure
the CATPart containing the wrong. _TechnoLinkAttr. publication.
publication, there is no !
before the publication.

Same publication appears The publication appears only

The publication appears several Remove all identical
UAV_14 (3) Product Structure several times in the one time in the Specification
times in the instance is wrong. publications but one.
Specification tree. tree. publication.

Transfer the
PUBLISHING_Pointage,
The PUBLISHING_Pointage,
PUBLISHING_Etiquette
The publication is broken PUBLISHING_Etiquette and/or
and Publication is no more
UAV_15 (2) (*) Product Structure after the modification of PUBLISHING_PubName
PUBLISHING_PubName broken.
CATPart PartNumber. attributes are affected on
attributes from
Instance instead of reference.
instance level to
reference level.
Instance externals should not be Reset instance externals.
Instance externals are
UAV_16 (2) Product Structure locally set because they take None.
locally set.
settings of their reference.

No shape representation on Shape representation should never The shape representation

UAV_18 (2) (*) a part reference or the be empty and it should not point to points to the own shape of Need to reload the product if
Product Structure shape representation on a the shape of another part. the part. the reference is not visible in
reference points to another the view.
part's shape.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1281
The ContextualLink is
A Contextual Link is always broken, but it can be
Not UpToDate, even after an The object pointed by this updated.
The ContextualLink
UAV_19 (2) (*) Product Structure Update. ContextualLink is not the good one, Document needs to be
pointing is unset.
and cannot be used. updated.

The PRDCONNECTION is corrupted. Compares the

Some of its applicative extensions' PrdConnection attributes
Error pannel on The update operation goes
attributes point to invalid objects to its direct reference, and
PRDCONNECTION displayed on correctly if launched.
UAV_20 (2) Product Structure (e.g. the applicative extension resets the corrupted
when updating the
itself). attributes according to the
assembly.
value held by this
reference.

The number of publication of

Check the integrity of all the part is the same in the
The number of publication of
Publications by comparing assembly count and when
Product Structure the part in the assembly One Publication of the part instance
it to its direct reference, part is opened separately.
UAV_21 (1) (*) count less than the number has no reference in the reference
and resets the corrupted Document needs to be
of publication in the part Part.
list according to the value updated.
when opened separately.
held by this reference.

The design is not up-to-date

and the update command is
The dependencies of a Some publications has the quality of
available in the assembly
UAQ_1 (3) Product Structure publication is not up to date the attribute "_Pointage" set to Quality is set to sp_IN.
workbench.
after an update. sp_NEUTRAL instead sp_IN.
Document needs to be
updated.

Lost inputs when editing a A new input can appear on

UDF_0 (2) (*) Mechanical Modeler User-Feature with an invalid Input. Re-plug of inputs.
UserFeature. the cleaned UserFeature.
A CATProcess document has a track When the user does one of
container in it. The catalog manager the following operation, he
of the track container points to the will not notice that the
non existing "CATDMUFitting" application does not list non
catalog file. So, existent "CATDMUFitting"
file.
When an effected 1. when the user loads the
CATProcess document is CATProcess document and 1. open the cleaned
loaded and when the user he tries to do File -> Send Unset the link to the non CATProcess document
tries to do File -> Send To - To -> Directory, the existing "CATDMUFitting" and do a File -> Send
UFC_1 (2) DMU Fitting > Directory, the user will file.
application lists "DMUFitting" To -> Directory.
see "CATDMUFitting" file file name. 2. load a specific project
name without full path. 2. when the user loads a from the Hub to V5
particular project from the and activate "Create
Hub to V5 and activates PackandGo Data"
"Create PackandGo Data" command.
command, the application
lists the "CATDMUFitting" file
name.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1282

The SheetMetal unfolded Check the timestamp

and folded are not values of the components.
The internal components are not The activity is at Yes
consistent. Some features If one anomaly is
UPD_1 (2) SheetMetal correctly updated, even if the Document needs to be
are missing or some detected, the components
update links are correct. updated.
modifications are not taken are set in NotUpToDate
in account. status.

The product keeps a previous Force the upgrade of the

Product is not correctly The Product is correctly
UPG_0 (3) Product Structure representation for a link (V5R2 link to a supported
visualized. visualized.
model) which is no more supported. representation.

After reordering the

The attribute _Pointage of the Upgrade this attribute by
(*) publications or deleting Part, The publications reference a
UPG_1 (3) Product Structure Publication is built in a relative a new Spec relation
the publications reference a correct geometry.
mode. without relative mode.
wrong geometry.

Bad performance when An URL points a document through Attribute is turned into the Document is opened with
URL_1 (3) (*) Knowledge
opening a document. an invalid attribute type. correct type. correct performance.

The formula is deleted

A formula valuating the name of the No more external links due
(*) Ghost links are visible then rebuilt so that there
VWN_0 (1) Drafting view is built upon a parameter that to the formula associated
through File Send to. are no external
exists in an external document. with a view name.
parameters.

To have the complete list of the return codes detected by the Data Upward Assistant, please refer to The List of the Return Codes Detected by the Data Upward
Assistant.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1283

The List of the Return Codes detected by the

Data Upward Assistant
The Data Upward Assistant capabilities are to check structural data within a CATProduct, CATPart,
CATDrawing, CATAnalysis, CATMaterial, CATProcess, and to upward (modify) the data structure.

You can find here the list of all the return codes that can be detected by the Data Upward Assistant and a
description.

The Data Upward Assistant is useful in the following situations:

● before recovering external data,

● before going into a new CATIA release,
● broken links when opening CATProducts,
● incidents when updating a component (for instance, Sketch update),
● the Edit-Links window appears: some documents are found but they have no references,
● performance problems when opening a CATProduct (because some elements have lost their links).

Priority levels
Priority Level Legend:

(1): Priority One Return Code: Upgrading action may lead to data deletion.

(2): Priority Two Return Code: Upgrading action may lead to data modification (without
deletion).

(3): Priority Three Return Code: Unimportant error. Upgrading action without huge impact on
data.

(*) This symbol means that the rule is not executed on a document coming from a PDM system
(ENOVIAVPM, ENOVIA LCA).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1284

List of the detected return codes

1. ObjectSpecsModeler:

DOC: linked document (container root)

DOC_1 (2): non typed document in a link => Cleaner: Document typed in the link.

DOC_3 (2): missing links => Cleaner: Link counter set up-to-date.

DOC_4 (3): ghost links=> Cleaner: Link counter set up-to-date.

DOC_5 (2): destroyed links => Cleaner: Re-build the missing link.

DOC_6 (3): applicative containers are lost => Cleaner: Empty stream added.

DOC_8 (3): Bad performance when opening a document due to an invalid link counter =>
Cleaner: The link that does not appear to end-user is deleted in table of inter-document links,
the table is just compacted.

DOC_9 (3): Update of a CATPart cannot be completed => Cleaner: Data contained in all
federators are put into one federator and empty federators are deleted.

DOC_11 (3) (*): SendTo on a CATPart shows a link to an useless CATPart => Cleaner:
meaningless repository, containing no Input or Inputs that are no more pointed, is deleted

CAT: Catalog

CAT_0 (2): feature catalog with no name => Cleaner: Deletion of the link to this catalog.

CCL: Component Catalog

CCL_0 (3): description's name and Name keyword are different => Cleaner: The description is
renamed.

CCL_1 (3): same chapter appears with a name in the Specifications tree and with another
name in the definition list => Cleaner: The chapter is renamed.

CCL_2 (3) (*): When a chapter's keyword is deleted, some internal data remain in
descriptions => Cleaner: Useless internal data are removed.

CCL_4 (3): A description's keyword value may be unlinked with its chapter's
keyword => Cleaner: The keyword value is re-linked with its keyword.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1285

CCL_5 (2): Chapters can not be viewed in the Catalog Editor => Cleaner: Missing description
pointing to the chapter is created under the root chaper.

EXT: External Link

EXT_0 (3) (*): A link still exists to a pointing document due to unused extensions feature =>
Cleaner: Deletion of the link, the document needs to be updated.

EXT_2 (3) (*): Ghost links when opening a CATProduct => Cleaner: The reference of an
extension is not in the same document that the reference of its base feature (probably after a
replace).

HIE: Hierarchy

HIE_3 (3): A product instance has too many sub-products => Cleaner: Deletion of the over
sub-products and product instance is synchronized.

HIE_5 (3): A change of reference is made during save as operation when a private component
cannot find its reference and error DOC_3 may reappears => Cleaner: Error DOC_3 is fixed
completely by first pass of CATDUA.

HIE_6 (1): Impossible to update the model: some assembly data (constraints) are invalid. =>
Cleaner: Invalid connection deletion.

2. Product Structure:

BRK: Broken Object

BRK_0 (1) (*): broken objects not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of objects.

LIF: Product Lifecycle

LIF_2 (3) (*): objects not reachable starting from root-product => Cleaner: Deletion of
objects.

LIF_4 (3) (*): non-destroyed objects in CATProdCont container => Cleaner: Deletion of
objects.

LIF_7 (3) (*): non-destroyed connections in CATProdCont container => Cleaner: Deletion of
objects.

LIF_8 (3) (*): non-destroyed connectors in CATProdCont container => Cleaner: Deletion of
objects.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1286
LIF_9 (3): non-destroyed product bag reps in CATProdCont container => Cleaner: Deletion of
objects.

LIF_12 (3) (*): Ghost Link on another document => Cleaner: Unset _ToProxy attribute.

LIF_13 (1) (*): A Ghost Link appears in SendTo command => Cleaner: Delete an internal
object (proxy) whith an invalid link to a document.

AGG: Aggregation

AGG_1 (1): aggregated object does not know its aggregating object => Cleaner: deletion
of the aggregation.

AGG_3 (2): A link Father-Son between an instance and the product is deleted, which
disables the destruction of the instance => Cleaner: Use the Spec service
CATSpecSetFather to reset the link.

AGG_4 (1) : At flexibilisation of product, a Constraint is broken. Before flexibilisation, all was
OK. => Cleaner: Connector is put again on right attribute of Product, and instanciated on all
referencing documents.

ATT: Rule Attribute

ATT_2 (3): unused attribute _UpdateError => Cleaner: Deletion of attribute.

ATT_3 (1): unused attribute (activrep) valuated => Cleaner: Unset of the attributes.

ATT_4 (2): update stamp incorrect on position attribute => Cleaner: Update of UpdateStamp.

UAQ: Product structure - Unexpected Attribute Quality

UAQ_1 (3): Quality on publication instance different from the publication startup => Cleaner:
Change quality from neutral to in.

UAV: Product structure - Unexpected Attribute Value

UAV_0 (2): illegal position attribute => Cleaner: Position is set to identity.

UAV_1 (1): incorrect overloading for position attribute => Cleaner: Switch in flexible products.

UAV_2 (3): component's list with blank => Cleaner: Deletion of blanks.

UAV_3 (1): A constraint is not in the right container => Cleaner: deletion of the
constraint.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1287

UAV_4 (3) (*): invalid object pointed by a connector => Cleaner: Link set correctly.

UAV_5 (2) (*): connection instance and reference point different connectors (by publication)
=> Cleaner: Connection synchronized.

UAV_6 (3): invalid connector pointed by a connection => Cleaner: Connection synchronized.

UAV_7 (2): instance of Product with overloaded contextuality => Cleaner: Product instance
synchronized.

UAV_8 (2): a Product with many representations (no Visualization when opening) => Cleaner:
Product instance synchronized.

UAV_9 (3): connector with incorrect connections => Cleaner: incorrect connections deleted.

UAV_10 (3) (*): A part document is pointing at useless components => Cleaner: empty the
_component attribute.

UAV_11 (3) (*): The attribute Shape Connector of the connector is pointing an invalid
document => Cleaner: Reset the attribute Shape connector.

UAV_12 (3) (*): The attribute _TechnoLinkAttr is wrong => Cleaner: Reset the attribute
_TechnoLinkAttr.

UAV_14 (3): Same publication appears several times in the Specification tree => Cleaner:
Remove all identical publications but one.

UAV_15 (2) (*): The PUBLISHING_Pointage, PUBLISHING_Etiquette and/or

PUBLISHING_PubName attributes, are affected on Instance instead of reference =>
Cleaner: Transfer the PUBLISHING_Pointage, PUBLISHING_Etiquette and
PUBLISHING_PubName attributes from instance level to reference level.

UAV_16 (2): Instance externals are locally set => Cleaner: Reset instance externals.

UAV_18 (2) (*): No shape representation on a part reference or the shape representation on a
reference points to another part's shape => Cleaner: The shape representation points to the
own shape of the part.

UAV_19 (2) (*): A Contextual Link is always Not UpToDate, even after an Update => Cleaner:
The ContextualLink pointing is unset.

UAV_20 (2): Error pannel on PRDCONNECTION displayed when updating the assembly =>
Cleaner: Compares the PrdConnection attributes to its direct reference, and resets the
corrupted attributes according to the value held by this reference.

UAV_21 (1) (*): The number of publication of the part in the assembly count less than the
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1288
number of publication in the part when opened separately => Cleaner: resets the corrupted list
of publication according to the value held by this reference.

UPG: Upgrade

UPG_0 (3): invalid multi-representation (V5R2 model) => Cleaner: Upgrade of multi-
representation.

UPG_1 (3) (*): After reordering the publications or deleting Part, the publications reference a
wrong geometry => Cleaner: Upgrade this attribute by a new Spec relation without relative
mode.

DOC: Linked Document (container root)

DOC_7 (2) (*): no save link to a sub-product => Cleaner: Link switch as a save-link.

SYN: Synchronization

SYN_1 (3): Multi-Instantiation of one reference by synchronization. => Cleaner: deletion of

the feature.

SYN_2 (1): The PRDBAGREP attribute of the ASMPRODUCT does not reference the
PRDBAGREP of the reference ASMPRODUCT. => Cleaner: reset the BagRepsList attribute of the
ASMPRODUCT.

HIE: Hierarchy

HIE_4 (1) (*): An internal object (connector) has an inconsistent state and retains an instance-
reference link to a useless document => Cleaner: Remove the offending connector.

NUM: Numbering

NUM_0 (3) (*): A warning pop-up is displayed when opening a CATProduct => Cleaner:
Remove the phantom numbering.

3. Mechanical Modeler

BST: BackUp Start Up

BST_1 (3): BackUp StartUp not declared on CAA mechanical feature => Cleaner: BackUp
StartUp is declared.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1289
LIF: Product Lifecycle

LIF_1 (1): The size of the CATPart is abnormally huge comparatively to the number of
elements and unused elements (Geometrical feature) are present => Cleaner: Deletion of
unused elements, the Part is the same but smaller.

LIF_3 (3): No visibility except the size of the CATProduct document (constraints deletion
cases) => cleaner: Deletion of unused elements; the document is the same but smaller.

LIF_5 (3) (*): non-referenced elements in the container CATSelSetsCont => Cleaner: Deletion
of elements.

LIF_10 (3) (*): not pointed or useless proxy objects => Cleaner: Deletion of the useless proxy
objects.

LIF_11 (3) (*): internal object unused in applicative container => Cleaner: Deletion of the
useless objects.

MMR: Mechanical Modeler

MMR_0 (1): corruption of the 3 reference planes => Cleaner: Restore valid reference planes.

MMR_1 (2): ShapeRep not pointed by a Product => Cleaner: Reset link.

MMR_2 (2): No Maintool in the Part => Cleaner: Creation of a default Maintool.

MMV:

MMV_1 (3): Invalid graphic property on the part => Cleaner : Deletion of the invalid property.

MMV_2 (3): Invalid graphic property remain in the model even after removal => Cleaner :
Restore correctly the dress-up properties.

MMV_3 (3): Wrong attribute values were streamed on the PartBody of a CATPart created on
V5R10 level => Cleaner: Erase the wrong attribute names.

MGN: Mechanical Generic Naming (topology)

MGN_0 (2): more than one topological result => Cleaner: Deletion of over results.

MGN_3 (2): invalid update state on a feature => Cleaner: Restore a valid state.

MGN_4 (3): the generic naming of the BRep features duplicates data => Cleaner: Remove the
duplicated data.

MGN_5 (3): Useless synchronization data remain on a feature => Cleaner: Remove the
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1290
useless synchronization data.

MGN_6 (1): Size of a CATPart on disk is abnormally huge => Cleaner: Remove useless
Mechanical modeler data.

MGN_7 (2) : Some cells of Datum Feature are not selectionnable => Cleaner: Add a namming
to the cells

MTR: Mechanical Tools

MTR_0 (2): tool's result not properly plugged => Cleaner: Result plugged.

MTR_1 (3) (*): Body's reference is lost => Cleaner: Reference is set to Start-Up.

MTR_2 (2): Shape Features not properly plugged => Cleaner: Re-plug of the Shape Feature.

MTR_3 (3): invalid valuation of VisuOnOff attribute => Cleaner: Reset attribute.

MFT: Shape Features Tools

MFT_0 (2): active/inactive status mismatched regardless to attribute structure => Cleaner:
Reset attribute.

MFT_1 (1): inactive Feature storing the result of the previous feature => Cleaner: No more
result in the feature.

MFT_2 (1): result of a shape feature valuated with result of the previous active shape feature
=> Cleaner: Result regenerated.

MFT_3 (1): inactive Shape Feature does not have its attribute saved or it is unset => Cleaner:
Attribute regenerated and/or re-evaluated.

GST: Generative Surface Tool

GST_0 (2): the user opens a CATPart with an unidentified object (broken icon) called
RollingOffset; startup lost for a GSMRolingOffset => Cleaner: Re-plug the startup.

GSD: Generative Shape Design

GSD_0 (3): unused aggregated feature => Cleaner: Deletion of these useless features.

GSD_1 (1): reference planes are set as datum or independent spec => Cleaner: Correction of
the Visu Graph attribute, aggregation of of the moved reference plane in current OpenBody and
creation of a new reference plane.

CTX: Context
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1291

CTX_1 (3) (*): multi-contextuality for a Part => Cleaner: Deletion of over contexts.

CST: Constraints

CST_1 (2): non-typed constraint => Cleaner: The constraint is typed.

CST_2 (2): attributes quality mismatched => Cleaner: Quality modification.

CST_3 (1): not valuated mandatory attributes on constraints => Cleaner: Deletion of
constraints.

CST_4 (2) (*): Ghost Link on a CATDrawing document due to an invalid "blocs" attribute of a
constraint => Cleaner: Valuate the "blocs" attributes of the constraint.

UDF: User Feature

UDF_0 (2) (*): user-feature with an invalid input => Cleaner: Re-plug of inputs.

4. Assembly:

ASD: Assembly Design (constraints)

ASD_0 (1): the start up of constraint is not found. => Cleaner: Load the AsmCst.feat catalog.

ASD_1 (1): isolated constraint => Cleaner: Deletion of constraints.

ASD_2 (1): mismatched storage of constraint => Cleaner: Deletion of constraints.

ASD_3 (2): The type of a constraint is lost => Cleaner: Restore the type of the
constraint.

ASD_4 (2): attributes quality mismatched => Cleaner: Modification of the quality.

ASD_5 (1): inconsistency between the feature catalog in V5R12 GA and the catalog in later
versions or service packs => Cleaner: Corrupted Fix Together is deleted and replaced by a new
Fix Together.

ASD_6 (1): a Fix Together without parent => Cleaner: Corrupted Fix Together is deleted.

ASD_7 (2): An attribute of a constraint contains a wrong value => Cleaner: Set the
right value to the attribute of the constraint.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1292

ASD_8 (3): Activity of the FixTogether is not displayed in F(x) => Cleaner: Valuate the
Activity parameter of the FixTogether.

ASD_9 (3): Impossible to reorder constraints, due to old and no more used sets => Cleaner:
Delete of the old sets and the set of constraints that are not used anymore.

ASD_10 (2): Some constraints can be seen in the 3D window, but they do not appear in the
specifications tree => Cleaner: Aggregation problem: the CONNECTION does not know the
ConstraintASM, but the ConstraintASM knows that the CONNECTION is its parent.

AFI: Assembly Feature

AFI_1 (3): assembly feature pointing wrong inputs => Cleaner: Correction of wrong links
"assembly feature->input".

AFI_2 (2) (*): An instance of a Reuse Pattern feature was pointing into a wrong
document, probably because of a problem during feature synchronization =>
Cleaner: Unset the pointing attribute on the instance.

AFI_3 (3) (*): Ghost links appear in File/SendTo command from the CATProduct => Cleaner:
Plug the instance to the right reference and Reset/Synchronize it.

5. Analysis:

SAF: Features (Spec view)

SAF_2 (2): feature has no explicit image => Cleaner: Creation of an explicit image.

SAF_3 (1): feature contains invalid explicit data => Cleaner: Deletion of this data.

SAF_5 (2): nodes with wrong activity status => Cleaner: Correction of the status.

SAF_4 (2): Missing links between mesh and physical data attach on mesh => Cleaner:
Creation of the appropriate links.

6. Sketcher:

SCS: Sketcher Constraint

SCS_0 (2): Sketch solving result is not stable. Geometries can move when the user edits a sketch =>
Cleaner: Add a missing "Help" parameter to sketcher constraint.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1293

SKT: Sketcher

SKT_0 (1): sketch with no father => Cleaner: Deletion of Sketch.

SKT_24 (3): Fsur of the _FtrList must be referenced => Cleaner: Deletion of the Fsur.

SKT_25 (3): mismatched version on sketch => Cleaner: Change version.

SKT_26 (2): Ghost Link window when opening a CATPart => Cleaner: Re-plug the geometry
with ghost links on their details/dittos in the CATDrawing to their startups in current CATPart
document.

SMG: SolveManager (Sketch object)

SMG_4 (2): ImportedGeom attribute size must be the same as the number of operators =>
Cleaner: Resize list.

SMG_5 (2): ImportedGeom attribute with no operator => Cleaner: Reevaluation of attribute.

SMG_6 (2): mismatched ImportedGeometry attribute => Cleaner: Devaluation of attribute.

SMG_9 (2): invalid number of constraints => Cleaner: Re-evaluation of attribute.

SMG_16 (2): non-impacted Solve Manager at update => Cleaner: Set constraint attribute to
neutral.

SMG_17 (2): invalid OutputGeoms attribute => Cleaner: Revaluation of attribute.

IGS: Imported Geometrical Set

IGS_0 (3): invalid phantom operator => Cleaner: Deletion of the operator.

SKS: Sketch Support

SKS_0 (2): cannot use sketch absolute or a sub-element of a sketch absolute axis to create a
feature => Cleaner: CATDUA puts absolute axis feature out of date.

SKS_1 (2): Update cycle not detected => Cleaner: Change structure of feature to detect cycle.

CRV: Curve

CRV_0 (2): end points not found on the curve => Cleaner: Add limit points.

CRV_1 (3): Update result is not right because update propagation is wrong. => Cleaner:
Attributes of several features are set to sp_NEUTRAL instead of sp_IN.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1294

7. Material:

MAT: Material

MAT_1 (1): more than one material container in a Part => Cleaner: Deletion of over
containers.

MAT_2 (3): orphans elements in the material container => Cleaner: Deletion of orphans.

MAT_3 (2): wrong visualization of a material => Cleaner: Reapply of material. Note that this
error could sometimes be impossible to repair if the material can not be retrieved (for example,
if the material is located in an inaccessible material catalog).

MAT_4 (3): invalid material link => Cleaner: Deletion of link.

MAT_5 (2): material parameter contains wrong data => Cleaner: Modify the material
parameter.

MAT_6 (2): Ghost link on a material => Cleaner: Modify the link to a correct material link.

MAT_7 (3) (*): A blank line is displayed in the window of the "Send/To" command (ghost link)
=> Cleaner: A material is located in a wrong container (not the material container). This can
lead to ghost links. This material is unused and should be destroyed.

8. Drafting:

DAS: Drafting Axis System

DAS_0 (1) (*): Unrelated document can be pointed by the drawing document (it appears using
Send To). => Cleaner: An object managing view axis origin has an invalid link to a 3D
document.

DBA:

DBA_0 (2) (*): bad link on a default feature => Cleaner: Deletion of the link.

DDU: Drafting Dress-up

DDU_0 (2): Useless data (connector, 3D feature) is erroneously referencing another

document (CATPart) => Cleaner: Remove this data and thus its links pointing other
documents.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1295

DDU_1 (2) (*): Open a Drafting document displays a panel with an invalid link to another
drawing => Cleaner: Remove the invalid links.

DDU_2 (1) (*): Ghost link on a CATDrawing document => Cleaner: Deletion of the axis lines,
center lines or thread that are directly under the DrwCont container.

DOB: Drafting Operator Breakout

DOB_0 (1) (*) : A CATDrawing containing isolated views has still some links to 3D parts/product. This
is detected when using File/SendTo => Cleaner: Deletion of the link.

DOP: Drafting Operator Projection

DOP_0 (1) (*) : A CATDrawing containing isolated views still has some links to 3D
parts/product. This is detected when using File/SendTo => Cleaner: Deletion of the link.

DOS: Drafting Operator Section

DOS_0 (1) (*): Unrelated document can be pointed by the drawing document (it appears using
Send To). => Cleaner: A section operator has an invalid link.

DOS_1 (1) (*): A section operator is not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of the object.

GME: Generative Modeler

GME_0 (1) (*): Unrelated document can be pointed by the drawing document (it appears using Send
To). => Cleaner: Deletion of the object.

GME_1 (1) (*): Unrelated document can be pointed by the drawing document (it appears using Send
To). => Cleaner: Deletion of the invalid link.

DRW: Drawing

DRW_0 (1) (*): more than one drawing in the document => Cleaner: Deletion of unused
drawings.

DRW_1 (1) (*): Ghost links might be visible in a part document via edit links, or the size of a
Part document might be strangely big => Cleaner: A DrwDrawing with external links is inside
the CATPrtCont. It is not visible in the specstree.

DWE: Generative Drafting

DWE_0 (1): An object, managing links between the views and 3D document, points
an unrelated document => Cleaner: Deletion of the useless object.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1296

DWS: Drawing Sheet

DWS_0 (2): views not well organized in a sheet => Cleaner: Re-ordinate views.

DWS_1 (1) (*): corrupted sheet => Cleaner: Deletion of sheet.

DWV: Drawing View

DWV_0 (1) (*): corrupted view (not well aggregated) => Cleaner: Deletion of the view.

DWV_1 (2): a View is linked with another Drawing => Cleaner: Deletion of the link.

DWV_2 (2) (*): A warning pop up is displayed when opening a CATProduct => Cleaner: unplug
a View sub-components with ghost links from their "ghost" reference and re-plug them to their
startups in current document.

DWV_3 (3): The local transformations of geometries in views (like translations, scaling,
rotations, offset) do not work, usually when some 2D Component instances have been exploded
or exposed in the CATDrawing. => Cleaner: The geometrical result of the axis component of a
view has been lost.

DWV_4 (3): The sketch support is in the no-show space => Cleaner: The sketch support is
put in the show-space and its axis elements are put in the no-show space.

DWV_5 (3) (*): Ghost links appear in File/SendTo command from a CATDrawing => Cleaner:
Remove the invalid link.

DVM: Drawing View MakeUp

DVM_0 (2): unused View MakeUp => Cleaner: Deletion of View MakeUp.

DWR: Drawing Relation

DWR_0 (3): incoherent relation has been detected => Cleaner: Deletion of the useless
DrwRelation.

DWT: Drawing Pattern

DWT_1 (3): not aggregated pattern has been detected => Cleaner: Deletion of the pattern.

GIE: Generated Item

GIE_0 (2): unused GenItem => Cleaner: Deletion of GenItem.

DAF: Drawing Area Fill

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1297

DAF_0 (3): Area Fill without profile => Cleaner: Deletion of area.

DAF_1 (3) (*): Area Fill not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of area.

DAF_2 (3) (*): Area Fill with a missing curve => Cleaner: Deletion of area.

DAF_3 (3): Area Fill without pattern => Cleaner: Apply default pattern.

DAF_4 (1): A document contains AreaFills with ghost links to other documents => Cleaner:
Delete these AreaFills.

HLV: HLr View

HLV_0 (1) (*): A generative view is not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of the object.

HLV_1 (1) (*): The drawing document size can be out of propotion regarding the useful data
contained inside => Cleaner: Deletion of the non aggregated generative view.

STD: Standards

STD_0 (2): too many standards in the document => Cleaner: Deletion of unused standards.

STD_1 (2): Standard not synchronized with the active sheet => Cleaner: Re-synchronization
of standards.

DET: Drawing Detail (2D component)

DET_0 (3) (*): 2D Component not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of component.

DET_1 (3) (*): 2D Component not typed through interface => Cleaner: Deletion of component.

DET_2 (2) (*): 2D Component instance has its reference outside its document => Cleaner: 2D
component reference is created inside the same document and replace the wrong one.

DET_3 (1): 2D Component instance has too big or too small scale => Cleaner: Deletion of the
scale.

DET_4 (2) (*): redundant local reference exists in the model => Cleaner: Instances of the
redundant local reference are redirected to the good one and the redundant local reference is
deleted.

DET_6 (1): Unpredictable behavior when using a drafting detail/ditto => Cleaner: invalid 2D
component instance is deleted.

DET_7 (2) (*): Open a CATDrawing displays a panel with an invalid link => Cleaner: unplugg
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1298
the View sub-components with ghost links from their "ghost" reference and replug them to their
startups in current document.

OLE: OLE Object

OLE_0 (2) (*): OLE object pointing at an invalid drawing => Cleaner: the OLE object is
replaced by a new one.

DWG: Generative Dimension

DWG_0 (1): object managing dimension generation no more used => Cleaner: Deletion of
GenDim.

DWG_1 (3): object managing dimension generation not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of
GenDim.

DWC: Callout

DWC_1 (3): Callout not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of Callout.

DWA: Projected Axis

DWA_1 (3): object manufacturing cut-views not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of Projected
Axis.

DWH: Generative pattern

DWH_1 (3): generative pattern not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of Generative pattern.

DWP: Pattern Mapping Table

DWP_0 (3): pointer for pattern on 3D no more used => Cleaner: Deletion of object.

DWP_1 (1): pointer for pattern on 3D not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of object.

DAO:

DAO_0 (3) (*): Associativity pointing an external link with the document => Cleaner: Deletion
of Associativity.

DAO_1 (3) (*): Ghost Link due to useless drafting data referencing another document =>
Cleaner: Deletion of useless data and its link.

PIC: Drawing Picture

PIC_0 (3): Non aggregated Picture => Cleaner: Deletion of the picture.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1299

VWN: VieWName

VWN_0 (1) (*) : Ghost links are visible through File Send to => Cleaner: The formula is deleted then
rebuilt so that there are no external parameters.

9. Annotation:

DST: Simple Text

DST_0 (1): invalid simple text => Cleaner: Deletion of the text.

DST_1 (1) (*) : A ghost link appears in old drawing containing a section view. => Cleaner:
Removes the link but keeps the text as it was.

DCR: Connector

DCR_0 (2): problem on connector => Cleaner: Retrieve section specification in related view.

DCR_1 (3) (*): obsolete internal element for associativity => Cleaner: Deletion of object.

DCR_2 (1): Broken dimension or ghost link on a CATPart in Send To command => Cleaner:
Information of associative dress-up (dimension, annotation, constraint,...) for assembly
positioning has been lost.

DCR_3 (1): A link to a 3D connector has not been deleted after isolate => Cleaner: Deletion of
each 3D connector which can be found in an interactive view.

DCR_4 (3): Unnecessary big drawing document => Cleaner: Deletion of useless element.

DCR_5 (1) (*): The "Send to" command shows that a drawing is linked to another drawing =>
Cleaner: Deletion of this link.

DCS: Drafting Constraint

DCS_1 (2): Constraints, which are not correctly aggregated, are not taken into account =>
Cleaner: Change the place where the constraints are aggregated.

DCT: Container

DCT_0 (1): Data model with the V4 format became useless but are nevertheless still stored
=> Cleaner: Delete the useless data.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1300

DCT_1 (2): Bad display of fonts, diameter symbol or no visualization of datum feature =>
Cleaner: Create a missing feature for the annotations' visualization.

DCT_2 (1) (*): Ghost links appear in Send to command due to non aggregated feature =>
Cleaner: Delete the non aggregated feature

DDI: Dimension

DDI_0 (2): invalid dimension pointing data => Cleaner: Deletion of the dimension.

DDI_1 (1) (*): dimensions pointing in another document => Cleaner: Deletion of the
dimension.

DDI_2 (1) (*): constraint data corrupted => Cleaner: Deletion of the dimension.

DDI_3 (3): non aggregated dimension => Cleaner: Deletion of the dimension.

DDI_4 (2): The dimension display does not match dimension properties => Cleaner:
Update dimension properties.

DDI_5 (1): The number of dimension found by search command is higher than the number of
dimension seen by the user => Cleaner: Deletion of each dimension which is not visualized in
the View.

DAC: Drawing Area cotation

DAC_0 (1) (*): invalid dimension line => Cleaner: Deletion of the dimension.

DAC_1 (1): The number of graphical dimensions found by search command is higher than the
number of graphical dimensions seen by the user => Cleaner: Deletion of each graphical
dimension which is not visualized in the view

DCH:

DCH_0 (1): Invalid 3D-Connector referred in constraint => Cleaner: Deletion of the constraint.

DCH_1 (2): Invalid elements on a constraint => Cleaner: Constraint is fixed.

DCH_2 (2) (*): Send to command shows that an isolated view is still linked to its part =>
Cleaner: Deletion of each hybrid constraints which can be found in an interactive view.

DTE:

DTE_0 (3): internal drafting data is erroneously referencing another document => Cleaner:
Deletion of the link.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1301

10. 3D Functional Tolerancing & Annotation:

FTA: Functional Tolerancing & Annotation

FTA_1 (1) (*): Some features in TTRS (Technologically and Topologically Related
Surface) container are not valid; the TTRS features become invalid because their StartUp has
been removed from the container => Cleaner: Deletion of the invalid TTRS features.

FTA_2 (3): The RGE (Reference Geometrical Elements) feature is not used by any 3D
annotations; unused elements (RGE) are present => Cleaner: Deletion of the unused RGE
features.

FTA_3 (3): The TTRS feature is not used by any 3D annotations; unused elements (TTRS) are
present => Cleaner: Deletion of the unused TTRS features.

FTA_4 (3): Deleting FTA annotations do not destroy all Drafting internal entities. => Cleaner:
Delete all Drafting annotations which are not pointed by FTA one.

11. SheetMetal:

UPD: Update

UPD_1 (2): invalid update stamp => Cleaner: Set update to false.

SHM: SheetMetal

SHM_0 (2): element with no activity or no value => Cleaner: Activity is fixed.

SHM_1 (2): internal BRep Edges features were pointed but not aggregated => Cleaner:
Aggregate the involved BRep Edge features.

12. Manufacturing:

MFG: Manufacturing

MFG_0 (1): Machining Feature not referenced by an Activity; unused machining feature is not
deleted (activities cases) => Cleaner: Deletion of the unused Machining Feature.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1302
MFG_1 (1): Pattern Definition not referenced by a Pattern Usage; unused pattern definition is
not deleted (pattern cases) => Cleaner: Deletion of the unused Pattern Definition.

MFG_2 (2): Manufacturing Geometry referencing a duplicated body; the body referenced by a
manufacturing geometry in SMART NC mode is duplicated => Cleaner: Deletion of duplicated
body.

MFG_3 (1): Toolpath not referenced by an Activity => Cleaner: Deletion of the unused
Toolpath.

13. Knowledge:

KWE: Knowledge

KWE_1 (1): knowledge object not aggregated; bad performance when opening a document
and an URL points a document through an invalid attribute type => Cleaner: Deletion of the
Attribute. If the parameter is pointed by a relation, add object in parameter set; if the object is
a relation, add it in the relation set).

KWE_2 (1): Knowledge Relation in a CATPrtCont points to other documents => Cleaner: The
relation is destroyed.

KWE_3 (2): The output value of a relation is not consistent. After forcing relation evaluation,
its value changes => Cleaner: The evaluation is forced.

KWE_4 (2): A Knowledge Check is broken. "!" information is displayed and an error in the
stream involves bad pointing in the Check attributes => Cleaner: The links are restored
correctly.

KWE_5 (2): A parameter external Reference is synchronized but with a wrong value =>
Cleaner: the value is updated with the good one.

URL_1 (3) (*): Bad performance when opening a document and an URL points a document
through an invalid attribute type => Attribute is turned into the correct type.

14. Kinematics:

JNT: Joint

JNT_1 (1): One or more kinematics joint axis are corrupted => Cleaner: Deletion of corrupted
joint.

JNT_2 (1): One or more geometries pointed by a kinematics joint are corrupted => Cleaner:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1303
Deletion of the corrupted joint.

JNT_3 (1): Several Mechanism containers exist in the same CATProduct document =>
Cleaner: Deletion of all Mechanism containers except the first non-empty one.

JNT_4 (2): Constraints associated to the joints of a mechanism are broken => Cleaner:
replace an incorrect pointed geometric element by a correct one.

JNT_5 (2): A "Point on Curve" Joint simulation is not correct => Cleaner: Internal frames of
the joint are updated.

15. Generic Naming:

GNL: Generic Naming Link

GNL_1 (3) (*): BRep feature is pointing at a ghost document => Cleaner: Deletion of link.

GNL_3 (3) (*): BrpRsur, BrpWire, ... are not aggregated => Cleaner: Deletion of BrpRsur,
BrpWire,...

16. New Topological Objects:

FGM: Fat Geometry

FGM_1 (3): the size of the CATPart is abnormally huge comparatively to the number of
elements. Some vertices have unnecessary geometric data (linked curves / surfaces and some
surfaces are over defined (unnecessarily extrapolated) => Cleaner: Removing of unnecessary
geometric data, the Part is the same but smaller.

If you update the CATPart, this error may re-appear again (after the cleaning rule).

17. SpaceAnalysis:

LIF: Product Lifecycle

LIF_6 (1) (*): Dimension which are CATSpecObject_Broken => Cleaner: Deletion of the
dimension and measure.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1304

18. Part Design:

BOL: Boolean

BOL_0 (2): Visualization problems due to Boolean between Solid body (old) and hybrid body (new)
=> Cleaner: Invalid operand body will be moved under the part.

CPF: Part Design Feature

CPF_0 (3): Size of a CATPart abnormally huge comparatively to the number of elements =>
Cleaner: Delete the Unreferenced BREP features.

DRF: Draft

DRF_0 (3): Faces to draft, fix aggregation of Brep Features. => Cleaner: remove Rsur
Features from CGMBody to PartBody.

DRF_1 (3): The default pulling direction is not compatible in pull dir object and vector. =>
Cleaner: The default pulling direction in object and vector is reset.

DVB: Default Value Bags

DVB_0 (3): An Applicative Design Table can not be deleted => Cleaner: A Design table link found
even when no feature was using it.

FIL: Fillet

FIL_0 (2): During the edition of a fillet, an error "Internal error in mechanical modeler" is flashed.
=> Cleaner: Move the PointOnEdge (FilletRadius object containing it) to appropriate the ribbon.

THD: Thread

THD_0 (3): A Link between a design table and the standard reference file is not broken =>
Cleaner: break the link.

MIR: Mirror

MIR_0(2): One or more than one reference elements kept in Generative Tool for
mirroring is lost => Cleaner: The reference elements kept in Generative Tool are
created again.

PAT: Pattern

PAT_0 (1): Document can not be updated => Cleaner: Redundant instances in GenerTool of
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1305
User Pattern are deleted.

19. PlantShipModeler:

BST: Backup StartUp

BST_0 (3): The Backup StartUp is not declared on Psp Product => Cleaner: The Backup
StartUp is declared.

BDR:

BDR_0 (3): Invalid version of 2D/3D modeling => Cleaner: Upgrade will eliminate direct
pointing to schematic functions.

CDC: Cross Document Connection

CDC_0 (1): The user will be prompt with error window if an invalid version of cross document
connections exists => Cleaner: Use publication to support cross document connections.

SCH: Schematic

SCH_0 (3): Mismatched update state on an extension => Cleaner: Update state set to TRUE.

20. V4 V5 Interoperability:

FS4:

FS4_1 (3): Some elements should not be in the container => Cleaner: Deletion of Unwanted
Extension.

21. Electrical:

EHI: Electrical Harness Installation

EHI_1(3): Flexible curve attributes are not correctly valuated => Cleaner: Set the
flexible curve attributes to correct value.

EHI_2 (2): The display of the name of electrical harness features is given by
Reference Designator attribute value and is not NLS compatible => Cleaner: unset
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1306

the Reference Designator attribute value for Branch and Bundle Segments.

EHI_3 (2) (*): Electrical knowledge formula is not visible => Cleaner: all electrical formulas
under the geometrical bundle are recreated correctly with the correct formulas.

EHI_4 (1): Bundle segments lead to twisted configuration if minimum bend radius is smaller
than the diameter => Cleaner: The Rib geometrical feature does not handle in standard.

EDL: Electrical Device Librarian

EDL_1 (3): Electrical part document is modified during the instantiation from catalog =>
Cleaner: Update the electrical features in the part.

22. DMU Fitting

UFC: Unresolved Fitting Catalog

UFC_1 (2): An invalid link on DMU Fitting file appears when using the "Send To" command on a
specific CATProcess => Cleaner: deletes the unwanted "Track" container.

SHC: Shuttle Container

SHC_1 (3): Performance issue when loading a CATPart => Cleaner: deletes an unwanted "Shuttle"
container.

TRC: Track Container

TRC_1 (3): The name of an invalid CATProduct appears when using the "Send To" command on a
specific CATPart => Cleaner: deletes an unwanted "Track" container.

23. Robotics

IGP: IGriP

IGP_1 (1): Not aggregated TagConnectors created on constraint definition are deleted by CATDUA
when processing LIF_8 error => Cleaner: Aggregate the floating TagConnectors with the TagGroup it's
logical parent.

24. Mold Design

TFC: Tooling Feature Corruption

TFC_0 (2): When opening only a sub-product of a Tooling Assembly some products that are
not part of the loaded sub-product are also loaded => Cleaner: The pointing attribute is
resetted on the first rank instance of the product.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1307
TFC_1 (2): A product takes a very long time to be closed => Cleaner: Suppress duplicated
links.

TFC_2 (2): When opening only a sub-product of a Tooling Assembly some products that are
not part of the loaded sub-product are also loaded => Cleaner: Resets to 0 all the attributes of
the useless extensions (their complete removal is not possible).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1308

Conferencing

Initializing a Conference Infrastructure

Initializing a Conference on UNIX using the Backbone Driver As Backb

one Manager, launch the backbone daemon on node1: "CATSysDemon -dm domain.lst -timeout 3000".
Launch the Backbone daemon on both node2 and node3 as follows: "export
CATBBDomainManager=node1 CATSysDemon -timeout 3000". Once initialized, all users must select
the Backbone driver option using: Tools-> Options -> General -> General. In the Conferencing area,
check the Backbone option.

Initializing a Conference on Windows using the Backbone Driver As Backbone Manager, launch the backbone
daemon on node1: "CATSysDemon -dm domain.lst -timeout 3000". Launch the Backbone daemon on
both node2 and node3 as follows: "export CATBBDomainManager=node1 CATSysDemon -timeout
3000". Once initialized, all users must select the Backbone driver option using: Tools-> Options ->
General -> General. In the Conferencing area, check the Backbone option.

Initializing a Conference on Windows using the NetMeeting Driver All users must select the NetMeeting
driver option using: Tools-> Options-> General -> General. In the Conferencing area, check the
NetMeeting option.

Organizing a Conference

Launching a Conference as Host In the menu bar, select the Tools->Conferencing->Host

Joining a Conference as Guest In the menu bar, select the Tools->Conferencing->Guest

Working in a Conference

Leading the Visual Conference

Sharing Documents

Transferring Files

Sending Messages to other Conference Participants

Customizing Conference Options

Consulting Conference History

Leaving a Conference
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1309

Initializing a Conference on UNIX using the

Backbone Driver

This scenario describes how to initialize a conference on UNIX using the Backbone driver.

Conferencing enables people who are geographically separated to dialog and work together as if they
were virtually in the same room. Audio, video or chat tools enable the conference members to dialog while
whiteboard or any other application sharing capabilities enable them to share documents or even
applications. Usually, one member has a leading role, he is named the host or the master member.

The conferencing functionality is available on both the Windows and UNIX platforms.

Backbone is a Dassault Systèmes component which enables the creation of information channels between
various applications running on various machines.

Backbone must be implemented on each computer that will be used by eventual conference members and
on a reference server.

Applications do not communicate directly but through local servers (CATSysDemon servers), which
communicate among themselves via a Domain Manager (which is itself CATSysDemon server)

As Backbone Manager, you must define the Domain that will enable the CATSysDemon servers to
communicate with one another.

1. Select a machine which will be the Domain Manager (Backbone Manager), e.g. node1.

2. Create a file containing the list of machines that will be allowed to connect to the Domain, e.g.

domain.lst containing the following lines:

node2
node3
node4
node5

3. Launch the CATSysDemon command with the above list of machines as parameter:

CATSysDemon -dm domain.lst

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1310

4. Export the Domain Manager host name:

export CATBBDomainManager=node1

5. All members of a conference must select the same conference driver, i.e. all members must select

Backbone. To select the conference driver:

● In the menu bar, select Tools->Options.

● Click the General category in the left-hand tree.
● Click the General tab.
● In the Conferencing area, check the Backbone option.
● Click OK to confirm.

On UNIX

On UNIX it is possible to modify the default communication ports. The communication technology used for
conferencing is socket-based. Your administrator must define the communication ports that will be used.
On UNIX, the default ports are 6666 and 6667.

If these default ports are not available, you can modify their values in the file /etc/services by replacing
6666 and 6667 by the available ports in the following lines:

catiav5bb 55555/tcp
catiav5run 55556/tcp

On UNIX it is possible to automatically launch the CATSysDemon server by adding the following line in the
file /etc/inetd.conf:

catiav5run stream tcp nowait nobody runCATSysDemon CATSysDemon

where runCATSysDemon is a shell which will launch CATSysDemon as a Domain Manager, for which you
also have the following options:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1311

CATSysDemon server options

The -opendm option can also be added to enable ANY other machine to be connected.

Ex: CATSysDemon -opendm -dm domain.lst

You can use -dmhost <hostname> option instead, if the CATBBDomainManager environment variable
is not set.

Ex: CATSysDemon -dmhost nodehost

The "-h" option gives you a list of the available options. For instance:

-DebugL<n>, with n=1,2,3,4,10 provides information to follow communications between CATSysDemon

servers. (Use it only if you encounter difficulties.)

-timeout <time in seconds> enables to leave the server running more than the default 300s when no
client application is connected.

Ex: CATSysDemon -DebugL4 -timeout 3000

The Meta-Domain, How domains are linked together

A Domain Lister must be launched to enable a machine from domain A to communicate with a machine
from domain B.

The domain Lister aims at providing a list of the domain managers. This consists in creating a meta-
domain where the Domain Lister is Domain Manager, and where the Domain Managers are clients.

● On the lister machine (let's call it node1), the CATSysDemon server must be launched using the "-dl
<filepath>" option, <filepath> being a file containing the list of every (other) machine belonging to
the meta-domain

Ex: CATSysDemon -dl domains.lst

● Before running the other servers in the meta-domain, the Domain Lister host name must be specified
via the CATBBDomainLister variable:

Ex: export CATBBDomainLister=nodelist

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1312

Initializing a Conference on Windows using the

Backbone Driver

This scenario describes how to initialize a conference on Windows using the Backbone driver.

Conferencing enables people who are geographically separated to dialog and work together as if they
were virtually in the same room. Audio, video or chat tools enable the conference members to dialog while
whiteboard or any other application sharing capabilities enable them to share documents or even
applications. Usually, one member has a leading role, he is named the host or the master member.

The conferencing functionality is available on both the Windows and UNIX platforms.

Backbone is a Dassault Systèmes component which enables the creation of information channels between
various applications running on various machines.

Backbone must be implemented on each computer that will be used by eventual conference members and
on a reference server.

Applications do not communicate directly but through local servers (CATSysDemon servers), which
communicate among themselves via a Domain Manager (which is itself CATSysDemon server)

As Backbone Manager, you must define the Domain that will enable the CATSysDemon servers to
communicate with one another.

1. Select a machine which will be the Domain Manager (Backbone Manager), e.g. node1.

2. Create a file containing the list of machines that will be allowed to connect to the Domain, e.g.

domain.lst containing the following lines:

node2
node3
node4
node5

3. Launch the CATSysDemon command with the above list of machines as parameter:

CATSysDemon -dm domain.lst

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1313

4. Export the Domain Manager host name:

set CATBBDomainManager=node1

5. All members of a conference must select the same conference driver, i.e. all members must select

Backbone. To select the conference driver:

● In the menu bar, select Tools->Options.

● Click the General category in the left-hand tree.
● Click the General tab.
● In the Conferencing area, check the Backbone option.
● Click OK to confirm.

CATSysDemon server options

The -opendm option can also be added to enable ANY other machine to be connected.

Ex: CATSysDemon -opendm -dm domain.lst

You can use -dmhost <hostname> option instead, if the CATBBDomainManager environment variable
is not set.

Ex: CATSysDemon -dmhost nodehost

The "-h" option gives you a list of the available options. For instance:

-DebugL<n>, with n=1,2,3,4,10 provides information to follow communications between CATSysDemon

servers. (Use it only if you encounter difficulties.)

-timeout <time in seconds> enables to leave the server running more than the default 300s when no
client application is connected.

Ex: CATSysDemon -DebugL4 -timeout 3000

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1314

Initializing a Conference on Windows using the

NetMeeting Driver

This scenario describes how to initialize a conference on Windows using NetMeeting as conference driver.

Conferencing enables people who are geographically separated to dialog and work together as if they
were virtually in the same room. Audio, video or chat tools enable the conference members to dialog while
whiteboard or any other application sharing capabilities enable them to share documents or even
applications. Usually, one member has a leading role, he is named the host or the master member.

The conferencing functionality is available on both the Windows and UNIX platforms.

1. All members of a conference must select the same conference driver, i.e. all members must select

NetMeeting. To select the conference driver:

● In the menu bar, select Tools->Options.

● Click the General category in the left-hand tree.
● Click the General tab.
● In the Conferencing area, check the NetMeeting option.
● Click OK to confirm.

2. To host a conference, in the menu bar, select the Tools->Conferencing->Host.

3. To join a conference as a guest, in the menu bar, select the Tools->Conferencing->Guest.

The NetMeeting and Conferencing dialog boxes appear.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1315

If the NetMeeting interface is already on the desktop, you can use it to host a conference by selecting the
Call/Host Meeting menu item, and then connect to that conference by selecting Tools->Conferencing-
>Host from the menu bar.

Likewise, guests already in a NetMeeting conference can connect to that conference by selecting the
Tools->Conferencing->Guest from the menu bar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1316

Launching a Conference as Host

The person who launches a conference is considered to be the conference host. The host, and only the host, can
do the following:
● invite other participants to the conference
● start the visual conference
● suspend the visual conference
● grant requests by other participants to speak

You must have a DMU Navigator session running.

You must have properly initialized the conferencing infrastructure. See:

● Initializing a Conference on UNIX using the Backbone Driver

● Initializing a Conference on Windows using the Backbone Driver

● Initializing a Conference on Windows using the NetMeeting Driver

Each participant of the conference must have access privileges to all data that he will visualize and he must load
the data manually. Information about which documents are open in the Host session is provided to all participants
on the Document page.

The actions replicated during a conference are the following:

● workbench transition
● object selection
● viewpoint modification (zoom, rotation)
● 3D annotations (creation, modification and deletion)
● 2D annotations (linked to cameras) creation, modification and deletion
● move products (free hand or simulation context)
● show/hide
● specification tree status (if you expand a node as the host it is replicated in the guest session)

It is now possible to use the F3 key to toggle the visibility of the specification tree. the coherence of which is
maintained for all member sessions of the conference.

1. To host a conference, in the menu bar, select the Tools->Conferencing->Host.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1317
The Conferencing dialog box appears.

If you are using NetMeeting as driver, the NetMeeting dialog box will also appear.

If the NetMeeting interface is already on the desktop, you can use it to host a conference by selecting the
Call/Host Meeting menu item, and then connecting to that conference by selecting Tools->Conferencing->Host
from the menu bar.

Likewise, guests already in a NetMeeting conference can connect to that conference by selecting the Tools-
>Conferencing->Guest from the menu bar.

As much as NetMeeting functionality would enable you to perform some of the conferencing actions, they will not
be described in this documentation.

Note, however, that even if you manage the conference completely from the Conferencing dialog box, you must
leave the NetMeeting dialog box opened as it is serving as the conference driver.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1318

2. The host member then invites the other participants.

In the Conferencing dialog box:

● enter the name or the IP address of the participant's machine

● click the Call button

An information box appears indicating that you are waiting for a response to your call.

When your invitation has been accepted by a given guest, that guest's identification will appear in the
Other participants area of the Setup page.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1319
As soon as the conference is organized (i.e. at least 2 members connected), the Visual Control page is
accessible.

The conference is suspended. Everybody can continue working, opening documents, annotating documents, etc.

3. At any moment, click the Who I am button to edit your personal identification information.

The Business card dialog box is displayed.

Starting the Visual Conference

4. Click the Start the Visual Conference button to start the visual conference.

The conference status changes to In Progress. (The Start the Visual Conference button changes

automatically to Suspend the Visual Conference.)

Suspending the Visual Conference

5. Click the Suspend the Visual Conference button to suspend the visual conference.

The conference status changes to Suspended. (The Suspend the Visual Conference button changes

automatically to Start the Visual Conference.)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1320

Joining a Conference as Guest

You can join a conference as a guest after having received a call from the Host inviting you to the
conference.

You must have a DMU Navigator session running.

You must have properly initialized the conferencing infrastructure. See:

● Initializing a Conference on UNIX using the Backbone Driver

● Initializing a Conference on Windows using the Backbone Driver

● Initializing a Conference on Windows using the NetMeeting Driver

Each participant of the conference must have access privileges to all data that he will visualize and he
must load the data manually. Information about which documents are open in the Host session is
provided to all participants on the Document page.

The actions replicated during a conference are the following:

● workbench transition
● object selection
● viewpoint modification (zoom, rotation)
● 3D annotations (creation, modification and deletion)
● 2D annotations (linked to cameras) creation, modification and deletion
● move products (free hand or simulation context)
● show/hide
● specification tree status (if you expand a node as the host it is replicated in the guest session)

It is now possible to use the F3 key to toggle the visibility of the specification tree. the coherence of which
is maintained for all member sessions of the conference.

1. To join the conference as a guest, in the menu bar, select the Tools->Conferencing->Guest.

The Conferencing dialog box appears.

You must now wait until you receive a call from the Host inviting you to join the conference.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1321

If you are using NetMeeting as driver, the NetMeeting dialog box will also appear.

If the NetMeeting interface is already on the desktop, you can use it to host a conference by selecting the
Call/Host Meeting menu item, and then connecting DMU to that conference by selecting Tools-
>Conferencing->Host from the menu bar in the DMU window.

Likewise, guests already in a NetMeeting conference can connect DMU to that conference by selecting the
Tools->Conferencing->Guest from the menu bar in the DMU window.

As much as NetMeeting functionality would enable you to perform some of the conferencing actions, they
will not be described in this documentation.

Note, however, that even if you manage the conference completely from the Conferencing dialog box,
you must leave the NetMeeting dialog box opened as it is serving as the conference driver.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1322

2. You must now wait until you receive a call from the Host inviting you to join the conference.

3. When you receive the invitation, click Accept in the Incoming Call dialog box.

You are now a participant of the conference.

As soon as the conference is active (i.e. at least 2 members connected), the Visual Control
page is displayed.

The conference is on hold. Everyone can go on working, opening documents, annotating

documents, etc.

4. At any moment, you can click the Who I am button to edit your personal identification

information.

The Business card dialog box is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1323

Leading the Visual Conference

During the visual conference, only the participant who is the designated speaker can speak. (The Host is
the designated speaker by default.) Actions or commands performed by the speaker in his /her DMU
session are replicated in the DMU sessions of the other participants. The other participants cannot perform
actions or commands in their DMU sessions while someone else is speaker (unless that particular
participant has switched from Listen mode to Work mode); they can, however, continue to perform
actions in the Conferencing dialog box.

Any participant can request to speak by clicking the Speak radio button on the Visual Control page. The
host grants the request to speak by double-clicking the name of the requesting participant in the
Speaking requests area of the Visual Control page. Of course, the host member can become speaker
at any time by requesting to speak and granting his / her own request.

Suspending the Visual Conference

The host member can suspend the visual conference at any time. All he needs to do is click the Suspend
the Visual Conference button. Performing this action allows everybody to work on their own.

Only the host can suspend and start the visual conference.

Conference mode
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1324
● Directed: the host manages the requests to speak
● Free: any participant can speak at any moment

Participant mode
● Record on / Record off: participants can record events in order to visualize all of the events that
transpired while they were in a break
● Update: recorded events are replayed one by one
● Listen and Work: participants can either listen to the speaker or choose to momentarily disengage
from the visual conference in order perform work not related to the conference
● Speak: to request to speak, a participant clicks the Speak radio button (if the Conference mode is
Free, then there is of course no need to request to speak)

Managing Who Speaks in a Directed Visual Conference

In a directed conference, the Host manages all speaking requests.

1. A participant clicks the Speak radio button.

The image of a person with raised hand appears, indicating the participant's request to speak. The

requesting participant must now wait until the Host grants the request.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1325

2. The Host double-clicks the name of the participant requesting to speak.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1326

3. As soon as the request is granted, the requesting participant's Speak radio button becomes

active, he / she is now the speaker.

When the speaker is performing actions in the interactive session, his / her name now appears under the
arrow.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1327

Sharing Documents with other Conference Members

The Document page enables you to manage data sharing. It indicates the documents which are opened in the host
member session.

Access permissions: Each conference member wants to share some of his components with some of the other
members, but perhaps not with all of them. For this reason, he must be able to define access permissions (visible or
invisible) per component and per conference member. In practice, the shared document (often called the "Root
product") belongs to the Host member, who calls the Guest members and chooses "who sees what". Guest members
will receive only those files they are allowed to see.

Component insertion: Afterwards, each member can add his own components in the shared document, having
previously determined the permissions of other participants.

Host -> Guest

● The host decides to hide, show or share his/her opened documents
● Guests receive information about the host protected or public documents
● Guest can download shared documents from the host session

Guest -> Host

● Every member decides to hide, show or share his/her opened documents
● The host receives information about Guests' protected (shown) or public (shared) documents
● The host can download shared documents form the guests' sessions

Sharing Documents

At the bottom of the Document page, the upper line is meant to read as a sentence indicating your intention with
regards to document sharing, e.g. "Set selected components visible for Jean Dupont".

1. Click Set selected components combo-selection button and select the desired mode from the proposed list.

2. Click the for combo-selection button and select the intended recipient of the share action from the proposed

list.

3. Click the Share button.

The selected documents will now change to status Visible for the indicated recipients.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1328

Loading Shared Documents

At the bottom of the Document page, the lower line is meant to read as a sentence indicating your intention with
regards to document loading, e.g. "Set selected components to load".

1. Click Set selected components combo-selection button and select the desired mode from the proposed list.

2. Click the Load button.

The selected documents change to status Loaded and are inserted into the participant's DMU session.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1329

Document visibility modes

● Invisible: the local documents are in a hidden state for the other participants
● Visible: the documents can be downloaded by the other participants. If download is requested (Load selected
components), both the document and its representation are downloaded.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1330

Transferring Files
Files can be transferred between users during the conference. This enables you to perform conferencing
on VPM data, as one member of a conference can transfer the necessary PSN file that will enable another
member of the conference to visualize the same ENOVIAVPM data.

Note: Both users must have access to a VPM database.

In the Send area of the File Transfer page, the Sender:

1. Clicks on the To selection button and chooses the intended recipient from the proposed list of

conference members.

2. Enters the file name in the File text-entry field or clicks the Browse button to select the file by

browsing his directories.

3. Presses the Send button to send the file to the intended recipients.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1331

In the Receive area of the File Transfer page, each Recipient:

4. In order to specify the location at which he wishes to place the sent file, he enters the directory

name in the Directory: text-entry field or clicks the Browse button to select the directory by

browsing his directories.

5. Presses the Accept button to accept the file at the specified location.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1332

Sending Messages to other Conference

Participants
You can send messages to the other conference participants.

1. In the Conferencing dialog box, click the the Chat tab.

The Chat page is displayed.

2. To send a message:

● type the message in the Message text-entry field

● click the To selection button and select the desired recipient of your message from the
proposed list
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1333

Customizing Conference Options

The Options page enables you to manage conference settings.

1. In the Conferencing dialog box, click the the Options tab.

The Options page is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1334

Consulting Conference History

The History page provides a list of certain actions performed throughout the conference.

1. In the Conferencing dialog box, click the the History tab.

The History page is displayed.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1335

Leaving a Conference
Any participant (host and guests) can leave the conference at any time. If the host leaves the conference,
the conference is terminated for everyone.

1. To leave a conference, in the menu bar, select Tools -> Conferencing -> Stop.

The Conferencing dialog box is closed, you have left the conference.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1336

Knowledgeware Applications Interoperability

In this section, you will find information about interoperability between CATIA Knowledgeware

Applications and other applications listed below:

ENOVIA LCA Interoperability

ENOVIAvpm Interoperability
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1337

ENOVIA LCA Interoperability

Recommended Methodology for Working with ENOVIA LCA
Recommended Methodology for Working with ENOVIA LCA and VPM Navigator
Working with Technological Packages
Working with Relations in ENOVIA LCA: Partial Loading
Working with Relations in ENOVIA LCA: Replacing a Component
Working with Design Tables in ENOVIA LCA
Working with Design Tables in ENOVIA LCA Using VPM Navigator
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1338

Recommended Methodology for Working with

ENOVIA LCA
The recommended methodology for working with ENOVIA LCA is:
● Create a product in ENOVIA

● Send your ENOVIA product to CATIA

● Work on your design in CATIA, whether from scratch or modifying an existing design
● Save your CATIA data in ENOVIA.

To ensure seamless integration:

● You must have both a CATIA V5 and ENOVIA LCA session running.

● In the Product Structure workbench of CATIA V5, click the Connect to Enovia LCA icon to
establish the connection between CATIA V5 and ENOVIA LCA.

Creating a Product in ENOVIA

At the top level of the ENOVIA product hierarchy is the product class root. This is the highest entity in
a product structure and is used to group products. Products can be created directly under this level or
under an intermediate level called the product class depending on how you want to structure your
data. It is not necessary to create product classes, but the product class root and product must
always exist. This is the product that will be sent to CATIA and is mapped to the CATIA document
root.

1. In the ENOVIA home page, open the Engineering Life Cycle folder and double-click the Product

Classes folder.

2. In the Product Class browser, click the New Product Class Root icon in the topmost
toolbar.

3. Enter a meaningful name for your product class root in the Product Class ID field and then

click Add.

4. Right-click the product class root you have just created and select New -> Product from the

contextual menu.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1339

5. Enter a meaningful name for your product in the Product ID field and then click Add.

6. Don't forget to click the Save icon in the topmost toolbar to save the structure in ENOVIA.

Sending an ENOVIA Product to CATIA

1. In CATIA, click the Connect to ENOVIA LCA icon ( ) to connect your ENOVIA LCA
database.

2. In ENOVIA, right-click the ENOVIA product and select Send to -> CATIA V5 from the

contextual menu.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1340

This is what you see in CATIA: the ENOVIA product is mapped to the CATIA document root.

Note: You also need to send any existing workpackages you need from ENOVIA. If you send a
workpackage, the product is also sent - you do not need to send both.

Saving CATIA Data in ENOVIA

1. In the Product Structure workbench of CATIA V5, click the Save Data in ENOVIA LCA

Server... icon in the ENOVIA LCA toolbar.

The Save in ENOVIA V5 dialog box appears showing objects to be saved and set to
the correct save mode and save options.

2. Click OK in the dialog box.

A Save in ENOVIA V5 progress bar lets you monitor the progress of the operation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1341

If the CATIA Document Root is Not an ENOVIA Product

● Save your work temporarily.
● Create a product class root and product in ENOVIA.
● Send the ENOVIA product to CATIA.
● Insert the components (Insert -> Existing Component) containing the work you saved
temporarily above.
● Save your work in ENOVIA.

For more information, see the CATIA / ENOVIA Interoperability User's Guide and the appropriate
ENOVIA LCA guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1342

Recommended Methodology for Working with ENOVIA

LCA and VPM Navigator
The recommended methodology for working with ENOVIA LCA is:
● Create a product in ENOVIA

● Send your ENOVIA product to CATIA

● Work on your design in CATIA, whether from scratch or modifying an existing design
● Save your CATIA data in ENOVIA.

To ensure seamless integration:

● In CATIA, click the Connect User to ENOVIA V5 icon ( ) to establish the connection between CATIA V5 and
ENOVIA LCA.

Creating a Product in ENOVIA

At the top level of the ENOVIA product hierarchy is the product class root. This is the highest entity in a product structure
and is used to group products. Products can be created directly under this level or under an intermediate level called the
product class depending on how you want to structure your data. It is not necessary to create product classes, but the
product class root and product must always exist. This is the product that will be sent to CATIA and is mapped to the CATIA
document root.

1. In the ENOVIA home page, open the Engineering Life Cycle folder and double-click the Product Classes folder.

2. In the Product Class browser, click the New Product Class Root icon in the topmost toolbar.

3. Enter a meaningful name for your product class root in the Product Class ID field and then click Add.

4. Right-click the product class root you have just created and select New -> Product from the contextual menu.

5. Enter a meaningful name for your product in the Product ID field and then click Add.

6. Don't forget to click the Save icon in the topmost toolbar to save the structure in ENOVIA.

Note that after creating the PCR, you can leave ENOVIA LCA.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1343

Sending an ENOVIA Product to CATIA

1. To send the product to CATIA:

❍ In CATIA, click the Connect user to ENOVIA V5 icon ( )

in the ENOVIA V5 toolbar. The ENOVIA Logon dialog box is
displayed:

❍ Enter your User Name, and your password.

❍ Select a role as well as a workbook and click OK.

❍ Click the Search ENOVIA icon ( ). The VPM Search dialog box is displayed.
❍ In the Objects scrolling list, select the Product option.
❍ Enter the Owner's ID.
❍ Click OK when done. The Product ID is displayed in the Result window.
❍ Double-click the product.

❍ Right-click the root product or the part instances and select the Open command. The Open Modes dialog box
is displayed. Leave the default settings and click OK. The CATIA view is displayed.

Saving CATIA Data in ENOVIA

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1344

1. In the Product Structure workbench of CATIA V5, click the Save Data in ENOVIA V5... icon in the ENOVIA V5

toolbar.

The Save in ENOVIA V5 dialog box appears showing objects to be saved and set to the correct save mode and save
options.

The dialog box below shows the objects.

2. Click OK in the dialog box.

A Save in ENOVIA V5 progress bar lets you monitor the progress of the operation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1345

If the CATIA Document Root is Not an ENOVIA Product

● Save your work temporarily.
● Create a product class root and product in ENOVIA.
● Send the ENOVIA product to CATIA.
● Insert the components (Insert -> Existing Component) containing the work you saved temporarily above.
● Save your work in ENOVIA.
For more information, see the CATIA / ENOVIA Interoperability User's Guide and the appropriate ENOVIA LCA guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1346

Working with Knowledgeware and Technological

Packages
● It is possible to create Knowledge data at the exploded product level to define assemblies containing
parameters and relations in ENOVIA LCA thus allowing collaborative work and concurrent engineering.
● Knowledge objects are inserted into technological packages associated with the product. These technological
packages are stored as entities in ENOVIA.

❍ Technological packages are entities that are created by you. You may decide to create
one or several technological packages under the same product. Only one of these
technological packages is considered as active. Once created, application data that is
created in the active product is added to the current active technological package.
❍ Technological packages can be considered as folders (for the representation in V5 tree
view), and as separate documents associated with the product (for the persistency
aspect) even if they are not implemented as documents.
❍ Technological packages can be heterogeneous in terms of included applicative data.
❍ Each technological package can be loaded or not in CATIA (via VPM Navigator).
❍ User rights and lock capabilities can be granted/assigned to a technological package.
❍ When loading a product structure, technological packages are not loaded by default: You
can identify the technological packages associated with the product structure and decide
to load them or not. This capability is available through the VPM Navigator user interface.

● Knowledge objects usually make reference to other objects that may belong to the product structure itself,
to other technological packages, or to part documents that belong to the product structure. Thus, those
references need to be stored in ENOVIA and navigated through VPM Navigator.
● The following Knowledge features are supported:

Infrastructure Knowledge Product Knowledge Expert

Advisor Engineering
Optimizer
❍ Parameters ❍ Rules ❍ Optimizations ❍ RuleBases with Links
❍ Parameters ❍ Checks ❍ Designs of ❍ Standard RuleBases
Sets Experiments
❍ Sets of
❍ Formulas Equations ❍ Constraints
Satisfaction
❍ Relations ❍ Reactions
Sets
❍ Actions
❍ Laws
❍ Lists
❍ Inspector
❍ Loops
❍ Design Tables
❍ VBScripts
❍ Equivalent
Dimensions
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1347
Note that if you want to store a Design table in a Technological Package, the external file (.txt and .xls)
will not be saved in ENOVIA.

The solution coverage depends on the kind of information that can be referenced through Knowledgeware
relations.

The following features can be referenced:

● Part parameters (or work package products parameters).

● Part publications of parameters.
● Parameters that belong to other technological packages.

The following features cannot be referenced:

● Offset parameters of constraints.

● Kinematics mechanisms parameters.
● Features in documents.
● Objects that belong to other technological packages.

Note that it is possible to save design tables external files in technological packages.

Technological Packages: To Know More...

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1348

Technological Packages: To Know More...

● A technological package is always linked to a product structure.
● A technological package can be loaded only when the product structure it belongs to is already loaded.
● A technological package cannot be configured outside a product.
● No VPMV4 or Smart Team integration is provided.
● No support of objects or attributes exposition is provided.
● Be cautious when working with technological packages that have the same name: If you create a relation
based on 2 reals that have the same name, the relation will detect a loop.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1349

Working with Relations in ENOVIA LCA:

Partial Loading
The scenario described below shows how to partially load instances and technological packages.

● Make sure you have selected ENOVIAV5 in the View -> Toolbars menu.

1. Create a Product in ENOVIA LCA. Note that you can close ENOVIA LCA after creating the Product.

Sending the product to CATIA

2. To send the product to CATIA:

❍ In CATIA, click the Connect user to

ENOVIA V5 icon ( ) in the ENOVIA V5

toolbar. The ENOVIA Logon dialog box is
displayed:

❍ Enter your User Name, and your password.

❍ Select a role as well as a workbook and click
OK.

❍ Click the Search ENOVIA icon ( ). The VPM Search dialog box is displayed.
❍ In the Objects scrolling list, select the Product option.
❍ Enter the Owner's ID.
❍ Click OK when done. The Product ID is displayed in the Result window.
❍ Double-click the product. The VPM Navigator view is displayed.
❍ Right-click the root product and select the Open... command. The Open Modes dialog
box is displayed. Leave the default settings and click OK. The CATIA view is displayed.

Adding components to the product

3. Click the root product and select the Insert->Existing Component... command. Select the

KwrCap.CATPart document. The bottle cap is inserted into the product.

4. Click the root product and select the Insert->Existing Component... command. Select the
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1350

KwrBottle2.CATPart document. The bottle is inserted into the product.

5. Optional: Access the assembly design workbench to add constraints to the assembly.

Adding a Volume parameter and a formula to the product

6. Create a Volume parameter that will compute the bottle total volume.

❍ Click the icon. The Formulas Editor opens.

❍ Select Volume in the scrolling list. Click the New Parameter of type button.

❍ Edit the name of the new parameter (Total_Bottle_Volume in this scenario) in the Edit
Name or value of the current parameter and click Add Formula.
❍ Enter the formula below by selecting the publications in the specification tree, and click OK
twice when done:

❍ The new parameter is displayed under the Parameters node located below the Default-
Technological package.1 node in the Specification tree.
❍ Right-click the technological package and select the Properties command. Rename the
technological package in the Name field (Bottle_Volume in this scenario), and click OK when
done.

Saving Data in ENOVIA LCA

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1351

7. Click the Save data in Enovia V5 icon ( ). The Save in ENOVIA dialog box is displayed. Click
OK to save the data.

8. Close all windows in CATIA.

Loading the Data Partially

9. To load the data partially:

❍ Click the Search ENOVIA icon ( ). The VPM Search dialog box is displayed.
❍ In the Objects scrolling list, select the Product option.
❍ Enter the Owner's ID.

❍ Click OK when done. The Product ID is displayed in the Result window.

❍ Double-click the product.

❍ In the VPM navigator view, right-click the

Bottle instance and select the Open
command. The Open Modes dialog box is
displayed.
❍ Check the Automatic lock of all
opened Parts and Documents option
and click OK. The CATIA view is
displayed.

❍ Repeat the same operation with the technological package (Bottle_Volume). Both items are
now loaded.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1352

A copy of
the cap
volume
parameter
is made.
Note that
if you
update
the
formula
an error
will be
raised
since the
cap is not
loaded.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1353

Working with Relations in ENOVIA LCA:

Replacing a Component
This scenario shows how to replace a part with another one using ENOVIA LCA. The scenario
described below is divided into the following steps:
● Creating a Product in ENOVIA LCA and sending it to CATIA.
● Saving the Parts in ENOVIA.
● Opening the Instances and Copying/Pasting them into the Product.
● Saving Data in Enovia LCA
● Replacing a part with another one.

To perform this scenario, you will need the following files:

● KwrCap.CATPart

● KwrBottle2.CATPart

● KwrBottle3.CATPart

The replace process is based on publications. Therefore, if you want to replace elements that contain
formulas, the parameters used in the formula should be published and the formula should be based
on these publications.

1. Create a Product in Enovia LCA (Bottle in this scenario). Note that you can close ENOVIA LCA

after creating the Product.

Sending the product to CATIA

2. To send the product to CATIA:

● In CATIA, click the Connect user to ENOVIA V5

icon ( ) in the ENOVIA V5 toolbar. The ENOVIA

Logon dialog box is displayed:

● Enter your User Name, and your password.

● Select a role as well as a workbook and click OK.

3. To send the product to CATIA:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1354

❍ Click the Search ENOVIA icon ( ). The VPM Search dialog box is displayed.
❍ In the Objects scrolling list, select the Product option.
❍ Enter the Owner's ID.
❍ Click OK when done. The Product ID is displayed in the Result window.
❍ Double-click the product.
❍ Right-click the root product and select the Open command. The Open Modes
dialog box is displayed. Leave the default options and click OK. The CATIA view
is displayed.

Saving the Parts in ENOVIA

4. Open the KwrCap.CATPart file and click the Save data in Enovia V5 icon ( ). The Save
in ENOVIA dialog box is displayed.

5. Click the button. Select the part in the table and click Modify.

6. Select the Bottle root product, and click OK. The part is saved in Enovia.

7. Repeat the steps above for the following parts: KwrBottle2.CATPart and KwrBottle3.CATPart.

Close the parts in CATIA as well as the Result window.

Opening the parts and copying/pasting them into the product

8. Click the Search ENOVIA icon ( ). The VPM Search dialog box is displayed.

9. In the Objects scrolling list, select the Part version option.

10. Click the Advanced Search tab. Select Owner in the Attributes scrolling list and enter your

identifier in the Value field. Click Add and OK. The Parts display in the Results window.

11. Right-click Cap and select the Open command.

12. In the Open Modes dialog box, check the Document Window and the Automatic lock of all

opened Parts and Documents options.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1355

13. Right-click Cap in the specification tree and select the Copy command and paste it into the

ENOVIA5\Bottle window.

14. In the Result window, right-click Bottle2 and select the Open command.

15. In the Open Modes dialog box, check the Document Window and the Automatic lock of all

opened Parts and Documents options. Bottle2 is displayed.

16. Right-click Bottle2 in the specification tree, select the Copy command, and paste it into the

ENOVIA5\Bottle window.

Adding constraints to the Product (optional)

17. From the Start->Mechanical Design menu, access the Assembly Design workbench.

18. Click the Coincidence Constraint icon ( ) and add a coincidence constraint to the parts.

Click the Update All icon ( ) to update the product.

Adding a Volume parameter and a formula to the product

19. Create a Volume parameter that will compute the bottle total volume.

❍ Click the icon. The Formulas Editor opens.

❍ Select Volume in the scrolling list. Click the New Parameter of type button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1356

❍ Edit the name of the new parameter (Total_Bottle_Volume in this scenario) in

the Edit Name or value of the current parameter and click Add Formula.
❍ Enter the formula. To do so, select the Cap1.1 publication + Bottle1
publication. Click OK when done.
❍ The new parameter is displayed under the Parameters node located below
the Default-Technological Package.1 node in the Specification tree.
❍ Right-click the technological package and select the Properties command.
Rename the technological package in the Name field (Bottle in this scenario)
and click OK when done.

Saving Data in Enovia LCA

20. Click the Save data in Enovia V5 icon ( ). The Save in ENOVIA dialog box is displayed.

21. In the Result window, right-click Bottle3 and select the Open command.

22. In the Open Modes dialog box, check the Document Window and the Lock options. Bottle3

is displayed.

Replacing bottle2 with bottle3

23. Go back to the ENOVIA5\Bottle window.

24. Right-click Bottle2 in the specification tree and select the Components->Replace

Component In Session command. The Select New Component window is displayed.

25. Select Enovia5\KwrBottle3.CATPart and click OK when done.

26. Click OK in the Impacts On Replace dialog box: The constraints as well as the volume are

updated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1357

Working with Design Tables in ENOVIA LCA

● The external files (.xls, or .txt files) of the design tables that can be seen when using the Edit->Links
command are embedded when saving the file in ENOVIA LCA. Note that this file is not displayed in the list of
the saved files in the Save in Enovia V5 window but it does in the progression bar when saving the file.
● In a session, if the file containing the design table is closed, the link with the design table external file is not
lost i.e. if you re-open the file, the same design table external file will be used. (This allows you to share
external files.)

● When saving the sheet in Enovia, the Duplicate data in CATIA

model option is automatically enabled. If the file is re-opened in
another session, the model saved is loaded in session, but the sheet
is not.
To synchronize the design table, right-click it, and select the
Synchronize (Enovia) command. If the design table icon is red, it
means that the design table is not synchronized, if it is green, it is
synchronized, if it is orange, it is disconnected so you cannot
determine if it is synchronized or not. To get an example, see
Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA.
● Use the Synchonize (Enovia) command in the following cases:

❍ The design table is not synchronized.

❍ You want to modify the table. To do so, you project it but you
need the right to modify it (otherwise the Edit button is
disabled).
❍ You just want to see the file content. So, you project it and open
it from the projection directory.
● Note that when working with design tables managed by other
applications, like Product Engineering Optimizer for example, the
Duplicate data in CATIA model option will not be automatically
enabled when saving the document in ENOVIA LCA (the model size
can be too large or the design table file contains too much data):
The file will only be projected if CATIA requires it and not if you want
it.
● Note that if you want to modify/update a design table saved in
ENOVIA LCA in CATIA, you will have to check it out in ENOVIA LCA
first.
● Note that the design table features cannot be saved in a
product saved in Structure Exposed storage mode - Document
not kept.

● It is possible to create a new version of a design table in ENOVIA LCA. To know more, see Versioning a
Design Table.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1358

● Dependency is supported in ENOVIA LCA:

Using the Impacted By and Impact On
commands, you can determine which Part is
attached to a design table. To know more
about these commands, see the Impacts On
and Impacted By topics in the Engineering
LifeCycle User's Guide.

● Naming the design table: 2 design tables cannot have the same name. For existing models, it is highly
recommended to use the ExportContentToFile command in ENOVIA LCA: The link will be replaced in
case of name conflict. In case of name conflict, you will not be able to save your design table in your
database.

● When you open a CATIA session and extract data from ENOVIA, you will not be able to access the
modified data, if this data was modified when you worked in your session. You will access them after
launching a new session. For example:

If User A saves a Part and a design table in ENOVIA and

User B loads this Part and synchronizes the design table and

User A modifies the design table and saves it again in ENOVIA

Then User B will not see this modification as long as he works in the same session.

But
User A saves a Part and a design table in ENOVIA and
if

User B opens a session but does not load the Part and the design table and

User A modifies the design table and saves it in ENOVIA

Then User B can access the modified data after loading the Part and synchronizing the design table.

● If you create a design table in a technological package, the .xls file will not be saved in ENOVIA. This .xls
file should be located on a shared file system.

Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA

Using a Design Table Saved in ENOVIA LCA in another Part
Versioning a Design Table External File
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1359

Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA

This task is designed to show your how to save a design table and its external file in ENOVIA LCA. It is
divided into the following steps:
● In CATIA, you create the design table from a pre-existing file.
● You save the file in ENOVIA LCA.
● You rename the design table external file so that it is not available for the application.
● You perform a Search in the ENOVIA LCA database.
● The file is sent from ENOVIA LCA to CATIA and synchronized with the Enovia database.

To know more about the use of design tables in ENOVIA LCA, see Working with Design Tables in
ENOVIA LCA.

Creating the design table

1. Open the BallBearing.CATPart file.

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Knowledge tool bar. The Creation of a Design
Table window is displayed.

3. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File

Selection dialog box opens.

4. Select the BearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when prompted to associate

the columns of the table with the parameters.

5. Click OK to apply the default configuration. DesignTable.1 is displayed below the Relations

node.

Saving the file in ENOVIA LCA

6. Save your files in ENOVIA LCA.

❍ In CATIA, click the Connect to ENOVIA LCA icon ( ) to connect your ENOVIA
LCA database.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1360

❍ In CATIA, click the Save data in ENOVIA LCA Server... icon ( ). The Save in
ENOVIA V5 dialog box is displayed.

❍ Select both files and check the Publications Exposed

storage mode.

❍ Click OK to validate. Close the file in CATIA.

Note that the .xls file does not display in this window. It will only display in the
progression bar when saving the data in ENOVIA LCA.

7. In Windows Explorer, rename or delete the BearingDesignTable.xls file.

Searching for the saved design table in ENOVIA LCA

8. In ENOVIA LCA, click the ENOVIA Home icon

( ). Expand the Content Management node and

double-click the Documents folder.

9. The Content Management Startup Selection dialog box is displayed. Click the Search

Documents radio button and click OK to launch the search.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1361

10. In the opening Search window,

❍ select Document Revision in the Search for: scrolling list.

❍ select the Creator field, enter the Creator's name and click Search.
The BallBearing.CATPart file is displayed in the Results tab.

Sending the File from ENOVIA LCA to CATIA

11. Right-click the BallBearing.CATPart file and select the Send to CATIA V5 command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1362

12. Expand the relations node. Right-click the DesignTable.1 file and select the Synchronize

(Enovia) command.

The DesignTable.1 is displayed with a green icon ( )

indicating that it is synchronized.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1363

Using a Design Table Saved in ENOVIA LCA in

another Part

This task is designed to show you how to use a design table saved in ENOVIA LCA in a new
Part. It is divided into the following steps. Your:
● Save the .xls file in ENOVIA LCA.
● Open the Part that will contain the .xls file in CATIA and save it in ENOVIA LCA.
● Perform a Search in the ENOVIA LCA database.
● Send the founded Part to CATIA.
● Save the design table .xls file on a local disk.
● Create the design table file in CATIA and save the .CATPart file in ENOVIA LCA.
● Send the file from ENOVIA LCA to CATIA and perform a synchronization.

To know more about the use of design tables in ENOVIA LCA, see Working with Design
Tables in ENOVIA LCA.

Saving the .xls file in ENOVIA LCA

1. Open your ENOVIA LCA database.

2. In ENOVIA LCA, click the ENOVIA Home icon

( ). Expand the Content Management node

and double-click the Documents folder.

3. The Content Management Startup Selection dialog box is displayed. Click the Create a

New Document radio button and click OK.

4. In the Document ID field of the opening window, enter New_Designtable and click

the Browse button. The Choose a file dialog box is displayed.

5. Select the BearingDesignTable.xls file and click OK. The design table external file is
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1364

saved in your ENOVIA LCA database.

6. In CATIA, open the BallBearing.CATPart file.

7. Click the Connect to ENOVIA LCA icon ( ) to connect your ENOVIA LCA
database.

8. Click the Save data in ENOVIA LCA Server... icon ( ). The Save in ENOVIA V5
dialog box is displayed. Select the file and check the Publications Exposed storage

mode.

9. Click OK to validate. Close the file in CATIA.

The .xls file and the new .CATPart file are now both saved in ENOVIA LCA.

8. In ENOVIA LCA, expand the Content Management node (if need be) and double-click

the Documents folder.

9. The Content Management Startup Selection dialog box is displayed. Click the Search

Documents radio button and click OK to launch the search.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1365

10. In the opening Search window,

❍ select Document Revision in the Search for scrolling list.

❍ select the Creator field, enter the Creator's name and click
Search. The BallBearing.CATPart file and the New_DesignTable
display in the Results tab.

11. Right-click the BallBearing.CATPart file and select the Send To->CATIA V5

command. The file is displayed in CATIA.

12. In ENOVIA LCA, right-click the New_DesignTable.xls file and select the Send To-

>Local Disk command.

13. In the Copy Out dialog box, indicate the directory where the .xls file will be stored as
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1366

well as the file name (BearingDT.xls in this scenario).

14. Click OK when done. An information dialog box indicates that the file was correctly

saved on your disk. Click OK to exit this dialog box.

15. In CATIA, change the part number of the BallBearing.CATPart file into BallBearing2.

16. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Knowledge tool bar. The Creation of a
Design Table window is displayed.

17. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The

File Selection dialog box opens.

18. Select the BearingDT.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when prompted to associate

the columns of the table with the parameters.

19. Click OK to apply the default configuration. DesignTable.1 is displayed below the

Relations node. Save your file.

20. Click the Save data in ENOVIA LCA Server... icon ( ). The Save in ENOVIA V5
dialog box is displayed.

21. Select both files, check the Publications Exposed storage mode.

22. Close the file in CATIA.

Searching for the saved design table in ENOVIA LCA

23. In the Search tab, click Search to launch the search. Your files display in the Results

tab.

24. Right-click the BallBearing2.CATPart file and select the Send To->CATIA V5

command.

25. Right-click the DesignTable.1 file and select the Synchronize (ENOVIA) command.

The DesignTable.1 is synchronized.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1367

Versioning a Design Table

This task is designed to show you how to create a revision of a design table external file in
ENOVIA LCA.

To know more about the use of design tables in ENOVIA LCA, see Working with Design
Tables in ENOVIA LCA.

Creating the design table

1. Open the BallBearing.CATPart file in CATIA.

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Knowledge tool bar. The Creation of a
Design Table window is displayed.

3. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The

File Selection dialog box opens.

4. Select the BearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when prompted to

associate the columns of the table with the parameters.

5. Click OK to apply the default configuration. DesignTable.1 is displayed below the

Relations node.

Saving the file in ENOVIA LCA

6. Save your files in ENOVIA LCA.

❍ In CATIA, click the Connect to ENOVIA LCA icon ( ) to

connect your ENOVIA LCA database.

❍ In Catia, click the Save data in ENOVIA LCA Server... icon

( ). The Save in ENOVIA V5 dialog box is displayed.

❍ Select both files and check the Publications Exposed storage

mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1368

❍ Click OK to validate. Close the file in CATIA. Click OK: Your

data are saved in the ENOVIA LCA database.

Note that the .xls file does not display in this window. It
will only display in the progression bar when saving the
data in ENOVIA LCA.

❍ Close CATIA and relaunch it.

Searching for the saved design table in ENOVIA LCA

7. In ENOVIA LCA, click the ENOVIA Home

icon ( ). Expand the Content

Management node and double-click the

Documents folder.

8. The Content Management Startup Selection dialog box is displayed. Click the Search

Documents radio button and click OK to launch the search.

9. In the opening Search window,

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1369

❍ select Document Revision in the Search for: scrolling list.

❍ select the Creator field, enter the creator's name and click Search. The
BallBearing.CATPart file is displayed in the Results tab.

10. Click the BallBearingDT.xls file and click the Add button.

11. Right-click the design table and

select the New Revision

command.

The new revision of the design table is created. Note that the suffix --A is added at the end of
the name, indicating that this design table is the first revision of the BallbearingDT design
table.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1370

Working with Design Tables in ENOVIA LCA

Using VPM Navigator
It is possible to save design tables in ENOVIA and to apply design tables saved in ENOVIA to existing parts using VPM
Navigator.

Note that:

● To modify a design table saved in ENOVIA, the sheet must be synchronized with the design table saved in ENOVIA.
To do so, right-click the design table in CATIA and select the Synchronize (ENOVIA) command. The design table
should also be locked.
● To share a design table, see Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA Using the VPM Navigator.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1371

Saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA Using VPM

Navigator
This task is designed to show you how to save a design table and its external file in ENOVIA using the
VPM Navigator and how to use the external file in another file (it is possible to share a .xls file with
other design tables). This scenario is divided into the following steps:
● In CATIA, your create the design table using a pre-existing file.
● You save the file in ENOVIA.
● You create another part in CATIA, save it and associate the design table external file stored in
ENOVIA.

To find out more about the VPM Navigator, see the VPM Navigator User's Guide.

Prior to performing your scenario, enable the Enovia option in the Tools->Options->General-
>Document tab.

Creating the Design Table

1. Open the BallBearing.CATPart file.

2. Click the Design Table icon ( ) in the Knowledge tool bar. The Creation of a Design
Table window is displayed.

3. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File

Selection dialog box opens.

4. Select the BearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open. Click Yes when prompted to associate

the columns of the table with the parameters.

5. Click OK to apply the default configuration. DesignTable.1 is displayed below the Relations

node.

Saving the Files in ENOVIA

6. Save your files in ENOVIA.

❍ Choose the Start -> ENOVIA V5 VPM -> VPM Navigator menu item.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1372

❍ Click the Connect user to ENOVIA V5 icon ( ) in the ENOVIA V5 toolbar. The
ENOVIA Logon dialog box is displayed.

❍ Enter your user name and your password.

❍ Select your "role" in the Role scrolling list and the workbook and click OK.

❍ Click the Save data in Enovia V5 icon ( ). The Save in Enovia V5 dialog box is
displayed. Click OK to save the files. Close the file in CATIA.

The BearingDesignTable.xls file and the BallBearing.CATPart file are now both saved in ENOVIA.

Applying the Design Table File Saved in ENOVIA to Another Part

7. Open the New_BallBearing.CATPart file. Click the Save data in Enovia V5 icon ( ). The
Save in Enovia V5 dialog box is displayed. Click OK to save the file.

8. Click the Design Table icon ( ) to associate a design table with the part.

7. Click the Create a design table from a pre-existing file option and click OK. The File

Selection window is displayed as well as the browser.

8. Click Cancel in the File Selection window and click the Enovia button in the browser.

7. The Search Conditions window is displayed.

8. In the Creator field, enter the creator's name and click Search. The results are displayed in

the Search Result window.

9. Select the BearingDesignTable.xls file and click Open.

10. Click Yes when prompted to associate the columns of the table with the parameters.

11. Click OK to apply the default configuration. DesignTable.1 is displayed below the Relations

node.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1373

ENOVIAvpm Interoperability
ENOVIAVPM-CATIA V5 Knowledgeware Integration
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1374

ENOVIAvpm-CATIA V5 Knowledgeware
Integration
Note that for the Knowledgeware integration to work properly, VPM1.5 PTF13 is required.

The VPM integration of Knowledgeware information created at the product level is guaranteed for Knowledge

Advisor, Product Engineering Optimizer and for the infrastructure fonctionalities (parameters, formulas, laws,

Design Tables).

● The following Knowledge features are supported:

Infrastructure Knowledge Advisor Product Engineering

Optimizer
❍ Parameters Sets ❍ Rules ❍ Optimizations
❍ Formulas ❍ Checks ❍ Design of Experiments
❍ Laws ❍ Sets of Equations ❍ Constraints Satisfactions
❍ Design Tables ❍ Macros with
arguments
❍ Equivalent Dimensions
Actions
Comments and URLs
❍
❍

❍ Reactions
❍

Design Tables: The link between design tables and their external files is not supported. The file should be
located in a shared directory. If it is not possible, use the Duplicate data in CATIA model option in the
design table dialog box.
Note that you can decide to copy the data into the model by checking (or not) the appropriate option in
the settings page. To do so, access the Knowledge tab from the Tools->Options->Parameters and
Measure category and check the Default Mode: Copy Data Into Model or the Default Mode: Do Not
Copy Data Into Model option.

These objects, considered as connections, support the following pointings:

● To Part parameters and objects

● To published parameters

● To Product users parameters

● To User properties of a product

● To assembly constraints parameters

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1375

● To Knowledge objects at the Product level

Replacing Components in VPM V4

Considering the opposite assembly, it
is now possible to replace in VPM V4
Part1 with another part (The part
numbers can be identical or not)
containing a renamed parameter
(both names must be identical.)
When loading the document in CATIA,
an incident report window is
displayed:

You can only save your assembly to update the links. Then, you can, for example, version Product 1: the
same message is displayed (see above) when loading the new version of Product 1.
Note that it is also possible for you to proceed as follows:
● Version Product 1.
● Update it in CATIA
● Replace Part1 with another part.

● Please find below the list of parameters that can be replaced:

Published parameters Can be replaced by the same publication located in a part (not necessarily a new
version, or identical part number).

Renamed parameters Can be replaced by the same renamed parameter located in a part.
(not published)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1376

Parameter (not Can be replaced by a parameter located in a Part that is a new version of an old
published, not part (not necessarily the same part number.)
renamed)

● The versioning and replacing of products is supported only if the links are updated in CATIA between each

operation (like for assembly constraints.)

Creating and Storing a Knowledgeware Relation

Useful Tips
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1377

Creating and Storing a Knowledgeware Relation

In the scenario described below, we assume that you start from scratch. The scenario is divided into the
following steps:
● Creating documents in VPM
● Creating the Assembly in VPM
● Applying constraints to the assembly in Catia
● Creating a formula in Catia
● Loading the Assembly in Catia

To perform this scenario, you will need the following files:

TowHook.CATProduct
M39.CATPart
Axis_Step3.CATPart
Support.CATPart
Liner_Step3.CATPart

In Catia, from the Tools->Options menu, select Infrastructure->Product Structure and make sure that
the Work with the cache system option is unchecked.

Creating Documents in VPM

1. In VPM, select the Object->Document command to specify the type of file that you want to create.

2. Select the File->Create & Save command. The Create&Save window is displayed.

❍ In the Part Number field, enter a string of characters. Note that this string will be visible in Catia

when loading the part: M39 for example.

❍ In the Eng Change field, enter 1 (version number).

❍ In the Type field, enter Part.

❍ Click the Source field and select the M39.CATPart file.

❍ Enter 1 in the remaining fields.

❍ Click Ok when done. The document is now created in VPM.

3. Double-click the Document to open the PSN editor.

4. Right-click the sheet corresponding to the created document and select Open. The Part opens in CATIA.

5. Repeat the 4 steps described above for the following parts:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1378

❍ Axis_Step3.CATPart

❍ Support.CATPart

❍ Liner_Step3.CATPart

Creating the Assembly

6. In VPM, select the Object->Part command to specify the type of file that you want to create.

7. Select the File->Create & Save command. The Create&Save window is displayed.

❍ In the Part Number field, enter TowHook.

❍ In the Eng Change field, enter 1 (version number).

❍ In the Type field, enter Product.

❍ Click OK when done and Yes to confirm.

8. Specify that the TowHook is made up of M39.CATPart, Axis_Step3.CATPart, Support.CATPart, and

Liner_Step3.CATPart. T

❍ Use the shift button to select the 4 documents listed above.

❍ Press the Ctrl+C keys.

❍ Click the TowHook file.

❍ Press the Ctrl+V keys. The assembly is created.

9. Double-click TowHook in VPM. The editor is displayed.

10. In the PSN editor, expand the documents and, holding the shift key, right-click the 4 documents and

select the Open command.

11. Select Add when prompted to replace or add the models in your current viewer session. The assembly
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1379
is displayed in Catia.

Applying constraints to the assembly in Catia

12. Apply constraints to build the assembly.

● From the Start menu, select the Mechanical Design->Assembly Design workbench.

● Apply a fix constraint to the Support.

● Apply a coincidence constraint between Liner.1 and Support.1.

● Apply an offset constraint (10 mm) between Liner.1 and Support.1.

● Apply a coincidence constraint between Axis.1 and Liner.1.

● Apply a coincidence constraint between Support.1 and Axis.1.

● Apply a coincidence constraint between Bolt.1 and Axis.1.

● Apply a contact constraint between Bolt.1 and Liner.1.

● Do not hesitate to use the Manipulations parameters tool available in the Assembly workbench to

move the assembly components before applying the constraints.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1380
The constraints are
created (see
picture opposite.)

Creating a formula

13. Create a formula applied on the Offset constraint.

● Click the f(x) icon. The Formula Editor is displayed.

● In the specification tree, select the offset constraint and click the Add formula button.

● In the editor, double-click Support\Plate_Thickness and add "+15mm". (See graphic below).

14. Click OK twice. The formula is created.

15. Save your .CATProduct file. Your file is saved in VPM.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1381

Loading the Assembly in Catia

16. Go back to VPM and right-click M39.CATPart, Axis_Step3.CATPart, TowHook,

and Liner_Step3.CATPart and select the Open command.

● A message is fired by Knowledge indicating that the relation cannot be solved.

● The formula is displayed with an interrogation mark.
● The formula cannot be edited.
● The formula can be deactivated.
● Some parameters are seen as "unfound".

The constraints applied to the Support document do not display.

17. Go back to PSN, right-click the Support document and select Add: The formula applies correctly and

the constraints all display.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1382

Useful Tips
Replacing a document publishing parameters

In VPM 4, if you want to replace a document publishing parameters with another parameter, do it in CATIA:
Before replacing the assembly, send it to CATIA as well as the document that will replace the existing one,
perform the "replace" operation in CATIA and save it.

Replace operations performed from VPM are supported with one restriction: In assemblies, you can only
replace part instances directly located below the root product.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1383

Workbench Description
Version 5 lets you create and manage parts, assemblies, drawings and CATIA Version 4 models in documents.

Version 5 uses a multiple document interface (MDI), meaning that you can manipulate several documents at
the same time. You can even view the contents of the same document in several windows at the same time.

Opening a specific type of document activates the workbench and the associated workbench toolbar
containing all the tools you need to edit the document, so the Version 5 application window looks a little
different depending on what type of document you are editing. The same applies to the contents of the menu
bar and the commands on pulldown menus.

This section contains the description of the icons and menus specific to the CATIA Object Manager
workbenches. These commands are discussed in greater details elsewhere in the guide.

The main application window looks like this (click the sensitive areas to see the related documentation):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1384

The section is organized as follows:

Menu Bar
Standard Toolbar
View Toolbar
Capture Toolbar
Graphic Properties Toolbar
3Dx Device Toolbar
Desk Toolbars
User Selection Filter Toolbar
Symbols
Viewing and Hiding Toolbars
Viewing the Commands List
Keyboard Shortcuts
Knowledgeware Toolbar
Feature Dictionary Editor Toolbar
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1385

Infrastructure Menu Bar

This section presents the main menu bar available when you run the application and before creating or opening a document.

Start ENOVIA V5 File Edit View Insert Tools Analyze Window Help

Start
The Start menu is a navigation tool intended to help you toggle between different workbenches. The contents of the Start menu
vary according to the configurations and/or products installed. For more information about the Start menu, refer to Accessing
the Navigation Tools.

File
For... See...

New... Creating New Documents

New from... Creating a New Document from an Existing One

Open... Opening Existing Documents

Close Closing Documents

Save Saving Existing Documents

Save As Saving Documents For the First Time or Under Another Name
Saving Documents In Other Formats

Save All Saving All Documents

Save Management Managing Document Save

Print... Customizing Print Settings Before Printing Your Documents

Printer Setup... Setting Up Your Printers on UNIX and Windows

Desk... Using the FileDesk Workbench

Send To Transferring Version 5 Data

Document Properties Displaying Document Properties

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1386

Edit
For... See...
Undo Undoing Actions

Redo/Repeat Redoing and Repeating Actions

Cut Cutting and Pasting Objects

Copy Copying and Pasting Objects

Paste Cutting and Pasting Objects

Copying and Pasting Objects

Paste Special... Using the Paste Special... command

Delete Deleting Objects

Search... Selecting Using the Search... Command

Selection Sets... Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

Selection Sets Edition... Editing Selection Sets

Find Owning Selection Sets... Storing Selections Using Selection Sets

Links... Editing Document Links

Properties Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties

Other Selection... Selecting Using the Other Selections... Command

View
For... See...

Toolbars Viewing and Hiding Toolbars

Commands List... Viewing the Commands List

Geometry Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

Specifications Setting Document Window Layout Preferences

Compass About the 3D Compass

Reset Compass Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and

Compass
Tree Expansion Expanding and Collapsing the Spec Tree

Specifications Overview Using the Overview on the Specification Tree

Geometry Overview Using the Geometry Overview

Fit All In Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area

Zoom Area Zooming In On An Area

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1387
Zoom In Out Zooming In
Zooming Out
Pan Panning

Rotate Rotating

Modify > Look At Looking At Objects

Modify > Turn Head, Zoom Turning Your Head To View An Object
In, Zoom Out, Normal View Zooming In
Zooming Out
Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane
Named Views... Using Standard and User-Defined Views

Render Style Using Rendering Styles

Navigation Mode Navigating

Lighting... Setting Lighting Effects

Depth Effect... Setting Depth Effects

Ground Viewing Objects against the Ground

Magnifier... Magnifying

Hide/Show Hiding and Showing Objects

Full Screen Using the Full Screen

Tools
For... See...

Formula... Using Knowledgeware Capabilities

Image Capturing and Managing Images for the Album

Macro Recording, Running and Editing Macros

Utility... Using the Batch Monitor

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1388
Customize... Customizing Toolbars

Visualization Filters... Using Visualization Filters

Options... Customizing Settings

Standards... Customizing Standards

Conferencing Conferencing

Window
For... See...

New Window Using Document Windows

Tile Horizontally Using Document Windows

Tile Vertically Using Document Windows

Cascade Using Document Windows

Help
For... See...
CATIA V5 Help Getting Contextual Help

CATIA User Companion

Contents, Index and Search Accessing the Online Help Library

What's This? Using the What's This? Command

User Galaxy Accessing the Dassault Systèmes User

Galaxy

About CATIA V5 Displaying Copyright Information

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1389

Standard Toolbar

See Creating New Documents

See Opening Existing Documents

See Saving Existing Documents

See Printing a Document Quickly without Customizing Print Settings

See Cutting and Pasting Objects

See Copying and Pasting Objects

See Cutting and Pasting Objects, and Copying and Pasting Objects

See Undoing Actions

See Undoing Actions

See Redoing and Repeating Actions

See Redoing and Repeating Actions

See Using the What's This? Command

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1390

View Toolbar
The View toolbar appears in three different configurations.

This is the default View toolbar in Examine mode:

Note: the visualization mode icons always show a black arrow within a white square to indicate a full pop-up. This means that
clicking the icon displayed in the toolbar will pop-up the whole icon box to let you choose the appropriate rendering style (wireframe,
shading. etc.). As it is a visualization mode command, it would be useless to let you run the command currently displayed without
displaying the other available modes.

This is the View toolbar in Walk mode:

This is the View toolbar in Fly mode:

See Navigating in Fly Mode

See Navigating in Fly Mode

See Navigating in Walk Mode

See Navigating in Examine Mode

See Fitting All Geometry in the Geometry Area

See Turning Your Head To View An Object

See Navigating in Fly Mode, Navigating in Walk Mode

See Navigating in Fly Mode, Navigating in Walk Mode

See Viewing Along a Normal to a Plane

See Creating a Multi-View: Manual Configuration or Automatic Configuration

See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1391

See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views

See Using Standard Views

See Panning

See Rotating

See Zooming In

See Zooming Out

See Shading (SHD)

See Shading with All Edges

See Shading with Edges without Smooth Edges

See Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges

See Shading with Material

See Wireframe (NHR)

See Customizing the View Mode

See Hiding Objects

See Displaying Hidden Objects

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1392

Capture Toolbar

See Capturing Simple Images

See Capturing Selected Areas of Images

See Capturing Simple Images

See Capturing Selected Areas of Images

See Capturing Simple Images

See Capturing Simple Images

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1393

Graphic Properties Toolbar

The Graphic Properties toolbar is hidden by default. It can be displayed by selecting View > Toolbars >
Graphic Properties.

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Toolbar

See Using the Graphic Properties Wizard

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1394

3Dx Device Toolbar

The 3Dx Device toolbar is hidden by default. It can be displayed by selecting View > Toolbars > 3DxDevice.

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

See Customizing Buttons

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1395

Desk Toolbars
The Desk toolbar is hidden by default. To display it, select View > Toolbars > Desk (basic):

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

The Desk File Management and Unload toolbars are available from the Desk window:

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

See Using the FileDesk Workbench

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1396

User Selection Filter Toolbar

The User Selection Filter toolbar is hidden by default. It can be displayed by selecting View > Toolbars > User
Selection Filter.
Note that the capture below takes the Generative Shape Design workbench as an example but the look and
number of icons available from the User Selection Filter toolbar varies according to the workbench you are
working in.

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

See Selecting Using a Filter

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1397

Specification Tree Symbols

Depending on the operations you perform, you may encounter new symbols on your features in the specification
tree. This table provides a list with a brief explanation about the use of these symbols.

Miscellaneous Symbols
Product Structure Symbols
Symbols reflecting an incident in the Geometry building
Referenced Geometry
Analysis Symbols: refer to Generative Structural Analysis
- Workbench Description - Analysis Symbols
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1398

Viewing and Hiding Toolbars

Method 1
1. Select View > Toolbars.

The list of current toolbars is

displayed. Currently visible
toolbars are indicated by a
tick symbol to the left of the
toolbar name.

2. In the list, click the toolbar you want to view or hide.

Note that:

● you can detach toolbars from the application window border by dragging the double line to
the left of the toolbar: you can drag the toolbar anywhere around the screen, then dock the
toolbar in the same or in another location by dragging it onto the the application window
border
● you can drag a tool icon from a workbench toolbar, and drop it onto a selected object: this
is a quicker way to run a command.

You can also drag and drop an object onto an object: for example, copy a fillet on a part.

Method 2
1. Right-click any icon in any toolbar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1399
The list of current toolbars is displayed. Currently visible
toolbars are indicated by a tick symbol to the left of the toolbar
name.

2. Select the Customize... command to display the Customize dialog box.

3. Click the Toolbars tab, then toggle the Hide or Show button to hide or show the toolbar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1400

Viewing the Commands List

This task illustrates how to access a list of all available commands.

1. Select View > Commands List.

The Command List... dialog box is displayed:

2. Select a command in the list.

Help about the command is displayed in the lower frame of the dialog box and when there are
more than two lines of text, you can use the arrows displayed to the right to scroll up or
down:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1401

3. With the command still selected, click OK.

The selected command is accessed if the appropriate workbench is already activated.

To access a command rapidly, double-click the name of the command in the list.

If you know the first letter of the command, select any command in the list, then type the first
letter to go to the commands starting with the letter you typed.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1402

Keyboard Shortcuts

Use this keyboard key (or combination)... To...

Escape Exit the current dialog box (when there is one)

F1 Get contextual online help
Shift + F1 Get help on toolbar icons
Shift + F2 Toggle the specification tree overview on and off
F3 Toggle specification tree display on and off
Alt + F8 Run macros
Shift + F3 Activate the graph if the model is active and inversely
Home Display the top of the graph
End Display the bottom of the graph
Page Up Relocate the graph one page up
Page Down Relocate the graph one page down
Ctrl + Page Up Zoom In the graph
Ctrl + Page Down Zoom Out the graph
Up arrow Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the top

Down arrow Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the bottom

Left arrow Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the left

Right arrow Relocate the graph 1/10th (one tenth) of a page to the right

Ctrl + Tab Swap active document windows

Alt + Enter Run the Properties... command

Ctrl + C Run the Copy command

Ctrl + F Run the Search... command

Ctrl + G Run the Selection Sets... command

Ctrl + N Run the New... command

Ctrl + O Run the Open... command

Ctrl + P Run the Print... command

Ctrl + S Run the Save... command

Ctrl + V Run the Paste command

Ctrl + X Run the Cut command

Ctrl + Y Run the Redo command

Ctrl + Z Run the Undo command

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1403

Another useful shortcut

Clicking an icon lets you run the command associated with that icon only once. However, double-clicking an icon lets you use the
associated command as many times as you want without having to click on the icon several times.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1404

Knowledgeware Toolbar
The Knowledge toolbar contains the following tools

See Creating a Parameter and Creating a Formula.

See Associating URLs and Comments with Parameters or Relations.

See Creating a Design Table from Current Values and Creating a Design Table from a Pre-Existing
File.

See Creating a Law.

See the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.

See Using the Equivalent Dimensions Feature.

See Locking and Unlocking a Parameter.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1405

Feature Dictionary Editor Toolbar

See Creating a New Object Class and Creating a New Feature Dictionary

See Modifying the Object Naming Rules

See Opening a Reference Dictionary

See Creating a New Object Class

See Adding Properties to an Object Class

See Modifying the Object Naming Rules

See Generating a Report

See Managing Colors

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1406

Customizing
Customizing Toolbars
Customizing Standards
Customizing Settings
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1407

Customizing Toolbars and Workbenches

Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping
Managing User-Defined Toolbars
Creating User-Defined Workbenches
Administering the Workbench List
Customizing Command Properties
Customizing Options
Customizing Buttons
Using the Tools Palette
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1408

Customizing a Toolbar by Dragging and Dropping

This task shows how to customize a toolbar by dragging and dropping a command onto the toolbar to add
the command, and dragging a command away from a toolbar to delete the command.

Before you begin, note that:

● the View toolbar cannot be customized
● you cannot drag and drop local commands onto global toolbars (for instance, you cannot drag and
drop the Pad command onto the Standard toolbar). If you try to do so, the symbol is displayed
to indicate that this action is forbidden.

1. Select Tools > Customize or right-click any icon in any toolbar then select Customize to open

the Customize dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1409
The dialog box contains the following tabs:

● Start Menu: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in
Accessing the Navigation Tools)

● User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches

● Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default)
● Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar
● Options: contains general customization options.

With the Toolbars tab open, double-clicking any icon highlights, in the toolbars list, the toolbar
the icon belongs to.

Double-clicking any toolbar also highlights the toolbar name, allowing you to identify it.
However, note that you must double-click the bottom of the toolbar for toolbars displayed in the
bottom part of the workbench (such as the Standard toolbar) and you must double-click the
right part of the toolbar for toolbars displayed on the right side of the workbench. Otherwise,
double-clicking the toolbar undocks it but does not highlight its name in the list.

2. Click the Commands tab to list the commands available.

The Categories list allows you to filter the listed commands by category: the category is the
name of the menu in the menu bar.

For example, selecting the Edit category in the Categories list displays in the commands list
all the commands likely to appear on the Edit menu.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1410

The category All Commands lists all commands available. You can also select the Select
command.

If you created macros, the macro names are also listed. You can then add macros to a toolbar.

3. Select a command from the command list.

In this example, the Capture... command has been selected. Note that the icon for the
command is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box, along with a short help message
explaining the role of the icon.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1411

4. Drag the command from the command list to the toolbar to which you want to add the command.

5. Drop the command onto the

desired toolbar.

In our example, the icon for

the Image Capture...
command has been added
to the Standard toolbar:

Note that this does not apply to icon boxes which cannot be customized.

6. To delete a command from a toolbar using the drag-and-drop mechanism, drag the command and

drop it back inside the list of commands in the Customize dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1412
You can also drag and drop commands which do not have icons: in this case, the command
name appears in the toolbar.

Your customization is stored automatically in the FrameConfig.CATSettings file: you recover it if

you exit then restart. For more information about settings, refer to About Settings.

If you intend to acquire or remove licenses using Tools > Options > General > Shareable
Products, do not forget to first exit then restart your Version 5 session before accessing this tab
in order to recover your customization.
Acquiring or releasing shareable products implies that all the toolbars and menus are
regenerated. The user interface is recomputed using the last settings saved and therefore, if
your customization has not been previously saved, it will be lost.

More about dragging and dropping icons

It is not recommended to drag and drop a Version 5 icon onto another application (such as Microsoft
PowerPoint, Microsoft Word, etc.): in that case, the dropped icon disappears from your Version 5 session
and the only way to restore it is to select Tools > Customize then follow the steps detailed in this
scenario.

Working with ENOVIA LCA: Optimal CATIA PLM Usability

The Safe Save mode prevents the user from creating or editing data in CATIA that cannot be
correctly saved in ENOVIA V5.
Working in this mode means that certain commands are unavailable (i.e. grayed out) as you enter the
workbench.

However, these unavailable commands are not grayed when displaying the list of commands using Tools
> Customize. As a consequence, if you drag and drop one of these commands onto a toolbar then use it,
bear in mind that the created data will not be saved in ENOVIA V5.

For detailed information on the interoperability between CATIA and ENOVIA, refer to the Version 5 -
ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1413

Managing User-Defined Toolbars

This tasks shows how to create, rename, delete, restore, hide and show user-defined toolbars.

1. Select Tools > Customize or right-click any icon in any toolbar then select Customize to open the

Customize dialog box:

2. Access the Toolbars tab if it is not already activated:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1414

The Toolbars tab lists the currently available toolbars, and provides the commands for:

● creating new toolbars via the New... button

● renaming toolbars via the Rename... button
● deleting toolbars via the Delete button
● restoring the original content of selected toolbars via the Restore contents... button
● restoring the original content of all toolbars via the Restore all contents... button. Do not forget that
when using this button, new toolbars are deleted as well
● restore the toolbars to their original position in the current workbench via the Restore position
button
● add commands to the selected toolbar via the Add commands... button
● remove commands from the selected toolbar via the Remove commands... button.

3. To create a new toolbar, click the New... button.

The New Toolbar dialog box appears with a default toolbar name (NewToolBar001), and an empty
toolbar appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1415

4. Enter the name of the new toolbar, then click OK.

The new toolbar is added to the bottom of the list, and an empty toolbar is added to the right of the main
application window.

In our example, the toolbar "MyToolbar" has been added to the list:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1416

5. Click the Command tab and drag and drop commands onto the new toolbar.

In our example, the toolbar "MyToolbar" contains three icons:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1417

6. To rename a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Rename... button

and enter the new name, then click OK.

7. To delete a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the Delete... button,

then click OK.

8. To restore the original contents of a toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, click the

Restore... button, then click OK.

The Restore All... button restores the original contents of all toolbars.

9. To hide or display a user-defined toolbar, click the Toolbar tab again, select a toolbar, and click the Hide or

Show button to toggle toolbar display on or off, then click OK.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1418

Your customization is stored in the settings only when exiting the session.
If you intend to acquire or remove licenses using Tools > Options > General > Shareable Products, you
need first to exit then restart your Version 5 session before accessing this tab in order to recover your
customization.
Acquiring or releasing shareable products implies that all the toolbars and menus are regenerated. The
user interface is recomputed using the last settings saved and therefore, if your customization has not
been previously saved, it will be lost.

Working with ENOVIA LCA: Optimal CATIA PLM Usability

The Safe Save mode prevents the user from creating or editing data in CATIA that cannot be correctly
saved in ENOVIA V5.
Working in this mode means that certain commands are unavailable (i.e. grayed out) as you enter the workbench.

However, these unavailable commands are not grayed when displaying the list of commands using Tools >
Customize. As a consequence, if you drag and drop one of these commands onto a toolbar then use it, bear in mind
that the created data will not be saved in ENOVIA V5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1419

Creating User-Defined Workbenches

This task explains how to create and customize workbenches.

1. Select Tools > Customize or right-click any icon in any toolbar then select Customize to open the

Customize dialog box:

The symbol might be displayed next to a workbench name in the Available list to identify a workbench
that has been locked by your administrator. This means that you cannot transfer the locked workbench to
the Favorites list and that the workbench is not listed in the Start menu. For detailed information, refer
to Administering the Workbench list.

2. Under the Start Menu tab, you can select a workbench then click the arrow (or right-click it then
select Add) to display it in the Favorites list.

3. Repeat the previous step as many times as necessary. In our example, six workbenches have been

transferred to the Favorites list:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1420

You can then use the Ctrl, Shift, Alt and Other... buttons to include them in the shortcut displayed in the

Accelerator box.

The Other... button lets you see the list of available keys. Select a key then click the Add button, or

double-click a key.

Whichever method you use, the corresponding choice is displayed in the Accelerator box, for example

like this: Ctrl+.

The shortcut you define appears besides the workbench name in the Start menu.

4. Click the User Workbenches tab.

Note that the New... option is available only if there is an active workbench: if no document is open, the
New... option is grayed out.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1421

5. Click the New... option to display the New User Workbench dialog box:

6. Enter the name for your workbench, then click OK.

In our example, let's assume the name of the user workbench is "My Workbench". Clicking the OK button
adds the workbench name to the list...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1422

... and deactivates the current workbench, and activates "My Workbench", represented by the icon top

right: .

7. Access the Toolbars tab, then click the New... option to start adding toolbars to "My Workbench".

The New Toolbar dialog box and an empty toolbar are displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1423

In the New Toolbar dialog box:

● the Workbenches list contains a list of all workbenches related to the current working context: in our
example, a CATPart document was open when we created "My Workbench", so the list contains all
workbenches that could possibly be activated in a CATPart document
● the Toolbars list contains the toolbars belonging to the selected workbench.

8. Select a workbench from the Workbench list.

The toolbars belonging to the selected workbench are displayed in the Toolbars list.

9. Select a toolbar.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1424

10. Name the new toolbar to be included in your workbench.

11. Click OK, and close the Customize dialog box.

The contents of the toolbar are added to your empty toolbar, for example:

You can then drag your new toolbar and dock it to the right of the application window so that your
workshop now looks like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1425

Note: your user-defined workbench will remain active after it is created, until you activate another
workbench.

Your new workbench is added to:

● the top of the Start menu (and to the Favorites list in the Start Menu tab)
● the Welcome to CATIA V5 dialog box, which appears when you start a session, or when you click the
icon representing the current workbench
● the list of workbench icons accessed by right-clicking the current workbench icon.

You can also insert your favorite workbenches in the Workbenches toolbar.

This toolbar is activated when you select Workbenches from the toolbar list:

The Workbenches toolbar displays the workbenches selected as favorites in the Start Menu tab of the
Customize dialog box.

In the example below, we selected the Product Structure, Real Time Rendering and Catalog Editor
workbenches as favorites. Thus, the Workbenches toolbar will look like this:

Click one of the icons to start the corresponding workbench.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1426

More about favorite workbenches

● When removing a dynamic (i.e. non-static and shareable) license during a session, the corresponding favorite
workbench disappears from the list of favorites. From now on, when the removed license is acquired once again,
the workbench automatically reappears in the list of favorites. You do not need to add it manually anymore
● If you installed a configuration containing more than 12 workbenches (such as the "AL2" configuration), only the
first 12 workbenches are displayed in the Favorites list. The other workbenches do not appear in the list
● Your customization is stored in the settings only when exiting the session.
If you intend to acquire or remove licenses using Tools > Options > General > Shareable Products, you need first
to exit then restart your Version 5 session before accessing this tab in order to recover your customization.
Acquiring or releasing shareable products implies that all the toolbars and menus are regenerated. The user
interface is recomputed using the last settings saved and therefore, if your customization has not been previously
saved, it will be lost.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1427

Administering the Workbench List

This scenario walks you through a procedure dedicated to administrators for managing the list of
workbenches displayed in the Start menu. The aim is to give end users a restricted access to these
workbenches by making some them unavailable.
Once a workbench is locked, it is no longer listed in the Start menu and end users cannot set it as a
favorite workbench.

1. Start a session in administration mode. For full details, refer to Locking Settings.

2. Select Tools > Customize or right-click any icon in any toolbar then select Customize to open

the Customize dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1428

3. Under the Start Menu tab, right-click the workbench to be locked then select Lock/Unlock. A

pop-up is displayed to inform you that you need to restart your Version 5 session to take your

modifications into account and the symbol is displayed next to the locked workbench:

4. Repeat the previous step as many times as necessary. In our scenario, we lock the following

workbenches: Assembly Design and Product Structure.

If you change your mind afterwards and decide to unlock a workbench, right-click it then
select Lock/Unlock to remove the lock.
Note also that if you want to lock a workbench that is already listed in the Favorites list, you
have first to remove the workbench from this list before locking it. Otherwise, an error
message is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1429

5. Click the lock symbol right under the Start Menu tab. The lock symbol now looks like this:
.

6. Click Close then exit your Version 5 session. The list of locked workbenches is stored in a

settings file named FrameConfig.CATSettings referenced by the CATReferenceSettingPath

environment variable.

An end user who starts a session with the normal startup commands and using the same environment,
will see this after selecting Tools > Customize:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1430

As you can see, the lock symbol now looks like this: .

This means that the end user is not able to make changes in this tab:

● the Lock/Unlock command is grayed out to prevent the user from locking or unlocking
workbenches
● an error message is displayed if the user tries to transfer a locked workbench to the Favorites list.

However, the end user can still select authorized workbenches as favorites.

If the administrator did not lock the Start Menu tab as explained in step 5, the end user will be able to
lock or unlock workbenches and therefore, he will also be able to transfer them to the Favorites list.

Then, when the end user selects Start to display the content of the Start menu, the workbenches that
have been locked by the administrator are not listed anymore and the end user cannot use them.
For instance, the Assembly Design workbench has been locked in step 3 and when the end user selects
Start > Mechanical Design, Assembly Design is no longer listed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1431

Once a workbench is locked by the administrator, the end user cannot access it, even though he
acquires the corresponding license afterwards.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1432

Customizing Command Properties

This task explains how to customize command properties by assigning keyboard shortcuts or icons to the
commands.

Note that this does not apply to icon boxes which cannot be customized.

1. Select Tools > Customize or right-click any icon in any toolbar then select Customize to open

the Customize dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1433

The dialog box contains three tabs:

● Start Menu: customizes the Start menu and workbench access icons (as described in
Accessing the Navigation Tools)

● User Workbenches: lets you create your own workbenches

● Toolbars: lists the currently visible toolbars (default)
● Commands: lists the commands you can drag and drop onto a toolbar
● Options: contains general customization options.

2. Access the Commands tab to list the commands available.

The grey frame below the Categories and Commands lists gives you information on the
selected command. When there are more than two lines of text, the arrows displayed to the
right are grayed out to let you scroll up or down.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1434

3. Select a category (menu name), then double-click a command, or select it and click the Show

Properties... button.

The Command Properties frame is added to the bottom of the dialog box:

4. Enter a new name for the command, if needed, in the title box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1435

5. Click the Ctrl, Shift and Other buttons to include them in the shortcut displayed in the

Accelerator box.

If the command you are customizing is not represented in a toolbar, a menu bar, etc., the
Accelerator box is grayed out to prevent you from defining a new accelerator or from using
an already existing accelerator. In that case, simply drag and drop the command onto any
toolbar to activate the Accelerator box.

6. If you want to use another key, click the Other... button to see the list of available keys:

7. Select a key then click the Add button, or double-click a key.

Whichever method you use, the corresponding choice is displayed in the Accelerator box, for
example like this: Ctrl+.

The User Alias box lets you assign an alias to the selected command. After clicking the Close
button, you just have to type c:alias_name in the power input field to run the command. For
example:

enter cap in the User Alias box

then

enter c:cap in the power input field

press Enter.

The Capture command starts.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1436

8. Click the ... button to the right of the Icon option (bottom right).

This displays the Icons Browser which lets you access all the graphic icons installed with the
Version 5 software, then browse to select the appropriate icon:

By default, only Version 5 icons are displayed in the Icons Browser. If you want to be able to
pick customized icons, proceed as follows:

● first, create a directory ending either with ...\icons\normal or ...\icons\small. For instance,
"e:\users\icons\normal"
● then, according to the size of your icons, put them in the appropriate directory
● access the Environment Editor and valuate the CATGraphicPath variable with the beginning
of the path to the directory you created but without mentioning "\normal" or
"\small": in our example, you simply enter "e:\users\icons"
● click OK to validate then re-access the Icons Browser: your customized icons are
displayed and you can associate them to commands.

However, keep in mind that bitmap images exceeding 24 bits per pixel are not supported.

Note also that if the customized icon you select is too big, it will be replaced by a default
image in the Command Properties frame:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1437

9. Click an icon then click the Close button (if you used the Icons Browser).

The icon is now displayed for the command in the Commands tab, and the Show
Properties... button changes to Hide Properties... as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1438

10. Click the icon to open the File Selection dialog box which lets you browse your file tree to
select your own icons. You just have to select the desired icon then click Open.

If you want the selected icon to be taken into account in Version 5, you need to access the

Environment Editor and valuate the CATGraphicPath variable with the path to the directory

containing the icon. Otherwise, you will still be able to select the icon in the File Selection

dialog box but it will not be taken into account in your session.

11. Click the Reset... button to access the reset options.

You can:

● restore the original settings of the present command

● or restore the original settings of all commands in the present category.

12. Click the VR Button Customize button to access the Button Customize dialog box which lets

you assign any command or macro to a device button.

For detailed information, refer to Customizing Buttons in this guide.

13. Click the Close button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1439

Customizing Options

This task explains how to customize general options.

1. Select Tools > Customize or right-click any icon in any toolbar then select Customize to open

the Customize dialog box:

2. Access the Options tab:

All the options displayed in this dialog box can be locked by the administrator.
When an option is locked, it is disabled when the end user starts a session and a red lock

symbol is displayed to the left of the locked option.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1440

Large Icons
By default, the option Large Icons is activated, which means that the size of the toolbar icons
is classic.

If you want the toolbar icons to have a smaller size, click to clear this check box.

Icon Size Ratio

When the option Large Icons is activated and if you are working on Windows, you can use the
slider Icon Size Ratio to define more precisely the ratio to be applied. You can choose a value
comprised between 1 and 5.
Once the ratio is defined, you need to restart your Version 5 session to take the new size into
account.

Below are two examples with two different icon sizes:

Ratio = 1 (default) Ratio = 1.5

Tooltips
Select the Tooltips check box to display tooltips.

Tooltips are short help messages displayed when you point to icons, as explained in Displaying
Tooltips and Help Messages.

Lock Toolbar Position

Select the Lock Toolbar Position check box to lock the position of all toolbars so that they
cannot be moved.

Note that you do not need to restart the session to take the lock into account.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1441

User Interface Language

The User Interface Language check box lets you define a Version 5 user interface language
independently from any other localized languages that may be used in other applications. This
option is used as follows:

● you can either leave the box to Environment language (default), which corresponds to
the language you define in the Regional Settings tab (on Windows) or in the LANG variable
(on UNIX)
● or you can set the box to English to display Version 5 dialog messages in English, the
messages of remaining applications being localized.
The use of English messages in Version 5 can make easier the communication with patners.

Once you have selected the desired language, you have to restart your Version 5 session to
take the new language into account.

Note: The use of this option with values other than Environment language (default) or
English is not supported.

3. Click Close to validate.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1442

Customizing Buttons
This task explains how to customize buttons which allows you to assign (i.e. map) any given command or macro to a device
button.
This functionality is available for any application-supported hardware providing the necessary buttons, e.g. Space Mouse and
the Spaceball range of 3D input devices, joysticks, Intersense wand, etc.

The SpacePilot (a new version of the SpaceBall/SpaceMouse with an LCD panel) is also supported. Refer to Activating Viewing
Tools for a general overview of this device.

1. Select View > Toolbars > 3DxDevice to display the 3DxDevice toolbar.

Before you begin, just a few words about the toolbar:

The 3DxDevice toolbar contains native integrated commands which let you modify the mode of the 3Dconnexion®
device you are currently using. For detailed information, you can browse the following Internet site:

http://www.3dconnexion.com

Clicking:

activates or deactivates the translation mode

activates or deactivates the rotation mode

activates or deactivates the dominant mode

increases the sensitivity of the device

decreases the sensitivity of the device

resets the sensitivity of the device to its original state

activates or deactivates the fast zoom mode. Note that when the fast zoom mode is on, all other manipulation
commands are disabled.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1443

When entering the Sketcher workbench, the rotation mode is automatically deactivated.

2. In the 3DxDevice toolbar, click Opens the Button Customization dialog box to open the Button
Customization dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1444
You can also access the Button Customization dialog box using one of the methods below:

● select Tools > Customize, choose the Commands tab then select VR Button Customization
● select View > Commands List then select VR Button Customization
● type c:VR Button Customize or c:3Dx Button Customize in the power input field then press Enter
● press button "1" of your Space Mouse or Spaceball (if you are using original settings).

This scenario uses the SpacePilot as an example but do not forget that the buttons displayed in the Button
Customization dialog box depend on the device you are using. For instance, when using the SpaceMouse, the look
of the dialog box is as follows:

Let's have a look at the information displayed in this dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1445

● the Device list displays the name of the device you are using
● the Button Configuration list displays the default configurations available as well as the configurations you
created
● the command icon displays the mapped command icon (if available) as it is shown on a toolbar
● the button drag-and-drop area displays the title of the command or macro which is currently assigned to the
corresponding device button. For instance, the Redo command has been assigned to "Button 2"
● the button title displays the device button title. For instance, with a SpaceBall 4000FLX the tenth button from the
top is shown as "Button A"

● the navigation buttons are not grayed out to let you skip backward and forward through the pages if
the device you have chosen has more than 15 buttons.

In addition to that:

● pointing at a command name displays the tooltip of the corresponding mapped command:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1446

● pressing a device button displays a red arrow to the left of the corresponding button name in the Button
Customization dialog box:

When starting a Version 5 session with no settings defined, two default mappings are provided in the two default
configurations shown below, provided that you use the new device and you installed the new driver (minimum level
required: 5.0.7):

Default configuration 1 Default Configuration 2

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1447

Note that this mapping differs from the one of the SpaceMouse. In that case, only the former default configuration is
available and this, whatever the driver version (anterior to 5.0.7 or later) you installed.
Similarly, if you use the SpacePilot with a driver anterior to 5.0.7, only the former default configuration is available:

3. In the Device area, use the list to select the device to be used. In our example, the device is a SpacePilot.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1448

4. In the Button Configuration area, select the default configuration to be used:

● if you are using the SpacePilot and the new driver, you can choose between Default 1 and Default 2 as

explained above

● if you are using a SpaceMouse, only one default configuration is available (whatever the driver).

5. To create a new button configuration, click the New button:

● with the SpacePilot and the new driver, the configuration is initialized with Default 1

● with a SpaceMouse, the configuration is initialized with the default configuration.

Each configuration you create is named "Configurationn", "n" is incremented by "1" for each new configuration.

Once several configurations have been created, you can switch from one configuration to another using the list.

6. If you want to delete one of the configurations you created, select it from the list then click the Delete button.

Note that default configurations cannot be deleted.

7. You can also rename the configurations (either default or new) displayed in the list. To do so, right-click the

configuration to be renamed from the list then select Rename. This opens the Rename Configuration dialog box:

In the New title box, enter the new configuration name then click OK to validate. The new name is then displayed in
the Button Configuration list:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1449

8. Map the desired device button to a particular command or macro using one of the four methods detailed below:

Dragging and dropping from a toolbar

1.1 Make sure that the toolbar containing the command to be mapped is visible.

1.2 Press and hold down the left-mouse button on top of the command icon.

1.3 Drag the icon to the top of the drag-and-drop area of the selected button:

1.4 Release the left-mouse button.

The command is assigned to the device button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1450

Dragging and dropping from the Customize dialog box

1.1 In the Button Customize dialog box, click the Customize... button or select Tools > Customize to

open the Customize dialog box.

1.2 Select the Commands tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1451

1.3 In the Categories list, select a category to map a command, or select the "Macros" category to map a

macro.

1.4 Select the command or macro to be mapped from the list of commands.

1.5 Press and hold down the left-mouse button on top of the command or macro entry.

1.6 Drag the command to the top of the button drag-and-drop area.

1.7 Release the left-mouse button.

The command is assigned to the device button.

Note that you can now assign the 3Dx Swap view/tree command to one of the buttons of your Space
Mouse or Spaceball in order to swap the focus between the specification tree and the geometry.

Dragging and dropping from another button

You can copy a command or macro already assigned to a device button. To do so:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1452

1.1 Press and hold down the left-mouse button on top of the button drag-and-drop area of the button

mapping to be copied.

1.2 Drag the button mapping to the other button drag-and-drop area the command or macro is to be

assigned to.

1.3 Release the left-mouse button.

The command or macro is now assigned to two different device buttons.

Using the contextual menu

As an alternative to the above-detailed drag-and-drop methods, it is also possible to use the contextual menu to
access the complete list of available commands.

1.1 Right-click the desired button drag-and-drop area to display the contextual menus:

1.2 Select Get Command.... The Commands list dialog box listing the Version 5 commands available is

displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1453

1.3 In the Commands list dialog box, select the command to be mapped.

Two new Version 5 commands can be mapped:

● 3Dx Next Configuration lets you cycle forward through the configurations displayed in the
configuration list
● 3Dx Previous Configuration lets you cycle backward through the configurations displayed in the
configuration list.

Once these commands have been mapped, you just have to press one of the corresponding device button
(for instance, the one corresponding to the 3Dx Next Configuration command) then close the Button
Customize dialog box. The next time you open the dialog box, the button mapping corresponding to the
next configuration in the list will be displayed.

1.4 When finished, click OK to validate.

The button drag-and-drop area now shows the title of the mapped command.

1.5 Select the Get Driver Command... to display a list of 3DxWare functions that can be mapped:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1454

1.6 Select the 3Dx command to be mapped then click OK to validate.

If you wish to remove a button mapping, simply right-click the desired button drag-and-drop area then
select Delete. This empties the button drag-and-drop area to indicate that no macro or command is
currently assigned to this device button.

The contextual menu also lets you restore the selected button to its original settings by selecting Default.
In case the selected button has no original settings but only a mapped command or macro, the button drag-
and-drop area is emptied (mapped commands or macros are not considered as original settings).

Now let's go back to the main scenario:

9. Repeat step 8 as many times as needed to map your device buttons.

10. Click OK to validate your mapping and close the Button Customization dialog box.

The mapping you defined is saved in Version 5 settings, more precisely in a file named
VRButtonCustomize.CATSettings.

11. Press the desired device button to activate the command you assigned to it. Note that if the Button Customization

dialog box is still open, pressing a device button has no effect.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1455

From V5R15 onwards, the calibration state is shared by your Version 5 session and the device driver. Therefore, any
change made in Version 5 (for instance, disabling the rotation) is automatically made in the button function of the
device driver and reciprocally:

12. Access the 3Dxconnexion Control Panel then click the Motion Settings button to open the Motion Settings dialog

box (click the thumbnail to see the full-size picture):

13. Access your Version 5 session so that it is displayed in background then, in the Motion Settings dialog box, clear the

Rotation check box: the Rotation command is instantaneously disabled in Version 5:

14. In the Motion Settings dialog box, click OK to validate your modification and close the dialog box.

Note that this applies only to calibration items that can be modified, i.e. Sensitivity, Dominant Mode, Translation
On/Off and Rotation On/Off.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1456
The calibration state is saved in the driver settings. The default calibration calibration can be restored by entering the
following command:

c:3Dx Sensitivity Reset

15. To restore the button mappings, click the Restore... button to open the following dialog box:

Two options are available:

● Current device lets you restore the original button mapping for the device you are currently using
● All devices lets you restore the button mapping for all devices to their original commands.

In both cases, if the button mappings have no original settings but only mapped commands or macros, the button
drag-and-drop areas will be emptied since mapped commands or macros are not considered as original settings.

16. Select the appropriate option then click OK to validate.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1457

Using the Tools Palette

This task aims at giving general information on the Tools Palette and shows a few examples of how the
Tools Palette can look like.
For workbench-specific information, you have to refer to the corresponding workbench documentation.

The Tools Palette is a toolbar containing a set of contextual tools (e.g. options or boxes) dedicated to
the command you activate.
Therefore, the look and content of the Tools Palette vary according to the workbench in which you are
working and according to the command you are using.
In addition to that, note that not all the commands display a Tools Palette.

Whatever the workbench, the name of this toolbar is always the same, i.e. Tools Palette.

Note that, contrary to the other toolbars available in Version 5, you cannot dock the Tools Palette.

● In the Drafting workbench, when you click Dimensions in the Dimensioning toolbar, the
following Tools Palette is displayed:

● Still in the Drafting workbench, when clicking Line in the Geometry Creation toolbar, the
Tools Palette looks like this:

In the above example, you can see that the Tools Palette contains a tool, , as well as
two boxes, L (for Length) and A (for Angle).

● Now if you access the Image & Shape workbench then click Sphere in the Creation toolbar,
the following Tools Palette is displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1458

About Multi-Selection
In workbenches allowing you to perform multiple selections, the Tools Palette may look like this:

● The first seven icons let you select objects using the selection traps.
For detailed information on these commands, refer to Selecting Using the Selection Traps.

● The Control mode icon lets you enter the advanced selection mode. In this mode, you can
select multiple elements by pressing Ctrl in multiple steps. "Multiple steps" means that you can
select several object, release the Ctrl key then press it again to add objects to your first selection.
As this selection mode is controlled, you can choose when you want the selection to stop, contrary to
the selection traps that are "single action-oriented", i.e. objects are selected in one go.

When you start selecting objects, the name of the first object you select is displayed in the
toolbar:

Then, when at least two elements are selected, the List of selected items icon is
activated and the number of selected elements is displayed instead of the element's name
(this icon is grayed out when only one element is selected since it is not relevant):

● The List of selected items icon opens the Elements list dialog box that lists the elements
you selected along with their path:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1459

● The Finish icon lets you stop the selection when you are done: all the elements you selected so
far are taken into account. As long as you do not click this icon, you can keep on selecting objects
and add them to your selection list.

However, depending on the workench you are using, the advanced selection mode may be implemented
in a different way. In that case, not all the icons are displayed and the look of the Tools Palette is
impacted as explained by the two examples below.
● If only the List of selected items icon and the Finish icon are displayed:

This means that the advanced selection mode is automatically activated and you can start
selecting objects using the Ctrl key.

● If only the Finish icon is displayed:

This means that the advanced selection mode is automatically activated and that you cannot
have any feedback on the elements you select.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1460

Customizing Standards
About Standards
Customizing Standards for Layers and Filters
Customizing Standards for Line Thickness
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1461

About Standards

This section aims at giving a general overview of standards. For detailed information on standards which are
specific to a workbench, you will be asked to refer to the corresponding documentation.

The second part of this section shows a basic example of how standards impact the documents you create.

Introduction

Standards are defined by your administrator in XML (Extensible Markup Language) files and let you set default
values for element properties.
Standards can be customized afterwards according to your needs but bear in mind that unless you are logged
as administrator, you will not able to modify standards.

There are two types of standards:

● default standards provided by Dassault Systèmes. These standards can be customized using the
interactive standard editor.
For detailed information on each type of standards, you have to refer to the corresponding documentation.
These default standards are dispatched in several categories:
❍ General parameters including
■ default graphic attributes (for Solids, OpenBodies, Points, Lines, Planes and Surfaces) in
CATStdMechanicalDesign.xml
■ attributes for layers and filters in
■ CATStdLayerAndFilter.xml and CATStdTypeLayerAndFilter.xml for CATPart documents
■ CATDftStdLayerAndFilter.xml and CATDftStdTypeLayerAndFilter.xml for .CATDrawing
documents.
Refer to Customizing Standards for Layers and Filters in this guide.

■ attributes for line thickness in CATStdLineThickness.xml. Note that these attributes are relevant for
.CATDrawing documents only.
Refer to Customizing Standards for Line Thickness in this guide

■ Aerospace SheetMetal Design parameters in AerospaceSheetMetalDesign.xml. For detailed

information, refer to the Version 5 - Aerospace SheetMetal Design User's Guide - "Administration
Tasks".

❍ Drafting parameters: as far as .CATDrawing documents are concerned, the use and administration of
their specific standards (dress-up, annotations, etc.) is detailed in the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting
User's Guide - "Administration Tasks"

❍ DXF/DWG Interface parameters: for detailed information, refer to the Version 5 - Data
Exchange Interfaces User's Guide - "Administration Tasks".
❍ Generative parameters: for detailed information on generative view styles, refer to the Version 5 -
Generative Drafting User's Guide - "Administration Tasks".
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1462

As far as default standards are concerned, their file name cannot be modified.

● user standards which are created and managed by the administrator.

In both cases, the administrator controls the access to the standard files and can, for instance, prevent users
to edit one or more of these files.

Standard files are identified by two runtime environment variables which are:

Environment variable Description

CATDefaultCollectionStandard Indicates the name and path of the sub-directory (or sub-
directories) containing the default standards provided by
Dassault Systèmes. This variable is set by default to
installation_folder\resources\standard during the installation
procedure

CATCollectionStandard Indicates the name and path of the sub-directory (or sub-
directories) containing the standards customized by the
administrator. This means that you should save your
customized standards in these sub-directories

For detailed information on environment variables, refer to What is An Environment? in the Version 5
Installation and Administration Guide.
For detailed information on how to set variables, refer to Customizing Your Environment on Window or
Customizing Your Environment on UNIX (depending on your operating system).

Impact of standards - Example

This scenario will show you how to access the pre-defined values for information only using the interactive
standard editor and then, how these standards impact the new documents you will create.

Bear in mind that if you want to be able to modify standards, you must be logged as administrator. An
example of customization is given in Customizing Standards for Layers and Filters.

Our example deals with default graphic attributes and thus, this scenario assumes you set up the
corresponding CATStdMechanicalDesign file. To do so:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1463

1. Access the following folder to copy the CATStdMechanicalDesign file:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\startup\templates

(where n is the current release number)

2. Paste the CATStdMechanicalDesign file in the following folder:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\Bn\intel_a\resources\standard

1. Select Tools > Standards to access the interactive standard editor:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1464

Bear in mind that you cannot modify the data, you access the editor for information only.

2. Select the Category you want to display: either General or Drafting-specific. Once a category is

selected, the corresponding .xml file names are displayed in the File list. For instance,

CATStdLayersAndFilters.xml lets you define default properties for the current layer and filter.

3. From the file list, select the CATStdMechanicalDesign.xml file to display the default visualization

properties defined by your administrator.

4. Click the plus sign next to CATStdMechanicalDesign node then repeat this step for each node to display

the complete xml tree structure. As you can see in the dialog box below, standards can be defined for

Solids, OpenBodies, Points, Lines, Planes and Surfaces:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1465

5. Select the desired item in the tree to expand the node then select the desired element to display the

corresponding values on the right.

In our example, we display standards applied to the point default color but you can display standards

for all 3D elements such as line type, thickness, etc.

The interactive standard editor shows that the default color for points is green which means that in
any new document you will create, points will be created with a green color.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1466

6. Click OK to close the interactive editor.

7. Suppose you create a new part document by clicking the New icon or by selecting File > New.

Standards impact new CATPart documents only. They do not apply to other documents you may

have previously created.

For detailed information on document creation, refer to Creating New Documents in this guide.

8. From the Start menu, select Shape Design then access the Generative Shape Design workbench.

9. Create as many points as you wish by clicking the Point icon then entering the desired coordinates:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1467

The color of the created points matches the color displayed in the interactive editor.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1468

Customizing Standards for Layers and Filters

As explained in About Standards, default standards for layers and filters are provided by Dassault Systèmes and
referenced by the CATDefaultCollectionStandard environment variable which is set to
installation_folder\resources\standard by default.

Two sets of .xml files are provided:

● CATStdLayerAndFilter.xml and CATStdTypeLayerAndFilter.xml for part documents

● CATDftStdLayerAndFilter.xml and CATDftStdTypeLayerAndFilter.xml for .CATDrawing documents.

The default values set in these samples can easily be customized to address your needs, provided that you are logged
as administrator.

This scenario aims at explaining how to modify the standard parameters for layers and filters either by using the
interactive editor, or by editing the .xml standard file.
The CATStdLayersAndFilters.xml is taken as an example but the method is identical for editing the
CATDftStdLayersAndFilters.xml file which is also available in the General category.

Prior to modifying standards, you need to set the CATCollectionStandard environment variable to identify the location
where your customized standards will be saved.
For detailed information on how to set environment variables, refer to Customizing Your Environment on Windows (or
on UNIX depending on your operating system).

Using the interactive editor

1. Select Tools > Standards to access the interactive standard editor:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1469

2. Check that the General category is selected then from the file list, select the CATStdLayersAndFilters.xml file.

3. Click the plus sign next to the CATStdLayersAndFilters node then repeat this step for each node to display the

complete XML tree structure with the values defined by your administrator.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1470

As you can see in the picture below, standard properties have been defined for the following instances:

● current layer and filter

● 2 layers named General and Basic geometry.

Refer to Assigning Objects to Layers for detailed information on how to use layers

● 3 filters named None, All and Current.

Refer to Using Visualization Filters for detailed information on layer filters.

More precisely, our example shows that the layer Basic geometry has been assigned number "1" without any

comment:

Now let's suppose you want to add a new layer. To do so:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1471

4. Select the Layers node from the tree structure then click the Add instance button to the right.

This creates a new instance in the tree structure which is named "NoNameDefined" by default.

5. Select the created instance, i.e. "NoNameDefined" then assign a number (the value must be comprised between

0 and 999) to the layer, a name of your own choosing as well as a comment (if necessary) in the corresponding

fields as shown below:

6. To create a new filter, select the Filter List node then click the Add instance button.

7. Select the created instance (NoNameDefined) then enter a name and a value:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1472

You can modify any field value anytime simply by selecting the desired instance then entering the new value
in the corresponding field.

8. In case you are not satisfied with an instance, select the node under which you want to remove an instance then

click the Remove instance button (in our example, we choose the Layers node).

This opens the following dialog box which displays the list of available instances for the selected node:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1473

Just select the instance to be deleted then click OK to validate.

9. When finished, you can:

● click OK to save the modifications in the CATStdLayersAndFilters.xml file. A pop-up message will inform

you that the modified standard file has been saved in the directory specified when setting the

CATCollectionStandard variable

● click the Save As New button to save the modifications in a new .xml file. Clicking this button opens the

Save As dialog box which places you in the directory you specified when setting the

CATCollectionStandard variable. This new file will then be accessible from the File list.

Note: you cannot change the default name of standard files included in the General category. For these

files, the Save As New button can only be used to generate a new file in another directory but still with the

same name.

Editing the XML file

Standard files are stored in a format called XML (EXtensible Markup Language) used to exchange data very easily.
XML files can be customized in a simple way, for instance to add new layers and filters, provided that you respect some
syntax rules detailed hereafter.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1474
Be careful not to edit the CATStdTypeLayerAndFilter.xml file since it contains the layer and filter type definition used
in the CATStdLayerAndFilter.xml file:

1. Open the CATStdLayerAndFilter.xml file in your XML editor. This file is made up of the following parts:

● XML starting tags indicating the format as well as the name and type of the file:

● data related to the "Current" layer and filter, i.e. the layer to which objects are assigned and the
visualization filter set as current. We recommend that you leave these data unchanged to avoid any
trouble or misunderstanding.
In our example, the value "-1" corresponds to the layer "None" which means that there is no current
layer:

● the list of layers declared in this standard file. This list is surrounded by <std:node name="Layers"> at
the beginning and </std:node> at the end.
Two layers have been defined in our example, each layer definition containing a Number and a Name (a
Comment may be added, if necessary):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1475

● the list of layer filters. This list is surrounded by <std:node name="LayersFilters"> at the beginning and
</std:node> at the end.
Three filters have been defined in our example, each filter definition containing a Name and a Value:

● the file ends with the tag </std:node>.

2. To declare a new layer, you just have to add a <std:typeval name="CATLayer"> ... </std:typeval> sequence to

the "Layers" node. For instance:

<std:typeval name="CATLayer">
<std:intval name="Number">50</std:intval>
<std:strval name="Name">My new layer name</std:strval>
</std:typeval>

Note that the layer number must be comprised between 0 and 999.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1476

3. To declare a new filter, add a <std:typeval name="CATLayersFilter"> ... </std:typeval> sequence to the

"LayersFilters" node.

For instance:

<std:typeval name="CATLayersFilters">
<std:strval name="Name">Only Layer One</std:strval>
<std:strval name="Value">Layer=1</std:strval>
</std:typeval>

As you can see it in the above example, a filter must be created using a layer number. However, neither filter
value nor filter definition needs the layer to be declared.

For instance, you can enter:

<std:typeval name="CATLayersFilters">
<std:strval name="Name">My Filter</std:strval>
<std:strval name="Value">Layer=0 + Layer=50 + Layer=100</std:strval>
</std:typeval>

even if "Layer 100" does not exist.

You can even use more complex expressions such as "Layer=0 + (Layer>50 & Layer<100)" but the simpler,
the better.

4. When finished, save the modified .xml file.

The new standards for layers and filters are applied to any documents you create from now on.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1477

Customizing Standards for Line Thickness

As explained in About Standards, default line thickness definitions are provided by Dassault Systèmes
and referenced by the CATDefaultCollectionStandard environment variable which is set to
installation_folder\resources\standard by default.

Line thickness is a property which can be applied to elements such as lines, curves, dimension lines, etc.
But keep in mind that line thickness cannot be applied to fonts and points.
As far as .CATDrawing documents are concerned, you do not use the CATStdLineThickness.xml file but
specific files provided in the Drafting category. Refer to the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting User's Guide -
"Administration Tasks, Setting Standard Parameters, Line Thickness Definition".

These default definitions are grouped together in the CATStdLineThickness.xml file. The values set in the
samples provided can easily be customized to address your needs, provided that you are logged as
administrator.
The defined thicknesses can then be applied to any element which supports line thickness, either using
the Edit > Properties or the Graphic Properties toolbar.

This scenario aims at explaining how to create and modify line thickness definitions using the interactive
editor.

Prior to modifying standards, you need to set the CATCollectionStandard environment variable to identify
the location where your customized standards will be saved.
For detailed information on how to set environment variables, refer to Customizing Your Environment on
Windows (or on UNIX depending on your operating system).

1. Select Tools > Standards to access the interactive standard editor.

2. Check that the General category is selected then from the file list, select the

CATStdLineThickness.xml file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1478

3. Click the plus sign next to the CATStdLineThickness node: a list of 55 line thickness definition is

displayed.

● line thickness definitions ranging from 1 to 8 are pre-defined with different parameters for

each, and available (i.e. the Availability box displays "1")

● line thickness definitions ranging from 9 to 55 are pre-defined with the same parameters

for all, and unavailable (i.e. the Availability box displays "0").
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1479

Now let's suppose you want to add a new line thickness. To do so:

4. Select the CATStdLineThickness node from the tree structure then click the Add instance button

to the right.

This creates a new instance in the tree structure. The number of the new line thickness is

incremented by one and therefore, its number will be "56".

5. Select the created instance, i.e. "56" then define the thickness parameters either by entering the

values directly in the boxes or using arrows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1480

● Availability: indicates whether the line thickness definition is available in the thickness

list for users to choose from, when creating or editing elements.

❍ 0 means that the definition is unavailable

❍ 1 means that the definition is available

You can only assign "available" line thickness definitions to elements. However,

existing element properties in drawings will not be affected: if an existing element is

assigned a line thickness which is flagged as "unavailable" in the Standards editor,

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1481

then this line thickness will be used for this element but it will not be available in

the thickness list, so that users cannot apply it to other elements.

● Pixel: sets the size in pixels. This value reflects the result displayed on screen

● mm: sets the line thickness in millimeters (mm). This value corresponds to the printed

version.

You can modify any value anytime simply by selecting the desired line number then entering
the new values in the corresponding fields.

6. In case you are not satisfied with a line thickness, select the CATStdLineThickness node then

click the Remove instance button.

This opens the following dialog box which displays the list of available instances:

Just select the instance to be deleted then click OK to validate.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1482

7. When finished, you can:

● click OK to save the modifications in the CATStdLineThickness.xml file. A pop-up message

informs you that the modified standard file has been saved in the directory specified when

setting the CATCollectionStandard variable

● click the Save As New button to save the modifications in a new .xml file. Clicking this

button opens the Save As dialog box which places you in the directory you specified when

setting the CATCollectionStandard variable. This new file will then be accessible from the

File list.

Note: you cannot change the default name of standard files included in the General category.

For these files, the Save As New button can only be used to generate a new file in another

directory but still with the same name.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1483

Customizing Settings
About Settings
General
Infrastructure
Mechanical Design
Shape
Analysis & Simulation
Machining
Digital Mockup
Equipment and Systems
Ergonomics Design & Analysis
Knowledgeware
ENOVIA V5 VPM
Machining Simulation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1484
About Settings

Types of Data Created by Version 5

Version 5 creates two types of data:
● application data contained in the documents you create
● and setting files which are non-editable

There are two types of settings:

● temporary settings
● permanent settings.

Certain Version 5 applications also create preferences.

What Do Settings Files Contain?

Temporary settings contain settings of a temporary nature (album screen captures, roll file information,...)

CATTemp contains two folders or directories:

● Album: contains screen captures created using the Tools->Image->Capture... command

● CNext01.roll: roll file.

Temporary settings are created in a location referenced by the CATTemp variable.

Permanent setting files store customization you perform mainly using the various tabs provided by the Tools->Options... command. For example,
application window customization, background colors, part and print settings, etc.

Permanent setting files are identified by the suffix: *.CATSettings, and are created in a location referenced by the CATUserSettingPath variable.

Deleting either types of files deletes your customization.

How Do You Specify Settings?

You specify settings using the Tools->Options... command which displays the Options dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1485

The left-hand column contains a list of categories used for organizing the different groups of settings. There are general settings for all configurations
and products, and settings for each type of configuration installed. The category names are the same as those listed on the Start menu.

To access the settings for a specific configuration, click the "+" to display the subcategories. Clicking on the subcategory displays the settings tabs for
that subcategory.

Where Are Settings Files Located on Windows?

The location of settings files on Windows platforms is inspired by the general data and settings management requirements operating on the Windows 2000
platform, which provides an underlying infrastructure allowing you to separate user data, user settings and computer settings.

The mechanism used is the CSIDL value mechanism. This implementation allows:

● your permanent settings (CATSettings) to roam as part of your user profile (CSIDL_APPDATA)
● your temporary settings (CATTemp, etc.) to be still stored in the user profile, but prevents them from roaming (CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA).

The following table will help you determine where your settings are now located:

VARIABLE LOCATION
CATUserSettingPath C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATSettings
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1486
CATTemp C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

CATCache Obsolete
CATReport C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATReport

CATErrorLog C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application

Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\error.log

CATMetasearchPath C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

CATW3PublishPath C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp

CSIDL Values in Environment Variable Paths

The values:

C:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data

are the defaults on these Windows platforms for the CSIDL_APPDATA values.

The values:

C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data

are the defaults on these Windows platforms for the CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA values.

Location of Settings Files on UNIX

Permanent settings are stored in the CATSettings directory in your home directory; temporary settings are stored in the CATTemp directory, also in your
home directory.

Administrator Settings

If you start a session in administrator mode using a specific environment, you can lock settings so that other users running a session with the same
environment inherit those settings and cannot change them. For full details how to do so, refer to Locking Settings.

Default Settings and Recommended Settings

Default settings are provided by applications. However, we recommend the following settings to enhance performance:

● General category, Performance tab:

❍ deactivate occlusion culling
❍ level of details (static) = 1 to 1.2
❍ level of details (while moving) = 10 to 11

● General category, Visualization tab:

❍ deactivate the graduated color background

● Product category, Cache Management tab:

❍ work with cache management
❍ cache size = 600MB

Selecting View->Render Style->Shading to work with shading without edges will also enhance performance.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1487

Accessing Settings Without Running a Session

You do not need to start a session to be able to access your settings.
On Windows

1. Change to the default folder in which you installed the product.

On Windows, the default folder is:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16\intel_a\code\bin

2. Enter the command:

CATOptionsMgt
You can also access the Options dialog box using the Start->Programs->CATIA Tools menu, and running the Settings Management V5R16
command.
The Options dialog box is displayed.
This function is useful for administrators because it allows you to set up user settings without having to start an interactive session first.

Specify your settings as usual.

On UNIX

1. Log on as root or end user.

2. Enter the command:

/usr/DassaultSystemes/B16/OS/code/command/catstart -run CATOptionsMgt

What Are Preferences?

Preference files contain user preferences set by the user when using certain applications. For example, certain drafting user choices, the last height of
a pad (Part Design), the list of values entered in certain editable fields, are stored as preferences, but are not settings. Preference files are a
convenient means of storing and recalling user preferences from one session to another.

Consequently, unlike settings, preferences are created by certain applications, and not via the Tools->Options... command.

Preference files are identified by the suffix: *.CATPreferences, and are created in the same location as settings, referenced by the CATUserSettingPath
variable. However, preferences cannot be administered, and consequently are not referenced by the CATReferenceSettingPath variable.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1488

General
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select the Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the General category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize general options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select one of these tabs to customize General options or select a sub-category in the left-hand

box to access specific options.

General
Help
Shareable Products
Licensing
Document
Macros
Performances
Printers
Search
Server Manager
Statistics
Display
Compatibility
Parameters and Measure
Devices and Virtual Reality

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1489

General

This tab deals with the options concerning:

● user interface style

● data save

● disconnection

● referenced documents

● conferencing

● drag and drop

● memory warning

User Interface Style

● P1: sets the P1 user interface style, and is available for both CATIA - P1 and CATIA - P2 users
● P2: sets the P2 user interface style, and is available for CATIA - P2 users only
● P3: sets the P3 immersive user interface style and features, and is available for P3 products/configurations only.

Note: when using the P3 style, the Standard toolbar is designed in a different way and contains only the

Undo and Redo icons. Other icons (such as New, Open, etc.) are not displayed.

Data Save
Note that the "No automatic backup" and "Incremental backup" options are available only for CATIA.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1490

No automatic backup

If this option is selected, it means that documents are not saved automatically.

By default, this option is cleared.

Automatic backup every ... minutes

If this option is selected, it means that you can specify a save frequency other than the default frequency (30
minutes). This option is activated by default.

The purpose of this option is to automatically save your data to allow you to recover it after a crash. When a crash
occurs, and you restart your session, the Warm Start dialog box asks the following question:

Do you want to recover previous session data?

If you choose "Yes", your documents will be recovered in the state in which they were last saved by the automatic
save option. Any data created after the last automatic save will not be restored.

If you choose "No", a new document will be created when opening the session.

You may encounter, when working on a document, a dialog box containing the following message:

Command interrupted

When this occurs, we recommend that you click OK to continue (a check is launched on your data in the
background). Then, you should immediately save your document(s) and exit then restart your session.

We also recommend the same method if a dialog box appears containing the message:
"This handler is null".

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1491

Incremental backup

Autosave Feature Constraints

Until now, warm start meant simply automatically saving all documents every "xx" minutes. Autosave operations on
large amounts of data can take a long time, even lasting several minutes, and all interactions since the last
autosave are lost. The autosave feature can also be deactivated by users who prefer to save their documents
frequently and manually to avoid losing data.

Incremental Warm Start Principles

When you use the incremental backup option, all open documents are stored in a temporary directory, and all
modifications to the document are logged in a log file. These operations involve a minimum inconvenience for the
end user when opening documents (direct copy without loading), and the logging of document modifications at each
interaction is not perceptible.

Regarding the restore behavior:

● after a crash, all documents are opened from the temporary directory
● all modifications stored in the log are replayed
● all necessary editors are opened
● restoring data could take a long time:
❍ all modifications made by users (including test/try, mistakes, etc.) are replayed
❍ time is needed to replay necessary updates.

A slight risk is involved: the modification log needs to be complete, otherwise there is a risk of restoring corrupted
data.

The incremental warm start mechanism is available for the CATPart, CATProduct and CATDrawing document
workbenches. However, the restoring of VPM V4 documents in warm start mode is not supported. Consequently, do
not activate the Incremental backup option if you are working with VPM documents: if you do, error messages will
appear when attempting to save the documents.

Note: movements of components using compass are not retrieved when translation/rotation is the last operation
before a crash.

Example

1. Start a Version 5 session, select the Tools->Options... command, click the General tab, and check the

Incremental backup option, then click OK to save, and restart Version 5.

2. Continue making modifications to the current document until a crash occurs.

3. Kill your Version 5 session.

4. Restart Version 5.

5. After restarting, you are prompted as follows:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1492
Previous session abnormally ended,

do you want to recover data?

Click Yes to recover data.

A progress bar is displayed while the data is being restored, and a confirmation window is displayed after the

data has been restored:

Data successfully restored, please save all to activate incremental warmstart again

If recovery fails, you may receive the following message:

Recovery of last session failed ! Restart the application.

Click OK to exit your session cleanly to make sure you do not restart a session which has not been properly

restored.

6. Check visually that your data was correctly restored.

7. You must save all data to reactivate the incremental warm start feature.

If you do not do so, the incremental warmstart feature will be deactivated.

8. Continue working.

Note: if, for example, you modified both a product and the parts linked to the product, waited for an automatic
save, then restarted after a crash, all documents are marked as "modified", which is normal: you retrieve them in
their state prior to the crash. If you modified only the product, waited for an automatic save, then restarted after a
crash, the product is marked as "modified", and the parts are marked as "modified by another user save". This
mechanism is designed to ensure that all potentially "dirty" documents are restored.

Partial Activation

As specified above, certain workbenches do not support the incremental warm start feature. When you switch to a
workbench which does not support it, a message will inform you that the workbench does not support this feature,
and warn you that it is deactivated.

The same also applies to certain commands: when you start the command, you will be warned that the incremental
warm start feature is deactivated.

To reactivate the warm start feature, go into a workbench supporting the incremental warm start feature, and save
all documents. If you close all documents, the warm start feature will be activated for the next opened document
supporting the incremental warm start. You can close or save one V5 document, but if there is always only one dirty
document in the session, the warm start will not be reactivated.

Generally speaking, if in doubt, save all documents to be sure the warm start is reactivated. It enables you also to
empty the modification logging files which can be large after a long time.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1493

Disconnection

Automatic disconnection after ... minutes

If this option is selected, it means that you activate automatic disconnection of your Version 5 session after a user-
defined duration (in minutes) without program use.

Note that once the disconnection time is reached, the session exits gracefully with no warning because the end user
is not supposed to be in front of the screen since the disconnection is only supposed to occur when interactions
have taken place. Because there is no warning message before exiting the session, make sure you have saved your
work well in advance.

By default, this option is cleared.

Referenced Documents

Load referenced documents

If this option is selected, it means that when a father document is loaded, the child documents it points to are also
loaded. However, if you clear this option, only the father document is actually loaded when you open it. This may be
useful for reasons of performance and efficiency. A typical case of this is a CATProduct or CATDrawing document,
i.e. the father document pointing to CATPart or model documents i.e. the child documents.

Once a father document has been loaded you cannot load or unload its child documents as changing the option
cannot apply retroactively. You must close the father document, select or deselect the Load referenced
documents option then reopen the father document.

If you open a father document containing unloaded child documents you can load one or more of these documents
using File > Desk (see Using the FileDesk Workbench).

Note that when loading objects pasted As Result With Link or external references, the pointed documents
containing the referenced geometry are not loaded and this, even if the Load referenced documents option is

activated. These pointed documents are identified by the symbol in the specification tree to indicate that they
have been found but not loaded.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1494

Note also that even if the Load referenced documents option is not activated, the geometry is still loaded when
reopening a file containing a .model document.

By default, this option is activated.

Conferencing

Conference driver

If you installed a license for a DMU Navigator product, you will be able to run conferencing sessions: a conference
host initiates a conferences and invites other users to join the conference as guests.

The actions replicated during a conference are the following:

● workbench transition
● object selection
● viewpoint modification (zoom, rotation)
● 3D annotations (creation, modification and deletion)
● 2D annotations (linked to cameras) creation, modification and deletion.

Conferencing is available on the Windows and UNIX platforms, and is based on two underlying prerequisites:

● NetMeeting (provided with Windows)

● the Communications Backbone (provided with the Version 5 infrastructure), required for conferencing on UNIX.

For more information, refer to the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide.

Drag and Drop

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1495

Enable Drag and Drop for Cut, Copy, Paste Use

If this option is selected, it means that dragging and dropping in the viewers (for copying, pasting or cutting
purpose only) is enabled.

For more information, refer to Dragging and Dropping Icons onto Objects and Dragging and Dropping Objects onto
Objects in this guide.

Note: this drag and drop option does not apply to toolbar customization.

By default, this option is activated.

Memory Warning

Trigger memory warning at ... % of memory use

This option helps you to save your data before a crash occurs due to excessive memory use.

A warning popup when the process memory use exceeds a certain percentage of the address space usage or when
the remaining free memory fragmentation reach a certain threshold. This popup warns you that because the
amount of remaining memory is becoming low, you should save your data and exit the session:

Important remark: this warning does not concern RAM memory use or paging space use. It is not dependant on the
computer resources, only on the process address space as we consider that, in general, in a typical environment
and with a recommended configuration, the 32-bit address space is the limiting factor in terms of memory
consumption.

Check this option and set the percentage of address space indicating when to trigger the warning. This will set the
limit value for address space use and fragmentation.

The thresholds may be changed but it is not advisable, except for expert users.

Once the warning is generated, the warning in itself should not crash or freeze your session.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1496
Limitations

● This check involves a small performance hit, so it is made generally at the end of interactions. This means that
in particular scenarios where the memory consumption increases very fast (passes from low consumption to
very high consumption in only one interaction), the warning may come too late. In other terms, this warning
does not protect absolutely all scenarios, only a high percentage of them. This limitation is inherent in the
specification and will never be suppressed.
● On UNIX, the fragmentation of the remaining free memory is useless as the memory manager addresses this
aspect well. Furthermore, it cannot be calculated. So the performance cost of the checking is not an issue on
UNIX platforms.
● On UNIX, the warning popup will only be generated once, the first time the threshold is passed. If you free
enough memory to come under the threshold and then exceed the threshold later, the warning will not be
generated a second time because the system has no way of knowing the threshold was exceeded again.
● This option activates the warning for both the memory space usage and for the remaining memory space
fragmentation. However, only the limit value on memory space usage may be specified by the user or
administrator. The fragmentation threshold is not customizable. However, it is activated.

By default, this option is not activated.

Additional Information Added to Session and Abend Traces

When the memory warning mechanism is activated, additional information is added to the Session_Information_File
and in abend traces to help in investigating certain memory crashes.

By logging this information, added information allows the segregation of scenarios involving crashes which occur
due to full memory consumption. So it will now be possible to distinguish between:

● crashes due to the fact that the application crashed after the warning popped-up, but before the user had any
chance to save data and exit
● crashes due to lack of memory without any warning: this may occur in some scenarios where, for example, a
huge amount of memory is consumed in one single interaction
● crashes due to the fact that the user was warned and continued the session until there were no more memory.

As perceived by the end user, application behavior does not change.

However, if the memory warning mechanism is activated, and if a warning is generated during the session, extra
information is logged in the SessionInformationFile indicating that a warning was generated.

Later, if the application crashes, the same information is logged in the AbendTrace associated with the crash.

Here is a sample of the type of information added (with the value set to 1% simply for the purpose of illustration):

[MEMORY WARNINGS]

Time=16.48.24:Process has reached 12.09% of memory usage which is over the critical limit of 1.00%.
Size of process : 246.04 Mo( 257986560 )
Physical memory : 1023.00 Mo( 1072693248 )
Avail physical mem : 578.47 Mo( 606572544 )
Paging disks : 3072 Mo( 3221225472 )
Total page space : 2462.61 Mo( 2582233088 )
Avail page space : 2119.59 Mo( 2222551040 )
Avail address Space: 1801.84 Mo( 1889366016 )
Memory allocatable : 1801.8398 Mo( 1889366016 )
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1497
Memory load : 43 %
Stack size : 1.00 Mo( 1048576 )
Stack used : 0.03 Mo( 28672 )
A Warning CATSysMemoryWng_132001 has been emitted. User is informed.
Warning: Memory limitation is exceeded.
Recommendation : please try to save your data and re-start the session.

The information contains:

● the time of the memory warning generation

● some information on memory usage, address space usage and paging space usage at the time of warning
generation
● the kind of warning generated (here: CATSysMemoryWng_132001)
● the NLS warning which was in the panel.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1498

Help

This tab deals with the options concerning:

● technical documentation

● user companion

● contextual priority

Technical documentation

Location

Displays the current location of the online documentation. By default, the online documentation is located in:

C:\Program Files\Dassault Systemes\B16doc

Enter the path where the documentation is installed or click the Path(s) selection icon to navigate to the

desired location then click the icon to add the selected directory or file to the path (displayed to the right).

Once a path has been added to the list, you can select it then click the following buttons to:

● move it up in the list

● move it down in the list

● remove it from the list.

Please note the following information:

● if you install the documentation on the network, you can map a drive and enter the appropriate path in this
field. UNC (Universal Naming Convention) syntax is also supported. Refer to Doc Installation Path for more
details.
● if the online documentation is installed on a http server, the installation path must be surrounded by quotes, for
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1499
instance "http://myserver/B15doc".

Note also that the Path Selection dialog box lets you select several different paths to interactively concatenate
them. On Windows, you can perform the concatenation manually. In that case, the separator to be used is ; and
not : .
Furthermore, when you select several paths using the Path Selection dialog box, the concatenated paths are
represented between " ", for example, like this:

"J:\V5R15DOC\Doc";"F:\V5R16DOC\Doc"

If you indicate a wrong path, an error message is displayed to inform you that the previous path is kept.

Language

Lets you select your documentation language: Environment language (default) or any language you selected
when installing the software. For detailed information on installing Version 5, refer to Unloading Your Product Code
on Windows (or on UNIX).
The default environment language corresponds to the language you define in the Regional Settings tab (on
Windows) or in the LANG variable (on UNIX).

To access a documentation in the same language as the software, you need to install the online documentation in
the appropriate language. Refer to Installing the Online Documentation After Installing the Software on Windows
(or on UNIX).
However, note that the documentation language you choose is independent from the language of your session or of
your operating system. For instance, you can run a session in Japanese and access an English documentation,
provided that you installed it on your computer.

User Companion

Location

Displays the path to the User Companion (provided that the Computer-Based Training module and the Companion
have been previously installed). You can enter another path directly in this field or click the Path(s) selection

icon to navigate to the desired location then click the icon to add the selected directory or file to the
path (displayed to the right).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1500

Contextual Priority

Technical Documentation

If this option is selected, it means that the technical documentation is accessed in priority when pressing F1 to get
contextual help.

By default, this option is cleared.

User Companion

If this option is selected, it means that the User Companion is accessed in priority when pressing F1 to get
contextual help.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1501

Shareable Products

This tab lets you acquire and release shareable product licenses.

For detailed information on how to use this tab, refer to Reserving Shareable Product Licenses Dynamically in the
Version 5 - Infrastructure Installation Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1502

Licensing

Refer to Reserving Static Licenses Using the License Manager for detailed information about how to reserve
configuration and product licenses using the License Manager.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1503

Document

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● document environments

● linked document localization

● file options

The administration of document environments based on the DLName mechanism is detailed in Administrating Data Using the
DLName Mechanism in the Version 5 - Installation and Administration User's Guide.

Document Environments

This category lets you:

● set the DLName environment as "Current"

● define DLNames

● search for DLNames.

An example of the integration of DLNames in your Version 5 session is also provided.

What is a document environment?

A document environment is a way of accessing your documents. When you access the Document tab, the following document
environments are displayed:

● Folder: default document environment in which the dialog access any folder containing the documents
● DLName: document environment which lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names
referred to as "DLNames". Each folder is assigned a logical name.
In this mode, the different file opening and saving commands only allow end users to access documents in directories
referenced by DLNames.
Any modification of a path impacts the DLName once, thus avoiding to search for and modify manually any occurrence of
this path.
The administrator may also define the folders in which users are allowed to work
● SmarTeam Query: lets you access SmarTeam projects stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Integration using queries
● SmarTeam: lets you access SmarTeam projects stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Integration
● SmarTeam CIX: lets you access documents stored in SmarTeam - CATIA Xtended Integration
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1504
● Enovia: lets you access documents stored in ENOVIA V5
● Catalog: lets you access documents stored in catalogs
● Loaded document: lets you access documents loaded in the current session.

A document environment may be assigned one of the following states:

● Current: sets the selected environment as the current document environment and defines the dialog box (i.e. File >
Open, File > Save, Edit > Links, etc.) displayed when accessing your documents
● Allowed: indicates that the environment may be set as Current or Not allowed. Setting a document environment as
Allowed means that you can access documents related to this environment via the Browse window which opens when
you select File > Open:

The above picture shows that in addition to the current DLName environment, two other environments have been
allowed: Folder and ENOVIA. You are thus allowed to access DLNames, files (such as CATParts, CATProducts, etc.)
or ENOVIA V5 documents.

● Not allowed: indicates that the environment may not be set as Current. You have to assign it the Allowed state before
selecting it as your Current environment.

Current vs. Allowed

When you open documents:

● the Current document environment is the default selected environment

● Allowed document environments may be also used.

When you save or send documents or use File > New from:

● only the Current document environment can be used.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1505

Command Usable document environment

Open Current + Allowed

Save Current

Send To Current

New from Current

For instance, let's suppose that you set the DLName environment as Current and the Folder environment as Allowed. When
you select File > Open, two dialog boxes are displayed: the Open document dialog box which only lets you access
DLNames, and the Browse dialog box which lets you open documents in File mode. However, using File > New from, File
> Save (Save As, Save All, etc.) or File > Send To > Mail/Directory has no effect on the documents opened in File
mode.
There is only one exception to this rule: when working with PDM data, you can use File > Save As.

More about document environments

● The Catalog and Loaded document environments cannot be set as Current

● If document environments have been locked by your administrator, the Allowed and Not allowed buttons are grayed
out and thus cannot be selected by the user. Only the Current and Configure... buttons are active.

Setting the DLName environment as "Current"

1. In the Document Environments column, select DLName.

2. Select successively the Allowed and Current buttons.

DLName is now defined as your current document environment as indicated by the Current value in the State

column.

Defining DLNames

Once you have set the DLName environment as your current environment, you have to create the DLNames you will use.

1. Click the Configure... button to open the Configure dialog box which lets you add or remove DLNames:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1506

Note: the UNIX Folder column is displayed on Windows only when running Version 5 in administrator mode. On
UNIX, only the Windows folder is displayed.
When running Version 5 in user mode, only the column corresponding to your operating system is displayed (for
instance, "Windows Folder" when working on Windows).

The Lock column is displayed in both administrator and user modes:

● means "locked" (in user and administrator mode)

● means "locked at administrator level" (in administrator mode)

● means "no lock" (in administrator mode). In user mode, there is no lock symbol.

2. Click the button or right-click then select the New command to create a new DLName.

A default name and a default folder are assigned to the new DLName as shown below (you can create as many
DLNames as necessary):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1507

3. If you are authorized by your administrator (i.e. when no lock appears opposite the DLName), you can modify the

values displayed. To do so, click the desired value to be able to edit it then type the new data.

In administrator mode, you can modify the DLName and the associated paths as you wish.

In user mode, you can create a root DLName. However, do not forget that some rules apply if you want to modify

names and folders:

● when changing the folder of a sub-DLName, the new folder must correspond to a folder of the father DLName
● the name of the last folder (on UNIX and Windows) is always the one of the DLName.
If you change the name of a DLName, the modification is automatically applied to the folder: if you have
DLNAME2 as a sub-folder of C:\DLNAME1 then rename DLNAME2 in DLNAMEA, the path displayed in the Folder
column will automatically change from C:\DLNAME1\DLNAME2 to C:\DLNAME1\DLNAMEA.

Therefore, be extra careful when renaming a DLName since this modification impacts the name of the folder and of

the sub-folders, if any!

Any modification of a root DLName path is controlled by the administrator which may prevent you from doing so.

As far as sub-DLNames are concerned, you cannot modify the path of a sub-DLName because this path contains

the name of the sub-DLName and depends on the location of the parent DLName.

To modify the Windows folder of a DLName, right-click the folder to be modified in the Windows column then

select Browse: this opens a dialog box that lets you navigate to the new folder. After clicking OK, this new folder

then replaces the former folder in the Windows column:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1508

You can include variables in DLNames using the syntax ${VARIABLE}.

For instance:

C:\users\${MODEL}\publish where ${MODEL} is a user-defined variable.

4. If you are running in administration mode, you can lock or unlock each DLName individually simply by clicking the

green symbol opposite the DLName.

Locking a DLName changes its state from to (and inversely when you unlock the DLName).

As an administrator, you can also click the general lock to prevent end users from defining and modifying

DLNames. Therefore, the following commands are not available: New, Browse, Delete, Import and Export.

5. When finished adding DLNames to your list, you can then click the button (or right-click and select Export) to
save your list of DLNames as a .txt file in the appropriate location using the Export DLNames dialog box.

You can make as many lists as you like and, for further use, import the list whenever you want to. To do so, click

the button (or right-click and select Import) then select the list to be imported in the Import DLNames
dialog box.

6. If you want to remove a DLName from the list, select it then click the button (or right-click it and select Delete).

Once DLNames have been created, they are displayed in the Look in list:

You can then use this list to display sub-DLNames, if any. In our example, selecting "DLNAME 1" in the list shows
that it contains a sub-folder "DLNAME4":
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1509

Note that you can also display sub-DLNames either by double-clicking the father DLName in the DLName column
or by right-clicking the father DLName (still in the DLName column) then selecting Down.

To re-access the upper level, click the button.

7. Click OK to close the Configure dialog box then OK to exit the Document tab.

Once you have defined your DLNames, you are allowed to put them in a search order. For more information, refer
to Localizing Linked Documents further in this task.

The Configure dialog box also lets you search for the DLNames you defined. For more information, refer to
Searching for DLNames.

Defining DLNames also impacts the commands in which they are integrated. Refer to the DLName Integration
section for detailed information.

Searching for DLNames

When a great number of DLNames has been defined, it may be difficult to find a DLName. A search functionality has been
added to the Configure dialog box to let you access your DLNames more easily.
This search functionality can be accessed:
● from the Configure dialog box (detailed in this section)
● from any file selection dialog box when working in a DLName environment (see theDLName Integration section for an
example)
● from the DLName Chooser dialog box (see Running the Data Life Cycle batch for an example).

1. Click the Configure... button to open the Configure dialog box.

2. Click the button (or right-click and select Import) then select DLNAME_search.txt from the samples folder.

3. In our example, three root DLNames (DLNAME1, DLNAME3 and DLNAME4) have been defined, each of them

containing sub-DLNames:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1510

4. Click the button to open the Search Results dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1511
Note that for performance reasons, the look of the Search Results dialog box might not be the same on all
operating systems.

This dialog box lets you search for DLNames (either root DLNames or sub-folders) using two criteria:

● the name, by entering a search string in the Name box

● the location, by selecting the DLName in which you will run your search from the Look in list.

5. Leave the default values which means that you are going to search for all DLNames created in the root.

6. Click the Search button to run the search:

The three root DLNames (DLNAME1, DLNAME3 and DLNAME4) as well as all their sub-DLNames are found.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1512
The five columns next to the Search button give you the following information about the search results:

● Name: gives the name of the search result.

In our example, eleven DLNames have been found in the root DLName
● Location: gives the path of the search result.
In our example, among the eleven DLNames found, you can see that some DLNames are sub-folders of other
DLNames. For instance, DLNAME1 contains three sub-folders named DLNAME2, DLNAME5 and DLNAME6
● Size: gives the size of the search result.
This column is relevant only when searching for files, i.e. when you access the Search Results dialog box
from the Open documents dialog box

● Type: gives the type of the search result.

When you access the Search Results dialog box via the Configure dialog box, you always search for
DLNames. However, when you access the Search Results dialog box from the Open documents dialog box,
you can also search for files which means that your search results can be of type "CATPart", "CATProduct", etc.
● Modified: gives the last modification date of the search result.

If needed, you can sort the search results by clicking the desired column title. For instance, clicking "Modified"
sorts the search results by their last modification date (in ascending order).

7. Select "DLNAME1" in the Look in list then click the Search button. This means that you are going to search for all

DLNames created in "DLNAME1":

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1513

8. Select a DLName in the list of search results. You can see that the name and type of the selected item are displayed

on top of the dialog box:

Note that you cannot select multiple files in the list but only one file at a time.

9. In the Name box, enter *New* to search for all DLNames whose names contain the string "New".

The asterisk (*) is used as a wildcard to replace any number of characters.

The question mark (?) is used to replace one character only.

Suppose the following example with two items, teston.CATPart and testoff.CATPart:

testo*.* finds teston.CATPart and testoff.CATPart

testo?.* finds teston.CATPart.

10. Click the Search button:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1514

However, do not forget that the search is case sensitive and therefore, entering *new* instead of *New* gives no
result.

You can run as many searches as needed.

11. When finished, click OK to close the Search Results dialog box.

DLName Integration

This section aims at giving you one example of the DLName integration using File > Open.

1. Click Open in the Standard toolbar or select File > Open. Instead of the usual File Selection dialog box, the
following dialog box opens:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1515

The Open document dialog box opens simultaneously with the Browse window. For more information on this
window, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window.

In case no DLName has been previously defined, a warning dialog box opens when running the command.

To see the preview of a file, click its name in the list.

You can also click the black arrow next to "DLNAME1" to display a list containing the DLNames you have defined,
you just need to select the desired DLName to access its content:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1516
About the Look in list:

● if the option "Activate logical filetree for DLNames" is activated, the Look in list shows only the root DLNames.
Their sub-DLNames are displayed in the Name column. In the picture above, "DLNAME1" contains three sub-
folders named "DLNAME2", "DLNAME5" and "DLNAME6"
● if the option "Activate logical filetree for DLNames" is not activated, the DLNames are displayed in "flat" mode,
i.e. all the DLNames you have defined are displayed in the "Look in" list.

By default, the Details display mode is activated. This display mode gives you information on the file size, the file
type and the last modification date and time.

If you want to display your files in List mode (i.e. only the file names are listed), select the List display mode:

Note: this Open document dialog box is very similar to the File Selection dialog box displayed when opening
existing documents since you can, for instance, select the document type.

2. Select the desired File name and type from the list.

3. Click the button to open the Search Results dialog box:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1517

This behavior of dialog box is identical to the one of the Search Results dialog box you access when configuring
DLNames, except that you can search for DLNames AND for files stored in DLNames.

4. In the Name box, enter the string to be searched for.

For instance, entering My* searches for any files or DLNames whose names start with the string "My".

The asterisk (*) is used as a wildcard to replace any number of characters.

The question mark (?) is used to replace one character only.

5. Use the Look in list to select the DLName in which you want to run your search.

6. Click the Search button to open the following dialog box (click the thumbnail below to see the full-size picture):

In our example, three items have been found: a DLName ("MyNewTest") and two files (a CATDrawing and a
CATProduct).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1518
The search is case sensitive and therefore, entering my* instead of My* does not give the same result.

7. Select an item other than a DLName. The data contained in the Name, Location, Size, Type and Modified columns are

displayed on top of the dialog box:

If you select a DLName, only the Name and Type are indicated.

Note that you can select multiple search results. In that case, the total number of items selected and the total file
size are indicated as follows:

For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Searching for DLNames.

8. When you have found the desired document, click OK to close the Search Results dialog box: the name of the

document is displayed in the "File name" field of the Open documents dialog box.

9. Click OK to open the selected document.

Note that the above example also applies to any command allowing you to perform a file selection.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1519
DLNames are also integrated in the following commands:

● File > Save (included Save As..., Save All and Save Management...)

● File > Desk

● File > New from

● File > Send To

● Edit > Links

● Other folders option

● Browse another catalog (refer to the Version 5 Component Catalog Editor User's Guide - "Browsing a Catalog
using the Catalog Browser" for detailed information)
● Save in catalog (refer to the Version 5 Generative Shape Design User's Guide - "Saving PowerCopies into a
Catalog" for detailed information)

For more information on these commands, refer to the corresponding task in this guide by clicking one of the
above hyperlinks.

Linked Document Localization

The primary aim of the Linked Documents Localization function is to resolve document links and to manage in an easy way
the strategy that will be used to locate your linked documents. Its purpose is different from that of the Edit > Links
command (see Editing Document Links).

This section shows you how to define a personal strategy for link resolution.

A default strategy always takes an already loaded document with the same identification to resolve document
links. In a file-based environment, a document is identified by its name and an internal identifier.
Bear also in mind that when using a link resolution strategy, you are not allowed to open two documents with
the same name in your session.

Note: if your administrator has locked the Linked Document Localization, all buttons except Configure... are grayed out.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1520

The Document Location column contains the various strategies you can choose to localize your linked documents.
The Active column indicates whether a strategy has been activated (Yes value) or deactivated (blank value).

1. Choose a strategy from the proposed list:

● Folder of the link: provides the absolute path which was saved in the link, i.e. the path used when you saved
your document.
● Folder of the pointing document: provides the current folder of your document
● Relative folder: provides a sub-folder with the same starting path. Note that choosing this strategy does not
make sense if you are working in a DLName environment since the hierarchy used to store documents is
different from the one used when working in a Folder environment (there is no "sub-folder" notion). Use the
Folder of the link strategy instead
● Other folders: provides a user-defined list of folders. Do not forget to insert a carriage return at the end of
each line
● Catalog & startup documents: provides the absolute path to catalogs and documents saved in the startup
installation folder (for instance c:\Dassault Systemes\B16\$OS\startup\...). When migrating from one release
level to another, any link to a catalog or document located in the installation folder is automatically updated to
match the new startup path
● Entreprise Process-libraries: provides the path to folder containing process libraries (.act files)
● ENOVIA LCA (appropriate license is required) for documents stored in ENOVIA LCA
● ENOVIA VPM database (appropriate license is required) for documents stored in ENOVIA VPM
● SmarTeam (appropriate license is required) for documents stored in SmarTeam database.

The following example illustrates more precisely the behavior of the first four strategies:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1521

First of all, we created a product named

"Product1.CATProduct" in the folder /u/users/DS/.
This product is linked to "Part1.CATPart", which is
stored in the folder /u/users/DS/Sub/.

Then, we moved "Product1" to another folder, i.e.

E:\tmp\DS\. As this product is linked to
"Part1.CATPart", you need to select a link resolution
strategy. Depending on the strategy you select, the
behavior is:

● Folder of the link:

tries to locate Part1 in /u/users/DS/Sub
● Folder of the pointing document:
tries to locate Part1 in E:\tmp\DS
● Relative folder:
tries to locate Part1 in E:\tmp\DS\Sub
● Other folders:
tries to locate Part1 in user-defined folders.

2. Once the strategy is selected, click one of the buttons displayed in the right part of the dialog box. These buttons are

grayed out depending on the strategy you selected:

● the Activate button lets you activate a strategy that has been deactivated
● the Deactivate button enables you to deactivate a strategy
● the Up and Down buttons let you customize the strategy order
● the Configure button is available for the Other folders strategy only.

Whichever action you choose for the strategy, you must restart your Version 5 session to take this modification
into account. A warning message is displayed after clicking one of the above buttons.

Here is a comparison between the former Search Order command and "Linked Document Localization":

Search Order Linked Document Localization

Folder of the link first

Other folders first

deactivates Other folders

only Other folders is activated

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1522
Note: Relative folder is used for catalog component links.

When you click the Configure... button, a dialog box appears with a user interface depending on your current
document environment. In our example, we are working in a Folder environment.
For more information on managing document environments, refer to the Document Environments part in this task.

3. Select a directory in the Look in list then click the Add button.

In case at least one document is already opened in your current session, a warning window is displayed to ask you
to close then reopen the documents to take into account your modifications.
Thus, it is recommended to close any opened documents before modifying the Other folders strategy.

Note: you can also click the Add Tree button to add the folder tree underneath the specified directory. However,
bear in mind that the more elements, the longer the duration.
This button is available for the Folder environment only. When working in a DLName environment, you can copy a
DLName but not its folders.

This puts the directory into the Search order list as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1523

The icon lets you access your various directories and the icon lets you move up in the directory hierarchy.

You do not need to enter the whole path in the Look in box. Enter the main directory and press Enter. Any
subdirectories are then displayed in the list and you can then select the appropriate subdirectory before clicking
the Add button.

Note that you can use the multiselection to add your folders to the search order:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1524

The Search order list is intended to contain the directories in which your linked documents are saved. You may
wish to use different search order lists for particular uses and for different circumstances.

4. Continue adding your most frequently used directories to the list. When you have finished click the Export... button

and save the list as a .txt file in the appropriate location in the Export Search Order dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1525

5. You can make as many lists as you like. When you want to use one of these lists, click the Import... button. The

Import Search Order dialog box appears.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1526

Right-clicking on any of the .txt files allows you to edit these files. If you then click the Open button the contents
of the .txt file you chose is placed in the list and replaces the elements previously contained, if any.

The Import Add... button lets you import and add a search order contained in a text file to the current Search
order list.

6. The search order lists can easily be updated. To change the priority of a directory i.e. move it up or down in the list,

select it then click the appropriate button: Up or Down.

Note that the multi-selection is also allowed.

7. To remove a directory, select it and click the Remove button.

The Remove, Up and Down buttons are activated only when at least one item in the list is selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1527

File Options

This category contains the following options:

● Upper case for document names

● Activate logical filetree for DLNames

● Apply Save All to editor scope only.

Upper case for document names

If this option is selected, it means that files names are converted to upper case when saving documents.
This conversion is taken into account when using the following commands:

● File > New

● File > Save As
● File > Save Management
● File > Send To > Mail/Directory.

As Windows and UNIX operating systems deal with upper case characters in a different way, note that the behavior slightly
differs when using the File > Save As:
● on Windows, a message appears and asks you to overwrite the file. The reason is that the file system is not case-
sensitive and therefore, Aaa = aaa = AAA
● on UNIX, no message is displayed since the file system is case sensitive.

By default, this option is cleared.

Activate logical filetree for DLNames

If this option is selected, it means that DLNames are organized in a logical way. The following scenario explains how to
organize your DLNames in a "logical tree" so that they are easier to access and how this impacts all commands providing
access to DLNames through file or folder selection.

Prior to organizing DLNames, you must define them. Refer to Defining DLNames for detailed information.

Once your .txt list of DLNames is created, some additional modifications are necessary to create the required structure with
respect of rules that is detailed hereafter:
● each DLName has a unique name inside the whole logical structure
● each DLName has one logical DLName "father", which can be an already defined DLName or the abstract "Root DLName"
● there is no relation between the logical structure and the physical one. When working in administrator mode, you can
place the DLName wherever you want and give it the name of your choice.
However, in user mode, bear in mind that when you decide to define a DLName as a sub-DLName of another existing
DLName:
❍ the name of its physical sub-folder is the one of the sub-DLName
❍ the location of its physical folder is a sub-folder of the parent DLName's physical folder.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1528

1. Open your .txt list to define your structure using the following format:

● one line per DLName

● each line has four fields separated each with a semi-colon as shown: Logical Name;Windows
Folder;UNIX Folder; Father Logical Name. The first three fields correspond to the first three fields
displayed when configuring DLNames
● each field ends with a semi-colon
● no data between the last two semi-colons means that the Father Logical Name is the "Root
DLName".

Let's have a look at the following example...

DLNAME1;E:\users\ajt\;/tmp;;
DLNAME2;E:\users\ajt\DLNAME2;/tmp/DLNAME2;DLNAME1;
DLNAME3;E:\temp;/tmp;;

... and more precisely at the meaning of each line:

DLNAME1;E:\users\ajt\;/tmp;;

● the logical name is named "DLNAME1"

● the logical name is located in "E:\users\ajt" on Windows
● the logical name is located in "/tmp" on UNIX
● the logical father name is "Root DLName".

DLNAME2;E:\users\ajt\DLNAME2;/tmp/DLNAME2;DLNAME1;

● the logical name is named "DLNAME2"

● "DLNAME2" is a sub-directory of "DLNAME1". This sub-directory is named "DLNAME2" after the
DLName it corresponds to. As a consequence, the logical name is located in
"E:\users\ajt\DLNAME2" on Windows
● "DLNAME2" is a sub-directory of "DLNAME1" and thus, the logical name is located in
"/tmp/DLNAME2" on UNIX
● the logical father name is "DLNAME1".

DLNAME3;E:\temp;/tmp;;

● the logical name is named "DLNAME3"

● the logical name is located in "E:\temp" on Windows
● the logical name is located in "/tmp" on UNIX
● the logical father name is "Root DLName".
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1529

2. Save your .txt file.

3. Select Tools > Options > General > Document then click the Configure... button.

4. Click the button to import the logical structure you created in step 1.

5. Navigate to the .txt file to be imported then click Open. The logical structure is imported:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1530

6. Click OK to validate.

7. Select the Activate logical filetree for DLNames check box.

8. Click Open in the Standard toolbar or select File > Open.

The Open document dialog box reflects the hierarchical organization: only root DLNames are displayed in the

Look in list and their sub-DLNames appear in the Name column.

This differs slightly from the Open document dialog box displayed when the logical filetree is not activated: all

the DLNames and sub-DLNames defined are displayed in the Look in list.

● Logical filetree is activated - Hierarchical organization:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1531

● Logical filetree is not activated - DLNames are displayed in "flat" mode:

The Open document dialog box opens simultaneously with the Browse window. For more information on this
window, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window.

In our example, the check box Activate logical filetree for DLNames is selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1532

9. To access the sub-directory "DLNAME2", double-click it in the list. You can, of course, display the preview of the

desired element by selecting it:

When you are in a sub-directory as this is the case in our example, you can click the icon to move up in the
hierarchy. In our case, we can use it to access the father directory "DLNAME1".
Remember that this icon is displayed only when the check box Activate logical filetree for DLNames is
selected.

10. Clicking the black arrow next to Look in displays a list containing the hierarchical structure from which you can click

the directory you want to access:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1533

By default, the List display mode is activated. This display mode lists the file names only:

If you want to display the file size, the file type and the last modification date and time of your files, activate the
Details display mode.

11. Click OK to open the selected document.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1534

Apply Save All to editor scope only

If this option is selected, it means that when you select File > Save All, only the documents linked to the current editor are
saved. Other documents are not impacted by the save.

Let's suppose a drawing document (CATDrawing) which points to a loaded and modified CATPart (Part1). Then, activate the
CATDrawing editor, modify the drawing then select File > Save All:

● when the Apply Save All to editor scope check box is selected, the following message is displayed:

If you click Yes, you can see that only CATDrawing has been saved, even though Part1 has also been modified,
because the CATDrawing editor was the active editor at the time the Save All command was run.

● when the Apply Save All to editor scope option is cleared, the following message is displayed:

If you click Yes, all the documents modified in the session (CATDrawing and Part1 in our example) are saved.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1535

Macros
This tab contains the options for accessing the macro development environment for automation
purposes:
● default editors

● external references.

Default Editors

The default editors list is as follows:

● CATScript: internal V5 editor
● VBScript: internal V5 editor
● VBA: Visual Basic Editor.

If you are using CATScript or VBScript, click the Change editor... button and select the editor you want
to use. You cannot change the editor if you are using VBA.

After choosing an external editor, you can restore the default editor by selecting the language and
clicking the Default editor button.

The default editor is the CATScript internal V5 editor.

External References
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1536

External references are only used when your macro script is used to control external applications. You
have identify and select the corresponding typelibs.

By default, the external references list is empty. Clicking the All references... button displays the
Current references dialog box containing a list of all the Version 5 typelibs because they are installed
automatically.

To add external typelibs, click the Add reference... button and navigate to select the typelibs. If you
click the All references... button again, you will see the external references at the bottom of the list in
the Current references dialog box.

To remove external references, select them from the list and click the Remove reference button.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1537

Performances

This tab deals with one category of options: Undo.

Undo

Stack size

Lets you indicate the number of commands (from 0 to 99) which can be undone for each document.

Whatever the value, it is always possible to undo internal transitions (also called "local actions") inside the
current command ("global action").
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1538

Printers

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● printer directory list

● printer creation directory

● driver configuration path

● printer group definition

Printer Directory List

Provides a list of directories that will be used to store the configuration files of your 3DPLM printers. You can add
your own directories and also protect or not the access to the desired directories when logged as administrator.

Protecting Printers

When logged as administrator, you can right-click the desired directory from the list then select Protect

Printers to protect the access to this directory (the green symbol under the Protection column turns red).
Inversely, once a directory has been protected, you can make it accessible by right-clicking it then selecting Free

Printers (the red symbol turns green).

Note: you can also use the above-mentioned commands when logged as a standard user but it is recommended
to be an administrator.

"Protecting" a printer directory means that when accessing the Printer Properties dialog box to configure a
printer, the parameters defined by your administrator are displayed but you cannot modify them.
Once a printer directory has been protected by your administrator, you can still add printers from this directory
but you cannot modify them.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1539

When logged as administrator, you also have the ability to use the lock symbol opposite the Printer Directory List
area: clicking this symbol prevents end users from selecting and thus, modifying the printer directories displayed
in this area.
For detailed information on lock mechanisms, refer to Locking Settings.

You can also refer to Scenario for Printer Administration for a detailed scenario illustrating printer administration.

Editing Variables

Please note that you can use variables other than ${CATReferenceSettingPath} or ${CATUserSettingPath} ; user-
defined variables are supported.

To edit a user-defined variable, click the button then enter the new value in the Printer Directory dialog
box that opens:

When finished, click OK to validate.

Adding a Directory

To add a directory to the list, click the button then browse your filetree.

If no directory has been added, ${CATUserSettingPath} and ${CATReferenceSettingPath} are automatically

added to the list. These two variables reference in the Version 5 environment the directories where setting files
are stored:

● CATReferenceSettingPath: points to the directory (or directories) where administrator settings are stored
● CATUserSettingPath: points to the directory where user settings are stored.

Note that any directory you add must have a father directory named "Printers". This father directory must be
located at the end of the path, for instance e:\users\Printers. If no such directory exists, the application
automatically adds it to the path.

Removing a Directory

To remove a directory from the list, select it then click the button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1540

Printer Creation Directory

Lets you navigate to the directory where the configuration files for your new 3DPLM printers will be stored by

clicking the button.

By default, 3DPLM Printer configuration files are stored in the permanent setting files which are created in a
location referenced by the CATUserSettingPath environment variable. This location is:

● $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/PLOTxxxx.xml (on Windows)

● $HOME\CATSettings\Printers\PLOTxxxx.xml (on UNIX).

where "$HOME" represents the CATUserSettingPath variable.

If no directory has been specified, the field displays ${CATUserSettingPath} to indicate that the default location
will be used.

Once a directory has been specified in the Printer Creation Directory box, any new 3DPLM printer you add
afterwards (refer to Adding a Printer for detailed information) is added to this directory.

When an environment variable references several concatenated paths, the new printer is added to the last added
path and not to the first anymore. This change has been made in order to match the settings files' behavior.
However, if you want to go back to the previous behavior, i.e. add the printer to the first path, you can export
the PRINTER_CREATION_DIR_FIRST variable but do not forget that this method is not recommended:

set PRINTER_CREATION_DIR_FIRST = 1 (on Windows)

or

export PRINTER_CREATION_DIR_FIRST = 1 (on UNIX)

"1" is just taken as an example, you can put any other value because it has no impact.

A better method is to work with a user-defined variable. To learn how to define your own variable, refer to
Customizing Your Environment on Windows or on UNIX.

Note: any printer creation directory you specify must have a father directory named "Printers". If no such
directory exists, the application automatically adds it to the path.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1541

When working in administrator mode, new printers are created in ${CATUserSettingPath} by default but you can
change it to ${CATReferenceSettingPath} if needed. In that case, once printers have been created, do not forget
to change ${CATReferenceSettingPath} back to ${CATUserSettingPath} to provide a user environment to end
users.

Driver Configuration Path

Lets you customize the path to external drivers that may have been defined with CAA Version 5 APIs. This option
is relevant when working in a CAA environment only.

Enter the path to the configuration file where your driver settings are stored or click the button to navigate
to the desired location.

This file is identified by the suffix *.cfg.

By default, the external driver configuration file is stored in:

● $HOME/CATSettings/Printers/Drivers.cfg (on Windows)

● $HOME\CATSettings\Printers\Drivers.cfg (on UNIX).

where "$HOME" represents the CATUserSettingPath variable.

If no path is specified, the field displays ${CATUserSettingPath}\Printers\Drivers.cfg to indicate that the default
location is used.

Printer Group Definition

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1542
Lets you define, modify and delete groups of printers. These groups then enables you to filter the printers
displayed in the Print dialog box and therefore, select the desired printer more easily.

Note that the printer groups you define in this tab are saved in the Printers.CATSettings file (stored in the
CATSettings directory).

1. Click the New button to open the Printer Group dialog box:

The left column displays the printers that have already been set up.

The group name is displayed in the Name field and can be modified if needed. The group number is

incremented for each new group you create.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1543

2. In the left column, select the printers to be added to the new group then click the button to add
them to the right column of the dialog box.

Once a printer has been added to a group, you can remove it by selecting it in the right column then

clicking the button: in that case, the removed printer reappears in the left column.

Note: you use the multi-selection to select your printers in the left and right columns.

3. Click OK to close the Printer Group dialog box.

The Printer Group Definition area now looks like this:

4. You can then carry out the following actions on the created groups:

● modification: select a group then click the Modify button. This opens the Printer group dialog box

detailed above and you can then add or remove printers

● removal: select a group then click the Remove button to remove it from the group list.

Once printer groups have been defined, you can use them to filter the printers displayed in the Print
dialog box using a specific combo box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1544

Search

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● default prefix for power input

● default search scope for power input

● deep search

The settings you define in this tab are stored in the Search.CATSettings file which means that you recover your
customization from one session to another.

Default Prefix for Power Input

Provides a list of predefined prefixes used to run a search or a command via the power input field. If one of these
prefixes is selected, it means that this prefix is set as the default prefix and therefore, this avoids having to type it
at the beginning of the search string or before the command name in the power input field.

The default prefix is taken into account only if no prefix is typed in the power input field.

If you leave the value none, it means that there is no default prefix.

The list contains the following predefined prefixes:

● last entered
The default prefix is the last prefix you typed in the power input field
● c: as command:
The default prefix is c: which lets you run commands. Refer to Running Commands for more information

● f: as favorite:
The default prefix is f: which lets you search for objects using your favorite or predefined favorite queries. Refer
to Using the Search Language for more information

● t: as type:
The default prefix is t: which lets you search for an object by its type. Refer to Using the Search Language for
more information
● n: as name
The default prefix is n: which lets you search for an object name. Refer to Using the Search Language for more
information
● NAME:
The default prefix is NAME: which is identical to n: except that the search is case sensitive
● g: as name in graph:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1545

The default prefix is g: which lets you search for an object name as it is displayed in the specification tree. Refer
to Using the Search Language for for information

● NAME IN GRAPH:
The default prefix is NAME IN GRAPH: which is identical to g: except that the search is case sensitive
● s: as set:
The default prefix is s: which lets you search for an object belonging to a selection set. Refer to Using the
Search Language for more information

● SET:
The default prefix is SET: which is identical to s: except that the search is case sensitive
● col: as color:
The default prefix is col: which lets you search for an object of a specific color. Refer to Using the Search
Language for more information

● vis: as visibility:
The default prefix is vis: which lets you search for visible elements, or elements hidden in the No Show space.
Refer to Using the Search Language for more information

● l: as layer:
The default prefix is l: which lets you search for an object located on a specific layer. Refer to Using the Search
Language for more information

● d: as dashed:
The default prefix is d: which lets you search for elements using specific linetypes. Refer to Using the Search
Language for more information

● w: as weight:
The default prefix is w: which lets you search for elements using specific thicknesses. Refer to Using the Search
Language for more information

● symb: as symbol:
The default prefix is symb: which lets you search for elements with specific point symbols. Refer to Using the
Search Language for more information.

By default, none is selected.

Default Search Scope for Power Input

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1546

Provides a list of predefined search scopes used to run a search via the power input field. If one of these scopes is
selected, it means that this scope is set as the default scope and therefore, this avoids having to type it at the end
of the search string in the power input field.

For instance, if you set n: as name: as the default prefix then, when searching for objects named "wheel", you just
have to type wheel in the power input field, there is no need to type n:wheel or name:wheel anymore.

For detailed information about the use of search scope in the power input field, reder to Using the Search Language.

The list contains the following predefined search scopes:

● all as Everywhere
The default scope is all which searches the whole specification tree from top to bottom, to find objects created
using all workbenches
● in as In the element
The default scope is in which locates the appropriate elements in the active object and in the workbench you are
currently using
● from as From the element to bottom
The default scope is from which searches the elements in the active object to the bottom of the tree. For
example, in a Part document, both parts and sketches are searched.
● sel as From current selection
The default scope is sel which searches from the selected objects to the bottom of the tree if you already
selected objects before entering a query
● scr as Visible on screen
The default prefix is scr which searches for objects visible in the current window. Elements that are not
activated or not represented in the geometry area are not taken into account.

By default, in as In the element is selected.

Replaces scope defined in favorite queries

If this option is selected, it means that the default search scope defined in the Default Search Scope for Power
Input list detailed above supersedes the scopes specified when running favorite queries (predefined or not) via the
power input field.

If you enter a search scope in the power input field, this scope overrides both the default search scope and the
scopes defined in your favorite queries (predefined or not).

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1547

Deep Search

This option is relevant only when working in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system
check box is selected in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Product Structure > Cache Management).

If this option is selected, it means that the Deep search check box is displayed and selected in the Search dialog
box. Therefore, all the geometry is loaded before performing the search then when the search is over, the elements
that are not required anymore are unloaded.

Note that if the administrator has locked this area, the Deep search check box is displayed in the Search dialog
box but it is grayed out.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1548

Server Manager

This tab deals with the following category: Session Management.

Session Management

Limit to one session per user

Enables you to limit each user to one session. In the case that the user already has a session opened, that
session will be aborted.

By default, this option is cleared.

This setting does not apply to CATIA standalone.

It only applies to CATIA being used in a server context.

Note: Server Manager is a process, launched by the Orbix daemon, that manages the access control of
application servers and the launching of those servers.
CATIA Infrastructure Statistics
Version 5 Release 16 Page 1549

This tab contains statistics options for:

● general statistics

● statistic thematics list.

General

You can log statistics for the following types of activities:

● time spent in workbenches
● time spent using specific commands in those workbenches
● server statistics
● session statistics.

Buffer`s size

Size of buffer file in Kbytes. The log file is only written to disk once the log file size exceeds the buffer size you set. The values which can be entered in the editable field are limited. Buffer size is limited to
1024KB (1 MB). The values entered are in KB.

File's maximum size

Sets the maximum log file size. Each time this size is exceeded, the file is written to the location you specify by navigating using the file selection box in the Maximum number of copies and location option.
The values which can be entered in the editable field are limited. The file size is limited to 2.097.152KB (2 GB).
Maximum number of copies and location

Sets the maximum number of copies of the statistics file, and the location in which the copies are stored on the disk. Once the size of the file exceeds the size set by the option File's maximum size, a copy of
the file is written to the specified location. This helps to optimize disk space. Once the maximum number of copies is reached, the oldest log file is deleted.

The number of copies is limited to 999 (you can only enter 3 digits in the field).

Disk-Full Condition Management

The error logging software will detect disk-full conditions. If you set a maximum number of copies of the statistics file and a directory location to which copies are saved, the error logging software will move the
file to the destination directory and try to continue logging. If you do not set a directory (or if after the copy the disk is still full), the error logging software will cease error logging until the end of the current
session.

Statistic Thematics List

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1550

Check the check button to activate the statistics, or click the "+" button to access the Additional Statistics dialog box:

General Output

Basic statistics are common to all options. Error log statistics contain extra options.

There are two log display modes:

● File: the log is written to the file whose default name is Workbench.log or Command when you exit the session, in the location pointed to by the CATErrorLog variable. Consequently, the files are written by
default to:

CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\Statistics\Workbench.log
CSIDL_LOCAL_APPDATA\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\Statistics\Command.log

● Console: the log is written to a window.

There are two log update modes:

● Cumulated: the log is written to the existing log

● Session: the existing log is overwritten by the log of the current session.

The log can be formatted or non-formatted.

CATIA Optional
Infrastructure
Fields Version 5 Release 16 Page 1551

This field contains the list of traditional statistics options: theme, date and time, elapsed time, response time, CPU, User, Host and PID.

Logging Workbench Activity

Example of formatted traces for a workbench log:
...

them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 10.29.02 2002:elps=0.000000:rtim=0.000000:cpus=0.000000:Session=Start:User=SES:Host=JANEDSY

WORKBENCH: Wed May 22 10.38.57 2002:0.000000:0.000000:0.000000:Start:SES:JANEDSY
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 10.39.32 2002:elps=5888.000000:rtim=861.000000:cpus=370.000000:Workbench=CATDrwDrwWkb:NLS=Drafting
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 10.39.38 2002:elps=3213621.000000:rtim=901.000000:cpus=170.000000:Workbench=CATPstProductWkb:NLS=
Product Structure
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 11.33.12 2002:elps=4567.000000:rtim=270.000000:cpus=130.000000:Workbench=CATCuiCATALOGWks:NLS=Catalog Editor
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 11.33.16 2002:elps=3866.000000:rtim=100.000000:cpus=60.000000:Workbench=CATMaterialWorkshopWks:NLS=
Material Library
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 11.33.20 2002:elps=3585.000000:rtim=100.000000:cpus=90.000000:Workbench=CATAifAssemblyWkb:NLS=Assembly Design
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 11.33.24 2002:elps=50.000000:rtim=50.000000:cpus=40.000000:Workbench=CATMaterialWorkshopWks:NLS=Material Library
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 11.33.24 2002:elps=40.000000:rtim=40.000000:cpus=30.000000:Workbench=CATCuiCATALOGWks:NLS=Catalog Editor
them=WORKBENCH:time=Wed May 22 11.33.24 2002:elps=1833.000000:rtim=120.000000:cpus=110.000000:Workbench=CATAifAssemblyWkb:NLS=Assembly Design
Example of non-formatted traces:

WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.36.17 2002:48690.000000:341.000000:300.000000:Workbench=CATAifAssemblyWkb:NLS=Assembly Design

WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.37.06 2002:2173.000000:481.000000:290.000000:CATPstProductWkb:Product Structure
WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.37.08 2002:11517.000000:1832.000000:1451.000000:CATPcfPartWkb:Part Design
WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.37.21 2002:4877.000000:471.000000:430.000000:CATDrwDrwWkb:Drafting
WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.37.26 2002:4747.000000:491.000000:120.000000:CATHybridPartWorkbenchWkb:Hybrid Part Workbench
WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.37.31 2002:50.000000:50.000000:30.000000:CATDrwDrwWkb:Drafting
WORKBENCH:Wed May 22 11.37.31 2002:1292.000000:70.000000:60.000000:CATHybridPartWorkbenchWkb:Hybrid Part Workbench
Note that:
● Workbench = internal workbench name
● NLS = NLS name of the workbench (the name which appears in the Start menu).

When you change an option, exit the session and restart to take your settings into account.

Logging Command Activity

Here is the log syntax:

them=COMMAND:time=Wed May 22 10.05.17

2002:elps=8993.000000:rtim=7491.000000:cpus=630.000000:Command=FileNew:NLS=New...:CurrentWorkbench=CATPstProductWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=
Product Structure:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd

where:

them: theme (command in this case)

time: time

elps: elapsed time spent in the command.

rtim: "response time", which is the ellapsed time minus user wait time.

Cpus: cpu time spent is the command.

Command: internal command name

 NLS: external command name
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1552
CurrentWorkbench: internal current workbench name

NLS_CurrentWorkbench: external current workbench name

Origin_Header: origin header

mode: background or foreground mode.

This trace will be logged when you exit the command. The workbench name is the current workbench when you exit the command.

Note that certain auxiliary commands (for example, the Search command) are not logged.
Example of formatted traces for a command log

them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.44.36 2005:elps=0.000000:rtim=0.000000:cpus=0.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Session=Start

them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.44.43
2005:elps=3828.000000:rtim=94.000000:cpus=76.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=FileNew:NLS=New...:CurrentWorkbench=CATPstProductWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Product
Structure:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.44.36
2005:elps=11219.000000:rtim=16.000000:cpus=15.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=Select:NLS=Select:CurrentWorkbench=CATPstProductWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Product
Structure:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.44.50
2005:elps=6671.000000:rtim=5234.000000:cpus=406.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=FileNew:NLS=New...:CurrentWorkbench=CATPstProductWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Product
Structure:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.45.01
2005:elps=15343.000000:rtim=15.000000:cpus=0.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=Select:NLS=Select:CurrentWorkbench=CATPcfPartWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Part
Design:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.45.16
2005:elps=20313.000000:rtim=110.000000:cpus=106.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=OpenSettings:NLS=Options...:CurrentWorkbench=CATPcfPartWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Part
Design:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.45.36
2005:elps=3265.000000:rtim=15.000000:cpus=15.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=Select:NLS=Select:CurrentWorkbench=CATPcfPartWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Part
Design:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.44.47
2005:elps=52641.000000:rtim=2281.000000:cpus=416.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=Select:NLS=Select:CurrentWorkbench=CATPstProductWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Product
Structure:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.45.40
2005:elps=78.000000:rtim=62.000000:cpus=62.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Command=FileExit:NLS=Exit:CurrentWorkbench=CATPcfPartWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=Part
Design:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
them=COMMAND:time=Fri Jan 21 14.44.36 2005:elps=64094.000000:rtim=7641.000000:cpus=946.000000:user=ses:host=JANE2DSY:upid=3168:Session=End
Example of non-formatted traces for a workbench log

COMMAND:Wed May 22 10.29.14 2002:7051.000000:171.000000:160.000000:Command=OpenSettings:NLS=Options...:CurrentWorkbench=CATAifAssemblyWkb:NLS_CurrentWorkbench=

Assembly Design:Origin_Header=Global:mode=ForegroundCmd
COMMAND:Wed May 22 10.29.21 2002:2673.000000:30.000000:30.000000:Select:Select:CATAifAssemblyWkb:Assembly Design:Global:ForegroundCmd
COMMAND:Wed May 22 10.29.24 2002:1392.000000:31.000000:30.000000:PasteSpecial:Paste Special...:CATAifAssemblyWkb:Assembly Design:Global:
ForegroundCmd
COMMAND:Wed May 22 10.29.25 2002:2003.000000:21.000000:10.000000:Select:Select:CATAifAssemblyWkb:Assembly Design:Global:ForegroundCmd
COMMAND:Wed May 22 10.29.00 2002:27429.000000:70.000000:10.000000:Command=AnalyserCmd:NLS=AnalyserCmd:Origin_Header=Global:mode=
BackgroundCmd
COMMAND:Wed May 22 10.29.27 2002:50.000000:50.000000:40.000000:FileExit:Exit:CATAifAssemblyWkb:Assembly Design:Global:ForegroundCmd

Logging Session Statistics

The Session Statistics is a new statistics theme which records information about application sessions (duration, start date, exit status). This information is collected via a statistics theme so as to take advantage
of the statistics infrastructure (for example, the automatic copy and relocation of statistics files exceeding a determined size).

This information is limited to one event per session.

As such, it will help keep track of users' session durations and ending status, providing a supplementary tool to measure MTBF.
 When activated, the Session Statistics generates one output line by session on the console or in a file. The default file is:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1553
CATTemp/Statistics/Stats_SESSION_user_HOST

Example of output:

them=SESSION:time=Mon Apr 14 09.12.06 2003:elps=131690.000000:

rtim=1112.000000:cpus=110.000000:MainName=CATIA:ExitStatus=normal_end

No output is generated for the session during which the session statistics are activated. You have to exit then restart your Version 5 session, and from then on you will obtain session statistics output for all
further sessions.

This new functionality is mainly useful for Version 5 administrators. Session Statistics list all the sessions, their duration, and exit conditions for any or all users, easily providing them with a comprehensive view
of the average duration of user sessions and allows a global view of the usage of Version 5 by any user or group of users.

It also provides an idea of the percentage of sessions where no failure occurred.

Session statistics add a global view in addition to the more detailed views already provided by the existing COMMAND and WORKBENCH statistics.

Notes about output logs

Event dates in the output file are not organized in chronological order. A statistics event is always logged when it is terminated. The start date and duration are specified. Events are generated in event
termination chronological order. Because the statistics software allows interlaced or embedded events, events do not necessarily end in the order in which they began.

The two start and end slots indicate the same time. A statistics event is always logged when it is terminated. The start time and duration are specified. The corresponding session event is generated at the end of
the session: it started at the beginning of the session and lasts the duration of the session. Due to the possibility of having several successive session statistics in the same session, it is necessary to physically
log the start of a session. This is the session start event (whose duration is null). The two events are generated at the same time in the code. To determine the end time, information is provided for the start date
and duration.

Error Logging Capability

The objective of this feature is to provide a key tool for MTBD tracking.

It will enable to users to detect hidden problems or find areas where improvement should be done, in terms of quality and functionality. Not only failure will be logged but also defects which may cause any sort
of problems to the end-user. Typically, it will log pop-up warnings, internal critical errors and failures.

Furthermore, end-users have a user interface allowing them to report defects and describe the problem. This report will be logged in this error log.

Principal Features
● Tools options user interface to activate/customize the error log
● user interface allowing user to report error logging
● logging of all infrastructure warning popups
● logging of all abends/failures
● logging of main applicative popups
● logging of critical internal errors.

Activating the Error Log

1. To activate the option, check the "activated" option.

2. Click the "+" button to access a dialog box containing more advanced customization options.
Note that the additional statistics contain extra options for error logging:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1554

Description of Error Log Scope

Optional Fields contains the following three options specific to error logging:

● Workbench
● Command
● Message

enabling you to specify whether you want to log workbench, command or message activity respectively. When activated, an error log will be generated. This error log contains one line per event. Each event will
correspond to a defect.

Severity Levels

The defects may be:

● an abend or failure
● a critical internal error detected by a low layer of the application and which may potentially cause later defects
● a warning pop-up displayed to the end-user
● a comment (indicating surprising or bothersome behavior which is not a defect, for example
● a user-reported defect.

Error Log Record Format

The error log uses the V5 statistics format. The default record format is:

Log Field Present/Absent in Default Log Comment

may be discarded by
Thematic Name Present
administrator
may be discarded by
Date/Time of the error Present
administrator
may be discarded by
User ID (Windows) Present
administrator
Host ID Absent may be added by administrator
Process ID Absent may be added by administrator
 may be discarded by
Date/Time of command start
CATIA Infrastructure Present Version 5administrator
Release 16 Page 1555
may be discarded by
Workbench Name Present
administrator
may be discarded by
Command Name Present
administrator
Error/Warning Message Code Present mandatory
Message Text Present depends on Error Log option

1st format style (with field names)

them=ErrorLog:time=Mon Apr 14 09.12.06 2003:user=SGT:Workbench=CATPstProductWkb:

Command=Select:gravity=warning:msg="Update Error"

2nd format style (without field names)

ErrorLog:Mon Apr 14 09.12.06 2003:SGT:CATPstProductWkb:Select:warning:"Update Error"

Note: Administrators will be able to lock these settings so that the end-user cannot change them, in which case an end-user will not be able to deactivate error logging.

User Defect Reporting

You can add your own information to the log by checking the User Report option. When you do so, you need to access the Error Log dialog box. To do so:

1. Select the View->Toolbars command.

2. Select the Error Log toolbar.
The toolbar is displayed.
3. Select the Error Log toolbar to display the Error Log dialog box:

4. Perform a scenario in which you observe a problem which has surprising or bothersome behavior and which is not a defect.
5. Specify the severity level and enter a comment in the Message field to describe the problem.
6. Exit your Version 5 session.

Location of Error Log

The log is located in the location referenced by the CATTemp variable. For example, the default location (on Windows) of the error log is:

C:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\Application Data\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp\Statistics

Logging PCS Traces

System PCS (performance, capacity and scalability) traces have been provided to be able to measure CPU and memory consumption in client and server scenarios for CATIA, ENOVIA and VPMV5 applications.

This tool is designed to:

● determine the main PCS costs of a scenario

● identify the critical points for PCS problems
● obtain customer site PCS information about critical problems without needing too much or confidential data.
 A typical scenario for which this tool would be useful is the use of the VPM Nav command in CATIA to open a product root class (PRC) on an ENOVIA V5 server.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1556
This new functionality will provide PCS administrators with more accurate data about memory and CPU use during each step of a scenario.

Note: only client PCS traces are supported in this release.

Functionalities

PCS Statistics allow users to log events and obtain information about CPU and memory consumption during the event.

The PCS thematic has several activation levels. The end user can choose the level of details required for measurements.

Only the event with an activation level less or equal than the activated level are output (more macroscopic events have a lesser activation level.)

This allows you to begin a statistics analysis session by identifying the macro events where a performance problem occurs, then to go gradually to the details to identify the exact layer of software which is
causing the problem.

The PCS thematic has a specific option call cumulated stats:

● this option cumulates all the occurrences of the same type (sum of elapsed time, cpu time).
● only one line is generated in the output file: a field in the output specifies the number of cumulated events.
● it is possible to simultaneously have cumulated events and individual events, depending on their respective levels:
❍ 1 < activation level of the event <= selected cumulation level: one line is generated by event
❍ cumulation level < activation level of the event <=selected activation level: one line is generated per group of events.

This allows analysis of individual macroscopic events and how their time is divided, without having hundreds of microscopic sub-events.

A command has been provided to define dynamically the start and end of the measurement. Contrary to most other statistics, PCS statistics are meant to be used dynamically PCS statistics are activated by
default, but no events will be generated if the user does not specify at least an activation level (cumulation level is optional).

An extra field exists for the memory (start memory and end memory; current memory or last recorded peak, depending on the operating system).

Unlike other statistics, the date parameter provides beginning and end time.

Activating PCS Statistics

The PCS Statistics thematic is activated by default in the Statistics Thematics List.

PCS has a new optional field: Memory.

When activated, it generates two fields in the output file:

● memory at the beginning

● and memory at the end

of the statistics event. Depending on the operating system, the value can be the instant memory or the last peak value.

Contrary to all other statistics thematics, when activated, the time field generate two fields in the output file, the date and time:

● at the beginning of the event

● and also at the end.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1557

Activation Level

It comprises up to ten activation levels.

Select the View->Toolbars command and check PCS Statistics to display the following toolbar:

By default, the level is set to "0", which means no traces are generated. Use the Start and Stop buttons to start and stop PCS measuring.

Cumulation Level

This option can be used to condense several events into a single generated line. This provides cpu time, cumulated elapsed times, and an extra field providing the number of iterations.

By default, the cumulation level mode is set to "0", so it is inactive.

If "n" and "m" are event levels:

o<n< cumulation level < m< activation level

An event of level "n" will be detailed (1 line per event).

An event of level "m" will be cumulative (1 line for one or more events).

If you set a cumulation level higher than the activation level, the cumulation level will be set equal to the activation level.
Example of output

Example of generated line:

them=PCS:time=Wed Jul 07 16.46.46 2004:end_time = Wed Jul 07 16.46.46 2004 :elps=0.000000:rtim=0.000000:cpus=0.000000

:user=siu:host=DREX1DSY:upid=2756:start_max=15705112: Field1=Value1:Field2=Value2:end_max=1244964
CATIA Limitations
Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1558
To generate an output, two conditions must be fulfilled:

● PCS Thematics must be activated: if not, an error message appears in the PCS panel, and measurement can not start. Furthermore, the activation level of the statistics event must be less than or equal to the
level activated in the PCS panel: if not, nothing is output, and no error message appears.
● Depending on the operating system, the names of the values provided for memory usage vary:
❍ the value of the current memory: the field names in the output file are "start_mem" and "end_mem"
❍ the value of the latest memory peak (in this case, the value can only increase during the session): the fields in the output file are "start_max" and "end_max".
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1559

Display

This page deals with Display options in the following tabs:

● the Tree Appearance tab lets you set options for displaying the specification tree

● the Tree Manipulation tab lets you set options for manipulating the specification tree

● the Navigation tab lets you customize navigation options

● the Performances tab lets you customize performance settings

● the Visualization tab lets you customize visualization settings

● the Thickness & Font tab lets you set thickness properties

● the Layer Filter tab lets you set options for layer filters

● the Linetype tab lets you set linetype properties.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1560

Tree Appearance

This tab deals with the options concerning:

● tree type

● tree orientation

● tree item size

● tree show/no show

Tree Type

Classical Windows Style

If this option is selected, it means that the specification tree is displayed according to the conventional way.
This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and assemblies.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1561

By default, this option is activated.

Structure

If this option is selected, the specification is displayed like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1562

By default, this option is cleared.

Constructive Historic

If the whole of the tree is not displayed, you may have to enlarge the window.

Alternatively, you can reduce the length of tree item names. To do this, click Fixed in the Tree Item Size area. The
default number of characters is 8. You can of course specify the number of your choice.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1563

By default, this option is cleared.

Relational

If this option is selected, the tree looks something like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1564

This option might, for example, be useful when working on solids and surfaces.

By default, this option is cleared.

Tree Orientation

Note that the tree orientation can be modified only when displaying the specification tree in Constructive Historic
or Relational mode.

Vertical

If this option is selected, all possible relations between the different items that go to make up the part are shown:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1565

By default, this option is activated.

Horizontal

This option might, for example, be used for surface creation.

You can also change the background colors via Tools > Options > General > Display > Visualization.

If the specification tree prevents you from seeing the geometry, you can move the tree by first clicking the
reference axis (the geometry is displayed in low highlighting mode), then dragging the tree to a new location using
the middle mouse button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1566

The example above shows an Horizontal orientation in Relational mode.

By default, this option is cleared.

Tree Item Size

Enables you to specify the number of characters used for the names of the items displayed in the specification
tree.

Text-dependent

If this option is selected, it means that each item name is displayed as a whole.

By default, this option is activated.

Fixed

If this option is selected, the field displayed to the right is activated to let you enter the fixed number of characters
to be displayed for item names.
In that case, the object name is truncated (only the first and last characters are displayed) as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1567

Text-dependent is activated Fixed is activated and set to 15

By default, this option is cleared.

Tree Show/No Show

If this option is selected, it means that if you select an item in the tree, then click Hide/Show in the View
toolbar, the item is grayed out in the tree.

If this option is cleared, you cannot gray out an item in the tree. Clicking Hide/Show has no effect.

When the size of the tree exceeds the window size, a scrollbar appears: you can then move the tree and navigate
using the scrollbar.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1568

Tree Manipulation

This tab deals with the options concerning:

● scroll

● automatic expand

● zoom on tree

Scroll

Automatic scroll activation during drag and drop

If this option is selected along with the Activate the Visualization of Show/No Show option, you can scroll the
tree automatically when dragging and dropping icons or objects onto it.
The tree is scrolled until you remove the mouse from the scroll area.

For more information on dragging and dropping, refer to Dragging and Dropping Icons and Objects in this guide.

By default, this option is activated.

Display geometry during tree scrolling

If this option is selected, you can see the geometry while scrolling the specification tree using the scroll bar
displayed to the left.

Note that this option has no impact when scrolling the specification tree using the mouse scroll button since the
geometry is displayed. However, when dragging and dropping icons with the Automatic scroll activation during
Drag and Drop option activated, the geometry is not displayed.

By default, this option is cleared.

Automatic Expand
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1569

If this option is selected, this activates the automatic expansion of the specification tree up to the second level as
shown below:

Example 1

When clicking the + sign next to the first

"DragObjectOntoObject" item with the automatic expand
not activated:

Example 2

When clicking the + sign next to the first

"DragObjectOntoObject" item with the automatic expand
activated:

When the automatic expand is activated, a message informs you that the automatic expand of the specification
tree will be taken into account the next time you open a document.

By default, this option is cleared.

Zoom on Tree

If this option is selected, it means that if you click any branch in the tree, the geometry is dimmed and only the
tree is active, enabling you to manipulate it on its own (zoom it up and down, etc.).

When deactivated, the only way to manipulate the graph is to click the reference axis in the bottom right corner of
the document.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1570

Navigation

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● selection

● navigation

● fly/walk

● mouse speed

Selection

Preselect in geometry view

Activates preselection highlighting. As you point to objects, different parts of the objects are highlighted in the geometry area, and the
object name is highlighted in the specification tree.
However, note that deactivating this option impacts all commands using prehighlight, especially the Other Selection... command that does
not work anymore when it is based on prehighlight.

By default, this option is activated.

Preselection navigator after ... second(s)

Sets the amount of time, in seconds, which elapses before the preselection navigator appears after pointing at an object. Refer to Selecting
Using the Preselection Navigator for more information about how to use the preselection navigator.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1571

Highlight faces and edges

Controls the way faces and edges are prehighlighted and highlighted.

How elements are prehighlighted and highlighted:

● is determined by whether you are in Design mode (editing an element in the context of an assembly) or in Visualization mode
● and varies according to the current visualization mode: Shading with Edges, Shading, Wireframe (NHR), Dynamic hidden line
removal (HRD). Note that some minor differences in the way elements are highlighted are noticeable using the HRD mode.

The default prehighlight and highlight colors are different, and can be customized using the Visualization tab. By default, faces and edges
are highlighted. Depending on the element type, elements may or may not be displayed using the Z-buffer.

The following examples use the shading mode.

When you are editing an object, a selected face is highlighted like this:

... and a selected edge is highlighted like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1572

If you select the Pad or the PartBody in the specification tree, the whole object is highlighted like this:

If you are in Visualization mode in an assembly, the whole object is highlighted.

By default, this option is cleared.

Display manipulation bounding box

When clicking on an object, displays a bounding box around the selected object if it uses manipulators:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1573
Objects using manipulators can be manipulated by the 3D compass. For more information about manipulating objects using the 3D compass,
refer to Manipulating Objects Using the Mouse and Compass.

By default, this option is cleared.

Limit display of manipulators to ... element(s)

Sets a limit on the number of elements selected in multi-selection mode (using the selection trap) on which manipulators can be displayed.

In case you select more elements than the limit (for example, by pressing Ctrl to extend the selection), no element can be manipulated.
Note that this option also optimizes the selection when large amounts of elements are involved. The consequence is that the selection
becomes faster but also less accurate. Therefore, when the limit is exceeded, some selected elements may not be highlighted and the
manipulators may not be displayed and this, even if the number of selected elements is reduced afterwards.

This option is activated when working in a 2D context (objects with handles such as texts and arrows, for instance) or 3D context.

The following scenario takes the Drafting application as an example:

1. Enter a value in the Limit display of manipulators box, 10 for instance then click OK to validate.

Note that setting a high number (greater than 50) has an impact on the content of the
contextual menu displayed when right-clicking a selected element: the contextual menu is
reduced and therefore, do not display all the commands available.

2. In the geometry area, select six elements either using the selection trap or by pressing Ctrl.

As you can see below, manipulators are displayed on the selected elements to let you modify them:

If you set the limit to 5 instead of 10, no manipulator is displayed since the number of selected elements (i.e. six) exceeds the limit:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1574

Display immersive list for the preselection navigator

Displays the list of all the elements you can preselect when using the preselection navigator.
If you do not want to display the immersive list, deactivate the option.

By default, this option is activated.

Display auxiliary viewer for preselection navigator

Activates an auxiliary viewer displaying the preselected object when using the preselection navigator. This viewer enables you to perform
viewing operations with the mouse such as zoom, rotate or pan.

By default, this option is cleared.

Prehighlight faces for preselection navigator

Activates the highlight of the faces you preselect using the preselection navigator.

By default, this option is cleared.

Display immersive viewer for preselection navigator

Activates the display of the immersive viewer when using the preselection navigator.

By default, this option is selected.

Navigation

Gravitational effects during navigation

Fixes the X, Y or Z axis during navigation. While turning in Fly mode, this creates the impression that the user viewpoint tilts or banks with
respect to the fixed axis, as in a real plane.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1575

Follow ground at altitude (in mm)

First, select the Gravitational effects during navigation check box to be able to activate this option.
When flying and walking, this gravitational effect makes you automatically fall if you do not reach the specified altitute (in millimeters). This
allows you to follow the ground relief, such as stairs.

An altitude set to "0" means that the eye level is set at ground level, whereas an altitude higher than "0" will set the eye level above ground
level.

Note that the Follow ground at altitude check box is automatically cleared when it is not relevant, i.e. when no ground is detected.

By default, this option is cleared.

Animation during viewpoint navigation

Set this option if you want viewpoint changes in certain contexts to be animated. To see an example of the effect of this option, check the

option, then select a plane and click Sketch . The selected plane is slowly rotated until parallel to the screen just like during an
animation. If you do not select this check box, the selected plane is set parallel to the screen immediately (without the animation effect).

Note: the visualization time of the product impacts the number of animation steps. The longer the duration, the less steps. In case the
visualization takes too much time, there is no viewpoint animation at all.

By default, this option is activated.

Disable the rotation sphere display

Hides the rotation sphere usually displayed when rotating an object. The result is as follows:

Rotation sphere activated (default mode) Rotation sphere deactivated

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1576

Fly/walk

Collision detection enabled

Select this check box to activate the following two options:

Point/scene collision

When flying and walking, detects if you collide with an object, so that you bounce off the object instead of going through it. This is the
default option.

By default, this option is activated.

Sphere/scene collision

Works the same way as Point/scene collision but this time, the user is modelized as a sphere whose radius can be defined by entering a
value (in millimeters) in the box to the right. When flying and walking, the option detects if the sphere collides with an object, so that you
bounce off the object. As no object can break through the sphere, this provides a more "immersive" experience.

Note that this detection collision mode works with complex geometry since it is based on visualization triangles.
Note also that, when used in combination with Follow ground at altitude, this option can provide video game Quake-like navigation
effects.

However, bear in mind that there is a price to pay in performance when using large models.

By default, this option is cleared.

Mouse Sensitivity

Sets the mouse sensitivity when flying and walking: if you set a low value, pointing the cursor produces only slow, minor changes in
direction; if you set a high value, pointing the cursor produces rapid, significant changes in direction.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1577

Start Speed

When you begin to fly, this option lets you choose between two options:

● Automatic: you begin to fly at the default speed, i.e. the speed at which you first approach the object depends on the initial distance
from the object and is calculated automatically
By default, this option is activated.
● Custom: you can define by yourself the speed at which you first approach the object using the slider.
By default, this option is cleared.

Mouse Speed

Sets the time interval (from 0 to 100 milliseconds) during which mouse movements are not taken into account for prehighlight purposes:
the higher the speed, the fewer elements are prehighlighted.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1578

Performances

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● occlusion culling

● 3D accuracy

● 2D accuracy

● level of detail

● pixel culling

● transparency quality

● frames per second

● frames per second for 3Dx devices

● miscellaneous

● enable back face culling

● halo when displaying the geometry with hidden lines removed

● picking

Occlusion culling

Occlusion culling enabled

If this option is selected, it means that occlusion culling is activated.

Occlusion culling avoids redisplay of hidden elements, particularly useful when viewing highly compartmented
scenes such as plants and buildings and improves display performance.

Let's have a look at the picture below to see what happens when occlusion culling is activated:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1579

By default, this option is cleared.

3D Accuracy

The accuracy setting controls the tessellation of surfaces."Tessellation" means that the surfaces of your
geometry are built using triangles. A triangulation is computed to describe the neighborhood relation of all
points.

You have two choices (the preview area to the right shows you the effect of each setting):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1580

Fixed

Sets a fixed sag value (from 0.01 to 10) for calculating tessellation on all objects, which does not vary with
object size.

The sag value defines the chordal deviation for curves and surfaces.

The "curve chordal deviation" represents the maximum distance between a polyline ("chord") whose end points
lie on a curve and a point on this curve:

The "surface chordal deviation" represents the maximum distance between the tessellation triangles and the
surface.
● a low value means that a very fine mesh is used to render surfaces because the distance between the
geometry and the triangles in the tessellation is very low.
However, the drawback is that geometry is redrawn more slowly when using the viewing tools

Example with default fixed sag value ( = 0.20)

● a high value increases the distance between the geometry and the triangles and thus, decreases the
number of triangles computed on the object. This means that a very coarse mesh is used, but the
advantage is that geometry is redrawn more quickly
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1581

Example with default fixed sag value set to 8.5

By default, this option is activated.

Proportional to element size

Tessellation is calculated according to object size: the larger the object, the coarser the tessellation. For the
same sag value, the tessellation on small objects is always finer than on large objects.

The sag value used to calculate the tessellation of each object is calculated is as follows:

sag = coeff. x radius of sphere/100

where:

● "coeff." is the value you set using the slider (between 0.1 and 1)
● "radius of sphere" is the radius of a sphere encompassing the object entirely (this value is obviously higher
on larger objects).

The following examples show the difference between a fixed and a proportional sag value applied to two
spheres with different radiuses:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1582

Radius = 100 mm Radius = 10 mm

Fixed sag value = 0.20 Fixed sag value = 0.20

Radius = 100 mm Radius = 10 mm

Proportional sag value = 0.20 Proportional sag value = 0.20

By default, this option is cleared.

Start by setting a high fixed value in order to decrease the number of tessellation triangles and thus, pay a
lower price in performance.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1583
Warning:
● when working with V4 models, be careful not to set a too high sag value for 3D accuracy, otherwise you will
not be able to visualize them
● as long as the CATPart is not modified (for instance, by creating a point or modifying the pad definition) the
3D accuracy is not taken into account when you save the CATPart using File > Save. However, if you use
File > Save As, the 3D accuracy is taken into account
● bear in mind that modifying the value of the 3D accuracy has an impact on the size of your CATPart
document. The reason is that a CGR (CATIA Graphical Representation) is stored systematically in the
CATPart and the size of this CGR depends on the value you set for the 3D accuracy.

Curves' accuracy ratio

This option lets you control the curve accuracy using the slider displayed to the right (you can choose a value
between 0.1 and 1).
The curve accuracy is a ratio of the 3D accuracy you define using the above-detailed 3D Accuracy options.

The curve accuracy is calculated as follows:

sag = 3D accuracy x ratio

As a consequence, the tessellation on curves is finer than the tessellation on surfaces.

For instance, setting the 3D sag value to 0.20 and the curve accuracy ratio to 0.10 means that:

● faces are tessellated with a 0.20 sag

● curves are tessellated with a 0.02 sag (0.20 x 0.10).

Example 1 Example 2
Fixed 3D accuracy = 10 Fixed 3D accuracy = 10
Curve accuracy ratio = 1 Curve accuracy ratio = 0.10
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1584

2D Accuracy

Note that settings for 2D accuracy are the same as for 3D accuracy.

Level of Detail

You do not always need to view a high level of detail in your geometry all the time. You can use the Static and
While Moving settings to add or remove display quality:
● Static: even if you do not want to move geometry, it is often useful to remove details you do not need to
see. Set a low value if you want to see all the details, or a high value to remove details
● While Moving: you can move large parts more quickly if you set this option to a high value. When you
release the mouse after moving the part, the normal level of detail is redisplayed.

In both cases, the higher the value, the lower the level of detail. Normally, you set Static to a low value, and
While Moving to a high value. The added value is increased display performance.

More about LODs

● If you are using the Level of detail options with Product Structure or DMU Navigator functions, you must
activate the cache for your LOD settings to be taken into account
● When working with a model onto which several colors have been applied (for instance, a different color for
each face) using a static or dynamic level of detail, only one color is displayed for performance reasons.
How is this color selected? The application retrieves the color of all the faces the object is made of and looks
for the dominant color (i.e. the most used color). This dominant color is then used for the display.
If you want to see all the colors applied onto the object, set the static or dynamic level of detail to 0.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1585

Pixel Culling

This option is similar to the Level of detail options, but in that case, it lets you define the size in pixels of
objects to be hidden or displayed in your geometry using the Static and While Moving sliders.
● Static: even if you do not want to move geometry, it is often useful to remove details you do not need to
see. To do so, set a high value to remove these details. On the contrary, setting a low value displays the
details. For instance, setting 2 means that objects whose size on screen is lower than 2 pixels are static
● While Moving: setting a high value enables you to move large parts more quickly. When you release the
mouse after moving the part, the Static size is redisplayed.

Transparency Quality

Low (Screen Door)

Similar to viewing an object through a mesh or a screen. Use this setting when you need to look at objects
through another transparent object.
This mode is recommended for increased display performance but keep in mind that only one pixel out of two is
rasterized and therefore, some objects might not be visualized.
When selected, the transparency is not impacted whatever value you set (between 1 and 255).

By default, this option is activated.

High (Alpha Blending)

The produced effect is similar to looking through clear glass. Use this setting when you need to view several
transparent objects located at different depths of a scene. For example, looking through a car windscreen at
other opaque objects inside the car.

As far as polygons are concerned, the result might not be as expected because in that case, the triangles are
blend with the rest of the scene. As it is too costly and may adversely affect performance, polygons are not
drawn using a Z order (i.e. depth order) and therefore, it is not possible to be sure that when the transparent
polygon is blended, all the scene is drawn behind. Transparent polygons are drawn at the end of the draw
phase but they are not depth-stored.

When activated, the transparency is impacted according to the value you set.
You also need to set the transparency coefficient on selected objects using Edit > Properties or the
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1586
Properties contextual command, by dragging the Transparency slider in the Graphic tab. Refer to Displaying
and Editing Graphic Properties for more information.

Note that when working in Shading with Material mode, the Transparency Quality is automatically switched
to High (Alpha Blending).

Note also that this mode is computation-intensive and consequently has an adverse affect on display
performance.

By default, this option is cleared.

Frames per second

Enabled

If this option is selected, it lets you control the minimum number of frames per second (frame rate) during
animations (zooming, moving, flying, etc.) when using a regular mouse. The frame rate varies from 1 to 30.
Setting a low frame rate keeps a maximum number of details visible, but animations are less smooth and fluid;
setting a high frame rate limits visible details, but provides smoother, more fluid animations.

This option is particularly useful, for example, in Fly mode: when flying within large objects, you may not need
to see all the details, but you want to navigate through the object in as smooth a manner as possible.

By default, this option is cleared.

Frames per second for 3Dx Devices

If this option is selected, it lets you control the minimum number of frames per second (frame rate) during
animations when using a 3Dx device such as a Space Mouse. This option works the same way as the above-
detailed Frames per second, the only difference is that it is specific to 3Dx devices.

By default, this option is cleared.

Miscellaneous
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1587

Show Hidden Edges (whenever possible)

Note that the display of hidden edges is now activated in the Custom View Modes dialog box.

Enable isoparametrics generation

If this option is selected, it means that you can generate (in this context, it means to "display") the topological
elements defined as being isoparametrics.
By default, the option is cleared for performance reasons.

To use this option, just follow the steps below:

1. Select the Enable isoparametrics generation check box: you are then asked to restart your Version
5 session
2. Restart your Version 5 session
3. Re-access the Performances tab then, if desired, specify the number of isoparametrics to be
generated for u and v axes using the Number of isoparametrics in U and V arrows displayed to the
right. You can generate up to 10 isoparametrics. Here, enter 2
4. Select View > Render Style > Customize View then select the Isoparametrics check box which is
now activated.

The isopamametrics are displayed:

Enable isoparametrics generation Enable isoparametrics generation and

and Isoparametrics are cleared: Isoparametrics are selected:
no isoparametrics. 2 isoparametrics are displayed for u and v axes
since we entered the value 2 in step 3.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1588

Enable two side lighting for faces and surfaces only

If this option is selected, it helps you to visualize the two sides (i.e. front side and back side) of a face or
surface by lighting them.

Example with option activated Example with option cleared

By default, this option is activated.

Enable OpenGL local viewer lighting

If this option is selected, it means that a the lighting quality is better. However, bear in mind that there is a
price to pay in performance.

By default, this option is cleared.

Save lineic elements in cache

All options related to cgr management are grouped together in the Cgr Management tab in Tools > Options
> Infrastructure > Product Structure. Therefore, the Save lineic elements in cache option is not
displayed in the Performances tab anymore.
Refer to "Customizing Cgr Settings" in the Version 5 - Product Structure User's Guide for detailed information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1589

Enable OpenGL Shader

If this option is selected, it lets you apply OpenGL materials when working with the Real Time Rendering 2
product. These advanced materials are used to create textures such as paint, wood or marble.
For detailed information, refer to the section entitled "Advanced Materials" in the Version 5 - Real Time
Rendering User's Guide.

To be able to use these advanced materials, you need to download the OpenGL Shader™ development kit. To
do so, if you are working on IRIX (only versions earlier than 6.5.20) or on Windows, browse the following site:

http://www.sgi.com/industries/manufacturing/partners/catia/

then send an e-mail to the Strategic Partner Manager (click its name on the page) to ask for the required
elements.

The option is displayed when re-accessing the Performances tab:

By default, this option is cleared.

Enable back face culling

For stand-alone faces

If this option is selected, it avoids redisplay of back sides of faces or surfaces.

Note that when this option is selected along with Enable two side lighting for faces and surfaces only,
only front faces are lightened.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1590

For faces belonging to solids

If this option is selected, it avoids redisplay of back sides of faces or surfaces belonging to solids:

Option is selected Option is cleared

Internal faces of the solid are hidden Internal faces of the solid are displayed

By default, this option is activated.

Note that activating these options has an impact on performance because back faces that were not previously
drawn are now systematically rendered, whether they can be seen by the user or not.

Halo when displaying the geometry with hidden lines

removed
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1591

Enabled

If this option is selected, it lets you display a halo around intersecting edges to create a perspective effect.

Prior to using it, you need to switch to Dynamic hidden line removal mode otherwise, you will not be able to
use this option. To do so, select View > Render Style > Customize View then select the Dynamic hidden
line removal check box before clicking OK to validate.

The following picture shows an example of halo:

Example 1 Example 2
No Halo Halo enabled

By default, this option is cleared.

Picking

This area enables you to pick elements, i.e. select elements when pointing them. In "normal" picking mode,
you need to move your mouse to select an element whereas in accurate picking mode, the slightest move (one
pixel, for instance) is enough to select.

Window size for picking

Lets you specify the size (in pixels) of the window to be used for picking elements in normal mode. You can set
a value comprised between 1 and 100, the default value being 4 pixels.
The smaller the value, the more precise the picking.

Enable accurate picking

If this option is selected, it helps you select more precisely elements that are very close to each other when
displaying the geometry.
It is recommended to work with a magnified view of your document by selecting View > Magnifier as shown
below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1592

For more information, refer to Magnifying in this guide.

Whenthe Enable accurate picking check box is selected, the Window size for accurate picking box is
activated to let you define the size of the window (in pixels) used for accurate picking.
The maximum value you can enter corresponds to the maximum value defined for the "normal" picking, i.e. the
value defined using the Window size for picking box.

Note that if you this option enables you to use normal picking as well.

Activating this option might have a negative impact on the performances when using big models.

When working on UNIX workstations, you can use the Double click latency slider to manage the maximum
duration (in milliseconds) between two mouse clicks so that they can be considered as a double-click.
The default value is 500 ms but you can increase it up to 2 seconds.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1593

Visualization

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● colors

● depth display

● anti-aliasing

● stereo enable

● display current scale in parallel mode

Colors

Graduated color background

Activates a graduated color background in all open documents, and in the Preview area of the
Visualization tab itself.

For example, this document uses a graduated color background. The color becomes gradually lighter
towards the bottom of the document:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1594

...but this document uses a normal color background:

Note that this option is also available for P1 users.

By default, this option is activated.

Background

Sets background color in all open document windows. Note that the default graduated background color can
also be reset by selecting it from the list.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1595

Selected elements, Preselected elements, Low-intensity elements and

Preselected element linetype

Set colors of selected elements, preselected elements, low-intensity elements, and the linetype used to
display preselected elements.

Note: low-intensity elements are elements such as parts, products, drawings, etc. which can be neither
filtered, nor removed. The default color for low-intensity elements is "dark green" (as indicated in the
picture of the Visualization tab above).

Refer to Preselecting and Selecting Using the Pointer for a discussion of preselection and selection
techniques.

Update needed

Sets the color of objects to be updated; refer to the Version 5 - Part Design User's Guide for more
information about updating objects.

Handles

Sets manipulator handle colors. Graphic manipulators are displayed on certain objects (planar patches,
holes, ...) for the purpose of moving the objects more easily. Refer to Moving Objects Using the 3D
Compass for more information about how the compass is used on examples of where manipulators are
used.

Selected edges

Sets colors of selected edges.

Surface boundaries

If this option is selected, you can set the color and thickness of surface boundaries.

By default, this option is cleared.

Smooth Edges

Note that the visualization of smooth edges is defined in the Custom View Modes dialog box.

Depth Display
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1596

Display all elements using Z-buffer depth

If this option is selected, it means that the Z-buffer is activated so that all elements hide each other.
When activated, all elements including lines and planes (usually displayed in front of other elements) are
displayed at their true depth in the 3D scene. When deactivated, lines and planes are always displayed in
front of other elements.

By default, this option is cleared.

Anti-aliasing

Edges/Lines

If this option is selected, it means that anti-aliasing is activated on all edges and lines. You need then to
define the offset coefficient using the arrows (which are activated once Edges/Lines is selected) to the
right. This offset enables you to enhance the quality of anti-aliasing. The maximum value you can set is 0.9.
Note that once the offset has been defined, you have to perform a viewing operation, such as a translation
or a rotation, to see the result.

Anti-aliasing makes jagged lines and edges appear smoother.

In the example, the offset has been set to 0.8:

... and when cleared, edges and lines look jagged:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1597

By default, this option is cleared.

Stereo enable

Enables or disables stereoscopic visualization of graphical data with a perception of realistic, three-
dimensional images:
● On: enables stereoscopic vision.
● Off: disables stereoscopic vision.

For more information, refer to Stereoscopic Viewing.

By default, Off is activated.

Display current scale in parallel mode

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1598
When On option is selected, this activates the display of the scaling factor (at the bottom right of the
geometry area) when displaying objects in a parallel view (using View > Render Style > Parallel).

The option helps you to know the real size of an object using the following formula:

real size = size on screen / scaling factor

Note that the scale display is automatically refreshed when zooming.

To illustrate this, let's suppose a pad with the following dimensions:

Now, follow the steps below:

1. Display this pad in a parallel view then set the viewpoint so that you see one face of the pad.
2. Click On in the Display current scale in parallel mode area.
3. Zoom until the scale factor is equal to 2.00. The result should look like this:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1599

According to the above-mentioned formula, you know that the pad real dimensions are:

Length = 50 mm (100 mm / 2)
Width = 20 mm (40 mm / 2)
Height = 10 mm (20 mm / 2)

By default, Off is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1600

Layer Filter

This tab deals with one category of options: Filter and Document Display.

Filter and Document Display

This category of options lets you modify the impact of layer filters applied to assemblies (i.e. CATProduct
documents).
As far as other types of documents supporting layer filters (such as CATPart and CATDrawing documents)
are concerned, filters are stored in the document and this storage location cannot be modified.

Current filter on all documents

If this option is selected, it means that the current filter is applied to all the documents of the assembly
(i.e. a CATProduct and the CATParts it contains).
When the assembly is edited, this option applies the filter at the CATProduct level and impacts the
visualization of all the documents of the assembly (including the CATParts) and this, even though a filter
has been defined in the CATParts. The only way to visualize a CATPart according to its specific filter is to
edit the CATPart on its own.

Filters that may be stored in the documents the assembly is made of are not taken into account.

This option enhances visualization performance but do not forget that it implies that the layer selection and
the filter application is coherent between the various document types.

When a CATProduct document is open and one of its CATPart is also open in another window in the same
session, Current filter on all documents works only if filters have been applied coherently on the two
documents. For instance, if the CATPart has been applied a specific current filter (different from the global
current one), this CATPart will not be visualized correctly in the two windows since an object cannot be
visualized in two different ways at the same time.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1601

Current filter of the document

If this option is selected, it means that each document uses its own current filter (if there is one). When an
assembly (i.e. a CATProduct its CATParts) is edited, this option applies on each CATPart the filter defined in
each of them, whatever the filter defined at the CATProduct level.
If no filter is defined in a CATPart, then the default filter All visible is applied.

Note that there is a price to pay in performance when using this filter mode.

By default, this option is cleared.

Whichever option you select, note that the result might not be as expected when working with Version 4
objects. Refer to Using Visualization Filters for more information.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1602

Thickness & Font

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● thickness

● font options

Thickness

The Thickness area lets you select a thickness type from the 55 values contained in the list.

If necessary, you can modify the size in pixels or the size in millimeters by selecting the value to be
modified then clicking it once and entering your own value.
"Size in pixel" reflects the result displayed on screen and "Size in mm" corresponds to the printed version.

You cannot assign a size greater than 16 pixels.

Font Option
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1603

Use the system TrueType fonts in CATIA

Enables you to use TrueType fonts provided by Windows and thus, add them to the font chooser.

This default list of fonts can be customized. To do so, refer to Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry
Area Texts in this guide.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1604

Linetype

This tab deals with one category: Linetype.

Linetypes for Drafting products are defined in standards. For detailed information on Drafting standards,
refer to "Linetype Definition" in the Version 5 - Interactive Drafting User's Guide.

Linetype

The available linetypes are displayed in a list, the first eight types being grayed out as they correspond to
the default linetypes (displayed in the Graphic Properties toolbar) and cannot be modified.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1605

Note that:
● it is not possible to assign a linetype greater than Linetype #7 to spline geometry
● it is not possible to assign a linetype greater than Linetype #9 to circle geometry.

1. Double-click the linetype to be modified. The Linetype editor opens:

You can either define a mono-dimensional linetype or a bi-dimensional linetype.

2. To define a mono-dimensional linetype, click the Define a new mono-dimensional linetype

button. The Mono-dimensional linetype editor dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1606

This dialog box lets you define the linetype to be used for visualization and print purpose.

3. In the Visualization definition box, click the desired squares to define the linetype pattern: a

white square corresponds to a drawing, a black square corresponds to a blank. You can select up to

16 squares.

The Preview is updated accordingly as shown below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1607

4. Use the Factor arrows to stretch the pattern by increasing the value:

5. In the Print definition box, enter the length in millimeters for each pattern segment (do not forget

to leave a blank space after each character you type).

A positive value indicates a drawing and a negative value indicates a move without drawing.

The capture below illustrates the print definition of the pattern defined in step 5:

6. Click OK to validate and close the dialog box.

The new linetype replaces the selected line in the Linetype editor list. If you do not wish to go
on defining linetypes, just click OK once again to close the Options dialog box.

7. To define a bi-dimensional linetype, double-click a line from the Bi-dimensional linetype list in the

Linetype editor window. The Bi-dimensional linetype editor window opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1608

8. Move the cursor then click to create a segment and repeat these steps as necessary to define the

desired pattern.

You can create segment breaks by double-clicking a point then moving the cursor to draw a new

segment:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1609

9. Use the following icons to:

● delete the whole pattern

● delete the last segment

● reframe the bi-dimensional line editor.

10. Click OK to validate and close the dialog box.

The linetype is displayed instead of the selected line at the end of the Linetype editor.

11. Click OK once again to close the Linetype editor and display the new linetype instead of the

selected line at the end of the Linetype list.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1610

Compatibility

This page deals with Compatibility options in the following tabs:

● the V4 Data Reading tab lets you customize compatibility settings

● the Saving as V4 Data tab lets you customize compatibility settings, and more particularly for the V5 to V4
Migration (Save As Model)
● the V4/V5 DRAW tab lets you customize given options when using interoperability from V4 to V5

● the V4/V5 SPACE tab lets you customize given options when using interoperability from V4 to V5

● the V4/V5 SPEC tab lets you customize given options when using interoperability from V4 to V5

● the Migration Batch tab lets you customize Migration Batch settings

● the 3D XML tab lets you customize 3D XML settings

● the DELMIA D5 tab enables you to set the options for DELMIA D5 Integration

● the DXF/DWG tab lets you set DXF/DWG options

● the Electrical Migration tab lets you set electrical migration options

● the ENOVIA V5 tab lets you customize compatibility settings in CATIA V5 in order to work in a CATIA/ENOVIA
LCA interoperability context
● the External Formats tab lets you customize the import settings

● the Graphic Formats tab lets you set options for using graphic formats

● the IGES tab lets you customize IGES settings

● the IGES 2D tab lets you customize IGES 2D settings

● the StiSmartBOM tab lets you export or import SmartBOM Briefcases from CATIA V5

● the STEP tab lets you customize STEP settings

● the VRML tab lets you customize VRML visualization settings.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1611

V4 Data Reading

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● Reading V4 Data,

● PRJ and DLNAME,

● Conversion V4 / V5.

Reading V4 Data

Display only elements with Sensitive Attribute

In CATIA V4, this option enables you to decide whether to display the faces and surfaces sensitive to the shading
mode in CATIA Version 4.

To display only the faces and surfaces that were sensitive to the shading mode in Version 4, you must therefore
activate this option. In CATIA Version 5, by default, this box is deactivated.

Display 3D elements labels

It means that when you download a model in CATIA V5, the visualization of the V4 elements' Id or 3D text is
recalculated. For instance, the Id *FAC can appear near the 3D Face in the 3D space.

It is the default value.

If you do not check this option, the 3D text associated to the V4 elements will not be built. They will not appear in
the 3D space in CATIA V5.
Both "Display only elements with sensitive attribute" and "Display 3D elements labels" are tessellation options.
Therefore, if you open a model with the Cache on and with the "Display 3D elements labels" option activated,
then if you uncheck this option, it will have effects on this model only if you empty the Cache before reopening
it.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1612

Open in Light Mode: 2D data is not taken into account

If you activate this setting, you can disable the reading of DRAW data.

The integration of V4 models in V5 applications generally uses only the 3D Master representation of the model. On
the other hand, the management of V4 DRAW data brings several critical issues:
● Stability issue: PRJ has to be referenced correctly, else CATIA may crash.
● Performance issue: data conversion (CATAIX/CATUNIT) of DRAW data is very expensive.
● Memory consumption.

Skipping DRAW data when opening the model will not bring any restriction when working in Assembly or DMU
workbenches for instance. On the contrary, it will be a major stability / performance / memory cost upgrade.

The DRAW data is suppressed before any operation (internal or external) can be performed on the model. However
the DRAFT tab page is still available, but swapping to this tab page will generate a warning indicating that the model
has been opened in light mode:

You only get SPACE elements in the *MASTER tab; the *DRAFT tab is empty:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1613

This setting can also be effective with CATProducts and Sessions containing V4 models.
Note:
● the warning is displayed only once per tab page.
● some functionalities open directly the models in 2D mode (for example: ENOVIA DMU / Send to V5 2D Viewer).
The warning should be sent in that case too.

● If a user wants to reread a model and browse V4 geometry, it is necessary to uncheck the setting and to
reopen the model.
● If this setting is activated, the V4-V5 Migration Batch will not be able to migrate V4 Drawing data.
Therefore, if you want to convert V4 drawing elements in CATIA V5, it is necessary to uncheck this option.
For more information about the Migration Batch, please refer to the CATIA - V4Integration User's Guide.

If the model has an external PRJ File which is not specified in the Tools-Options, a second message appears (even if
the PRJ File Path is not necessary when you choose the Light Mode). However, this warning is useful when the user
decides to go back to the normal mode (not the Light Mode), at the same time he can also specify the PRJ File Path
in the Tools-Options.

This mode is also available in PDM Application when sending a model from PDM Application into CATIA V5.

Reading Code Page

In Version V4, the declaration parameter catsite.DEFAULT_DS_CODE_PAGE declares the language to identify the
data read if this data is not labeled (i.e. if it is just labeled EBCDIC or ASCII, and not labeled with a standard code
page such as ISO8859-x, IBM-392, EUC-KR, EUC-CN, and so forth).

In V4, information such as the language used to identify unlabeled readable data was specified by means of the
parameter settings in the declaration files. These declaration parameters are no longer supported in Version 5 and
there is no way to transfer them automatically to V5.

Before attempting to read Version 4 data (V4 data that is not labeled with a standard code page, for example,
ASCII-DS-xxx or EBCDIC-DS-xxx, other than US English), you must specify the appropriate language from the list
provided:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1614

PRJ and DLNAME

Project File Path

In V4, certain model data must be contained in a PROJECT file which can either be internal to the model or external.
If it is external, the only way to access such data is to provide Version 5 with precise information about the PROJECT
file's whereabouts.

Enter, in the PROJECT File Path field, the location of the PROJECT file referenced by the V4 model you wish to
display. Make sure you complete this field before displaying a Version 4 model.

The customer can use environment variables; he pre-defines an environment variable:

● on Windows: set FILE_PATH_ENV=C:\Documents and Settings\xxx

● on UNIX: export FILE_PATH_ENV=/u/users/Documents and Settings/xxx

The name of the variable is chosen by the user.

The user fills the editor with a path containing this environment variable.

The user switches tab page or clicks OK. Then he comes back to the modified tab page: the path
contains no environment variable anymore. Instead, the full expanded path appears on the tab page:

Bear in mind the following:

● If you do not specify the PROJECT file path before opening the model, a warning message will appear.
● There are no restrictions as regards the PROJECT file's code page. However, you must make sure that the
code pages of the model and the PROJECT file are compatible.

The following reference tables in the PROJECT files can now be accessed in Version 5:

● attribute and class tables,

● annotations/dimensions.
On UNIX and Windows, you can reference an external PROJECT File using the http protocol, the address to be
specified should be like this: http://serverName/path/PRJDirName
Make sure beforehand that an http server has been installed on the machine where the V4 data resides. For
more information, you can refer to About Data Sharing between Windows and UNIX, in CATIA - Infrastructure
User's Guide.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1615
On UNIX only, you can also reference PRJ files with a UNIX path: /u/path/PRJDirName.

On Windows only, if you have access to PRJ files installed on the Windows disk, you can reference it with an
Windows path: E:pathPRJDirName.

In that case, you need to bring these Project files referenced by the model into an Windows directory and rename
these files according to the conversion table. In the PROJECT File path, you refer to the directory containing the
Project Files.
For more information about character conversion, refer to the Conversion Table in the Model Naming chapter
in CATIA - V4Integration User's Guide.

Thus, in the PROJECT File path you refer to the directory containing the Project Files. For more information
about the methodology of coping your Project File on Windows, refer to Having Access to PRJ File on Windows
in CATIA - V4Integration User's Guide.

DLNAME

The only way to locate a PROJECT File physically is to fill in the PROJECT File Path. The DLNAME setting does not
allow this functionality. This setting only allows to compare the Model DLNAME (when the Model references a
DLNAME instead of a PRJ File Path) with the specified one within the setting.

When the user has only specified the PRJ File Path (User_PRJ) and not the DLNAME, whereas the model references
only a DLNAME (User_dlname), the following Warning message appears:

Whatever the value of the DLNAME field is, the PROJECT File Path is taken into account (reference to locate the
PROJECT File). This is the reason why the DLNAME option is automatically deleted when the PROJECT File Path is not
specified and when you click OK to close the window.

Conversion V4 / V5
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1616

Characters Equivalence Table Path

The Characters Equivalence Table is taken into account when using the following functionalities:

● File / Open a Session or a .asm document (documents are read with V5 compliant names).

For more information about this functionality, read Opening a CATIA V4 Session in CATIA V5, in CATIA -

V4Integration User's Guide.

● V4 to V5 Migration Batch (documents are migrated with V5 compliant names).

The Characters Equivalence Table allows to convert characters contained in CATIA V4 documents. It is mainly
used to generate V5 compliant names from V4 names by replacing special characters (", *, /, etc...) by standard
characters.
A default table exists (.txt document) but the user can choose a different one by specifying its Windows or UNIX
path in the option box.

By default, the conversion table will be applied to special characters:

ASCII Code of the Character
New Character String
Original Character to be Replaced
0x22 " _Inch
0x2a * x
0xB1 _
0x2f / _
0x3a : _
0x3c < _
0x3e > _
0x3f ? _
0x5c \ _
0x7c | _
● If the conversion table is defined, it is used to convert the V4 documents.
● For instance, the double-quotes (0x22 in ASCII code) will be replaced by "_Inch".
● If the conversion table is not defined, the default character for space and slash for the
CATV4ToV5CompatibilityName is underscore.
● If you want to display it on Windows, the address to be specified should look something like this:
home/path/table.txt.
● CATIA V4 documents, containing the special characters space and slash, are saved with a name which does not
have the space or slash character. The space is automatically converted in (0xB1) and the slash is automatically
converted in (0XB4).
● In CATIA V4, if a pointed document is renamed or moved, the multi-model link is broken.
❍ If a document name contains a space, it is a result of a manual renaming procedure, so the pointed
document is considered to be not the same as the one corresponding to the link name.
❍ When V4 documents dependencies are scanned for renaming, V4 links (if exist) are analyzed, and the
CATV4ToV5CompatibilityName try to find the pointed documents. If their name must be changed, they are
added to the list of documents to rename. But, if the name of the pointed document does not match the
saved pointed document (with and ') the dependency is not taken into account. And the pointed
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1617
documents are considered as not found.
❍ In the multi-model links, the conversion table is applied on:

■ the document name (in the link) for the slash,

■ the saved name for the space.

Here is an example with a pointed document or a model name:

● Link name with space and slash

❍ Sample ZZZ/ZZZ.model

● Pointed document on disk:

❍ SampleZZZ ZZZ.model

● With no conversion table:

❍ new name: Sample_ZZZ_ZZZ.model (and ' become _ )

● With Conversion table: (if converted into A and / converted into B)

❍ new name: SampleAZZZBZZZ.model.

For more information about this functionality, read Migration in Batch Mode, in CATIA - V4 Integration User's

Guide.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1618

Saving as V4 Data

This task shows you how to customize V5 / V4 Migration settings, that are divided in six sections:
● Saving as V4 Data,

● Associativity,

● Create an error feature in CATPart if saving is incomplete,

● Associate Curves to Face Boundaries in V4 Model,

● V4 Model File Name,

● Small Edges and Faces Cleaning.

Saving as V4 Data

Writing Code Page

For a full scenario illustrating this functionality see "Saving Version 5 CATPart Documents As CATIA Version 4 Models"
in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide.

In Version 4, the declaration parameter catsite.WRITING_CODE_PAGE declares the code page to be stored in the
Version 5 data to be written. The writing code page ISO-8859-1 is the default value so normally, unless another code
page was already specified, you can go ahead with the save.

However, if you want to use a writing code page other than ISO-8859-1, open the WRITING_CODE_PAGE list in the
V4 Declarations part of the dialog box (indicated by the arrow above), select the appropriate code page and click OK.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1619

Model Dimension
It is possible to customize Model Dimension for V4 models generated in V5.

V4 tolerances will be computed according to V4 recommended values from this Model Dimension. In V4, model
tolerances can be modified through Standards -> Model Function. The Model Dimension Parameter, which can be
modified in CATIA V4, has an impact upon the precision of geometrical calculation. The value by default is 10000mm
and it corresponds to the V4 value.

Before saving a V5 Part as a Model, you can change the Model Dimension parameter to fit your V4 standards. The
whole set of tolerances will be computed from this Model Dimension according to the V4 recommended values.
Be aware that modifying this value without consideration can affect dangerously the V4 geometry. The
modification of the Model Dimension parameters should only be used to respect the V4 standards.

The management of the resolution is different in V5 and in V4:

In V5 the main concept for tolerances is the Resolution which defines the minimum length of a valid object. It is
fixed to 10-3mm. The management of confusions ("Do two objects have the same geometry?") is a direct
consequence of the resolution: if the distance between to geometric points is less than the resolution, the two
points are considered to be geometrically at the same location.

In V4, tolerances are driven by the Model dimension. The most appropriate value to fit V5 resolution is
10000mm. Note that this is also the V4 default value.

Model Unit
You can apply a scale factor between the imported file and what you want to get from the original Model. You can
choose a V4 Unit in this list:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1620

Initial Model File Path

With this option, you have the possibility to translate V5 CATPart documents into V4 Models using V4 standards
defined in the V4 Initial Model.

You may use an Initial Model; this means that you define a reference model which includes default values. To
customize the environment (initialization values to modal parameters and management parameters), you need to
create an Initial Model. Such a Model is often used to ensure that everyone in a company works with the same
predefined standard values.

The Save As Model operation is able to take into account a V5 setting: a V4 Initial Model file path. Before saving a
V5 CATPart as a V4 model, you can specify an initial Model file path in this setting:

The "Initial Model file path" setting can replace the following settings:

● The "WRITING_CODE_PAGE" setting,

● The "Model Dimension" setting,

● The "Model Unit" setting.

The "Initial Model file path" setting defines other V4 standards:

● The layer filters,

● The colors,
● Standards for SPACE elements: GENERAL and HLR standards can be taken into account. SPEC ELEMENTS
standards cannot be defined,
● Standards for DRAW elements.

This information will be extracted from the Initial Model and added to the V5 generated model.

The customer can use environment variables:

He pre-defines an environment variable:

● on Windows: set FILE_PATH_ENV=C:\Documents and Settings\xxx

● on UNIX: export FILE_PATH_ENV=/u/users/Documents and Settings/xxx

The name of the variable is chosen by the user.

The user fills the editor with a path containing this environment variable.

The user switches tab page or clicks OK. Then he comes back to the modified tab page: the path
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1621
contains no environment variable anymore. Instead, the full expanded path appears on the tab page:

Initial Models referenced in CATIA V5 should not contain:

● any geometry, SPACE or DRAW,
● any applicative data,
● Internalized Project File.

Therefore, Initial Models used in CATIA V4 will not always be reusable directly in V5, and it will be generally
easier to recreate a dedicated Initial Model for CATIA V5.
If the Initial Model contains elements that are not supported, the Save As Model operation will be aborted.

Associativity

Associativity mode
You can choose either the:
● the Associative mode: there is no access to the No Solid Creation button because this option is only available
with the Not Associative mode.
If you check the Associative mode: you can create a model in Associative mode during the Batch migration or
interactively. Applying a Save As Model operation on a Volume or a Surface means that the model keeps in
memory the path of the Part and you can resynchronize the model after modifying the Part.
You can launch the Associative mode whatever the CATIA components' nature is (volumic or not). Therefore, a
standard Save as Model can be applied on non-volumic or non-surfacic elements.

● or the Not Associative mode: the No Solid Creation button can be checked.

The Not associative mode is the default value.

By default, the No Solid Creation button is not checked, which means that V4 solids will be created in V4 model. If

you check this button, no V4 solid will be created; only V4 volumes will be generated in the .model:

Since the V4 solid is necessary for associativity, this option is only available for non-associativity.
It is advised to use this option only when high memory is required in order to create a V4 model.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1622

Layer for not associative data:

Synchronization of the model: At each stage of synchronization, the non-associative elements created during the
previous migration are added in the "bin" layer. And the non-associative elements of the current CATPart's geometry
are entirely re-created. In this way, the user, if he wants, can delete all the old non-associative geometry by
selecting the "bin" layer in CATIA V4.

Number of the layer for non-associative data: The number of layer can be specified by the user thanks to the
Tools -> Option -> Compatibility Settings. Note that in V4 model, a number of layer can have a value between 0
and 254. If this setting is not informed, a default layer number is used: layer number 254. If you enter 255 for
instance, a warning is displayed. The layer is visible in the model. The user can put it in the No Show space or delete
it if he wants.

Identifiers of the non-associative elements: During the stage of synchronization, non-associative elements
issued from the previous migration are moved into the "bin" layer and their identifiers are modified in order to know
which migration number they come from. Each identifier is modified in that way: RxxxIDENT, where xxx is the
migration number.
For instance, the identifier LINE.1 becomes R001LINE.1 at the first synchronization of the model. If we make two
synchronizations, the model contains LINE.1 and the following identifiers R001LINE.1 and R002LINE.1.

Create an error feature in CATPart if saving is incomplete

When some V5 elements cannot be migrated into CATIA V4, a warning can be displayed and an error feature appears
in the CATPart's Specification Tree.
● Never: if the user does not want to see this message and the error feature, he can click this option.

It is the default value.

● After user agreement: if he chooses this option, the following warning appears, asking if he wants to see the
corresponding error feature in the Specification Tree.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1623

If the user click Yes, an error feature indicates the V5 component that could not be migrated: "Invalid BRep
Geometry.1 (This face is too small)". In the Geometry, the face is highlighted in red and the user can modify it.

Always: no warning is displayed and the error feature automatically appears in the CATPart's tree.

Associate Curves to Face Boundaries in V4 Model

During the "Save As Model" operation, this option is available and the user can choose to associate (or not) Curves to
Face boundaries in a V4 model or not.

In the Associate Curves to Face Boundaries in V4 model frame, you can select one of these options:

● None: it means never associate Curves to Face boundaries in a V4 model.

It is the default value.

● Only conics: Associate only Conics to Face boundaries in a V4 model.

● All V4 types: Associate all V4 Curves types to Face boundaries.
If the user has clicked one of these buttons and then he wants to use the by-default option, he needs to delete
personal settings before activating this option.

V4 Model File Name

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1624

Before migrating a CATPart into a .model, by selecting this option File Name in Capital Letters you can specify that
the resulting .model must have Capital Letters.
By default, this option is cleared.

1. Check the option: File Name in Capital Letters.

2. Open a CATPart in CATIA V5.

3. Save the CATPart as a .model.

4. Open the .model in CATIA V5. In the File Selection dialog box and in then in CATIA V5, the model's name is in

Capital Letters:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1625

Small Edges and Faces Cleaning

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1626
The parameter entered in the Maximum Gap Of... frame is used in order to choose a maximum gap that may be
generated when a small element (Face or Edge) is cleaned in V4 model.
By default, this option is cleared.

In the Small Edges And Faces Cleaning frame, a first choice can be activated or not:

● If it is not checked, the value used will be the V4 tolerance for Curves. This value appears in the grey editor.

● If it is checked, it is possible to enter another tolerance which must be lower than V4 tolerance for Curves and

higher than 0.

The value of maximum gap must be positive. If it is not the case, a warning is displayed until a positive value is
entered:

If the value chosen by the customer is higher than the V4 tolerance for curves, then this parameter wont be
taken into account and the default value will be used.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1627

V4 / V5 DRAW

This task shows you how to customize V4 / V5 DRAW Data settings, that are divided in five sections:
● Geometry import,

● Dimension conversion mode,

● Explode Mode,

● Blink element,

● Generative view style.

Geometry import

When importing geometry, you can decide that you do or do not create centers and end points.

Dimension conversion mode

When converting dimensions, the resulting dimensions can or cannot be edited (modified).

Explode mode

When importing a ditto (or component), this ditto is automatically exploded. As result each element in that
ditto can be modified separately.

By default, you can convert the V4 Symbole into Ditto in CATIA V5, but when this setting is activated you can
keep the former mode, Explode symbole mode.

Blink element
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1628

When this setting is activated, you obtain a red element in CATIA V5 corresponding to the V4 Blink element. If
you do not activate this option, the migrated Blink element is displayed in highlight.

Generative view style

This setting specifies the generative view style that should be used when migrating AUXVIEW2 views from V4
to V5. Select an XML file from the list. The generative view style parameters defined in this file will be used for
the migration.
If this setting is unavailable, you need to uncheck the Prevent generative view style creation setting from
Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab.
For more information about generative view styles, refer to the Generative Drafting User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1629

V4 / V5 SPACE

This task shows you how to customize V4 / V5 Migration settings, that are divided in six sections:
● Gap Healing,

● Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation),

● Surface and Curve Sub-elements (Segmentation),

● Migration of DETAILS spaces used by dittos,

● Migrating Isolated Mock-Up Solids,

● Migrating V4 3D Text.

Gap Healing

Gap Healing has an impact on External Control Points and not on Inner Control Points. External Control Points
are modified according to the following options:
● Model relative value (corresponding to the Identical Curves Value defined by the model): External
Control Points are modified according to the model's value or tolerance.
It is the default value.
● User defined value (External Control Point Maximum Deformation): Here is a schema to explain the
position of the External Control Points, before activating this option:

And the displacement of the External Control Points after activating this option:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1630

When this option is activated, it allows you to fill in the gaps between two arcs/patches, and therefore to
optimize the geometry. Both patches are joined because the External Control Points have merged. There is
however a deformation tolerance and this process can give the Surfaces a C0 Continuity.
CATIA V5 requires its geometry to be C2-continuous. When non C2-continuous geometry must be
imported from CATIA V4 to V5, this geometry (Curves, Surfaces) is first optimized and then broken down
into a set of contiguous geometries (Faces, Edges), each of them being C2-continuous.

This window allows you to optimize and control the quality of the geometry and to obtain C2 Continuity
(deformation is possible).

Examples in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide: Customizing, will help you to understand How to
use Gap Healing.

Curvature Improvement (Maximum Deformation)

For a Surface/Curve, the number of generated V5 Faces/Edges varies according to another parameter: the
maximum value allowed for Control Point deformation.

Curvature Improvement has an impact on Inner Control Points. Inner Control Points are modified (displaced)
according to the value defined by the following options. If you select the Inner Control Point Maximum
Deformation option, the Curvature Improvement value can be modified.

● Model Relative Value: Use the default value (corresponding to the Projection Point tolerance
defined by the model)
It is the default value.

If you choose this option, the value which is taken into account is the maximum value between the V5
resolution value (10-3) and the Projection Point tolerance value (10-3 for instance, in V4) for a model
dimension of 10 000m.

For a model dimension of 10m, the standard value of the Curvature Improvement is 0.001mm
(corresponding to the V4 model's value). In CATIA V4, the geometric standards are listed in the
following dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1631

In order to understand Curvature Improvement results, please refer to the scenario How to use Curvature
Improvement, described in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide, in Customizing.

● User defined value: Inner Control Point Maximum Deformation (User Value)

If the Inner Control Point Maximum Deformation value is equal to 0, the geometry is broken
and an edge is created for each patch limit.

To decrease the number of cells/patches in the geometry, you need to select this option
(default value) and to increase the tolerance/curvature improvement. The unit is the
millimeter (V4 model unit in general).

Surface and Curve Sub-elements (Segmentation)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1632

When V4 Surfaces/Curves are migrated into CATIA V5, some Faces/Edges are created in V5. In order to keep a
C2 continuity with the geometric objects, Surface and Curve sub-elements may be deformed and cut into several
pieces (where they are not C2).
By default, this option is cleared.

By default, the Keep Segmentation option is not selected, the simplification of the geometry is active:

● If you want to reduce the geometry data size, select this option.
● If you want to keep the same number of sub-elements, deselect this check-box.

For instance, two arcs and two surfaces with a C2 Continuity can be transformed into a single patch or arc in
order to simplify the geometry. But if you keep the patch segmentation, these arcs and surfaces are not
simplified.
You can find an example in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide, in Customizing, to know How to
Keep Segmentation.

Migration of DETAILS spaces used by dittos

Copying / Pasting DETAILS and DITTOS into CATIA V5:

Usual Optimized Mode:

● only the "reference" solids are taken into account,

● they are copied AS RESULT With Link (CARWL),
● they keep the same place as the DITTOS', with the same scale,
● this link is associative: if you modify the "reference" body in the No Show space, the ones of the CARWL are
also modified.
● the DITTOS' s geometry is not created for each DITTO; it is stored as a Reference in the Geometrical Set (in
No Show).
It is the default value.

Both Usual and Wireframe Mode:

● same behavior like Usual Optimized Mode, but in this case, the "reference" geometry is copied AS RESULT in
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1633

an OpenBoby under each DITTO. It has the same scale as the DITTO's geometry.
● there is no associativity between the "reference" geometry and the DITTO's.

Like V4 Explode Mode:

● same behavior like Both Usual and Wireframe Modes, but the "reference" Bodies are not CARWL, but Past As
Specified in Part Document".
● There is no associativity with the Reference.

For more information about these options (Recommended Practices), please refer to Copying /
Pasting a Model with Dittos in CATIA V5, in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide.

Migrating Isolated Mock-Up Solids

Isolated Mock-Up Solids (SolidM) means that they do not have any history, any specifications. They can be
converted (as Result) into CATIA V5:
● as CGR,
It is the default value.
● or as PartBody.

For the Isolated Mock-Up Solids' migration into CATIA V5, you can choose between:

● the SolidM conversion as CGR: if you want to get only the meshing view (visualization mode).

● the SolidM conversion as PartBody: if you want to be able to see the Geometry of the Solid, to edit it and
obtain an exact Solid.

If you select the as PartBody option, you will also have the following message after the copy / paste of
the SolidM into a CATPart:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1634

If you do not use the setting, the SolidM will be migrated as CGR.

For more information about the Conversion of SolidM, please refer to the scenario entitled Conversion of
SolidM entities as Result (migrated as a PartBody) in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide.

3D Text Migration

This setting allows you to migrate or not CATIA V4 3D Text into CATIA V5 (V5 Annotations). There are some
features containing 3D Text that are not migrated in CATIA V5. These exceptions are listed below.
By default, this option is cleared.

For information, after the migration, if you want to create Annotations in CATIA V5, you can select Insert ->
Annotations -> Text with Leader.

Limitations:

If the Keep 3D Text button is checked, the migration of V4 3D Texts into V5 Annotations is possible when they
are associated to the following features:

● All geometrical objects: Points, Curves, Surfaces.

● Axis.
● Solids, Volumes and Skins if the Text is set on the Solid, on the Volume or on the Skin. If for instance, a solid
is migrated and one of its Faces has an associated Text, this Text will not be migrated.
● Faces migrated independently (that is to say out of solid's context, Skin's context, etc... ) will have their
associated 3D text migrated.
● If V4 entities to be converted are numerous, we advise customers against converting 3D Text from V4 into
V5, which can lead to high CPU time consuming.
● V4 3D text properties such as color, font, size, etc... are not migrated into V5.
● Concerning other elements (Dittos, etc...), the migration of V4 3D Text cannot occur.

If you want to see an example about 3D Text Migration, please refer to the scenario Migrating V4 3D Text
in the CATIA - V4 Integration User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1635

V4 / V5 SPEC

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● Step-by-step Update and Reroute,

● Draft feature migration mode.

Step-by-step Update and Reroute:

● Step-by-step Update: If you select this option, you do not need to update your document after the copy / paste of a .model into a

CATPart or a CATProduct. The update operation is automatic and you no longer need to press the update button: .

If there are several V5 update errors:

❍ there is only one pop-up window with all the messages of these errors.
❍ the KO update features are re-name with "present update errors during V4V5 migration", whom is easily found in the tree with
Search "V4".
❍ the KO update features are deactivated and therefore the body is immediately usable. It saves a lot of time.

● And Automatic Reroute: it is a means to use the geometry in order to recover the Edges and Faces. This functionality is applicable
only with updated EXACT or SMART Solids.

It is strongly recommended to have this button ON.

By default, this option is selected.

What is the reroute mechanism?
When a contextual primitive (a Fillet, a Chamfrain, a Support or a Feature Draft) is unsolved in V5, the Modeler (in Part Design) is
able to visualize the former geometric shape and the Fillet's Specifications.

Draft feature migration mode:

The V4 propagation edges for draft is done with SQUARE mode:

In order to get the best V5 results (close to CATIA V4) from copying / pasting As Spec a model containing Drafts into CATIA V5, it is
advisable to choose the Square mode. Indeed, this is the mode used in CATIA V4.

It is the default value.

Open DRAFT_4_FACES.model.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1636

1. Select the Square option and click OK, all the migrated Drafts (during the copy / paste As Spec from CATIA V4 to CATIA V5) will

be migrated in this mode.

2. Select *MASTER and copy / paste it in a CATPart.

3. In the CATPart, DRAFT_4FACES_SQUARE.CATPart, double-click Draft.1 in order to see the Draft Definition window.

In the Draft Definition window, you can see the property "Square" in the Draft Form field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1637
4. If the paste of a Draft or the update of the resulting Draft goes wrong, select the Cone mode. It will allow you to paste the Draft:

5. Select *MASTER and copy / paste it in a new CATPart.

6. In the CATPart, DRAFT_4FACES_CONICAL.CATPart, double-click Draft.1 in order to see the Draft Definition window. This time, the

Draft Form is "Cone".

However, after you have copied / pasted the Draft in Cone mode and before leaving your CATIA V5 session, you should not forget
to re-select the Square mode so that the Cone mode is not chosen by default in further sessions.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1638

Migration Batch

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● Format,

● V4 Part Definition,

● Conversion Mode,

● Drawing Parameters,

● Mapping Files Location for Saving,

● Mapping Files Location for Retrieving,

● Migration Interface.

These options are only useful in the Migration Batch context, not with interactive CATIA V5.

Format

As SPEC

With the AS SPEC format, you can get the model's specifications in a first place and the geometry in a second
place (after updating the document). Then you can modify the elements you have converted into CATIA V5.

It is the default value.

As RESULT

The AS RESULT format allows you to migrate the V4 elements that cannot be converted AS SPEC. And this
operation is more efficient in terms of performance.

V4 Part Definition
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1639

A CATPart by Geometric Set

If you check this option A CATPart by Geometric Set, the "V4 Part" definition is the Geometric Set.
Therefore, the subsets will be migrated into a V5 CATPart document.

It is the default value.

A CATPart by Solid

With this option A CATPart by Solid, the "V4 Part" definition can also be a Solid. The Solids will be migrated
into CATParts and the non-solid elements (for instance: Wireframe) into a CATPart as well.

Conversion Mode

Convert SPACE / DRAW

If you choose this option Convert SPACE and DRAW, it means that you selecting the Migration of SPACE /
DRAW data in Batch Mode.

According to its content, a model is migrated into several documents: a CATPart and / or a CATProduct and /
or a CATDrawing. It is possible to separate the treatment of SPACE data and DRAW data. In the Batch window,
there is an Options button giving you access to this Tools-Options window and you can choose between Space
And Draw, Space, and Draw.

Some entities undergo a few changes during the V4 to V5 conversion:

● V4 DRAFT -> V5 Sheet,

● V4 Detail -> V5 Detail Sheet,
● V4 Views -> V5 Views.

In the Batch Mode, all Draw and Detail workspaces are migrated in CATIA V5. On the contrary, if you Copy /
Paste a Draft or a View interactively, only referenced Details are migrated.

It is the default value.

Convert SPACE only

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1640

There are 2 Part definitions; the migration of each Set respects the definition determined by the "V4 Part
definition" a few lines above.

Every Workspace containing several Dittos or Set instances is converted as a CATProduct. Under this
CATProduct, there are as many components as Dittos (Part or Product instances) and Sets.

The impacts of the V4 to V5 conversion on the entities:

● V4 Set -> V5 Part,

● V4 Detail -> V5 Part or Product,
● V4 Model -> V5 Part or Product and/or CATDrawing,
● V4 Ditto -> V5 Product component.

Convert DRAW only

When a model contains DRAW data, they are migrated as a unique document: a CATDrawing.

Display Report Attribute

This functionality allows the visualization of 3D elements attributes in the Migration Report. For each element,
the list of its attributes is displayed with the following data:

● The name of the attributes

● The value of the attributes

The CATV4ToV5Migration interface is unchanged.

The Report window displays attributes information.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1641

There are some limitations:

● Display of geometrical elements' attributes (2D and 3D elements) only. You can find the information about
the 3D elements in the interactive report and about the 2d elements in the .rpt file.
● Display of only the attributes which have a value. For example, empty words that is to say words with no
number are not displayed.

Drawing Parameters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1642

Initial Drawing Path

Select a .CATDrawing document which will serve as a template. The standard used by this document will be
used during the migration. If you leave this field blank, the standard used by default during the migration will
be the last one you used when creating a drawing.

The customer can use environment variables:

He pre-defines an environment variable:

● on Windows: set FILE_PATH_ENV=C:\Documents and Settings\xxx

● on UNIX: export FILE_PATH_ENV=/u/users/Documents and Settings/xxx

The name of the variable is chosen by the user.

The user fills the editor with a path containing this environment variable.

The user switches tab page or clicks OK. Then he comes back to the modified tab page: the path
contains no environment variable anymore. Instead, the full expanded path appears on the tab
page:

Projection of Space for transparent views

Specify what kind of projection mode you want to use for transparent views during the migration:

● the NHR V4 Mode,

● the HLR V4 Mode,
● or the Same projection mode as the V4 Model.
The Same as V4 model option is the default value.

Mapping Files Location for Saving

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1643

This functionality allows you to find pointed entities in V4 Multi Model Links Solids and to retrieve associativity
in CATIA V5. You can store them in the following directories:

● Batch Target Directory.

It is the default value.

● Model Directory: a mapping table per model is available; it is stored at the same place where
the associated model is.
● Specified Directory: you can specify the directory path of your choice.

Mapping Files Location for Retrieving

When you migrate the pointing model, you need to know where the mapping table is, in order to retrieve the
V5 entities.
The mapping table has the same name as the model; this is why it is important not to change the name
of the mapping table. It is also not recommended to rename V5 documents otherwise you will not be
able to find them in the next migrations, and therefore to recreate the V5 associativity.
If you cannot find the mapping table, a Migration As Result will take place: first, the pointed models are
migrated and then the pointing models (asynchronous migration).

If you cannot find the pointed element, the link between the models cannot be reproduced.

Click Add repository to find the mapping table location. With the arrows (Up and Down), you can move in

the list and with the rubber button , you can erase a file location.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1644

Migration Interface

This option allows you to customize Applications' migration from CATIA V4 to CATIA V5. You can specify a
particular behavior for this migration. You can choose how your applicative data will be migrated by writing
source code (only two interfaces: CATIAecMigration and CATIE3DMigration) in this empty field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1645

3D XML

This task explains how to customize the settings for the usage of the 3D XML format, a universal
lightweight XML-based format for quick and easy sharing of 3D data, enabling rich PLM information to be
easily incorporated into technical documentation, maintenance manuals, marketing brochures, websites,
email communications and many other everyday uses.

The 3D XML settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Export

● Visualization Format

Export

Accuracy
To define the export accuracy, enter the desired value in the Accuracy text-entry field or use the
corresponding spin box.

Note: The accuracy must be a value between 0.01 and 1.00, inclusive.

By default, this option is valuated to 0.01.

Visualization Format

To define the visualization format as exact, click the Exact radio button, or to define the visualization
format as tessellated, click the Tessellated radio button.

By default, this option is valuated to Exact.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1646

DXF

This page deals with:

● Import DXF/DWG options:
❍ Standards,

❍ Unit of the file,

❍ Paper Spaces in Background,

❍ Keep Model Space,

❍ Create end points,

❍ Convert dimensions as,

● Export DXF/DWG options:

❍ Exported sheets,

❍ Version,

❍ Export mode.

Import
Standards

Drafting:

The element you import will be placed in a Drawing, the root document of Drafting.
This Drawing uses styles defined in a pre-defined or a customized standard such as ISO, JIS, ANSI, ASME.
For more details about Drafting standards, please refer to Administration Tasks in the Interactive
Drafting User's Guide.

Drafting Standards replace the process of the previous releases where you had to open, (eventually modify)
and close a new Drawing to recover the standard you wanted to use for the data you were going to import.
The standard selected in the settings is taken into account at once.

DXF:

DXF Standards replace the mapping options of the previous releases.

Those options applied only to the current session whereas a given standard applies to all the sessions
using that standard.
For more information, please refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide Customizing Standards.

Some AutoCAD elements do not exist in V5 and require a mapping:

● AutoCAD color is mapped to V5 line thickness,

● AutoCAD line type is mapped to V5 line type,
● AutoCAD text font is mapped to V5 text font.

These mappings are defined in a DXF standard file. For more details about DXF standards,
please refer to DXF/DWG: Administration Tasks in this User's Guide.

Select the requested standards from the drop-down lists.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1647
The content of this list depends on which standards have been created and/or customized by your administrator.

Unit of the File

By default, the option is set to Automatic and the unit of import is determined automatically
(either millimeter or inch) for the best possible resulting drawing.

However, in some cases the resulting drawing is not satisfactory and requires another unit.
Select this unit in the list. Then restart the import.

If you have selected Scale Factor, enter the value of the scale factor between the imported
file and what you want to get from the original Drawing in the fields on the right.
By default, the option is set to Automatic

Paper Spaces and Model Space

The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to manipulate a sheet. A sheet contains:

● a main view: a view which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet
● a background view: a view dedicated to frames and title blocks
● interactive or generated views.

An AutoCAD file is usually made of:

● a model space that contains the geometry,

● a paper space (or several in AutoCAD 2000).
AutoCAD recommends that the paper space contains the title box and one or several viewports
(A viewport is a window to the model space). However other configurations are possible.

Select this option to put the Paper Spaces in the Background view.
The viewports will be created in the working view.
By default, this option is not selected.

Select this option to keep the entire Model Space in its own sheet.
By default, this option is not selected.

By default, these options are not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1648

Create end points

It is not easy to modify and stretch geometry of imported elements the way you can do it in a V5 native elements.
A solution is to create end points when needed, but to the detriment of performances.
Create end points offers you three options to fit your needs:

● Never: it is the default option. It ensures the best performances.

● For few entities: creates end points only for hatch boundaries and mixed polylines.
This is an intermediate choice between performances and edition capabilities.
● Always: creates end points for arcs, ellipses, lines, mlines, leaders and not standard polylines and splines.
Use this option only when edition capabilities are required.

Information on the option selected is given in the report file:

By default, the option is set to Never.

Convert dimensions as

Select the required option:

● Dimensions:

This option preserves the semantic of AutoCAD dimensions in V5 as best as possible.

● In most cases, the whole semantic of the dimension is kept.

This means the position, the layout and the text are preserved.
The position, color, thickness, text caption (symbol, value, tolerance, font, color) can be edited.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1649
● In some cases, text with redundant information
(e.g. tolerance present both in the dimension field and in the dimension text) or dual dimension,
or other unrecognized information will be dealt as a text with an associative link with the dimension.
This dimension has a "fake value" that is blanked.
To display the true dimension value, delete the associated text and enter the data in the properties
of the dimension.

Limitation for the Dimensions option:

● Angular dimensions, problems may occur while positioning texts,
● Following attributes are not yet supported :

● suppression of one of the dimension lines (for half dimensioning),

● offset extension or suppression of extension lines,
● arrowhead choice (the V5 default arrowhead is used),
● automatic suppression of arrowheads if space is not sufficient.

● Geometry:

Select this option to keep the graphical aspect. Geometry is exploded into multiple lines, arcs, texts.
(this mode increases performance when loading a model).
This is the option by default

● Details: dimensions are turned into details.

This is an halfway notion between the previous two, in which the geometry is preserved and
the dimension is easy to handle (it can be all selected at once).

See also the FAQ

By default, the option is set to Geometry.

Export
Exported Sheets

Select the required option to export either all sheets or only the current sheet of a multi-sheet drawing.

● The option Only current exports the data to a file with the name entered in the Save as dialog box.

● The option All exports the data to several files.

The name of each file is made of the name entered in the Save as dialog box and the name of the sheet

(Drawing1_sheet_1.DXF, Drawing_sheet_2.DXF, ...).

By default, the option is set to All.

Version

Select the required export file format from the combo box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1650

Version 5 supports DXF/DWG formats version 12, 13, 14 and Autocad2000.

Autocad2000i and Autocad2002 formats are the same as Autocad 2000.

By default, the option is set to DXF/DWG R14.

Export mode

This option offers the choice between three export modes:

● Graphic:
This was the only available mode up to Release 9.
It is quick and reliable. It is useful if you want to export a CATDrawing to AutoCAD and print it without modifying it.
● Structured:
This mode was introduced in Release 10.
The exported file can be modified. For example, in the case of a dimension exported in Structured mode,
all the graphic entities representing the dimension are exported to an Insert/Block.
The more complex Drafting elements are exported the same way whereas the basic geometric elements
(lines, arcs, etc) are exported as isolated elements.
● Semantic:
This mode was introduced in Release 11 and is similar to the Structured mode, with the advantage that linear,
angular and circular dimensions are exported as true dimensions (with a default dimension style).
"Default dimension style" entails that most graphic attributes
(such as color, display format of the dimension value, type of arrow, space...) of the dimensions are lost.

For more information, see the What About the Elements You Export? section in the
Exporting a CATDrawing Document Data into a DXF or DWG File chapter of the Data Exchange Interfaces User's Guide.

By default, the option is set to Graphic.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1651

Electrical

This tab lets you define the migration mode:

● for the bundle segments

see also migration option disabled.

● for geometrical bundle.

Bundle Segment Migration Mode

Bundle segments

If this option is selected, it means that each V4 BNS is migrated to a V5 bundle segment. Each V5 bundle

segment is stored in a CATPart document. They are instantiated in the geometrical bundle, a CATProduct

document.

Multi-branchable document

If this option is selected, it means that all the BNSs of a V4 GBN are migrated to one multi-branchable

document in a V5 geometrical bundle. All the V5 bundle segments are stored in a single CATPart, the multi-

branchable document.

In case there are several V4 GBNs to be migrated, as many V5 geometrical bundles (CATProduct documents)

are created, with one multi-branchable document (CATPart) containing all the bundle segments.

It is the default value.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1652

It is recommended to use this option as it reduces the number of CATPart documents generated during

the migration.

Migration Options Disabled

The electrical migration options can be disabled if the Interface Name parameter is not filled up with the
CATIE3DMigration value in the Migration Batch tab.
Refer to Migration Interface.

Geometrical Bundle Migration Mode

Component

If this option is selected, each GBN is migrated as a component under the root product.

Product

If this option is selected, each GBN is migrated as a product in a separate CATProduct.

By default, this option is selected.

Choosing the right migration mode option is important since it determines how geometrical bundles will
be stored in ENOVIA LCA:
● Migrating them as products lets you store them in ENOVIA LCA using Workpackage mode
● Migrating them as components lets you store them in ENOVIA LCA using Explode mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1653

ENOVIA V5

This tab contains compatibility settings in CATIA V5 in order to work in a CATIA / ENOVIA LCA interoperability
context:
● Save Option

● CATIA Client Interoperability Administration

● User Attribute Mapping

● ENOVIA V5 Server Interoperability Administration

These options can be used for both LCA Navigator and VPM Navigator.

Save Option

Check the Partial Save authorized box if you want to implement the Partial Save function. This functionality
allows you to save as many objects as possible, even those linked to a modified but unsavable object, while
ensuring database integrity. It enables a more efficient save operation for concurrent engineering purposes.
By default, this option is unchecked.
For more information about this option, see "Performing a Partial Save" in the "Saving Objects" section
of the VPM Navigator User Guide.

CATIA Client Interoperability Administration

In the CATIA Client Interoperability Administration section, click the DMU Mode (Digital Mock-Up) in
order to transfer a lighter version of ENOVIA LCA data into CATIA V5. Only the visible data is sent to CATIA V5;
the transfer is more rapid because the constraints are not downloaded during the interoperability process.
By default, this option is unchecked.

User Attribute Mapping

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1654

By default, this option is unchecked.

In the User Attribute Mapping section, check the Work with Attribute Mapping option to enable attribute

mapping (or, if this option is checked, uncheck it to disable attribute mapping).

Specify the attribute mapping file using the pushbutton . Once selected, the file appears in the Attribute
Mapping File field.

To change the AttributeMapping.xml file to any other xml file, you must:

● restart CATIA V5. If you are already connected to ENOVIA LCA, a message will be displayed prompting you

to restart CATIA to put into effect the changes made.

● work in the existing CATIA session. This is possible only when you are not connected to ENOVIA LCA:

You can also define the path of the attribute mapping file by using a variable. You can choose a particular

variable depending on the OS (Windows or UNIX) you want to use. For this, you need to have the launching

shell in CATIA V5:

set XMLPath=E:\users\Users Data\AttributesMapping.xml:

● In this empty field, define this variable as the path of the attribute mapping file. In the image below,
${XMLPath} references the name of the CATSetting. This information avoids mixing CATSettings between
Windows and UNIX:

Both the user and the administrator can therefore have control over this file. The setting is platform-

dependent and if you have specified in the variable that it should be used on Windows, it cannot be used on

UNIX (for UNIX, you need to choose another value or path).

For more information about this Attribute Mapping functionality, see "Mapping Attributes and Defining
Domains in an XML File" in the VPM Navigator User Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1655

ENOVIA V5 Server Interoperability Administration

The site administrator can modify the default behavior to allow free naming of documents, parts
or products.

Due to the uniqueness of the V_ID attribute, the name of a document / part / product, will have
to be mapped in a CATIA identifier different from the V_ID attribute.

The site administrator can modify the default behavior by specifying the attributes that will be
used to map CATIA identifiers. To do this, the administrator can modify these settings either by
using the Tools -> Options... command in a CATIA Version 5 session or else with a variable,
without starting a Version 5 session.

What are the attributes for identifiers?

● Default = V_ID (length=40),

● Recommended = V_name (length=80),

● Available = V_description (length=250),

● Others depend on DB customization.

For more information about this option, see "Free Naming in ENOVIA LCA Mode" in the ENOVIA / CATIA
Interoperability User Guide.

This option should be used only by the ENOVIA LCA administrator to modify the ENOVIA
LCA server settings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1656

Customizing External Formats Import

If you have the SolidWorks, SolidEdge or Acis Plug-In license, the following categories of options will be available:
● visu format unit

● link mode

● others

● output of generated data

● Ideas

● ProEngineer

You imported a CAD Part through the Insert ->Existing Component command.

Visu Format Unit

Millimeters per unit

This setting allows you to specify the number of millimeters per unit of the model. For instance, if you have a file in
inch, you need to enter 25.4 in this field.

This option is taken into account when you have the following formats: SLP, STL, OBJ, BYU, IFF and _PS.

Note: For a file of type _PS, the Visu Format Unit must be set to 10.

Link Mode

Visu

Tesselated data.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1657

Visu Snap

Recovery of CAD's exact geometry to generate V5 CGR. Canonical shape properties are identified. The visualization
mode enables part snapping capability. After selecting this option, this message appears: "Please, restart session to
take modifications into account".

CATPart

Link with a V5 CATPart. Do not modify this CATPart in CATIA V5.

Others

Save Coorsys in Cgr

Stores part coordinate systems in .cgr file. It is only supported in the indirect mode. This parameter determines
whether coordinate systems present in imported ProE, UG or IDEAS parts will be imported into the resulting CGR
files.

Output of generated data

Output Path

Lets you customize the Output File for generated data. It specifies the location where CGR and CATParts will be
generated.

If you have the IDEAS, ProEngineer or Unigraphics Plug-In licenses, additional options will appear in the External
Formats tab.

With the IDEAS Plug-In license, you obtain:

IDEAS (direct mode)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1658

IDI 3D Annotation (CATPart mode only)

Select this option to convert IDI 3D Annotations to V5 (requires one of the following licenses):

● CATIA: FT1.prd or FTA.prd

● ENOVIA: DT1.prd
● DELMIA: MTR.prd or MFT.prd

ProEngineer

With the ProEngineer Plug-In license:

Quilts Read

Enables to activate the transfer of quilts surfaces inside CGR. This setting does not apply to NCGM or CATPart
conversions.

By default, this option is not activated.

Simplified Representation

Only part simplified representation is supported. To set the name of the part simplified representation to use before
the Assembly conversion, check this box and enter the name.

By default, this option is not activated.

Instance Name

When you want to import a specific instance of a generic assembly/part, check this button and specify the name of
the instance of your choice.

By default, this option is not activated.

● For Simplified Representation and Instance Name, only upper case names are supported with the direct
converter.
● xpr files must be on the disk for proper support of Part Instances conversion.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1659

Graphic Formats

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● import

● export

Import (Viewer)

This area lets you choose the pen characteristics to be taken into account when opening an HPGL document.
To do so, click the Configuration... button to access the Import Configuration dialog box:

Printers

This option is activated provided that at least one HPGL printer has been setup.

If this option is selected, it means that the HPGL viewer uses the pen configuration of the HPGL driver you select in the list
("My HPGL Printer" in our example). This ensures a coherence between the selected HPGL printer and the advanced
configuration parameters defined in the printer properties.

Local

This option is relevant when no specific HPGL printer has been defined.
If this option is selected, it means that the HPGL viewer uses the local pen settings you define in the HPGL Configuration
dialog box.
To do so, click the Settings... button (which becomes activated as soon as you click Local) to open the HPGL
Configuration dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1660

This dialog box lets you define the characteristics of the pens that will be used in order to create a mapping between the
original Version 5 document and the result in HPGL format.

Refer to the configuration scenario dedicated to HPGL printers for detailed information on how to define advanced HPGL
configuration parameters.

When finished, click OK to validate and close the HPGL Configuration dialog box.

Export (Save As)

This category of options lets you define the advanced configuration options to be applied to the drivers listed below when
saving a document in another format using File > Save As.
The purpose of this option is to prepare your documents for printing by configuring the driver corresponding to the file format
in which your document will be saved.

In the Export list, select the format in which the document will be saved then click the Configuration... button to define the
corresponding configuration parameters. The look and content of the dialog box varies according to the format you select:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1661
● CGM

● HPGL2

● PostScript

● PDF

● Raster

● SVG

CGM

Clicking the Configure... button lets you define configuration options dedicated to the CGM driver:

Refer to Configuring an Existing Printer for detailed information.

HPGL2

Clicking the Configure... button lets you define configuration options dedicated to the HPGL/2 RTL driver:

Refer to Configuration Scenarios for detailed information.

PostScript

Clicking the Configure... button lets you define configuration options dedicated to the PS (Generic PostScript) driver:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1662

Refer to Configuration Scenarios for detailed information.

PDF

Clicking the Configure... button lets you define the following configuration option:

If you select the Save as one PDF file check box, it means that all the sheets of your CATDrawing document are stored in a
single file when saving the document in PDF format using File > Save As.
If you leave the option as is, each sheet is saved in a different file and therefore, there are as many .pdf files as there are
sheets.

Raster

Clicking the Configure... button lets you define configuration options dedicated to the Raster driver:

Refer to Configuration Scenarios for detailed information.

SVG
Clicking the Configure... button lets you define configuration options dedicated to the SVG driver:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1663

Refer to Configuration Scenarios for detailed information.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1664

IGES

This task shows you how to customize IGES settings, that are divided in four sections:
● General IGES options:
❍ Show/NoShow dialog box

● Import IGES options:

❍ Import mode,

❍ Join,

❍ Continuity Optimization of Curves and Surfaces,

❍ Detection of Invalidity in Input Geometry,

❍ Representation for Boundaries of faces,

● Export IGES options:

❍ Save only shown entities,

❍ Curve and surface type,

❍ Representation mode,

❍ Name of Author,

❍ Author's Organization,

❍ Export Unit as.

General
Show/NoShow Completion Dialog Box

By default, the Show Completion Dialog Box option is not selected.

Select this option to display the completion dialog box at the end of the transfer.

By default, the option is not selected

Import
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1665

Import mode

When the Generate one CATPart option is selected, the IGES file is translated into one CATPart.

For large files containing a large number of 308/408 IGES entities, you can select the option Map the 308/408 IGES entities onto a
Product Structure:

● if the IGES file contains 308/408 entities, a root CATProduct is created in V5,
● the 408 entities will be translated into CATParts or components under the root CATProduct as follows:
❍ If the 408 entity references an intermediate 308 entity (i.e. one that contains 408 entities), a new component is created. It will
contain components for each 408 of the 308 (see first case below).
❍ If the 408 entity references a leaf 308 entity (i.e. one that does not contain any 408 entity), a CATPart will be created. It will
contain the geometry contained in this 308 (see second case below).

The uniqueness of the component name is ensured by adding a suffix corresponding to the DE (Directory Entry) number of the IGES 308
entity (subfigure definition).

By default, the option is set to Generate one CATPart.

Join
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1666

● Select the option Join surfaces of the model if you want to join the surfaces of your IGES model into a shell.

If this option is active, the software will try to knit the surfaces from an importable file into a shell, even if the file contains Groups

(402).

● You can edit the Tolerance which is used to join the surfaces of the model: If you know the tolerance of the system which has

created the IGES file, you can use it. Otherwise, it is better to begin with a small tolerance.

● If you select the join option, while importing IGES files to V5, make sure that model is constituted of one part.
● The Join operation may fail in specific topological configurations.

● This option does not apply to Manifold Solid Brep (IGES type 186): the faces are always imported into a join.
● The previous option Join surfaces of each group is replaced by the Map the 308/408 IGES entities onto a Product Structure
above. This option enables you to create several CATParts from one IGES file.
● When the Map the 308/408 IGES entities onto a Product Structure option is active, the option Join surface of the model is
selectable but has no effect.

By default, this option is not selected.

Continuity Optimization of Curves and Surfaces

V5 requires its geometry to be C2-continuous. When non C2-continuous geometry must be imported from a IGES file, this geometry
(curves, surfaces) is broken down into a set of contiguous geometries, each of them being C2-continuous. This is what happens when the
No Optimization option is chosen.

However, this can produce an increase of the size of the resulting data, because more curves/surfaces are created. In order to limit this
drawback, two other modes are optionally offered.

In those modes, the IGES interface tries to limit the splitting of curves and surfaces by modifying their shape slightly, so that they
become C2-continuous while remaining very close to their original shape.

In order to guarantee that the deformation is not excessive, a maximum deviation (tolerance) parameter is used. When in Automatic
Optimization mode, the value read from the IGES file is corrected so that it remains lower than 0.001 mm. This guarantees an
optimization that remains compatible with the precision for the data that was set by the emitting system.

Last, if this strategy is not enough, you can choose the Advanced Optimization mode, in which an arbitrary deviation value can be
entered.

By default, the Automatic Optimization is proposed:

● No approximation , thus this option does not create a significant deformation and keeps the internal BSpline structure (equations and
knots).
● A continuity optimization is performed within the default value for deformation tolerance (0.001 mm) on:

● BSpline surfaces,
● all types of curves with the exception of canonical curves (3D and P-curves when available),

● The parameters box cannot be activated

This option soften the effect C2 cutting of faces and boundaries (which is mandatory in V5) without any significant geometric deformation

If you select No optimization:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1667
● No optimization is performed on BSplines (neither curves nor surfaces).
● Elements are cut at discontinuity points to suit the modeler (exact mathematic continuity). This may result in a dramatic number of
faces and boundary curves, data of poor quality and poor performances in further use in V5.

If you select Advanced Optimization:

● No approximation. The internal BSpline structure (equations and knots) is kept,

● A continuity optimization is performed on:
❍ BSpline surfaces,
❍ all types of curves (3D and P-curves when available),
❍

● but the deformation tolerance is set by the user (see Parameters).

With this option, you can enter a larger tolerance value which may enhance the optimization impact (resulting in less C2
cutting on faces).

Push the Parameters button to access advanced optimization options and tolerances.

User-defined Tolerances

● Deformation: maximum deformation (in millimeter) allowed in the optimization of curves and surfaces. Ranges between 0.0005 and
0.1 mm.
● Angle: angle (in degree) below which contiguous elements can be merged. Ranges between 0 and 10 degrees.
● Push the Default Values button to revert to the default values (respectively 0.001 and 2).

The parameters values apply to all current options

User-defined Advanced Options

By default, these options are not selected.

● Curves and Surfaces Approximation alone:

● BSpline surfaces and curves continuity is optimized,

● In addition, Bspline curves and surfaces approximation is performed,
● It is possible to enter a user value for Deformation,
● This option may change the internal structure of BSplines (equations and knots),

● This option usually results in a significant decrease in the number of faces cuttings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1668
● Topological Reduction of Boundaries alone:

● BSpline surfaces and curves continuity is optimized,

● In addition, topological reduction is applied to boundaries,
● The Angle value is used to select contiguous curves that can be merged into a smooth one (tangency criteria),
● It is possible to edit the values for Deformation and Angle,
❍ This combination of options usually results in a significant decrease in the number of boundary curves (especially on
poor quality input data).

● Curves and Surfaces Approximation and Topological Reduction of Boundaries together:

● BSpline surfaces and curves continuity is optimized

● In addition, BSpline curves and surfaces approximation is performed and topological reduction is applied to boundaries
● It is possible to enter user values for Deformation Tolerance and tangency Angle.
● This combination of options allows the utmost optimization of curves and surfaces, while keeping geometric deformation
under control. It results in reducing the number of faces and boundaries and ensures better performance in downstream
use of the data.

You can find useful information in the report file. Please see the Report file section in the IGES Import chapter in this User's Guide.
By default, the option is set to Automatic Optimization.

Detection of Invalidity in Input Geometry

You can choose to import IGES files with or without detecting discrepancies in geometry, by selecting the corresponding option.

Detection enables you to enter the Tolerance value above which a geometry is considered as invalid:

● size of a hole in an open boundary,

● distance between the boundary loop and the surface.

The default Tolerance value is 3 mm.

For more information, please see the IGES Best Practices chapter in this User's Guide.
By default, the option is set to Detection.

Representation for Boundaries of Faces

There are two type of IGES faces: types 144 and 143. The boundaries of those faces (respectively type 142 and 141) have two
representations:

● 2D (parametric)
● 3D (spatial).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1669
For each boundary, the IGES file contains a parameter defining the preferred representation:

● 3D,
● 2D,
● none,
● equal preference.

In the three last cases, V5 tries to import the 2D representation of the boundary. In case of failure, the 3D representation is imported.

By default, the Keep File Preference option is active:

● if the preference is set, the import will respect it.

● If no preference is set, the 2D representation is preferred.

If you do not wish to use the 2D representation (i.e. override the preference set in the IGES file), select the Force 3D representation
option. Only the 3D representation will be imported.
By default, the option is set to Keep file preference.

Import Groups

Imports IGES groups (Entity Type 402, Forms 1-7-14-15: Associativity Instance) as Selection Sets.

You can de-select this option for a faster import. Note that Selection Sets will not be created.
By default, this option is selected.

Export
Save only shown entities

● When selected, the Save only shown entities option allows you to save only the Part's entities which are in the Show mode.

By default, this option is selected.

Curve and surface type

● The default Standard option and the BSpline option allow you to select which curve and surface types you want to be generated.
If you leave the default Standard option selected the curve and surface types created in the Part are kept as is.
If you select the BSpline option all curves and surfaces are converted into B-splines.

By default, the option is set to Standard.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1670

Representation mode

● If you select the default option Surface, solid decomposition will be identical in both the original model and the resulting file.
Only the surfacic decomposition of the original model is stored.
● Wireframe should be used if you want 3D visualization of solid edges to be identical in both the original model and the resulting file.
Only the wireframe decomposition of the original model is stored.
This may be useful in cases where curves are the only form of input accepted.

● Solid-Shell lets you save Solids, Shells and Faces as IGES New Entities as follows:
V5 IGES
Solid Manifold Solid B-Rep Object Entity (Type 186, Form 0)
Solid (Closed) Shell Closed Shell Entity (Type 514, Form 1)
Independent Shell Open Shell Entity (Type 514, Form 2)
Face in a Shell Face Entity (Type 510, Form 1)
Face Loop Loop Entity (Type 508, Form 1)
List of Loop Edges Edge Entity (type 504, Form 1)
List of Start/End Loop Edges Vertices Vertex Entity (Type 502, Form 1)
Plane Surface (support of Face) Plane Surface Entity (Type 190, Form 0)
● For Loops, only the 3D Representation is exported
● All those new IGES entities have not been "tested" (IGES Norm 5.3) and the IGES/PDES Organization recommends that special
consideration be given when implementing certain untested entities. Therefore if you do not know whether the receiver system will
recognize those entities, we recommend that you do not use this option.
● The representation mode Solid-Shell requires IGES version 5.3 or higher.

By default, the option is set to Surface.

Author's Name and Organization

Enter here your name and the name of your organization.

This information will be transferred to the Global Section of the IGES file at export.

Export Units as

Let's you define the unit to be used for export. This unit can be different from the V5 file.

The default option is Keep User Unit, the IGES file unit will be :

● the unit defined in Tools > Options > General > Parameters and Measure / Units tab, if the IGES Norm recognizes it,
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1671

● the Millimeter (mm) otherwise.

Units like the one named Feet, Inch, Decimal are not recognized by IGES Norm. If such Units are selected in Parameters and
Measure / Units tab and if the option selected is Keep User Unit, the IGES file unit will be the Millimeter (mm).

By default, the option is set to Keep User Unit.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1672

IGES 2D

This page deals with:

● Import IGES 2D options:
❍ Standards,

❍ Unit of the file,

❍ Destination view,

❍ Create end points,

❍ Convert dimensions as,

● Export IGES 2D options:

❍ Exported sheets,

❍ Export mode.

Import:
Standards

Drafting:

The element you import will be placed in a Drawing, the root document of Drafting.
This Drawing uses styles defined in a pre-defined or a customized standard such as ISO, JIS, ANSI, ASME.
For more details about Drafting standards, please refer to Administration Tasks in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.

Drafting Standards replace the process of the previous releases where you had to open,
(eventually modify) and close a new Drawing to recover the standard you wanted to use
for the data you were going to import. The standard selected in the settings is taken into account at once.

The content of this list depends on which standards have been created and/or customized by your administrator.

Unit of the file

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1673
By default, the option is set to Automatic and the unit of import is determined automatically (either millimeter or inch)
for the best possible resulting drawing.

However, in some cases the resulting drawing is not satisfactory and requires another unit.
Select this unit in the list. Then restart the import.

By default, this option is set to Automatic.

Destination view

Select the view in which you want to import the file.

By default, this option is set to Working views.

Create end points

It is not easy to modify and stretch geometry of imported elements the way you can do it in a V5 native elements.
A solution is to create end points when needed, but to the detriment of performances.
Create end points offers you three options to fit your needs:

● Never: it is the default option. It ensures the best performances.

● For few entities: creates end points only for hatch boundaries and mixed polylines.
This is an intermediate choice between performances and edition capabilities.
● Always: creates end points for arcs, ellipses, lines, mlines, leaders and not standard polylines and splines.
Use this option only when edition capabilities are required.

Information on the option selected is given in the report file:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1674

By default, this option is set to Never.

Convert dimensions as

If you select:

● Dimensions: linear, angular and circular dimensions will be preserved, others (ordinate types) will be transformed into
details.
This option keeps the semantic of the dimension. This means the position, the layout and the text are preserved.
The position, color, thickness can be edited. The text of the dimension is a text that has an associative link with the
dimension.
This dimension has a "fake value" that is blanked.
To display the true dimension value, delete the associated text and enter the data in the properties of the dimension.

Limitation for the Dimensions option:

● Linear dimensions: rotated dimensions, i.e. linear dimensions with a fixed angle other than horizontal or
vertical are turned into details,
● Radial dimensions: problems may occur while positioning arrows,
● Angular dimensions, problems may occur while positioning texts,
● Following attributes are not yet supported :

● suppression of one of the dimension lines (for half dimensioning),

● offset extension or suppression of extension lines,
● arrowhead choice (the V5 default arrowhead is used).

● Geometry: geometry is exploded into multiple lines, arcs, texts.

Select this option to keep the graphical aspect (this mode increase performance when loading a model).
● Details: dimensions are turned into details.
This is an halfway notion between the previous two, in which the geometry is preserved and
the dimension is easy to handle (it can be all selected at once).

By default, this option is set to Details.

Export
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1675

Exported Sheets

Select the required option to export either all sheets or only the current sheet of a multi-sheet drawing:

● The option All exports the data to several files.

The name of each file is made of the name entered in the Save as dialog box and the name of the sheet

(Drawing1_sheet_1.ig2, Drawing_sheet_2.ig2, ...).

The option Only current exports the data to a file with the name entered in the Save as dialog box.

By default, this option is set to All.

Export mode

This option offers now the choice between three export modes:

● Graphic:
This was the only available mode up to Release 11.
It is quick and reliable. It is useful if you want to export a CATDrawing and print it without modifying it.
It is the default mode.
● Structured:
This mode is introduced in Release 11. The exported file can be modified.
For example, in the case of a dimension exported in Structured mode, all the graphic entities representing
the dimension are exported to an Insert/Block. The more complex Drafting elements are exported the same way
whereas the basic geometric elements (lines, arcs, etc) are exported as isolated elements.
● Semantic:
This mode is introduced in Release 11 and is similar to the Structured mode, with the advantage
that linear dimensions are exported as true dimensions (with a default dimension style).
"Default dimension style" entails that most graphic attributes
(such as color, display format of the dimension value, type of arrow, space...) of the dimensions are lost.

For more information, see the What About the Elements You Export? chapter.

By default, this option is set to Graphic.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1676

StiSmartBOM

This tab contains options for exporting or importing SmartBOM Briefcases from CATIA Version 5. These options
are available (not grayed) if you have previously installed SMARTEAM-BOM.

Exporting BOM Briefcases enables you to share data by means of nomad applications (SmartBOM-Editor).

This page deals with the following categories of options:

● General

● Export

● Import

General

SMARTEAM BOM has been designed to enable companies and suppliers to coordinate together over the BOM,

utilizing email and the Internet. In the General section, you can insert your user name and e-mail address.

Export

Selecting Embed associated documents enables you to attach CATIA documents (geometry and

specifications) in your briefcase.

Selecting Export Briefcase enables you to export BOM as a nomad application (.exe). If you have selected

this option, you can then click Browse... to access the install path. The install path is a temporary directory

where the nomad application is built before being sent.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1677

Import

The Temporary output path indicates a temporary directory where the data you import will be read. To

specify this temporary directory, just click Browse... and navigate to the directory of interest.

To import the data:

1. For example, open the CATProduct document you want.

2. Save it as an .stbom file (or .exe file).

This generates the SmartBOM Briefcase or SmartBOM Active Briefcase with your data (.exe file). You

can then send this data by e-mail or publish it on your Web site.

3. Edit the stbom file in SmartBOM Editor: double-click the stbom file (or .exe file) to edit the BOM by
using SmartBOM Product. No specific installation is required to view and edit BOMs.

4. Save your changes by using SmartBOM Editor (File->Save as).

5. To import a new SmartBOM Briefcase in CATIA V5, select File->Open in CATIA V5 and choose the

stbom format: the new BOM is imported with the attached CATIA documents.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1678
STEP

This page deals with:

● General STEP options:
❍ Detailed report,

❍ Geometric Validation Properties (GVP),

❍ Groups (Selection Sets).

● Import STEP options:

❍ Continuity optimization of curves and surfaces,

❍ Assemblies physical structure,

❍ Insert existing component,

● Export STEP options:

❍ Application Protocol (AP),

❍ Units,

❍ Show/NoShow,

❍ Header of the STEP file,

❍ Assemblies.

General

Detailed report

By default, the report file contains a Detailed Conversion chapter. Click to clear the Detailed Report option to remove this chapter from the report
file.

By default, this option is selected.

Geometric Validation Properties (GVP)

This functionality is available in STEP AP214 only.

When the Geometric Validation Properties option is selected, the Tolerances button becomes available. It opens a dialog box where you can

define the tolerances for the GVP checking.

● The first tolerance is the percentage of variation of volume or area allowed. Default value: 1%.
● The second tolerance is the maximum error for the center of gravity, expressed in mm. Default value: 1mm.
● You can retrieve the default values (1 and 1) with the Default Values button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1679

For import:

● Geometric validation properties are computed for each solid, shell, product or instance, and this information is written in the report file.
● For each solid, shell, product or instance, the report file gives the computed geometric validation properties:

● Centroid: coordinates of the center of gravity (applies to solid, shell, product or instance),
● Area: area of the entity (wetted area for solids) (applies to solid, shell or product),
● Volume: volume of the entity (for solids only) (applies to solid or product).

● If the imported STEP file contains geometric validation properties, these properties are read. This information is written in the report file.
● For each read geometric validation properties, the report file gives the status of comparison between read and computed properties, with the
following information:

● Centroid deviation error (distance measure) (applies to solid, shell, product or instance),
● Surface area difference value and error ratio (applies to solid, shell or product),
● Volume difference value and error ratio (applies to solid or product).

● A global status for the conversion is given, together with the maximum deviations found.

Example of report file:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1680

● The status of comparison for a given solid, shell, product or instance is ok if:

● ratios (Volume difference and Surface area difference) are lower than 1%.
● and the centroid deviation is lower than 1 mm.

● If all status are ok, the global status is ok too.

● The maximum deviation found for each comparison (centroid, area and volume) is given in the report file with the corresponding entities (the
maximum deviations found do not necessarily apply to a single object).
● This functionality involves a slight performance loss, due to the properties computation cost.

For export:

● The exported STEP file includes geometric validation properties for each solid, shell, product or instance, according to STEP AP214 and the CAX-IF
recommended practices.
● For each solid, shell, product or instance, the report file gives the computed geometric validation properties:

● Centroid: coordinates of the center of gravity (applies to solid, shell, product or instance),
● Area: area of the entity (wetted area for solids) (applies to solid, shell or product),
● Volume: volume of the entity (for solids only) (applies to solid or product).

● The unit used for geometric validation properties is the STEP length user unit. See Unit option.

● If the option Assemblies/Structure only is selected, the Geometric Validation Properties are not available.

● This functionality involves a slight performance loss, due to the properties computation cost.

By default, this option is not selected.

Groups (Selection Sets)

By default, this option is selected:

● at import, Groups found in the STEP file are translated into Selection Sets.
● at export, Selection Sets found in the CATIA file are exported as Groups in the STEP file. Refer to the STEP: Export chapter for more information
(Miscellaneous section).

However, importing or exporting Groups may be time consuming. Click to clear this option and de-activate the processing of Groups.

By default, this option is selected.

Import
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1681

Continuity optimization of curves and surfaces

This setting allows a better user control over the number of curves and surfaces that are created during the process of importing STEP data into V5:

V5 requires its geometry to be C2-continuous. When non C2-continuous geometry must be imported from a STEP file, this geometry (curves, surfaces)
is broken down into a set of contiguous geometries, each of them being C2-continuous. This is what happens when the No Optimization option is
chosen.

However, this can produce an increase of the size of the resulting data, because more curves/surfaces are created. In order to limit this drawback, two
other modes are optionally offered.

In those modes, the STEP interface tries to limit the splitting of curves and surfaces by modifying their shape slightly, so that they become C2-
continuous while remaining very close to their original shape.

In order to guarantee that the deformation is not excessive, a maximum deviation parameter is used. When in Automatic optimization mode, this
maximum deviation is read into the STEP file itself, in the STEP parameter that documents the precision of points in the file. In this mode, the value
read from the STEP file is then corrected so that it remains comprised between 10E-2 and 10E-3. This guarantees an optimization that remains
compatible with the precision for the data that was set by the emitting system.

Last, if this strategy is not enough, you can choose the Advanced optimization mode, in which an arbitrary deviation value can be entered.

You can find useful information in the report file. Please see the Report file section in the STEP Import chapter in this User's Guide.
The Automatic optimization proposes:
● No approximation, thus this option does not create a significant deformation and keeps the internal BSpline structure (equations and knots).
● A continuity optimization is performed within the deformation tolerance used for optimizing BSplines, comprised between 0.001mm and 0.01mm
(depending on the tolerance value defined within the imported STEP file) on:

● BSpline surfaces,
● BSpline boundary curves (3D and P-curves when available),
● BSpline independent 3D curves,

● The parameters box cannot be activated

This option softens the effect C2 cutting of faces and boundaries (which is mandatory in V5) without any significant geometric deformation

If you select No optimization:

● No optimization is performed on BSplines (neither curves nor surfaces).

● Elements are cut at discontinuity points to suit the modeler (exact mathematic continuity). This may result in a dramatic number of faces and
boundary curves, data of poor quality and poor performances in further use in V5.

If you select Advanced optimization:

● No approximation. The internal BSpline structure (equations and knots) is kept,

● A continuity optimization is performed on:

● BSpline surfaces,
● BSpline boundary curves (3D and P-curves when available),
● BSpline independent 3D curves,

● but the deformation tolerance is set by the user (see Parameters).

With this option, you can enter a larger tolerance value which may enhance the optimization impact (resulting in less C2 cutting on faces).

Push the Parameters button to access advanced optimization options and tolerances.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1682

User-defined Tolerance

● Deformation: maximum deformation (in millimeter) allowed in the optimization of curves and surfaces. Ranges between 0.005 and 0.1 mm. The
default deformation is 0.003.
● Push the Default Value button to revert to the default value.

User-defined Advanced Option: Curves and surfaces approximation:

● By default, this option is not selected.

● BSpline surfaces and curves continuity is optimized,
● In addition, Bspline curves and surfaces approximation is performed,
● It is possible to enter a user value for Deformation,
● This option may change the internal structure of BSplines (equations and knots),
● This option usually results in a significant decrease in the number of faces cuttings.

By default, this option is set to Automatic optimization.

Assemblies physical structure

This option enables the processing of sub-assemblies of an imported assembly.

By default, it is not selected. A CATProduct file containing the whole assembly structure and a CATPart file for each part of the assembly are created.

If you select this option, a CATProduct file containing the sub-assembly structure is created for each node of the whole assembly while a CATPart file is
created for each part of the whole assembly.
STEP File One CATProduct for each product is not selected One CATProduct for each product is selected
Assembly file containing the geometry of components 1 CATProduct + N CATPart P CATProduct + N CATPart
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1683
Assembly file referencing STEP files containing the 1 CATProduct + N CATPart P CATProduct + N CATPart
geometry of components

Assembly file referencing native files containing the 1 CATProduct + N native files P CATProduct + N native files
geometry of components

By default, this option is not selected.

Insert existing component

This option appears only if both the V5 - STEP AP203 Interface and the V5 - STEP AP214 Interface and the MULTICAx STEP Plug-in exist on the
machine. By default it is not selected. Select it to activate the MultiCAD mode.
By default, this option is not selected.

Export
Application Protocol (AP)

The data contained in a CATPart or CATProduct document will be saved in STEP AP203 or AP214 formats. For more information about STEP AP203,

AP203 with extensions, AP203 edition 2 and STEP AP214, refer to Exporting CATPart or CATProduct Data to a STEP AP203 / AP214 File.

By default, this option is set to AP203 iso.

Units

Select the required unit to export a CATPart or a CATProduct in STEP format and in Inch or millimeter independently of the V5 Session unit.
By default, this option is set to mm.

Show/NoShow
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1684

By default, those options are not active.

A CATProduct to export may contain:

● visible entities placed in the Show space,

● hidden entities placed in the NoShow space. By default, they are not exported.
● hidden entities placed in layers that are not visualized (for more information, see Using Visualization Filters). Visualization filters are now taken into
account: by default, entities placed in non-visualized layers are no longer exported.

Select the Export also NoShow entities option to export all entities belonging to both the "Show" and the "NoShow" spaces.

Select the Export non-visualized layers option to export also all entities belonging to those layers.

Note that the entities placed in the NoShow or in non-visualized layers are exported as if they were visible entities. This means that reading back a
STEP file generated with the Export also NoShow entities or the Export also non-visualized layers option will make those previously hidden
entities visible.
By default, no option is selected.

Header of the STEP file

Push the Define... push button to define the header of the STEP file:

Fill in the form displayed as required. You can revert to the Default Values of the header by pushing the Default Values push button.

The header of the exported file looks like this:

Assemblies
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1685
Select the required option to select the export mode.

● One STEP file: one STEP file only containing the structure and geometry of the components.
● Links to CATIA: a STEP file containing structure and entities PRODUCT_DEFINITION_WITH_ASSOCIATED_DOCUMENT which have a link with
CATPart files.
● External references to STEP :

● one STEP file containing the structure

● and a STEP file for each component
The STEP file names, for each component, have the same name as the components.
the structure and the component STEP files are generated in one shot, in the same location.

● External references to CATIA: one STEP file containing the assembly structure with external links to CATPart, CATShape, model V4, .cgr, .wrl
files, according to AP214 and AP203 edition 2 external references mechanism.

The External References functionality is available only with AP214 and AP203 edition 2.

A STEP file cannot refer to a STEP assembly file.

This summary table shows you all the possible combinations within the first two frames, Export : Application Protocol and Export : Assemblies.

Frame Export AP
--------- 203 and 203+ext(1)203 edition2 (2)214 (2)
Frame Export Assemblies
One STEP file (3) YES YES YES
External References to STEP (4) NO (inactive button) YES YES
External References to CATIA (6) NO (inactive button) YES YES
Links to CATIA (5) YES YES YES

(1) = reference of the Application Protocol Config Control Design (AP203)

(2) = reference of the Application Protocol Core Data for Automotive Mechanical Design Processes (AP214)
(3) = Export of the Structure and Geometry of a CATProduct into one file only
(4) = Export of the Structure and Geometry of a CATProduct into different files
(5) = Export of the Structure only of a CATProduct
(6) = Export of the Structure of a CATProduct with links to CATIA for the geometry.

If you have no STEP license:

● in batch mode, you cannot export a CATProduct in Links to CATIA mode,
● in interactive mode, you can export a CATProduct in Links to CATIA mode.

Dynamic Licensing:

If you release the STEP license and you access the STEP options panel, the export assemblies options may change.

In this case, when you recover the STEP license, you have to go back to the STEP options panel to restore the good values.

By default, this option is set to One STEP file.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1686

VRML

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● import unit

● import options

● export version

● export options

Import: Unit

Lets you select the desired unit for the VRML file to be imported: Meter (m), Millimeter (mm) or
Centimeter (cm).

Import: Options

Crease angle

Impacts the generation of default normals.

The following picture illustrates this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1687

If the angle you defined in the Crease angle box is lower than the angle between the two geometric
normals (shown in blue) of the adjacent edges, then a default and unique normal is calculated so that the
faces look smoother across the edges.
If the defined angle is greater than the angle between the two normals, two normals are calculated and the
faces look less smooth across the edges.

Export: Version

You can choose between the VRML 1.0 and the VRML 97 format. To do so, select the appropriate option.

Note: when saving sections in VRML 97 format, make sure that the Save edges check box is selected.

By default, VRML 97 is activated.

Export: Options

Save normals

Lets you save normals contained in your model when converting it into VRML format.

This option is relevant for VRML 97 format only.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1688

Save edges

Lets you save edges contained in your model when converting it into VRML format.

This option is relevant for VRML 97 format only.

Bear in mind that saving edges increases the file size significantly.

By default, this option is activated.

Save textures

If this option is selected, it means that you can save your textures (bear in mind that environment
reflections are not saved in VRML):

● in an external file of type .jpg

● directly in the VRML file. However, note that this increases the file size considerably.

By default, this option is cleared.

Background color of generated VRML file

Lets you select the background color to be used when visualizing the generated VRML file in a standard
VRML viewer (such as Cosmo Player, for instance).
The default color is "black" but you can select the desired color from the list or click More Colors... to
access the color palette. This palette lets you define more colors or create your own colors.

Note that when reopening your VRML document in Version 5, this background color is not taken into
account.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1689

Parameters and Measure

This page deals with Parameters and Measure options in the following tabs:
● the Knowledge tab lets you specify the options when working with Knowledgeware relations, parameters and
design tables
● the Units tab lets you customize units

● the Knowledge Environment tab lets you specify the options you may need to check when working with
Knowledge browsers
● the Report Generation tab lets you customize the reports generated by the Global Check Analysis tool in the
Knowledge Advisor and Knowledge Expert workbenches
● the Parameter Tolerance tab lets you specify the default tolerance of Angle and Length type parameters

● the Measure Tools tab lets you customize measure settings

● the Constraints and Dimensions tab lets you customize the display and style of the constraints and dimensions
defined in your document.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1690

Knowledge

This page deals with these categories of options:

● Parameter Tree View

● Parameter names

● Relations update in part context

● Design Tables

Parameter Tree View

There are 2 types of items that you can display in the specification tree.

With value
Displays the parameter values in the specification tree.

By default, this option is unchecked.

With formula
Displays the formulas constraining the parameter in the specification tree.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Parameter names

This option should be checked if you work with non-Latin characters. If this option is unchecked, parameter names
should have to be renamed in Latin characters when used in formulas.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1691

By default, this option is unchecked.

Relations update in part context

Before V5R12, Knowledge relations (formulas, rules, checks, design tables, and sets of equations) used to execute as
soon as one of their inputs was modified.
The user can now choose, when creating the relation, if it will be synchronous (i.e. the evaluation will be launched as
soon as one of its parameters is modified) or asynchronous (i.e. the evaluation will be launched when the Part is
updated). Each relation can therefore be synchronous or asynchronous.

The 2 following options enable the user to create synchronous or asynchronous relations.

Creation of synchronous relations

Enables the user to create synchronous relations, that is to say relations that will be immediately updated if one of
their parameters/inputs is modified. Relations based on parameters are the only one that can be synchronous.

By default, this option is unchecked

Creation of relations evaluated during the global update

Enables the user to associate the evaluation of asynchronous relations with the global update. The relations can be
asynchronous for 2 reasons:
● The user wants the relations to be asynchronous
● The relation contains measures.

● Relations based on parameters: These relations can be synchronous or asynchronous.

● Relations based on geometry: These relations can only be asynchronous.
● Relations based on parameters and on geometry: For the part of the relations containing parameters, the user
decides if he wants the update to be synchronous or not. For the other part of the relations, the update occurs
when the global update is launched.

Note that the user can also decide if already existing relations are synchronous or
asynchronous. To know more, see Controlling Relations Update in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.

By default, this option is checked.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1692

Design Tables

There are 2 types of items that you can set up.

Automatic Synchronization at Load

When loading a model containing user design tables, if the design table files have been modified and the external
file data is contained in the model, the design table will be synchronized automatically if this radio button is
checked.

By default, this option is checked.

Interactive Synchronization at Load

When loading a model containing user design tables whose external source file was deleted, this option enables the
user to select a new source file or to save the data contained in the design tables in a new file.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Manual Synchronization
When loading a model containing user design tables, if the design table files have been modified and the external
file data is contained in the model, the design table will be synchronized if this radio button is checked. To
synchronize both files, right-click the design table in the specification tree and select the DesignTable object-
>Synchronize command or the Edit->Links command.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Default Mode: Copy Data Into Model

If checked, the data contained in the external source file will be copied into the model.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Default Mode: Do Not Copy Data Into Model

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1693

If checked, the data contained in the external source file will not be copied into the model.

By default, this option is checked.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1694

Units

This page deals with the following categories of options:

● Units

● Dimensions display

Units

Units
You can define or redefine:
● the default unit
● and the display of values for magnitude type parameters.

The default unit along with its symbol is displayed for each magnitude:

Dimensions display
Note that this option is available only if the XML configuration setting is set.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1695

Display trailing zeros

If checked, enables the user to display trailing zeros.

Exponential notation for values greater than 10e+

Enables the user to define the upper limit for using an exponential notation.

By default, this option is set to 6.

Exponential notation for values lower than 10e-

Enables the user to define the lower limit for using an exponential notation.

By default, this option is set to 6.

Magnitude Display

Same display for read/write numbers and read-only numbers

If checked, both read-write and read-only numbers will have the same display.

By default, this option is checked.

Decimal places for read-write numbers

Enables the user to define the number of decimal places to display for read-write numbers.

By default, this option is set to 3.

Decimal places for read-only numbers

Enables the user to define the number of decimal places to display for read-only numbers.

By default, this option is set to 3.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1696

Knowledge Environment

This page deals with the following categories of options:

● Language

● Reference Directory for Types

● Knowledge Environment

Language

This field is to be used when using measures in relations or user functions. Measures are specific functions to be used

in formulas and rules.

The Knowledge Advisor User's Guide provides you with tasks explaining how to use measures. For how to create and

use user functions, see the CATIA Application Architecture documentation.

Load extended language libraries

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1697

If checked, enables you to select the packages he wants to load under Packages (if he wants to load a limited
number of packages.)

This option is particularly useful for the administrator to limit the number of packages used by the
user. It is also very useful to improve performances since only the required libraries are loaded.

● When you open a document and some relations are broken, you might need to load all libraries to

solve the error, which may take quite a long time.

● It is strongly recommended to identify the packages you will need and to select them.

By default, this option is unchecked.

All packages
Enables the user to select all packages.

In the past, when running relations based on functions belonging to other workbenches, a warning message would
display asking you if you wanted to load all libraries, which impacted performances. A dictionary file listing the
functions available and the libraries that contain these functions is located in the runtime view. When a relation
based on such a function is run, the function is searched for in the dictionary.

Reference Directory For Types

Reference Directory For Types

Enables you to save the CATGScript file in the Directory indicated in the Reference Directory for Types field for later
re-user (To know more, see the PKT User's Guide).

By default, this option is not available.

Knowledge Environment

Architect Resources Creation Path

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1698

Enables you to select the directory (Knowledge directory) containing Knowledge data. To find out more, see
Managing Knowledge Applications Resources in the CATIA Infrastructure User's Guide.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1699

Report Generation

This page explains how to customize the reports generated by the Global Check Analysis tool in the Knowledge
Advisor and Knowledge Expert workbenches. It deals with the following categories of options:

● Configuration of the Check Report

● Input XSL

● Report content

● Output directory

● HTML Options

Configuration of the Check Report

Html
Enables the user to generate a HTML report.

Xml
Enables the user to generate a XML report.

By default, the HTML option is enabled.

Input XSL
Note that this option is available only if the XML configuration setting is set.

Input XSL
Enables the user to select the XSL style sheet that will be applied to the generated XML report. The StyleSheet.xsl
file is the default XSL file, but you can use your own template.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1700

Report content

Failed Checks
If checked, the generated report will contain information about the failed checks only.

By default, this option is unchecked.

All Checks
If checked, the generated report will contain information about all the checks contained in the document.

By default, this option is checked.

Check Advisor
If checked, the generated report will contain information about all the Knowledge Advisor checks contained in the
document.

By default, this option is checked.

Parameters information
The generated report will contain the parameters values.

By default, this option is checked.

Check Expert
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1701

If checked, the generated report will contain information about all the Knowledge Expert checks contained in the
document.

By default, this option is checked.

Passed objects
If checked, the generated report will contain information about the objects that passed the Expert checks as well as
information about the parameters of these objects (diameter, depth, pitch,...).

By default, this option is checked.

Objects information
The generated report will contain a list of the objects attributes.

By default, this option is checked.

Output directory

Output directory
Enables the user to select the output directory that will contain the generated report.

By default, this option is available.

HTML Options

Open HTML browser into CATIA Session

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1702

This option is available for Windows only. It enables the user to define if the report will be opened in a CATIA
session (in this case, the check box should be checked) or if it will be opened in an Internet Explorer session (in
this case, the check box should remain unchecked.)

Note that it is highly recommended not to use this report as a basis for macros or for other applications. It is only
provided for information purposes.

By default, this option is checked.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1703

Parameter Tolerance

This tab allows you to specify the default tolerance of Angle and Length type parameters. Angle and Length type
parameters can be assigned a tolerance. To do this, edit the parameter, right-click the value field then select the Add
Tolerance... command from the contextual menu. The default values which are displayed in the tolerance dialog box
are those you have specified in this tab.

This page deals with the following categories of options:

● Tolerance

● Length

● Angle

Tolerance

Tolerance
When checked, enables you to specify default values.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Length

Maximum tolerance
Enables you to assign a maximum tolerance.

By default, the default value is 0 mm.

Minimum tolerance
Enables you to assign a minimum tolerance.

By default, the default value is 0 mm.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1704

Angle

Maximum tolerance
Enables you to assign a maximum tolerance.

By default, the default value is 0 mm.

Minimum tolerance
Enables you to assign a minimum tolerance.

By default, the default value is 0 mm.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1705

Measure Tools

The Measure Tools tab contains two categories of options:

● Update

● Graphic properties

Update

Automatic update in part

Selecting this check box automatically updates measures made on parts if you edit the part.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Notes:
● Only associative measures can be updated.
● For this option to be taken into account, you need to select Automatic located in the Infrastructure -
> Part Infrastructure -> General -> Update frame.

By default, this option is selected

Automatic update in product

Selecting this check box automatically updates measures made on products if you modify geometry or
move geometry in a product structure context.

By default, this check box is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1706
Notes:
● Only associative measures can be updated.
● If you edit a part, the measure is updated when you activate the product.

Graphic Properties

Graphic properties set in the Options dialog box are automatically applied to documents containing
measures made before Version 5 Release 8, Service Pack 1 when you open the document. You are
therefore advised to customize your graphic properties before you open the document.

Display ~ for approximate measurement

Selecting this check box sets the default display of the tilde (~) in dialog boxes and the geometry area to
visually identify approximate measures.

By default, this check box is selected.

Color

Use the Color chooser to set the fill color.

By default, the Color is as shown above.

Line width

Use the Line width dropdown list to set the measure line width.

By default, the Line width is as shown above.

Text color

Use the Text color chooser to set the text color.

By default, the Text color is as shown above.

Box display

Selecting this check box creates a box of the color specified around measures.

By default, this check box is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1707

You cannot subsequently edit the text color or change the style (Box display check box or fill color) via
the Edit Properties command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1708

Constraints and Dimensions

This tab deals with with these categories of options:

● Constraint Style

● Dimension Style

● Constraint Display

● Preview

Constraint Style

Defines the constraint style options:

Resolved constraint
Defines the color status for resolved constraints.

By default, the color is green. See the screen capture.

Unresolved constraint
Defines the color status for unresolved constraints.

By default, the color is dark green. See the screen capture.

Overstrained
Defines the color status for overstrained constraints.

By default, the color is purple. See the screen capture.

Invalid geometry
Defines the color status for constraints set on a geometry became invalid.

By default, the color is dark red. See the screen capture.

Status Color Visualization

Defines if the default status color or the graphical user defined color is displayed on constraint.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1709

By default, this option is not selected (default status color).

View Angle
Defines the angle from which the constraint is displayed in the geometry area, when you are rotating the geometry.
This angle is measured between the normal to the screen and the constraint direction.

By default, the value is 1deg.

Constraint Display

Defines the constraint display options:

Display Mode
● Value: displays the constraint value only.
● Name: displays the constraint name only.
● Name+Value: displays the constraint name and value only.
● Name+Value+Formula: displays the constraint name and value or the constraint name and formula.

By default, Value is selected.

Filter...
Click this button to display the Constraint Filter dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1710

Filter

Defines the general filter options:

● Show all: displays all the constraints.
● Conditional Filter: displays the constraints according to the Status Filter, Product and Filter by Type selected options.

● Hide all: hides all the constraints.

By default, Show all is selected.

Status Filter

Defines the status filter options:

● Do not filter status: displays the constraints without take into account their status, verified or not.
● Filter unverified constraints: displays the unverified constraints only.
● Filter verified constraints: displays the verified constraints only.

By default, Do not filter status is selected.

Product

Defines the product filter option:

● Show on active product: defines whether the constraints of the active product only are displayed.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1711

Filter by Type

Defines the filter by type options:

● Dimensions: defines whether dimension constraints are displayed.
● Angles: defines whether angle constraints are displayed.
● Fixed Angles: defines whether fixed angles constraints are displayed.
● Tangencies: defines whether tangency constraints are displayed.
● Coincidences: defines whether coincidence constraints are displayed.
● Equalities: defines whether equal constraints are displayed.
● Fixities: defines whether fix constraints are displayed.
● Concentricities: defines whether concentricity constraints are displayed.
● Chamfers: defines whether chamfer constraints are displayed.
● Driven: defines whether driven constraints are displayed.
● Driving: defines whether driving constraints are displayed.

By default, all these options are selected.

Dimension Style

Defines the dimension style options:

Scale
Defines the size of the graphical symbols for constraint (tangency, parallelism, leader arrow) options:
● Small: displays small symbols.
● Medium: displays medium symbols.
● Large: displays large symbols.

By default, the Medium option is selected.

Displays iconified constrained elements

Defines whether the iconified constrained elements are displayed.

By default, this option is selected.

Highlight constrained elements

Defines whether the constrained geometries are highlighted when you pre-select a constraint.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1712

By default, this option is selected.

Gap
Defines the distance between the constrained geometries and constraint extension lines.

By default, the value is 2mm.

Overrun
Defines the distance between the constraint dimension lines and constraint extension lines.

By default, the value is 2mm.

Preview

Pre-visualizes the constraint appearances according to the Constraint Style, Dimension Style and Constraint Display options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1713

Devices and Virtual Reality

This page deals with Devices and Virtual Reality options in the following tabs:
● the Devices tab lets you set set up peripheral devices.

● the Tablet Support tab lets you set up pad options in order to perform viewing operations using the Tablet
Pen on a Tablet PC.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1714

Devices

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● virtual reality configuration

● virtual reality options

● maximum frequency for event sending

● automatically started daemons

This task explains how to set up peripheral devices.

The peripheral devices concerned are primarily:

● the joystick
● the spaceball/space mouse.

The joystick is supported on all product brands and on all supported Windows platforms.

The spaceball and space mouse are supported on all P2 products on all supported platforms.

After installing Version 5, you must connect your peripheral devices and install the appropriate drivers.

Virtual Reality Configuration

Lets you activate the configuration to be used to run your tracking devices when starting a Version 5
session.
Prior to activating a configuration, you need to generate the corresponding configuration file in the
Immersive System Assistant workbench.
Each configuration is saved in a .xml file and contains all the necessary MPK display configuration,
including those related to the supported drivers and brokers which are now threaded.

To set a configuration as active, click the Manage button to open the following dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1715

The Configurations list contains all the configuration files you have previously generated.

Select the desired configuration in the list and click Activate then OK to validate: the selected
configuration now appears in the Active Configuration box. You need to restart your Version 5 session
to take the new active configuration into account.

You can also:

● remove a configuration from the list by selecting it then clicking the Delete button
● add a configuration to the list by clicking the Add button. This opens the Select VR Configuration
dialog box that lets you browse your file tree to select the configuration file to be added to the list.
Once a file is selected, click the Open button to add it to the list.

If you set the DLName environment as your current document environment (to do so, select Tools >
Options > General > Document, select DLName in the Document Environment column then click the
Allowed and Current buttons), a specific dialog box dedicated to DLNames opens instead of the usual
Select VR Configuration dialog box.

The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical
names referred to as "DLNames". Each folder is assigned a logical name. In this mode, the different file
opening and saving commands only allow end users to access documents in directories referenced by
DLNames.

When working in a DLName environment, the following dialog box opens:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1716

Note that if no DLName has been defined, a warning dialog box is displayed.

The configuration files available for DLNAME1 are displayed and you can select your configuration file in
the Name column.

If you want to search for a configuration file stored in another DLName, click the black arrow next to
"DLNAME1" then select the desired DLName from the list. This list contains all the DLNames that have
already been defined via the Document tab.

You can also search for a DLName or for a configuration file stored in a DLName by clicking the
button.
The File Selection dialog box is identical to the Open document dialog box displayed when selecting
File > Open in a DLName context. For detailed information on how to use this dialog box, refer to the
DLName Integration section.

When the configuration file has been selected, click OK to validate and close the File Selection dialog
box.

Virtual Reality Options

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1717

Move compass with 3D devices

Lets you move the compass using 3D devices, i.e. a Space Mouse ou a SpaceBall for instance when put
into the 3D scene.

By default, this option is activated.

Line immersive cursor

You can customize the 3D picking device (laser beam) representation to obtain a better precision in
picking and a better visualization in dark environments, all you need to do is:

Select the Line immersive cursor check box.

The 3D picking device representation becomes a white and thin line (see images below):

Standard representation New representation

By default, this option is cleared.

Maximum frequency for event sending

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1718

Max Frequency (event/sec)

Maximum frequency (number of events per second) at which events are sent by peripheral devices. This
value aims at limiting the frequency of emitted events for some devices. Polhemus, for instance, is not
impacted by this value.
We recommend that you use the default value, unless the peripheral device you are using has special
requirements.

A process filters the mass of events generated when using I/O devices and relays only the useful events
to Version 5.

The c:VR Monitor command activates a diagnostic window (named VRMonitor) displaying any drivers
declared to the broker as well as any events those drivers are able to send.

Automatically Started Daemons

This part of the tab lists the peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5. Activate
the threaded drivers you need:
● Space Daemon: spaceball/space mouse. It is an automatic, i.e. threaded, driver which means that it
can be managed by an automatic broker. This driver manages the orientation as well as button
information
● Lighted Programmable Function Keys
● Joystick

Select the appropriate option to ensure that the peripheral device will be activated and recognized the
next time you start a session. This setting requires the use of a peripheral broker. If you are using the
peripheral devices for which native support is provided by Version 5 (joystick, spaceball/space mouse):
the peripheral broker process is started automatically when you start a session. Otherwise, you must run
it manually.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1719

Tablet Support

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● transformation pad

● gesture pad

This task explains how to set up pad options in order to perform viewing operations using the Tablet Pen
on a Tablet PC.
Note that you can use the pad to visualize both 2D and 3D objects.

This functionality is available on Windows only.

Transformation Pad

Activate Transformation Pad

If this option is selected, it means that the pad display is activated in the geometry area.

By default, the pad is displayed to the right as shown below:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1720

When working with a Tablet PC, this option is already activated. Otherwise, it is cleared.

Action on double-click
Lets you select the action to be triggerred when double-clicking. You can choose among the following

actions:

● Open option window

This action opens the Tablet Support dialog box directly in the geometry area. You can then

modify your pad options without having to re-access the Tablet Support tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1721

● Reframe
Zooms in or out to fit all the geometry into the available space
● Center location
Centers the geometry at a specific location
● No action
Means that no action is performed when double-clicking. This can be useful, for instance, to
avoid involuntary actions when manipulating the Tablet Pen.

For more information on the various viewing operations you can perform with the Tablet Pen,
refer to Activating Viewing Tools.

Pad Size

Lets you set the size of the pad using the slider. You can choose a value comprised between 1 and 15.

Pad Transparency

Lets you define how transparent the pad is: the higher the value, the more transparent the pad.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1722

No transparency Transparency = 60%

Pad Position

Lets you position the pad by selecting the appropriate option:

● to the top

● to the bottom

● to the left

● to the right.

By default, the pad is located to the right part of the screen.

Gesture Pad
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1723

Activate Gesture Pad

If this option is selected, it means that the gesture pad is activated in the geometry area. Note that the
gesture pad is displayed only after clicking OK.

A gesture is a set of strokes that are used as keyboard shortcuts. The gesture pad captures the gestures
you draw and translate them into keyboard shortcuts for standard commands such as Cut, Copy or
Delete.

This functionality is available only when working with a Windows XP Tablet PC Edition and in that case,
it is already selected.

Customize command mapping

Some gestures are already associated to standard commands:

● Delete

● Copy

● Cut.

When you draw a gesture in the gesture pad, the associated command is launched.

However, you can modify the command mapping by clicking the Customize command mapping... button
to open the following dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1724

You can then select any symbol with the value [None] and assign it a command. Selecting a symbol opens
the Command Chooser which lets you choose among a list of commands the command to be associated
with the selected symbol:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1725

You can enter a search string in the Search Filter box to restrict your search to the desired characters and
find a command more quickly.
For instance, entering annotation displays only the commands containing the string "annotation" as shown
below:

Note that you can use neither special characters (such as *), nor operators (+, &, -) to filter your search.

When finished mapping your commands, click OK to validate and close the Command Chooser then
Close to close the Customize command mapping... dialog box.

Pad Size

Lets you set the size of the gesture pad using the slider. You can choose a value comprised between 1 and
15.

Pad Transparency

Lets you define how transparent the gesture pad is: the higher the value, the more transparent the pad.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1726

No transparency Transparency = 50 %

Pad Position

Lets you position the gesture pad by selecting the appropriate option:

● Top-left

● Top-right

● Bottom-left

● Bottom-right.

By default, the pad is located in the bottom-left part of the screen.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1727

Infrastructure
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Infrastructure category in the left-hand box.

3. Click the workbench to be customized.

Product Structure
Material Library
Catalog Editor
Photo Studio
Real Time Rendering
Part Infrastructure
3D Annotations Infrastructure
Collaboration Infrastructure

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1728

Product Structure

This page deals with the Product Structure options in the following tabs:
● the Cache Management enables you to considerably reduce the time required to load your data,

● the Cgr Management settings enable you to define the policy for the generation of cgrs into the cache,

● the ENOVIAvpm tab shows you to manage CDM Interoperability Administration, customize PSN Display Options
and V4 CDM Cache Management,
● the Nodes Customization tab lets you give a particular name, reference or description to a product or a
component in the Specification Tree,
● the Product Structure tab lets you define Product Structure settings (Part Number, Low Light Mode, etc...),

● the Product Visualization tab lets you define Product Visualization settings (Representation and Visualization
mode type),
● the Reconciliation tab lets you select the reconciliation rules that will be available in the Reconciliation session,

● the Tree Customization tab lets you define Specification Tree Order options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1729

Cache Management

Using a cache system considerably reduces the time required to load your data. For more information on working
with a cache system, see About Working with a Cache System.

A DMU Navigator document must be opened.

It is imperative that any directory designated for use as a cache directory be reserved for this usage only, i.e. you
should not manually save any other files in this directory. (When necessary, the Check Maximum Size option
purges the least-recently-accessed files in order to maintain the cache smaller than the designated Maximum size.
As a result, any files that you manually save to this directory could eventually be purged.)

It is strongly recommended that any files you wish to delete from the cache be deleted using the Cache Content
command. See the DMU Navigator User's Guide, User Tasks, Setting Up Your Session, Managing Cache Content. The
integrity of cache data and the cache functionality will not be guaranteed if the cache content is manipulated outside
of the CATIA, ENOVIA or DELMIA user interface.

The released cache feature requires a DMU license.

The timestamp feature requires a DMU license.

If you activate the cache using a VB macro, you will not receive a message reminding you to re-launch your session.
You must, however, re-launch your session.

When you are working in Cache mode, a .model or .CATPart is converted to a .cgr format. You can convert the .cgr
to a .model or .CATPart format using the Design Mode command. See the task Design Mode in the Product Structure
user guide.

The Cache Management settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Cache Activation

● Cache Location

● Cache Size

● Timestamp

Cache Activation

Work with the cache system

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1730
To activate the cache, check the Work with the cache system checkbox.
Note: You must re-start the application in order that the cache activation be taken into account.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Cache Location

Cache Location

New features have been added to the Cache Management that render the configuration of the local and released
caches easier. The new features are:

● Local cache - a history of the last five defined paths

● Released cache - a configuration panel that enables you to:

● select directories from a list of "accessible" directories that have been pre-defined by the administrator
● reorder the directories list
● remove entries from the directories list

Note that it is possible to use environment variables to define a local cache or a released cache:

● the variable should be defined (using the set command on Windows or the export command on UNIX) in the
script file used to launch the executable file of the interactive application
● the variable must be correctly valuated to an existing directory
● the entry in the local cache or released cache text-entry field should be of the form ${variable_name}

Path to the local cache

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1731
To define a local cache directory, enter the name of the directory in the Path to the local cache text-entry field or
click the Path to the local cache selection button and select an entry from the proposed history list.

By default, this variable is valuated to

Windows: C:\Documents and Settings\userid\Local Settings\Application Data\Dassault Systemes\CATCache
UNIX: $HOME/CATCache

Path to the released cache

To define a released cache directory, enter the name of the directory in the Path to the released cache text-entry
field or invoke the released cache configuration panel by clicking the Path to the released cache Configure
button.

By default, this variable will be a list of the released caches that have been defined by your administrator.

Configure

Click the Path to the released cache Configure button.

The Configuration dialog box appears.

To add one of the Accessible Directories to the list of Current Directories, select the entry in the Accessible

Directories list and click the Right-arrow icon .

The entry is added to the Current Directories list.

Note: The list of directories in the Accessible Directories list is defined by the administrator as follows:

● define a .txt file of which each line contains the path to a directory that will
appear in the list of accessible directories
● set and export an environment variable AVAILABLE_CACHE_DIR_PATH
that points to the above .txt file
● the administrator can, of course, manage the access rights to the above-defined directories so as to
restrict their access to groups of users or specific users
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1732

To move one of the entries in the Current Directories list to a higher place in the list (remember that released cache
directories are searched in the order in which you see them displayed), select the entry in the Current Directories list

and click the Up-arrow icon .

The entry is moved up in the list.

To delete an entry from the Current Directories list, select the entry in the Current Directories list and click the
Delete button.

To enter the paths identifying the cache locations, click the Browse icon . The Browse enables you to locate
the file you want. The user can enter the path to his own local cache location, and if permitted by the site
administrator, one or more paths to released cache locations.

The default directory is the user's home directory under UNIX and the USERPROFILE directory under Windows.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1733

Cache Size

Check maximum size

(Optional) Set the maximum size for local cache option.

Check this option to activate the verification that the maximum size of the local cache has not been exceeded.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Maximum size
Set the maximum size for the local cache.

When a file needs to be tessellated and the maximum size is exceeded, a sufficient number of .cgr files are deleted,
on a least-recently-used basis, in order to make place for the .cgr file that needs to be calculated. A warning
message will appear in the Incident Report.

When inserting a component, the maximum size is checked before tessellation of the component to be inserted.
Therefore, it can occur that the cache size becomes greater than the maximum size specified in the setting.

By default, the maximum size is 500 MB.

Timestamp

Check timestamps
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1734
(Optional) Set the Check timestamp option:

The timestamp option serves to check whether or not the tessellated cgr file is up-to-date.

If clicked, the system checks the original document's date against that of the corresponding cgr file, and if older,
tessellates the document again overwriting the out-of-date version. If dates are the same, no tessellation is done
and the cgr file in the data cache is loaded.
Turning this option off means that no check is run and cgr files in the cache are systematically loaded.

By default, this option is unchecked.

GMT timestamp format

Until now, the cache timestamp has been based on local time. This can lead to unwanted re-tessellations if you are
sharing data between sites located in different time zones.

It is now possible to base your cache on GMT time.

The following are the rules for implementing your cache based on GMT time:

● a batch job will permit you to migrate old caches to GMT time-based caches
● once a cache is migrated to or designated as GMT time-based, you can never go back to a local time-based cache
● ALL caches (local cache and released caches) must be of the same format

To migrate an old cache, use the following command:

CATSysMvCache -o UTC -inputdir input_directory -log file.txt [-outputdir output_directory]

If outputdir is not set, the cache specified in inputdir and the documents it contains are converted to GMT format.

Once a cache has been migrated to GMT time-based, it is no longer compatible with previous releases of ENOVIA
DMU or CATIA (i.e. a migrated cache cannot be used in V5R11 or below).

To designate all caches specified in Cache Location as GMT time-based, check the GMT timestamp format
checkbox.

Note: When the GMT timestamp format option is activated:

● all new caches will be based on GMT time

● all specified caches must have been updated using the provided batch job

If any of the caches specified do not conform to the rule that all caches must be of the same format, an
error message will appear.

By default, this option is unchecked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1735

Cgr Management

The Cgr settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● General

● Applicative data

The cgr settings enable you to define the policy for the generation of cgrs into the cache.

General

Save level of details in cgr

Activating this option will cause level of details to be added to generated cgrs.

By default, this option is activated.

Save lineic elements in cgr

Activating this option will cause the following lineic elements to be added to generated cgrs:

● lines
● edges
● axis systems
● planes
● wire-edges

By default, this option is not activated.

Optimize cgr for large assembly visualization

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1736
When this option is activated, only a subset of each cgr data content is loaded, thereby reducing memory
consumption and improving loading performance.

Note the following:

● This subset is sufficient for most DMU review scenarios performed on large assemblies
● If a DMU command requires more information from some cgrs, the entire data content of the
concerned cgrs will be automatically loaded.
● This option has an effect during session time only, it has no impact on the persistent content of the
cgr.
● This option is only compatible with cgrs computed in V5R14 or later.
● In order to upgrade old cgrs, see the DMU Navigator User Guide, Running the CATDMUUtility Batch
Process,
option -force.

By default, this option is not activated.

Applicative data

Save density in cgr

Activating this option will cause density data to be added to generated cgrs.

Note: This option will only be available if you have a DMU Navigator license (DN1, DU1, MDU).

By default, this option is not activated.

Save V4 Comment Pages in cgr

Activating this option will cause V4 comment pages to be added to generated cgrs.

Note: This option will only be available if you have a DMU Navigator license (DN1, DU1, MDU).

By default, this option is not activated.

Save V4 Filter Layers in cgr

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1737
Activating this option will cause V4 filter layers to be added to generated cgrs.

Note: This option will only be available if you have a DMU Navigator license (DN1, DU1, MDU).

By default, this option is not activated.

Save FTA 3D Annotation representation in cgr

Activating this option will cause FTA 3D annotation representations to be added to generated cgrs.

Note: This option will only be available if you have a Tolerancing license.

By default, this option is not activated.

Confirming chosen options

4. When you have finished customizing options, click OK to confirm.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1738

ENOVIAVPM

This page deals with the options concerning:

● CDM Interoperability administration,

● PSN Display Options,

● Customize Session Building,

● V4 CDM Cache Management.

CDM Interoperability Administration

There are three push buttons in this section:

● Selecting the Database Administration button lets you define the parameters for connection to the CDM
databases you wish to use (see "Connecting an ORACLE or DB2 Database to Your CATIA Version 5
Environment" in the ENOVIAVPM User's Guide).
● Checking the Database Server Dictionary box lets you define a CDM dictionary associated with a server.
● Checking the ENOVIAvpm/Product Structure Mapping box lets you map CDM and assembly attributes
(see "Mapping CDM and Assembly Attributes" in the ENOVIAVPM User's Guide).

PSN Display Options

● Checking the Automatic Highlight in PSN box sets the automatic highlight for the identification of models
in a PSN graph from a Version 5 session and vice-versa. This means that whenever you select one or more
models in a PSN graph they are automatically highlighted in the Version 5 session. When selected in a
Version 5 session, they are automatically highlighted in the corresponding PSN graph.

If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that performance will be adversely affected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1739

Customize Session Building

● Checking the Load all EnoviaVPM properties box means that when a session is built all the properties
visualized in VPM that have not been mapped will be loaded as user properties.

If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that performance will be adversely affected.

● Checking the Disable Applicative Object management box speeds up performance.

If you do decide to use this option you should be aware that V5 applicative objects such as
publications, constraints, etc. will neither be saved nor stored in the database.

V4 CDM Cache Management

● Checking the Work with the V4 CDM cache system box enables you to use the cache system and provide
the location of the V4 local cache in the field CDM Cache path.

You can also specify the access method in the field Access method.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1740

Nodes Customization

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● Reference Product,

● Product instance, reference loaded,

● Product instance, reference unloaded.

For each section, you have the possibility to check the option: Customized display and the same Configure window appears.

1. Click the Customized display box and the Configure button become active.

2. Press the Configure button and the Configure customized display window is displayed:

In this window, you can select different options:

Product:
● Part number (#PN#),
● Revision (#RE#),
● Definition (#DF#)
● Nomenclature (#NO#),
● Source (#SO"),
● Description (#DR#).

Link to Reference:
● Short Reference Path (#SRP#)

Component:
● Instance name (#IN#),
● Description (#DI#).
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1741
Shape:
● Shape Name (#SN#),
● Short Description (#SD#),
● Environment (#EN#),
● Source (#SC#).

You can click the box of your choice and the diagram of this option (#DR# for Description, for instance) is automatically reported in
the empty field, in the top of the window. By default, the #PN# option is always selected.

You can directly replace the diagram (#PN#,#RE#,...) by the term of your choice (between two #) and it will appear in the Product
Structure. By the same way, you can add a comma and a blank space between these parameters.

Reference Product

By default, this option is not selected.

Open AnalyzingAssembly02.CATProduct and unload CRIC_TOP.CATPart. For more information about unloading components, please
refer to the Product Structure User's Guide.

Reference Product:

● Customized display: if you select this option, you will decide what will be seen at the root product level, in the Specification Tree. For
example:

1. Select Properties in the contextual menu of AnalyzingAssembly02.CATProduct.

2. Enter a number in the Revision field (10 for instance) and click OK.

3. Select the Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure command and click the Nodes Customization tab.

4. Click the Customized display box under the Reference Product section. Press the Configure button.

5. In the Configure customized display field, select select Revision (#RE#).

6. Click Close and then OK. You can visualize the result in the second picture.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1742

Product instance, reference loaded

By default, this option is not selected.

● Customized display: if you select this option, you will decide what will be seen at the Instance level (Instance whose the Reference is
loaded), in the Specification Tree. For example:

7. Select Properties in the contextual menu of CRIC_FRAME.CATPart.

8. Change the Instance Name ("first instance") and add a Definition: "A1".

9. Select the Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure command and click the Nodes Customization tab.

10. Click the Customized display box under the Product instance, reference loaded section. Press the Configure button.

11. In the Configure customized display field, delete the Instance Name, therefore the Instance name will not be visible in the

Specification Tree even if it has been redefined previously via the Properties command.

12. Click the Close and then OK. You can visualize the result in the second picture.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1743

Product instance, reference unloaded

By default, this option is not selected.

● Customized display: Check Customized Display.

13. Select Properties in the contextual menu of CRIC_TOP.CATPart, which is unloaded (Visualization mode).

14. Modify the Instance Name ("bis").

15. Select the Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure command and click the Nodes Customization tab.

16. Click the Customized display box under the Product instance, reference unloaded section. Press the Configure button.

17. In the Configure customized display field, delete the Part Number diagram (#PN#), therefore the Part Number will not be visible

whereas the Instance name will be visible in the Specification Tree.

18. Click Close and then OK. You can visualize the result in the second picture.

If you are using CATIA "with cache system", the information that you can usually display on each node will not be available for the
CATPart nodes when opening a CATProduct.

In this case, the unavailable information is replaced by the character string '[?]'. There is one exception: the "Part Number" (#PN#) is replaced by '[NNNN]'
where NNNN is the name of the file containing the CATPart (without the directory name).

The unavailable information is made available when you use the "Properties" command on a CATPart. At this moment, the '[?]' strings are replaced by the real
values for this particular node in the specification tree.

These attributes are also accessible in the component's contextual menu: Edit -> Properties.
For instance, open the following example ManagingComponents01.CATProduct and select the Edit -> Properties contextual command
of CRIC_AXIS.CATPart.

For more information about Component Properties, please refer to Modifying Component Properties in CATIA - Product Structure User's
Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1744

1. Click the Define other properties button to add new attributes to CRIC-AXIS.CATPart and click the New Parameter of type

button. The following dialog box appears:

You can add the "Price" parameter in the Edit name and value field:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1745
And you can notice the modifications in the Properties dialog box:

2. Click OK.

3. Select the Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product Structure command and the Nodes Customization tab. Check

the option Customized Display and choose the following settings:

To specify the Price parameter, you need to use these characters: #@xxx@#.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1746

4. Click OK. And you obtain in the following result in the Specification Tree:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1747

Product Structure

This task shows you how to customize Product Structure settings, that are divided in five sections:
● Part Number,

● Low Light Mode,

● Model in BOM,

● Reframe mode after insert existing component,

● Specification tree.

Part Number

Defining the Default Part Number of the Component to be Imported

By default, this option is not selected.

Check Manual input if you wish to assign the name you wish to the component you insert into the assembly.

Low Light Mode

Selecting the Low Light Mode of the component that does not belong to the active level
By default, this option is not selected.

If you check the Low Light Mode option and select (double-click) a component in a CATProduct, it becomes UI Active
(highlighted) in the Geometry Space:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1748
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1749
The second example shows that the operation is also possible with Models.

This is a visualization mode : the selected element remains highlighted and the other geometric components are in low light (gray-
colored). If you double-click on another element, it immediately becomes highlighted and the other ones are dimmed.

Model in BOM

Describing the model file in the Bill Of Material

By default, this option is not selected.
Select the Model In BOM option in order to have access the Models' information (path name for instance) in the document's
BOM.

1. Open a CATIA document containing one or several models.

2. Select the Analyze -> Bill Of Material Menu and click the Listing Report tab.

3. Click on the Refresh button in order to access to the components' properties (path name for example):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1750

These Models have been inserted into a CATProduct and you can now visualize the Models' path name. You can find the original

directories in which the models were stored. When there is a broken link, you can read the following expression : "Unretrieved

document".

Reframe mode after insert existing component

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1751
Reframe Mode after insert existing component
By default, this option is selected.

Check the Reframe Mode options you need.

In the following examples, Global reframe has been selected. CRIC_FRAME.1 has been inserted into Product6 and a different
Reframe Mode has been selected beforehand. The original CATProduct looks like this:

● Global Reframe: this is the default value, Global Reframe zooms on the whole geometry and it allows you to see all the
components. After the insertion of CRIC_FRAME.1 into Product6, the visualization of the geometry is re-adjusted in CATIA
window so that all the components can be seen.

● No Reframe: if you insert an element in the product, you may not see the totality of this element in the CATIA window. The
visualization on the already existing component, CRIC_AXIS.1, does not change. There is no Reframe on the last inserted
element.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1752

● Reframe on last inserted component: This zoom-in capability improves the visualization of the last inserted component.
Therefore, in some cases, you cannot visualize the other CATIA objects because there is an automatic Reframe on the last
inserted component.

Specification Tree
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1753
Customizing the Specification Tree
By default, this option is not selected.
● Products to display the products in the Specification Tree. When the option is activated:

When the option is activated: When the option is deactivated:

To display the Constraints, Parameters and Relations, you need go to the Tree Customization tab.

To modify the setting Automatic expand, you need to select the Tools->Options->General->Display category and the
Tree Manipulation tab:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1754

Product Visualization

The Product Visualization tab concerns the following setting categories:

● Representation,

● Visualization Mode Type.

Representation

In the Representation area, if you click the Do not activate shapes on open selection box, the graphical representations of all the
components will not be computed when opening a CATProduct. So the only thing that will be displayed is the specification tree.
This option may be used to speed up the opening of large CATPRoducts when you don't need to see all the components.
Once the CATProduct is opened, you can display the component you need to see by using the Representation -> Activate Node
option in the contextual menu of these components.

By default, this option is not selected.

Visualization Mode Type

● Visualization Mode with local cache option, when the Cache is activated (check the Work with the cache system checkbox).
In this case, you create all the cgr files in a local cache in mono process.

It is the default value.

● Multi process visualization mode with local cache: when the Cache is activated. You can choose the creation of Cache files in
multi process (DMU context). If you decide to check "Multi Process Visualization Mode with local cache" rather than "Visualization
Mode with local cache", the following message appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1755
● Visualization Mode without local cache: the cgr files within local Cache cannot be visualized; they are not created in the local
cache.
● None: when this option is activated, you are not in Visualization Mode but in Design Mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1756

Reconciliation

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● Query

● Environment

Query

Number of characters taken into account for the query

Enables the user to define the number of characters that will be taken into account when
querying the database.

By default, the value is set to 20.

Environment
There are 3 options available for customizing the environment.
● Environment

● Authorized rules for Publications Exposed mode

● Authorized rules for Structure Exposed mode

Environment
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1757

Enables the user to select his working environment.

● ENOVIA VPM V4: By default, the working environment is ENOVIA

VPM V4.
● ENOVIA V5 VPM: By default, the working environment is ENOVIA V5
VPM.
● SMARTEAM: By default, the working environment is SMARTEAM

By default this option is set to ENOVIA V5 VPM.

Authorized rules for Publications Exposed mode

Enables the user to select the reconciliation rules that will be available in the Reconciliation
session when selecting the Publications Exposed storage mode.

● New: The user can save new objects in the VPDM.

● Load: The user can reload objects from the VPDM.
● Overwrite: The user can overwrite the objects stored in the VPDM by
those loaded in session.
● Keep External: The broken link will be accepted as "broken" during
the reconciliation phase.

By default, all options are enabled.

Authorized rules for Structure Exposed mode

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1758
Enables the user to select the reconciliation rules that will be available in the Reconciliation
session when selecting the Structure Exposed storage mode.

● New: The user can save new objects in the VPDM.

● Overwrite: The user can overwrite the objects stored in the VPDM by
those loaded in session.

By default, all options are enabled.

Note: These options are not available for users of SMARTEAM CATIA Supply Chain Engineering
Exchange.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1759
Tree Customization

This tab deals with Tree Customization and more particularly with:
● Specification Tree Order.

Specification Tree Order

1. In the Specification Tree Order category, there is a list of CATIA attributes corresponding to the nodes in the Specification Tree. This list

allows you to order nodes in the Specification Tree and to activate or deactivate their visualization.

2. This is an order by default. You can modify this order by selecting a Specification Tree Node Name and clicking the Up or Down button. You can

reorder the whole structure, for instance:

3. Click OK and the option panel is closed. The result in the Specification Tree corresponds to the order you had customized in the setting, for

instance:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1760

4. The column entitled Activated allows you to activate or deactivate one or several nodes in the Specification Tree. For instance, you can choose

to deactivate the Constraints node:

And you obtain:

Products and Publication Nodes cannot be deactivated.

5. If you add a new node (for instance, a Material: Concrete) in the Specification Tree, you can activate the corresponding nodes:

6. You can deactivate this component by the same way:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1761

7. Or reorder the components within the Specification Tree:

And you obtain:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1762

Material

This tab deals with the options concerning:

● general options

● material parameters

● default material catalog path

● environment image file

Options

Display a warning when adding properties to a material

If this option is selected, it means that whenever you want to add properties to a material (by double-
clicking it then choosing the Analysis or Drafting tab for example), a warning message is issued to let
you know that the material has been modified when you accessed the Analysis or Drafting properties:

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1763

Use Link mode by default when applying materials

If this option is selected, it means that the selected material is mapped as a linked object and thus, will be
automatically updated to reflect any changes to the original material in the library.

Note: the link mode is activated whichever method you use to apply the material, i.e. the Apply Material
command or drag & drop capabilities. For more information, refer to "Applying Materials" in the Version 5 -
Real Time Rendering User`s Guide.

By default, this option is cleared.

Use Force mode as the default inheritance mode

If this option is selected, it means that the force inheritance mode is activated, i.e; a material is forced
when it is applied onto parts, products, bodies or surfaces in order to make it visible even if a father
material propagates.

For more information on inheritance modes, refer to "Setting Priority between Part and Product" in the
Version 5 - Real Time Rendering User`s Guide.

By default, this option is cleared.

Desynchronize visualization when modifying material attributes

If this option is selected, it means that the material properties is modified independently from the
visualization and thus, this avoids visualization refresh which can take a long time when working on big
models.

By default, this option is cleared.

Open the catalog in read-write mode when applying a material

If this option is selected, it means that, for any applied material, you can open and modify the
corresponding material catalog.

By default, this option is cleared.

Material Parameters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1764

Create a material parameter when creating a part, a body or a surface

If this option is selected, it means that a material parameter will be automatically created for any part,
body or surface you create (either using File > New or the Insert command), even if no material is
mapped onto it.
Activating this option also means that a parameter entitled "Material=None" (or "Material" if you decided
not to activate the display of the parameter value in Tools > Options > General > Parameters and
Measure > Knowledge) appears in the specification tree.

By default, this option is cleared.

Create a link to the catalog when modifying a material parameter

If this option is selected, it means that a linked material is created when modifying a mapped material

using Knowledgeware capabilities.

Do not forget to select the Parameters check box in Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Part

Infrastructure > Display to visualize the Material parameter.

In the two examples below, the Material parameter was selected in the specification tree then modified via
the Edit Parameter dialog box (using Material object > Definition):

Option activated Option cleared

Material applied as a linked material Material applied as a non-linked
material

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1765

Default Material Catalog Path

This area lets you browse your file tree using the button to select the material catalog to be used by
default when applying materials.

The selected material catalog supersedes the one defined in the CATStartupPath environment variable and
thus, will be retrieved when selecting Default Material Catalog from the Library dialog box.

Depending on the document environments (i.e. the method to be used to access your documents) you

allowed in the Document tab, an additional window may appear simultaneously to the File Selection

dialog box to let you access your documents using an alternate method:

In our example, four document environments have been allowed among which the DLName environment.
If you want to access your texture files using DLNames, for instance, click the Logical File System
button: this opens a specific dialog box dedicated to the DLName environment.
For detailed information on this dialog box, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse
Window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1766

Environment Image File

This area lets you use your own environment instead of the default one provided.

To do so, enter the path to the user-defined environment or click the button to open the File
Selection dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the desired location.

Note that depending on the document environments you allowed in the Document tab, the Browse
window may appear simultaneously to the File Selection dialog box to let you access your documents
using an alternate method.
For detailed information, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window.

Or

Click the Environment image generator button to open the Environment Image Generator
dialog box (this icon appears only when working with a Real Time Rendering 2 license):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1767

In the upper part of the dialog box, click each environment wall (i.e. "Up", "Back", etc.) then navigate to
the desired image using the File Selection dialog box.
The resulting environment is displayed on the environment map as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1768

The Image Size list lets you choose a size for your environment image:
● Very Small (128 x 128 pixels)
● Small (256 x 256 pixels)
● Medium (512 x 512 pixels)
● Large (1024 x 1024 pixels)
● Very Large (2048 x 2048 pixels).

Once the image is generated, enter its name and path in the Save as box or click the Browse

Directories button to open the File Selection dialog box which lets you browse your folders to the
desired location.

Note that depending on the document environments you allowed in the Document tab, the Browse
window may appear simultaneously to the File Selection dialog box to let you access your documents
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1769
using an alternate method.
For detailed information, refer to Opening Existing Documents Using the Browse Window.

Click OK to validate and go back to the Material tab.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1770

Catalogs
This task explains how to customize your Catalog settings.

This tab page enables you to define options for the following:
● resolved family components

● ENOVIA V5 management

● part number management

● performance

● favorite catalogs

Resolved Family Components

Create new reference for each instantiation

If this option is selected, it means that a component reference will be created from each instantiated
reference part (just like the New from... command). In other words, each component instantiation will
result in the generation of a .CATPart document saved in the folder specified in the Folder field above.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1771

Allow family component dynamic resolution in catalog

If this option is selected, it means that catalog components will be dynamically resolved when instantiating

them.

Selecting this option activates the Folder field which lets you enter the path to the folder in which you will

store your resolved parts along with their configurations. This avoids recalculating the part resolution

whenever you wish to use a part in a configuration.

To specify a folder, you can also click the icon to the right to open the Folder Chooser dialog box which lets

you browse your folders to the desired location.

By default, this option is cleared.

Instantiate only resolved family components

If this option is selected, it means that you can instantiate only resolved and stored components.
Otherwise, an error message appears to warn you that the component cannot be resolved.

Selecting this option activates the Folder field which lets you enter the path to the folder in which you will
store your resolved parts along with their configurations.

By default, this option is cleared.

ENOVIA V5 Management

Check in Enovia V5 before instantiate a component

If this option is selected, the system will first check if the desired Part exists in Enovia. If the part is found
, it is loaded and instantiated into the Product.

The Search in Enovia will be done with the Part Number value of the description. The Part Number is
valuated in the design column for each description of which the family is composed. If the Part is not
found, no warning message is displayed, but the desired part is automatically created (a new CATPart
document is created in the CATIA session).

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1772

Part Number Management

Modify the Part Number when resolve family

If this option is cleared, the system will not valuate the Part Number into the Generated Part. The Part
Numbers of the generated part will not be set during the resolution algorithm.

By default, this option is activated.

Performance

If this option is selected, it means that if the preview of a catalog component is not stored in the catalog,
this preview will not be displayed (either in the Catalog Browser or in the Preview tab). Therefore, this will
improve performance.

The purpose of this option is to minimize the access to external documents and as a consequence the
objects' preview is not refreshed and cannot be seen. When you browse a Catalog, you know that this
option is selected because the "Status Unknown " appears in the Preview space:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1773

Once the element is instantiated or loaded in purpose, the preview will be updated and the status will not
be unknown.

Checking this option also means that pointed catalogs will not be loaded and that the links to these
catalogs will not be checked. As a consequence, you will not be aware of broken links, if any.

However, note that you can still display the preview of a pointed element by double-clicking it in the list.

By default, this option is cleared.

Favorite Catalogs
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1774

Defining User Favorite Catalogs

The access to define the favorite catalogs is made through the Tools -> Options -> Catalog Editor. This is
a user setting that each user can modify, no lock management is provided.

This functionality allows to increase productivity so that the user can have a direct access to designated
catalogs. It is possible to define some favorite catalogs in the tools -> options. These defined
catalogs as favorites (privileged) always appear in the quick access of the catalog browser.
Selecting a catalog defined in the Favorite is the same has browsing, selecting, and opening
the catalog.

In a standard design process, the user has browsed to select the catalog he wants to use. Also the actual
catalog editor is reminding the last five recently opened catalogs. For example: if the user has used
catalog 1,2,3,4 and 5, the display of the catalog browser is as follows:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1775

To prevent the user from browsing too often to choose the catalog he wants to use, he can pre-define
some favorite catalogs through the setting so that they are always displayed in the catalog Browser.

Display of the Favorites in Catalog browser for quick use

Once the user has defined the Favorite Catalogs, they are automatically added to the Catalog Browser.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1776

If a catalog belongs to more than one category (Last opened, Favorite, Applicative), it is only displayed
once in the list.

Techniques of Interactions

Example1: Adding a new Favorite

Select this button:

By default, the newly added favorite is at the end of the list.

As the user clicks the Add button, a standard File Open Box appears. The user is only able to select
Catalog files.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1777

The user can also select documents that are already loaded.

Note: Only File based catalogs can be selected.

Example2: Reordering Favorites

By clicking on one of these icons, you can reorder your Favorites:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1778
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1779

Photo Studio

This page deals with the Photo Studio options in the following tabs:
● the Display tab lets you define the rendering display

● the General tab lets you define general settings for light sources

● the Output tab lets you define the rendering output

● the Satellites tab lets you define the remote computers used when distributing rendering. This tab is
available only when using Photo Studio Optimizer
● the Sticker tab lets you define the sticker default image..
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1780

Display

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● active lights

● inactive lights

● inactive environments

● light manipulator

Active Lights

This area lets you control the display of active lights, whether they be standard or area light sources.

Wireframe display

Displays the representation of the light source in wireframe mode:

Spot light source: wireframe display

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1781

Shaded display

Displays the representation of the light source in shading mode as shown below:

Spot light source: shaded display

You can use the manipulators to interactively position the light source as you would do for the default
wireframe representation.
This display helps you visualize more easily which part of the object is illuminated as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1782
Note that the color of the shaded representation corresponds to the color defined for the light source (via
the Lighting tab in the Properties dialog box). In the above example, the light intensity has been assigned
a green color.

By default, this option is cleared.

Inactive Lights

No display

Turns off inactive light display.

By default, this option is activated.

Full display

Turns on inactive light display.

By default, this option is cleared.

Inactive Environments

No display

Turns off the inactive environment display.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1783

Simplified display

Displays inactive environments in a simplified way.

By default, this option is cleared.

Full display

Turns on the inactive environment display.

By default, this option is cleared.

Note: dynamic reflections are no longer supported.

Light Manipulator

Show normal

This option is relevant only when the Position along Normal or Position Specular command is active. It
allows you to display the normal of the surface when you move the mouse over the surface and therefore,
helps you to position the light source.

To be able to use this option, you need to activate the light source (either by clicking the light symbol in
the geometry area or by selecting the light in the Light Commands toolbar) then, move your mouse over
the surface to see the normal:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1784

The option is The option is not

activated activated

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1785

General

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● new light position

● view mode

● material display.

New Light Position

This area lets you define how the new light sources you are going to create will be positioned. You can
choose between three modes:

Default mode

The light source is positioned in the upper part of the geometry area, oriented down and centered:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1786

Spot light source - "Default" mode

By default, this option is activated.

As Viewpoint

The light source is positioned according to the user's viewpoint:

Spot light source - "As viewpoint" mode

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1787

Gravitational

The light source is positioned along the X, Y or Z axis of the model. The axis to be used is defined by
selecting the appropriate option next to "Gravitational":

Spot light source - "Gravitational" mode along Y axis

By default, this option is cleared.

View Mode

This area lets you activate/deactivate the view mode to be used by default when entering the Photo Studio
workbench:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1788

Parallel

If this option is selected, it means that when entering the Photo Studio Rendering workbench, your model
is displayed in a parallel view.

By default, this option is activated.

Perspective

If this option is selected, it means that when entering the Photo Studio workbench, your model is
displayed in a perspective view.

By default, this option is cleared.

Last saved

If this option is selected, it means that when entering the Photo Studio workbench, each model you open
is displayed in the view (i.e. perspective or parallel) used to display the model at the time it was saved.
For instance, if you are working with a product in a perspective view then save it before closing the
document, re-opening this product after activating the Last saved option automatically displays it in a
perspective view.

Note: once your model has been saved, if you change the viewpoint afterwards then close the model
without saving it again, this new viewpoint is not used when activating the Last saved option.

By default, this option is cleared.

Material Display

View material

If this option is activated, it means that when entering the Photo Studio workbench, the visualization
mode is automatically switched to "Shading with Material".
The Shading with Material rendering style lets you display materials that have been applied onto your
model.
Therefore, you do not need to select View > Render Style > Shading with Material or click Shading

with Material anymore.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1789

Output

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● quick render

● save

Quick Render

Image Size
● From active viewpoint: indicates that the image is defined from the active viewpoint
● Fixed: lets you define the image width and height in pixels by entering the desired values in the field
nex to "Fixed".

By default, the "From active viewpoint" option is activated.

Output
● On screen: indicates that the rendering output will be displayed on screen
● On disk: indicates that the rendering output will be saved on a disk. You need to specify the new path

and name of the image either by entering them directly in the field or by clicking the button to
browse your folders to the desired location.

By default, the "On screen" option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1790

Save

Increment name if file already exists

This option is used to add the suffix "_ number" to the name of the file if the file already exists. The
number will be automatically incremented as necessary, e.g. "CatiaRender_1.tif", "CatiaRender_2.tif", and
so on.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1791

Satellites

This tab deals with one category of options: Distributed Rendering.

Distributed rendering enables to decrease rendering time since several processors are used to generate
the image.
This category concerns the definition of the remote computers ("satellites") used in network to compute a
rendered image.

This tab is available only when using Photo Studio Optimizer.

For detailed information on how to use this tab, refer to "Using Distributed Rendering" in the Version 5 -
Photo Studio Optimizer User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1792

Stickers

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● default image

● real time representation.

Default Image

This area lets you replace the default sticker image with your own image.

Simply enter the path to the user-defined image or click the button to open the File Selection dialog box
which lets you browse your folders to the desired location.

Real Time Representation

If this option is selected, it means that when a sticker is applied, its representation is displayed in the geometry
area:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1793

Example 1 Example 2
The option is activated The option is not activated

However, note that when you select the sticker in the specification tree, the sticker representation is displayed
even if the Activate real time representation option is not activated.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1794

Real Time Rendering

This page deals with the Real Time Rendering options in the following tabs:
● the Display tab lets you define the display for lights, environments and environment reflections

● the General tab lets you define general settings for light sources

● the Sticker tablets you define the sticker default image.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1795

Display

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● active lights

● inactive lights

● inactive environments

● light manipulator

● environment reflections

Active Lights

This area lets you control the display of active lights.

Wireframe display

Displays the representation of the light source in wireframe mode.

By default, this option is activated:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1796

Spot light source: wireframe display

Shaded display

Displays the representation of the light source in shading mode as shown below:

Spot light source: shaded display

You can use the manipulators to interactively position the light source as you would do for the default
wireframe representation.
This display helps you visualize more easily which part of the object is illuminated as shown below:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1797

The color of the shaded representation corresponds to the color defined for the light source (via the
Lighting tab in the Properties dialog box). In the above example, the light intensity has been assigned a
green color.

By default, this option is cleared.

Inactive Lights

No display

Turns off inactive light display.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1798

Full display

Turns on inactive light display.

By default, this option is cleared.

Inactive Environments

No display

Turns off the inactive environment display.

By default, this option is activated.

Simplified display

Displays inactive environments in a simplified way.

By default, this option is cleared.

Full display

Turns on the inactive environment display.

By default, this option is cleared.

Note: dynamic reflections are no longer supported.

Light Manipulator
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1799

Show normal

This option is relevant only when the Position along Normal or Position Specular command is active.
It allows you to display the normal of the surface when you move the mouse over the surface and
therefore, helps you to position the light source.

To be able to use this option, you need to activate the light source (either by clicking the light symbol in
the geometry area or by selecting the light in the Light Commands toolbar) then, move your mouse over
the surface to see the normal:

The option is activated The option is cleared

By default, this option is cleared.

Environment Reflections
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1800

Enable

Activates environment reflections on reflective objects.

However, bear in mind that this option does NOT deactivate the active environment reflections. Whenever
you wish to restore the default reflections, you can either deactivate the environment by right-clicking it
in the specification tree then clearing Environment Active, or simply delete it.

Checking this option activates the Quality box which lets you specify the reflection quality: Low, Medium
or High.
Checking this option also activates the other fields detailed below.

By default, this option is cleared.

Update reflections when viewpoint is changed

Updates environment reflections on reflecting objects when the viewpoint is modified beyond a predefined
threshold. Otherwise, the reflection update only occurs when you are working with a new or modified
environment (i.e. new wall textures or colors).
You can use:

● the Quality while moving box to indicate the texture size used when the viewpoint is moved
● the Update threshold box to specify the texture update threshold in degrees when the viewpoint is
rotated
● the Computation passes box to indicate the number of texture passes.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1801

General

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● new light position

● view mode

● material display.

New Light Position

This area lets you define how the new light sources you are going to create will be positioned. You can
choose between three modes:

Default mode

The light source is positioned in the upper part of the geometry area, oriented down and centered:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1802

Spot light source - Default mode

By default, this option is activated.

As Viewpoint

The light source is positioned according to the user's viewpoint:

Spot light source - As viewpoint mode

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1803

Gravitational

The light source is positioned along the X, Y or Z axis of the model. The axis to be used is defined by
selecting the appropriate option next to Gravitational:

Spot light source - Gravitational mode along Y axis

By default, this option is cleared.

View Mode

This area lets you activate/deactivate the view mode to be used by default when entering the Real Time
Rendering workbench:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1804

Parallel

If this option is selected, it means that when entering the Real Time Rendering workbench, your model is
displayed in a parallel view.

By default, this option is activated.

Perspective

If this option is selected, it means that when entering the Real Time Rendering workbench, your model is
displayed in a perspective view.

By default, this option is cleared.

Last saved

If this option is selected, it means that when entering the Real Time Rendering workbench, each model
you open is displayed in the view (i.e. perspective or parallel) used to display the model at the time it was
saved.
For instance, if you are working with a product in a perspective view then save it before closing the
document, re-opening this product after clicking Last saved automatically displays it in a perspective
view.

Note: once your model has been saved, if you change the viewpoint afterwards then close the model
without saving it again, the new viewpoint will not be used when clicking Last saved.

By default, this option is cleared.

Material Display

View material

If this option is activated, it means that when entering the Real Time Rendering workbench, the
visualization mode is automatically switched to Shading with Material.
The Shading with Material rendering style lets you display materials that have been applied onto your
model.
Therefore, you do not need to select View > Render Style > Shading with Material or click Shading

with Material anymore.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1805

Stickers

This tab deals with the following categories of options:

● default image

● real time representation.

Default Image

This area lets you replace the default sticker image with your own image.

Simply enter the path to the user-defined image or click the button to open the File Selection dialog box which lets
you browse your folders to the desired location.

Real Time Representation

If this option is selected, it means that when a sticker is applied, its representation is displayed in the geometry area:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1806

Example 1 Example 2
The option is activated The option is cleared

However, note that when you select the sticker in the specification tree, the sticker representation is displayed even if the
Activate real time representation check box is cleared.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1807

Part Infrastructure

This page deals with Part Infrastructure options in the following tabs:

● The General tab lets you set general settings to be used in CATPart documents.

● The Display tab provides options for customizing the display of elements in the specification tree as well as

in the geometry area.

● The Part Document provides options dealing with the creation of a part.

From V5R16 onward, any modifications made to the Part Infrastructure settings can now be recorded in a
Visual Basic file using Tools>Macro>Start Recording. See Recording, Running and Editing Macros in the

Infrastructure User's Guide for details about running macros. Additionally, you can now launch a dedicated

Visual Basic macro in order to set parameters for Part infrastructure.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1808

Display

This tab deals with these categories of options:

● Display in Specification Tree

● Display in Geometry Area

● Checking Operation When Renaming

Display in Specification Tree

There are six types of elements you can display or not in the Specification tree. If you want them to be
displayed, just select them.
● External References

● Constraints

● Parameters

● Relations

● Bodies under operations

● Expand sketch-based feature nodes at creation

External References

Copies with links of geometry from other documents:

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1809

Constraints

Dimensional and geometrical constraints created in the CATPart document:

By default, this option is not selected.

Parameters

Parameters created using the Knowledge Advisor capability:

If you wish to know what parameters and relations are, refer to the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Users Guide
Version 5.

By default, this option is not selected.

Relations

Relations (formulas) created using the Knowledge Advisor capability:

If you wish to know what relations are, refer to the CATIA Knowledge Advisor Users Guide Version 5.

By default, this option is not selected.

Bodies under operations

Bodies attached to other bodies in different ways (Add, Assemble, Remove, Intersect, Union Trim).

The option is selected: The option is not selected:

This option is available only with Part Design application. For more, refer to "Associating Bodies" in the CATIA
Part Design Users Guide Version 5.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1810

By default, this option is selected.

Expand sketch-based feature nodes at creation

This option is not a new option: it has just been renamed.

If the Expand sketch-based feature nodes at creation option is selected, sketch-based features nodes are
expanded so as to display sketch nodes. If not selected, sketch nodes are present in the tree but you need to
click the plus sign to the left of features to expand them.

By default, this option is selected.

Display in Geometry Area

There are five options available for customizing the geometry display:

● Only the current operated solid

● Only current body

● Geometry located after the current feature

● Parameters of features and constraints

● Axis system display size

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1811

Only the current operated solid

This option is used when editing features belonging to attached bodies (bodies that underwent Boolean
operations) only. It displays

● only the features of the current body,

● all the other bodies and geometrical sets directly aggregated to the part.

In the following example, the option is on: you can see Body.2 and Set.1.

This setting can greatly improve the application performances whenever you edit these features.

Note: Instead of accessing this option via Tools > Options, you can click this icon available in the Tools
toolbar.

By default, this option is not selected.

Only Current Body

This option displays the geometry of the current part body or open body only. In the example above, we could
not see Set.1.

By default, this option is not selected.

Geometry located after the current feature

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1812

This option is reserved for Ordered Geometrical Sets (OGSs) and bodies that can include both Part Design
features and GSD features (for more information, refer to Hybrid Design in the CATIA Part Design Users Guide
Version 5.). If selected, the application displays:

● the geometry of the current feature and

● only the GSD and wireframe geometry located after the current feature.

In the example below, since the option is on, you cannot see EdgeFillet.1 nor Hole.1 in the geometry area:

By default, this option is not selected.

Parameters of features and constraints

This option permanently displays parameters attached to Part Design features and Sketcher constraints.

By default, this option is not selected.

Axis system display size (in mm)

This option lets you define the size of axis systems in mm.

By default, this option is not selected.

Checking Operation When Renaming

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1813

Three options let you define rules for renaming geometric elements (using the Properties command).

No name check

Use this option if you wish to allow all types of rename operations whatever the locations of the elements in the
specification tree.

By default, this option is checked.

Under the same tree node

Check this option to prevent two elements belonging to a common node from having the same name. If you are
giving an identical name, a warning message is issued informing you that the element you are renaming will be
suffixed as 'Renamed'. The check operation in case-insensitive.

By default, this option is not selected.

In the main object

Check this option to prevent two elements belonging to the same main node from having the same name. The
check operation in case-insensitive.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1814
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1815

General

This tab deals with these categories of options:

● External References

● Update

● Delete Operation

● Replace

External References

Keep link with selected object

Checking this option lets you maintain the links between external references, (copied elements and imported
elements), and their origins when you are editing these elements. This option is used as you are editing parts
included in assemblies. For more about designing parts in assembly context, refer to the CATIA Assembly
Design Users Guide Version 5. If later on you need to cut the link between external references and their origin,
you just need to use the Isolate command.

In the example below, the option is selected:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1816

Now, when the option is not selected:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1817

By default, this option is not selected.

Show newly created external references

This option is not a new option: it has just been renamed.

If this option is selected, all external references you create from the moment the option is on, are visible in the
geometry area. The option does not affect external references created before the option was active.

By default, this option is not selected.

Confirm when creating a link with selected object

Selecting this option enables you to be warned that links are created when you are pasting or importing
elements from a separate part. This is the warning message that is displayed:
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1818

This option is valid if Keep link with selected object is selected as well.

By default, this option is not selected.

Use root context in assembly

Check this option to ensure that the root of the assembly is the context used. Uncheck this option if you prefer
to use the minimal context. For more about changing contexts, please refer to the task describing the Define
Contextual Links command in the Product Structure User's Guide.

By default, this option is selected.

Restrict external selection with link to published elements

This option is not a new option: it has just been renamed.

Check this option if you want to allow only published elements to be selected as external geometry. This
restricts and therefore controls the selections that can be made when selecting elements belonging to a
different part.

If Keep link with selected object is not on, although selected, this option has no effect.

By default, this option is not selected.

Allow publication of faces, edges, vertices, and axes extremities

This option is not a new option: it has just been renamed.

Selected, this option enables you to directly select faces, edges, vertices, axes extremities when defining a
Publication.

By default, this option is selected.

Update
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1819

Automatic/Manual

Check Automatic if you want parts to be updated automatically. Conversely, check Manual if you wish to
control your update operations.

By default, the Automatic option is selected.

Stop Update on first error

Check this option to stop the update process as soon as the application finds an error when building the
geometry.

By default, this option is selected.

Update all external references

This option is not a new option: it has just been renamed.

Check this option to make sure that the application updates elements copied from other parts. Synchronizing
assumes that all modifications to the other parts affect external references included in your part. If this option is
deactivated, the application will update your part only.

By default, this option is selected.

Activate local visualization

Check this option to visualize features as they are being rebuilt during the update process.

By default, this option is not selected.

Delete Operation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1820

Display the Delete dialog box

Check this option if you wish to access filters for deletion (see "Deleting Features" in the Part Design Users
Guide Version 5).

By default, this option is selected.

Delete exclusive parents

Check this option if you wish to delete the parents of the features you are deleting. The parents will be deleted
only if they are exclusive, in other words, if they are not shared by other features. Conversely, if they are
shared by other features they will not be deleted.

When this setting is active, the option is selected in the Delete dialog box. Even if the option is selected in the
Delete dialog box, you can uncheck it if you wish to. If Display the Delete dialog box is not selected, this setting
has no effect. For more information, refer to Deleting Features in the Part Design Users Guide Version 5.

By default, this option is not selected.

Replace

Do replace only for elements situated after the In Work Object

Checking this option makes the Replace... operation possible only for features located below the feature in
Work Object and in the same branch. This option is available for bodies and ordered geometric sets, not for
solid bodies.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1821

Part Document

This tab deals with these categories of options:

● When Creating Parts

● Hybrid Design

When Creating Parts

Create an axis system

Select this option if you wish to create a three-axis system which origin point is defined by the intersection of
the three default planes that is plane xy, plane yz, and plane zx. When the CATPart document is open, the axis
system is displayed both in the geometry and in the specification tree. For more information about Axis
System, refer to the Part Design User's Guide.

By default, this option is not selected.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1822

Create a geometrical set

Check this option if you wish to create a geometrical set as soon as you create a new part. From V5R15 onward,
geometrical sets created with this option on, are located above Part Bodies in the specification tree.

For more information about geometrical sets, refer to Generative Shape Design User's Guide.

By default, this option is not selected.

Note: data contained in the CGR format are saved within the CATPart format when you are saving your part in
order to improve performances when working in Assembly Design workbench.

Create an ordered geometrical set

Check this option if you wish to create an ordered geometrical set as soon as you create a new part. For more
information about ordered geometrical sets, refer to Generative Shape Design User's Guide.

By default, this option is not selected.

Create a 3D work support

Check this option if you wish to create a 3D work on support as soon as you create a new part.

By default, this option is not selected.

Display the New Part dialog box

Check this option if you wish to display the New Part dialog box as soon as you create a new part (using Start
>Mechanical Design or File > New... part).
This dialog box lets you name the new part and access options defining whether you wish to:

● work in a hybrid design environment

● create a geometrical set

● create an ordered geometrical set

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1823

Note that you can also access these options by using Tools>Options as described above. For more information
about the New part dialog box, refer to Part Design User's Guide.

By default, this option is selected.

Hybrid Design

Enable hybrid design inside part bodies and bodies

Check this option if you wish you to work in a hybrid design environment, that is with bodies that can include

wireframe and surface elements.

Note:

If your CATPart document already contains traditional bodies, that is bodies that cannot include surface nor

wireframe elements, the application identifies them with a gray icon:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1824

If the option is deactivated, then on insertion of a traditional body (body not allowed to contain wireframe nor

surface elements), icons identifying existing bodies likely to include wireframe and surface elements turn yellow.

See hybrid design for reference information. See also the Miscellaneous list identifying icons available in the Part

Design workbench.

By default, this option is selected.

Locate wireframe and surface elements

When the option described above is on, meaning that you have chosen to work in a hybrid environment, you

still can then choose between inserting wireframe and surface elements within bodies by checking In a body, or

within geometrical sets by checking In a geometrical set. For more information about geometrical sets, refer
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1825

to the Generative Shape Design User's Guide.

By default, the In a body option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1826

3D Annotations Infrastructure

This page deals with 3D Annotations Infrastructure options in the following tabs:
● The Tolerancing tab lets you set the tolerancing options.

● The Display tab lets you define the annotation display options.

● The Manipulators tab lets you set the manipulator options.

● The Annotation tab lets you the annotation display options.

● The View/Annotation Plane tab lets you define the view/annotation plane options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1827

Tolerancing

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Tolerancing Standard.

● The Leader associativity to the geometry.

Tolerancing Standard

Defines conventional standard options:

Default standard at creation

● ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers
● ASME 3D: American Society for Mechanical Engineers
● ANSI: American National Standards Institute
● JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard
● ISO: International Organization for Standardization

By default, the ISO standard is selected.

Leader associativity to the geometry

Defines the leader associativity options:

● Free: specifies that leader annotations are freely positioned relative to their geometrical elements.
● Perpendicular: specifies that leader annotations are positioned perpendicular to their geometrical elements.

By default, the Free option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1828

Display

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Grid.

● The Annotations in Specification Tree.

Grid

Defines the grid options:

Display
Defines whether the grid is displayed.

By default, this option is not selected.

Snap to point
Defines whether annotations are snapped to the grid point.

By default, this option is not selected.

Allow Distortions
Defines whether grid spacing and graduations are the same horizontally and vertically.

By default, this option is not selected.

H Primary spacing
Defines the grid horizontal spacing.

By default, the value is 100mm.

H Graduations
Defines the grid horizontal graduations.

By default, the number of graduation is 10.

V Primary spacing
Defines the grid vertical spacing, available only if Allow Distortions is selected.

By default, the value is 100mm.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1829

V Graduations
Defines the grid vertical graduations, available only if Allow Distortions is selected.

By default, the number of graduation is 10.

Annotations in Specification Tree

Defines the annotations in specification tree options:

Under Geometric Feature nodes

Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the geometric feature nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view 3D
annotations under the Part Design or Generative Shape Design feature nodes to which they are applied.

By default, this option is not selected.

Under View/Annotation Plane nodes

Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the view/annotation plane nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view
3D annotations under the view node to which they are linked.

By default, this option is not selected.

Under Annotations Set node

Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the annotation set node in the specification tree, available only if Under
View/Annotation Plane nodes is selected.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1830

Manipulators

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Manipulators.

Manipulators

Defines the manipulator options:

Reference size
Defines the annotation manipulator's size.

By default, the reference size is 2mm.

Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation manipulator is zoomable or not.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1831

Annotation

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Annotation Creation.

Annotation Creation

Defines the annotation creation options:

Annotation following the mouse (Ctrl toggles)

Defines whether the annotation is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process or not.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1832

View Annotation Plane

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The View/Annotation Plane Associativity.

● The View/Annotation Plane Display.

View/Annotation Plane Associativity

Defines the View/Annotation Plane associativity options:

Create views associative to geometry

Creates views associative to the geometry, so that views and their annotations are automatically updated when the geometry is
modified.

By default, this option is selected.

View/Annotation Plane Display

Defines the View/Annotation Plane display options:

Current view axis display

Defines whether the active annotation plane axis system is displayed.

By default, this option is selected.

Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation plane axis is zoomable.

By default, this option is selected.

Visualization of the profile in the current view

Defines whether the view/annotation plane profile on the part/product is displayed.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1833

Customizing Instant Collaboration

Network
Identification
Connectivity
Collaborative Design
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1834

Network

This task explains how to customize collaboration network settings.

The Network settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Local Area Network Mode

● Client/Server Mode

Local Area Network Mode

To activate Local Area Network Mode, click the Local Area Network Mode radio button.

By default, this option is activated.

Local Environment Default Group

When a user connects to the Community, he / she will belong to the the group defined in
this setting.

In the Default Group text-entry field, enter the name of the desired default group.

By default, this option is valuated to Default.

Client/Server Mode
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1835

You must have the VPM Navigator license, otherwise this setting will be grayed out.

To activate Client/Server Mode, click the Client/Server Mode radio button.

By default, this option is not activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1836

Identification

This task explains how to customize collaboration user identification settings.

The Identification settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Business Card

Business Card

The Business Card enables you to identify yourself to the other users with whom you
collaborate.
The Business Card contains the following fields:
● Name
● Company
● Position
● Phone Number
● e-mail

Name
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1837
When a user connects to Instant Collaboration, he / she will be identified as defined in this
setting.

In the Name text-entry field, enter your name.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

Company
In the Company text-entry field, enter your company name.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

Position
In the Position text-entry field, enter your position within your company.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

Phone Number
In the Phone Number text-entry field, enter your phone number.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

e-mail
In the e-mail text-entry field, enter your e-mail address.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1838

Connectivity

This task explains how to customize collaboration server connectivity settings.

You must have the VPM Navigator license, otherwise this setting page will be empty.

The Connectivity settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Collaboration Server

● Communication Server

● Connection

Collaboration Server

Host Name
In the Host Name text-entry field, enter the name of the WebSphere Application Server.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

HTTP Port
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1839
In the HTTP Port text-entry field, enter the port number of the HTTP server via which you
are accessing your WebSphere Application Server.

By default, this option is valuated to 80.

URI
In the URI text-entry field, enter the application name of your VPM Instant Collaboration
application as it was deployed in the WebSphere Application Server.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

Communication Server

Host Name
In the Host Name text-entry field, enter the name of the Sametime server.

By default, this option is valuated to blank.

Community Port
In the Community Port text-entry field, enter the port number of the Sametime server.

By default, this option is valuated to 1533.

Connection
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1840

Direct Connection using Sametime Protocol

To activate the use of Sametime protocol, click the Direct Connection using Sametime
Protocol radio button.

By default, this option is is activated.

Direct Connection using HTTP Protocol

To activate the use of the HTTP protocol, click the Direct Connection using HTTP
Protocol radio button.

By default, this option is not activated.

Use proxy
To activate the use of proxy, click the Use proxy radio button.

By default, this option is not activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1841

Collaborative Design

This task explains how to customize collaborative design settings.

You must have the license CD1, otherwise this page will be empty.

The Collaborative Design settings page concerns the:

● Briefcase Merge

Briefcase Merge

Apply viewpoint on merge

When checked, enables the user to apply the viewpoint when merging the briefcase and to set
the Merge viewpoint option status available in the Briefcase window.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Graph decoration on merge

When checked, enables the user to assign a color to the features making up the briefcase (Red if
the feature is seen as deleted or yellow if the feature is modified.)

By default, this option is unchecked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1842

Mechanical Design
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Mechanical Design category in the left-hand box.

3. Click the workbench to be customized.

Assembly Design
Customizing for Sketcher
Mold Tooling Design
Structure Design
Drafting
Aerospace Sheet Metal Design
Customizing settings
Functional Tolerancing & Annotation

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1843

Assembly Design

This page deals with Assembly Design options in the following tabs:
● The General tab lets you set the general options.

● The Constraints tab lets you define the constraint options.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1844

General

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Update.

● The Update propagation depth.

● The Compute exact update status at open.

● The Access to geometry.

● The Move components involved in a Fix Together.

Update

Defines the assembly update activating options, which affects Assembly constraints, Assembly features, Weld features, contextual design:

● Automatic: updates the assembly automatically after each interaction.

For performance reasons, no update is launched at document opening, even if the Automatic option is selected.
● Manual: lets you decide when you need to update your assembly.

By default, the Manual option is selected.

Update propagation depth

Defines the assembly update propagation options, which affects Assembly constraints, Assembly features, Weld features:

● Active level: updates the child components of the active components only.
● All the levels: updates all the components recursively from the active components.

By default, the All the levels option is selected.

Compute exact update status at open

Defines the update status when you are opening an assembly document or inserting an assembly component.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1845

This option is only taken into account when you work with the Work with the cache system option selected, which is located in
the Infrastructure -> Product Structure ->Cache Management -> Cache Activation frame.

By default, this option is not selected.

● Automatic: loads the minimal data needed in assembly components to determine the update status of the assembly: updated or not.
● Manual: displays the Unknown Status Update icon when the minimal data needed are not loaded to determine the update status of
the assembly.

By default, the Manualoption is selected.

Access to geometry

Ensures that the application will automatically launch the Design mode when using the following commands: constraints creation, reuse
pattern and define multi-instantiation.

This option is only taken into account when you work with the Work with the cache system option selected, which is located in
the Infrastructure -> Product Structure ->Cache Management -> Cache Activation frame.

By default, this option is not selected.

Automatic switch to Design mode

Defines whether the automatic switch is allowed.

By default, this option is selected.

Move components involved in a Fix Together

Defines the move behavior for the components involved in a Fix Together in the Assembly Design workbench only.

Extend selection to all involved components?

Defines the move selection extending:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1846
● Always: ensures to move all the components involved in a Fix Together without warning.
● Never: ensures to move only the selected component involved in a Fix Together without warning.
● Ask each time: ensures to display of a warning message that appears when moving components.
The warning message will appear whenever you will apply the following commands to components fixed together: compass, Snap,
Translation or Rotation, or Manipulate without respect to constraints (With respect to constraints option unselected).

By default, the Never option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1847

Constraints

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Paste components.

● The Constraints creation.

● The Quick Constraint.

Paste components

Defines the paste component behavior options:

● Without the assembly constraints: pastes one or several components without the assembly constraints applying to them.
● With the assembly constraints only after a Copy: pastes one or several components with the assembly constraints applying
to them, only after the Copy command.
● With the assembly constraints only after a Cut: pastes one or several components with the assembly constraints applying
to them, only after the Cut command.
● Always with the assembly constraints: pastes one or several components always with the assembly constraints applying to
them.

By default, the Without the assembly constraints option is selected.

Constraints creation

Defines the constraint creation options:

● Use any geometry: allows you to select any geometrical element.

● Use published geometry of child components only: allows you to select any published element belonging to child
components.
For more information about publication, refer to Managing a Product Publication in the Assembly Design documentation.
● Use published geometry of any level: allows you to select any published element.

By default, the Use any geometry option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1848

Quick Constraint
The Quick Constraint command is based on a ordered list of constraints to be created by the application. The setting available
here lets you reorder the list of constraints having priority when applying the Quick Constraint command to the selected
geometrical elements. What you need to do is select the constraint type you wish to reorder and click the arrows to the right of the
selection to reorder the selected constraint.

By default, the ordered list is the following:

● Surface contact.
● Coincidence.
● Offset.
● Angle.
● Parallelism.
● Perpendicularity.

Creation verified constraints first

Defines whether you want to create verified constraints with the Quick Constraint command.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1849

Sketcher

This page deals with Sketcher options in the following tab:

● The Sketcher tab lets you set the sketcher options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1850

Sketcher

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Grid.

● The Sketch Plane.

● The Geometry.

● The Constraint.

● The Colors

● The Update

Grid

Defines the grid options:

Display

Defines whether the grid is displayed.

By default, this option is selected.

Snap to point

Defines whether annotations are snapped to the grid point.

By default, this option is selected.

Allow Distortions

Defines whether grid spacing and graduations are the same horizontally and vertically.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1851

H Primary spacing

Defines the grid horizontal spacing.

By default, the value is 100mm.

H Graduations

Defines the grid horizontal graduations.

By default, the number of graduation is 10.

V Primary spacing

Defines the grid vertical spacing, available only if Allow Distortions is selected.

By default, the value is 100mm.

V Graduations

Defines the grid vertical graduations, available only if Allow Distortions is selected.

By default, the number of graduation is 10.

Sketch Plane
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1852

Defines the sketch plane options:

Shade sketch plane

Defines whether a shaded plane is displayed in the Sketcher workbench representing the sketch plane.

By default, this option is not selected.

Position sketch plane parallel to screen

Defines if the sketch plane is positioned parallel to the screen when you enter in the Sketcher workbench,
otherwise the default orientation is kept.

By default, this option is selected.

Visualization of the cursor coordinates

Defines whether the cursor coordinates are displayed, near the cursor, within the geometry.

By default, this option is selected.

Geometry

Defines the geometry options:

Create circle and ellipse centers

Defines when you create a circle or an ellipse whether its center is created.

By default, this option is selected.

Allow direct manipulation

Defines whether you are able to move geometry using the mouse according to the Solving Mode options.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1853

Solving Mode...

Click this button to display the solving mode options.

Solving mode for moving elements

● Standard mode: specifies that you can move as many elements as possible with respect of existing
constraints.
● Minimum move: specifies that you can move as few elements as possible with respect of existing
constraints.
● Relaxation: specifies that you can move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally
speaking. This method solves element moving by minimizing energy cost.

By default, the Minimum Move option is selected.

Drag elements end points included

Defines whether you move geometrical elements with their end points.

By default, this option is selected.

Constraint
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1854

Defines the constraint options:

Creates the geometrical constraints

Defines whether the geometrical constraints detected by the SmartPick tool are created. This option is also

available in the Sketcher Tools toolbar through the Geometrical Constraints capability .

By default, this option is selected.

Creates the dimensional constraints

Defines whether the dimensional constraints detected by the SmartPick tool are created. For more
information, see SmartPick. This option is also available in the Sketcher Tools toolbar thru the Dimensional

Constraints capability .

By default, this option is selected.

SmartPick...

Click this button to display the SmartPick options. The SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions, and
more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to the rapid highlighting
of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at different elements in rapid succession.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1855

Support lines and circles

Defines whether the line and arc of circle support are detected.

Alignment

Defines whether alignment constraint is detected.

Parallelism

Defines whether parallelism constraint is detected.

Perpendicularity

Defines whether perpendicularity constraint is detected.

Tangency

Defines whether tangency constraint is detected.

Horizontal and vertical

Defines whether horizontal and vertical constraints are detected.

By default, all these options are selected.

Colors
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1856

Defines the colors options:

Default color of the elements

Defines the color of the geometrical elements.

By default, the color is white. See the screen capture.

Visualization of diagnosis

Defines whether the diagnosis colors are applied. See Colors diagnoses.

By default, this option is selected.

Colors...

Click this button to display diagnosis colors options.

Over-constrained elements

Defines the color of over-constrained elements.

By default, the color is magenta. See the screen capture.

Inconsistent elements

Defines the color of inconsistent elements.

By default, the color is red. See the screen capture.

Not-changed elements
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1857
Defines the color of unchanged elements.

By default, the color is brown. See the screen capture.

Iso-constrained elements

Defines the color of iso-constrained elements.

By default, the color is green. See the screen capture.

Other color of the elements

Defines the color of the elements which are different of geometrical and diagnosis elements. See Colors for
other elements.

Colors...

Click this button to display colors for other elements options.

Protected elements

Defines the color of the protected elements.

By default, the color is yellow as shown by the screen capture.

Construction elements

Defines the color of construction elements.

By default, the color is grey as shown by the screen capture.

SmartPick

Defines the color of the SmartPick assistant elements and symbols.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1858

By default, the color is blue as shown by the screen capture.

Update

Select this option to ensure that the Update Diagnosis dialog box appears to inform you that the sketch you
have modified is under-constrained.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1859

Mold Tooling Design

This section deals with Mold Tooling Design customizing options. These options can be reached via
Tools/Options and are set out in three tabs:

● Catalogs, that defines the storage location of catalogs,

● Add/Remove, that allows the association of add/remove bodies with receiving bodies,

● Component, that defines the components options.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1860

Catalogs

Catalog storage Directory in this tab is the directory where the root catalogs are stored. This field may not

be empty. A default directory is proposed. You can add other root catalog storage directories according to your

needs. Separate each path by a ";".

Using catalogs stored in SmarTeam

You can customize your catalog storage so that you can retrieve components from, and store components in,
SmarTeam (after intervention by your administrator). You need to initialize selection from these catalogs once
(for each type of component) for them to be used by default as your component catalogs. Here is an example
to show you how to do this:

1. Open SmarTeam.
2. Find a component of the type you what to use.
3. Click it and use the contextual menu to choose the menu option that your administrator defined for you
(here TEAM PDM URL).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1861
This displays a message:

that gives you the ClassID number (687) and the ObjectID number (938). Note
them.

4. Let's suppose the component in question is a baffle. Click in the space that is beneath ClassID and
across from Baffle and type 687. Do the same for Object ID and enter 938:

5. Press OK.

SmarTeam intervention for Administrators

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1862
1. Check that the script TeamPDM_URL.bs is in SmarTeam installation directory, \SmarTeam\script.
If not copy the script from CATIA installation, \intel_a\startup\SmarTeam\scripts\TeamPDM_URL.bs
2. Start SmarTeam script maintenance via Start/Program/SMARTEAM/Administrative Tools/SmartBasic
Script Maintenance.
3. Add the TEAM PDM URL command in the User Defined tab of CATIA class. Save the changes. Exit from
script maintenance.
4. Start the Menu Editor via Start/Programs/SMARTEAM/Aministrative Tools/Menu Editor.
5. Create a TEAM PDM URL command via Start Menus/Menu Commands/Default/User Defined Commands
and New User Defined Commands.
6. Select the TEAM PDM URL command and press OK.
7. Add the TEAM PDM URL command to the default profiles via Start Menus/Menus Profiles/System
Profiles/System/Default/Pop-Up Menus/Grid Popup/User Defined Tools and New Menu Item.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1863

Add/Remove

This tab serves to:

● associate add/remove bodies (pads, pockets, drillholes and tapholes) with receiving
bodies,
● to filter the customized names of holes, pads and pockets for use with the Distributed Drill
Component command.

It also offers an option that allows you to add and remove bodies in the manner of versions
prior to V5R16.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1864

Bodies options
Allow you to:

● fully customize the names of drill holes, tap holes, pads and pockets (in accordance with
the naming rules given below),
● structure receiving bodies (plates, for instance) that are dedicated to receiving these
bodies
● include additional information in the end of the name of these bodies.
● associate bodies and their receiving bodies

1. To add the name of a body to the list, type it in the box beneath the Add/Remove

bodies list.

2. Click in the list or hit return to add it.

3. Remove a name by selecting it in the list and hitting backspace.

4. Receiving bodies behave in the same way.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1865

5. Associate an Add/Remove body to a Receiving body by clicking on an

Add/Remove body, clicking on a Receiving body

and pressing Associate.

● When an Add/Remove body is selected for an association, all elements that begin with
the same name will be selected. For instance, if you select MyPocket as Add/Remove
body, the association will also include MyPocket1, MyPocketForPlate6, etc.
● An Add/Remove body can only be associated with a single Receiving body.

Add/Remove management

By default, bodies are assembled. You can, however, choose to add/remove bodies (as in
versions prior to R16) by unchecking this box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1866

Component

This tab deals with options concerning components, giving the components on the left and the customizing options
on the right:

The full table of options looks like this:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1867

● The column 'Not cut in section views' is used to determine whether the component will be visualized in

crosshatch display when a cut is being performed in its drafting.

By default, all types of screws (cap screws, countersunk screws, locking screws,...) and dowel pins are
not cut; therefore the option is selected by default for these components

● The column Selection filter allows the user to activate or not know-how rules when creating components.

When activated, associated filters are applied in the Catalog Browser during component creation.

By default, the rules are automatically applied to all components:

● bushing: the value of the inner diameter of the bushing (InD) must correspond to the
value of the leader pin 's tip diameter (D) if there is one.
The following filter is therefore activated: InD=D
● core pin: the overall length of the core pin (L) must be greater than or equal to H, the
height between the bottom of EjectorPlateA and the top of the uncut CorePlate.
The following filter is therefore activated: L>=H
Also, the height of the core pin's guide hole is set by the Offset_Parting parameter.
● ejector: the overall length of the ejector (L) must be greater than or equal to H, the
height between the bottom of EjectorPlateA and the top of the uncut CorePlate
The following filter is therefore activated: L>=H
Also, the height of the ejector's guide hole is set by the Offset_Parting parameter.
● ejector pin: the overall length of the ejector pin (L) must be greater than or equal to H,
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1868
the height from the bottom of EjectorPlateA to the top of the uncut CorePlate.
The following filter is therefore activated: L>=H
Also, the height of the ejector pin's guide hole is set by the Offset_Parting parameter.
There is a check on the height value of the hole containing the ejector pin's shouldered
part to determine whether it is consistent with the course of the ejection plates; an error
message is displayed when there is a risk of collision.
● ejector sleeve: the overall length of the ejector sleeve (L) must be greater than or equal
to H, the height from the bottom of EjectorPlateA to the top of the uncut CorePlate
The following filter is therefore activated: L>=H
Also, the height of the ejector sleeve's guide hole is set by the Offset_Parting parameter.
● flat ejector: the overall length of the flat ejector (L) must be greater than or equal toH,
the height between the bottom of EjectorPlateA and the top of the uncut CorePlate.
The following filter is therefore activated: L>=H
Also, the height of the flat ejector's guide hole is set by the Offset_Parting parameter.
There is a check on the height value of the hole containing the flat ejector's shouldered
part to determine whether it is consistent with the course of the ejection plates; an error
message is displayed when there is a risk of collision
● leader pin: in the case of a standard mold base, use of the DLP diameter parameter (a
mold base parameter which is displayed in the specification tree) is recommended by the
supplier.
The following filter is therefore activated: D=DLP;
● locating ring: in the case of a standard mold base, use of the DLR diameter (a mold base
parameter which is displayed in the specification tree) is recommended by the supplier.
The following filter is therefore activated: ShD=DLR
● sleeve: the inner diameter of the sleeve (InD) must correspond to the diameter of the
leader pin (D) if there is one. The following filter is therefore activated: InD>=D
The length of the sleeve (L) must be greater than the height of the riser bars (H). The
following filter is therefore activated: L>H.
One or two filters can be activated, depending on the current situation.
● stop pin: in the case of a standard mold base, use of the DSP diameter (a mold base
parameter which is displayed in the specification tree) is recommended by the supplier.
The following filter is therefore activated: ShD=DSP
● support pillar: the length of a support pillar (L) must equal the height of the riser bars,
i.e. the distance between SettingPlate and CoreSupportPlate or CorePlate.
The following filter is therefore activated: L=H

● The column Several Instances per Reference is set to yes by default for all components (except for core

pins, ejectors, ejector pins, flat ejectors, ejector sleeves , spring, sliders, and inserts). This is an option that

allows you to create several instances of one reference component. If you deactivate this option, only one

instance will be created per reference component.

● The column Default plate defines a default plate for a given component. By default it is set to None. Select

the component, then select a plate from the Plate name list at the bottom.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1869

● The column Plate Position defines a default positioning on a plate for a given component. By default, this

option is set to Bottom. Click the label to change it to Top. First select the plate on which the component is to

be positioned. The Top and Bottom option becomes available. Check the proper one. The next time you will

create a component of this type, it will be positioned on the chosen plate, on the selected face, without

selecting it.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1870

Structure Design

This page deals with the following category of options in the General tab: Color.

Color

Use the Shape and/or Plate color chooser to define the default color for shapes and plates respectively.

By default, colors are as shown above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1871

Drafting

This page deals with Drafting options in the following tabs:

● The General tab lets you set general settings to be used in the Drafting workbenches.

● The Layout tab lets you customize options that will be used when creating views or when adding sheets.

● The View tab lets you customize control geometry and dress-up behavior when generating views, as well as view

generation (Generative Drafting workbench only).

● The Generation tab lets you customize options for controlling dimension and annotation generation (Generative Drafting

workbench only).

● The Geometry tab lets you customize options that will be used when creating 2D geometry, whether using autodetection

(or SmartPick) or not, or still adding constraints to this geometry.

● The Dimension tab lets you customize options that will be used when creating or re-positioning dimensions.

● The Manipulators tab lets you visualize manipulators that will be used whenever creating or modifying dimensions

(Interactive Drafting workbench only).

● The Annotation and Dress-Up tab lets you customize options that will be used when creating annotations.

● The Administration tab lets you customize settings for the management of drawings.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1872

General

This page deals with the following categories of options in the General tab:

● Ruler

● Grid

● Rotation

● Colors

● Tree

● View Axis

● Start Workbench

Ruler

Show ruler

Select this option to display the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor
coordinates as you are drawing.

By default, this option is not selected.

Grid
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1873

Display

Select this option to display the grid in your session. Note that this option is also available via
the Tools toolbar.

By default, this option is selected.

Snap to point

Select this option if you want geometry (as well as 2D components) to begin or end on the
various intersection points of the grid. Note that this option is also available via the Tools
toolbar.

By default, this option is selected.

From V5 R15 onwards, this option no longer applies to annotations.

Now, only the Snap by default (Shift toggles) setting is used to specify whether snapping should be
activated by default for annotations. For more information, refer to Annotation and Dress-up.

Allow Distortions

Select this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H and V.

By default, this option is selected.

Primary spacing: H & V

The Primary spacing field lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid.
To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and/or V fields.

By default, primary spacing is set to 100 mm.

Graduations / H & V

The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the
grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. To define your grid, enter the
values of your choice in the H and/or V fields.

By default, graduations are set to 10.

Rotation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1874

Rotation Snap Angle

Specify the angle that should be used when rotating text elements (text, frame, or leader)
using snapping. In other words, this option defines the snapping value used when rotating an
element using the Select or Rotate commands.

By default, rotation snap angle is set to 15 deg.

Automatic Snapping

Select this option to use snapping automatically when rotating an element.

By default, this option is not selected.

Colors (for pre-V5R14 drawings)

These options apply to drawings created with versions prior to V5R14. For drawings created with V5R14
onwards, sheet and detail backgrounds colors are defined in the standard file, under the node Sheet
colors of General node.

Sheet background

Choose the color that will be used for the sheet background.

By default, the color is white.

Detail background

Choose the color that will be used for the background of 2D components.

By default, the color is white.

Graduated color
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1875

If you want the sheet background and/or the detail (i.e. 2D component) background to be
graduated, select the associated box.

By default, these options are not selected.

Tree

Display parameters

Select this option to display in the specification tree the formula parameters used in the
drawing.

By default, this option is selected.

Display relations

Select this option to display in the specification tree the relation parameters used in the
drawing.

By default, this option is selected.

View axis
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1876

Display in the current view

Select this option if you want the view axis to be displayed when you activate a view.

By default, this option is selected.

Zoomable

Select this option if you want to be able to zoom view axes (as you can do with geometry).

By default, this option is selected.

Reference size

Enter the size that you want to use as a reference to display view axes size.

By default, the reference size is 30 mm.

Start Workbench

Hide new dialog box when starting workbench

Select this option if you want to hide the New Drawing dialog box (in the case of Drafting) and the New
Layout dialog box (in the case of 2D Layout for 3D Design) when you start the workbench.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1877

Layout

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Layout tab:

● View Creation

● New Sheet

● Background View

● Section / Projection Callout

View Creation

View name

Select this option if you want the view name to be created automatically when creating views.

By default, this option is selected.

Scaling factor

Select this option if you want the scaling factor to be created automatically when creating views.

By default, this option is selected.

View frame

Select this option if you want the view frame to be created automatically when creating views.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1878

Propagation of broken and breakout specifications

Select this option if you want broken and breakout specifications to be reproduced.

By default, this option is not selected.

Auxiliary and section views orientation according to profile

Select this option if you want auxiliary and section views to be oriented according to the profile. In
this case, the X axis will be parallel to the profile.

Be aware that this setting is a default value, i.e. the setting used when creating the view is
stored by the view and cannot be edited via the view's properties (available via Edit >
Properties).
This setting drives the angle of the view in the sheet. So if the auxiliary/section view profile
is modified, the view rotation angle will be modified accordingly.

By default, this option is not selected.

View axis system based on 3D axis system

Select this option if you want the axis system of the generated view to be based on the axis
system of the 3D part. This enables you to create views with the same orientation if, when
creating two views in the same projection plane by selecting two different faces, the axis systems
which are specific to these faces are different.

For example, take the following part:

With the View axis system based on 3D axis system option not checked, the view orientation
will be different depending on the element selected in the 3D when creating the view:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1879

View orientation when a face of the View orientation when a View orientation when the absolute
rectangular pad is selected face of the elliptic pad is XY plane is selected
selected

With the View axis system based on 3D axis system option checked, the view orientation will
always be the same, no matter what element is selected in the 3D when creating the view:

View orientation when either a face of the

rectangular pad, a face of the elliptic pad, or the
absolute XY plane is selected

By default, this option is not selected.

New sheet
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1880

Copy background view

Select this option if you want a background view to be copied into newly created sheets.

By default, this option is selected.

Source sheet

Specify whether you want the source sheet for the background view to be the first sheet of the
current drawing, or a sheet from another drawing by selecting the appropriate option.

By default, the option is First sheet.

Background view

Directory for frame and title block

You can specify the path to the directory containing the frame and title block macros.

By default, the path is install_root/VBScript/FrameTitleBlock.

Section/Projection Callout
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1881

Size not dependent on view scale

Select this option if you do not want the size of projection and section callout elements to be
dependent on the view scale. This option will apply to newly created callouts, i.e. selecting this
option will not have any impact on existing callouts.

Note that this option only applies to drawings created with versions prior to V5 R11 (i.e. versions
up to V5 R10).

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1882

View

This page deals with the following categories of options in the View tab:

● Geometry generation / Dress-up

● View generation

● Clipping view

● View from 3D

These options do not apply to the Interactive Drafting workbench.

These options are applied when creating new views. Once the view has been created, you can modify its
properties through the Properties dialog box: from the contextual menu of a given view, select Properties,
click the View tab and then select the desired options. For more information, refer to Editing View Properties.

Geometry generation / Dress-up

This category of options lets you specify what kind of geometry and dress-up elements you want to generate

when generating views.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1883

Generate axis

Select this option to generate axis lines.

By default, this option is not selected.

Generate threads

Select this option to generate threads.

By default, this option is not selected.

Generate center lines

Select this option to generate center lines.

By default, this option is not selected.

Generate hidden lines

Select this option to generate hidden lines.

By default, this option is not selected.

Generate fillets

Select this option to generate fillets.

By default, this option is selected.

Additionally, click the Configure button to configure fillet generation. You can choose to generate
either of the types of fillets described below.

By default, Boundaries is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1884

Boundaries

Thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets.

Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces

which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if
they correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two
faces whose curvature radii vary.

This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection

between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what
option you select.

Symbolic

Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each

corresponding surface.

Approximated Original Edges

Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the fillet.

Projected Original Edges

Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view

projection.

This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection

mode.

The following restrictions apply to Symbolic, Approximated Original Edges and Projected Original Edges:
● Dimensions on such fillets are not associative.
● Such fillets cannot inherit 3D colors (see below). Likewise, when using generative view styles, such fillets
cannot inherit the 3DInheritance view dress-up parameters (defined in Tools -> Standard ->
generativeparameters -> *.XML file, Drafting -> ViewDressup -> 3DInheritance).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1885

Inherit 3D colors

Select this option if you want the colors of a part to be automatically generated onto the views.

In the case of white parts, the views generated with this option selected will be white, and will
therefore not be displayed properly.

By default, this option is not selected.

Project 3D Wireframe

Select this option to visualize both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views.

By default, this option is not selected.

Additionally, click the Configure button to configure the 3D wireframe projection mode. You can
choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden (3D wireframe geometry will follow standard
removal of hidden lines) or is always visible (3D wireframe geometry will not follow standard removal
of hidden lines and will always be visible). Whichever option you choose, note that linear elements
will not be projected as points when they are perpendicular to the projection plane.

By default, Can be hidden is selected.

Project 3D Points

Select this option to project points from 3D (no construction element).

By default, this option is not selected.

Additionally, click the Configure button to select the type of points visualized in the projected
drawing. In the 3D Point Projection dialog box, you can choose between keeping the symbols that are
used in the 3D or using a new symbol.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1886

By default, the X symbol is selected.

Apply 3D specification

Select this option to specify whether, in an assembly, the properties assigned to given parts (also
called components) will be applied in the view.

The following 3D specifications may be defined for components in the Product Structure workbench:

● The component will, or will not, be cut when projected in section views (Do not cut in section
views).
● The component will, or will not, be projected in views (Do not use when projecting).
● The component will, or will not, be represented with hidden lines (Represented with hidden lines).

For more information, refer to Modifying Component Properties in the Product Structure User's Guide.

By default, this option is selected.

View Linetype

Click the Configure button to configure linetypes and thicknesses for specific types of views: section
view, detail view, broken view, breakout view, skin section view (in the case of wireframes and
surfaces). In the Linetype and thickness dialog box, select the line type and the thickness you want
for each type of view, from the associated fields. Click Close when you are done.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1887

By default, linetypes and thicknesses are configured as shown above.

If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note that this linetype is
just a graphical dress-up of the view. This means that if one line is
relimited on the breakout line, then it will be relimited on the theoretical
line as shown here, and not on the visualized zigzag line.

View generation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1888

View generation mode

From this list, select how you want to generate views.

By default, Exact view is selected.

A short description of the various view generation modes is provided below. For a detailed description (including
the advantages and restrictions pertaining to each mode), refer to View Creation > About the View Generation
Modes.

Exact view

Generates exact views from the Design mode, i.e. views for which the geometry is available. The
exact generation mode will be the best option in most cases.

CGR

Generates views using the CGR format (CATIA Graphical Representation). CGR corresponds to a data
format containing a graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the
Visualization mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode).
With CGR, only the external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not
available. The corresponding .cgr file, if it exists, is inserted from the cache system.

Approximate

Generates views in Approximate mode. Although Approximate views are not as high in precision and
quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption.
Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the
Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large
amounts of data.

You can fine-tune the generation options according to your needs. Click the Configure button. The
Approximate mode dialog box is displayed, allowing you to set the precision (that is the level of
detail - LOD) with respect to the performances (that is generation time - Time).

The level of detail corresponds to the precision with which the application determines which edges
are hidden and which are not. As a result, decreasing this precision may lead to smaller geometry
being visible whenever it should not be, and vice-versa. The higher the precision, the lower the
performances. In any case, memory consumption will not be impacted.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1889

Proceed as follows:

a. Specify the level of detail in the dedicated field, or move the cursor to set the precision in the

graphic area on the right.

b. Click Close when you are done.

Raster

Generates views as images. This enables you to quickly generate overall views for large products or
assemblies, regardless of drawing quality. Such views are associative to the 3D geometry and can be
updated when the part or product changes.

To optimize disk space and memory consumption, it is recommended that you do not select the
Inherit 3D colors option when generating raster views.

You can configure the raster mode options according to your needs. Click the Configure button. The
Raster Mode Options dialog box is displayed.

Proceed as follows:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1890
a. From the Mode list, select the mode that you want to use: Dynamic Hidden Line Removal,

Shading, Shading with edges. These modes are equivalent to the 3D rendering styles. For

more information, refer to Using Rendering Styles in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

If you want the colors of a part to be used when generating Raster views using the
Shading or Shading with edges mode, remember to select the Inherit 3D Colors
option. Otherwise, the view will be generated using shades of grey.

b. Now, set the level of detail (i.e. the definition, in dpi) that will respectively be used to

visualize and to print the drawing. You can choose between three pre-defined modes (Low

quality, Normal quality and High quality) and a custom mode (Customize). If you choose to

customize the definition yourself, set the dpi for visualization and for print in the appropriate

fields.

The level of detail applies to the scale of the view. In some cases (when the view would
print with a considerable height or width), there may be too many pixels to generate
the view. In this case, the view will be displayed as a red cross-mark. If this happens,
try to reduce the scale of the view and/or the level of detail.

c. Click Close when you are done.

To further improve performance when generating Raster or CGR views, we recommend you work in
Visualization mode: to do this, in the Options dialog box, go to Infrastructure -> Product Structure ->
Cache Management tab and select Work with the cache system. (For more information, see Customizing
Cache Settings in the Infrastructure User's Guide and Visualization mode in the Product Structure User's
Guide.)

By default, this option is not selected.

Exact preview for view generation

Make sure this check box is selected if you want an exact preview when generating views. Note that
exact previews show exactly what will be projected.
In this case, the part or product will be loaded in Design mode when previewing the view to generate,
even if you are working in Visualization mode.

Clear this check box to get a quick preview of the 3D document when generating views. Note that
quick previews do not necessarily show what will be projected, but show exactly what is visualized in
3D.
In this case, a part or product open in Visualization mode will not be loaded in Design mode for the
preview, which optimizes memory consumption.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1891

Only generate parts larger than

To specify that you only want to generate parts which are larger than a certain size, select this option
and indicate the appropriate size by providing a value in millimeters in the appropriate field.

By default, this option is not selected.

Enable occlusion culling

Select this option if you want to save memory when generating exact views from an assembly which
is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system option is active). This
will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which
is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage.
To ensure the efficiency of this option, make sure that the Exact preview for view generation
option is not selected.
In the case of an assembly which is loaded in Design mode, or in the case of a part, the Enable
occlusion culling option will help increase performance by reducing CPU usage.

Keep the following restrictions in mind when selecting the Enable occlusion culling option:

● The Project 3D points option will be disabled.

● The only option available for Project 3D wireframe is Can be hidden.

● If you choose to project 3D wireframe, you will need to make sure that your wireframe elements
have been taken into account when the CGR data was created: this is the case if you activated
the Save lineic elements in cgr option from Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product
Structure -> Cgr Management before the creation of CGR data (i.e. before you launched the
part or product in Visualization mode). If not, you need to activate the Save lineic elements in
cgr option and then re-create the CGR data. To do this:

1. Close all open parts and products and exit the application.
2. Delete your CGR data from the cache. (The cache location is specified in Tools -> Options -
> Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab, Path to the local
cache field.)
3. Re-open the product in Visualization mode.

By default, this option is not selected.

Select body in assembly

Select this option if you want to be allowed to create a view selecting one or several bodies in an assembly.

By default, the box is not checked and the following error message is displayed if you try to generate a view
from a body.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1892

Once Select body in assembly is checked, a warning is displayed when creating the view as you are strongly
advised not to use this option.
Actually, generating a view on a body from a .CATProduct prevents many features from working properly:
● Positioning of the different parts in the assembly is not taken into account in the resulting view and parts
might be superimposed,
● Changes such as rotation or translation in the assembly are not taken into account,
● Modification of an instance properties such as visibility or colors are not taken into account,
● Overload properties is disabled as it is linked to the assembly's properties,
● Creation of balloons is not possible,
● Edit/ Links option references only two parts.
Moreover, multi-selecting a body in two different parts modifies the behavior of the Modify links and Modify
Projection Plane according to the order of selection, since the .CATPart of the first selected body will be used
as reference document and not the .CATProduct.

Clipping view

Put in no show dimension on non-visible geometry

Select this check box if you want to put automatically in no show mode the dimensions which are attached to
geometry which is not visible in clipping views.

If you do not select this check box, dimensions are displayed in clipping views using the colors defined in Tools -
> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis display mode area. For more
information, refer to Analysis display mode.
The color used depends on whether the dimension is interactive (that is, created manually) or generated
automatically:

● interactive dimensions are displayed using the color defined for dimensions on non-visible geometry (light
blue by default).
● generated dimensions are displayed using the color defined for dimensions generated from 3D constraints
(light green by default).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1893
Dimensions are put in no show mode only if none of the geometrical elements to which the dimension is
attached are visible. If an element is visible while the other is not, the dimension is displayed using the color
defined by the analysis display mode as specified above.

By default, this option is selected.

View From 3D

Keep layout and dress-up of 2D extracted annotations

Select this option if you want the layout and dress-up applied to 2D extracted annotations to be preserved
when updating a view from 3D (Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench).
● 2D dress-up modifications are kept when updating design changes from 3D.
● Associativity of the annotations or their leader with the 3D geometry is taken into account.
● Associativity between annotations is taken into account.

By default, this option is not selected.

Generate 2D geometry

Select this option if you want to generate 2D geometry (i.e. wireframe and 2D points) when generating a view
from 3D from a layout view (2D Layout for 3D Design workbench).

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1894

Generation

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Generation tab:

● Dimension generation

● Balloon generation

These options apply to the Generative Drafting workbench only.

Dimension generation

Generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In other words, a
dimension will appear on a view so that it does not need to be created on another view.

The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were previously switched to the
dimension generation option.

Generate dimensions when updating the sheet

Select this option to generate dimensions automatically each time you update the sheet.

By default, this option is not selected.

Filters before generation

Select this option to display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before generation. This
enables you to specify what type of dimensions you want to generate. Also, in assembly or
product views, this lets you indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1895

Automatic positioning after generation

Select this option if you want the dimensions to be automatically positioned after generation.

By default, this option is not selected.

Allow automatic transfer between views

Select this option if you want dimensions to be automatically transferred to the most
appropriate view when regenerating dimensions.

By default, this option is not selected.

Analysis after generation

Select this option to display the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box after generation.

By default, this option is selected.

Generate dimensions from parts included in assembly views

Select this option to extract 3D part constraints (on top of assembly constraints) when
generating product dimensions.

This option is particularly useful if you want to generate dimensions for all parts included in
assembly or product views, without displaying the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box
before dimension generation. Note that if you display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog
box before generating dimensions, you will need to indicate what parts you want to generate
dimensions for (whether this option is selected or not).

By default, this option is not selected.

Delay between generations for step-by-step mode

Specify the delay between each dimension generation when generating dimensions step by
step.

By default, this option is not selected.

Balloon generation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1896

Creation of a balloon for each instance of a product

If you select this option, a balloon will be generated for each instance of a component:
therefore, if a component is used two times within a product, then the balloon will be generated
twice.

If you leave this box unselected, a single balloon will be generated for all instances of the same
component, when a component is used several times within a part or product.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1897

Geometry

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Geometry tab:

● Geometry

● Constraints creation

● Constraints Display

● Colors

Geometry

Create circle and ellipse centers

Specify whether you want to create centers when creating circles or ellipses. Clear this check
box if you do not need to create circle and ellipse centers.

By default, this option is selected.

Allow direct manipulation

Select this check box to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When moving geometry,
you can move either the minimum number of elements, the maximum number of elements,
or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of elements, if needed.

By default, this option is selected.

Additionally, click the Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1898

The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the solving mode:

Standard mode
You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Minimum move
You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.

Relaxation
You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally speaking. This method
solves element moving by minimizing energy cost.

Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end points by selecting Drag
elements end points included.

By default, Minimum move and Drag elements end points included are selected.

Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette

Select this check box to show the H and V fields in the Tools Palette when creating 2D
geometry or when offsetting elements. Leaving the option unselected enables you to directly
enter the value corresponding to the type of element you are creating: for example, the
length when creating a line, the radius when creating a circle or the offset value when
offsetting elements.

When a command (such as the Point creation command) does not have any parameters other
than H and V, then these two fields will remain in the Tools Palette, whether you select this
option or not.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1899

Create end points when duplicating generated geometry

Select this check box if you want to create end points when duplicating geometrical elements
that were generated from the 3D.

By default, this option is not selected.

Constraints creation

Create detected and feature-based constraints

Select this check box if you want the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the
SmartPick tool to be created.

This option is also available in the Tools toolbar through Create detected constraints .
If you leave this check box unselected, Create detected constraints will be inactive by
default. You will be able to activate it at any time.

By default, this option is not selected.

SmartPick... (button)

As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions,
and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to
the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at
different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired
detections by clicking the SmartPick... button.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1900

The SmartPick dialog box provides these options:

● Support lines and circles

● Alignment
● Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency
● Horizontality and verticality

Clear the check boxes corresponding to the elements you do not wish to detect when
sketching.

Clearing all check boxes in the SmartPick dialog box disables SmartPick completely. This will
be particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, disabling SmartPick
lets you concentrate only on the geometry.

By default, all options are selected.

Constraints Display
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1901

Display constraints

Select this check box to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. Note that if
the Display constraints option is cleared, the other options in this category are not
available.

By default, this option is selected.

Reference size

Specify the size that will be used as a reference to display constraints symbols. Changing this
reference size will modify the size of all constraints representations.

By default, the reference size is 2 mm.

Constraints color

Choose the color that will be used to display constraints.

By default, the color for constraints is blue.

Constraints types... (button)

Click this button to define which types of constraints you will visualize as you create the
geometry.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1902

The Constraints types dialog box provides these options:

● Horizontal
● Vertical
● Parallelism
● Perpendicularity
● Concentricity
● Coincidence
● Tangency
● Symmetry

Clear the check boxes corresponding to the types of constraints you do not want to visualize
as you create the geometry.

By default, all options are selected.

Colors

Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to
colors illustrating:
● Graphical properties
Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options
dialog box.

OR

● Constraint diagnosis
Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the
graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnoses.
As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the
Tools -> Options dialog box.

Visualization of diagnosis

Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, not-changed or iso-constrained

elements to be identified using specific colors.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1903

By default, this option is selected.

Then, click the Colors... button to configure these colors.

In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements:

Over-constrained elements
The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the
geometry.

Inconsistent elements
At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are
under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution.

Not-changed elements
Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that
depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated.

Iso-constrained elements
All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its
geometrical support.

By default, colors are configured as shown above.

Other color of the elements

Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1904

In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements:

Construction elements
Specifies the color used for construction elements.

A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch.
This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives.

SmartPick
Specifies the color used for SmartPick elements and symbols.

By default, colors are configured as shown above.

When opening a drawing, colors are not recomputed. Colors will not be displayed until you create
another element or move the geometry.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1905

Dimension

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Dimension tab:

● Dimension Creation

● Move

● Line-Up

● Analysis Display Mode

Dimension Creation

Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles)

Select this option to specify that the dimension line should be positioned according to the
cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process.

By default, this option is selected.

Default dimension line/geometry distance

If you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the value at which the
dimension is created. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry,
you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned.

By default, this option is set to 5 mm.

Constant offset between dimension line and geometry

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1906

Select this option to specify that the distance between the created dimension and the
geometry should remain the same when moving the geometry.

By default, this option is not selected.

Associativity on 3D... (button)

If you click the button, the Dimensions associativity on 3D dialog box appears. These options
are used in a Generative Drafting context, and specify how associativity between dimensions
and the 3D part or product is handled.

When they are associative, dimensions are linked to the 3D part or product. As a result, when
you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically re-computed. When dimensions are
not associative, you need to re-create them after performing an update.

Associativity on 3D

When creating dimensions in a Generative Drafting context, specify whether and how
dimensions should be associative with the 3D part/product:

● Only create non-associative dimensions: dimensions will never be associative with

the 3D.
● Allow non-associative dimensions: dimensions are associative with the 3D whenever
possible, but dimensions that cannot be associative with the 3D are also created.
● Never create non-associative dimensions: only dimensions that can be associative
with the 3D are created.

By default, Allow non-associative dimensions is selected.

Associativity in "Approximate" mode views

Select the Allow the creation of associative dimension in approximate views option if
you want the option chosen in the Associativity on 3D section above to be applied to
dimensions in Approximate views (i.e. views generated using the Approximate view
generation mode). This option only applies to the following dimension creation commands:
Dimensions, Chained Dimensions, Cumulated Dimensions, Stacked Dimensions,
Distance/Length Dimensions, Angle Dimensions, Radius Dimensions, Diameter Dimensions,
Chamfer Dimensions, Dimension Systems. It does not apply to other dimension types, nor to
driving dimensions.

If this option is not selected, dimensions will not be associative in Approximate views (as was
the case prior to V5R15), which minimizes memory requirements.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1907

Create driving dimensions

Select this option if you want newly created dimensions to drive the geometry.

A new field will appear in the Tools Palette during the creation process, allowing you to enter
the driving dimension value.

By default, this option is not selected.

Detect chamfer

Select this option to activate chamfer detection: this will lets you create chamfer dimensions
in a single click.
As chamfer detection may slow performance down, you may want to deactivate this option
for large products or assemblies.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1908

By default, create dimensions on circle's

Specify whether the dimension you will create between a circle and another element should
be on the circle center or on the circle edge.

By default, the Center option is selected.

Move

Configure snapping

Click the Configure snapping button to define how snapping should be performed. In the
dialog box that appears, specify whether the dimension should be snapped on the grid,
whether the dimension value should be located at its default position between symbols (it will
work only if the cursor is between the symbols), or both.

By default, Value between symbols is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1909

Snap by default (SHIFT toggles)

Select this option to activate snapping by default when creating or handling dimensions.
Pressing the Shift key will enable you to temporarily deactivate snapping. Note that snapping
is performed according to the options set in the Configure snapping dialog box.

With this option unselected, snapping is not active. In this case, pressing the Shift key will
enable you to temporarily activate it.

By default, this option is selected.

Before V5 R15, this option used to be called Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles).

Move only selected sub-part

Select this option if you want to move only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc.).

By default, this option is not selected.

Line-Up
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1910

You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to
each other as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element.

Default offset to reference

This allows you to set the offset between the smallest dimension and the reference element.

By default, the offset is 0 mm and 0 deg.

Default offset between dimensions

This allows you to set the offset between dimensions.

By default, the offset is 10 mm and 15 deg.

Align stacked dimension values

Lets you align all the values of a group of stacked dimensions on the value of the smallest
dimension of the group.

By default, this option is not selected.

Align cumulated dimension values

Lets you align all the values of a group of cumulated dimensions on the value of the smallest
dimension of the group.

By default, this option is selected.

Automatically add a funnel

Whenever the value of a cumulated dimension requires a funnel to be displayed correctly,

lets you have one added automatically.

By default, this option is selected.

Analysis Display Mode

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1911

Activate analysis display mode

Select this option to display dimensions using different colors according to their status (not-
up-to-date, isolated, fake, etc.).

By default, this option is selected.

Additionally, click the Types and colors button to customize the colors that will be used. The
Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you assign the desired color(s) to the selected
dimension types. You will then be able to visualize the different types of dimensions using
their assigned colors.

By default, colors are configured as shown above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1912

Manipulators

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Layout tab:

● Manipulators

● Dimension Manipulators

Manipulators

These settings can be used for any type of manipulator (texts, leaders, center lines, dimensions and so forth).

Reference size

Specify the reference size that should be used for manipulators. In the case of texts, for example,
this reference size corresponds to the diameter of the rotation manipulators.

By default, the reference size is set to 2mm.

Zoomable

Check this box if you want to make manipulators zoomable.

By default, this option is selected.

Dimension Manipulators
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1913

These options let you define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use when creating and/or
modifying dimensions:

Modify overrun

If you drag select one overrun manipulator, both overrun extension lines are modified. To modify
only the selected overrun extension line, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the
manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears.

By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.

Modify blanking

If you drag select one blanking manipulator, both blanking are modified. To modify only the selected
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1914
blanking, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in
the dialog box that appears.

By default, the Creation option is not selected, and the Modification option is.

Insert text before

Allow inserting a text before, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the
manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears.

By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.

Insert text after

Allows inserting a text after, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the
manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears.

By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.

Move value

Lets you move only the dimension value.

By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.

Move dimension line

Lets you move only the dimension line by dragging it to the new location.

By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.

Move dimension line secondary part

Lets you move only the dimension line secondary part by dragging it to the new location.

By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1915

Annotation and Dress-Up

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Layout tab:

● Annotation Creation

● Move

● 2D Component Creation

● Balloon Creation

● Table

Annotation Creation

In order for these options to be taken into account, the Snap by default (SHIFT toggles) box must
be selected. Note that the option selected in the Snapping Configuration for Annotations dialog box
will be taken into account. See the Move section.

These options are taken into account only when creating annotations, not when adding a reference line,
for example.

Create text along reference

Select this option if you want to create annotation texts along a reference direction. For
example, if you select a line when creating a text, the text will be oriented parallel to the line.

By default, this option is not selected.

Text

Select this option if you want to create the extremity of text leaders normal to a reference
direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a text with leader, the leader will be
normal to the line.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1916

By default, this option is not selected.

Geometrical tolerance

Select this option if you want to create the extremity of geometrical tolerance leaders normal
to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a geometrical
tolerance, the leader will be normal to the line.

By default, this option is not selected.

Move

Configure snapping

Click the Configure snapping button to define how snapping should be performed. In the
dialog box that appears, specify whether you want annotations to be snapped on the grid,
according to the leader orientation, or both. This will apply to the annotations selected in the
Annotation Creation area.

By default, Both is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1917

Snap by default (SHIFT toggles)

Select this option to activate snapping by default when creating or handling annotations.
Pressing the Shift key will enable you to temporarily deactivate snapping. Note that snapping
is performed according to the options set in the Snapping Configuration for Annotations
dialog box.

With this option unselected, snapping is not active. In this case, pressing the Shift key will
enable you to temporarily activate it.

By default, this option is selected.

● From V5 R15 onwards, the Snap to Point option on the General tab no longer applies to
annotations. Only this option is taken into account.
● Before V5 R15, this option used to be called Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles). It has
been renamed for clarity reasons.

2D Component Creation

Create with a constant size

Select this option if you want all 2D component instances to have the same size when you
create them, no matter what the view scale is.

This lets you create 2D component instances whose size is independent from the view scale
so that they always look the same. You can use them as symbols, for example.

If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Create with a
constant size setting and the Apply Scale property for the text (in Edit -> Properties):
the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1918

Prevent direct manipulation

Select this option to make it impossible to move 2D components using the mouse.

By default, this option is not selected.

Prevent direct scaling

Select this option to make it impossible to scale 2D components using the mouse.

By default, this option is not selected.

Balloon Creation

You can specify what kind of balloons you want to create (using the Balloon command from the
Annotation toolbar) or to generate (using the Generate Balloons command from the Generation
toolbar).

3D associativity

Select this option to indicate that you want to associate balloons with information from the
3D.

By default, this option is selected.

Additionally, select from the list the kind of balloons you want to create or generate: the
numbering of parts within an assembly (default option), the instance name or the part
number.

By default, Numbering is selected.

Table
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1919

Recompute table when editing cell

Select this option if you want a table to be resized while you are editing a cell. If it is not
selected, the table is resized after closing the Text Editor.

By default, this option is selected.

Do not split table on several sheets

This option is available only when certain licenses are installed.

With certain licenses, tables are split automatically on several sheets. Select this option if you
want to keep tables on a single sheet.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1920

Administration

This page deals with the following categories of options in the Administration tab:

● Drawing management

● Style

● Generative view style

● Dress-up

Drawing management

Prevent File>New

Select this option to make it impossible to create drawings using the File -> New command. All
drawings will be created using the File -> New From... command instead.

By default, this option is not selected.

Prevent switch of standard

Select this option to make it impossible to change standards, i.e. to use a standard other than the
one currently defined in the Page Setup dialog box.

By default, this option is not selected.

Prevent update of standard

Select this option to make it impossible to update standards for the current document in the Page
Setup dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1921

By default, this option is not selected.

Prevent background view access

Select this option to make it impossible to access the background view.

By default, this option is not selected.

Style

Use style values to create new objects

Select this option if you want dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette to be pre-
filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor) when creating new annotations.
In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be disabled during the creation of the
annotation.
If you leave this box unchecked, annotation dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette
will be pre-filled with the last entered values (except for Texts, Texts with leader, Balloons and
Datum features). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be active during the
creation of the annotation.

If you select this option, you will be able to reset the current style values in dialog boxes at any
time using the Reset button unless it is disabled.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1922

Create new sheet from (for pre-V5R14 drawings)

This option lets you specify if the properties used for creating new sheets should be those defined
in the standards or those defined in the first sheet of a drawing. These properties are the scale and
the projection method (first or third angle).

Select Style if you want the sheet to use the style defined in the standards (in Tools ->
Standards -> Drafting -> [StandardName] -> Styles -> Sheet).

Select First sheet if you want the sheet to use the properties defined in the first sheet of a
drawing. For example, you can use this option if you use an existing drawing to create a new one
(i.e. when you want the new drawing to have the same properties as the existing drawing).

This option applies only to drawings created with versions prior to V5R14.

By default, First sheet is selected.

Lock "User Default" Style

Select this option to make it compulsory to use User Defaults (i.e., user-defined values set as
default). The Styles drop-down list will be set to Only User Defaults and will be inactive so that
Original Defaults or User Defaults cannot be selected.

This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has
NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.

By default, this option is not selected.

Prevent "Set As Default" and "Reset All Defaults"

Select this option to use the current defaults and to make it impossible to create, change and reset
user defaults (i.e. user-defined values). This disables the Set as Default and the Reset All
Defaults commands.

This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has
NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1923

Display Reset button in dialog boxes

Select this option to display the Reset button in dialog boxes. Deselecting this option hides the
Reset button in dialog boxes and disables the Reset functionality.

By default, this option is selected.

Generative view style

Prevent generative view style usage

This option is used for the Generative Drafting workbench only.

Select this check-box if you do not want to use generative view styles when creating or updating
views. In this case, you will not be able to select a generative view style after having selected a
view creation command, which means that the Generative View Style toolbar will not be displayed.
(In the case of advanced front views, it is the Generative view style list in the View Parameters
dialog box which will not be displayed).

Note that this option also drives view generation parameters when updating views, whether
the view was created using generative view styles or not. In this case, there are two
possibilities:
● If you created the view using generative view styles (i.e. with this check-box cleared)
and then select this check-box, then, at the next update, the view properties (available
via Edit -> Properties) will be used for all overloaded parameters (an asterisk *
appears in the Properties dialog box in front of the parameters which are considered as
being overloaded) and the view settings (available via Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting - > View tab) will be used for the others.
● If you created the view without generative view styles (i.e. with this check-box selected)
and then clear this check-box, then, at the next update, all parameters available in the
view properties (available via Edit -> Properties) will be considered as being
overloaded and will be used. To make sure that generative view styles are used in this
case, click the Reset to style values button in the Properties dialog box.

For more information, refer to the Generative View Styles chapter in the Generative Drafting User's
Guide.

By default, this option is selected.

Dress-up
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1924

Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints

Select this option to make it impossible to modify a 3D constraint via a 2D dimension that was
generated from it.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1925

Aerospace Sheet Metal Design

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools -> Options. The Options dialog box is displayed.

2. Choose the Mechanical Design category in the left-hand box.

3. Select the Aerospace Sheet Metal Design sub-category. Various tabs are displayed.

❍ General lets you set the location of the Standard Profiles Catalog File.

❍ Display lets you manage the visibility of characteristic curves in folded and unfolded 3D

views.

4. Set options in these tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK in the Options dialog box when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1926

General

This page deals with the following option in the General tab: Standard Profiles Catalog File.

Standard Profiles Catalog File

Enter the default path to the Standard Profiles Catalog File in this field. You may click the Browse icon

By default, this field is empty.

If no catalog path has been defined prior to entering the Catalog Browser command, the default catalog is

selected and its path is automatically added to the Standard Profiles Catalog File field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1927

Display

This page deals with the following category of options in the Display tab:

● Characteristic Curves

❍ Surfacic Flange Features

❍ Stamping Features

Characteristic Curves

Reset with Standard Settings

Click this button to reset settings on this tab according to the parameters defined in the standards. For more

information on standards, refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Aerospace Sheetmetal Design User's

Guide.

Clear all Check Boxes

Removes the check mark from all check boxes on this tab.

Surfacic Flange Features

Brake formed
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1928
Specify whether the BTL Base Feature, BTL Support, IML, OML, and Second OML should be seen in folded
and unfolded 3D views of brake formed surfacic flanges, by selecting respectively the Folded view and
Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Hydro-pressed

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature, BTL Support, IML, OML, and Second OML should be seen in folded
and unfolded 3D views of hydro-pressed surfacic flanges, by selecting respectively the Folded view and
Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Stamping Features
Flanged Hole

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature, IML and OML should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of
flanged holes, by selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Bead

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of beads, by selecting
respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1929

Circular Stamp

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of circular stamps, by
selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Surface Stamp

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of surface stamps, by
selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Flanged Cutout

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature, IML and OML should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of
flanged cutouts, by selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Stiffening Rib

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of stiffening ribs, by
selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Curve Stamp
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1930

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of curve stamps, by
selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

User Stamp

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of user stamps, by
selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.

Other Stamping Types

Specify whether the BTL Base Feature should be seen in folded and unfolded 3D views of other stamping
types, by selecting respectively the Folded view and Unfolded view check boxes.

The default value for these check boxes is specified in the standards.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1931

Generative Sheetmetal Design

This page deals with the following category of options in the Aerospace Sheet Metal Design tab:
Standard Profiles Catalog File.

Standard Profiles Catalog File

Enter the default path in this field. You may click the Browse icon .

By default, this field is empty.

If no catalog path has been defined prior to entering the Catalog Browser command, the default catalog is

selected and its path is automatically added to the Standard Profiles Catalog File field.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1932

Functional Tolerancing & Annotation

This page deals with Functional Tolerancing & Annotation options in the following tabs:
● The Tolerancing tab lets you set the tolerancing options.

● The Display tab lets you define the annotation display options.

● The Constructed Geometry

● The Manipulators tab lets you set the manipulator options.

● The Dimension

● The Annotation tab lets you the annotation display options.

● The Tolerances

● The View/Annotation Plane tab lets you define the view/annotation plane options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1933

Tolerancing

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Tolerancing Standard.

● The Semantic Control.

● The Leader associativity to the geometry.

● The Published Geometry.

● The Note Object Attribute.

Tolerancing Standard

Default standard at creation

Five conventional standards are available:

● ASME: American Society for Mechanical Engineers
● ASME 3D: American Society for Mechanical Engineers
● ANSI: American National Standards Institute
● JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard
● ISO: International Organization for Standardization

By default, the ISO standard is selected.

Semantic Control

Defines the semantic control options:

Always try to create semantic tolerances and dimensions

Tries to set as semantic an annotation during its creation. Applicable on annotation which can be semantic, keep in mind that the
annotation display could be modified and/or moved according to the standard semantic.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1934

By default, this option is selected.

Always try to create semantic general tolerances on dimensions

Tries to set as semantic a general tolerances dimension during its creation. Applicable on dimension which can be semantic,
available only if Always try to create semantic tolerances and dimensions is selected.

By default, this option is not selected.

Non-semantic tolerance creation allowed

Defines whether non-semantic tolerances creation is allowed.

By default, this option is selected.

Non-semantic dimension creation allowed

Defines whether non-semantic dimensions creation is allowed.

By default, this option is selected.

Leader associativity to the geometry

Defines the leader associativity options:

● Free: specifies that leader annotations are freely positioned relative to their geometrical elements.
● Perpendicular: specifies that leader annotations are positioned perpendicular to their geometrical elements.

By default, the Free option is selected.

Published Geometry

Defines the published geometry options:

Create annotation on published geometry only

Defines whether annotations are created on published geometry only.
When this option is selected, the Forbidden cursor is displayed over non-published geometries:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1935

By default, this option is not selected.

Note Object Attribute

Defines the Note Object Attribute options:

Allow Note Object Attribute creation

Defines whether note object attribute may be created by user. Enable or disable the icon and menu item commands.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1936

Display

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Non-Semantic.

● The Grid.

● The Annotations in Specification Tree.

● The Partial Surface.

● The Annotation Parameters.

● The Surface Normal.

● The 3D Annotation Query.

● The Hatching, coloring or dotting for clipping plane.

Non-Semantic

Defines the non-semantic options:

Mark non-semantic annotations

Defines whether non-semantic annotations (datum elements, datum targets, geometrical tolerances, linear and angular
dimensions) are marked with a wavy red line in the specification tree and in the geometry.

By default, this option is not selected.

Grid

Defines the grid options:

Display
Defines whether the grid is displayed.

By default, this option is not selected.

Snap to point
Defines whether annotations are snapped to the grid point.

By default, this option is not selected.

Allow Distortions
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1937
Defines whether grid spacing and graduations are the same horizontally and vertically.

By default, this option is not selected.

H Primary spacing
Defines the grid horizontal spacing.

By default, the value is 100mm.

H Graduations
Defines the grid horizontal graduations.

By default, the number of graduation is 10.

V Primary spacing
Defines the grid vertical spacing, available only if Allow Distortions is selected.

By default, the value is 100mm.

V Graduations
Defines the grid vertical graduations, available only if Allow Distortions is selected.

By default, the number of graduation is 10.

Annotations in Specification Tree

Defines the annotations in specification tree options:

Under Geometric Feature nodes

Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the geometric feature nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view 3D
annotations under the Part Design or Generative Shape Design feature nodes to which they are applied.

By default, this option is not selected.

Under View/Annotation Plane nodes

Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the view/annotation plane nodes in the specification tree. This lets you view
3D annotations under the view node to which they are linked.

By default, this option is not selected.

Under Annotations Set node

Defines that 3D annotations should be displayed under the annotation set node in the specification tree, available only if Under
View/Annotation Plane nodes is selected.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1938

Partial Surface

Defines the partial surface options:

Apply Settings
Defines whether the following settings are applied while creating a partial surface feature.

By default, this option is not selected.

Surface Color
Defines the surface color of the partial surface.

By default, the color is magenta. See the screen capture.

Transparency
Defines the surface color transparency of the partial surface.

By default, the value is 0.

Edge Type
Defines the edge type of the partial surface's border.

By default, the edge type is 1.

Edge Thickness
Defines the edge thickness of the partial surface's border.

By default, the edge thickness is 1.

Edge Color
Defines the edge color of the partial surface's border.

By default, the color is yellow. See the screen capture.

Annotation Parameters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1939

Defines the annotation parameter options:

Display parameters under annotation feature node

Defines that knowledge parameters (such as tolerance values, datum label, etc.) of annotations should be displayed under the
annotation feature node in the specification tree; also defines that feature parameters of dimensions (accessible through the Edit
Generative Parameter command) should be displayed under the dimension feature node in the specification tree.
Note that in order to have the value of the parameters displayed in the specification tree, you need to select the With value
knowledge setting in Tools -> Options -> General -> Parameters and Measure -> Knowledge tab.

By default, this option is not selected.

Surface Normal

Display for shifted profile tolerance

Defines whether the normal of all the selected surfaces are displayed, or not, when a shifted profile tolerance is specified or
queried.

By default, this option is not selected.

3D Annotation Query

Allow query for default annotation (automatic selection mode)

Defines whether the query for default annotation is allowed, or not. This option allows you to highlight the related annotations or
geometrical elements with the selected annotation or the related annotations with the selected geometrical element.

By default, this option is selected.

Hatching, coloring or dotting for clipping plane

Display

Defines whether the clipping plane is displayed with hatching, coloring or dotting, or not.

Note that the same option is available in DMU Tolerancing Review. Modifying this option in DMU Tolerancing Review will modify its
status in Functional Tolerancing & Annotation, and vice-versa.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1940

Constructed Geometry

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Graphic Properties.

● The Limits.

● The Automatic Creation.

Graphic Properties

Defines the graphic properties options:

Surface color
Defines the constructed geometry surface color for plane and cylinder.

By default, the color is light yellow. See the screen capture.

Transparency
Defines the surface color transparency of the constructed geometry.

By default, the value is 128.

Curve type
Defines the constructed geometry curve type.

By default, the curve type is 0.

Curve thickness
Defines the constructed geometry curve thickness.

By default, the curve thickness is 1.

Curve color
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1941
Defines the constructed geometry curve color.

By default, the color is white. See the screen capture.

Point type
Defines the constructed geometry point type.

By default, the point type is a cross symbol. See the screen capture.

Point color
Defines the constructed geometry point color.

By default, the color is white. See the screen capture.

Apply settings
Defines whether all the graphic properties settings are applied or not.

By default, this option is not selected.

Limits

Defines the limit options:

All around overrun

Defines the minimal limit between the constructed geometry and its related geometry.

By default, the value is 10mm.

Automatic Creation

Defines the automatic creation options:

Center point
Defines whether all the center point's constructed geometry is automatically created or not, for circle center, sphere center.

By default, this option is not selected.

Center axis
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1942
Defines whether all the center axis's constructed geometry is automatically created or not, for cylinder, cone.

By default, this option is not selected.

Center plane
Defines whether all the center plane's constructed geometry is automatically created or not, for slot.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1943

Manipulators

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Manipulators.

● The Rotation.

● The Dimension Manipulators.

Manipulators

Defines the manipulator options:

Reference size
Defines the annotation manipulator's size.

By default, the reference size is 2mm.

Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation manipulator is zoomable or not.

By default, this option is selected.

Rotation

Defines the rotation options:

Rotation snap angle

Defines an angle value for rotating elements. This option is used to rotate text elements (text, frame, or leader).

By default, the snap angle value is 15deg.

Automatic snapping
Defines whether the rotation will be snapped to the angle value.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1944

Dimension Manipulators

Defines the dimension manipulator options:

Modify overrun
Defines whether overrun extension lines can be modified during creation or modification.

By default, the creation and modification options are not selected.

Modify blanking
Defines whether blanking can be modified during creation or modification.

By default, the creation option is not selected and the modification option is selected.

Insert text before

Defines whether a text before can be inserted during creation or modification.

By default, the creation and modification options are not selected.

Insert text after

Defines whether a text after can be inserted during creation or modification.

By default, the creation and modification options are not selected.

Move value
Defines whether only the value can be moved during creation or modification.

By default, the creation and modification options are not selected.

Move dimension line

Defines whether only the dimension line can be moved during creation or modification.

By default, the creation and modification options are not selected.

Move dimension line secondary part

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1945

Defines whether only the dimension line secondary part can be moved during creation or modification.

By default, the creation and modification options are not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1946

Dimension

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Dimension Creation.

● The Move.

● The Line-Up.

● The Dimension related to an origin.

Dimension Creation

Defines the dimension creation options:

Dimension following the cursor (CTRL toggles)

Defines whether the dimension line is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process or not.

By default, this option is not selected.

Constant offset between dimension line and geometry

Defines whether the distance between the created dimension and the geometry remains the same when you move the geometry or
not.

By default, this option is not selected.

Default dimension line/geometry distance

Defines the value at which the dimension is created from the geometry.
If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry, you can define the value at which the dimension will remain
positioned.

By default, the distance is 5mm.

Create dimensions on circle's or cylinder's or revolute's

Defines the dimension you will create between a circle and another element will be either on the circle center (or axis cylinder) or
on the circle edge.

By default, the circle center (or axis cylinder) option is selected.

Move
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1947

Defines the annotation move options:

Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles)

Defines whether the dimension will be snapped .

By default, this option is not selected.

Additionally click the Configure... button. In the Configure snapping of dimension dialog box, specify whether the dimension
should be snapped on the grid, or whether the dimension value should be located at its default position between symbols (it will
work only if the cursor is between the symbols), or both.

By default, this On grid option is selected.

Move only selected sub-part

Defines whether only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc...) will be moved.

By default, this option is not selected.

Line-Up

Defines the line-up options:

Align stacked dimension values

Defines whether the values of a group of stacked dimensions are aligned on the value of the smallest dimension of the group.

By default, this option is not selected.

Align cumulated dimension values

Defines whether the values of a group of cumulated dimensions are aligned on the value of the smallest dimension of the group.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1948

By default, this option is not selected.

Automatically add a funnel

Defines whether the value of a cumulated dimension requires a funnel added automatically to be displayed correctly, available only
if Align cumulated dimension values is selected.

By default, this option is not selected.

Dimension related to an origin

Defines the dimension origin options:

Use Dimension Origin Symbol

Defines whether the dimension origin symbol is used.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1949

Annotation

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Annotation Creation.

● The Geometrical Tolerance.

● The Capture Creation.

Annotation Creation

Defines the annotation creation options:

Annotation following the cursor (CTRL toggles)

Defines whether the annotation is positioned according to the cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process or not.

By default, this option is not selected.

Geometrical Tolerance

Extension line length

Defines the extension line length between the geometrical frame and the its leader.

By default, the length is 0mm.

Capture Creation

Manage the visibility of Part instances, bodies and geometrical sets

Defines whether the visibility status of part instances in products or bodies and geometrical sets in parts is managed by captures or
not.

The same option is available in the Capture Attributes tab of the capture properties.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1950

Tolerances

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Angular Size.

● The Linear Size.

● The Geometrical Tolerance.

Angular Size

Defines the angular size options:

Default upper tolerance value

Defines the default upper tolerance value for angular size.

By default, the upper tolerance is 0.1deg.

Symmetric lower limit

Defines whether the default lower tolerance value is symmetric in relation to the default upper tolerance value.

By default, this option is selected.

Default lower tolerance value

Defines the default lower tolerance value for angular size, enable when Symmetric lower limit is not selected.

By default, the lower tolerance is -0.1deg.

Numerical value increment

Defines the increment for angular size numerical value.

By default, the increment is 1deg.

General tolerance class

Defines the general tolerance class for angular size, according to the selected standard in Tolerancing Standard.

By default, the general tolerance class is ISO 2768 - f.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1951

Linear Size

Defines the linear size options:

Default upper tolerance value

Defines the default upper tolerance value for linear size.

By default, the upper tolerance is 0.1mm.

Symmetric lower limit

Defines whether the default lower tolerance value is symmetric in relation to the default upper tolerance value.

By default, this option is selected.

Default lower tolerance value

Defines the default lower tolerance value for linear size, enable when Symmetric lower limit is not selected.

By default, the lower tolerance is -0.1mm.

Numerical value increment

Defines the increment for linear size numerical value.

By default, the increment is 0.01mm.

Default tabulated value

Defines the default tabulated for linear size.

By default, the tabulated value is H7.

General tolerance class

Defines the general tolerance class for angular size, according to the selected standard in Tolerancing Standard.

By default, the general tolerance class is ISO 2768 - f.

Geometrical Tolerance
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1952

Defines the geometrical tolerance options:

Default numerical value

Defines the default numerical for geometrical tolerance.

By default, the numerical value is 0.1mm.

Numerical value increment

Defines the increment for the to geometrical tolerance numerical value.

By default, the numerical increment value is 0.01mm.

Precision
Defines the geometrical tolerance precision after the numerical separator.

By default, the precision is 0.01.

Separator
Defines the geometrical tolerance symbol used as numerical separator.

By default, the separator is a comma ",".

Display trailing zeros

Defines whether "0"s complete the number of digit displayed after the separator, according to the precision.

By default, this option is not selected.

Display leading zeros

Defines whether the "0" before the numerical separator, when value is less than 1, is displayed.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1953

View/Annotation Plane

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The View/Annotation Plane Associativity.

● The View/Annotation Plane Display.

View/Annotation Plane Associativity

Defines the View/Annotation Plane associativity options:

Create views associative to geometry

Creates views associative to the geometry, so that views and their annotations are automatically updated when the geometry is
modified.

By default, this option is selected.

View/Annotation Plane Display

Defines the View/Annotation Plane display options:

Current view axis display

Defines whether the active annotation plane axis system is displayed.

By default, this option is selected.

Zoomable
Defines whether the annotation plane axis is zoomable.

By default, this option is selected.

Visualization of the profile in the current view

Defines whether the view/annotation plane profile on the part/product is displayed.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1954

Shape
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Shape category in the left-hand box.

3. Click the workbench to be customized.

FreeStyle Shaper, Optimizer & Profiler

Automotive Body In White Fastening
Generative Shape Design
Shape Sculptor

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1955

FreeStyle

This page deals with FreeStyle Shaper, FreeStyle Optimizer, and FreeStyle Profiler options in the following tab:
● The General tab lets you set the general options.

● The Manipulators tab lets you set the control point options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1956

General

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Geometry.

● The Auto Detection.

● The Display.

● The Tuning.

● The Selection focus.

Geometry

Defines the geometry options:

Tolerances
Defines the user-defined tolerances to every element to be created and modified within a FreeStyle workbench or the Automotive
Class A workbench.

Constraint

Defines the continuity variation. In this case if the continuity is over the set value the element is not created/modified.
This value cannot be modified in P1-mode.

By default, the value is 0.1

Deviation

Defines the deviation tolerance value used when converting elements using the Converter Wizard for example (see tasks
Approximating/Segmenting Procedural Curves and Approximating/Segmenting Procedural Surfaces within the FreeStyle
Shaper, Optimizer, and Profiler User's Guide). In this case you accept the conversion up to the set tolerance value.

By default, the value is 0.1

Order
Defines the maximum allowed order along the U (and V) directions for each curve segment and surface patch. This maximum order
value ranges from 5 to 16 included, in a given direction.
This value cannot be modified in P1-mode.

By default, the value is 16

Auto Detection
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1957

Defines the auto detection options:

Coordinates
Defines whether the point coordinates are displayed as the pointer moves along the geometry.

By default, this option is not selected.

Search Dressing
Defines whether the control points on geometry detected with the pointer are displayed when using the Snap on Cpt (snap on
control points) option from the Dashboard.

By default, this option is selected.

Display

Defines the display options:

Control Points
Defines whether the control points are displayed on the geometry. See Displaying Control Points Temporarily in the FreeStyle
Shaper, Optimizer, and Profiler User's Guide).

By default, this option is not selected.

Continuity
Defines whether the continuities are displayed at every connection between elements (such as blend and match curves and
surfaces, fill surfaces, and so forth).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1958

By default, this option is selected.

Curvature
Defines whether the curvature texts are displayed on an element (such as blend and match curves and surfaces, and so forth).

By default, this option is not selected.

Order
Defines whether the order number is displayed along the U (for curves) or U and V directions (for surfaces).

By default, this option is selected.

Contact Point
Defines whether the contact point is displayed at every connection between connected elements (such as blend and match curves
and surfaces, and so forth).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1959

By default, this option is selected.

Tension
Defines whether the tension manipulators are displayed oat every connection between connecting elements (such as blend and
match curves and surfaces, and so forth).
This option is P2-only.

By default, this option is not selected.

Tuning

Defines the tuning options, these options are P2-only:

Coefficient
Defines the coefficient value used when manipulating views or geometry.

By default, the value is 0.1

Rotation Step
Defines the rotation step value used when manipulating views or geometry.

By default, the value is 1.000

Selection focus
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1960

Defines the selection focus options

Full Cross
Defines whether a full cross is displayed.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1961

Manipulators

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Translator properties.

● The Mesh properties.

Translator properties

Defines the control points manipulator appearance.

Color
Defines the color of the control points manipulator.

By default, the color is green as shown in the screen capture.

Cross

Defines the cross representation for the control points manipulator. Four representations are available:

● a line

● an arrow

● a triangle

● nothing

By default, the direction representation is a line.

Center

Defines the center representation for the control points manipulator. Three representations are available:

● a plus

● a point

● a circle
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1962

By default, the center representation is a point.

Discrete Manipulation

Defines whether the control points manipulator jumps from the control point position to the cursor position.

By default, this option is not selected.

Mesh properties

Defines the control points mesh options.

Color U
Defines the color along U of the control points mesh.

By default, the color is green as shown in the screen capture.

Type U
Defines the line type along U for the control points mesh. Seven types are available:

By default, the type representation is a solid line.

Thickness U
Defines the line thickness along U for the control points mesh.

By default, the line thickness number is 1

Color V
Defines the color along V of the control points mesh.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1963

By default, the color is green as shown in the screen capture.

Type V
Defines the line type along V for the control points mesh. Seven types are available:

By default, the type representation is a solid line.

Thickness V
Defines the line thickness along V for the control points mesh.

By default, the line thickness value is 1.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1964

Automotive Body In White Fastening

This page deals with the Automotive BiW Fastening options:

● The General tab lets you define the application and extract parameters, as well as the export and report
directories.
● The Display tab lets you define the display options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1965

General

This page deals with the following settings:

● Setting Up Parameters

● Defining the Export Directory

● Defining the Report Directory

● Setting Up the Extract Parameters

● Allowing the Creation of unsaved data from Enovia

Setting Up Parameters

Default Standard File

The Default Standard File path corresponds to the path of the file where the default standards are stored.

You can change the path by clicking the Browse icon .

Automatic Standard Import

You can automatically import the standard by clicking on the Automatic Standard Import check box.
If this option is activated, any BiW feature creation (BiWJoint, BiW JointBody, BiW Fastener) automatically
imports the standard.
By default, this option is selected.

Check the Standard File Consistency at Import Time

You can also select the Check the Standard File Consistency at Import Time option to check the
consistency of the standard values when importing the standard file (whose path is mentioned above)
If the standard file is not valid, it cannot be imported and an error message is issued.
By default, this option is not selected.

Defining the Export Directory

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1966
The Export default directory is the directory where the export file is stored.

You can change the by clicking the Browse icon .

Defining the Report Directory

The Report default directory is the directory where the report file is stored.

You can change the by clicking the Browse icon.

Setting Up Extract Parameters

Fixed Drawing Spot Size

You can define a fixed size for the 2D drawing spots: check the Fixed Drawing Spot Size button and define a
diameter value.
As a consequence, all spots in the 2D document will have this diameter, whatever their size in the 3D
document.
By default, this option is not selected.

Angular Tolerance
You can define a user Angular Tolerance.
By default, this option is set to 90deg.

Include View Reverse Direction

You can check the Include View Reverse Direction checkbox to visualize 2D reverse spots.
By default, this option is unchecked.
For further information,, refer to the Drafting Integration chapter.

Allow creation Enovia unsaved data

You can allow the creation of unsaved data from Enovia by clicking the Allow button.
If you do not select this option, commands will be grayed out in Enovia V5.
By default, this option is not selected.
For further information, refer to the Optimal CATIA PLM Usability for Automotive BiW Fastening chapter.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1967

Display

To improve the fasteners' visualization, the following settings are not taken into
account when opening the model. To apply these settings, open the Display tab
and click OK.

This page deals with the following settings:

● 3D Fasteners All Display Options

● Shape

● ID

● Fastener Parameters

● Fastener Axis Orientation

● Support Contact Zone Material Orientation

● Contact Zones

3D Fasteners All Display Options

Click the Unset All button to uncheck all the options, except for the Shape Representation option. Similarly

click the Set All button to check all options.

These options apply to all the fasteners contained in the product.

Shape

Click the Show button to visualize the fastener's shape.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1968

ID

Click the Show button to visualize the fastener's ID.

By default, this option is not selected.

Fastener Parameters

Click the Show button to visualize the fastener's shape.

By default, this option is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1969

Associating a symbol to a specification

● a process type (by default): the symbol is displayed according to the symbol code assigned to the Fastener
Process Type in the standard file. By default, if no symbol is assigned to the process type in standard, or if
there is no imported standard, the symbol is (101)

● an unspecified type (Unspec): the default symbol is displayed. It can be modified through the

Properties contextual command.

● the thickness count: the symbol is displayed according to symbol code assigned to the Thickness Count in

the standard file.

By default, if no symbol is assigned to the thickness count in standard, or if there is no imported standard,

the symbol is:

for 1 thicknesses (1)

for 2 thicknesses (2T)

for 3 thicknesses (3T)

for 4 thicknesses (4T)

for more than 4 thicknesses

● None: no symbol is visualized.

Once the symbol is associated with a specification, it can no longer be modified when editing the fastener's
properties, except for the Unspecified type.
The following example shows how to define a graphic symbol (here Laser process type) associated to a
thickness count.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1970

For 1T:

For 2T:

For 3T:

For 4T:

Associating a color to a specification

● a process category (by default): the color is displayed according to the color code assigned to the Fastener

Process Category in the standard file.

By default, if no color is assigned to the Process Category or no standard is imported, the default color is:

Yellow for Welding

Cyan for Adhesive
Magenta for Sealant
Green for BiW Mechanical
White for Unspecified

● an unspecified type (Unspec): the color is white whatever the Process Category.

● None: no symbol color is visualized.

● In this case, the color associated with the process category will be transparent.
● Once the color is associated with a specification, it can not longer be modified
when editing the fastener's properties, except for the Unspecified type.

Associating marks to the specification

● Robustness
● Regulation
● Finish
● None

Note that:

● 1 is for assigning a mark

● 0 is for assigning no mark

For instance assign the 1 mark code for the Robustness parameter and which value set by default is C:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1971

You will get this Mark:

In this case all the Fasteners with the Robustness specification will get the mark symbol.
In the Standard file, Marks are assigned by default:
● For Robustness parameter ("Safety") enter the C value.
● For Regulation parameter ("Norm A") enter the A value.
● For Finish parameter ("Class A") enter the A value.

Fastener Axis Orientation

Click the Show button to visualize the fastener's axis orientation.

By default, this option is not selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1972

● K Axis Only:
❍ if checked, only the K axis is visualized on the fastener's location.

❍ If unchecked, a trihedron showing the fastener's axis system (I, J, K) is visualized on the fastener's
location.

For a curve bead, the location corresponds to the start point.

By default, this option is selected.

● On each Discretization Point: for a curve bead, it enables to visualize the axis (K or I, j, K) on each
discretization point.
❍ if checked: the fastener axis (K or I, j, K) is visualized on each discretization point of the curve bead.

❍ if unchecked, the the fastener axis (K or I, j, K) is visualized on the start point of the curve bead only.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1973

By default, this option is not selected.

Support Contact Zone Material Orientation

Click the Show button to visualize the material orientation of the support contact zone.
By default, this option is not selected.

Contact Zones

Show Projected Points

Select this option to visualize the fastener's projected points.
By default, this option is not selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1974

Show Material Orientation

Select this option to visualize the fastener's material orientation.
By default, this option is not selected.

Show Thickness Stack-Up Order

Select this option to visualize the fastener's thickness stack-up order.
By default, this option is not selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1975

● In certain cases where the ordering thickness crossing criteria cannot be applied,
some visualization attributes are not displayed.
For further information, refer to Ordering Thickness Crossing Criteria chapter
from the Report chapter.
● You can define the thickness and the material orientation for a GSD feature
using the Thin Parts Attribute command in the Generative Shape Design
workbench.
Refer to the Applying a Thickness chapter in the Generative Shape Design
documentation.
● The options listed above can also be accessed using the fasteners' properties via
the contextual menu.
Refer to the Editing the Fasteners' Properties chapter.

Note that, in visualization mode:

● when selecting at least one of the options contained either in the Support
Contact zone Material Orientation or in the Contact Zones within the
Properties dialog box,
● and when selecting Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Assembly
Design > General, the Automatic Switch to Design Mode option,

then all joint components are automatically switch to Design mode.

The Automatic Switch to Design Mode option must be activated to visualize the
desired options.
If you do not wish to have all joint components automatically switch to Design
mode, then uncheck the options mentioned above.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1976

Customizing

This page deals with the Generative Shape Design options:

● The General tab lets you define the tolerant modeling, axes visualization and groups options.

● The Work On Support tab lets you define the work on support and the work on support 3D options.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1977

General Settings

This page deals with the following settings:

● Tolerant Modeling

● Axes Visualization

● Groups

● Stacked Analysis

Tolerant Modeling
This command is only available with the Generative Shape Design product.

Input parameters
● Merging distance: default value defining the distance below which elements are to be joined, healed or

extracted.

● This option is available with the following commands: Join, Healing, Extract, and
Multiple Extract.

● Extract and multiple extract commands have a particular behavior: refer to the
corresponding chapters to have further information.

By default, this option is set to 0.001mm.

● Tolerant laydown: in case the lay down of an input guide on a surface fails, you can check the Tolerant

laydown button. When activated, a fixed lay down tolerance of 0.1mm is applied.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1978

This option is available with the following commands: Parallel Curve, Sweep, Multi-
Sections Surface, Blend, Split, Curve Smooth, Fill, Extrapol, Trim.

By default, this option is not selected.

Open the TolerantLaydown.CATPart document.
Here is a scenario with the Sweep command.

1. Create a tolerant swept surface and define a Deviation from guide of 0.1 mm.

In our scenario we created a swept surface using an implicit linear profile and the ''two limits'' sub-type.

We created Curve.1 and Curve.2 as the guide curves.

2. Create a parallel curve of Curve.1 using the swept surface as the support.

The creation of the parallel curve fails.

An error message opens informing you that the guide curve does not lie on the swept surface.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1979

3. Check the Tolerant laydown option.

4. Perform step 2 again.

The creation of the parallel curve is successful.

It is advised not to use a wire that lies on the edge of the sweep when working with
the Tolerant laydown option.

Output parameters
● Choose the Continuity Type:

❍ None: deactivates the smoothing result

❍ Tangency: enhances the current continuity to tangent continuity

❍ Curvature: enhances the current continuity to curvature continuity

This option is available with the following commands: Project and Parallel Curve.

By default, the option is set to None.

● You can specify a Maximum deviation to set the allowed deviation between the initial element and the

smoothed element by entering a value or using the spinners.

By default, this option is set to 0.001mm.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1980

This option is available with the following commands: Project, Parallel Curve,
Sweep, Multi-Sections Surface, and Curve Smooth.
For the Sweep and Multi-Sections Surface commands, only the Deviation
parameter can be defined from Tools -> Options (the Angular correction
parameter cannot be defined here). The Deviation and Angular correction will be
activated only if the smoothing type is set to Tangency or Curvature.

Axes Visualization

Uncheck the Axes visualization limited to the bounding box of the input button to visualize an infinite axis

in the 3D geometry.

By default this option is selected.

Option checked Option unchecked

Groups

Check the Integration of created features as group inputs option if you want each new feature to be
included as an input in an existing group and remain visible in the specification tree.
If you uncheck this option, created features will not included in the group and will be hidden in the group tree
(expand the group to be able to see it).
By default this option is not selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1981

● This option is only available when creating a new feature.

● It is only available for features accessible in the Generative Shape Design
workbench. All other features will not be included in the group even if the option
is checked.

For further information, refer to the Managing Groups chapter.

Stacked Analysis

Check the Stacked analysis default behavior set as temporary option to automatically create a temporary
analysis when checking connections between surfaces or curves.
By default this option is not selected.

This option is only available with the Offset command.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1982

Working With a Support

This page deals with the following settings:

● Work On Support

● Work On Support 3D

Work On Support

● Define the First direction scale (H for horizontal), by setting Primary spacing and Graduations values.

By default, this option is set to 100mm for primary spacing and 10 graduations.

● If you wish, you can define another scale for the Second direction scale (V for vertical), thus allowing

distortions of the grid. Check the Allow distortions option to activate the Primary spacing and

Graduations fields of the second direction.

By default, this option is not selected.

For further information, refer to Working With a Support.

Work On Support 3D
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1983

Grids definition
Define the default values for the grids, by defining Labels names and Primary Spacing values for each
direction.
By default, the Labels are set to X, Y, and Z for the first, second and third directions, and the Primary
Spacing is set to 100mm for all directions.

Grids customization
● Define the Grid labels unit, that is the coefficient of division for all straight lines units.

For example, the grid label unit is set to 1 and the X label for one line is set to 500. If you modify the grid

label unit to 10, the X label will be 50.

By default, this option is set to 1.

● Define the Automatic Scale Factor, that is the scale to be used when the grid becomes too small. The
factor is comprised between 2 to 10.

By default, this option is set to 10.

● Define the Maximum lines number to be displayed on the screen, from 70 up to 500 lines.

By default, this option is set to 70.

All these values will be used as the default values when creating a support.
For further information, refer to Working With a 3D Support.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1984

Shape Sculptor

This page deals with the general options:

● Curve Sampling

Curve Sampling

Custom Settings
Check Custom Settings to enable the modification of parameters that control the precision of the curves.
By default, this option is unchecked.

Chordal Deviation
Define the Chordal Deviation by entering a value or using the spinners.
By default, this option is set to 0.001.

Segment Length
Define the Segment Length by entering a value or using the spinners.
By default, this option is set to 0.001.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1985

Analysis & Simulation

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Analysis & Simulation category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize solution options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select one of these tabs to customize Analysis & Simulation options or select a sub-category in

the left-hand box to access specific workbench options.

General
Graphics
Post Processing
Quality
External Storage
Reporting
Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1986

General

This task explains how to customize Analysis and Simulation general settings.

The General tab deals with the following settings:

● Default Analysis Case

● Specification Tree

● Load Management

Default Analysis Case

Define a default starting analysis case

This option lets you define a default analysis case that will be inserted each time you enter the Generative

Structural Analysis workbench or the Advanced Meshing Tools workbench.

Before defining a default analysis case using Tools > Options command, make sure you started the Analysis &

Simulation (Generative Structural Analysis or Advanced Meshing Tools) workbench at least once.

The default starting analysis case is Static Analysis. You can decide that the new default case will be:

● Static Analysis
● Frequency Analysis
● Free Frequency Analysis
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1987

The cases will only be displayed if an analysis workbench has been loaded at least once because the

listed cases are linked to the Analysis workbenches last loaded.

By default, this option is deactivated.

Specification Tree

Show parameters

This option lets you display parameters in the specification tree.

Option deactivated Option activated

By default, this option is deactivated.

Show relations

This option lets you display relations in the specification tree.

By default, this option is deactivated.

Load Management
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1988

Pointed documents not loaded

By default, this option is deactivated.

Disable Product Structure cache system

By default, this option is deactivated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1989

Graphics

This page deals with the following options:

● Nodes

● Elements

Nodes

This option lets you select the symbol and color you wish to assign to the node elements.

● Symbol: lets you choose the symbol that represents a node element.
● Color: lets you define the color of the chosen symbol.

Elements

This option lets you define:

● 1D elements shrink: lets you define the shrink visualization of 1D elements.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1990

● 2D elements shrink: lets you define the shrink visualization of 2D elements.

● 3D elements shrink: lets you define the shrink visualization of 3D elements.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1991

You can modify the shrink value from 1.00 (default value) to 0.50 (minimum value).

By default, these values are equal to 1 (i.e. no shrink visualization).

● Edge size limit: lets you define the mesh tolerance under which two circles is added to the

BAR visualization.

By default, this value is equal to 0.01mm.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1992

Post Processing

This task explains how to customize Analysis and Simulation post processing image settings.

● Save as new template

● Image edition

● Text Properties

Save As New Template Folder

You can define the location of the SPMUserTemplateImageDefinition.xml file or manage this file.

This file contains all the generated images that have been saved with the Save As New Template

contextual menu.

Output directory

This option lets you choose the directory in which you want to store the .xml file.

By default, this field is empty.

Output file name

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1993

This option indicates the name of the associated .xml file. You can rename or remove the stored images.

Images must have been saved with the Save As New Template contextual menu and a .CATAnalysis

document must be launched (in the opposite case, the Manage button is not available).

If you click the Manage button, the Available Images dialog box appears.

● Remove...: lets you remove the selected images (multi-selection is available).

● Rename...: lets you rename a selected image.

● Remove All: lets remove all the images that are stored in the xml file.

All modifications are updated only if you click OK in the Options dialog box.

For example: if you change the path directory after managing images and without clicking OK in the

Options dialog box, your modifications are not preserved.

Image Edition

Automatic preview mode

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1994

This option lets you preview automatically the changes you done in the Image Edition dialog box.

If this option is deactivated, the Preview button will be available in the Image Edition dialog box: the

visualization will be launched only if you click the Preview button.

This option may be useful if you work with large models because some parameters could take time to be taken

into account.

In this case, deactivate the Automatic preview mode option.

By default, this option is activated.

Text Properties

You can set the text properties in case of:

● Text images

● Text displayed when you move pointer over a displayed image.

For example:

❍ over a Fringe image:

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1995

❍ over a Symbol image:

● Symbol images with Text option.

Size
This option lets you specify or not the size of the text.

● Default: lets you visualize the text values with a default size.

● Specify: lets you specify the size of the text values.

Example with a text image type:

Default size Specified size (equal to 3)

By default, the Default option is selected.

Stacking
This option lets you specify the stacking of the text.

● Horizontal: lets you display the text horizontally.

● Vertical: lets you display the text vertically.

Example with a text image type:

Horizontal stacking (default) Vertical stacking

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1996

By default, the Horizontal option is selected.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1997

Quality

This page deals with the following options:

● Export Default Directory

● Default Standard File

● Quality Criteria

Export Default Directory

This option lets you define the default directory in which the criteria configuration have been saved.

By default, the Export Default Directory field is empty.

While a default directory is not defined, you cannot use the Export Criteria option in the Quality

Analysis functionality in the Advanced Meshing Tools workbench (for more details, refer to

Advanced Meshing Tools User's Guide - User Tasks - Quality Analysis - Analyzing Element Quality).

Default Standard File

This option lets you define the list of quality criteria that will be used by default.

By default, the Default Standard File field is empty and so all the Quality Criteria are taken into
account.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1998

Quality Criteria

This frame lets you visualize the quality criteria that are taken into account and their limit values between:

● good and poor elements

● poor and bad elements

By default, all the Quality Criteria are taken into account.

The limit values change as you define the Default Standard File option.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 1999

External Storage

This page deals with the following options:

● Default CATAnalysisResults File Folder

● Default CATAnalysisComputations File Folder

● Default Temporary External Storage Folder

● Computations Data Management on Save

● File Name Management on Save

Default CATAnalysisResults File Folder

This option lets you change the default directory of the CATAnalysisResults file.

● Last used: lets you choose the last used directory.*

● Current CATAnalysis file folder: lets you choose the same directory as the current CATAnalysis
directory.*
● Local host temporary folder: lets you choose the temporary directory.
● Always...: lets you define a default directory that will be always the same. You have to define the

path directory using the button.*

* If the directory is undefined or does not exist anymore when generating the result file, the

CATAnalysisResults file will be created in the Local host temporary folder.

By default, the Last used option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2000

Default CATAnalysisComputations File Folder

This option lets you change the default directory of the CATAnalysisComputations file.

● Last used: lets you choose the last used directory.*

● Current CATAnalysis file folder: lets you choose the same directory as the current CATAnalysis
directory.*
● Local host temporary folder: lets you choose the temporary directory.
● Always...: lets you define a default directory that will be always the same. You have to define the

path directory using the button.*

* If the directory is undefined or does not exist anymore when generating the computation file, the

CATAnalysisComputations file will be created in the Local host temporary folder.

By default, the Last used option is activated.

Default Temporary External Storage Folder

This option lets you specify the default directory of temporary data.

● Last used: lets you choose the last used directory.*

● Local host temporary folder: lets you choose the temporary directory.
● Always...: lets you define a default directory that will be always the same. You have to define the

path directory using the button.*

* If the directory is undefined or does not exist anymore when generating temporary data, the data will
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2001

be created in the Local host temporary folder.

By default, the Last used option is activated.

Computation Data Management on Save

Automatic clearing of computation data

This option lets you set the automatic clearing of computation data when saving CATAnalysis documents.

If this option is activated, CATAnalysisComputations files (and related temporary data) are deleted when

the associated CATAnalysis document is saved.

This option is not available for SMARTEAM users.

By default, this option is deactivated.

File Name Management on Save

Automatic renaming of CATAnalysisResults and CATAnalysisComputations files

This option lets you set the automatic renaming of CATAnalysisResults and CATAnalysisComputations files

when saving a CATAnalysis document for the first time or under a new name and/or in a different folder.

If this option is activated, CATAnalysisResults and CATAnalysisComputations files are renamed according

to the name of the associated CATAnalysis document when it is saved.

This setting is taken into account only if all the documents are in a file-based environment

(Folder or DLName document environment).

For more details about document environments, please refer to Customizing - Customizing

Settings - General - Document in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

By default, this option is deactivated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2002

Reporting

This page deals with the following options:

● Image Size

● Image Format

● Background Image

● Temporary Output Directory

These settings will be useful with the following functionalities:

● Generate Report command,

● Generate Advanced Report command,
● Report contextual menu.

Image Size

This option lets you customize the size of the generated images.

● Default (600x450): lets you choose the default size (600x450 pixels).
● Specify size: lets you specify the size of generated images.
❍ Width: lets you define the image width (in pixels).
❍ Height: lets you define the image height (in pixels).

By default, the Default (600x450) option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2003

Image Format

This option lets you customize the format of the generated images.

● Format: lets you choose between the following format:

❍ JPEG: File interchange Format, medium quality (.jpeg).
❍ JPEG_HIGH: File interchange Format, high quality (.jpeg).
❍ PNG: Portable Network Graphics (.png)
❍ BMP: Windows Bitmap (.bmp)

By default, the default format is JPEG (medium quality).

Background Image

This option lets you customize the background image of the report file.

● Default (Dassault Systèmes logo): lets you choose the logo of Dassault Systèmes as background
image.
● Picture: lets you select an other image as background image.

To change the background image, click the button.

By default, the Default (Dassault Systèmes logo) option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2004

Temporary Output Directory

This option lets you set the temporary output directory in which the contextual report file will be stored

(report file generated using the Report contextual menu).

To change the directory, click the button.

By default, the temporary output directory is the TEMP environment variable.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2005

Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly

This page deals with Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly options in the following tabs:
● The General tab lets you set the general options.

● The Fastening tab lets you define the fastening options.

● The Tolerancing tab lets you set the tolerancing options.

● The Contacts tab lets you define contact options.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2006

General

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The File Out Folder.

● The Feature Colors.

● The Meshes.

● The Node and Point Filter.

File Out Folder

Defines the file out folder paths:

External Result Path

Defines the folder path where external results should be saved.

By default, the value of the CATTemp variable.

Computation Result Path

Defines the folder path where computation results should be saved.

By default, the value of the CATTemp variable.

Temporary Result Path

Defines the folder path where temporary results should be saved.

By default, the value of the CATTemp variable.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2007

Feature Colors

Defines the tolerance analysis feature colors:

Rigid Support
Defines the default color of rigid supports.

By default, the color is magenta. See the screen capture.

Flexible Support
Defines the default color of flexible supports.

By default, the color is magenta. See the screen capture.

Mechanical joint
Defines the default color of mechanical joints.

By default, the color is light blue. See the screen capture.

Fastening
Defines the default color of fastening.

By default, the color is blue. See the screen capture.

Contact
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2008

Defines the default color of contacts.

By default, the color is green. See the screen capture.

Meshes

Defines the meshes options:

Maximum distance between geometry and point

Defines the maximum distance allowed between a point you defined as a node and the part geometry.
Beyond this distance, the point is not taken into account when the mesh is generated automatically.

By default, the value is 5mm.

Node and Point Filter

Defines the node and point compatibility with tolerance analysis features:

● Activate Filter during selection: the application allows you to select nodes and points compatible with
the tolerance analysis feature.
● Activate Filter during creation: the application allows you to select nodes and points compatible with
the tolerance analysis feature.
● Deactivate Filter: the application checks the validity of the tolerance analysis features when operating
the computation.

By default, the Activate Filter during selection option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2009

Fastening

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Spot Welding.

● The Riveting.

● The Bolting.

● The Spot Gluing.

Spot Welding

Defines the spot welding options:

Joint type before welding

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent spot welding before a spot welding activity:

● Point
● Planar

By default, the Point representation is selected.

Joint type after welding

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent spot welding after a spot welding activity:

● Revolute
● Spherical: only when Point is selected in Joint type before welding.

By default, the Revolute representation is selected.

Riveting
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2010

Defines the riveting options:

Joint type before riveting

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent riveting before a riveting activity:

● Point
● Planar
● Spherical
● Revolute

By default, the Point representation is selected.

Joint type after riveting

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent riveting after a riveting activity:

● Revolute.
● Spherical: only when Point or Spherical is selected in Joint type before riveting.

By default, the Spherical representation is selected.

Bolting

Defines the bolting options:

Joint type before bolting

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent bolting before a bolting activity:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2011

● Point
● Planar
● Spherical
● Revolute

By default, the Point representation is selected.

Joint type after bolting

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent bolting after a bolting activity:

● Revolute.
● Spherical: only when Point or Spherical is selected in Joint type before bolting.

By default, the Spherical representation is selected.

Spot Gluing

Defines the spot gluing options:

Joint type before gluing

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent spot gluing before a spot gluing activity:

● Point
● Planar

By default, the Point representation is selected.

Joint type after gluing

Defines the mechanical joint taken into account to represent spot gluing after a spot gluing activity:

● Revolute
● Spherical: only when Point is selected in Joint type before gluing.

By default, the Revolute representation is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2012

Tolerancing

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Conversion Range.

● The Tolerance Translation Reduction Coefficient.

● The Minimum Variance.

Conversion Range

Defines the conversion range options:

Range
Defines the range value to switch between tolerance interval and statistics law.
For example, with a range value of 3 and applied to a normal law, 99.73% of measures contained in the
tolerance interval represent the statistics law field.

By default, the range is 3.

Tolerance Translation Reduction Coefficient

Defines the tolerance translation reduction coefficient options:

Coefficient Value
Defines the coefficient value to translate functional tolerances due to form uncertainty in deviation point grid.

By default, the coefficient value is 1.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2013

Minimum Variance

Defines the minimum variance options:

Minimum Variance
Defines the percentage value of minimum variance to translate functional tolerances.

By default, the minimum variance is 50%.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2014

Contact

This page deals with the options concerning:

● The Contact Management Threshold.

● The Links Creation Mode.

Contact Management Threshold

Those thresholds determine whether a Force or a Clearance is valid or not (red light) or
neglected (orange light).

Force +
Force -Clearance +
Clearance -

If the red threshold covers the orange threshold, the orange threshold is no longer relevant
and all values beyond the orange threshold are seen as invalid.

Force + Force -
Clearance - Clearance +
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2015

By default, the values are set as shown above.

Links Creation Mode

Defines the contact link creation mode:

Automatic
Defines whether the links creation can be automatic.
Using the automatic mode, the application takes into account the appropriate contacts around a fastening
element.
Otherwise, you must define the list of contacts taken into account by a given fastening element.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2016

Machining
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Machining category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize solution options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select one of these tabs to customize Machining options.

General
Resources
Operation
Output
Program
Photo/Video

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2017

General
This document explains how to customize general settings for Machining products.

Select the General tab, which is divided up into areas.

Parameters in this area... Allow you to customize...

Performance settings for optimized performance
Tree Display display of the specification tree
Color and Highlight colors of displayed geometry and parameters
Tool Path Replay tool display during tool path replay
Complementary Geometry handling of geometry necessary for manufacturing
Design Changes use of the Smart NC mode and enhanced detection of design
changes.

Performance

Click the Optimize button in order to automatically set a number of the Machining options for optimized performance. These
options are listed in the Information dialog box that appears:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2018

If you click Yes, these options will be set as described in the dialog box. Note that, if needed, you may locally reset any of
these options.
If you click No, the options will remain with their current settings.

The Information box also lists some recommendations for manually setting other options that have an influence on
performance.

Tree Display
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2019

● Select the check box if you want the status of activities in the tree to be updated automatically.
● If this check box is not selected, you can display the status of one or more selected activities in the tree using Display

Status of Selected Activities in the Auxiliary Commands toolbar.

If this check box is not selected, performance is improved.

By default, the check box is not selected.

Color and Highlight

● Select the colors to be used for identifying the various manufacturing entities by means of the combos.
Note that for Geometry that is not found or not up to date, you can select the colors used to display the valuated
parameters in the corresponding Operation or Feature dialog boxes.
● For certain entities, you can select the corresponding check box to use highlighting.
Performance is improved when all the Highlight check boxes are selected.

Tool Path Replay

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2020

Display tool near cursor position on tool path

Select this check box if you want to display the tool near your cursor position on the trajectory during a tool path replay.

You can display the tool at a specific point by clicking on the tool path. The tool will then be positioned on the nearest
computed point on the trajectory. To remove the tool from that position, just click anywhere on the tool or tool path.
Please note that, as from Release 15, this positioning capability is available even when the check box is not selected.

Display tool center instead of tool tip

Select this check box if you want to display the tool center point instead of the tool tip during a tool path replay.

Display circles

Select this check box if you want to display each circular trajectory as a circular arc instead of a set of discretization points.
The extremities of the circular arc are indicated by means of 'O' symbols.
This allows better control of the Point by Point replay mode, where it is necessary to make several interactions to replay a
circle (because of its representation by a set of points). With the graphic representation as a circle, only one interaction is
necessary to perform the replay.

By default, these check boxes are not selected.

Color of feedrates

Select the colors to be used for identifying the various feedrate types by means of the combos. The selected colors will be
displayed in the Different colors replay mode.

Complementary Geometry
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2021

Select the check box to create a CATPart dedicated to manufacturing-specific geometry in the Product List of the PPR tree.

By default, the check box is not selected.

Design Changes

Smart NC mode

Select this check box to activate the Smart NC mode. In this mode, an image of the geometry selected in machining
operations is kept to allow analysis of design changes.
Performance is improved when this check box is not selected.

Optimized detection of design changes

Select this check box to enable a geometrical comparison mode for detecting design changes.
This mode determines with more precision the design change status of machining operations when a product is replaced in
the Part Operation (using either the Part Operation editor or the Edit Links capability). This option has no effect on all other
design change methods such as direct modification in the Part.

By default, these check boxes are not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2022

Resources
This document explains how to customize resource settings for Machining products.

Select the Resources tab, which is divided up into areas.

Parameters in this area... Allow you to customize...

Catalogs and Files the path name for resource files
Tool Selection the selection of tools
Automatic Compute from Tool Feeds and the update of feeds and speeds according to tooling data
Speeds
Tool Query Mode in Machining Processes tool queries in machining processes
Instantiation

Catalogs and Files

Enter the path of the folder containing tool catalogs, PP tables, macros, and machining processes. You can choose a folder by clicking
the [...] button.

You can concatenate paths using:

● a semi colon (;) character for Windows platforms

● a colon (:) character for UNIX platforms.

For example, if the concatenated folders E:\DownloadOfCXR12rel\intel_a\startup and e:\users\jmn\NC in the figure above contain PP
tables, then those PP tables will be available for selection in the Part Operation's Machine Editor dialog box.

Please note that:

● PP tables must be contained in folders named Manufacturing\PPTables

● tools must be contained in folders named Manufacturing\Tools.

Tool Selection
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2023

Automatic query after modification

Select this check box if you want to to activate an automatic query after each modification of a tool parameter. Performance is improved
when this check box is not selected.

Tool preview after selection

Select this check box if you want to preview the tool after selection.

By default, these check boxes are selected.

Automatic Compute from Tool Feeds and Speeds

Feedrate attributes of the operation

Select this check box if you want the Automatic Update of Feedrates option to be set by default in the Feeds and Speeds tab page of
machining operations.
This option allows feedrates of operations to be automatically updated whenever feedrate information on the tool is modified.

Spindle attributes of the operation

Select this check box if you want the Automatic Update of Speeds option to be set by default in the Feeds and Speeds tab page of
machining operations.
This option allows spindle speeds of operations to be automatically updated whenever speed information on the tool is modified.

By default, these check boxes are selected.

Tool Query mode in Machining Processes Instantiation

Select the type of Tool Query to be executed when a Machining Process is instantiated:

● automatically computed Tool Query

● interactively defined Tool Selection in case of multiple results
● interactively defined Tool Selection if no tool is found.

Depending on the selected option, the Advanced tab page of the Search Tool dialog box shows the solved Tool Query for each operation
in the Machining Process.

By default, the Automatic Tool Query option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2024
In the example below, you can choose one of the tools found in the ToolsSampleMP, or use the Look in combo to select a tool from
the current document or another tool catalog.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2025

Operation
This document explains how to customize machining operation settings for Machining products.

Select the Operation tab, which is divided up into areas.

Parameters in this area... Allow you to customize...

Default Values the use of default values
After Creation or Machining Process (MP) what happens after creating machining operations or machining
Instantiation processes

When Copying the duplication of geometry links

Display tool path displays of operations
User Interface dialog boxes of 3-axis surface machining operations
Start Feedrate the feedrate at the start of operation.

Default Values

Select the check box if you want operations to be created with the values used in the current program.
The values and units of attributes at the creation step of an operation are set to the values and units of the last edited and
validated operation whatever its type (that is, exit the operation definition dialog box using OK).

Otherwise the default settings delivered with the application are used.

By default, this check box is selected.

After Creation or Machining Process (MP) Instantiation

Select the desired check boxes to specify conditions to be applied when you create machining operations or machining
processes.

Sequence machining operation

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2026

Machining operations are automatically sequenced in the current program after creation.
Otherwise, sequencing can be managed in the feature view.

Search compatible tool in previous operations

When creating an operation, if a compatible tool exists in a previous operation of the current program, it will be set in the
new operation.
Otherwise, the operation will be incomplete.

Use a default tool

When creating an operation, a search is done in the document to find a compatible tool. If no compatible tool exists, a
default one is created in the document and set in the created operation.
If check box is not selected, no tool will be defined on the operation.

Start edit mode (not available for machining processes)

When creating a machining operation, Edit mode is automatically started to allow modifying parameters of the created
operation.
Otherwise, the operation is added to the program but the machining operation editor is not started.

MP instantiation: keep the absolute position of the tool axis

When a machining process is instantiated, the tool axes of the activities in the MP keep their absolute positions. Otherwise, if
the check box is not selected, these positions are changed in order to keep the relative components of the tool axis.

By default, these check boxes are selected.

When Copying

Select the check box if you want geometry links to be duplicated in a copied operation.

Otherwise the geometry must be defined for the copied operation. Performance is improved when this check box is not
selected.

By default, this check box is selected.

Display

Select the check box if you want to display tool paths of operations in the current Part Operation.

By default, this check box is not selected.

User Interface
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2027

Select the check box if you want to have the possibility of simplifying the dialog boxes of machining operations (that is, you
can display the minimum number of parameters necessary for a correct tool path). This setting is available for 3-axis surface
machining operations only.

By default, this check box is not selected.

Start Feedrate

If the checkbox is selected, the following paragraphs illustrate the expected behaviour.
Otherwise, the behaviour is the same as for V5R13 level.

If a clearance macro is defined and active on machining operation B (see figure below), the feedrate at the start of operation
B is the feedrate of the transition path in the plane of the clearance macro.

If there is no clearance macro defined on operation B (or if a clearance macro is defined but inactive), the feedrate at the
start of operation B in the figure below is:

● either rapid feedrate if the Set rapid feedrate at start of operations NC output option is set
● or the first feedrate of operation B (this may be the feedrate of the approach macro of operation B, for example).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2028

By default, this check box is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2029

Output
This document explains how to customize data output settings for Machining products.

Select the Output tab, which is divided up into areas.

Parameters in this area... Allow you to customize...

Post Processor and Controller Emulator the type of Post Processor and Controller Emulator files to be used
Folder for generating and simulating NC code and the path where these
files are located
Tool Path Storage the tool path storage capability
Tool Path Edition the tool path edition capability
During Tool Path Computation contact point storage
Tool Output Point type of tool output point
Tool Output Files ... Location default paths for NC output files storage.

Post Processor and Controller Emulator Folder

Select the desired option:

● None: no Post Processor or Controller Emulator is defined. NC code output is not possible in this case

● Cenit: you can choose from among the Post Processor and Controller Emulator parameter files proposed by Cenit to
generate and simulate your NC code

● IMS: you can choose from among the Post Processor and Controller Emulator parameter files proposed by Intelligent
Manufacturing Software (IMS) to generate and simulate your NC code

● ICAM: you can choose from among the Post Processor and Controller Emulator parameter files proposed by ICAM
Technologies Corporation (ICAM) to generate and simulate your NC code.

Enter the path of the folder containing Post processors and Controller Emulators. You can choose a folder by clicking the [...]
button. File concatenation is possible.

By default, the None option is selected.

Tool Path Storage

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2030

Select the desired option to store tool path data either in the current document or in an external file (as a tpl file).

For operations with large tool paths (more than 100 000 points), tool path storage in an external file is recommended.

By default, the Store tool path in the current document option is selected.

Tool Path Edition

Select the check box if you want to be able to edit tool paths even when the operation is locked.

This capability is available only for activities with a tool path node in the specification tree.

By default, this check box is selected.

During Tool Path Computation

Select the check box if you want to store contact points in the tool path.

Performance is improved when this check box is not selected.

By default, this check box is selected.

Tool Output Point

Select the desired option to select one of the following as output point:

● tool tip
● tool center point
● tool center point for ball end tools (that is, any tool with the Ball-end tool attribute selected or an end mill whose nominal
diameter is equal to twice the corner radius).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2031
Performance is better when the Tool Tip option is selected.

By default, the Tool Tip option is selected.

Default File Locations

Specify default locations for storing Tool Path files, NC Documentation, and NC Code output.

You can store tool paths files (tpl files) in the same folder as the CATProcess by selecting the check box. This allows you to
store these files according to your CATProcess context. Otherwise, you can choose another location by clicking the [...]
button.

For NC Documentation, and NC Code output you can choose a folder easily by clicking the [...] button.

You can customize the extension to be used for NC Code output (by default, the suffix used is CATNCCode).

Please note that Video results are stored in the NC Code output directory. This is done by using Associate Video Result to
Machining Operation in the Replay Tool Path dialog box.

By default, the Tool path: Store at same location as the CATProcess check box is not selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2032

Program
This document explains how to customize manufacturing program settings for Machining products.

Select the Program tab to customize program auto-sequencing rules and priorities. These settings are mainly
intended for the administrator.

Make sure that the document in the sequencing rules path (AllSequencingRules.CATProduct in the example
below) is accessible in Read/Write.

Auto Sequencing

Access to sequencing rules settings

Select the Access to sequencing rules settings check box to authorize user access to sequencing rules.

You can then specify the path for the rules base
You can choose a rules base easily by clicking the [...] button.

By default, this check box is selected.

Display sequencing rules and priorities

Select the Display sequencing rules and priorities check box to authorize the display of sequencing rules
and priorities in the user's view. In this case two more check boxes can be selected in order to:

● allow the user to filter rules

● allow the user to modify rule priorities.

By default, these check boxes are selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2033

Photo/Video
This document explains how to customize material removal simulation settings for Machining products.

Select the Photo/Video tab, which is divided up into areas.

Parameters in this area... Allow you to customize...

Simulation at material removal simulation at program of Part Operation level
Video Video material removal simulation options
Photo Photo material removal simulation options
Performance settings that influence performance
Color color during material removal simulation
Positioning Move allowed tool axis variation between two operations

Simulation at

Select the desired option to perform material removal simulation at either Program or Part Operation level.
Depending on the selected level, simulation begins either from the start of the manufacturing program or from the start of
the Part Operation.
Best performance is obtained with Program level.

By default, the Program level option is selected.

Video

Stop at tool change

Select the Stop at tool change check box if you want the Video simulation to stop each time a tool change is encountered
in the program.

By default, this check box is not selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2034

Collision detection

Select the desired Collisions detection option to:

● ignore collisions during the Video simulation

● stop the Video simulation at the first collision
● continue the Video simulation even when collisions are detected. In this case, you can consult the list of collisions at any
time during the simulation.

Best performance is obtained when collisions are ignored.

By default, the Ignore option is selected.

Touch is collision

Select the Touch is collision check box if you want touch (or contact) type of collision to be detected.

By default, this check box is selected.

Multiple Video result on program

Select the Multiple Video result on program check box if you want to store video results on more than one operation in
the program.

By default, this check box is not selected.

Photo

Select the desired Fault box type for examining remaining material or gouges:

● Transparent: to display a transparent bounding box

● Wireframe: to display a wireframe bounding box
● None: if no bounding box is required.

By default, the Wireframe option is selected.

Select the check box to compute all information at the picked point.

By default, this check box is not selected.

Best performance is obtained when Fault box is set to None and the Compute all information at picked point check box
is not selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2035

Performance

Tool and faceting

There are three methods of tool faceting used in Video simulation: Standard, Smaller and Larger.
The number of facets for a tool representation is determined by the chord deviation that is set for the tool diameter (0.005%
of the tool diameter).

● Smaller: The picture shows a rough approximation of a tool with six facets. Note that the chord deviation is always
inside the actual circle, and that the points are always on the circle (accurate).

This is the most accurate method for the Arc through Three Points command.
● Standard: The picture shows a rough approximation of a tool with six facets. Note that the chord deviation is partly
inside and partly outside the actual circle, and that the points are not always on the circle.

This is the best method for material removal simulation.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2036
However, this is not suitable for the Arc through Three Points command.
● Larger: The picture shows a rough approximation of a tool with six facets. Note that the chord deviation is outside the
actual circle, and that the points are not on the circle.

This is not suitable for the Arc through Three Points command.
However, it can be useful for gouge detection.

By default, the Standard option is selected.

Photo resolution

Best performance is obtained when the Photo resolution is set to 0. In this case, a detailed simulation of a portion of the part
can be obtained using the Closeup command.
Increasing the resolution improves machining accuracy and gives a very detailed simulation. However, this requires
increased memory and computation time.

By default, this resolution is set to 0.

Tool axis interpolation angle (5-axis only)

Specify the maximum angle that the tool axis is allowed to vary between two consecutive points.
Best performance is obtained for an angle of 10 degrees. Decreasing the angle improves the precision of the simulation.
However, this requires increased memory and computation time.

By default, this angle is set to 1degree.

Optimized rendering for Video

Select the Optimized rendering for Video check box to obtain an optimized rendering that improves Video simulation
performance.
Otherwise, more realistic colors are obtained with a slightly degraded performance. Milling, drilling, and turning operations
are supported .

By default, this check box is selected.

Color
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2037

Set the tool (and associated machined area) color to be the same as or different from the last tool, or have different colors
for all tools. Best performance is obtained with same colored tools.

By default, the All different option is selected.

Assign colors to the different tools using the associated color combo.

Assign colors to tool holders, parts, and fixtures using the associated color combos.

Positioning Move

Set the Maximum tool axis variation that is to be allowed between the end point of an operation and the start point of
the next operation. If the tool axis varies by an amount greater than the specified value, then the tool is positioned at the
start of the following operation.

By default, this angle is set to 1degree.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2038

Digital Mockup
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Digital Mockup category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize solution options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select one of these tabs to customize Digital Mockup options or select a sub-category in the left-

hand box to access specific workbench options.

General
DMU Navigator
DMU Sectioning
DMU 2D Workshop
DMU Space Engineering
Multiprocess Settings
Overlay Settings
DMU Space Analysis
DMU Fitting
DMU Fastening Review
DMU Immersive Review
DMU Optimizer

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2039

DMU Navigator

General
DMU Navigator
Product Visualization
Multiprocess Settings
Overlay Settings
Cache
Visualization
2D Workshop Visualization
Product Structure
Navigation
External Format Import
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2040

General

The General settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Preview

● Group Preview

Preview

You can customize the automatic display of preview windows.

Click preview checkboxes as appropriate to change the automatic display setting of preview windows
when creating cameras, manipulating objects, etc.

By default, this option is activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2041

Group Preview

You can customize the graphic properties of components displayed in the Group Preview window.

Visualize hidden objects as in main viewer

Click the Visualize hidden objects as in main viewer checkbox to visualize hidden objects in the
Group Preview window as in the main window.

By default, this option is activated.

Visualize hidden objects with customized graphic properties

Click the Visualize hidden objects with customized graphic properties checkbox to visualize
hidden objects in the Group Preview window with customized graphic properties.

● To customize the color graphic property, click the Color selection button and
choose the desired color from the proposed list.
● To customize the opacity graphic property, click the Opacity selection
button and choose the desired opacity setting from the proposed list.
● To visualize components in low-intensity, click the Low Intensity checkbox.
● To visualize components as pickable, click the Pickable checkbox.

By default, this option is not activated.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2042

DMU Navigator

The DMU Navigator settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Hyperlink representation

● Marker Default Properties

● Text Marker Properties

● Scene Default Properties

● Update on Product Structure modifications and Scene activation

● Publish

● Spatial Query parameters

● Import of applicative data

● Fast Clash detection

● DMU Review default properties

Hyperlink representation

You can add hyperlinks to your document and then use them to jump to a variety of locations, for
example, to a marketing presentation, a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet or a HTML page on the intranet.

Name
By default, hyperlink names are displayed : all hyperlinks will be textual. The name you give the link
in the Manage Hyperlink dialog box when you create it will appear when using the Go to Hyperlink
command.

By default, this option is checked.

Marker Default Properties

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2043

There are three options available for customizing the display of 2D and 3D markers. Defining the
Marker default properties in the Tools->Options->DMU Navigator sets the selected properties as
default properties and changes how new annotations will look when you create them.

Color
Click the Color selection button and choose the desired color from the proposed list.

By default, this option is valuated to Red.

Weight
Click the Weight selection button and choose the desired line weight from the proposed list.

Text Marker Properties

There are five options available for customizing the display of 3D markers. Defining the Marker
default properties in the Tools->Options->DMU Navigator sets the selected properties as default
properties and changes how new annotations will look when you create them.

Note: The options Color, Weight, Dashed, Font and Size only apply to 3D markers, they do not apply
to 2D markers.

There are two additional options concerning special modes available for 2D and 3D markers.

Color
Click the Color selection button and choose the desired color from the proposed list.

By default, this option is valuated to Red.

Weight
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2044
Click the Weight selection button and choose the desired line weight from the proposed list.

Dashed
Click the Dashed selection button and choose the desired dash pattern from the proposed list.

Font
Click the Font selection button and choose the font from the proposed list.

Size
In the Size text-entry field, enter the desired size value or click the selection buttons to increase or
decrease the value.

2D Marker Part Name Recognition

Click the 2D marker part name recognition checkbox in order to activate the option to
automatically use a Part's Name as the default for the creation of text annotations.

By default, this option is unchecked.

3D Marker with Graphic Message Mode

Click the 3D marker with graphic message mode checkbox in order to activate the mechanism
that enables you to transform temporary markers into persistent 3D annotations.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Scene Default Properties

Change the Scene background color as desired.

Color
Click the Color selection button and choose the desired color from the proposed list.

By default, this option valuated to Green.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2045

Update

This option manages a publish/subscribe mechanism which will manage the automatic updates of
certain events:

● move
● shape activation
● insert
● replace product
● delete product
● UI-activation modification
● graphic attributes modification
● Enhanced Scene activation

Update on Product Structure modifications and Scene activation

Uncheck the Update on product structure modifications and scenes activation option if
necessary.

If the option is unchecked, some applicative data will not be automatically updated upon the above
events. However, if the option is unchecked, performance will be faster.

By default, this option is checked.

Publish

Browser automatically opened

To activate the automatic launching of Publish results in a browser upon the stopping of the Publish
process, in the Publish area, check the Browser automatically opened checkbox .

By default, this option is checked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2046

Spatial Query parameters

The spatial query calculation is based on a cubic representation of each part, the size of the cubes of
which is designated by the accuracy parameter.

The clearance parameter defines an area around the reference selection within which all products are
considered "nearby" and outside of which all products are considered "far away".

Released Accuracy
In the Released accuracy text-entry field, enter the desired released accuracy value.

To force users of the Spatial Query command to use the defined Released Accuracy value, check the
Force released accuracy in interactive command checkbox.

The default value for Released accuracy is 20mm.

By default, the Force checkbox is unchecked.

Clearance
In the Clearance text-entry field, enter the desired clearance value.

To force users of the Spatial Query command to use the defined Clearance value, check the Force
clearance in interactive command checkbox.

The default value for Clearance is 0mm.

By default, the Force checkbox is unchecked.

Import of applicative data

Do the Import
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2047
To activate the applicative data import, click the Do the Import checkbox.

By default, this option is unchecked.

With a user prompt

This option will be available if you have checked the Do the Import option above.

In order that a dialog box will appear enabling you to define a subset of applicative data to be
inserted, click the With a user prompt radio button.

Automatically
This option will be available if you have checked the Do the Import option above.

To automatically insert the applicative data, click the Automatically radio button.

Always create DMU Review at highest level

To always create imported applicative data in a new DMU Review at highest level, click the Always
create DMU Review at highest level checkbox.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Fast Clash detection

Use Voxelisation for collision detection

Checking this option enables you to obtain clash detection based upon a specified voxel size.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Voxel size
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2048
Specifies the voxel size to use for the clash detection.

By default, this option is valuated to 5mm.

Sag precision
Specifies the use of the currently defined sag value for the clash detection.

By default, this option is unchecked.

View collision feedback

● If you select a voxel size and check the View Collision Feedback button, then you obtain a clash
detection with a voxel precision of the specified size, with clashing parts highlighted and the
center points of the voxels appearing in red.
● If you select a voxel size and uncheck the View Collision Feedback button, then you will obtain a
clash detection with only the clashing parts highlighted.
● If you select sag precision and check the View Collision Feedback button, then you obtain a clash
detection with the precision of the sag, with clashing parts highlighted and the intersection curve
of the clashing parts appearing in red.
● If you select sag precision and uncheck the View Collision Feedback button, then you obtain clash
detection with only the clashing parts highlighted.

By default, this option is unchecked.

DMU Review default properties

This parameter determines the default name for new DMU Reviews that you will create.

Name
In the Name text-entry field, enter the desired default name for DMU Reviews.

By default, this option is valuated to the string DMU Review.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2049

Multiprocess Settings

Multi-processes concern the CATDMUUtility processes that are created as child processes for the
tessellation of documents when performing a File -> Open of a CATProduct or when running the
CATDMUUtility batch process using the -mp option. This new feature enables the management of
possible coredumps and / or looping problems during tessellation such that the impact is localized to
the specific document that cannot be tessellated; the state of a V5 session will no longer be
impacted by these problems and a CATDMUUtility batch process will run to conclusion. A log file
indicates which documents could not be tessellated.
You must have activated the variable Multi process visualization mode with local cache in the
Product Structure options. See Product Visualization.

The Multiprocess settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Multiprocess parameters

The Multiprocess parameters enable you to customize:

● The maximum number of child processes that will be launched.

● The maximum amount of time a process will be allowed to loop before it is killed.
● The path of the log file that will report the success or non-success of each tessellation
concerned with the opening of a CATProduct.

Multiprocess parameters

Maximum son processes

The number of child processes is limited to 1.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2050
In the Maximum son processes text-entry field, enter the maximum number of child
CATDMUUtility processes to be used during tessellation.

By default, this option is valuated to 2.

Timeout (minutes)
In the Timeout (minutes) text-entry field, enter the maximum time that a single tessellation
process will be allowed to loop before being aborted.

By default, this option is valuated to 60.

Log File Path

In the Log File Path text-entry field, enter the path of the log file of the tessellation process or click

the Browse icon to choose a path via the File Browser.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2051

Overlay Settings

The Overlay settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Global

● Text

● Global Parameters

● Text Properties

● Position

When you work with suppliers to review a mock-up, you might want to warn these partners that
some parts have a certain level of confidentiality. Displaying an overlay enables you to do that.

The overlay works for both 2D and 3D documents, and is also taken into account during capture
and print. It is also visible in no show space.

A Overlay Settings tab page enables you to:

● define the text that should be displayed

● define the graphical properties and layout of the text
● activate / deactivate the overlay

Each setting can be locked by the administrator.

Limitations:
● The overlay is not visible in result and preview windows (group, clash, section, current
selection etc.)
● The overlay is not integrated in Collaboration tools

Global
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2052
You have the possibility of activating the overlay automatically whenever a document is opened.

Always activate Overlay when opening a document

Check the Always activate overlay when opening a document checkbox to activate the
option.
Note that it is not necessary to restart your session in order to take into account the modification
of this checkbox.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Text

You define the text that will constitute the overlay.

In the text-entry field, enter the desired overlay text.

Customize
To customize the textual properties, click the Customize button.
The following panel appears:

Date
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2053
To insert the current date in the overlay text, click the Date checkbox.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Format
To modify the format of the inserted date, click the Format selection button and choose the
desired format from the proposed list.

Copyright Username
To insert your username in the overlay text, click the Username checkbox.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Global Parameters

Transparency
The transparency parameter defines the transparency of the overlay fill (0% is equivalent to no
transparency and 100% is equivalent to complete transparency).

To modify the transparency value, drag the Transparency slide button to the desired value.

By default, this option is valuated to 0%.

Fill
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2054
The overlay fill constitutes a background to the overlay text.

To modify the fill color, click the Fill selection button and choose the desired fill color from the
proposed list.

By default, this option is valuated to No Color.

Text Properties

You can modify the text properties of the overlay text defined above.

Font
Click the Font selection button and choose the desired font from the proposed list.

By default, this option valuated to Swiss.pfb.

Size
In the Size text-entry field, enter the desired size or use the increment / decrement buttons until
you reach the desired size value.

By default, this option valuated to 20.

Color
Click the Color selection button and choose the desired color from the proposed list.

By default, this option is valuated to Yellow.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2055

Position

Click the radio button corresponding to the desired placement of the overlay text: top, bottom,
left, right or diagonal.

If you also wish the overlay text to be tiled, then click the Tile checkbox.

By default, this option is set to Bottom and Tile unchecked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2056

DMU 2D Workshop

The DMU 2D Workshop settings page concerns the following settings categories:

● Background

Background

Graduated color background

If you wish the background color to be graduated, click the Graduated color background selection
box.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Background color
Click on the combo-box selection button and choose the desired standard color from the proposed
list.

By default, this option is valuated to White.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2057

DMU Space Engineering

This page deals with the following options:

● Connection Mode

● Server Connection Parameters

● Clash Result Path

● Computation Parameters

Connection Mode

Automatic

Select the Automatic check box to connect DMU space Engineering Assistant
automatically to the http server, you do not need to click the Connect/Disconnect

icon .
(The connection is established during the Send to CATIA... operation)

If disabled (default mode), you need to connect manually to the server clicking the
Connect/Disconnect icon in the Spy toolbar.

By default, the Automatic check box is cleared.

Server Connections Parameters

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2058

Host Server

Specify the host server name (name of the machine hosting the Apache server) using the drop-
down list.

By default, this field is left blank.

Port Server

You can now edit the port server.

By default, the port server is set to 80.

Clash Result Path

Path

Click Browse and specify the path directory where the XML files (clash results) are to be
stored.

By default, this field is left blank.

Computation Parameters

Beep when computation ends

Clear this check box if you want to deactivate the beep sound which is triggered when the
calculation is finished.

By default, this check box is selected.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2059

DMU Space Analysis

This page deals with DMU Space Analysis options in the following tabs:

● DMU Clash lets you customize basic clash settings.

● DMU Clash - Detailed Computation lets you define what is computed when you select a conflict or product in the Check

Clash Results dialog box.

● DMU Clash - Penetration lets you define how penetration depth is computed.

● DMU Clash - Rule lets you identify the path to the CATProduct containing knowledgeware clash rules.

● DMU Clash - Process lets you customize clash process XML settings.

● DMU Sectioning lets you customize section plane, grid and section viewer settings.

● DMU Distance lets you customize results window and publish settings of the Distance and Band Analysis command.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2060

DMU Clash

The DMU Clash tab contains five categories of options:

● Retrieve information

● Results window

● Display in results box

● Type of computation

● During initial computation

Retrieve Information

Select the option defining whether or not, and where, to retrieve clash results for comparison purposes:

● From previous computation

This comparison is based on numeric and/or graphic results whenever these results are available. For a more pertinent

comparison, select the Compute penetration depth or minimum distance option on this tab page.

● From PDM: from either Enovia V5 or Enovia VPM.

Note: This setting cannot be combined with the authorized penetration interference type.

● None: No comparison will be done.

By default, no information is retrieved.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2061

Results Window

Automatically open
Selecting this check box automatically displays the results window when you run a clash command computation.

By default, this option is cleared.

Display in Results Box

List by conflict / List by product

Select the option specifying the default display in the results box of the Check Clash dialog box: List by conflict or List by

product.

By default, the default display is set to List by conflict.

First line automatically selected

Selecting this check box automatically selects the first line in the List by Conflict or List by Product tab and computes the

graphics representation of the selected interference as well as the penetration depth or minimum distance.

By default, this option is selected.

Type of Computation
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2062
Default computation
Select the default interference type that will display in the Check Clash dialog box from the drop-down list box. Two types

are available:

● Contact + Clash: checks whether two products occupy the same space zone as well as whether two products are in

contact.

● Clearance + Contact + Clash: In addition to the above, checks whether two products are separated by less than the pre-

defined clearance distance.

By default, default computation is set to Contact + Clash.

Clearance value
Enter the default clearance value that will display in the Check Clash dialog box when the Clearance + Contact + Clash

interference type is selected.

By default, the clearance value is set to 5mm.

During Initial Computation

Select the option specifying what the system computes in addition to detecting and identifying the different types of

interference. Three options are available:

● Compute penetration depth or minimum distance: if selected, automatically computes and displays the penetration

depth and minimum distance for all interferences detected.

● Compute all numeric and graphic results: if selected, automatically computes and displays numeric results as well as

graphic results as defined in the Detailed Computation tab.

Note: Computation time can be long.

In this case, the progress bar shows the status of the calculation in two different steps:

Stage 1/2: determines the number of interferences

Stage 2/2: computes appropriate numeric and graphic results.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2063

● None: if selected, the initial computation detects and identifies the different types of interference only.

By default, this option is set to None.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2064

DMU Clash - Detailed Computation

The DMU Clash - Detailed Computation tab contains give categories of options:

● Level of detail

● Clash result

● Contact & clearance result

● Numeric result

● Intersection volume

Level of Detail

Select the option specifying at what level of detail the detailed computation is run:

● Element: lets you work globally at product level while allowing you to pinpoint the elements involved.
● Product: gives information at product level only.

Note: Element analysis in Detailed Results and Visualization boxes is only available if the level of detail is set to Element.

By default, the level of detail is set to Element.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2065

Clash Result

Select the option specifying the graphics representation for clashes.

● Curve: Red intersection curves identifying clashing products are computed and displayed.

If you select the Curve option button, note the size of the CATProduct will impacted when saving the interference

within the CATProduct document. The more significant, the interference is, the longer the curve is and

consequently the bigger the CATProduct is.

● None: No intersection curves are computed.

By default, this option is set to Curve.

Contact & Clearance Result

Select the option specifying the graphics representation for contacts and clearances.

● Triangle: Yellow and green triangles identifying products in contact and products separated by less than the specified

clearance distance respectively are computed and displayed.

Note: The graphics display and storage of the triangular representation is costly and may adversely affect performance.

● Surface: Yellow and green surfaces identifying products in contact and products separated by less than the specified

clearance distance respectively are computed and displayed.

If you select this option:

❍ You must set an accuracy. The value entered defines the maximum value for the length of the longest side of a

triangular representation of the results. This representation is used to obtain the yellow and green surfaces.

❍ Note the size of the CATProduct will be impacted when saving the interference within the CATProduct document.

The more significant the interference is, the longer the curve is and consequently the bigger the CATProduct is.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2066
● None: No triangles or surfaces are computed.

By default, this option is set to Triangle.

Numeric Result

Select the option specifying whether or not a numeric result will be computed and displayed.

● Penetration depth or minimum distance: The penetration depth of clashes and the minimum distance for clearances

is computed and displayed.

● None: No penetration depth or minimum distance is computed.

By default, this option is set to Penetration depth or minimum distance.

Intersection Volume

Select the option specifying the graphics representation for clashes. This representation can be requested in addition to that

selected under Clash Result.

● Voxel: Voxels (cubes) identifying clashing products are computed and displayed.

If you check this option, you must set the voxel size. The value entered is the edge-length of the voxel or cube. A lower

value will give a more accurate result but will also require a longer computation time and more memory. The minimum

value is 1mm (0.03937 inch).

● Boolean: Boolean solids identifying clashing products are computed and displayed.

● None: No intersection volume is computed.

Notes:

● The intersection volume is only visible in the Results window.

● The value of the intersection volume is also given in the Detailed Results box of the Check Clash dialog box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2067
● The intersection volume is not stored in the model and cannot be saved in ENOVIA LCA or ENOVIA VPM.

By default, this option is set to None.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2068

DMU Clash - Penetration

The DMU Clash - Penetration tab contains only one category of options: Mode of Penetration.

Mode of Penetration

Select the option defining how penetration depth is computed. Two modes are available:

● Element

● Product

Element
This mode lets you assess the seriousness of a clash.

In this mode, penetration depth corresponds to the minimum distance by which it is necessary to translate an element to

avoid a clash. The calculation is repeated for each pair of clashing elements and the maximum penetration depth output.

If you then translate the element, elements no longer clash but are in contact.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2069

In our example, the green product (A) comprises three elements and the blue product (B) two elements.

Two different pairs of elements are clashing: A1 and B1; A2 and B2. The penetration depth for the first pair of elements is

N1; for the second pair N2. The largest value is output, in our case, N2.

Note: You cannot use this calculation to translate products and avoid clashes

Product
In the Product mode, penetration depth (visualized by a vector) is the minimum distance by which it is necessary to

translate a product to avoid a clash. If you then translate the product, products no longer clash but are in contact.

This mode corresponds to the penetration depth computation prior to Version 5 Release 8.

By default, the mode is set to Element.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2070

DMU Clash - Rule

The DMU Clash - Rule tab contains only one category of options: CATProduct containing Rule(s).

CATProduct containing Rule(s)

Enter the full path to the CATProduct containing knowledgeware clash rules, or select this path using the icon.

By default, this field is left blank.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2071

DMU Clash - Process

The DMU Clash - Process tab contains two categories:

● General

● Default XML paths

General

XML Export for clash process purpose

Selecting this check box exports clash results and geometry to XML files as part of a standalone clash process.

By default, this check box is selected.

Federated XML output

Selecting this check box generates one file per conflict plus one header file summarizing results. If you de-activate this

option, a single large XML file containing all conflicts is generated.

By default, this check box is selected.

Picture generated in XML

Selecting this check box generates pictures in png format in a picture folder. This option has an obvious impact on

performance.

By default, this check box is selected.

Browser automatically opened

Selecting this check box automatically opens a browser displaying results when clash results are exported.

By default, this check box is selected.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2072

Default XML Paths

Data base repository

Enter the path giving the default location in which to save the XML files, or select this location using Browse...

Note: If you set the DLName document environment (Tools > Options > General > Document) as your current

environment, clicking Browse... will open the DLName dialog box instead of the usual Directory Browser dialog box.

The DLName dialog box displays the list of DLNames that have been defined when you set your document environment.

Simply select the DLName, then click OK to validate.

By default, this field is left blank.

Style sheet location

Enter the path identifying your customized style sheet, or select it using Browse...

Note: If you set the DLName document environment (Tools > Options > General > Document) as your current
environment, clicking Browse... will open the DLName dialog box instead of the usual Style Sheet Selector dialog box.

The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names referred to as
'DLNames'. Each folder is assigned a logical name. In this mode, you can only access documents in folders referenced by
DLNames.

By default, this field is left blank.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2073

DMU Sectioning

The DMU Sectioning tab contains three categories of options:

● Section planes

● Section grid

● Results window

Section Planes

Default color
Use the color chooser to define the default color of section planes.

By default, color is as shown above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2074

Normal X, Y, Z
Select the option specifying the absolute axis along which you want to orient the normal vector of the section

plane (master plane in the case of slices and boxes).

By default, the normal vector is oriented along X.

Origin
Select the option locating the center of the plane:

● 0,0,0: at absolute coordinates 0,0,0

● Selection: at the center of the bounding sphere around the products in the selection you defined.

By default, the origin option is set to Selection.

Hide the plane

Selecting this check box hides the plane on exiting the command. If cleared, the plane is kept in the Show space

on exiting the command.

By default, this check box is selected.

Hide the section results in the No Show space

Selecting this check box transfers the section results to the No Show place on exiting the command.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Automatic computation of the result

Selecting this check box automatically updates sectioning results while manipulating the plane. If cleared,

sectioning results are computed when you release the mouse button.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2075

Wireframe elements cut

Selecting this check box takes wireframe elements into account and the section plane sections any wireframe

elements present. Points represent the intersection of the plane with wireframe elements.

If cleared, wireframe elements are not taken into account.

By default, this check box is selected.

Allow measures on a section created with a simple plane

Selecting this check box gives the same 3D section cut display for a plane as in the case of a slice or box and

lets you make measures on the wireframe section cut.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Section Grid

Mode
Select the option to locate the grid:

● Absolute: sets grid coordinates with respect to the absolute axis system of the document.

● Relative: places the center of the grid on the center of the section plane (master plane in the case of slices

and boxes).

By default, the mode is set to Absolute.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2076

Style
Select the option defining how the grid is represented: Lines or Crosses.

By default, the style is set to Lines .

Steps - Automatic filtering

Selecting this check box automatically adjusts the level of detail of the grid display when you zoom in and out.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Steps - Width, Height

In the Width and Height boxes, type or select a new value to specify the spacing between grid lines. Units are

current units set using Tools -> Options.

By default, width and height are set to 100.

Steps - Automatic grid resizing

Selecting this check box automatically re-sizes the grid to section results when moving the section plane. If

cleared, the grid has the same dimensions as the section plane.

By default, this option is selected.

Automatic grid resizing ON: Automatic grid resizing OFF:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2077

Results Window

Automatically open
Selecting this check box always displays the Section viewer when in the Sectioning command.

Note: If cleared, the preview window is displayed.

If, in addition, you clear the Sectioning preview option in the Digital Mockup General tab (Tools > Options >

Digital Mockup > General), then no viewers are displayed.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2078

Always 2D view
Selecting this check box locks the Section viewer in a 2D view. If cleared, you can work in a 3D view.

By default, this check box is selected.

Automatically reframe

Selecting this check box automatically fits the results into the available space in both the Section viewer and
preview window when manipulating the section plane in the document window.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Section fill
Selecting this check box fills in the section to generate a surface for measurement and display purposes.

By default, this check box is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2079

DMU Distance

The DMU Distance tab contains two categories of options:

● Results window

● XML publish default directory

Results Window

Automatically open
Selecting this checkbox automatically displays the results window when you run a distance command

computation. If cleared, the Preview window displays.

By default, this option is cleared.

XML Publish Default Directory

Default path
Enter the path giving the default location in which to save the XML file, or select this location using Browse...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2080

Note: If you set the DLName document environment (Tools > Options > General > Document) as your

current environment, clicking Browse... will open the DLName dialog box instead of the usual Directory

Browser dialog box.

The DLName dialog box displays the list of DLNames that have been defined when you set your document

environment. Simply select the DLName, then click OK to validate.

By default, this field is left blank.

Style sheet
Enter the path identifying your customized style sheet, or select it using Browse...

Note: If you set the DLName document environment (Tools > Options > General > Document) as your

current environment, clicking Browse... will open the DLName dialog box instead of the usual Style Sheet

Selector dialog box.

The DLName document environment lets you restrict the access to specific folders referenced by logical names

referred to as DLNames. Each folder is assigned a logical name. In this mode, you can only access documents in

folders referenced by DLNames.

By default, this field is left blank.

Browser automatically opened

Selecting this checkbox automatically opens a browser displaying results when distance results are exported.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2081

DMU Fitting Simulator

This section describes how to set DMU Fitting Simulator options, which are controlled by the following tabs:

● DMU Fitting

● DMU Manipulation
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2082

DMU Fitting
This page deals with the DMU Fitting options.

● Shuttle Angular Validation

● Path Finder

● Track

● Default Clash Detection

Shuttle Angular Validation

Checking the Angle limitation box enables you set the angular shuttle validation option in the Edit Shuttle
dialog box.

Once you select Angle limitation, you can specify a Maximal angle for the rotation of the shuttle and the
Vector around which the shuttle will rotate.

The default value is to have Angle limitation deselected.

Path Finder

If Automatic smooth is selected, smooth is performed within the Path Finder command once you click the OK
button.

The default value is to have Automatic smooth deselected.

Track
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2083

Automatic track update

If Automatic track update is selected, the track is automatically updated after modification.

Manual update is the default value.

Default speed
You can modify this value at any time. When you modify the default speed, the modification applies to tracks
created after the modification. To modify the speed on existing tracks, use the Properties dialog box.

Default speed is 0.001m_s.

Default Time
You can modify this value at any time. When you modify the default time, the modification applies to tracks
created after the modification. To modify the time on existing tracks, use the Properties dialog box.

Default time is 0.001s.

Default Clash Detection

When activating the default clash detection, the clash computation can take several minutes before the
Simulation dialog boxes are displayed. Sometimes it is more convenient not to compute this clash detection for
the first step. Also, the first step can already be validated by a static clash analysis. The Activated only while
moving option increases the efficiency of the default clash detection.

If this option is selected, no calculation will be performed when the default clash detection is activated (i.e.,
set to on or stop). When running tracks, sequences, and simulations, clashes are still calculated with respect
to the default clash detection state (i.e., on, off, or stop).

The Activated only while moving option is deselected by default.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2084

DMU Manipulation
This page deals with the DMU Manipulation options.

● Clash feedback
● Automatic insert configuration
● Manipulation mode for simulations and tracks
● Snap sensitivity

Clash Feedback

Select the Clash Beep checkbox to activate the Beep during interference analyses or simulation recordings.

The default value is to have Clash Beep deselected.

Automatic Insert Configuration

Regardless of the options selected for Automatic Insert Configuration, the function itself must be set. See
Manipulation Mode for Simulations and Tracks, below.

On mouse release
Lets you record positions on mouse release.

The default option is On mouse release.

While mouse moving

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2085

If this option is selected, two additional options can also be specified:

● Distance: Specifies the minimum distance step during simulation recording .
● Angle: Specifies the maximum rotation angle step during simulation recording.

The Distance and Angle fields are only grayed out when On mouse release is selected. Once While mouse
moving is selected, you can enter the appropriate values to record the the motion.

Manipulation Mode for Simulations and Tracks

The first three options let you validate the shuttle simulation detecting clashes.

This setting is linked to the Automatic Clash Detection toolbar. The icon changes automatically with respect to
the option checked.

No clash detection is the default value.

No clash detection

: Clash detection will not occur.

●

Clash detection on

: Activates the clash detection mode (The objects in clash are highlighted in the geometry area while
recording the simulation.)

Stop on collision

: Activates the stop mode. Consequently, the simulation stops once any objects clash. The objects in
clash are highlighted in the geometry area.

Automatic insert
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2086

When selected, this option enables automatic insert mode. Automatic insert mode enables users to insert shots
in a track without using the Record (Insert) command on the Recorder toolbar. The two configurations
available for Automatic Insert appear above.

Automatic insert is deselected by default.

Snap Sensitivity

Lets you customize the snap functionality parameters within a sphere and a cylinder. The image below
illustrates the options:

● Position: Specifies the sphere radius (first area) where the shuttle is snapped onto the object.
● Orientation: Specifies the cylinder height (second area) where the shuttle is snapped onto the object.

The default values appear above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2087

Customizing for DMU Immersive Review

DMU Immersive Review
Customizing 3D Joystick Buttons
CATIA Infrastructure
DMU Immersive Review
Version 5 Release 16 Page 2088

This page deals with the following options:

● Starting Options

● Scale of the review

● Default toolbar position

Starting Options

Viewpoint tracking

If you select this check box, the viewpoint changes as your head turns if you use a head tracker device.
This option is linked to Stereoscopic option which enables or disables 3D visualization of your session. You need to launch the device driver. Please refer
to Customizing Devices Settings

By default, this check box is cleared.

Stereoscopic

Enables or disables stereoscopic visualization of graphical data with a perception of realistic, three-dimensional images.
 By default, this check box is cleared.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2089

P3 grid

Enables to display the P3 grid when you enter the DMU Immersive Workbench

By default, this check box is selected.

Action triggers activated by default

If you select this check box a "demo mode" is launched which means each time you select an object which has been assigned an action trigger, the
operation is automatically launched (the CATScript macro is triggered). In this case, only the standard toolbar is available, the action triggers command
is activated.

If you clear this check box, you need to click the Action Triggers icon first and then select the object. All immersive review toolbars are available.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Scale of the Review

To get the most of this capability, make sure either the Stereoscopic check box is selected (MPK compliant) or both Viewpoint Tracking and
Stereoscopic check boxes are selected.

Note: when selecting the Start at the scale defined below check box, the following warning message is displayed:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2090

Start at the scale defined below

Activates the scale command when entering Immersive Review workbench.

By default, this check box is selected.

Display the current scale

Activates the display of the current scale factor (at the bottom left in the review window)

Scale of the review:

Allows the user to define a specific scale factor (i.e. the required scale, applied by the Scale command)

Default toolbar position

Select the option to locate the toolbar:

● Upper left: sets the toolbar at the upper left. It can be useful depending on the display configuration you need (one or more screens)
● Lower left: sets the toolbar at the bottom left of the screen.

By default, the mode is set to Lower left.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2091

Customizing 3D Joystick Buttons

This task explains how to customize 3D Joystick buttons which allows you to assign (i.e. map) any given command or macro a device
button.
This functionality is available for any application-supported hardware providing the necessary buttons, e.g. Space Mouse and the
Space ball range of 3D input devices.

Please also read Customizing Buttons in the Infrastructure User's Guide

1. Select Tools->Customize commands, choose the Commands tab then click the VR Customize button

You can also access the Button Customize dialog box using one of the methods below:
1. select the View->Commands List commands then select the VR Button Customize command
2. type c:VR Button Customize or c:3Dx Button Customize in the power input field then press
ENTER
3. press button "1" of your Space Mouse or Spaceball (if you are using original settings).

The Button Customize dialog box is displayed:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2092

2. Use the input device name area on top of the dialog box to select the desired device from the drop-down list in order to

modify button mappings.

In our example, the device is a Joystick3D.

3. Map the desired device button to a particular command or macro using one of the methods detailed in Customizing Buttons

For example, using the Drag and Drop capability from the Customize toolbar (still open)
1. In the Categories list, select a category to map a command, or select the "Macros" category to map a macro.
2. Select the command or macro to be mapped from the list of commands.

3. Press and hold down the left-mouse button on top of the command or macro entry.

4. Drag the icon to the top of the button drag-and-drop area.

5. Release the left-mouse button.

The command is assigned to the device button.

4. Repeat step 3. as many times as needed to map your 4 device buttons.

In our example, we assigned the following commands:

Commands Buttons

Wireframe: Button1
Shading Button2
Zoom In Button3
Zoom Out Button4
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2093

Note that when entering the DMU Immersive Review workbench, the commands assigned to the first two buttons
(button1 button2) are automatically deactivated
If you wish to remove a button mapping, simply right-click the desired button drag-and-drop area then select the
Delete contextual command. This will empty the button drag-and-drop area to indicate that no macro or command is
currently assigned to this device button.

5. Press the desired device button to activate the command you assigned to it.

This is what you obtain if you press button1 and button2 successively:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2094

The help area in bottom part of the panel displays a help text for the corresponding mapped command
when a device button is pressed (a red arrow identifies in the panel the button you press)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2095

DMU Optimizer

This page deals with DMU Optimizer options in the following tabs:
● DMU Optimizer lets you customize alternate shape settings and

● DMU Sectioning lets you customize section plane, grid and section viewer settings.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2096

DMU Optimizer

The DMU Optimizer tab contains three categories of options:

● Alternate Shape Management

● Wrapping Color

● Vibration Volume Color

● Save Management for Swept Volume

Alternate Shape Management

Shape Name
Select the desired representation(s) to be managed as alternate shape(s)
i.e. Silhouette representation

For instance, if the Silhouette check box is selected, the resulting silhouette shape is managed as the silhouette component alternate shape
(i.e. input component)

Note: when you select a specific check box to manage a representation as an alternate shape, the Activate and Default options become
available.
By default, all shape name check boxes are cleared.

Activate
Select this check box to visualize the selected shape in the current session.

For instance, if this check box is selected, the silhouette representation becomes the one visualized in the session.
By default, the check boxes are selected.

Default
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2097

Select this check box to activate the selected representation as the default shape (i.e. the one loaded when opening the CATProduct
document).

In our example, if both Silhouette and Default check boxes are selected, the silhouette representation becomes the default shape.

By default, the check boxes are cleared.

Notes:
● In DMU Optimizer, it is impossible to generate various alternate shapes with the same name. Only the last generated alternate shape is
taken into account.
● This option does not work with CATPart documents (i.e. when the initial selection is a CATPart document).

Path For Save

Specify the full path for save or select this path using the Browse button .
Notes:
● the path/directory you selected for one shape is now the default path specified in the Save as dialog box. You can still change it, if you
need to, when saving.
● You can customize a specific path/directory for each alternate shape.

By default, this field is left blank.

Wrapping Color

Vibration Volume Color

Use part color when possible, otherwise...

Select the Use part color when possible, otherwise... check box to swap from the part color to another color when it is appropriate
(default color or a color of your choice)

By default, this check box is cleared.

Default color

Use the color chooser to define the default color of wrapping or vibration volume.

By default, color is as shown above.

Save Management for Swept Volume

Use one directory and save in one click

Select the Use one directory and save in one click check box to save in a single directory, multiple swept volumes, in one click (when
dealing with several moving products, for instance when performing a swept volume on a shuttle).
For more information, read Swept Volume section in DMU Optimizer User's Guide.

By default, this check box is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2098

Equipment and Systems

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Equipment & Systems category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize solution options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select one of these tabs to customize Equipment & Systems options or select a sub-category in

the left-hand box to access specific workbench options.

General
Display
Diagrams
Electrical Mapping
Design Criteria
Electrical Process Interfacing
Standards
Structure Drawing
Electrical Cabling Discipline
❍ Electrical Connectivity Diagrams

❍ Electrical Cableway Routing

Electrical Wiring Discipline

❍ Electrical Assembly Design

❍ Electrical Harness Installation

❍ Electrical Wire Routing

❍ Electrical Harness Flattening

❍ Electrical 3D Design Assembly

Structure Discipline
❍ Structure Preliminary Layout

❍ Compartment and Access

❍ Equipment Support Structures

Circuit Board Design

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2099

❍ Circuit Board Design

Structure Functional Design

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2100

General

This tab provides settings for:

● General environment

● Resolved part storage path

● Resource attributes

● Catalog placement.

General environment

Grid Step

This is the default grid step setting that displays in the General Environment toolbar at the bottom of the 3D
viewer. Even if you change the value in the toolbar during your session, the value entered in the Grid Step field
will re-appear when you open a new session. Enter your preference for the Grid Step. Note: The Units (unit of
measure) is set in the Units tab under Tools - Options - General - Parameters and Measure. See also Set
Correct Working Units and Grid.

Snap Angle

It sets the degree of rotation of the plane manipulator.

See Using the Plane Manipulator for more information.

Resolved part storage for spatial objects

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2101

Directory

This is the location where resolved Spatial objects unique to the Plant Layout, Systems Routing and
Systems Space Reservations products are stored.
Click the Open file button and navigate in the Resolved Part Storage Directory Browser window to set or
change the location for the directory.

Resource attributes

Automatic creation of resource attributes

Certain attributes accompany Spatial objects (those created in Plant Layout, Systems Routing and Systems
Space Reservations); objects such as item reservations, areas, runs, etc. These attributes, or properties, are
generated specifically for the DELMIA product line and cannot be assigned or changed in other product lines.

Although you will not be making use of these resource properties, their creation will have no affect on the
product you are working in. If you do not want these properties to be created, click to clear the check box
Automatic creation of resource attributes and click OK.

Catalog placement
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2102

Display image while placing catalog object in 3D viewer

You can choose to hide or display a preview of the part you are placing. Check or uncheck the box Display
image while placing catalog object in 3D viewer to obtain the effect you want.

Place at component's origin when placing in free space

By default, when you click (in free space) to place a part, the center of the part will be placed at that location.
The application determines the center of the part by creating a box around it and selecting the center of the
base of the box. You can also choose to place the origin of the part at the point where you click. To do this
check the box Place at component's origin when placing in free space.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2103

Display

This tab provides display options for:

● Analysis mode

● Specifications tree

● 3D Viewer display

● Routable display.

Analysis mode

Analysis mode

Select the box in Analysis Mode to display information about routables. It works only when you are performing
an action with a routable, such as placing a part, branching a run or creating an offset route.

Specification tree
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2104

Application objects: Show application grouping

Selecting the checkbox Show application grouping displays object grouping mechanisms such as piping lines
or zones in the specifications tree, along with all their members - pipes, valves, etc. These members will also
display as separate entries in the specifications tree (they will display twice). If you do not select this checkbox
then the parts will display in the specifications tree, but there will be no entry grouping them under their parent
piping line, zone or other grouping mechanism.

Spatial objects

Click to select the check boxes of the items you want to appear in the specifications tree. Spatial objects may
only be placed using the Systems Routing, Systems Space Reservation and Plant Layout workbenches.

Spatial Assembly

When the Spatial Assembly checkbox is not selected, objects (that are specified in this option) in a document
will display in the specifications tree in the order in which they were placed. If you select the checkbox then
they will display alphabetically. This applies to Plant Layout, Systems Routing and Systems Space Reservation.

3D Viewer display
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2105

Run connections

Click to select the check boxes to set the connection and connector display options as desired.

Part connectors

Set the color of the connection and connector symbols using the drop down color palette.

Routable display

Twist Smoothness Factor

Change this option to increase the smoothness of a run at a twisting turn.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2106

Diagrams

This tab is specific to diagrams products. It allows you to select or specify settings for:

● Gapping information

● Flow arrow information

● Scale component factor

● Connector display

● Reference component display.

Gapping Information

● Type: Select the looks of the gap you want displayed in your document by clicking one of the buttons. The

three choices are blank, jump and wavy.

● Size: Enter the size of the gap.

● Priority rules: Select the line in which the gap should display.

NOTE: Gaps display in a document after you execute the View - Gaps command. See Display Line Gaps in

Document.

Flow Arrow Information

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2107

Flow Arrow Frequency

Select the segments on which you want flow arrows to display:

● All: Arrows will display on all segments.

● Not Last: Arrows will display on all segments except the last.

● Middle: An arrow will display in the middle segment only.

● All Middle: Arrows will display on all segments except the first and last segments.

Flow Arrow Positioning on Segment

Select the position of the flow arrows:

● Middle: The arrow will display in the middle of a segment.

● End: The arrow will display at the end of a segment.

Flow Arrow Type

Select the type of the flow arrow: filled, unfilled or standards. This defines the looks of the arrow.

Flow Arrow Size

Enter the size of the flow arrow. The size is measured front to back. Note that the size of the arrow will remain

constant, even when you zoom in or out of a document.

NOTE: Flow arrows display in a document after you execute the View - Flow command. See Display Flow

Arrows in Document.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2108

Scale Component Factor

This allows you to modify the size of a placed component. When the factor is 1 the component will display
normally, according to the scale of your document. Changing the factor to 2 or 3 doubles or triples the size of a
placed component, whereas 0.5 halves it, and so on.

Connector Display

Two options allow you to show or not the connectors in the drawing sheet:

By default,

● Show connected connectors is not selected to lighten the display

● Show unconnected connectors is selected to emphasize the display.
● Modify dynamic connectors: when you check this option and create connectors you will only be able to
define the values for three attributes - name, alignment vector and flow capability. If the option is
unchecked you will get the default values for these attributes.

Reference Components Display

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2109

● Show reference components: Selecting this checkbox displays reference components in the specification

tree. A reference component is a component that is pointed to by placed instances. It may be placed in a

catalog, or it may be built in a design document, intended for use only in that document, and not placed in

a catalog. Displaying a reference component in the specifications tree allows you to place components from

the tree (using the place component command).

● Show drawing in tree: Selecting this checkbox displays detail sheet objects in the specifications tree. This,

in turn, allows you to select them and perform various operations.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2110

Electrical Mapping

This tab deals with the catalog and objects mapping:

● the catalog definition

● the mapping between the catalog and the electrical objects

● the keyword attributes.

Catalog/Electrical objects mapping

In order to valuate the keywords automatically when the devices are stored in the catalog with their properties,

you need to define a mapping between keywords of each family and the attributes of the component type.

Catalog

The drop-down list or the Browse button lets you define the catalog of interest.
This information is displayed in the Electrical Process Interfacing tab.

Define the corresponding type for each family

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2111

Associate an electrical Type to the currently selected Family, to do so:

● select a family
● then use the combo list to select the corresponding type.

Define the corresponding the corresponding attribute for each keyword

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2112

Define for each Keyword the corresponding reference Attribute:

● select a keyword
● then use the combo list to select the corresponding attribute.

By default, these options are cleared.

The mapping definition can be set by the administrator.

In this case it can also be locked.

To get more information about the Administration Mode in CATIA, refer to Infrastructure User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2113

Design Criteria

This tab allows you to toggle settings for:

● ID Management

● 3D Design

● 3D Placement.

● Line ID file name

ID Management

Update ID on property change

When the object naming convention (ID schema) includes an attribute, e.g. nominal size, and you change its
value using the Properties dialog box, the name of the object will change to reflect the new value of the
attribute.

3D Design

Schematic Driven

Click to select Schematic Driven if you are placing parts from a schematic into a 3D design document. Used
with Piping Design, Tubing Design, HVAC Design and Waveguide Design applications.

3D Placement
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2114

Place automatic parts

When Place automatic parts is selected the automatic parts rule is invoked. You can, for instance, place an
object such as a valve and the flanges and gaskets will be placed automatically.

Line ID Options

User Defined file name

Selecting the checkbox gives you a Line ID Filename field in the Create Line ID dialog box. To explain, every
time you create a line ID, this application creates a system file for it. Normally this file is named in such a way
that users cannot recognize it. If you want to give this file your own name then you need to select this
checkbox. See also Creating a Line ID.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2115

Electrical Process Interfacing

This document lets you define the options to take advantage of external data from partners, through XML files
or from CAA V5 APIs, retrieving information from legacy databases.

This tab shows:

● the access to external data

● the electrical iXF repository path

● the electrical working catalog path

● the identifier for mapping management.

External Data Interfacing

Enable External Data Interfacing

If this option is selected, you can use external data. If not you can only work with CATIA data.

By default, this option is selected.

Electrical iXF Data Repository

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2116

System repository
Identify the folder path in which the XML files available are stored.

To do so, use this button to locate the iXF systems repository.

By default, this option is cleared.

Electrical Working Catalog

Catalog path
The catalog path is displayed in this frame. However, it is defined in the Electrical Mapping tab.

● Select the Electrical Mapping tab to select the working catalog using the Browse button .

● Locate the catalog containing the V5 parts, which Part Number attributes are referred to in the XML files.

By default, this option is cleared.

Identifier Management

Instance Name
Select this option so that the Instance Name will be taken into account instead of the Reference

Designator to insure the mapping between 3D objects and external system's objects.

By default, this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2117

It is also necessary to define the electrical object mapping regarding the working catalog.
To do so, select the Electrical Mapping tab.

Refer to the Customizing - Equipment & Systems - Electrical Mapping documentation.

When working with Electrical 3D Design and Documentation workbenches, please refer to the Customizing

section of this user's guide for information about P1 options in the Electrical Process Interfacing tab page.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2118

Standards

The Standards tab allows you to define the default standard for the active product.

Standard Names

When you click the Standards tab, the only fields available to you will be that of the active product, in this case
Piping Design, and Hanger Design, which is always available. The fields for other products will be grayed out.

Click the down arrow to display a list of available standards, and select the standard you want to use for your
session.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2119

Structure Drawing

The Structure Drawing tab contains the following categories of options:

● Molded forms: to define how molded forms will be represented on drawings.

● Members/Stiffeners: to define how members or stiffeners will be represented on drawings.

● Plates: to define how plates will be represented on drawings.

● Openings: to define how openings will be represented on drawings

● Midship designation

● Datum line

Molded forms

Linetype

Defines the linetype used to represent molded forms on drawings. Select the desired linetype from the dropdown
list.

By default, this option is set to 0.

Apply linetype on profile view only

If this check box is selected, the selected linetype is applied to profile views only.

By default, this check box is cleared.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2120

Members / Stiffeners

Graphic replacement

If this check box is selected, a line representing the trace of visible members / stiffeners is generated on
drawings. The user can specify the linetype (near side linetype) for this line.

By default, this check box is cleared and the 3D representation of members / stiffeners is generated on
drawings.

Anglular tolerance

Defines the value above which the member/ stiffener section is not represented. It is the angle between the
member/ stiffener section and the projection vector. In the example below, the angular tolerance is 15.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2121

Near side linetype

Defines the linetype to be used for the trace of visible members / stiffeners if the Graphic replacement option is
selected. Select the desired linetype from the drop-down list. A solid line font is recommended.

Show far side stiffeners

If this check box is selected, a line representing the trace of hidden members / stiffeners, below a deck for
example, is generated on drawings. The user can specify the linetype (far side linetype) for this line.

By default, this check box is cleared and hidden members / stiffeners are not shown on drawings.

Far side linetype

Defines the linetype to be used for the trace of hidden members / stiffeners if the Show far side stiffeners option
is selected. Select the desired linetype from the drop-down list. A phantom font is recommended.

Generate arrowheads

If this check box is selected, arrows are generated at ends of members / stiffeners.

By default, this check box is cleared and no arrowheads are shown on drawings.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2122

Generate material throw orientation - stiffeners only

If this check boxis selected, marks indicating the material throw orientation of stiffeners are generated.

Note: This option is valid for stiffeners only.

By default, this check box is cleared and no marks are generated on drawings.

Plates

Graphic replacement

If this check box is selected, you can define how plates will be represented on drawings.

By default, this check box is cleared and the 3D representation of plates is generated.

Generate Material Throw Orientation

If this check box is selected, marks indicating the material throw orientation of plates are shown on drawings.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Angular tolerance

Specifies an angular tolerance. If the angle between plates is less than the specified value, weld seams are
generated; if the angle is greater than or equal to the specified value, knuckle lines are generated.

By default, this option is set to 0 degrees.

Weld seam callout offset

Specifies the offset for weld seam callouts.

By default, this option is set to 0 mm.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2123

Weld seam callout thickness

Specifies the thickness for weld seam callouts.

By default, this option is set to 0 mm.

Openings

Graphic replacement

If this check box is selected, the user can define the symbols to use to represent openings on drawings.

By default, this check box is cleared and the 3D representation of openings is generated.

Center line representation

Defines the symbol used for the centerline on front views if the Graphic replacement option is selected. Two
options are available:
● Axis line

● Cross symbol: the centerline is represented by a cross.

By default, the centerline representation is set to Axis line.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2124

Butterfly symbol thickness

Defines the thickness of the butterfly symbol in mm. Applies to profile views.

By default, this option is set to 0 mm.

Midship Designation

Generate hull centerline

If this check box is selected, the hull centerline is generated on drawings.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Hull centerline text

Defines the text to be placed at both ends of the centerline.

By default, this field is blank.

Symbol representation

If this check box is selected, the midship symbol is generated on drawings.

Note that dimensions of this symbol do not change.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Datum Line
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2125

Generate datum line

If this check box is selected, a datum line is generated on drawings.

By default, this check box is cleared.

Annotation style

Defines the annotation style to use for the datum line. Options available are:

● No annotation
● Names from 3D: specifies frame names
● Position values: specifies the offset from the origin (units are indicated)
● Position values without units: specifies the offset from the origin.

By default, this option is set to No annotation.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2126

Customizing Electrical Connectivity Diagrams

This file explains the settings specific to Electrical Connectivity Diagrams workbench.
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This is done using Tools -> Options from the menu bar.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files. Settings will not be lost if you exit your
session.

Feature Dictionary Settings

From-To List
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2127

Feature Dictionary Settings

This file explains how to set the options for the user dictionary and schema Id.

1. Click Tools -> Options -> Equipment & Systems -> Electrical Connectivity Diagrams.

The Feature Dictionary tab offers two frames:

❍ User Dictionary

❍ User Schema ID

2. Fill up the fields according to the information given below.

3. Click OK when you are done.

User Dictionary
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2128
The dictionary contains object basic classes such as: equipments, sockets, plugs, switches, cables, etc.
These objects have standard properties: type, part number, etc.
According to you needs, you may want to define more properties such as subtype classes, and other specific
attributes:

In this example, four subtype classes have been defined for the Schematic Equipment class.

This is done using the Feature Dictionary Editor , available in the Start -> Equipment & Systems menu.

The classes, subclasses and their properties are saved in a document with a CATfct extension.
This file must be stored in the following directory according to your operating system:

on NT: .../intel_a/resources/graphic/
on Solaris: .../solaris_a/resources/graphic/
on Irix: .../irix_a/resources/graphic/
on Aix: .../aix_a/resources/graphic/
on Hpux: .../hpux_a/resources/graphic/

In the User Dictionary File Name field, only enter the file name and extension.

You can have more than one .CATfct file, but you will reference only one at a time.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2129
In order to access the user subclasses and properties defined in the .CATfct file, always reference an existing
.CATfct file. If a .CATfct file has been used to create data, it must not be deleted to preserve the data
consistency.

Client ID

The Client ID is defined in the Feature Dictionary Editor as a protection on the CATfct file, before creating the
user dictionary and the subclasses.

In the ID field, enter the same three characters:

User Schema ID

Within a project, it is possible to define naming rules for the schematic objects. They are used to set
automatically the Reference Designator attribute on electrical components. These rules (Schema ID) are saved
in xml files and stored together in specific directory. It is the path to this directory that you indicate in the first
field (Schema) of the frame below.
The Sequence Number is assign automatically provided that the file server is stored in a directory shared
between all the users working on the project. Enter the path to this directory in the second field (Sequence
Number) of the frame below

You can decide then to use the naming rules you have defined or not.

In the first case, check the Automatic instances ID generation.

To enter manually the Reference Designator, uncheck this box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2130

Customizing Settings
This section describes the settings you can access through the Tools -> Options command in the menu bar. These settings are
stored in permanent setting files and will not be lost when you end your session.

1. Click Tools -> Options in the menu bar.

The Options dialog box is displayed.

2. Click Equipment & Systems under the Options heading in the left column.

3. Click the Electrical Cableway Routing workbench.

The Electrical Cableway Routing tab displays:

4. Use the Separation Code File area to define segregation code rules you can use to optimize automatic routing:

❍ Select File Based to choose the segregation code file by browsing for a text file. (Creating File-Based Design Rules

describes the format for creating a text file.) You can also select Cable-Cable Check to manage compatibility between

cables.

❍ Select Rule Based to use CATIA Knowledgeware to define a rule made up of one or more conditions. Only one rule can

be implemented at a time, but this rule may combine several conditions.

5. Click the Edit button to enter a new rule: the Routing Rule Editor is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2131
The line above the input field is a reminder of the Knowledgeware syntax.

6. Use the Eraser icon to clear the input field.

7. Click OK when you are done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2132

Electrical Library

This page deals with Electrical Library options placed in the following tabs:

● The General tab lets you define the Automatic compass option.

● The Electrical Library Access tab lets you define the library and the compatibility table and their locations.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2133

General

The General tab contains one option.

Automatic Compass

Snap to placed element

If this option is selected, when you place an element, the compass snaps to this element allowing you to modify
the orientation and location.

By default this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2134

Electrical Library Access

Electrical System Functional Definition takes advantage of Electrical Library for the mapping between
functional equipments and connectors to V4 library parts. It consists of the definition of the
corresponding physical components for functional equipments or connectors.
This is done in Electrical System Functional Definition.
Moreover, a compatibility can be established between functional and physical components in order to
reduce the list of physical components available for a functional component. The compatibility sets a
relation between the External Reference attribute of the functional component and the Part Number
attribute of the physical component. These relations are stored in a compatibility table, in csv format.

The Electrical Library Access tab contains two categories of options letting you customize:

● The library names and their locations

● The location of the compatibility table.

V4 Library Access Configuration

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2135

● To add a library in the list, click the corresponding button.

The dialog box opens:

● Enter the library name and path then click OK to validate.

● You can delete or modify the library access, using respectively the Remove or Edit button.

By default, the fields are blank.

Functional-Physical Compatibility Location

To gain access to the compatibility table, enter its path (for example: c:\Temp) in the Compatibility Path

field.

By default, the field is blank.

Let's see the compatibility table structure:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2136

In this sample, the functional equipment which External Reference is ExtRefEqt is compatible with
three physical equipments which PartNumber are PN1, PN2, PN3.

For more information about the interoperability with Electrical System Functional Definition, refer to
Mapping Functional Components to Physical Parts in this User's Guide.

The Electrical Library Access can be set by the administrator.

In this case it can also be locked.
To get more information about the Administration Mode in CATIA, refer to Infrastructure User's Guide.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2137

Electrical Harness Installation

This page deals with the Harness Management options:

● the bundle segment creation

● the bundle segment naming rule

● the bundle segment connection

● the bundle segment disconnection

● the management of contextual links

● the management of branch/support links

● the bundle segment profile

● the bundle segment computation mode.

Bundle Segment Creation

Geometrical bundle is mandatory

If this option is selected, it means that you need to create a geometrical bundle prior to defining a bundle segment.

By default, this option is selected.

Work with one multi-branchable per geometrical bundle

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2138

If this option is selected, only one multi-branchable document can be created within a geometrical bundle: a single

part contains the full harness, reducing the size of the document, the number of contextual links and consequently

the update time.

However to take advantage of the ENOVIA configuration management, this option needs to be cleared if you want

to manage the effectivity at a more detailed granularity level: the branch.

Select this option if the configuration management does not need to be done at the level of each branch, but at the

level of a set of branches created in a single document.

By default, this option is not selected.

Use customized display for geometrical bundle naming rule.

When this option is not selected, the name is geometrical bundle.

If this option is selected the naming rule uses the default name corresponding to the option set up in

Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Nodes Customization tab, for the Product instance, reference

loaded item. This means that during the geometrical bundle creation, its name is not overwritten.

Refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide Customizing section.

By default, this option is not selected.

Bundle segment color

Use the chooser to define the bundle segment color at creation.

Bundle Segment Naming Rule

Bundle segment (#PN#)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2139

If this option is selected, the bundle segment name shows like this in the specification tree:

It is the default value.

Parent-bundle segment (#PN#)

If this option is selected, the bundle segment name shows like this in the specification tree:

Bundle Segment Connection

Geometrical link

If this option is selected, when the selection is completed, the bundle segment is extended to the second point

selected (which is either a bundle segment extremity or a bundle connection point).

By default, this option is selected.

Automatic link to new bundle segment

If this option is selected, the electrical connection is created at the same time as the bundle segment.

By default, this option is selected.

Bundle Segment Disconnection

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2140

Remove geometrical link at unlink

If this option is selected, when a bundle segment is disconnected from a connector, the geometrical link is also

removed and the bundle segment geometry is modified to its last but one definition point.

By default, this option is selected.

Keep unused branch points/Prompt user for deletion

When a branch is unlinked or deleted, if a branch point is no longer used, the system may keep it or prompt the

user for deletion. This happens when:

● the branch point is removed from the route definition of the branch
● the branch is unlinked from the branch point with the Unlink command
● the last connected branch is deleted using the Delete Special contextual menu.

By default, this option is set to Keep unused branch points.

Contextual Links

For the first option to be taken into account, you must first change options located in the Part
Infrastructure -> General -> External References frame:
● select the Keep link with selected object option, otherwise no external references will be created.
By default, this option is not selected.
● clear the Use root context in assembly option. If not, the links will be created to the root of the
assembly.
By default, this option is selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2141

Keep link with selected object

The object created from the selection will or not keep the link according to this option. This option can take three

values:

● Always: always creates the external reference links.

It is the default value.

● In geometrical bundle: creates external reference links only if the selected object is part of the geometrical

bundle of the bundle segment.

● Never: always creates a local copy of the selected object with no associativity.

Forbid selection outside current geometrical bundle

If this option chosen, the selection of points, supports or devices which do not belong to the current geometrical

bundle for bundle segment routing is forbidden.

By default, this option is not selected.

Branch/Support Link

Only use publications to recognize adaptative supports

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2142

In visualization mode, when the part document is not loaded, an adaptative support is recognized as such if the

ELEC-SUPPORT-RADIUS parameter is published. To take advantage of this option, you need to publish it

manually.

Refer to Part Design User's Guide - Advanced Tasks - Using Tools - Publishing Elements.

If this option is not selected, or if the parameter is not published, the support is not seen as adaptative.

By default, this option is selected.

Bundle Segment Profile

Circular profile/Any profile

If Circular profile is selected, the user interface is the same as before (up to R14), for bundle segment creation.

If Any profile is selected, the ability to manage profiles is activated: when the user creates a bundle segment, the

rib is replaced by a loft representation. More or different options are available in the dialog boxes for Branch

Definition, Bundle Segment Definition and Profile Management.

This option only works for bundle segments within multi-branchable documents.

By default, Circular profile is selected.

Keep the greatest value constant

These four options are used to know how to update the parameters of the profile when the profile area is directly
modified or updated after wire routing.

If this option is selected, the greatest value:

● between height and width value for rectangular profile

● between major and minor axis value for an ellipse

remains unchanged: only the other value is updated accordingly.

By default, this option is selected.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2143

Keep the smallest value constant

If this option is selected, the smallest value:

● between height and width value for rectangular profile

● between major and minor axis value for an ellipse

remains unchanged: only the other value is updated accordingly.

Keep the ratio constant

If this option is selected:

● the height/width ratio for rectangular profile

● the major axis/minor axis ratio for an ellipse

remains unchanged: both values are updated at the same time and keep their ratio constant.

Do not recompute values

If this option is selected:

● neither the height value/width value for rectangular profile

● nor the major axis value/minor axis value for an ellipse

are updated.

Bundle Segment Computation

The Bundle Segment Computation mode is only available under FLEX Physical Simulation license.

As a consequence, this option does not appear if FLEX Physical Simulation license is not present.

Standard algorithm
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2144

If Standard algorithm is selected, the user interface is the same as before (up to R14), for bundle segment

creation.

By default, this option is selected.

FLEX algorithm

If this option is selected, a new computation algorithm is used, giving a more realistic shape to the bundle

segments.

● Balance between performance (P) and accuracy (A)

The slider allows you to choose the balance between the calculation time (P) and the accuracy (A).

This option only works for bundle segments within multi-branchable documents.

The default position of the slider is shown above.

● Tolerance (%) in Constrained Length mode

This option is used for Constrained Length mode only.

The spinner lets you set a tolerance value: it represents the percent tolerance permitted between the initial and

final bundle segment length.

The default value is 1 (Real type).

Note: In Constrained Length mode, the default accuracy is set to a very high value in order to respect bundle

segment length better. The value set for the balance slider is not taken into account.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2145

Electrical Wire Routing

This page deals with General options used for wire routing:

● wire extremity management

● property naming to be displayed as column title

● separation code file

● bundle segment extremity color

● bundle segment update

Wire Extremity Management

Available/Favorites
● To add properties to the list, select the property in the Available list and click the --> arrow.
The Favorites list contains the properties displayed in the Interconnection frame of the Wire Extremity
Management dialog box.
● To remove properties, do the reverse: select the property from the Favorites list and click the <-- arrow.

By default, the Favorites list is blank.

Favorite column title

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2146

Select a property in the Favorites list and enter a name in the Favorite column Title field.

It is displayed in the Wire Connection Management dialog box:

By default, this option is blank.

Separation Code File

The Separation Code File area is used to define Separation Code rules to optimize the routing.

Three options, mutually exclusive are available:

● No Rule: the separation code is not used.

The routing is done according to the shortest route found.
● The separation codes may be File Based. In that case, define the path to access the compatibility table by
clicking the Browse button to choose the separation code file.
This file is used during the Automatic Routing and the Routing Simulation.
Two options are available:
❍ Signal-Signal manages compatibility between signals,
❍ Signal-Arc manages compatibility between signal and pathways.

● The separation codes may also be Rule Based, using the Knowledge language.
Only one rule can be implemented at a time, but this rule may combine several conditions.
The line above the input field is a reminder of the knowledgeware syntax.
The Eraser icon is used to clear the input field.
❍ Click the Edit button to enter a new rule: the Routing Rule Editor is displayed.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2147

❍ Enter the required elements by picking them from the lists.

The rule is now displayed in the option box.

The default value is No Rule.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2148

Extremity Color

The Color field is used to change the color of the extremity boxes.

Select a color from the list box. the result looks like this:

or

Bundle Segment Update

Diameter and bend radius to its content

Selecting this checkbox means that, after wire routing, bundle segment diameter and bend radius will be updated
based on the wires and wire groups routed through the segment.

Click to clear this option if you do not want bundle segment diameter and bend radius to be updated. In you clear
this option, and you subsequently need to update bundle segment diameter, you will have to force the update of
each multi-branchable document:

● Select the Diameter and bend radius to its content option

● Select Tools -> Force Recompute Diameter.

By default, this checkbox is selected.

Bend radius according to the wire's

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2149

Three mutually exclusive modes are available:

● Never: no update of the bundle segment minimum bend radius is performed.

● Always: the greatest bend radius of the wires routed in the bundle segment determines the segment bend
radius to be applied.
● Conditional: the wire bend radius is taken into account for update when it is greater than the bundle segment
bend radius.

The default mode is Always.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2150

Electrical Harness Flattening

The General tab lets you define:

● the synchronization report repository

● the electrical drawing catalog

Synchronization Report Repository

Path

Indicate the folder path where you want to save the synchronization report html files.

By default, this field contains: ...\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp.

Electrical Drawing Catalog

Catalog path and Catalog name

Indicate the catalog path and name where the drawing 2D details or text templates for GVS are stored.

By default, this field is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2151

Electrical 3D Design Assembly

This page deals with Electrical 3D Design Assembly options in the following tabs:
● The General tab lets you set the automatic compass

● The Harness Flattening tab lets you define the synchronization report repository

● The Harness Management tab lets you set the bundle segment creation options

● The Wire Routing tab lets you customize the options to optimize the routing.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2152

General

This page deals with the options concerning:

● the automatic compass

Automatic Compass

Snap to placed element

if this option is checked, you take advantage of the compass:

when you place an element, the compass snaps to this element allowing you to modify the orientation and

location.

By default this option is checked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2153

Harness Flattening

This page deals with the options concerning:

● the synchronization report repository

● the electrical drawing catalog

Synchronization Report Repository

Path

Indicate the folder path where you want to save the synchronization report html files.

By default, this field contains: ...\DassaultSystemes\CATTemp.

Electrical Drawing Catalog

Catalog path and Catalog name

Indicate the catalog path and name where the drawing 2D details are stored.

By default, this field is empty.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2154

Harness Management

This page deals with the options concerning:

● the bundle segment creation

Bundle Segment Creation

Bundle segment color

Use the color chooser to define the bundle segment color at creation.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2155

Wire Routing

This page deals with the options concerning:

● the separation code file

● the bundle segment bend radius update

Separation Code File

This option is used to define separation code rules to optimize the routing.

No Rule

The separation code is not used. The routing is done according to the shortest route found.

It is the default value.

File Based
The separation codes may be File Based.
In this case, define the path to access the compatibility table by clicking the Browse button to choose the
separation code file.
This file is used during the automatic routing.

Bundle Segment Bend Radius Update

According to the wire bend radius

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2156

Three modes are available:

● Never: no update of the bundle segment minimum bend radius is performed.
● Always: the greatest bend radius of the wires routed in the bundle segment determines the segment bend
radius to be applied.
● Conditional: the wire bend radius is taken into account for update when it is greater than the bundle
segment bend radius.

The default mode is Always.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2157

Structure Preliminary Layout

This page deals with Structure Preliminary Layout options in the following tabs:
● The Design tab lets you set default colors for main items.

● The Drafting tab lets you customize lines drawings.

● The Offset Data tab lets you manage the output formats for your offset data.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2158

Design Settings

The Design tab contains two categories of options: Default colors and Import option.

Default Colors

Use the color chooser to define the default color for molded forms, bounded zones (compartments) and
boundaries.

By default, colors are as shown above.

Import Option

Selecting this option stores external references (surfaces and planes) used to create molded forms and
compartments in associated CATParts.

Click to clear this option to improve performance by significantly reducing data size.
If cleared, external references are not stored in the CATPart. When editing, necessary geometry is loaded in
transparent fashion.
By default, this option is selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2159

Drafting

The Drafting tab contains five categories of options letting you customize your lines drawings:

● Geometry to display

● Waterlines view

● Waterline position

● Body plan

● Midship position

Geometry to Display

Select the option defining how the shape of the ship is shown on lines drawings: Wireframe only or Surface
only, or Both.

By default, the option is Wireframe only.

For a body plan, ensure Wireframe only is selected.

Waterlines View

Select the option defining the view looking at the ship from above: Symmetrical or Asymmetrical depending
on whether or not the ship is symmetrical about the centerline. This generates a half-breadth or full-breadth
view respectively.

Typical half-breadth view:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2160

By default, the option is Asymmetrical.

Waterline Position

Select WaterLine reference plane

If this option is selected, the waterline is located at the selected reference plane in the 3D document.

Specify value (absolute z coordinates

If this option is selected, the waterline is located along the Z direction at the absolute coordinate entered in the
Absolute Z coordinate box.

By default, the option is Specify value.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2161

Body Plan

Select the option defining the view showing the shapes of the frame lines: Symmetrical or Asymmetrical
depending on whether or not the ship is symmetrical about the centerline.

The generated view is made of two parts. If the ship is symmetrical, only one side of the ship is shown (usually
the portside) and the right-hand part looks aft at the forward portside of the ship, while the left-hand part looks
forward at the after half of the portside. If the ship is asymmetrical, both sides of the ship are shown.

Typical body plan:

To generate this drawing, you need to define the midship position (see below).

By default, the option is Asymmetrical.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2162

Midship Position

Select middle station

If this option is selected, the midship is located at the selected reference plane in the 3D document.

Specify value (absolute x coordinates)

If this option is selected, the midship is located along the X direction at the absolute coordinate entered in the
Absolute X coordinate box.

By default, the option is Specify value.

For the options in this tab page to be taken into account, you need to select Project 3D wireframe,
Project 3D points and Apply 3D specifications located in Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View -
> Geometry generation/Dress-up frame.

By default, Project 3D wireframe and Project 3D points check boxes are cleared, and the Apply
3D specifications check box is selected.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2163

Offset Data

The Offset Data tab contains one category of options to manage output formats, for example HTML pages or
CSV files, for your offset data: Global.

Global

New / Edit / Delete

Use New, Edit or Delete to add new stylesheets, and edit or delete existing ones.

Sample stylesheets (OffsetDataAsHTML.xls and OffsetDataAsCSV.xls) for two formats, HTML and CSV
respectively, are provided. By default, they are located in the installation folder under
OS/startup/EquipmentAndSystems/StructurePreliminaryLayout/StyleSheet.

Apply XSL Transformation

Select this check box to take all stylesheets into account and choose the format of your output data when
interactively generating your offset data.

By default, this check box is cleared and only XML files will be generated.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2164

Compartment and Access

The Compartment and Access heading under Equipment and Systems has two tabs.

The Placement tab determines the step value used in the Define Offsets dialog box. The dialog box displays
during the part placement function.

Enter a value in the Offset Step field. This is the step by which values will increase or decrease in the Define
Offsets dialog box.

The Openings tab allows you to specify whether or not you want an opening to update automatically when you
move the object associated with the opening. For example, if you move a door on a compartment wall, and
that door has an opening associated with it, the opening is automatically moved to the door's new location.
Select the Auto Update checkbox to activate this option.

Note that you cannot save documents modified this way unless you have permission to make changes to the
wall containing the opening.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2165

Equipment Support Structures

This page deals with the following categories of options in the General tab:
● Color

● Material

● User types

● Catalogs storage

● Sections storage

● Thickness table

Color

Use the Member and/or Plate color chooser to define the default color for members and plates respectively.

By default, colors are as shown above.

Material

Select the default material for members and plates in the Member and/or Plate list.

By default, materials are as shown above.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2166

User types

Lets you create and manage Member and Plate user types:
● Add: enter the name of the member or plate type then click Add to add user types.
● Remove: select the member or plate type in the list then click Remove to remove user types.

By default, these options are left blank.

Catalogs storage

In the Path box, enter the path of the folder containing sample standard catalog sections supplied with the
product:

downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/structuralcatalogs

where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows),

Or, use [...] to locate the folder of interest.

By default, this option is left blank.

Sections storage
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2167

In the Path box, enter the full path of the folder that will contain the list of available sections, for example
e:\Section, or use [...] to locate the folder of interest.

This folder will contain resolved user-defined sections stored here directly and any sample standard or user-
defined catalog sections accessed via the Section command or the Other section... option. It is recommended
that an empty directory be identified.

By default, this option is left blank.

Thickness table

In the Path box, enter the path of the thickness table. A sample table, ThicknessListSample.txt, is supplied
with the product.

downloaddirectory/OS/startup/components/StructuralCatalogs/Thickness
Tables/ThicknessListSample.txt

where OS is the operating system, for example intel_a (Windows),

Or, use [...] to locate the folder of interest.

By default, this option is left blank.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2168

Circuit Board Design

This page deals with Circuit Board Design options placed in the following tabs:

● The Graphic tab lets you set the color for the different areas.

● The Components tab allows you to define a catalog and other parameters.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2169

Graphic

This page deals with the options concerning constraint area color.

Constraint Area Color

Use the color chooser to define the default color for the different types of constraint area.

By default, colors are as shown above.

Update documents in session

If you select this option, your changes will apply to the current document.

By default this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2170

Components

This page deals with the options concerning:

● the working catalog

● the component default height
● the constraint use.

Default Catalog

Selected catalog file

Enter the path of the folder in which the catalog of components is stored, or use to locate the folder of
interest.

By default, this option is left blank.

Component

Default height
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2171

When importing data, the .lib file contains the component footprint.

You need to set a default height for the component so if its height is null, the Default height will be used as

the component pad height.

By default, the default height is 0.100.

With constraints

When you select this option, mechanical constraints will be generated according to the component status:

● if the component is fixed: FixTogether constraint

● if the component is placed: Offset constraint.

By default this option is cleared.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2172

Structure Functional Design

This page deals with Structure Functional Design options in the following tabs:

● The Catalogs tab identifies the path to the structure sections folder.

● The Design tab lets you define default colors and a default material-grade combination.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2173

Catalogs

The Catalogs tab contains only one category of options: Resolved Sections Folder.

Resolved Sections Folder

The Path box identifies the path of the folder in which the list of available sections is stored. The path is given
for information only.

The sections folder, like other catalogs (the standard section catalog, thickness table and opening catalog), is a
project resource and can be browsed via the Project Management command (Tools menu).

By default, this option identifies the path set in the project resource management file.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2174

Design

The Design tab contains the following categories of options:

● Color

● Material

Color

Use the color chooser to define the default color for functional stiffeners, functional plates, functional
pillars and the selected support surface.

By default, colors are as shown above.

Material

Select the default material-grade combination for functional stiffeners, functional plates and functional
pillars from the corresponding list.

This is the combination proposed when creating functional plates, insert plates, stiffeners, twisted profiles and
pillars if no default value has been specified in the Feature dictionary.

By default, the material-grade combination is Steel A100.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2175

Knowledgeware
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Knowledgeware category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize solution options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select a sub-category in the left-hand box to customize Knowledgeware options.

Business Process Knowledge Template

Product Function Optimization
Product Functional Definition

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2176

Business Process Knowledge Template

1. Select the Tools > Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed.

2. Expand the Knowledgeware option and click the Business Process Knowledge

Template tab. The following tab is displayed:

This tab lets you define:

❍ Access Rights

❍ Behavior operation

❍ Specification tree

❍ ARM Behaviors Mode

Access Rights

This scrolling list enables the expert user to determine who will be able to access the generated

workbench.

All Users
Only the User can access the workbench.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2177

Expert&Administrator
The Administrator and the Expert user can access the workbench.

Expert
The expert user is the only one who can access the workbench. This mode is used when the
expert user wants to test the generated workbench.

By default, this option is set to All Users.

Behavior operation

With messages
If checked, enables the expert to decide if he wants messages to be displayed or not when testing
the workbench.

Note that this option is available only if the user selected Expert or Expert&Administrator in
the Access Rights field.

By default, this option is unchecked.

Specification tree

All variables
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2178

All variables belonging to the technological type and all parameters of the product are displayed in
the generated workbench under the "Variables" node.

By default, this option is checked.

Technological variables only

Only the variables belonging to the technological types as defined in BKT will be displayed in the
generated workbench.

By default, this option is unchecked.

No variables
No variables are displayed in the generated workbench.

By default, this option is unchecked.

ARM Behaviors Mode

Classical file based only

Resources are searched for on disk.

ARM only
Resources are available through an ARM catalog.

ARM or classical file based

Resources used are available either on disk or through an ARM catalog.

By default, this option is set to ARM only.

3. Change these options according to your needs.

4. Click OK when done to validate your settings.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2179

Product Function Optimization

1. Select the Tools > Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed.

2. Expand the Knowledgeware option and click the Product Function Optimization tab. The

following tab is displayed:

The Invention Machine tools tab is displayed containing the following set of options:

❍ Problem presentation in tree

❍ Concept presentation in tree

❍ Knowledge Base Access

❍ File Locations

❍ Additional

Problem presentation in tree

The Problem presentation in tree section relates to the listing of the problems in the Problem

Manager.

All Problems
Choosing All problems causes the problems detected by the FunctionalSystem and the user defined
ones to appear in the list.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2180

User problems only

If you do not want to see the ones detected by the FunctionalSystem, select User problems only.

By default, this option is set to All problems.

Concept presentation in tree

All concepts
Enables you to display all concepts in the tree.

By default, this option is set to All concepts.

User concepts only

Enables you to display user concepts only in the tree.

Knowledge Base Access

The Knowledge Base Access section determines how you access the information in the Knowledge and

Innovation Server (KnIS).

Start Web Browser in CATIA

Opens the default Web Browser and displays the effects/examples from KnIS in it.

By default, this option is unchecked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2181

Start ENOVIA portal

Opens the effects/examples in the ENOVIA portal.

By default, this option is checked.

Absolute addressing
Enables you to use the absolute addressing.

By default, this option is checked.

Relative addressing
Enables you to use the relative addressing.

By default, this option is unchecked.

File Locations

IM-Prediction Database
Enables the user to indicate the path of the IM-Predication database.

By default, this field is empty.

IM-Principles Database
Enables the user to indicate the path of the IM-Principles Database.

By default, this field is empty.

Additional
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2182

Show warnings

By default, this option is checked.

3. Change these options according to your needs.

4. Click OK when done to validate your settings.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2183

Product Functional Definition

1. Select the Tools > Options command. The Options dialog box is displayed:

2. Expand the Knowledgeware option and click the Product Functional Definition tab.

The General tab is displayed containing the following set of options:

❍ Document contents at creation

❍ Functional Object presentation in

graph

❍ Functional Action presentation in tree

❍ Knowledge items presentation in tree

❍ Type of icon on Functional Elements

in graph

Document contents at creation

The Document contents at creation section relates to the document contents at creation.

Empty
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2184

After a File>New, you just see onscreen the tree

with the OBJECTS, ACTIONS, PROBLEMS,
CONCEPTS and VARIANTS nodes.

Sample Elements
In addition to the basic tree, you get onscreen a
sample of a graph.

By default, this option is set to Sample Elements.

Functional Object presentation in graph

Split Functional Object Name on several lines

By default, this option is checked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2185

String used as carriage return in Functional Object name

Functional Action presentation in tree

A: <Action > (alone)

Only the action label is displayed (example: Generates).

By default, this option is checked.

SAO: <Subject> <Action> <Object>

The action is displayed in the <subject> <action> <object> form (example: Motor Generates
Noise).

By default, this option is unchecked.

ASO: <Action> (<Subject>--><Object>)

The action is displayed in the <action>(<subject>-><object>) form (example:
Generates(Motor->Noise).

By default, this option is unchecked.

Knowledge items presentation in tree

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2186

Show parameters
Enables the user to display the parameters located under the Parameters node and related to
the object(s) or system(s).

By default, this field is unchecked.

Show relations
Enables the user to display the relations located under the Relations node and related to the
object(s) or system(s).

By default, this field is unchecked.

Type of icon on Functional Elements in graph

Indicates a current association with PPR links

Displays a red or a green light indicating that a file is linked to the system.

By default, this option is checked.

Indicates a current Generative Script

Indicates that a link exists between the object and a Generative script.

By default, this option is unchecked.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2187

Show synchronization status of the Local Parameters Cache (on

referenced systems)
Enables the user to display the existing link between two parts.

By default, this option is unchecked.

3. Change these options according to your needs.

4. Click OK when done to validate your settings.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2188

ENOVIA V5 VPM
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the ENOVIA V5 VPM category in the left-hand box.

3. Select the first tab to customize ENOVIA V5 VPM Logon options or select a sub-category in the

left-hand box to access specific workbench options.

ENOVIA V5 VPM Logon

VPM Search
VPM Navigator

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2189

ENOVIA V5 VPM Logon

This tasks explains how to define VPM Navigator settings.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command.

2. Click the ENOVIA V5 VPM category and select the ENOVIA V5 VPM Logon tab:

3. In the Server hosts section of the dialog box, add the address and port to the server host

list by entering them in the appropriate fields:

4. Click the Add button to add them to the list:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2190

5. Click the Allow User to Add Host box if you prefer to make a manual entry in the combo

listing the host servers in the Log on to ENOVIA V5 dialog box.

If your entry is valid it will be added to the server host list and will be available for future

use.

6. In the Roles section of the dialog box, add your own role list using the Add and Remove

boxes:

This should only be done if you want to restrict the number of server-defined roles i.e. the

roles made available in the ENOVIA Logon dialog box when the Check to choose a role

box is clicked (see "Logging On/Off" in the VPM Navigator User Guide). Any role you define

must be one of the server-defined roles. Otherwise, it will not be proposed in the ENOVIA

Logon dialog box.

If you prefer to make available all the roles defined by the server, leave this list empty. By

default, all the server-defined roles will then be proposed when you log on.

If you enter a list of roles, bear in mind that if none of the roles in your list

are defined by the server selected in the ENOVIA Logon dialog box, the list

of available roles will be empty.

7. Click the Load Balancing box if you want to use load balancing. For more information about

this, see "Managing User Authentication" in the section "Logging On/Off" in the VPM

Navigator User Guide.

8. Click OK.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2191

VPM Search

This tasks explains how to define VPM Search settings.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command.

2. Click the ENOVIA V5 VPM category then select the VPM Search subcategory to display the

VPM Search tab:

Make sure you are connected to ENOVIA V5 VPM. Otherwise, the Customize the

Result Window section cannot be visualized.

Results per page

3. Open the Results per page combo box to select the number of search results you wish to

have displayed in the RESULT window (the default number is 10) or you can manually enter

the number you like.

You can deselect the Fetched On checkbox but this means that all the search results will be
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2192

contained in a single page of the RESULT window which may not be convenient if the search

results in an extremely long list.

Customize the Result Window

4. You can also customize the RESULT window by selecting, for a given domain and a given

object, what columns it should contain and in what order. To do this, choose the domain and

object in the Domain and Type fields respectively and, using the Right, Left, Up and Down

buttons, move to the right those attributes to be included in the window. The next time you

open the Search workbench, the content of the RESULT window will appear accordingly.

5. Use the Clear button to empty, if necessary, the contents of the list on the right.

6. Click OK.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2193

VPM Navigator

This tasks explains how to define VPM Navigator settings.

1. Select the Tools->Options... command.

2. Click the ENOVIA V5 VPM category then select the VPM Navigator subcategory to display

the VPM Navigator tab:

Start Options
3. In the Start Options section, click the Logon at start box if you want to log on immediately

to VPM Navigator whenever you open a CATIA session.

This means that you skip selecting the Connect icon . The logon box appears
automatically.

Merge Mode
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2194

4. In the Merge Mode section, click the Merge Mode box if you want to be able to work with a

tree that combines certain aspects of both the VPM Navigator tree and the CATIA V5 Product

Structure tree:

Here is an example of a Product tree prior to a merge:

Here is the same Product tree once the merge has been applied:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2195

Background Color
5. In the Background Color section, click the combo to select a color other than the light blue

default background.

6. To access more colors, or to create your own colors, click the More Colors... option at the

bottom of the list to access the color palette (for more information on this, see the

appropriate section in "Displaying and Editing Graphic Properties" in the CATIA V5

Infrastructure Guide).

Publish/Subscribe
7. In the Publish/Subscribe section, click the Enable Publish/Subscribe daemon box to

activate the Publish/Subscribe functionality.

Once you have done this, you can change the default interval of 3 minutes in the Timer

interval box. This interval reflects the maximum time you have to wait between the event

occurrence in the database and the interactive notification in CATIA. (The higher the value

the better CATIA performance is.)

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2196

Once activated, the Publish/Subscribe daemon will continue to poll the server

at the specified interval regardless of what you are otherwise doing. You must

therefore disconnect if you wish to stop the server.

Bear in mind the following:

❍ If the server timeout is greater than the selected timer interval, then no

timeout will occur because the daemon will continue to ping the server

and the server timeout will never be reached.

❍ If the server timeout is less than the selected timer interval, then a

timeout should occur.

Expand PRC on Open

8. The Expand the PRC automatically box is selected by default. This means that when you

open a PRC it is automatically expanded to one level.

To deselect this option, just uncheck the box.

Stable Order
9. Select the Order the VPM Navigator graph nodes box. The result of this is to order graph

nodes by type i.e. PRC, GCO, instance, etc. and by name. Each of these ordered groups will

be in alphabetical order.

To deselect this option, just uncheck the box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2197

Machining Simulation
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Machining Simulation category in the left-hand box.

A number of tabs letting you customize solution options appear in the right-hand box.

3. Select the NC Machine Simulation sub-category in the left-hand box to access specific

workbench options.

General
Simulation

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2198

General

This page deals with the General option for NC Machine Tool Simulation.

● Initial Path for D5 VNC

Initial Path for D5 VNC

The path is the installation path of D5 VNC objects (e.g., D:\Delmia\vmap). You can either enter the path or

or use the Browse button.

By default, no path is provided.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2199

Simulation

This page deals with the Simulation option for NC Machine Tool Simulation.

● Tool Path Display

● Tool Path Modification

Tool Path Display

Display Tool Path during Simulation

If this option is selected, the tool path is visible when running the Machine Simulation command.

By default, the option is not selected.

Show Point
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2200

If this option is selected (and the Display Tool Path during Simulation option is selected), the TCP points

are displayed. You can select the following display options for the points:

● Color, which can be selected from the list

● Type, which can selected from the list.

By default, the options are as shown.

Show Line

If this option is selected (and the Display Tool Path during Simulation option is selected), the tool path

trace is displayed as a line. You can select the following display options for the line:

● Color, which can be selected from the list

● Type, which can selected from the list.

● Line Thickness, which can be selected from the list.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2201

By default, the options are as shown.

Tool Path Modification

Modification Range
The Modification Range determines the range of modifications. Each tool path comprises discrete segments.
The number of segments set in the Modification Range is the number of segments available for modification
when a user chooses Modify Tool Path. Similarly, when users select Partial Simulation, the Modification
Range determines how many segments of the tool path are shown.

By default, the Modification Range is set to 5.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2202

Ergonomics Design & Analysis

Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end
your session.

1. Select Tools > Options.

The Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the Ergonomics Design & Analysis category in the left-hand box.

3. Click the workbench to be customized.

Human Measurements Editor

Human Activity Analysis

Human Builder

Human Posture Analysis

4. Set options in the tabs according to your needs.

5. Click OK when done.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2203

Human Measurements Editor Tools > Options

Follow these steps to add a new population into Human Measurements Editor:

Choose Tools > Options from the main menu. Go to the Ergonomics Design & Analysis section, then

select Human Measurements Editor.

In the Anthropometry tab, there are two sections:

● User-Defined populations

A population file is a safework statistic file describing a population. It contains the user-defined

dimensions for the population under study, and follows a very precise format. The file,

my_population.sws, is an example of such a population file. See the Advanced Task, Creating a

Population File, for more details

● Change population with respect to...

This function implies that the system would respect the value or percentile subsequent to a

copy/Paste function. Actually, however the choice of units (value or percentile) by the user

applies after changing the population.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2204

Human Activity Analysis

This page describes how to customize the specifications for the RULA (Rapid Upper Limb Assessment) Analysis.

You can customize a total of nine parameters, thus influencing the result of the RULA analysis via the Tools-
>Options menu. These parameters define the threshold values for different degrees of freedom.
The default values for these parameters are shown in the image, below.

These nine parameters are used to transform the questions involved in the RULA process to angle comparisons.
For example, during the calculation of the RULA result the question might be, Is the neck bending to the side?
The question is subjective unless a threshold is set. For this particular case, the software compares the value
of DOF 2 of the subject manikin's neck with the threshold defined in the RULA settings. If the value of that DOF
is greater than 18.375 degrees, then RULA considers the neck to be bending.

If the user determines that 18.375 degrees (default threshold) is not an appropriate value for the neck, this
value may be overridden. The new value entered by the user will then be used for the next RULA calculation,
and the output will be affected accordingly.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2205

Human Builder Tools / Options

The display options are located in the Menu Bar under Tools->Options->Ergonomics Design & Analysis->Human Builder.

The tools options for Human Builder has two tabs:

● General

● Display options

The General tab has various settings for customizing.

● Constraint Resolution
Either have the constraints update Automatically, or Manually.
● Twin Segments (Reach and IK Mode)
This option modifies the user interface behavior of the 3D Reach Mode and the IK Mode. When enabled, the option makes it
possible to delete the twin segment when clicking a segment twice in a row. The twin segment is the visual representation of the
segment at its target position, that is, the visual representation of the segment at the compass location. When you activate the
IK Mode or the 3D Reach Mode and selects a segment, a twin segment is automatically created and displayed at the compass
location (it appears in yellow by default, and this is governed by the option); if you select the segment twice in a row, the twin is
deleted (assuming the option is on); when clicking on the segment again, the twin is redisplayed, and so on. This option thus
makes the selection of a segment act as a toggle for the creation/deletion of the twin.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2206

● Look At (Reach and IK Mode)

This provides a natural behavior for the manikin's vision when it is performing a reach or IK on an object. The vision of the
manikin is directed to the object the manikin is trying to pick up, which would be more like human behavior.
In most positioning scenarios, you have to manually do a reach with the line of sight for orienting the head in the direction of the
working hands. This will eliminate a step since the reach of the line of sight will be done interactively. You will also be able to
choose which type of eyes tracking the manikin will perform: eyes-only or eyes and head.
● Angle Reference
This Human Builder option allows changing the way the value of certain angles are displayed in:
the Posture Editor;
the Angular Limitations command;
the Postural Score Analysis panel.

By default, the option is off, that is, the Angle Reference is set to Default. In this (normal) mode, the angle values are
displayed in such a way that the neutral position (0deg) of a segment corresponds to its standard anatomic posture.

When the option is enabled, that is, when the Angle Reference is set to Inter-Segment, the angle values that are presented
are the values between a segment and its parent segment (as circled below). In this Inter-Segment mode, only the first
DOF (e.g. flexion/extension) of a segment is affected or modified, except for the hand (wrist), for which the modification is
applicable on DOF2 (radial deviation/ulnar deviation) as well.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2207
It is important to note that this option does not change the way the angles are calculated. When the Inter-segment option is
enabled, the only difference is that, instead of displaying the value of a DOF itself, the software rather displays the Inter-segment
value for that DOF; the Inter-segment value being the angle value between a segment and its parent segment as depicted above.

The images below are an example of output from the Posture Editor when the Inter-Segment option is enabled. Note that the Value
frame now reads Value --- Inter-Segment.

● Reports

It is possible to override the default report ID (second column of the text report) and to insert your own.

Enabling this option causes the custom report ID dialog box to pop at every update. The custom user string (as entered in the
text field) then replaces the default ID in the generated report.

Display options
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2208
The Display Tab has various settings for customizing the colors of Constraints, Vision, Twin Segments, Loads and Offsets.

The load representations can be displayed in several ways:

● Load Arrow (default): the forces acting on the hands

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2209

● Force Line: the reactive (opposite direction from the force)

● None: nothing is displayed

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2210

The Postural Score

In the Tools->Options->Ergonomics Design->Human Posture Analysis->Postural Score tab. The first Display field lists available
segments.
● Choose one or select more than one using the Ctrl key.
● Move them into back and forth from the Available field to the Favorites field with the and buttons.

● Use the and buttons to move entire lists back and forth.

● Use the buttons to move favorite segments up or down in the sorting order.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2211

Reference Information
This section provides essential reference information on the following topics:

Graphic Formats
Color Palette
3D XML Format
Layers and Layer Filters for Dittos
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2212

Graphic Formats
SVG
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2213

SVG
SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is a W3C recommendation. It is a royalty-free vendor-neutral open standard
developed under the W3C Process and it has a strong industry support.

This standard defines an XML (Extensible Markup Language) grammar for 2D graphics which includes features
such as transparency, arbitrary geometry, filter effects (shadows, lighting effects, etc.), scripting and animation.

SVG drawings can be interactive and dynamic. Animations can be defined and triggered either declaratively (i.e.
by embedding SVG animation elements in SVG content) or via scripting.
SVG files can also be visualized by external applications such as ADOBE products, JASC or BATIK.
For detailed information, you can browse the following Internet site:

http://www.w3c.org

You can access the two sections below providing a test suite for SVG implementations as well as reference
information on fonts.

SVG Interpreter
Test Suite
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2214

SVG Interpreter
This section deals with the elements rendered by the SVG Interpreter:

● Element Modules

● Interpreted Elements

❍ Hyperlink Module

❍ Image Module

❍ Marker Module

❍ Pattern Module

❍ Shape Module

❍ Structure Module

❍ Text Module

● Module Attributes

❍ Animation Attribute Sets

❍ Animation Events Attribute Module

❍ Clip Attribute Set

❍ Conditional Processing Attribute Set

❍ Container Attribute Module

❍ Core Attribute Module

❍ Cursor Attribute Set

❍ Document Events Attribute Module

❍ ExternalResourcesRequired Attribute Module

❍ Gradient Attribute Set

❍ Graphical Element Events Attribute Module

❍ Graphics Attribute Module

❍ Filter Attribute Sets

❍ Marker Attribute Set

❍ Mask Attribute Set

❍ Opacity Attribute Module

❍ Paint Attribute Module

❍ Style Attribute Set

❍ Text Attribute Sets

❍ Viewport Attribute Module

❍ XLink Attribute Module

● Interpreted Attributes

❍ Core Attribute Module

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2215
❍ Graphics Attribute Module

❍ Marker Attribute Set

❍ Opacity Attribute Module

❍ Paint Attribute Module

❍ Style Attribute Set

❍ Text Attribute Sets

❍ XLink Attribute Module

❍ Transform Attribute.

Below are detailed the modules, elements and attributes rendered by the Version 5 SVG Interpreter using the classification made by
the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
For a complete list of all SVG modules, elements and attributes that exist, you can browse the following Internet site:

http://www.w3.org/TR/2003/REC-SVG11-20030114/

W3C® is a trademark (registered in numerous countries) of the World Wide Web Consortium; marks of W3C are registered and held
by its host institutions MIT, ERCIM, and Keio.
More information can be found at the following address:

http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/2002/trademark-license-20021231

Legend
Elements that are not rendered by the Version 5 SVG Interpreter are displayed in red.
Elements rendered by the Version 5 SVG Interpreter are displayed in green.

Element Modules
Animation.Module animate animateColor animateTransform animateMotion set mpath
Clip Module clipPath
Color Profile Module color-profile
Conditional Processing Module switch
Cursor Module cursor
Extensibility Module foreignObject
filter feFlood feColorMatrix feComponentTransfer feComposite feConvolveMatrix
feDiffuseLighting feDisplacementMap feFlood feGaussianBlur feImage feMerge feMergeNode
Filter Module
feMorphology feOffset feSpecularLighting feTile feTurbulence feDistantLight fePointLight
feSpotLight feFuncR feFuncG feFuncB feFuncA
font font-face glyph missing-glyph hkern vkern font-face-src font-face-uri font-face-format
Font.Module
font-face-name definition-src
Gradient Module linearGradient radialGradient stop
Hyperlink.Module a
Image Module
image

Marker Module marker

Mask Module mask
Pattern Module pattern
Script Module script
Shape Module path rect circle line polyline polygon ellipse
Structure Module svg g defs desc title metadata symbol use
Style Module style
Text Module text tspan tref textPath altGlyph altGlyphDef altGlyphItem glyphRef
View Module view
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2216

The following modules are parsed and processed by the SVG Interpreter:
● Hyperlink module lets you associate links to primitives
● Image module defines how raster images shall be drawn
● Marker module lets you add markers at the beginning, in the middle or at the end of a drawing
● Pattern module lets you fill or stroke shapes using a pre-defined graphic object. This predefined graphic object can be defined
with vectorial shapes or a bitmap image
● Shape module groups together the drawing of graphics primitives
● Text module defines how text elements shall be drawn.

Interpreted Elements
Hyperlink Module

Elements Attributes Description

Associates a group of primitives to link attributes (local
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib, transform,
or non-local URI). This link is not active during the
a target, GraphicalEvents.attrib, Presentation.attrib,
visualization process but it is saved whenever a
External.attrib, XLinkReplace.attrib
conversion to CGM is made.

Image Module

Elements Attributes Content Model

Describes a vector or bitmap image that is defined via a
Core.attrib, XLinkEmbed.attrib, Conditional.attrib, link to an external file (relative or absolute path) or via a
Style.attrib, External.attrib, GraphicalEvents.attrib, base64 encoding (in that case, the formats that can be
preserveAspectRatio, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib, read are: BMP, JPEG, TIFF or PNG).
image
Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, Profile.attrib,
Viewport.attrib, transform, x, y, width, height Links to external bitmap images are supported but
not links to vector images.

Marker Module

Elements Attributes Content Model

Defines a group of primitives to be re-used as markers
via the marker attribute.

The markerUnits attribute is not taken into

Core.attrib, External.attrib, Style.attrib,
account, it is considered as being equal to
marker Presentation.attrib, viewBox, preserveAspectRatio, refX,
userSpaceOnUse.
refY, markerUnits, markerWidth, markerHeight, orient

The orient attribute is not taken into account and

the marker is not oriented according to the path
segment. It is always applied without any orientation.

Pattern Module
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2217

Elements Attributes Content Model

Defines a group of primitives to be re-used for filling or

stroking shapes.

The patternUnits attribute is not taken into

account, it is considered as being equal to
Core.attrib, XLink.attrib, Conditional.attrib , userSpaceOnUse.
External.attrib, Style.attrib, Presentation.attrib, viewBox,
pattern
preserveAspectRatio, patternTransform, x, y, width, The only interpreted pattern is pattern
height, patternUnits
defined with a bitmap image. Patterns defined
with a set of vectorial elements are not
recognized.
Therefore, the child of the pattern element should
be of type <image>. This enables to read Drafting
documents with a fill texture.

Shape Module

Elements Attributes Content Model

Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, External.attrib,
Style.attrib, transform, d, pathLength, Defines the outline of a shape. It is made of circular or
path GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib, elliptical arcs, lines, cubic poly-Béziers and quadratic poly-
Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib, Béziers. This outline can be closed or open.
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, Marker.attrib
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib, Defines a rectangle.
rect Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, x, y, width, height, rx, Rounded corners are not interpreted.
ry, transform
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib,
circle Defines a circle.
Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, cx, cy, r, transform
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib,
line Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib, Defines a line.
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, x1, y1, x2, y2,
transform
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib,
ellipse Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib, Defines an ellipse.
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, cx, cy, rx, ry,
transform
Defines a polyline.
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib, If the polyline is in open mode, only the outline is
polyline
Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib, drawn, the polyline is not filled.
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, points, transform

Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,

GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib, Opacity.attrib,
polygon Defines a polygon.
Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib, Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, Clip.attrib, points, transform

Structure Module
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2218

Elements Attributes Content Model

Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib, x, y, width,
height, viewBox, preserveAspectRatio, zoomAndPan,
svg version, baseProfile, contentScriptType, Groups an SVG image.
contentStyleType, External.attrib, Presentation.attrib,
GraphicalEvents.attrib, DocumentEvents.attrib
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
Groups together one or several elements sharing the
g External.attrib, Presentation.attrib,
same attributes.
GraphicalEvents.attrib, transform
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, Style.attrib,
Defines groups of elements that will be re-used. Its
defs External.attrib, Presentation.attrib,
children are thus reference elements.
GraphicalEvents.attrib, transform
desc Core.attrib, Style.attrib Describes the element.
title Core.attrib, Style.attrib Indicates the title of the element.
Core.attrib, Style.attrib, External.attrib, viewBox,
symbol preserveAspectRatio, Presentation.attrib, Defines a group of elements that will be re-used.
GraphicsElementEventAttrs
Core.attrib, Style.attrib, Conditional.attrib, transform, x,
References a predefined group of elements in order to
use y, width, height, XLinkEmbed.attrib, Presentation.attrib,
display it.
GraphicsElementEventAttrs

Text Module

Elements Attributes Content Model

Defines a text.
Core.attrib, Conditional.attrib, External.attrib,
Style.attrib, transform, x, y, dx, dy, rotate, textLength,
lengthAdjust, GraphicalEvents.attrib, Paint.attrib,
text
Font.attrib, Opacity.attrib, Graphics.attrib, Cursor.attrib,
Filter.attrib, Mask.attrib, GraphicalEvents.attrib, The text color is the one defined by the stroke color,
Clip.attrib, TextContent.attrib, Text.attrib and if the stroke color is not explicitly defined then the fill
color is used.

Module Attributes

Animation Attribute Sets

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Animation.attrib XLink.attrib
AnimationAttribute.attrib attributeName, attributeType
AnimationTiming.attrib begin, dur, end, min, max, restart, repeatCount, repeatDur, fill
AnimationValue.attrib calcMode, values, keyTimes, keySplines, from, to, by
AnimationAddtion.attrib additive, accumulate

Animation Events Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

AnimationEvents.attrib onbegin, onend, onrepeat, onload

Clip Attribute Set

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2219

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Clip.attrib clip-path, clip-rule

Conditional Processing Attribute Set

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Conditional.attrib requiredFeatures, requiredExtensions, systemLanguage

Container Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Container.attrib enable-background

Core Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Core.attrib id, xml:base, xml:lang, xml:space

Cursor Attribute Set

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Cursor.attrib cursor

Document Events Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

DocumentEvents.attrib onunload, onabort, onerror, onresize, onscroll, onzoom

ExternalResourcesRequired Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

External.attrib externalResourcesRequired

Gradient Attribute Set

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Gradient.attrib stop-color, stop-opacity
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2220
Graphical Element Events Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

onfocusin, onfocusout, onactivate, onclick, onmousedown,
GraphicalEvents.attrib
onmouseup, onmouseover, onmousemove, onmouseout, onload

Graphics Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

display, image-rendering, pointer-events, shape-rendering, text-
Graphics.attrib
rendering, visibility

Filter Attribute Sets

Attributes in
Collection Name
Collection
Filter.attrib filter
color-interpolation-
FilterColor.attrib
filters
x, y, width, height,
FilterPrimitive.attrib
result
FilterPrimitive.attrib,
FilterPrimitiveWithIn.attrib
in

Marker Attribute Set

Collection
Attributes in Collection
Name
marker-start, marker-mid,
Marker.attrib
marker-end

Mask Attribute Set

Collection
Attributes in Collection
Name
Mask.attrib mask

Opacity Attribute Module

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2221

Collection
Attributes in Collection
Name
opacity, stroke-opacity, fill-
Opacity.attrib
opacity

Paint Attribute Module

Collection
Attributes in Collection
Name
color, fill, fill-rule, stroke, stroke-dasharray, stroke-dashoffset, stroke-
Paint.attrib linecap, stroke-linejoin, stroke-miterlimit, stroke-width, color-interpolation,
color-rendering

Style Attribute Set

Collection
Attributes in Collection
Name
Style.attrib style, class

Text Attribute Sets

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Text.attrib writing-mode
alignment-baseline, baseline-shift, direction, dominant-baseline, glyph-
TextContent.attrib orientation-horizontal, glyph-orientation-vertical, kerning, letter-spacing,
text-anchor, text-decoration, unicode-bidi, word-spacing
font-family, font-size, font-size-adjust, font-stretch, font-style, font-
Font.attrib
variant, font-weight

Viewport Attribute Module

Collection
Attributes in Collection
Name
Viewport.attrib clip, overflow

XLink Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

xlink:type, xlink:href, xlink:role, xlink:arcrole, xlink:title, xlink:show,
XLink.attrib
xlink:actuate
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2222
xlink:type, xlink:href, xlink:role, xlink:arcrole, xlink:title, xlink:show,
XLinkRequired.attrib
xlink:actuate
xlink:type, xlink:href, xlink:role, xlink:arcrole, xlink:title, xlink:show,
XLinkEmbed.attrib
xlink:actuate
xlink:type, xlink:href, xlink:role, xlink:arcrole, xlink:title, xlink:show,
XLinkReplace.attrib
xlink:actuate

Interpreted Attributes

Core Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

id Identifier of the graphics primitive.

Graphics Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Displays or hides the graphics primitive.

display

Only the value "none" is interpreted.

Marker Attribute Set

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

marker-start Draws a marker at the first point of the primitive.
marker-mid Draws a marker at every other point (i.e. except the first and last) of the primitive.
marker-end Draws a marker at the last point of the primitive.

Opacity Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Defines the transparency of the primitive.

Only formats enabling to save as a raster image can manage transparency. Therefore
opacity
transparency is not displayed.

Moreover, even when saving as a raster image, transparency does not support nesting.
Defines the transparency of the primitive's outline.

Only formats enabling to save as a raster image can manage transparency. Therefore
stroke-opacity
transparency is not displayed.

Moreover, even when saving as a raster image, transparency does not support embedding.
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2223
Defines the transparency of the primitive's fill.

Only formats enabling to save as a raster image can manage transparency. Therefore
fill-opacity
transparency is not displayed.

Moreover, even when saving as a raster image, transparency does not support embedding.

Paint Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Defines the color. The <color> type is compliant with CSS2 specification for a color defined in sRGB
space. This attribute supports several syntaxes defined in [CSS2-color-types] (browse the w3c.org
Internet site for detailed information), as well as a list of keywords, each keyword being associated to a
color.

Supported syntaxes for numerical color specifications are #rgb, or #rrggbb, or rgb(R, G, B), or rgb(R%,
G%, B%).
color
Below are examples with different syntaxes that all specify the same color:

EM { color: #f00 } /* #rgb */

EM { color: #ff0000 } /* #rrggbb */
EM { color: rgb(255,0,0) } /* integer range 0 - 255 */
EM { color: rgb(100%, 0%, 0%) } /* float range 0.0% - 100.0% */
Defines the fill type.
The value "none', "current-color" or a color are supported.
fill

Gradients are not supported.

Defines the algorithm to be used when filling a polygon.

fill-rule
The only supported algorithm is "nonzero".
The "evenodd" algorithm is not supported.
Defines how the element is to be stroked.
The value "none', "current-color" or a color are supported.
stroke

Patterns and gradients are not supported.

stroke-dasharray Defines the pattern to be applied to get a dotted line.
Defines the shape to be used at the end of the outline when it is stroked: round, square, etc.

stroke-linecap
Saving in vector format includes this attribute. However, its display and its save in raster format
are not supported.
Defines the shape to be used when corners of a polyline are stroked: round, miter, etc.

stroke-linejoin
Saving in vector format includes this attribute. However, its display and its save in raster format
are not supported.
Defines the stroke width.

stroke-width
Saving in vector format includes this attribute. However, very thick strokes can be painted using a
thin width.

Style Attribute Set

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2224
Collection Name Attributes in Collection
style Groups all the attributes together.

Text Attribute Sets

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

Defines the spacing to be used between each character.

letter-spacing
The display of TrueType fonts does not support this attribute and thus, a great number of
generators (discretization).
text-anchor Defines the alignment of a text.
Defines the font family name.

font-family
Only fonts supported by Version 5 are interpreted correctly, otherwise the default font is used.
More info...
Defines the text height.
font-size
The height must be defined as a length or percentage.
Defines whether the text is to be rendered using a bold or normal style.

font-weight
The display of TrueType fonts does not support this attribute and thus, a great number of
generators (discretization) as well.

XLink Attribute Module

Collection Name Attributes in Collection

xlink:href Defines links. This attribute is interpreted for the link element or for defining raster images.
xlink:show Defines how the resource pointed to by the link is to be displayed.

Transform Attribute

The transform attribute is parsed and processed. The following transformations are applied:

● matrix(<a> <b> <c> <d> <e> <f>), which specifies a transformation in the form of a transformation matrix of six values

● translate(<tx> [<ty>]), which specifies a translation by tx and ty

● scale(<sx> [<sy>]), which specifies a scale operation by sx and sy

● rotate(<rotate-angle> [<cx> <cy>]), which specifies a rotation by <rotate-angle> degrees about a given point

● skewX(<skew-angle>), which specifies a skew transformation along the x-axis

● skewY(<skew-angle>), which specifies a skew transformation along the y-axis.

More about the font-family attribute

This property sets the font to be used to render the text. It can reference a list of font family names and/or generic family names.

● The family-name can be interpreted if the font is supported in Version 5.

 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2225
3 types of fonts are supported in Version 5:
● CATIA Version 4 fonts
● TrueType fonts
● PostScript Type 1 fonts.

These fonts are described in the section entitled Customizing Fonts for Displaying Geometry Area Texts.

● The generic-family are substituted by the following font with the V5 SVG interpreter:

❍ 'serif' is interpreted as 'Times New Roman'

❍ 'sans-serif' is interpreted as 'Arial'

❍ 'cursive' is interpreted as 'Adobe Poetica'

❍ 'fantasy' is interpreted as 'Alpha Geometrique'

❍ 'monospace' is interpreted as 'Courier New'.

For detailed information on the generic-family attribute, you can browse the following Internet site:

http://www.w3.org/TR/REC-CSS2/fonts.html#generic-font-families
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2226

Test Suite
The table below lists the SVG implementations that have been tested along with the version and the platform each
implementation is targetted at.
Note that this test suite applies to "SVG full" profile only and is inspired by a more exhaustive test that can be found at the
following address:

http://www.w3.org/Graphics/SVG/Test/20030813/status/matrix.html

Legend

Type Description
Yes Implementation passes test
No Implementation does not pass test
Partial Implementation passes part of the test, but not enough to give a full pass
Unknown Implementation has not been tested

Company Name Product Version Platform

INRIA Amaya-81a-GL Amaya 8.1a-OpenGL Windows XP

Adobe Systems ASV6p1 AdobeSVGViewer 6pre1 Windows XP

CSIRO CSIRO Full PocketSVG 1.0.6 (not yet released) Pocket PC

Corel Corporation CSV Corel SVG Viewer 2 Windows NT/2000/XP

Lerstad LXViewer08 LXViewer 0.8

Mozilla Mozilla SVG GDI Mozilla SVG project 2003080623 Windows XP

SharpVectorGraphics Viewer
SVG# 0.3 0.3 Windows XP with .NET
for .NET

CVS Repository, July

Apache Batik Batik Squiggle JDK 1.3.1
10th 2003

Dassault DSV5PLM SVG Windows W2K,2003 Server, XP

DS SVG Package 1.0
Systèmes Reader 32-64bits, UNIX

SVG Full Results

V5 SVG
Amaya- Mozilla
Test Name Inter- ASV6p1 Batik CSIRO Full LX Viewer08 ASV3 CSV SVG# 0.3
81a-GL SVG GDI
-preteur
animate-elem-02-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2227
animate-elem-03-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-04-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail OK Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-05-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-06-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail OK Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-07-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-08-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-09-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-10-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-11-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-12-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-13-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Partial Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-14-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-15-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-16-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-17-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-18-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-19-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-20-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-21-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-22-
Fail OK Fail Partial Partial OK Fail OK Fail Fail
b
animate-elem-23-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail OK Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-24-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Partial Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-25-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail OK Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-26-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-27-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Partial Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-28-
Fail OK Fail OK Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
animate-elem-29-
Fail OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
b
color-prof-01-f Fail OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
color-prop-01-b Fail OK OK OK Partial OK OK Fail Fail OK
color-prop-02-f OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
color-prop-03-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
coords-trans-01-
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
b
coords-trans-02-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2228
coords-trans-03-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
coords-trans-04-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
coords-trans-05-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
coords-trans-06-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
coords-units-01- Fail
OK OK Partial Partial OK Partial Fail Fail Partial
b
coords-units-02-
OK OK OK Fail OK OK OK Partial OK OK
b
coords-units-03-
Fail OK OK Fail Partial OK OK Partial Partial OK
b
coords-viewattr-
Fail OK OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK
01-b
coords-viewattr-
OK OK OK Unknown Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
02-b
extend-
Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
namespace-01-f
filters-blend-01-b Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
filters-color-01-b Fail OK OK Fail Partial OK OK Fail Fail Fail
filters-composite- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
02-b
filters-comptran- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
01-b
filters-conv-01-f Fail OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
filters-diffuse-01-
Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
f
filters-displace-
Fail OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
01-f
filters-example-
Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
01-b
filters-gauss-01- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
filters-image-01- Fail
OK OK Fail Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
b
filters-light-01-f Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
filters-morph-01-
Fail OK OK Fail Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
f
filters-offset-01-b Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
filters-specular-
Fail OK OK Fail Partial OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
01-f
filters-tile-01-b Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
filters-turb-01-f Fail OK OK Fail Partial OK OK Fail Fail Fail
fonts-elem-01-t Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
fonts-elem-02-t Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
fonts-elem-03-b OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
fonts-elem-04-b OK OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
interact-cursor- Fail
OK OK Fail Partial OK Partial Fail Partial Fail
01-f
interact-dom-01- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
interact-events- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
01-b
interact-order-01- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
interact-order-02- Fail
OK OK Partial OK OK Partial Fail Fail Fail
b
interact-order-03- Fail
OK OK Partial Partial OK Partial Fail Fail Fail
b
interact-zoom-01- Fail
OK Partial OK Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
t
linking-a-01-b Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK OK OK Fail
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2229
linking-a-02-b Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK OK OK Fail
linking-a-03-b Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
linking-a-04-t Fail OK OK OK Fail OK Partial OK OK Fail
linking-uri-01-b Fail Partial OK Partial Fail Partial Fail Fail Fail Fail
linking-uri-02-b Fail Fail OK Partial Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail
linking-uri-03-t Fail OK OK OK Fail OK OK OK OK Fail
masking-mask- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
01-b
masking-opacity- Partial
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Partial Fail Fail
01-b
masking-path-01- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
masking-path-02- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
masking-path-03- Fail
OK OK OK Partial OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
masking-path-04- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
masking-path-05- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
f
metadata- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
example-01-b
painting-fill-01-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
painting-fill-02-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
painting-fill-03-t Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial OK OK
painting-fill-04-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
painting-marker- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
01-f
painting-marker- Fail
OK OK Fail Partial OK Partial Fail Fail Partial
02-f
painting-render- Fail
OK OK Partial Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK
01-b
painting-strOKe- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
01-t
painting-strOKe- Partial
OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial OK OK
02-t
painting-strOKe- Partial
OK OK OK Partial OK OK Fail OK Partial
03-t
painting-strOKe- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail OK OK
04-t
paths-data-01-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
paths-data-02-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
paths-data-03-f OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
paths-data-04-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
paths-data-05-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
paths-data-06-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
paths-data-07-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
pservers-grad-01- Fail
OK OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-grad-02- Fail
OK OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-grad-03- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-grad-04- Fail
OK OK OK Partial OK OK Fail Fail Partial
b
pservers-grad-05- Fail
OK OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail Partial
b
pservers-grad-06- Fail
OK OK Partial Partial OK Partial Fail Fail Partial
b
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2230
pservers-grad-07- Fail
OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Partial
b
pservers-grad-08- Fail
OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail Partial
b
pservers-grad-09- Fail
OK OK OK Partial OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-grad-10- Fail
OK OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-grad-11- Fail
OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-grad-12- Fail
OK OK OK Partial OK OK Fail Fail OK
b
pservers-pattern- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail OK
01-b
render-elems-01- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
t
render-elems-02- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
t
render-elems-03- Fail
OK OK OK Fail OK OK Partial OK OK
t
render-elems-06- Fail
OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial OK OK
t
render-elems-07- Fail
OK OK OK OK OK Partial Fail OK OK
t
render-elems-08- Fail
OK OK OK OK OK Partial Partial OK OK
t
render-groups-01- Partial
OK OK Fail Partial OK OK Partial Fail Fail
b
render-groups-03- Partial
OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial Fail OK
t
script-handle-01- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
script-handle-02- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
b
script-handle-03- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
script-handle-04- Fail
OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
shapes-circle-01- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
t
shapes-ellipse-01- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
t
shapes-line-01-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
shapes-polygon- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
01-t
shapes-polyline- Partial
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
01-t
shapes-rect-01-t Partial OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
struct-cond-01-t Fail OK OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail OK
struct-cond-02-t Fail OK OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail OK
struct-defs-01-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail OK
struct-dom-01-b Fail OK OK Fail OK Fail Partial Fail Fail Fail
struct-dom-02-b Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
struct-dom-03-b Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
struct-dom-04-b Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
struct-dom-05-b Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
struct-dom-06-b Fail OK OK Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail Fail
struct-frag-01-t Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail OK
struct-group-01-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
struct-group-02- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail
b
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2231
struct-image-01-t OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail OK
struct-image-02- Partial
OK OK OK Partial OK OK OK Fail Fail
b
struct-image-03-t Partial OK OK OK Fail OK Fail OK Fail Fail
struct-image-04-t OK OK OK Unknown Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
struct-image-05- Fail
OK OK Unknown Fail OK OK Partial Fail OK
b
struct-symbol-01- OK
OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial Fail Partial
b
styling-css-01-b Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail OK
styling-css-02-b Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
styling-css-03-b Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK Fail Fail OK
styling-inherit-01- Fail
OK OK OK Partial OK OK Partial Partial OK
b
styling-pres-01-t Fail Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail Fail Fail OK
text-align-01-b OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial OK OK
text-align-02-b Partial OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Partial Fail OK
text-align-03-b Partial OK OK OK Fail OK OK Partial Fail OK
text-align-04-b Partial OK OK Partial Partial OK OK Partial Partial Fail
text-align-05-b Fail OK OK OK Fail OK Partial Fail Fail Fail
text-align-06-b Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
text-altglyph-01- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
text-deco-01-b Fail OK OK Partial Fail OK OK Partial Partial Partial
text-fonts-01-t OK OK OK OK Partial Partial OK Partial OK OK
text-fonts-02-t Partial OK OK OK Partial OK OK Partial OK OK
text-intro-01-t Partial Partial OK OK Fail Partial OK Partial OK OK
text-intro-02-b Fail OK OK Fail Fail OK Partial Partial Partial Fail
text-intro-03-b Fail OK OK OK Fail OK Partial Fail Fail Partial
text-intro-04-t OK OK OK OK Fail OK OK Partial Fail OK
text-path-01-b Fail OK OK Fail Partial OK OK Fail Fail Fail
text-spacing-01- Fail
OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail
b
text-text-01-b Partial Fail OK Fail Fail Fail OK Fail Fail Fail
text-text-03-b Fail OK OK OK Partial OK OK OK OK OK
text-tref-01-b Fail OK OK OK Fail Fail OK OK Fail OK
text-tselect-01-b Partial OK OK Fail OK OK Fail Fail Fail Fail
text-tspan-01-b Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK Partial Partial Partial
text-ws-01-t Fail OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
text-ws-02-t Fail OK OK OK Fail OK OK OK OK OK
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2232

Color Palette
Color list
Color chooser

Color list
Below are detailed the 16 colors available in Color list (from top to bottom):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2233

Name # RGB Display

White 2 (255,255,255)

Yellow 26 (255,255,0)

Orange 42 (255,128,0)

Red 25 (255,0,0)

Salmon 17 (255,128,128)

Magenta 32 (255,0,255)

Violet 48 (128,0,255)

Blue 45 (0,0,255)
Dodger
22 (0,128,255)
Blue
Cyan 29 (0,255,255)

Green 35 (0,255,0)
Dark
43 (0,128,0)
Green
Sandy
16 (211,178,125)
Brown
Maroon 33 (128,64,64)

Burgundy 41 (128,0,0)

Black 1 (0,0,0)

Color chooser
Below are detailed the 48 colors available in the Basic Colors area of the Color chooser (among which 16 are
provided in the Color list) from upper left corner to lower right corner:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2234

Name # RGB Display

Black 1 (0,0,0)

White 2 (255,255,255)
Sandy
3 (255,190,71)
Yellow
Golden
4 (250,190,71)
Yellow
Orange
5 (242,162,87)
Salmon
Pink
6 (234,132,102)
Salmon
Light
7 (196,179,209)
Lavender
Dark
8 (153,147,191)
Lavender
Slate Blue 9 (131,170,214)

Sky Blue 10 (129,192,232)

Sea Green 11 (148,201,191)

Light Sea
12 (174,209,155)
Green
Light Khaki
13 (191,205,144)
Green
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2235

Dark Grey
14 (126,162,151)
Green
Grey-28% 15 (193,196,192)
Sandy
16 (211,178,125)
Brown
Salmon 17 (255,128,128)

Pale Yellow 18 (255,255,128)

Pale Green 19 (128,255,128)

Spring
20 (0,255,128)
Green
Dark Slate
21 (128,255,255)
Grey
Dodger
22 (0,128,255)
Blue
Hot Pink 23 (255,128,192)

Orchid 24 (255,128,255)

Red 25 (255,0,0)

Yellow 26 (255,255,0)

Chartreuse 27 (128,255,0)

Blue Green 28 (0,255,64)

Cyan 29 (0,255,255)

Royal Blue 30 (0,128,192)

Dark Slate
31 (128,128,192)
Blue
Magenta 32 (255,0,255)

Maroon 33 (128,64,64)
Pink
34 (255,128,64)
Orange
Green 35 (0,255,0)

Teal 36 (0,128,128)

Blue Grey 37 (51,51,102)

Pale Blue 38 (128,128,255)

Plum 39 (128,0,64)

Light Purple 40 (255,0,128)

Burgundy 41 (128,0,0)

Orange 42 (255,128,0)
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2236

Dark Green 43 (0,128,0)

Aquamarine 44 (0,128,64)

Blue 45 (0,0,255)

Dark Blue 46 (0,0,160)

Purple 47 (128,0,128)

Violet 48 (128,0,255)

The 16 colors you can add in the Custom Colors area of the Color chooser are named as follows (from upper
left corner to lower right corner):

Name #

Custom 1 1

Custom 2 2

Custom 3 3

Custom 4 4

Custom 5 5

Custom 6 6

Custom 7 7

Custom 8 8

Custom 9 9

Custom 10 10

Custom 11 11

Custom 12 12

Custom 13 13

Custom 14 14

Custom 15 15

Custom 16 16
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2237

3D XML Format

3D XML (EXtensible Markup Language) is a universal, lightweight, XML-based format that enables users to capture and
share live, accurate 3D data quickly and easily.
3D XML compresses highly complex data, provides rapid file transmission and shorter load times while maintaining the
exact geometry of the files exchanged.

Unlike existing formats, 3D XML is fully based on standard XML. Therefore, any software program will be able to read,
write, and enrich 3D XML content using standard tools.

With 3D XML, the use of sophisticated 3D graphics is no longer restricted to engineering departments. These graphics
can now easily be incorporated into technical documentation, maintenance manuals, marketing brochures, websites,
email communications and many other everyday uses.

You can download the XSDs reference schemas and the 3D XML user's guide. This guide provides you with the
essential information for understanding and using the 3D XML language. The purpose of this guide is to help you write
an entire document or insert your writing into an existing document.
To download it, browse the Dassault Systèmes's Internet site:

http:\\www.3ds.com

You can also use the following interactive functionalities:

Opening 3D XML documents

Version 5 lets you open documents in 3D XML format by selecting File > Open. For more information, refer to Opening
Existing Documents.

Inserting 3D XML documents

You can insert a 3D XML file into an existing CATProduct by selecting Insert > Existing Component. For more
information on this command, refer to "Inserting Components" in the Version 5 - DMU Navigator User's Guide.

Saving documents in 3D XML format

Version 5 lets you save CATProducts in 3D XML format by selecting File > Save As. For more information, refer to
Saving Documents In Other Formats.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2238

Layers and Layer Filters for Dittos

In Version 4
Dittos are polyhedral elements from Version 4 .model documents. In Version 4, there are two types of dittos:
● compact: these dittos have a layer number comprised between 0 and 254. This layer number is taken into account
for visualization
● standard: these dittos have the layer number 255. This layer number is not taken into account for visualization.

For these two types of dittos (i.e. compact and standard), a filter can be built:

● if a filter is created, this filter replaces the current filter applied

● if no filter exists, the filter applied is:
❍ ALL for compact dittos. This means that all the contents of your document are visible
❍ NONE for standard dittos. This means that the current filter is kept and the contents are displayed accordingly.

In Version 5
The visualization filtering is computed during the draw process, which means that the visualization of dittos is filtered
when the tree is parsed.
This enables a correct visualization when a Version 4 object is instantiated many times under different dittos with
different layer filters.

Below is a sample of a Version 4 model aggregating two different dittos. These two dittos aggregate the same objects
but have different visualization filters and different position matrices:
● Ditto 1 only shows objects in layers 0 and 1
● Ditto 2 only shows objects in layers 0 and 2.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2239

Before V5R16, the visualization was computed statically (i.e. at the time the filters were applied). The result on screen
was incorrect and incoherent with the result obtained in Version 4:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2240
As of V5R16, dittos' filters are managed in a different way as explained below:

● under Ditto 1, only Ditto 3 and Object 1 are visible (Object 2 is filtered because it is assigned to layer 2)
● under Ditto 2, we can only see Ditto 3 and Object 2 (Object 1 is filtered because it is assigned to layer 1).

The result on screen looks like this:

If neither Ditto 1 nor Ditto 2 had any layer filter, the result on screen would look like this:

Layer filters created for dittos in Version 4 cannot be modified. However, you can modify the filter applied to the
Master via the Layer Filter command.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2241

Methodology
This section provides methodology and conceptual information on the following topics:

Printing
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2242

Printing

Basic Concepts
Three Scenarios to Illustrate Version 5 Printing
Configuration Scenarios for Printer Drivers
Scenario for Printer Administration
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2243

Basic Concepts

Printer vs. Driver

A driver is a software routine (i.e. a program) that controls a printer. The printer driver describes the physical
characteristics of the printer and sends data and instructions to the printer.

A printer is a peripheral device with which the driver communicates and that physically prints your documents.

Version 5 lets you configure both the driver and the printer, whatever the architecture.

Printing
With this concept, we speak from the user point of view, that is to say, what the end user sees in the user
interface.
When you want to print a document, you can use different functionalities and, according to the
functionality you choose, you will have to deal with a different user interface.

In Version 5, three modes are provided for printing documents:

● direct printing: the document is physically printed on a media such as paper, vellum, polyester, etc. To
do so, you select File > Print. For more information, refer to Printing Documents
● asynchronous printing: the document is virtually printed and stored in a file for later use. You can
decide to print it afterwards or to keep it as is. This is done via the Print to File capability available in
the Print dialog box (when you select File > Print). For more information, refer to Printing To a File
● technical illustration: you generate files in a standardized format (e.g. PDF, SVG, TIFF) that will be
used through the 3D PLM architecture. You can also use these files for data exchange purpose (.cgm,
.svg or raster files) or for documentation or publishing purposes. No printed output is required, the aim
is to produce a format compliant with external applications such as Microsoft or Adobe products.
This method is complementary to the File > Save As or Tools > Image > Capture command. For more
information, refer to Saving Documents in Other Formats or Capturing Simple Images.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2244

Architecture
This concept introduces the different architectures provided for implementing your printers.

Version 5 supports three types of architecture:

● 3D PLM architecture: architecture implemented by Dassault Systèmes. It is a driver language-oriented

architecture which means that it provides a generic solution for enabling the communication (i.e. data
transfer) between your driver and your printer.
In V5R16, HP DesignJet 4000 Series printers are natively integrated in Dassault Systèmes CATIA V5
PLM solution thanks to the support a dedicated driver. This means that users will be able to access and
control some of the printers' options using the architecture provided by Dassault Systèmes.
This customization of the 3D PLM architecture results from a partnership between Hewlett-Packard and
Dassault Systèmes.

If you are working with this type of architecture, you will select the 3D PLM Printer option in the
user interface (to access this dialog box, select File > Printer Setup then double-click Add
Printer):

To help you to differentiate more easily 3D PLM printers from other types of printers, 3D PLM printers are

identified by the symbol in the user interface.

● Microsoft architecture: this architecture offers various printing mechanisms that can vary according to
the your working environment.

If you are working with this type of architecture, you will select the Windows Printer option in
the user interface:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2245

Windows printers are identified by the symbol in the user interface.

● CAAV5 partners' architecture: thanks to a sofware development partnership established by Dassault

Systèmes, CAAV5 partners can also implement their own specific architecture, such as OCE PrintExec.

If you are working with this type of architecture, you will select the Software Partner Printer
option in the user interface:

Software partner printers are identified by the symbol in the user interface and the Printer Properties
dialog box provides additional options:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2246

Administration
Once you are familiar with the printing and architecture concepts, you can add another level to your
printing process: administration.

In big companies, it can also prove useful to put into place a corporate process in order to administer the
printers. In that case, som people called administrators are dedicated to administration tasks and their
role and privileges are totally different from those of end users.
They can, for instance, restrict the access of a group of users to a specific printer. This also implies that
the interface is impacted since all users will not have access to the same information, according to the
user group they belong to.
For a more detailed example of printer administration, refer to Scenario for Printer Administration.

In smaller companies, there might be no need to implement such a complex organization and therefore,
end users might have the ability to perform administration tasks as well.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2247

Three Scenarios to Illustrate Version 5

Printing

Direct printing
Direct (or "office") printing is the simpliest scenario which aims at printing directly the document.

1. Definition of the print settings to be applied when printing the document. This is done via the File

> Print command which opens the Print dialog box.

2. Click OK to validate your settings: they are transmitted to the printer driver which, in turn, send

the print job to the printer: the document is then printed on the output (paper, vellum,
polyester, etc.) you specified.

This is illustrated by the scheme below (click the thumbnail to see the full-size picture):

Asynchronous printing
Asynchronous (or "virtual") printing lets you work in a more complex environment because in that case,
third-parties, a plot server and distributed printers are involved.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2248

1. From a Version 5 session, selection of the Print to File check box to store the image printout in a
file in the location you specify. This is done via the File > Print command which opens the Print

dialog box.

or

From a third-party application (e.g. Multi-CAD), use the print functionality

to store the image printout in a file or in database.

2. The plot server or database application retrieves the file.

3. The file containing the printout image is browsed in a viewer such as a CAD or a Web viewer.

or

The file containing the printout image is sent to a printer. Depending on

the options you selected in step, either one or many documents are

printed.

This is illustrated by the scheme below (click the thumbnail to see the full-size picture):

Technical illustration
Technical illustration lets you generate documents that will be available on a wide variety of supports. This
printing mode is also a "virtual" printing mode since no direct printing is required, it is a file format-
oriented mode.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2249

1. From a Version 5 session, open the document (SVG, JPEG, etc.) to be printed then select File >

Print. In the Print dialog box, select the Print to File check box to store the image printout in
the location you specify.

or

From a third-party (e.g. Multi-CAD), use the print functionality to store the

image printout in a file or in the documentation database.

2. The server environment retrieves the document from the database.

3. The document is then transferred to people such as technical writers or web designers who can

work on the document as needed.

4. Finally, the document can be displayed on the world-wide web, printed in books, stored on CD-

ROMS, etc.

This is illustrated by the scheme below (click the thumbnail to see the full-size picture):
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2250

Configuration Scenarios for Printer Drivers

These scenarios show you how to define drivers' advanced configuration options for the following 3D PLM
printers:
● Raster

● CGM (described in "Configuring an Existing Printer")

● PDF

● PostScript

● HPGL

● HPGL2

● HP DesignJet 1000 Series

● HP DesignJet 4000 Series

● SVG

● EMF.

Select File > Printer setup... to open the Printers dialog box:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2251

You can also access the Printers dialog box using one of these two methods:
● by selecting Start > Programs > CATIA > Tools > Printers V5Rn

where "n" is the current release number

● by accessing the directory /usr/Dassault Systemes/B0n (on UNIX) or C:\Program Files\Dassault

Systemes\B0n\intel_a\code\bin (on Windows) then entering the following command:

CATPrinterManager

where "n" is the current release number

Scenario 1: Raster
1. Right-click the Raster printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click the printer name) to

access the Printer Properties dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2252

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

3. Select the format to be used from the Format list: TIFF, BMP, JPEG, WMF, etc.

You can also set more precisely the desired DPI value using the Dpi box.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2253

4. In the Options area, select the compression type:

● No compression

● Packbits

● JPEG

● HUFFMAN

● Fax Group 4.

If you choose the JPEG type, the Quality slider is activated to let you specify the compression
quality: the higher the rate, the better the quality.

5. When finished, click OK to validate and close the Advanced Configuration dialog box.

Scenario 2: PDF

No advanced configuration options are available when using a PDF printer.

Scenario 3: PostScript
1. Right-click the PostScript printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click the printer name)

to access the Printer Properties dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2254

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

3. Choose the level for PostScript generation by selecting the appropriate option: Level 1 or Level 2.

4. If you want to use the EPS format, select the Encapsulated PostScript check box. EPS does not

contain page description directives and is designed for portable exchange between applications and

platforms. It may also be included in a larger PostScript document.

5. Click OK to validate.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2255

Scenario 4: HPGL
Note that you can also configure an HPGL printer via the HPGL2 advanced configuration options.

1. Right-click the HPGL printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click the printer name) to

access the Printer Properties dialog box.

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2256

The Pens tab lets you create a mapping between the original Version 5 document and the result

in HPGL format by defining the width and color to be applied to pens that will be used. Each of

the pens is associated to a color (RGB) and a thickness (in millimeters).

To do so, the pens to be used are selected using the following priority order:

● first, by their color in order to use a color matching (exactly or as close as possible) the one of

the original document

● then, by their width. The width that is used corresponds either to the real width (i.e. as

defined in the model) of the element to be drawn or to the width of the pen, depending on the

option you activate for the Thickness Management.

The goal of this capability is to have the printing that best suits your device specifications with

respect to the limitations inherent in HPGL printer language.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2257

3. Select a pen from the list.

As soon as a pen is selected, the other fields displayed below are activated and you can then

specify the color and the width to be applied to the selected pen.

By default, each pen you select is already assigned a color and a width but you can modify them

as needed using the Color list and the Width box.

4. Select the Enable check box if you want the selected pen to be used when printing. When a pen is

active, it is identified by a "+" sign in the Enable column.

Note: if you are not satisfied with the parameters you defined, you can click the Reset button to

recover the original parameters.

5. Access the Options tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2258

6. Indicate the location at which the pen will start using the Origin list:

● Center

● Lower Left Corner

● Upper Left Corner

● Lower Right Corner

● Upper Right Corner.

You can also:

● select the Relative Move Pen check box if you want the pen to move relative to current
coordinates (this is the default)
● select the thickness to be used for printing by selecting one of these two options:
❍ Model Thickness if you want to print according to the model thickness (this is the
default). Pens are parsed until a pen with a thickness matching exactly the one of the
model is found
❍ Pen Thickness if you want to print according to the pen thickness. Pens are parsed and
the first pen whose color corresponds exactly or is as close as possible to the original
color, whatever its thickness, is selected.
For instance, if you define a pen as "Red" (RGB = 255-0-0) with a thickness of 0.18 mm,
then each red curve in the model will be printed with a thickness of 0.18 mm and this,
even though the original curve thickness in the model is 5 mm.

7. Click OK to validate and close the HPGL Configuration dialog box.

Scenario 5: HPGL2
1. Right-click the HPGL2 printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click the printer name) to

access the Printer Properties dialog box.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2259

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

The Enable Cutter check box is selected by default and means that the media is cut after
printing.

3. Select the desired Media Type (i.e. the type of paper to be used) from the list: paper, polyester

film, etc.

4. Define the Quality Level using the slider.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2260

5. Select the Restrict to HPGL check box if you want to use the printer for HPGL data only.

Activating this option also activates the HPGL Configuration... button which lets you access the

HPGL Configuration dialog box.

6. When finished, click OK to validate.

Scenario 6: HP DesignJet 1000 Series

1. Right-click the HP DesignJet 1000 Series printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click

the printer name) to access the Printer Properties dialog box.

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2261

In the Options tab, you need to:

3. Specify how the printer will be loaded using the Media Source list: Roll or Manual feed.

For printers with an integrated multi-roll feeder, you also need to select the MultiRollFeeder

check box ption to specify the roll to be used: to do so, select the desired roll number from the

Media Source list, i.e. "Roll 1", "Roll 2", etc.

4. Use the Media Type list to indicate the type of media to be used: paper, vellum, polyester film, etc.

5. Select the Quality Level to be used: Fast, Normal or Best. By default, Best is selected.

6. Access the Advanced tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2262

7. By default, all the options displayed are selected but you can deactivate them if needed:

● Line Sharpening (RET) enhances detail in line drawing. It is especially useful for drawings

with a lot of details

● Enable Cutter activates the cutter mechanism which cuts the media after printing

● Inked Area takes the first object encountered in the plot and places that object at the origin

(0,0 coordinate). After the last object is printed, the printer adds the margin and the plot is

complete. When this option is activated, white area around the plot, as well as page size

information coming from the software is ignored.

This option is recommended when using roll media and when centering is not important. This

option also provides optimal paper usage

● Autorotate lets the printer decide at print time which orientation requires the least

media for your drawing based on the "roll media" that is loaded.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2263

8. When finished, click OK to validate.

Scenario 7: HP DesignJet 4000 Series

HP DesignJet 4000 Series printer is now natively integrated in Dassault Systèmes CATIA V5 PLM solution
thanks to the support of a dedicated driver.
HP DesignJet 4000 Series printers allow you to rapidly produce higher-quality large-format prints,
addressing demand for improved printing precision, especially for technical drawings. You also benefit from
having full UNIX-Windows compatibility and the same functional level on both platforms.

For detailed information, you can browse the HP Internet site:

http://www.hp.com

1. Right-click the HP DesignJet 4000 Series printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click

the printer name) to access the Printer Properties dialog box.

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2264

In the Options tab, you need to:

3. Specify how the printer is loaded using the Source is list: Roll or Manual feed.

4. Use the Media Type list to indicate the type of media to be used: paper, vellum, polyester film, etc.

5. Select the Print Quality to be used: Fast (draft), Normal (final) or Best (enhanced). By

default, Normal (final) is selected.

6. Indicate the Resolution to be applied: either 300, 600 or 1200. By default, "600" is selected.

7. Access the Advanced tab:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2265

8. By default, all the options displayed are selected but you can deactivate them if needed:

● Optimize for Drawings/Text enhances detail in line drawing. It is especially useful for

drawings with a lot of details

● Maximum Detail enables to view as much detail as possible by increasing both the printing

and rendering resolution

● Disable Automatic Cutter deactivates the cutter mechanism which cuts the media after

printing

● Remove Top/Bottom Blank Areas takes the first object encountered in the plot and places

that object at the origin (0,0 coordinate). After the last object is printed, the printer adds the

margin and the plot is complete. When this option is selected, white area around the plot, as

well as page size information coming from the software is ignored.

This option is recommended when using roll media and when centering is not important. This

option also provides optimal paper usage

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2266

● Autorotate lets the printer decide at print time which orientation requires the least

media for your drawing based on the "roll media" that is loaded.

9. When finished, click OK to validate.

Scenario 8: SVG
1. Right-click the SVG printer in the list then select Configure (or double-click the printer name) to

access the Printer Properties dialog box.

2. Click the Advanced Configuration... button.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2267

3. In the Image tab, use the list to indicate if you want the image to be stored in an external JPEG file

(with links to the SVG file) or to be embedded in the SVG document.

4. The Text Rendering area lets you specify whether the text should be rendered as a tessellated text

or using system fonts:

● selecting Tesselated text means that all glyphs will be displayed as

polygons. If you choose this option, skip the next step

● selecting Use system font lets you replace the font of your choice by

another one.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2268

5. If you selected Use system font in the Text Rendering area, the Font Substitutions area is

activated to let you replace the font of your choice by another one. To do so, first select a font in the

list displayed to the left then select the appropriate option:

❍ Discretized: means that when the image suffers from a lack of points, points are distributed to

fill the gaps and ensure linearity

❍ Not Substituted: means that the selected is not replaced by another font, it is kept as is

❍ Substituted: means that the selected font is replaced by a suitable replacement font you select

in the list displayed to the right of the radio buttons. This list is activated as soon as the

Substituted option is selected.

6. When finished, click OK to validate.

Scenario 9: EMF

No advanced configuration options are available when using a EMF printer.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2269

Scenario for Printer Administration

This scenario shows an example of printer administration and explains what happens when three different
administrators successively protect printer directories and lock printer creation directories and describes
the impact on the end user inheriting these settings.

We assume that you are already familiar with concatenation mechanisms and locking/unlocking settings.

The scenario involves three administration levels and one end user:
● Admin1 (the higher administration level) has reset CATReferenceSettingPath to E:\users\Admin1:
${CATReferenceSettingPath}=E:\users\Admin1
● Admin2 has reset CATReferenceSettingPath to E:\users\Admin2:
${CATReferenceSettingPath}=E:\users\Admin1;E:\users\Admin2
● Admin3 has reset CATReferenceSettingPath to E:\users\Admin3:
${CATReferenceSettingPath}=E:\users\Admin1;E:\users\Admin2;E:\users\Admin3
● User1 is the end user.

1. Admin1 accesses the Printers tab and:

● protects the paths referenced by ${CATReferenceSettingPath}

● does not protect the paths referenced by ${CATUserSettingPath}

● does not lock the Printer Directory List area

● sets ${CATReferenceSettingPath} as the printer creation directory.

The result is:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2270

2. Admin1 now creates a printer by selecting File > Printer Setup > Add Printer: this new printer

is created in:

E:\users\Admin1\Printers

"Printers" has been added at the end of the path because when the printer creation directory

has no "Printers" father directory, the application automatically adds it to the path.

As ${CATReferenceSettingPath} has been protected in step 1, Admin1 can only display the

printer properties but is not authorized to modify any printer parameter.

3. Admin2, who inherits locked and unlocked values from the higher administration level (i.e.

Admin1) accesses the Printers tab and sees that printer directories referenced by

${CATReferenceSettingPath} have been protected:

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2271

4. Admin2 creates a printer and this printer is created in...

E:\users\Admin2\Printers

...since ${CATReferenceSettingPath} references several concatenated paths and thus, the new

printer is created in the last path.

Admin2 has access to two printers: the one he has created and the one created by Admin1.

He cannot modify the printer parameters of these two printers since

${CATReferenceSettingPath} has been protected by Admin1 (unless he cancels the protection

by clicking the red symbol to make it turn green ).

5. Admin3, who inherits locked and unlocked values from Admin1 and Admin2, accesses the Printers

tab then:

● adds a directory using an environment variable named ${Admin3PrintersPath} that already

references other printers

● locks the new ${Admin3PrintersPath} variable

● locks the Printer Directory List area

● changes the Printer Creation Directory to ${CATUserSettingPath}

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2272

● locks the Printer Creation Directory.

The result is now:

This means that Admin3 has access to the printers created by Admin1 and Admin2 but cannot
modify their parameters.

Admin3 has also access to the printers referenced by the ${Admin3PrintersPath} variable but
cannot modify them since a protection has been applied to ${Admin3PrintersPath}.

6. User1, who inherits values from Admin1, Admin2 and Admin3, accesses the Printers tab:
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2273

User1 can use the printers created by Admin1, Admin2 and Admin3 but cannot modify their

parameters.

As shown in the above capture, the User1 cannot modify the data displayed in the Printer

Directory List area and in the Printer Creation Directory box because they have been locked

by Admin3.

Therefore, any printer created by User1 will be created in ${CATUserSettingPath}, which is the

default location, and User1 will be able to modify their parameters.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2274

Glossary

A
access key The key that corresponds to an underlines letter on a menu or control (also referred to as
a mnemonic access key).

active end The ending point for a selected range of objects. It is usually established at the object
logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user releases a mouse button.
Compare anchor point.

active object Object currently being edited.

active window The window in which a user is currently working or directing input. An active window is
typically at the top of the Z order and is distinguished by the color of its title bar. Compare
inactive window.

album Collection of images you generate with the Tools > Image>Capture... command.

anchor point The starting point for a selected range of objects. An anchor point is usually established at
the object logically nearest the hot spot of the pointer when a user presses a mouse
button. Compare active end.

application Window containing the Version 5 application.

window

apply To commit a set of changes or pending transactions made in a secondary window, typically
without closing that window.

assembly An entity composed of various components which have been positioned relative to each
other.

auto-repeat An event or interaction that is automatically repeated. Auto-repeat events usually occur
when a user holds down a keyboard key or presses and holds a special control (for
example, scroll bar buttons).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2275

B
background Area in document windows to which you can apply a background color.

box edit A standard Microsoft Windows interface control that provides a discrete area for entering
each character. A user can also edit text within the control.

C
cancel To halt an operation or process and return to the state before it was invoked. Compare
stop.

cascading menu A menu that is a submenu of a menu item (also referred to as a hierarchical menu, child
menu, or submenu).

check box A standard Windows control that displays a setting, either selected (set) or cleared (not
set). Compare option button.

child menu See cascading menu.

click (v.) To position the pointer over an object and then press and release a mouse button. See
also press.
(n.) The act of clicking.

clipboard The area of storage for objects, data or their references after a user carries out a Cut or
Copy command.

clipping Depth effect for viewing parts or all of a 3D object between two planes.

character set A character is any symbol used for the organization, control, or representation of data. A
group of such symbols used to describe a particular language. Each language (or group of
languages) has its character set

combo box A standard Windows control that combines a text box and interdependent list box.

command button A standard Windows control that initiates a command or sets an option (also referred to as
a push button).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2276
component A reference integrated in an assembly. A component possesses characteristics related to
how it is integrated in an assembly (for example, its relative location in an assembly).

context-sensitive Information about an object and its current condition. It answers the questions "What is
Help this" and "Why would I want to use it?" Compare reference Help and task-oriented Help.

contextual menu A menu that is displayed at the location of a selected object (also referred to as a shortcut
menu). The menu contains the commands that are contextually relevant to the selection,
and the most frequently used. You display the contextual menu by right-clicking.

contiguous A selection that consists of a set of objects that are logically sequential or adjacent to each
selection other (also referred to as range selection).

current State of an object when selected.

cursor A generic term for the visible indication of where a user's interaction will occur. See also
input focus, insertion point, and pointer.

D
default An operation or value that the system or application assumes, unless a user makes an
explicit choice.

desktop The visual work area that fills the display. The desktop is also a container and can be used
as a convenient location to place objects stored in the file system.

dialog box A secondary window that gathers additional information from a user. A dialog box usually
contains one or more controls, such as buttons, list boxes, combo boxes, and edit boxes,
with which the user enters text, chooses options, or directs the action of the command.

document A common unit of data (typically a file) used in user tasks and exchanged between users.
When saved on disk, a document is given a unique filename by which it can be retrieved.

document window A window that provides a primary view of a document (typically its content).
 CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2277
double-click (v.) To press an release a mouse button twice in rapid succession.
(n.) The act of double-clicking.

duplicate Performs mirroring or pattern operations on an active object.

E
edit field See text box.

Edit menu A common drop-down menu that includes general purpose commands for editing the
current object, such as Cut, Copy, and Paste.

ellipsis The "..." suffix added to a menu item or button label to indicate that the command
requires additional information to be completed. When a user chooses the command, a
dialog box is usually displayed for the user input of this additional information.

embedded object See OLE embedded object.

enter (v.) To type a character from the keyboard.

(n.) A classification of an object based on its characteristics, behavior, and attributes.

extended selection A section technique that is optimized for the selection of a single object or single range
using contiguous selection techniques (that is, canceling any existing selection when a new
selection is made). However, it also supports modifying an existing selection using disjoint
selection techniques.

F
filter Tool for organizing elements of V4 model document into layers.

File menu A common drop-down menu that includes commands for file operations, such as Open,
Save, and Print.

font A set of attributes for text characters.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2278
font size The size of a font, typically represented in points.

G
geometry area Area of a document window in which application data are displayed and edited.

glyph A generic term used to refer to any graphic or pictorial image that can be used on a button
or in a message box. Compare icon.

H
handle An interface element added to an object that provides a control point for moving, sizing,
reshaping, or other operations pertaining to that object.

Help menu A common drop-down menu that includes commands that provide access to Help
information or other forms of user assistance. See also context-sensitive Help, and task-
oriented Help.

hierarchical menu See cascading menu.

hold down To continue pressing a keyboard key, or mouse button.

hot spot The specific portion of the pointer (or pointing device) that defines the exact location, or
object, to which a user is pointing.

I
icon A pictorial representation of an object. Compare glyph.

inactive window A window in which a user's input is not currently being directed. An inactive window is
typically distinguished by the color of its title bar. Compare active window.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2279
in-place activation The ability to edit an OLE embedded object in place, without opening it into its own
window.

insertion point The location where text or graphics will be inserted (also referred to as the caret). Also
used for text box controls to indicate input focus.

interoperability ● Ability to exchange data between CATIA Version 4 and Version 5

● Ability to exchange Version 5 data between Version 5 workshops
● Ability to exchange data between Version 5 and OLE-compliant applications
● Ability to exchange data between CATIA and ENOVIAVPM, ENOVIA LCA or VPM
Navigator.

J
jump A special form of a link that navigates to another location (also referred to as a hyperlink).

L
label The text (or graphic) that identifies a control (also referred to as a caption).

landscape An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example, screen or
paper) is horizontal.

link (v.) To form a connection between two objects.

(n)) A reference to an object that is linked to another object. See also OLE linked object.

link path The descriptive form of referring to the location of a link source (also referred to as a
moniker).

list box A standard Windows control that displays a list of choices.

M
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2280
marquee See region selection.

maximize To make a window its largest size. See also minimize.

menu A list of textual or graphical choices from which a user can choose. See also contextual
menu.

menu bar A horizontal bar at the top of a window, below the title bar, that contains menus.

menu button A command button that displays a menu.

menu item A choice on a menu.

menu title A text or graphic label that designates a particular menu. For drop-down menus, the titles
is the entry in the menu bar; for cascading menus the menu title is the name of its parent
menu item.

message box A secondary window that is displayed to inform a user about a particular condition.

minimize To minimize the size of a window: in some cases, this means to hide the window. See also
maximize.

mirror An operation creating a 3D object by duplicating an initial object. The duplication is defined
by symmetry.

model CATIA Version 4 model.

model document Document containing a CATIA Version 4 model.

most recently usedList of most recently used files (MRU) located in the File menu for easy access.

mouse A commonly used input device that has one or more buttons used to interact with a
computer. It is also used as a generic term to include other pointing devices that operate
similarly (for example, trackballs and head pointers).

O
object An entity or component identifiable by a user that can be distinguished by its properties,
operations, and relationships.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2281
OLE Object Linking and Embedding. The name that describes the technology and interface for
implementing support for object interaction.

OLE embedded A data object that retains the original editing and operating functionality of the application
object that created it, while physically residing in another document.

OLE linked object An object that represents or provides an access point to another object that resides at
another location in the same container or a different, separate container. See also link.

operation A generic term that refers to the actions that can be done to or with an object.

option button A standard Windows control that allows a user to select from a fixed set of mutually
exclusive choices (also referred to as a radio button). Compare check box.

P
package An OLE encapsulation of a file so that it can be embedded in an OLE container.

part A 3D entity obtained by combining different features. It is the content of a CATPart

document.

point (v.) To position the pointer over a particular object an location.

(n.) A unit of measurement for type (1 point equals approximately 1/72 inch).

pointer A graphic image displayed on the screen that indicates the location of a pointing devices
(also referred to as a cursor).

portrait An orientation where the long dimension of a rectangular area (for example, screen or
paper) is vertical.

press To press and release a keyboard key. See also click.

preview Tool allowing you to view a document or album image prior to printing.

product A 3D entity which contains several components.

progress indicator Any form of feedback that provides the user with information about the state of a process.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2282
property Attribute or characteristic of an object that define its state, appearance, or value.

push button See command button.

R
radio button See option button.

range selection See contiguous selection.

redo Repeat the last operation.

reference A product or part with its own characteristics. Compare component.

reference Help A form of online Help information that can contain conceptual and explanatory information.
Compare task-oriented Help and context-sensitive Help.

region selection A selection technique that involves dragging out a bounding outline (also referred to as a
marquee) to define the selected objects.

restore window To make a window back to its previous size and location.

right-click Click using the right mouse button (to display contextual menu).

S
scale Operation that resizes the contents of document prior to printing or previewing.

scroll To move the view of an object or information to make a different portion visible.

scroll arrow A component of a scroll bar that allows the information to be scrolled by defined
button increments when the user clicks it. The direction of the arrow indicates the direction in
which the information scrolls.

scroll bar A standard Windows control that supports scrolling.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2283
scroll box A component of a scroll bar that indicates the relative position (and optionally the
proportion) of the visible information relative to the entire amount of information. The user
can drag the scroll box to view areas of information not currently visible.

section view 3D view of a cross-section generated using a plane.

select To identify one or more objects upon which an operation can be performed.

selection An object or set of objects hat have been selected.

selection handle A graphical control point of an object that provides direct manipulation support for
operations of that object, such as moving, sizing, or scaling.

selection set A group of selected objects that you can store and retrieve.

Send To Tool used for sharing document files with other users.

settings Set of setup parameters and user preferences stored in non-editable files.

shell A generic term that refers to the interface that allows the user control over the system.

shortcut A generic term that refers to an action or technique that invokes a particular command or
performs an operation with less interaction than its usual method.

shortcut icon A link presented as an icon that provides a user with access to another object.

shortcut key A keyboard key or key combination that invokes a particular command (also referred to as
an accelerator key).

shortcut menu See contextual menu.

slider A standard Windows control that displays and sets a value from a continuous range of
possible values, such as brightness or volume.

specification tree Area of the document window reserved for viewing the design specifications of a part,
presented in the form of a tree structure.

spin box A control composed of a text box and increment and decrement buttons that allow a user
to adjust a values from a limited range of possible values.

split An operation allowing splitting 3D objects using a plane.

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2284
standard view Typical view available in 3D workshops: top, bottom, front, back, left, right, isometric.

status bar An area that allows the display of state information of the information being viewed in the
window, typically places at the bottom of a window.

stop To halt a process or actions, typically without restoring the state before the process began.
Compare cancel.

STRIM/STYLER Model files generated by STRIM or STYLER. These files have the same ".tdg" extensions.
models They are read and converted to Version 5 documents for further processing.

submenu See cascading menu.

T
taskbar A special toolbar that docks on an edge of the desktop supplied by the system. The taskbar
includes the Start button, buttons for each open primary window, and a status bar.

task-oriented Help Information about the steps involved in carrying out a particular task. Compare context-
sensitive Help and reference Help.

template An object that automates the creation of new objects of a particular type.

text box A standard Windows control in which a user can enter an edit text (also referred to as the
edit field).

toolbar A frame or special area that contains a set of other controls.

tooltip A standard Windows control that provides a small pop-up window that provides descriptive
text such as a label, for a control or graphic object.

U
unavailable The state of a control or data whose normal functionality is not presently available to a
user (also referred to as dimmed).
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2285
undo To reverse one operation performed on an object.

user-defined view 3D view an end user can generate by customizing view parameters. The view can be
named. Also referred to as named view.

V
View toolbar Toolbar containing viewing tools.

viewing tools Tools for viewing contents of current document in different ways.

VRML Virtual Reality Markup Language. A vector-based language for modeling three-dimensional
environments. It sends ASCII text files over the Internet, which are translated by the
VRML viewing engine at the other end. VRML complements HTML. This format is useful for
viewing Version 5 data using a Web browser.

W
window A standard Windows object that displays information. A window is a separately controllable
area of the screen that typically has a rectangular border.

workbench Set of tools for completing specific tasks. Each type of document can be edited with a
document-specific set of tools.

workspace A window or task management technique that consists of a container holding a set of
objects, where the windows of the contained objects are constrained to a parent window.
Similar to the multiple document interface, except that the window displayed within the
parent window are of objects that are also contained in the workspace.
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2286

Index
Numerics
A B C D E F
G H I J K L
M N O P Q R
S T U V W Z
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2287

Index Numerics

Numerics
2D inertia

measuring
3D compass

free rotation angle

locking current orientation

locking to local axis system

manipulation

manipulation bounding box

privileged plane

snapping to selected objects

viewpoint manipulation

3D XML

3Dx Device toolbar

3Dx Dominant On/Off command

3Dx Fast Zoom command

3Dx Rotation On/Off command

3Dx Sensitivity Decrease command

3Dx Sensitivity Increase command

3Dx Sensitivity Reset command

3Dx Translation On/Off command

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2288

Index A

A
Accelerate command
acquisition agent

searching
actions

redoing

repeating

undoing

activate an external parameter

activating

viewing tools

activating a component

activity

Add Attributes command

Add to favorites option

adding

PostScript fonts

printer

adding a row to a design table external file

Advanced mode

searching
album

deleting images

editing images

playing videos

previewing images

printing images

renaming images

saving images to other formats

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2289

Album icon

Album... command
ambient

light source

angles
applying

color

applying ranges to parameters by using a rule

associative link
attribute

searching
automatic

saving

automation directory
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2290

Index B

B
banner options

printing
batch

CATDUA V5

Batch Monitor

bitstream fonts

boolean parameter

bounding outline
brightness

light source

Browse window

Buildtime view

button mapping
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2291

Index C

C
Capture toolbar

Capture... command
capturing

images

multi-view configuration

selected areas of images

simple images

Cascade command

CATDownwardCompatibility utility

CATDUAV5 utility

CATGraphSize

CATKnowledgeBuildPath setting

CATKnowledgePath environment variable

CATOptionsMgt command

CATStdLayerAndFilter file

CATStdTypeLayerAndFilter file

CATUIDownwardCompatibility utility

catutil utility

CGM formats
changing

view

Close command
closing

documents

Collapse All command

collapsing

specification tree
collision detection
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2292

Walk Mode
color

applying

background

customizing

light source

searching
color options

printing

color palette
command

3Dx Dominant On/Off

3Dx Fast Zoom

3Dx Rotation On/Off

3Dx Sensitivity Decrease

3Dx Sensitivity Increase

3Dx Sensitivity Reset

3Dx Translation On/Off

Accelerate

Add Attributes

Album...

Capture...

Cascade

CATOptionsMgt

CATPrinterManager

Close

Collapse All

Command List...

Comment and URLs

Contents, Index and Search

Control Points

Copy
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2293

Create New Tracking Station

Create Subclass

Customize View Parameters

Customize...

Cut

Decelerate

Define Color

Define Dynamic Level of Detail

Define Dynamic Pixel Culling

Define ID Schema

Define/modify ID Schema

Delete...

Depth Effect...

Design Table

Desk

Equivalent Dimensions

Examine Mode

Expand All

Expand First Level

Expand Second Level

Expand Selection

Find Owning Selection Sets...

Fit All In

Fly

Full Screen

Generate Configuration Files

Generate Report

Geometry

Geometry Overview

Ground

Hide/Show

Intersecting Outside Trap Selection

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2294

Intersecting Trap

Lighting...

Links...

Look At

Magnifier

Measure Between

Measure Inertia

Measure Item

Multi-View Customization...

Named Views...

New Font...

New from...

New IG

New View

New Window

New...

Next View

Normal View

Open Application Dictionary

Open Reference Dictionary

Open User Dictionary

Open...

Opens the Button Mapping dialog box

Options...

Other Layers...

Other Selection...

Outside Trap Selection

Paint Stroke

Pan

Parallel

Paste

Paste Special...
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2295

performance gauges

Perspective

Polygonal Trap

Preview View

Print...

Printer Setup...

Properties

Quick Print

Redo

Repeat

Reset Compass

Rotate

Save

Save All

Save As...

Save Management...

Scale Planes

Search...

Select

Selection Sets Edition...

Selection Sets...

Selection Trap

Send To Directory

Send To Mail

Settings Management

Shading (SHD)

Shading With Edges

Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges

Shading With Edges Without Smooth Edges

Shading With Material

Snap

Snapping Viewpoint
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2296

Specifications

Specifications Overview

Standards...

Sub-Trees

Swap view/tree

Swap visible space

Test viewpoint and VR cursor tracking

TestVisuPerfoDraw

Text

Tile Horizontally

Tile Vertically

Toggle the plan view on

Toolbars

Turn Head

Undo

Utility

Video...

View Angle

Visualization Filters...

Walk

What`s This

Zoom Area

Zoom In

Zoom Out
command list

viewing

Command List... command

command properties

customizing
compressing

images
compression-decompression

parameters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2297
conference

consulting history

customizing options

exiting

initializing on UNIX

initializing on Windows

joining

launching

leading

sending messages

sharing documents

transferring files

conferencing
configuring

printer

constant parameter

Contents, Index and Search command

Control Points command

controlling design tables synchronization

controlling relations update

Copy command

Copy icon

copy/paste a parameter
copying

data to directory or diskette

images to the clipboard

objects

Create New Tracking Station command

Create Subclass command

creating

ARM catalog

new document from existing one

new documents
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2298

creating a design table from a pre-existing file

creating a design table from the current parameter values

creating a formula

creating a formula based on publications

creating a parameter

creating an external parameter

creating and using a knowledge advisor law

creating points and lines as parameters

Customize View Parameters command

Customize... command

customizing

buttons

color

command properties

fonts for displaying geometry area texts

fonts for displaying texts

fonts on UNIX

fonts on Windows

icon size

print driver setup

print settings

rendering style

toolbar

Tools Palette

tooltips

Cut command
cutting

objects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2299

Index D

D
data

copying to directory or diskette

sending in the mail

sharing between Windows and UNIX

Data Life Cycle utility

Data Upward Assistant

deactivate an external parameter

deactivating a component

Decelerate command

Define Color command

Define Dynamic Level of Detail command

Define Dynamic Pixel Culling command

Define ID Schema command

Define/modify ID schema command

Delete... command
deleting

images from the album

objects

Depth Effect... command

depth effects
design table

adding a row to a design table external file

automatic synchronization at load

controlling synchronization

creating a design table from a pre-existing file

creating a design table from the current parameter values

enovia lca
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2300

functions

generating a file from a design table

getting familiar with the design table dialog box

interactive synchronization at load

introducing

manual synchronization

restrictions

storing a design table in a power copy

useful tips

versioning
design tables

saving using VPM Navigator

Desk command

Desk File Management toolbar

Desk toolbar
diffuse

light source

Display the preselection navigator after...seconds option

displaying

document links

graphic properties

hidden objects

preselection navigator
distance

measuring

distance (maximum) between surfaces and volumes

distance (minimum) and angle between geometrical entities and points

DLNames

document environment
document links

displaying

editing

pointed documents
documents
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2301

closing

creating new from existing one

managing save

opening recently used

opening using the Browse Window

saving all

saving existing documents

saving for the first time or under another name

saving in other formats

sharing in a conference

window layout

windows

downward compatibility
dragging and dropping

icons

objects

Duplicate data in Catia model option

dynamic level of detail

dynamic pixel culling

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2302

Index E

E
edges

graphic properties

highlighting

Edit... contextual command

editing

document links

graphic properties

Enable independent saves option

enovia lca

design table

methodology

partial loading

replacing a component
ENOVIA LCA integration

recommended methodology

ENOVIA LCA interoperability

entering data

power input mode

equivalent dimensions

interface

Erase icon
Examine Mode

navigating

Examine Mode command

exiting

conference

Expand All command

Expand First Level command

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2303

Expand Second Level command

Expand Selection command

expanding

specification tree
exporting results

inertia properties
external parameter

activate

create

deactivate

synchronize
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2304

Index F

F
favorites

search language
Favorites mode

searching

Feature Dictionary Editor

Feature Dictionary Editor toolbar

file

printing to
FileDesk

deleting documents

finding documents

loading documents

moving documents

opening documents

renaming documents

filenames
files

transferring in a conference
fill

graphic properties
filter

searching

visualization

Find Owning Selection Sets... command

Fit All In command

Fit in Page option

Fit to option
fitting all in
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2305

geometry area

Fly command

Fly Mode
fonts

display and printed output

for displaying texts

formats

introduction

on UNIX

on Windows

PostScript

Version 4

Version 5
formula

creating a formula

creating a formula based on publications

introducing

referring to external parameters in a formula

specifying a measure in a formula

useful tips

using geometry

using the dictionary

formula editor

full screen

Full Screen command

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2306

Index G

G
General mode

searching

Generate Configuration Files command

Generate Report command

generating a file from a design table

geometry

overview

geometry area

fitting all in

Geometry command

Geometry Overview command

getting familiar with the design table dialog box

getting help

accessing sample documents

contextual help

copyright information

displaying tooltips and Help messages

easy warning

online help library

user galaxy

What`s This command

global name
graphic properties

displaying

edges

editing

fill
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2307

layers

lines and curves

pick

points

show

transparency

Graphic Properties toolbar

Graphic Properties Wizard

Ground command
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2308

Index H

H
hand tracking

virtual reality
head tracking

virtual reality
hidden objects

displaying

hidden parameter

Hide/Show command
hiding

objects

toolbar
highlighting

edges
history

consulting in a conference

html directory
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2309

Index I

I
Icon Browser
icon size

customizing
icons

dragging and dropping

icons directory
images

capturing

compressing

printing
Immersive System Assistant workbench

virtual reality

importing a parameter

inertia properties

exporting results
initializing

conference on UNIX

conference on Windows

inserting a design table saved in LCA into a new part

Intersecting Outside Trap Selection command

Intersecting Trap command

introducing design tables

introducing formulas
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2310

Index J

J
joining

conference
joystick control panel

virtual reality
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2311

Index K

K
keyboard

viewing tools

keyboard shortcuts

knowledge index

knowledgeResources directory

knowledgeResourcesCatalogs directory

knowledgeTypesCustom directory

Knowledgeware Language

Knowledgeware toolbar
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2312

Index L

L
launching

conference

law

layer box
layers

adding and naming

assigning objects

graphic properties
layers and filters

standards
leading

conference
light source

ambient

brightness

color

diffuse

specular

lighting effects

Lighting... command
line thickness

standards
lines and curves

graphic properties

link between measures and parameters

linked document localization

Links... command

local name
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2313

Lock Current Orientation contextual command

Lock Privileged Plane Orientation Parallel to Screen contextual command

locking

compass to local axis system

current compass orientation

privileged plane

Look At command

looking at objects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2314

Index M

M
macro

Magnifier command

magnifying

Make Privileged Plane Most Visible contextual command

Make YZ the Privileged Plane contextual command

managing

document save
manipulating

objects using Edit... command

objects using mouse and compass

viewpoints using mouse and compass

manipulation

3D compass

bounding box

handle

maximum distance

Measure Between command

Measure Inertia command

Measure Item command

measures

cursors
measuring

2D inertia

angles

distance

maximum distance

minimum distance and angle

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2315

objects

memory warning

Menu bar
messages

sending in a conference

methodology
minimum distance and angle

measuring

mkrtv command
mouse

viewing tools
movie replay

parameters

msgcatalog directory
multi-documents

printing
multipiped session

virtual reality
multi-view configuration

capturing

manual

Multi-View Customization... command

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2316

Index N

N
Named Views... command
navigating

Advanced Fly Mode

Advanced Walk Mode

Beginner`s Fly Mode

Beginner`s Walk Mode

Examine Mode

Fly Mode

Walk Mode

Neon Light mode

New Font... command

New from... command

New IG command

New View command

New Window command

New... command

Next View command

No Fitting option

No Light mode

Normal View command

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2317

Index O

O
object class

adding properties to

creating a new

managing

object method
objects

copying

cutting

deleting

dragging and dropping

hiding

measuring

pasting

OLE-compliant applications

OLE-compliant documents

online help library

Open Application Dictionary command

Open in New Window contextual command

Open Pointed Document contextual command

Open Reference Dictionary command

Open Sub-Tree contextual command

Open User Dictionary command

Open... command
opening

existing documents

recently used documents

Opens the Button Mapping dialog command

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2318
operating signs

search language

searching
operators

search language
option

Add to favorites
options

customizing in a conference

Options... command

Other Layers... command

Other Selection... command

Outside Trap Selection command

overview

geometry

specification tree
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2319

Index P

P
Paint Stroke command

Pan command

panning
paper format

printing
paper margins

printing

Parallel command
parameter

activating and deactivating a component

applying ranges to a parameter by using a rule

copying/pasting a parameter

creating a link between measures and parameters

creating a parameter

creating points and lines as parameters

global name

importing a parameter

local name

publishing a parameter

specifying a parameter value as a measure

specifying the material parameter

useful tips

using relations based on publications

Paste command

Paste Special... command

pasting

objects
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2320

performance gauges command

perspective and parallel view

Perspective command
pick

graphic properties

pixel image formats

Pixel Mode
playing

videos from the album

pointed documents

document links
points

graphic properties

Polygonal Trap command

PostScript fonts

adding
power copy

storing a design table

power input mode

entering data

introduction

running commands
predefined favorites

search language
preferences

overview

Preselect in geometry view option

preselecting

using pointer
preselection navigator

displaying

using

Preview icon
previewing

printing
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2321

Previous View command

print driver setup

customizing
print settings

customizing

Print whole contextual command

Print... command

PrintBatch utility
printer

adding

configuring

setting as default

setting up

testing

Printer Setup... command

printing

area

banner options

color options

image orientation

image position and size

images

images from the album

in batch mode

multi-documents

page orientation

paper format

paper margins

previewing

quickly

sheets

to file

various options
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2322
privileged plane

locking

swapping

visible
Product Structure

activating a different workbench

creating a new document

creating a workbench document

introduction

navigation tools

Properties command

publication

publishing a parameter
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2323

Index Q

Q
Quick Print command

quick search
quickly

printing
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2324

Index R

R
recording

interactions in video format

pausing

stopping

video

Redo command
redoing

actions

referring to external parameters in a formula

relation

controlling relations update

using relations based on publications (Product)

relation based on a publication

relation update
removing

printer
renaming

images in the album

rendering style

customizing

dynamic hidden line removal (HRD)

half visible smooth edges

line-on-line

outlines

per object

shading

shading with edges

shading with edges and hidden edges

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2325

shading with edges without smooth edges

shading with material

transparent

triangles

wireframe (NHR)

Repeat command
repeating

actions

Reset Compass command

Rotate command

rotating
running commands

power input mode

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2326

Index S

S
Save All command

Save as new option

Save As... command

Save command

Save Management... command

saving

a design table using VPM Navigator

all documents

automatic

documents for the first time or under another name

documents in other formats

existing documents

images to other formats

saving a Design Table in ENOVIA LCA

Scale Planes command

Screen Mode capture

search language

favorites

operating signs

operators

predefined favorites

search filters

special characters

syntax

Search... command
searching

acquisition agent
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2327

Advanced mode

by attribute

by color

by name

by product properties

by specific attributes

by type

combination of search criteria

Favorites mode

filter

General mode

lines by thickness or type

material

More... option

objects belonging to a selection set

operating signs

visible or hidden elements

Select command
selected areas of images

capturing
selecting

selection sets

using a filter

using Other Selection... command

using pointer

using preselection navigator

using selection sets

using selection traps

using the Search command (Advanced mode)

using the Search command (Favorites mode)

using the Search command (General Mode)

selection sets

selecting
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2328

Selection Sets Edition... command

Selection Sets... command

Selection Trap command

selection traps

Send To Directory command

Send To Mail command

sending

data in the mail

Settings Management command

Shading (SHD) command

Shading with Edges and Hidden Edges command

Shading With Edges command

Shading with Edges Without Smooth Edges command

Shading With Material command

sheets

printing
show

graphic properties
simple images

capturing

Single Light mode

Snap automatically to selected object contextual command

Snap command
snapping

3D compass to selected objects

snapping viewpoint
solid objects

pasting as special
special characters

search language

specification tree

collapsing

expanding

introduction
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2329

overview

sub-tree

Specifications command

Specifications Overview command

specifying a measure in a formula

specifying the material parameter

specular

light source

Standard toolbar

standard views
standards

general overview

layers and filters

line thickness

Standards... command
starting a session

choosing the language on UNIX

choosing the language on Windows

on UNIX

on Windows

using document icons

stereoscopic viewing

virtual reality

stitching

storing a design table in a power copy

sub-tree

opening

viewing

Sub-Trees command
surface objects

pasting as special

Swap view/tree command

Swap visible space command

swapping
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2330

privileged plane

symbols

synchronize
syntax

search language

syntax error message

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2331

Index T

T
tables

saving a design table using VPM Navigator

TabletPC

viewing tools

technological package

Test viewpoint and VR Cursor Tracking command

testing

printer

TestVisuPerfoDraw command

Text command

Tile Horizontally command

Tile Vertically command

Toggle the plan view on command

toolbar

3Dx Device

Capture

customizing

Desk

Desk File Management

Feature Dictionary Editor

Graphic Properties

hiding

Knowledgeware

Menu

Standard

User Selection Filter

View
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2332

viewing

Toolbars command
Tools Options - 3D Annotations Infrastructure

Annotation

Display

Manipulators

Tolerancing

View/Annotation Plane
Tools Options - Analysis and Simulation

External Storage

General

Graphics

Post Processing

Quality

Reporting
Tools Options - Assembly Design

Constraints

General

Tools Options - Catalog Editor

Tools Options - Circuit Board Design

Components

Graphic
Tools Options - Compatibility

Electrical

VRML
Tools Options - Data Exchange Interface

DXF

IGES

IGES 2D

STEP
Tools Options - Devices and Virtual Reality

Tablet Support
Tools Options - Display

Layer Filters
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2333

Linetype

Navigation

Performances

Thickness and Font

Tree Appearance

Tree Manipulation

Visualization
Tools Options - DMU Fitting Simulator

DMU Fitting

DMU Manipulation
Tools Options - DMU Space Analysis

DMU Clash

DMU Clash - Detailed Computation

DMU Clash - Penetration

DMU Clash - Process

DMU Clash - Rule

DMU Distance

DMU Sectioning
Tools Options - DMU Tolerancing Review

Tolerancing
Tools Options - Electrical 3D Design and Documentation

General

Harness Flattening

Harness Management

Wire Routing
Tools Options - Electrical Harness Flattening

General
Tools Options - Electrical Harness Installation

Harness Management
Tools Options - Electrical Library

Electrical Library Access

General
Tools Options - Electrical Wire Routing

General
Tools Options - Equipment and Systems
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2334

Design Criteria

Diagrams

Display

Electrical Mapping

General

Standards
Tools Options - Equipment Support Structures

General
Tools Options - Functional Tolerancing and Annotation

Annotation

Constructed Geometry

Dimension

Display

Manipulators

Tolerances

Tolerancing

View/Annotation Plane
Tools Options - General

Compatibility

Devices and Virtual Reality

Display

Document

General

Help

Licensing

Parameters and Measure

Performances

Printers

Search

Server Manager

Shareable Products
Tools Options - Infrastructure

Photo Studio
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2335

Real Time Rendering

Tools Options - Machining

General

Operation

Output

Photo/Video

Program

Resources
Tools Options - Material Library

Material
Tools Options - Mold Tooling Design

Add/Remove

Catalogs

Component

General
Tools Options - Parameters and Measure

Constraints and Dimensions

Measure Tools
Tools Options - Photo Studio

Display

General

Output

Satellites

Stickers
Tools Options - Real Time Rendering

Display

General

Stickers
Tools Options - Sketcher

Sketcher
Tools Options - Structure Design

General
Tools Options - Structure Functional Design

Catalogs
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2336

Design
Tools Options - Structure Preliminary Layout

Design

Drafting

Offset Data
Tools Options - Tolerance Analysis of Deformable Assembly

Fastening

General

Tolerancing

Tools Options- Business Process Knowledge Template tab

Tools Options- Product Functional Definition tab

Tools Palette
tooltips

customizing
transparency

graphic properties

Turn Head command

Two Lights mode

type

searching
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2337

Index U

U
Undo command
undoing

actions

URL

Use Local Axis System contextual command

User Selection Filter toolbar

user-defined

toolbars

views

workbenches
using

preselection navigator

using equivalent dimensions

using geometry in a formula

using selection sets

selecting

using the dictionary

utility

CATDownwardCompatibility

CATDUAV5

CATUIDownwardCompatibility

catutil

Data Life Cycle

PrintBatch

Utility command

UUID
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2338

Index V

V
various options

printing

vector image formats

Vector Mode

versioning a design table

video

format

properties

recording

Video... command
view

changing
view angle

editing

View Angle command

View toolbar

Viewer Mode capture

viewing

along normal to plane

command list

creating a multi-view

objects against the ground

toolbar
viewing tools

activating

keyboard

mouse

TabletPC
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2339

Viewpoint Snapping command

virtual reality

hand tracking

head tracking

Immersive System Assistant workbench

joystick control panel

multipiped session

navigating in Examine Mode

navigating in Fly Mode

stereoscopic viewing

support
visible

privileged plane

Visual Basic for applications (VBA)

Visual Basic Script (VBScript)

visualization filter

Visualization Filter Editor

Visualization Filters... command

visualization performance

visualization time

VPM Navigator

VR Button Customize
CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2340

Index W

W
Walk command
Walk Mode

collision detection

Warm Start

What`s This command

workbench

description
workbench list

administering

working with design tables using VPM Navigator

CATIA Infrastructure Version 5 Release 16 Page 2341

Index Z

Z
Zoom Area command

Zoom In command

Zoom Out command

zooming

in

in on area

out